JP7698231B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, a game starts when a start command device (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged on the outer periphery rotate. When the reels are stopped by using a reel stop device (stop button) to stop the rotation, if a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up on an active line, the machine generally transitions to a special game state (a game state in which the probability of winning a small prize or the like is higher than usual) that is more profitable for the player than the normal game state. In addition to these basic games, slot machines also perform various effects to improve the overall entertainment value. In addition, the payout sound is output, the number of medals won is displayed, and a backlight effect is displayed in conjunction with the payout of the game medals, allowing the player to recognize that the game medals have been properly paid out.

JP 2019-217068 A

Improvements to the performance of this type of gaming machine are desirable.

a first display device controlled by a main control means;
A second display device controlled by a sub-controller is provided,
As a game state, there is a notification game preparation game state and a notification game state,
The first information can be notified by the first display device in a predetermined game in which a specific lottery result has been determined in the notification game preparation game state,
In a predetermined game in which a specific lottery result has been determined in the notification game preparation game state, the second display device can notify the first stop operation mode,
The second information can be notified by the first display device in a specific game in which a specific lottery result is determined in the notification game state;
In a specific game in which a specific lottery result is determined in the notification game state, a second stop operation mode can be notified by the second display device,
The first stop operation mode is a stop operation mode that recommends not performing the first stop operation on the stop switch corresponding to the first reel,
The second stop operation mode is a stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
In the notification game preparation game state, when a specific lottery result is determined and the first information is notified by the first display device in a predetermined game, if the stop switch corresponding to the first reel is operated to perform a first stop operation, the next game of the predetermined game is not a game in the notification game state,
When a specific lottery result is determined in the notification game preparation game state and the first information is notified by the first display device in a predetermined game, if a stop switch corresponding to the second reel is operated to perform a first stop operation, the next game of the predetermined game can be executed in the notification game state;
When a game is started, a process for outputting a first test signal is executable;
When a game is started, a process for outputting a second test signal is executable;
A first test signal in a predetermined game in which a specific lottery result is determined in the notification game preparation game state and the first information is notified by the first display device includes information on the operation order of the stop switch for performing the first stop operation on the stop switch corresponding to the second reel,
A gaming machine characterized in that a second test signal in a specified game in which a specific lottery result is determined in a notification game preparation game state and first information is notified by a first display device includes information regarding the operation order of the stop switches, which causes the stop switch corresponding to the first reel to be the first stopping operation.

This invention can improve the performance of gaming machines.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the cabinet of the slot machine PS1. A diagram showing the back surface of the front panel PS2. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the inner surface of the cabinet PS3. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing functional blocks. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start process. 11 is a flowchart showing a power-off process. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 11 is a flowchart showing a power interruption recovery process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main game progress. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. 1 is a diagram illustrating a reel arrangement in the present embodiment. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a condition device according to the present embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where the MAX bet switch is not operated to insert a coin after the payout process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where an insert operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where a settlement operation is performed using a settlement switch after the dispensing process is completed. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where no gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the case where a gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where a payout is performed normally. 13 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a payout has been normally performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). A figure showing an example of a push order navigation image. A figure showing an example of a push order navigation image displayed on a liquid crystal display. A figure showing an example in which a specified error occurs while a push order navigation image is being displayed. This is a time chart for when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart for when the MAX BET switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart when a MAX BET switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart for when no gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a normal payout is not made after a cherry win (when a hopper empty error occurs). This is a time chart when a payout is not made normally after a cherry win (when a hopper retention error occurs). 2 is a diagram showing each area stored in a main control ROM; FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an interrupt initial setting area and automatic allocation according to the priority order of the interrupt initial setting area. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between power-on processing and interrupt vector addresses of timer interrupt processing; 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt vector addresses of the power-on process and the timer interrupt process and other programs. FIG. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A flowchart showing a favorable zone clear counter management process corresponding to the favorable zone difference counter. A flowchart showing a favorable zone clear counter management process corresponding to the favorable zone difference counter. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. A figure showing an example of the presentation of the operation advance notification state and the end notification state. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display. This figure shows the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, the chute member, and the return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2. A diagram explaining the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. A diagram explaining the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. This figure shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed. This figure shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed. 13 is a diagram illustrating the position and dimensions of a fastening part (screw) that fastens the chute member when the fastening part of the chute member is fastened to the front panel PS2 by the fastening part. FIG. A figure showing another aspect of the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, the chute member and the return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2. FIG. 13 illustrates an example of an error history screen. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an error history screen when the front door is opened and closed while the error history screen is displayed. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a time setting screen. This is a list of display patterns of error history when multiple errors occur. A figure showing an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state." A figure showing an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state." A figure showing an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state." FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the transition of notification states related to a cutoff. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap in the bonus gaming state and the temporary cap flag. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an advance notification image in the bonus game state. FIG. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. This figure explains the notification state related to termination when the power is cut off and then restored while the notification state related to termination is in the operation preview state. 13 is a diagram illustrating an error image that is displayed when an error occurs during automatic settlement. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an error image that is displayed when an error occurs during automatic settlement. FIG. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the progress of a game and the lighting state of the bet lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the progress of a game and the lighting state of the bet lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the progress of a game and the lighting state of the bet lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the progress of a game and the lighting state of the bet lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the performance volume in each situation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a dangerous installation situation of the gaming machine. 13 is a diagram showing the movement of the selector when the gaming machine is in a normal installation state and a dangerous installation state. FIG. This is a view of the gaming machine with the left side facing down, seen from behind the front door. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the gaming machine as viewed from the front, illustrating the configuration around the speaker. 13 is a diagram illustrating the selector and the return member when the front door is viewed from the back side. FIG. FIG. 13 is a view of the selector as seen from the right side. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a roulette effect. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating display contents in a roulette effect. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating the display timing of the effect switch effects in the roulette effect. A diagram explaining the types of setting confirmation effects. A figure showing a selection table for setting confirmation effects. A diagram showing a selection table for setting confirmation effects with different winning probabilities depending on the number of times the game is played. A diagram showing internal lottery data during non-RT when the setting value L is provided. A diagram showing internal lottery data during RT1 when the setting value L is provided. This is an overall front view of the front door as seen from the back side. A figure showing an internal lottery in a new mode that starts a favorable gaming state. 13 is a diagram illustrating a game presentation that notifies of a special stop operation mode in a new mode that starts a favorable game state. FIG.

<Terminology> "Medals (number of medals)", "game medium (number of game media)", and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet", "BET", and "input" in relation to game media are synonymous and all refer to the act of betting (putting money) on game media. When expressing a hexadecimal number, it is written as "0x00" or "00h", and when expressing a binary number, it is written as "00000000b" or "00000000B", and if there is no other notation before or after the number, it is expressed in decimal. "Reel" may be called "drum", all of which are synonymous. "Storage means" may be called "RWM", "RAM", or "storage area", all of which are synonymous. "Granting" used in "granting game media" or "granting points", etc. may be called "payout" or "acquisition", all of which are synonymous. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" depending on its function, but in both cases it refers to the same switch. The "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may each be provided as different switches. When a small symbol with a high payout or a small symbol with a low payout stops depending on the operation mode, the small symbol with a high payout may be referred to as a high symbol (high symbol bell, high symbol small symbol are also synonymous), and the small symbol with a low payout may be referred to as a low symbol (low symbol bell, low symbol small symbol are also synonymous). When a symbol combination with no payout stops at this time, it may be referred to as a spill symbol (synonymous spill symbol).

Below, an embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as the present embodiment) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Description of Slot Machine PS1> The components of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 3.

The slot machine PS1 is roughly divided into a front panel PS2 side and a cabinet PS3 side, with the necessary parts and boards attached to each side. The sides of the front panel PS2 and cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device, and the locking device side can be opened by inserting a lock key into the locking device provided on the front panel PS2 and rotating it in a specific direction. In other words, the front panel PS2 functions as a door to the cabinet PS3.

<Front Panel PS2> The front panel PS2 (also referred to as the front door PS2, front door PS2, or front door PS2, or simply the front door) is a plate-shaped member with a design, and on the front side (player side) are provided the middle panel (including the display window 4, operation indicator lamps 24, etc.), the operation panel 11 (including the bet number display lamp 25, credit number display 26, number of coins acquired display lamp 27, etc.), the lower panel 5 (also referred to as the lower panel 5), the upper lamp (also referred to as the top lamp) or the side effect lamps (also referred to as the side lamp), etc., and on the back side are provided the medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "selector"), the display device 32, the sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., and the setting display LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the setting value display LED, setting display device, setting value display device, setting value display device).

<Display window 4> The display window 4 is an area provided on the front panel PS2, and when the front panel PS2 is closed, the symbols drawn on the reels are visible. The symbols printed on the outer periphery of each reel tape fixed to the reel rim of each of the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are configured to be visible from the front (player side) through the display window 4. When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of 21 symbols (20 or 16 symbols may be freely designed depending on the specifications) are visible. In other words, a total of nine symbols (3 symbols x 3 reels) are visible from the display window 4. Here, of the stop positions at which the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is called the upper row, the center stop position is called the middle row, and the lowest stop position is called the lower row.

<Eligible Line> The eligible line is a symbol combination line that is the target of the winning judgment process (described later) when the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c stop. In this embodiment, the eligible line is visible through the display window 4 and is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) that passes through the middle of each reel. When the winning judgment process determines that a symbol combination that has stopped on the eligible line corresponds to any role, processing is performed according to the symbol combination that has stopped. As an example, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a minor role such as a bell has stopped, a payout process for game medals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medals, game media, or game value) and a credit addition process are performed, and when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped, an automatic bet process is performed.

Depending on the slot machine PS1, the number of active lines may be set to five, including an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, a line rising to the right, and a line falling to the right, or six or more lines may be set, including non-straight, roughly mountain-shaped (lower left reel 8a, upper middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), roughly valley-shaped (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, upper right reel 8c), roughly L-shaped (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), or the active lines may be set to change depending on the number of coins bet, and may be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1. In addition, straight lines other than active lines may be called inactive lines.

<Operation indicator lamps 24> The operation indicator lamps 24 are provided around the display window 4, and indicate the operation sequence of the stop switches 13 (described later) to the player when the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c are spinning. That is, when the left operation indicator lamp 24a is lit (the center operation indicator lamp 24b and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, when the center operation indicator lamp 24b is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the center stop switch 13b should be operated, and when the right operation indicator lamp 24c is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the center operation indicator lamp 24b are off), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Bet number display lamp 25> The bet number display lamp 25 (also called the bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25) is provided on the operation panel 11 and has the function of displaying the number of coins bet by the player's operation. It is also composed of a 1 bet lamp 25a (not shown), a 2 bet lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3 bet lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a lights up, when a total of two medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a and the 2 bet lamp 25b light up, and when a total of three medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c light up. In addition, although not shown, after the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed, when the automatic bet process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay was won is turned on, and the replay lamp is turned on. The timing of lighting the bet number display lamp 25 and the timing of lighting the replay lamp may be simultaneous, or one may be configured to light up first.

<Credit number display 26> The credit number display 26 (also called credit, medal number display, medal number display device, gaming media number display, gaming media number display device) is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment display 26a (not shown) which is made up of a total of eight segments, seven segments and decimal points (DP), and mainly displays the upper digits of the credit number, and a segment display 26b (not shown) which is made up of a total of eight segments, seven segments and decimal points (DP), and mainly displays the lower digits of the credit number. The credit number refers to the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and a maximum of 50 can be stored. In addition, when normal play cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, a display related to the error may be displayed.

<Acquired coin number display 27> The acquired coin number display 27 (also called acquired coin number display, acquired number display, payout coin number display, or payout number display) is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment display 27a (not shown) which is composed of a total of eight segments, seven segments and decimal points (DP), and mainly displays the upper digits of the acquired coin number, and a segment display 27b (not shown) which is composed of a total of eight segments, seven segments and decimal points (DP), and mainly displays the lower digits of the acquired coin number. The acquired coin number means the number of medals paid out to the player (including the number of medals stored in the credit number display 26) according to the results of the game on the slot machine PS1. In addition, when normal gameplay cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, a display related to the error may be displayed.

The credit number display 26 and the acquired number display 27 may display information other than the credit number information or the acquired number information depending on whether the DP is lit or not. For example, information indicating that the player is in a favorable zone (described later) or that a specific external signal is being output may be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. The acquired number display 27 may also have the ability to notify the player of the push order using the display section for the upper digits and the display section for the lower digits. When the acquired number display 27 is used to notify the player of the push order, the acquired number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

<
Operation Panel 11> The operation panel 11 is provided in the approximate center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped shape with a horizontal section that is approximately horizontal and a vertical section that extends approximately vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal section, and the vertical section is provided with a start switch 12 and a stop switch 13, which will be described later, and the horizontal section is provided with a medal insertion slot 17, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, a settlement switch (not shown), and a performance switch (not shown).

<Start switch 12> The start switch (also called start lever) 12 is provided on the vertical part of the operation panel 11. It is a lever-shaped operation part, and the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and the mechanism is such that the start switch is determined to have been operated when the start switch sensor is OFF when operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes effective when the number of bets reaches a specified number, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process (also called internal lottery process), a process related to the instruction function, or a reel rotation process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the input signal is low active, the start switch input signal is OFF when the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and the start switch input signal is ON when the start switch sensor changes from ON to OFF when operated. Not limited to this, the start switch input signal may be ON when the start switch sensor is ON. In other words, the specified number refers to the number of bets required to start playing.

Hereinafter, when it is simply stated that "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated," it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON.

<Stop switch 13> The stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11. In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c corresponds to the right reel 8c. In addition, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the color of the lamp provided on the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamps around it changes to indicate that the stop switch 13 is active. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the light turns blue, and when it cannot be operated, the light turns red. In addition, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the light turns on, and when it cannot be operated, the light turns off.

<Medal insertion port 17> The medal insertion port 17 is provided on the operation panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal insertion port, and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. Several types of medal insertion ports 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of several types of medals, but the installation standards for the various medal insertion ports 17 are the same so that they can be installed on the operation panel 11 in a common manner.

Regarding the insertion of gaming media, the gaming media is not limited to the medals mentioned above, but may be, for example, gaming balls (so-called Parrots) used in pachinko gaming machines, or gaming medium information stored in an electrical storage medium such as a magnetic card or flash memory, which is input into the gaming machine, and the number of bets is set and added when a prize is won based on the input gaming medium information.

<Bet Switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19)> The bet switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the bet switch is operated when there are medals stored in the credit, the bet process is executed and the bet number is set in the same way as when medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 17. However, even if the bet switch is operated when there are no medals stored in the credit, the bet process is invalid (the operation of the bet switch is not accepted). The MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player, a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part, and a light-emitting part (also called a MAX bet lamp) that lights up the push-down part, and the 1 bet switch 19 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player and a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part (the 1 bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting part).

The MAX BET lamp informs the player that betting processing can be performed when the MAX BET switch is operated, and various notification modes are possible, such as lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specified color or blinking the MAX BET lamp at a specified interval. Conversely, when the MAX BET switch is operated but betting processing cannot be performed, possible modes include lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specific color or not lighting the MAX BET lamp.

The slot machine PS1 is also provided with a MAX bet switch 18 that allows the user to bet the maximum number of coins (three coins in this embodiment) set for each slot machine PS1, and a 1 bet switch 19 that allows the user to bet one coin. The MAX bet process is executed when the user operates the MAX bet switch 18, and the 1 bet process is executed when the user operates the 1 bet switch 19. The MAX bet process can be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently betted is three or more, and the number of bets currently betted is less than three. The MAX bet process cannot be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently betted is less than three (in other words, when the number of bets is less than three even if the MAX bet switch 18 is operated) or when three bets have already been made. The 1 bet process can be executed when the number of credits is one or more, and the number of bets currently betted is less than three, and cannot be executed when three bets have already been made.

In addition, the 1 bet switch 19 executes 1 bet processing each time it is operated, and when no bets have been placed, the 1 bet switch 19 is operated three times, resulting in 3 bets. Three operations of the 1 bet switch 19 are equivalent to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18.

In addition, although an embodiment has been described in which the 1 bet switch 19 is disabled when 3 bets have been made, the system may be configured so that when 3 bets have been made and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated once, the 1 bet state is established and 2 cards are returned to the credits.

In addition, while an embodiment has been described in which the MAX bet process executed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 is not executed when the number of bets is less than 3, a process in which the maximum number that can currently be bet is bet can also be considered. In other words, a process in which 2 credits are bet when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated when no bet has been made and the number of credits is 2 can also be considered.

The maximum number of coins that can be betted may be configured to differ depending on the game state, and may be configured such that the maximum number of coins that can be betted during non-bonus play is 3 coins, and the maximum number of coins that can be betted during bonus play is 2 coins.

<Sub-switch 20> The sub-switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a push-down part made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection part for detecting that the push-down part has been operated, and a sub-switch lamp for illuminating the push-down part of the sub-switch. This sub-switch 20 is a switch for mainly displaying a menu screen (sometimes called a user menu screen) on the display device 32 described later. In addition to the sub-switch 20 as an input means managed by the sub-control board 1000, a sub-cross key switch 21 (up switch, down switch, left switch, right switch) and a performance switch (a switch operated by instructions during play) are provided. The sub-switch 20 can also function as a trigger for starting a linkage system with a mobile terminal (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile linkage system) described later. Note that although the sub-switch 20 is divided into a menu display function and the performance switch is for operation during play, they may be a common switch.

The menu screen displays role configuration items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light intensity adjustment items, and items related to the mobile linkage system, and the cursor selecting an item is controlled to move up and down by operating the up switch or down switch of the sub cross key switch 21. In addition, when the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on any of the items, details of that item are displayed. For example, when the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on the volume adjustment item, the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the player volume can be adjusted by the left switch or right switch of the sub cross key switch 21.

Note that the volume that can be changed using the volume adjustment item on the menu screen is the volume of game sounds, and the volume of system sounds cannot be changed. Game sounds are sounds that can be output during gameplay or while waiting to play, and include betting sounds, wait sounds, reel start sounds, and other sounds related to effects. System sounds are sounds that can be output mainly when gameplay is not possible, and include error sounds, complete function activation sounds, and other system-related sounds. Each game sound has a set effect volume, and even if the player volume is the same, not all game sounds are output at the same volume. For example, when the player volume is at level 5 out of 10, the volume of the betting sounds is 30 decibels, and the volume of the wait sounds is 20 decibels.

The menu screen can also be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 when no bets have been placed after the end of a game. The menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 regardless of whether the presentation state at this time is normal presentation, continuous presentation, AT presentation, or demo screen (a screen that appears 60 seconds after the end of a game, and which displays the manufacturer's name and a presentation introduction in the form of a moving image). However, this is not limited to the embodiment, and there may also be a configuration in which the menu screen cannot be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous presentation or AT presentation.

The volume may be changed using a rotary switch provided inside the cabinet. Because the rotary switch is provided inside the cabinet, it cannot be operated by the player. The rotary switch is a switch operated by an administrator, and can set a standard value for the volume that can be set by the player. For example, if there are eight volume levels that a player can set, there are also eight volume levels that can be set with the rotary switch, and if the volume setting on the rotary switch is "2", the initial volume of the volume adjustment item on the menu screen where the player volume can be adjusted will be "2". Alternatively, the rotary switch may be configured in a different way so that the player can set the volume within the range of volume levels set by the rotary switch.

<Switch for Effects> The switch for effects is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a push-down part made of a translucent material to allow the player to directly operate it, a detection part that detects that the push-down part has been operated, and a switch lamp for effects that illuminate the push-down part of the switch for effects. When the switch for effects is operated in a situation where operation of the switch for effects is valid, an effect based on the operation is executed. For example, when a continuous effect is being executed on the display device (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "liquid crystal") 32, a "success" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "successful effect") meaning that a bonus has been awarded in the final game of the continuous effect, or a "failure" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "failed effect") meaning that a bonus has not been awarded, the switch for effects may be operated to display "success" or "failure".

In addition, when the operation of the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp lights up, making it possible to inform the player that the operation of the effect switch is valid. The lighting mode of the effect switch can be such that it is unlit when the operation of the effect switch is invalid, and is lit when the operation of the effect switch is valid. Another lighting mode when the operation of the effect switch is valid may be such that it is repeatedly lit and turned off at a fixed cycle.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the performance switch is valid, a display simulating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD to notify the user that the operation of the performance switch is valid. When a display simulating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD, it is displayed based on a command received from the main control means 100. For example, a display simulating the performance switch may be displayed based on a start switch reception command, or a display simulating the performance switch may be displayed based on a command to stop all reels.

In addition, by pressing the performance switch, the detectable piece provided on the performance switch can be moved to a detection position (on position) where it is detected by a sensor provided on the performance switch, and by moving the performance switch away (an operation in which the spring provided on the performance switch is returned to its natural length by the force of its extension) while the sensor is detecting the detectable piece, the detectable piece can be moved to a non-detection position (off position) where it is not detected by the sensor.

Note that while the performance switch has been described as a push-type switch, it is not limited to this and may be a switch with a jog dial structure. Other structures may also be used as long as the on and off positions can be detected.

<Settlement switch> The settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When operated after the game is finished, the settlement switch executes a process (settlement process) of paying out to the player the number of gaming media bet and the number of gaming media stored in the credit. Note that in this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where a bet has been made and gaming media are stored in the credit, the bet gaming media are paid out first, and then the gaming media stored in the credit are paid out. However, this is not limited to this, and a process of paying out the gaming media stored in the credit only when the number of gaming media bet is 0 may be executed. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where a bet has been made, only the bet gaming media are paid out, and then when the settlement switch is operated again, the gaming media stored in the credit are paid out.

<Lower Panel 5> The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. It is made of two sheets of transparent resin joined together, with a design sheet sandwiched between the two sheets of resin, and the design sheet is printed with a design that represents the distinctive color of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout outlet 45> The medal payout outlet 45 is provided below the lower panel 5. It is an outlet for discharging medals paid out from a hopper 44 (also called a hopper) described later to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (to the tray 28). It also serves as a return port for discharging medals rejected from a medal selector 34 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Receiving tray 28> The receiving tray 28 (also called the "lower tray") is provided below the lower panel 5. It has a generally concave structure so that it can receive and store medals released from the medal payout opening 45, and is provided so that it protrudes toward the player so that the player can check the stored medals.

Other functions of the tray 28 include a cigarette ashtray 29 and a seal storage section 30 with an opening that can store a resin sheet with a union license seal, patent seal, and model seal attached, and display them to the player.

<Speaker S> The speaker S is provided at the top and bottom of the front panel PS2. It is connected to the sub-control board 1000 with a harness (not shown), and outputs sound effects that match the performance, as well as error sounds and warning sounds that notify the user that an error has occurred.

<Display device 32> The display device 32 is provided above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and displays various performance images, as well as game instruction images that indicate the order in which the stop switch 13 is pressed and the position to be pressed during play (when only the order of pressing is displayed, it is called a push order navigation image (also called a push order image, operation sequence image, or operation order image), when only the position to be pressed is displayed, it may be called a push order navigation image (also called a push image or operation position image), or when both the order of pressing and the position to be pressed are displayed and as a higher concept than the order of pressing and the position to be pressed, it may be called an operation mode navigation image (also called an operation mode image)), an error image when an error occurs, etc. In addition, some models of slot machines PS1 do not have a display device 32. In addition, some models of slot machines PS1 have multiple display devices 32. Even if multiple display devices 32 are provided, unless otherwise specified, the display device 32 refers to any one of the multiple display devices 32, or to multiple display devices 32.

<Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable accessories> Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable accessories are provided at any position on the front panel PS2, such as around the display window 4, on the middle panel, or on the lower panel 5. The other performance devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and perform various performance images and performance operations, as well as game instruction images and operations that indicate the order in which to press the stop switch 13 and the position to press during play, and error images and operations when an error occurs. The other performance devices are installed arbitrarily according to the type of slot machine PS1. In addition, various devices such as liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors can also be used as other performance devices. In particular, in gaming machines that are equipped with a liquid crystal as an auxiliary other performance device, the display device 32 may be called the main display device, and the liquid crystal as the other performance device may be called the sub-display device. In this case, the main display device is configured to have a larger display area than the sub-display device.

<Medal selector 34> The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the rear side of the front panel PS2, and is provided in the flow passage below the medal insertion port 17. The medal selector 34 has a medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by the player using a sensor provided on the flow passage, a medal removal function that guides inserted medals that do not meet the specifications to the receiving tray 28, an ejection function that removes medals that have become stuck in the medal selector 34 when an eject switch provided on the front side of the front panel PS2 is operated, and a blocker function that removes medals inserted at times other than when medals are accepted from the flow passage using an electrically driven blocking member (also called a blocker). Furthermore, if the medal inserted when medals are accepted is a regular medal, the medal selector 34 discharges the medal into a hopper 44 located downstream.

The various sensors in the medal selector consist of a passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, and chute sensor. The passage sensor is the first sensor to detect medals inserted through the medal insertion port, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. Insert sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and blocker, and are provided to determine the passing time of medals passing through insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 to determine whether they pass normally or abnormally. Insert sensor 2 is located downstream of insertion sensor 1. The chute sensor is located downstream of insertion sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. The passage sensor and chute sensor have overlapping functions, so only one of them may be provided.

The passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, or chute sensor may directly detect medals, etc. (medals or illegal devices) using an optical sensor, or a physical movable piece may move when it comes into contact with a medal, etc., and the moved movable piece may be detected by a proximity sensor.

When the blocker in the medal selector is ON, it allows the game medals to pass through, and when it is OFF, it does not allow the game medals to pass through. Allowing the game medals to pass through means that the game medals inserted through the medal insertion port are guided to the hopper 44, and not allowing the game medals to pass through means that the game medals inserted through the medal insertion port are not guided to the hopper 44.

The following describes the components of the cabinet PS3 in the slot machine PS1.

<Cabinet PS3> Cabinet PS3 is configured in a rectangular box shape with an opening on one side, and inside are provided a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "reset switch" or "setting switch"), a power supply 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, etc. It is also composed of a bottom plate, side plates (right side plate, left side plate), a top plate, and a back plate.

<Main control board 100> The main control board 100 is stored in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are joined together, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are crimped together so that they cannot be easily opened or closed (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to the main control board case bracket inside the cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6> The reel unit 6 is mainly composed of a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a center reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet PS3, and is fixed with locking members (screws or rivets).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, right reel 8c) are composed of a reel base, a reel tape with multiple types of patterns attached to the outer circumference of the reel base, a stepping motor axially supported by the reel base, and a motor fixing base to which the stepping motor is fixed, which is generally considered to be the reel unit. A different pattern arrangement is drawn on the reel tape for each reel.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 rotations per minute), the stepping motor moves one step each time a timer interrupt process (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as interrupt process) is executed, maintaining a constant speed rotation state (constant speed rotation), and then, depending on the player's operation of the stop switch 13, the corresponding reel is moved at a constant speed rotation to a stop position determined for each stop operation reception position, and after the reel has been moved to the stop position, the brakes are applied (a four-phase excitation signal is output), stopping the rotation of the reel and terminating the excitation output.

In addition, an index is provided on the spoke part provided at the reel base of each reel, and an index sensor provided on the motor fixing base of each reel detects the index to determine the position of the reference pattern (also called the initial pattern) during each rotation. The stepping motor, which is the driving source of the reel in this embodiment, has 336 steps, and one rotation is completed with 336 timer interrupt processes during constant speed rotation. In addition, a rotation failure detection counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process is executed twice during constant speed rotation, and a rotation failure is determined when the counter value of the rotation failure detection counter reaches 180. In other words, a rotation failure is determined when the reel does not rotate once even after executing the timer interrupt process 360 times. The rotation failure detection counter is configured to be set to 0 when the index is detected, so that if the constant speed rotation process is normal, the rotation failure detection counter will reach 0 before reaching 180.

In this embodiment, a determination is made as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing, and a determination is not made as to whether an index has been detected during acceleration processing, but this is not limiting, and a determination as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing and acceleration processing may also be made. With this configuration, it is possible to make it possible to more quickly bring the player into a state where stop acceptance is possible.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided on the motor fixing base of each reel, which is turned on to highlight the stopped symbols after the reel has stopped, and to improve the visibility of the symbols while the reel is spinning.

<Hopper 44> The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals inserted by players. The hopper 44 is placed by engaging with a rail provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3, and can slide back and forth along the rail. The hopper 44 is composed of a storage tank section that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 into the gaming machine, a hopper motor that is driven by a drive signal input from the hopper drive means, a turntable that is supported by the hopper motor and aligns the medals in the storage tank section, a medal payout section that has a discharge mechanism for discharging medals one by one into the tray 28 by rotating the turntable, a medal discharge port that discharges medals by the medal payout section, and a payout sensor that detects medals discharged from the medal discharge port.

<Auxiliary tank 46> The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and medals stored in excess of the capacity of the storage tank section of the hopper 44 are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 through a downwardly sloping rail section provided in the storage tank section. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box structure, and when installed in the cabinet PS3, two full detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are exposed in the auxiliary tank 46 from through holes provided on at least one side. When a certain amount or more of medals inserted from the medal insertion port are stored, the two full detection electrodes become conductive through the medals, and it is determined that the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 are full. The number of full detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of full detection electrodes may be changed, such as three. The method of full detection is not limited to using full detection electrodes, and full detection may be possible by a sensor provided at a predetermined position detecting medals.

<Setting key switch 37> The setting key switch 37 is provided on a setting key switch unit with an opening/closing door on the front side provided inside the slot machine PS1. After opening the front panel PS2, access is possible by opening the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it 90 degrees to the right. When the setting key switch 37 is on and medals can be accepted, the current setting value can be confirmed, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is on during the power-off recovery process (also called the power-on process) when the power is turned on, the setting change process is executed.

<Power supply unit 39> The power supply unit 39 is located at the lower left when viewed from the front of the cabinet PS3. The power supply unit 39 has a rectangular box structure, with a power switch 40 provided on the outside and a power supply board that generates voltage provided inside. The power supply unit 39 is individually connected to the reel device board and the sub-control board 1000 via harnesses (not shown), and is further connected from the reel device board to the main control board 100 via a harness, supplying power to the main control board 100.

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 is configured to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1, generate a predetermined voltage, and cause the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000 to take in the predetermined voltage, and when the power switch 40 is turned off, it is configured not to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1.

<External output terminal board 47> The external output terminal board 47 (also called the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally attached inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and converts the signal related to the game result output from the main control board 100 into a signal of a predetermined format and transmits it to the outside of the slot machine PS1. The game result includes the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (number of big bonuses, number of regular bonuses), a door opening signal, etc. Other conditions for transmitting a signal to the outside can be set based on predetermined information controlled by the main control board 100, such as when the AT state is reached, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, or when the value of a counter related to the game reaches a predetermined value.

<Functional block diagram> The functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 4.

<Main control board 100> The slot machine PS1 of this embodiment is electrically connected from the main control board 100 (also referred to as the main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) which controls the general flow of the game to the sub-control board 1000 (also referred to as the sub-control means 1000, sub-control board 1000, or sub-control means 1000), door relay board (also referred to as the central display board), reel device board, reset/setting switch 38, setting key switch, etc., enabling data communication. However, two-way communication is not possible between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000, and data communication is possible via one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 1000.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main control chip. The main control chip allows data communication between the main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM, etc. via a bus. The main control chip also has a main control built-in register, and the main control built-in register and the main control CPU can communicate data with each other via a bus. The main control chip also has general-purpose registers (e.g., A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that the main control CPU can use for calculations, etc., a PC register that stores the program (return address) after a return command (e.g., RET command) after executing a program by a call command (e.g., CALL command), and an interrupt register (e.g., IFF1 register, IFF2 register) that manages the enable and disable states of maskable interrupts.

By controlling the main control chip, the role selection (also called internal selection), reel drive control (also called reel control), payout control, etc. are appropriately transmitted to various boards. In addition, when a selected role (also called AT role, AT target role, push order role, eye push role, or operation procedure role including both push order role and eye push role) is won as a result of the internal selection, the sub-control board 1000 transmits selected role information (selected role group information, information regarding the display of selected roles) to enable the sub-control board to notify information regarding the display of selected roles (push order, operation timing) when the main control means 100 notifies the sub-control board. In addition, all processing related to the AT, such as transition to the AT, extension of the number of AT plays, and push order notification, is sometimes referred to as processing related to the instruction function. The push order role is a condition device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the order in which the reels are stopped (push order), and the eye-pressing role is a condition device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the timing at which the stop button is operated.

The main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less", and has a usage area (also referred to as the first program area) of "7.5 KB or less" and the rest outside the usage area (also referred to as the second program area). The usage area has a control area (also referred to as the first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which the programs executed by the main control board 100 are stored, and a data area (also referred to as the first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than the programs (e.g., internal lottery table information) is stored or will be stored. Outside the usage area, like the usage area, there is a control area (also referred to as the second control area) and a data area (also referred to as the second data area). The usage area stores programs related to the progress of the game, and outside the usage area stores programs related to anti-fraud measures and programs used for gaming machine testing.

The main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 has a memory capacity of "1024B or less," with a usable area of "512B or less" (also referred to as the first working area) and a non-usable area (also referred to as the second working area). The first working area is a memory area that can be rewritten as the game progresses, and the second working area is a memory area that can be rewritten when programs for anti-fraud measures and gaming machine testing are executed.

The main control RAM's memory areas built into the main control chip include a memory area for switch state flags indicating the on/off state of the play stop switch and the on/off state of the automatic settlement switch, a memory area for setting value information indicating one of the values 1 to 6 that is set, a memory area for RT state information indicating which of multiple RT states the RT state is in, a memory area for specific condition devices indicating the winning state of specific condition devices such as bonuses, a memory area for game information that stores other information necessary to progress the game, an unused memory area, a memory area for a stack area in which data evacuated from registers is stored, and a memory area for a temporary stack area that is set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized when the setting change process is performed by the setting change means (sometimes called "when the setting change device is activated" or "when the setting change mode is switched on"), when the power is turned off and back on, and at the start of each game, and the range of the main control RAM's memory area that is initialized varies depending on the case.

If power recovery cannot be performed normally during the setting change process, or if the power is not recoverable (an unrecoverable error has occurred), data 0 is set (initialized) to the RAM area excluding the storage area for the switch status flag. In other words, only the switch status flag carries over the state before the setting change; for example, the RT status and condition device flags are cleared and not carried over. However, this is not a limitation, and all RWM areas including the switch status flag may be initialized.

In addition, during the setting change process, if the power supply can be restored normally or if the state is not one in which restoration is impossible, i.e., if the setting change process is performed normally, data 0 is set in the RAM area excluding the areas storing the switch state flag, the setting value information storage area, the RT state information storage area, and the specific condition device storage area. In other words, the RT state, setting value data, and condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the setting value after the setting change while maintaining the game state before the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and a new setting value is set in the subsequent setting change process, so it is used in the sub-control board 1000 to determine whether a setting change has been made.

In addition, when the power is restored, data 0 is set to unused memory areas in the RAM area at the start of each game, and data 0 is set to memory areas in the stack area excluding the maximum used area when the RAM is initialized when the power is restored.

The main control internal registers built into the main control chip are used to control the operation settings and functions of each peripheral circuit (e.g., timer circuits, etc.) built into the main control chip.

For example, data is written to a predetermined memory area of the main control built-in register by a program stored in the main control ROM (
By inputting the setting command, it is possible to make settings (timer circuit settings) related to the maskable interrupt process (for example, timer interrupt process), which is one of the programs stored in the main control ROM.

<Sub-control board 1000> The sub-control board 1000 is equipped with a sub-control chip. The sub-control chip allows the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. to communicate data with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the performance control board, and transmits data specifying the performance to be output to the speaker S, LED lamps, sub-switches 20, performance switches, etc. Data for the display device 32 is transmitted to the image control board. The sub-control board 1000 is also supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Reel device board> The reel device board is a relay board that communicates data between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also called external centralized terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. The reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when a protruding piece (also called an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether the front door PS2 is open or not. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether medals pass properly when being paid out from the hopper 44. The external centralized terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the gaming machine. In addition, the reel device board is supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Door relay board> The door relay board receives information from various sensors in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, shoot sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and outputs information from the board such as blocker information, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board is electrically connected to the selector, bet switch, stop switch, settlement switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, and advantageous zone lamp.

<Performance control board> The performance control board (also called performance control means) is electrically connected to the sub-switch 20, the sub-cross key switch 21, the performance switch, the movable props, the speaker S, the back lamp, the LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and the image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32.

The performance control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the output of performance to the performance device based on performance commands received from the sub-control means 1000.

The performance control means selects the performance content based on the result of the lottery of the role by the internal lottery means. In this embodiment, multiple types of performance content are prepared in advance, and the performance control means selects the performance content by lottery using software random numbers after the lottery of the role is performed by the internal lottery means at the start of the game, etc.

In addition, there are multiple types of presentation content depending on not only the results of the role selection but also the results of the freeze selection and the game state (RT state, freeze state), etc. Specifically, there are multiple types of presentation content corresponding to when a bonus is won, when a small role is won, when a replay is won, when a non-win is won, etc.

The presentation content determines what kind of presentation will be output (how the lamp will be turned on, blinking, or turned off, what kind of sound will be output from the speaker S, what kind of image will be displayed on the display device 32, etc.) and at what timing (when the start switch 12 or each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) as the game progresses.

It is also possible to generate effects output by the effect control means in response to operations by the player. For example, it is possible to generate effects by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on sub-control commands transmitted from the main control board 100 in response to operation signals from the start switch 12, stop switch 13, medal slot 17, bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), settlement switches, etc., whose operation signals are input to the main control board 100, or to generate effects directly from the sub-control board 1000 in response to sub-input switch operation means, such as the sub-switch 20, sub cross key switch 21, and effect switches, whose operation signals are input to the sub-control board 1000. Also, although the sub-control board 1000 and the effect control board are separate boards, they may be configured as a single board. In that case, the sub-control board 1000 has the functions and processing of the performance control board, and the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, performance switch, movable props, speaker S, back lamp, LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and an image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32 may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000.

<Image control board> The image control board (also called image control means) is equipped with an image control ROM, sound ROM, cooling fan, etc. for specifically displaying the performance content on the display device 32.

<Additional information on board configuration> The sub-control board and performance control board may be configured on one board, or the sub-control board, performance control board, and image control board may be configured on one board. When the sub-control board and performance control board are configured on one board, there may be two sub-control CPUs and two performance control CPUs, or one CPU may be used. The same applies when the sub-control board, performance control board, and image control board are configured on one board.

<Power supply board> In this embodiment, the slot machine PS1 supplies power from the power supply board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40. The power supplied to the reel device board is then supplied to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, which then becomes electrically connected. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 is then supplied to the performance control board, which then becomes the image control board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, which then becomes electrically connected.

Next, we will explain the control of the main control board 100, which controls the game on the gaming machine.

<Types of errors> Errors can be broadly divided into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable errors> A recoverable error is an error that indicates an error related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), an error related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), a door open error, a harness coming loose, etc. When a recoverable error is set, if the cause of the various recoverable errors is removed and the reset switch is operated, it is possible to return to play without having to turn the power back on. During a recoverable error, information about the error that has occurred is displayed on the display device 32, payout number indicator, and various lamps to inform the player of what error has occurred.

If a recoverable error is detected during play, the game progress may be stopped at the time of detection, or after the game in which the recoverable error was detected has ended. By stopping game progress during a recoverable error, damage to the amusement center manager can be reduced even if the recoverable error occurred due to fraud. The condition for recovering from a recoverable error state may be configured to automatically recover by removing the cause of the error, and an error that can be recovered from without turning the power back on is called a recoverable error.

<Unrecoverable Error> In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the output of the output port is cleared, and other measures are taken to restrict game progress, and the credit number display 26 displays a message according to the type of error, thereby informing the player that an unrecoverable state has occurred.

In addition, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is cleared when a reset switch (not shown) is operated, but once an irrecoverable error is set, the irrecoverable error cannot be cleared by simply accepting a reset switch operation or by turning the power back on. In this case, the system is configured to clear the irrecoverable error by performing a setting change process. When the power is turned back on in the event of an irrecoverable error, after part of the power outage recovery process is executed, the irrecoverable error display is repeatedly executed, and control is exercised so that subsequent game processing is not executed.

Examples of unrecoverable errors include when the number of coins bet at the time of the winning combination is other than the specified number, when the value is not within the normal range in the setting value error check, when it is determined that the power cut process was not performed normally when the power is restored after a power cut (sometimes called an "RWM (RAM) abnormality" or "RWM (RAM) error"), when a random number abnormality is detected such as an abnormality in the crystal oscillator frequency, or when a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination that is not on a winning line is stopped during the winning determination process.

In addition, if an unrecoverable error occurs, game progress will be halted regardless of whether the game is in progress or on standby (from the end of a game to the start of the next game).

<Game method and game flow> To play with the slot machine PS1, first insert medals into the medal insertion slot 17, or operate the MAX BET switch 18, 1 BET switch 19 to bet medals stored in advance, thereby setting a pre-defined number of medals to be bet (also called the stipulated number). In this embodiment, the stipulated number is set to three medals. By setting the number of medals to be bet, the active line is set to active, and the machine becomes available for play.

When a new medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot when the number of medals bet is set to the upper limit, the number of game medals stored in the credits increases. The maximum number of medals that can be stored in the credits is limited to 50. When medals that exceed the upper limit of the number of medals bet (3 medals) and the upper limit of the number of medals stored (50 medals) are inserted through the medal insertion slot (the 54th medal), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (a state that prevents medals from being inserted into the gaming machine) and the medals are returned to the tray. In other words, when the number of medals bet is at the upper limit and the number of stored credits is at the upper limit, the blocker is turned off (a path to the hopper 44 in the selector is no longer formed).

When medals are inserted, the bet number is added when the bet number is less than three (less than the maximum bet number in the game state when the medals are inserted). When medals are inserted, the credits can be saved when the bet number is three (the maximum bet number in the game state when the medals are inserted) and the credits are less than 50 (less than the upper limit that can be saved in the credits). In other words, when the sum of the bet number and the saved credits is less than 53, the medals will enter the gaming machine when inserted from the medal insertion slot. In addition, another condition for the medals to enter the gaming machine when inserted is that the game is in standby (the period from the end of a game to the start of the next game). For example, the medal insertion requirement is met even during game standby after a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed and the automatic bet process is executed. In this case, three medals have been bet in the automatic bet, so if the saved credits are less than 50, the medal insertion requirement is met.

Next, when operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process is executed, and after determining the result of the internal lottery process (also referred to as the role lottery result or the condition device number), it is determined whether or not the minimum play time (also referred to as the wait time (period) or the 4.1 second timer) has elapsed, and if the wait time has elapsed, the rotation of each reel is started, and if the wait time has not elapsed, each reel is kept waiting without being rotated until the wait time has elapsed.

Next, when an operation (stop operation) of any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops according to the result of the role selection and the timing when the stop operation was accepted. When all reels stop (also called a full stop), it is determined whether or not each of the stopped symbols determined at the time of acceptance of the stop of each reel is abnormal, and if they are not abnormal, a search is performed to determine which symbol combination has stopped, and depending on the symbol combination that corresponds to the search result, processing such as the payout of medals (including addition to credits), setting of a replay (automatic bet processing), setting of a bonus state, ending of the bonus state, setting of a RT state, and ending of the RT state is performed, and one game is completed.

<Freeze Processing> Freeze processing (also called freeze effect), which temporarily stops and delays game progress for a predetermined period of time, can include temporarily stopping functions related to game progress, such as accepting game media, accepting the operation of a bet switch to determine the number of game media to be bet on credited in advance, accepting the operation of the start switch 12 to start game play, or accepting the operation to stop the reels. The freeze processing (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100.

The freeze effect may be to temporarily halt all of the functions related to the game progress described above, or to temporarily halt only some of the functions.

Examples of ways to temporarily halt the progress of a game include not performing control processes based on the player's operation (processing to form a path through which medals are guided to the hopper 44 by blocker control, processing to set the number of coins to bet based on the operation of the bet switch, processing to spin the reels or internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12, and processing to stop the reels based on the operation of the stop switch 13).

When an input signal based on a player's operation is issued during a period in which game progress is paused by a freeze effect, the system performs processing such as not performing control processing based on the input signal, not accepting the input signal, or delaying the transmission of the input signal until a specified period has passed, thereby delaying the timing of the end of one game compared to when the freeze effect is not performed.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, there are cases where when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels are not rotated for a predetermined period of time, but are rotated after the predetermined period has elapsed, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period of time, but are performed after the predetermined period of time, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing is performed for a predetermined period of time, but the reels are not rotated, but are rotated after the predetermined period of time, when the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed, a predetermined period is set after which the reels are rotated and stopped during the predetermined period, and when the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed and the reels are rotated, a predetermined period is set after which the stop switch 13 stop acceptance is disabled for the predetermined period.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the control process for the freeze effect is different between the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the freeze effect that is performed based on the stop display of a specific symbol on the reel as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13.

As an example of the control process for the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13, when the left stop switch 13a is operated to freeze while all reels are rotating, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c can be disabled after the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a stops. This means that for a specified period of time, the player cannot stop the spinning middle and right reels, but after the specified period has elapsed, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c is enabled, so the timing until the end of one game can be delayed.

Control processing for freeze effects that is performed based on a specific symbol being displayed frozen on a reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 may include disabling the acceptance of the stop of the last stop switch 13 when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13 to be stopped, or not performing control processing such as setting the number of bets based on the operation of a bet switch to start the next game, detecting the insertion of gaming media using a passing sensor, or automatic betting processing that is performed when a replay stops on an active line, based on a specific symbol being displayed frozen on each reel as a result of accepting the operation of the last stop switch 13 to be stopped.

During the specified period during which the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily suspended, but game machine operations that are not related to the progress of the game can be executed. For example, even if the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the reel rotation pattern can be set arbitrarily, such as rotating in the normal rotation pattern, or rotating slower or faster than normal.

The reel rotation patterns during a specified period of time may include rotating the reels in the opposite direction to normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), rotating the reels a specified number of times to display a specific symbol combination, stopping a specific reel among multiple reels while the other reels are rotating, changing the reel rotation speed, or changing the reel operation due to the player's operation.

The specified period during which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to specified conditions. Here, the specified conditions include the detection of a signal based on the operation acceptance status of various switches by the player (operation status of the start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, settlement switch, etc.) and the result of a freeze lottery. In addition, examples of changing include shortening or lengthening the specified period during which the freeze effect is performed, during which the game progress is temporarily stopped, and switching the rotation mode of the reels.

Examples of control processes that shorten the pause period include forcibly terminating the pause period or rewriting it to a period shorter than the pause period. Examples of control processes that lengthen the pause period include adding another period after the pause period or rewriting the pause period to a longer period. In addition, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not need to have an upper limit, and may continue until a certain result is reached based on the result of the operation reception.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set to include the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period is compared with the freeze effect period, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, the freeze effect is executed during the wait period. If the freeze effect does not end during the wait period, the freeze effect period is set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period is resumed after the freeze effect ends. Also, if the freeze effect period is longer than the wait period, it is possible to omit the process of comparing the wait period with the freeze effect period and start the freeze effect after the start switch 12 is operated (after the internal lottery process).

As a freeze effect, it is also possible to perform a freeze effect (also called pseudo play) during the acceleration process as if normal play was in progress. In pseudo play, the start switch 12 is operated, and a pseudo play period is determined during the acceleration process of the reels after the internal lottery is performed. During the pseudo play period, reel rotation control is performed as in normal play (reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start switch based on the start of the pseudo play), and reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13. It may also be configured so that the reels are rotated again by operating the start switch 12 during the pseudo play period. However, internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12 and winning determination processing or payout control processing based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In addition, in pseudo-games, when the reels stop as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13, or when the reels stop automatically as a reel effect, the stopped reels are made to sway up and down (so-called swaying fluctuations). This allows the player to determine whether they are playing a normal game or a pseudo-game when they operate the stop switch 13.

In addition, when an acceleration process is executed to start the real game (sometimes called the "main game") after the pseudo game has ended, a random delay process is executed to randomize the timing at which each reel starts spinning. For example, if a seven-symbol combination stops during a pseudo game and the main game starts with the same symbol position relationship, it would be easier to line up all seven symbols in the main game (a so-called aid to eye-pressing). To prevent this from happening, the timing at which each reel starts spinning is randomized using the random delay process to spread out the symbol combinations that stop in the pseudo game.

The random delay process sets a timer for each reel to wait for the reel to start spinning, updates the set timer value with each timer update process of the interrupt process, and starts spinning from the reel whose set timer value has reached 0. If the random delay process results in the timer values for all reels reaching 0 and it is determined that all reels are spinning at a constant speed, it becomes possible to accept a stop switch operation for the reel.

In addition, if random delay processing is not incorporated, the symbol combination before the start of the pseudo game may be stored, and the symbol positions may be returned to that symbol combination before the start of the actual game before the reels start spinning.

<Symbol combinations that do not require technical intervention> Symbol combinations that do not require technical intervention refer to symbol combinations that can always stop and display the winning symbol combination on an active line, regardless of when the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are spinning. For example, when bell symbols are arranged every three symbols on all reels, bell-bell-bell always stops (100% attraction rate), so this can be said to be a symbol combination that does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, an attraction rate of 100% will be referred to as PB=1, and a winning symbol combination with an attraction rate of 100% on all reels may be referred to as PB=1 role.

On the other hand, PB≠1 means that the winning symbol combination will not stop depending on the timing of when the stop switch 13 stops while the reels are spinning. For example, if there is a location within the pull-in range where there are no symbols related to the winning symbol (e.g., 5 symbols apart), then PB≠1, and the winning symbol may be referred to as a PB≠1 symbol.

<Small win priority control, bonus priority control> Small win priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are both won, or when a small win is won within a bonus, if both a small win symbol and a bonus symbol can be drawn in, the symbol related to the small win will be drawn in.

Bonus priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are both won, or when a small win within a bonus is won, if both a symbol related to a small win and a symbol related to a bonus can be drawn, the symbol related to the bonus is drawn.

In addition, since replays have the highest priority and cannot be missed, when the condition device flags for replay and small win, or replay and bonus are turned on at the same time, the replay-related symbols are always drawn.

<Normal section> The normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When a push order role is won in a normal section, a process is executed to send masked information (performance group number) indicating which push order was won to the sub-control means 1000. In addition, when a push order role is won in a normal section, a notification of the push order (both correct and incorrect push orders) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in a normal section, even if a push order role is won, neither the main control means 100 nor the sub-control means 1000 notifies the push order, so even if a push order role is won in a normal section, it is not always clear whether it is correct or incorrect. In other words, it is a play section in which the AT state does not occur.

<Advantageous Zone> The advantageous zone is a zone in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and the advantageous zone is set to suppress excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If the player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery executed in the normal zone, the player can transition to the advantageous zone. In the advantageous zone, a transition lottery to the AT can be held or the AT state can be entered, but in order to suppress the excessive medal acquisition described above, the advantageous zone is designed to end and transition to the normal zone based on certain conditions. Specifically, 1) when 1500 games are played from the next game after transition to one advantageous zone, 2) when more than 2400 medals are won from the next game after transition to one advantageous zone, and 3) when any condition is met. These can suppress excessive medal acquisition. Note that the 1500 games in 1) may be 4000 games, or may be 65535 games, which is the maximum value that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area, or may be configured so that the advantageous zone does not end when a predetermined number of games are consumed. In addition, the arbitrary condition in 3) may be, for example, when one AT ends or when a specific pattern combination is displayed.

If it is an advantageous zone, information indicating that it is an advantageous zone (also called advantageous zone type) is stored in a specified RAM area. If the value stored in the RAM area is 0 (if the advantageous zone type is 0), it indicates that it is a normal zone, and if the value stored in the RAM area is 1 (if the advantageous zone type is 1), it indicates that it is an advantageous zone.

<Advantageous Zone Lamp> The advantageous zone lamp is provided as information on the main side indicating that the player is in the advantageous zone. This allows the player to easily determine whether or not the player is in the advantageous zone by checking whether the advantageous zone lamp is on or off. Specifically, when the DP of the credit number display 26 is on, it indicates that the player is in the advantageous zone, and when the DP of the credit number display 26 is not on, it indicates that the player is not in the advantageous zone. The advantageous zone lamp is lit when all reels stop, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted by the player is detected, when the second medal inserted by the player is detected, when the third medal inserted by the player is detected, after the start switch is accepted, or after the selection role is won by the internal lottery. In addition, the condition for always lighting the lamp is when the player is in the advantageous zone, when the operation procedure information of the selection role is announced, and when the ball payout rate (maximum ball payout rate) of the announced game exceeds 1 (when it increases).

In addition, the machine is configured to light up the advantageous zone lamp even when it is notified of the push order transition push order to an RT with a high replay probability even though the payout rate does not exceed 1 due to the machine not being equipped with a push order minor role (a minor role among push order roles) due to the specifications. This is to inform the player that the advantageous zone lamp is in an advantageous state, and to prevent players from suffering losses due to not understanding the specifications of the gaming machine.

Note that if the conditions for turning on the favorable zone lamp as described above are not met, the timing for turning on the favorable zone lamp after moving to a new favorable zone can be arbitrary.

In addition, once the advantageous zone lamp is lit, it will remain lit until the advantageous zone ends, and will be turned off before the start switch operation for the next game after the game in which the advantageous zone ends is accepted (after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted during maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted during maintenance is detected, or when the third medal inserted during maintenance is detected).

By configuring it in this way, even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit, it may be an advantageous zone, and the player can be given a sense of expectation that the processing related to the instruction function will be executed even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit. As a result, while in the past, if it was a normal zone, the game was simply waiting for the transition to the advantageous zone, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible that an AT transition lottery or the like is being held even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit, making it possible to maintain motivation to play.

In addition, when the advantageous zone type is 1, it does not necessarily mean that the zone is advantageous. This is because in a game in which the advantageous zone type is 0 and the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, causing the advantageous zone type to become 1, the advantageous zone type is 1 but the game state is still in the normal zone because it has not yet transitioned to the advantageous zone. When executing the process to send a test signal indicating whether the zone is advantageous or normal, referring to the advantageous zone type will result in sending a signal for the advantageous zone even though it is a normal zone, and a signal different from the intended state will be sent.

To prevent this situation, when sending a test signal indicating whether the zone is favorable or normal, the system is configured to refer to the value of the favorable zone clear counter. When the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0, processing is executed to output a test signal indicating that the zone is normal, and when the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 1 to 1500), processing is executed to output a test signal indicating that the zone is favorable. By configuring in this way, the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately identify the state simply by determining whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0 or not, thereby eliminating pressure on program capacity and improving program execution speed. As mentioned above, when the favorable zone is ended by an arbitrary ending condition, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is set to 1, so that the processing for outputting the test signal can accurately output that the zone is favorable even in a game where the favorable zone ends.

<Main gaming state> The main gaming state is a gaming state managed by the main control means, and is not necessarily the same as the RT state. For example, the main gaming state is determined in correspondence with the AT, sub-bonus, CZ, normal zone, etc., which will be described later. When only the main gaming state transitions, the probability of determining the internal lottery result by the internal lottery means does not change. The main gaming state is for the main control means to manage the gaming state, and the performance related to the instruction function such as the AT winning probability, the freeze winning probability, or the output trigger to the external terminal is determined for each main gaming state.

<AT> AT is an abbreviation for assist time, also known as the notification period, which is a period for making it easier for players to win the winning combination selected by the combination lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). Generally, the means of notification during the AT include the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation order of the stop switch, and both the operation timing and the operation order of the stop switch, and are also referred to as the operation procedure or operation mode.

<Sub-bonus> A sub-bonus is a type of AT, and is different from the bonuses that can be won by internal lottery (Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, RB, CB, SB, described below). It is basically the same as an AT, but is characterized by the fact that the sub-bonus starting symbol combination is stopped by reel effects, simulated play, or push order when the sub-bonus begins. It should be noted that even when it is simply referred to as an "AT", the concept includes sub-bonuses.

<Grouping of Selected Roles> When a selected role is won during a non-AT, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 a performance group number indicating that the selected role has been won, and when a selected role is won during an AT, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 a performance group number and operation procedure information. In other words, since operation procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during a non-AT, the sub-control means 1000 is not able to notify the operation procedure. As a result, it is unclear on the sub-control means 1000 side which operation procedure can be used to display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during a non-AT, and since operation procedure information that can display a symbol combination advantageous to the player is transmitted during an AT, the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device or operation indicator lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. This allows the player to easily recognize the operation procedure, and further prevents the operation procedure information from being illegally obtained during a non-AT.

<Processing related to instruction function> The processing related to the instruction function is a concept that includes not only AT-related lotteries such as AT transition lottery, AT additional lottery, updating of AT termination conditions (addition/subtraction of AT play count, addition/subtraction of AT execution notification count), and AT execution (notification of operation mode), but also processing related to management of the AT state. The processing related to this instruction function can be executed with a predetermined number of bets for each game state, and is configured to execute processing only when any one of the bet numbers is set when multiple bet numbers are set as a specified number in a certain game state. For example, when two-coin bets and three-coin bets are possible in the bonus internal state, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed only when playing with three-coin bets, and the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed when playing with two-coin bets. In other words, when playing with two-coin bets, even if a role subject to AT lottery is won, the AT lottery is not executed, and the AT play count is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if the SB (single bonus) or CB that ends after one game is only for two-coin bet games, and the game after the SB or CB ends with two or three bets, if a replay is won in the SB or CB and the number of coins automatically bet is two, the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed in the game after the SB or CB ends (processing related to the instruction function can be executed with a three-coin bet), so the number of bets automatically inserted when a replay is won in the SB or CB is set to three. In this way, processing related to the instruction function can be executed even in the game after the replay is won in the SB or CB, so that a game that is disadvantageous to the player can be eliminated. As mentioned above, the processing related to the advantageous zone is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

<Instruction Monitor> During the AT, when reporting information regarding the operation procedure of the push order role, the winning number display may be used to report the operation procedure information. Specifically, for push order role A (left, center, right correct), "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, for push order role B (left, right, center correct), "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, for push order role C (center, left, right correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, for push order role D (center, right, left correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, for push order role E (right, left, center correct), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and for push order role F (right, center, left correct), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With this configuration, players can know the correct button press sequence by checking the instruction monitor. In addition, because the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it can accurately notify the player of the correct button press sequence even if the sub-control board is tampered with.

In addition, if the indication monitor is also used as the winning coin count display, the lower digits may display the numbers (1 to 6) mentioned above, and the upper digits may display "=" as an identifier. In this case, the identifier allows the player to determine whether the winning coin count display is displaying the winning coin count or the push order, so that the player's recognition is not hindered.

Also,
When the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a three-digit seven-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. In addition, in the case of push order A (left, center, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order B (left, right, center correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order C (center, left, right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order D (center, right, left correct), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order E (right, left, center correct), "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order F (right, center, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, the push order on the instruction monitor becomes easy to intuitively grasp, and the player can easily grasp the correspondence between the push order and the display on the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the push order on the instruction monitor is preferably within the advantageous zone, and any time from after the push order role is selected by the internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch until the stop switch can be operated. With this configuration, the push order can be notified to the player before he or she operates the stop switch, preventing the player from performing the stop operation with the incorrect push order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)> The role ratio monitor is a display device that switches and displays the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio (selectable depending on the specifications of the gaming machine; also called instruction-included role ratio), consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. status ratio every 4800 ms, and is capable of displaying a four-digit number by using four seven-segment LEDs (with DP). The top two digits of the four-digit number displayed by the four seven-segment LEDs are called the identification segment, and the bottom two digits are called the ratio segment.

The "functionality" in the functionality ratio refers to the first type special functionality (so-called RB), the second type special functionality (so-called CB), and the normal functionality (so-called SB), and the "functionality ratio" is the ratio calculated by the payout during functionality operation ÷ total payout × 100. Note that the payout during the operation of the first type special functionality continuous operation device (so-called BB) and the second type special functionality continuous operation device (so-called MB) is also included in the "payout during functionality operation", but the payout during general play during BB and general play during MB is not included in the "payout during functionality operation". Note that "payout" is a term that does not subtract the number of coins inserted, and in the case of the number of coins inserted minus the number of coins inserted, it is called the difference number (difference number). In addition, the first type special functionality continuous operation device and the second type special functionality continuous operation device are sometimes simply called the functionality continuous operation device as a combined concept.

The "continuous feature" in the continuous feature ratio refers to the first type special feature (so-called RB), and the "continuous feature ratio" is a ratio calculated by: payout during operation of the first type special feature ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during operation of the first type special feature continuous operation device (so-called BB) are also included in "payouts during feature operation", but payouts during general play during BB are not included in "payouts during feature operation".

The "instruction-included role" in the instruction-included role ratio includes the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated (so-called AT) in addition to the "role" described above, and the "instruction-included role ratio" is a ratio calculated by (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) ÷ total payout × 100. Here, (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) does not refer to the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated and the role is activated, but refers to the sum of the payout number in the game in which the instruction function is activated and the payout number in the game in which the role is activated. If the game in which the instruction function is activated is a game in which the role is activated, the two payout numbers are not added together, but the payout number for that game is (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation). Note that if a player operates the stop switch incorrectly in a game in which the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained, but in this case the calculation is based on the actual payout.

The information displayed in the identification segment among the information displayed on the ratio monitor is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed among the cumulative favorable zone ratio, cumulative instructed role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games, role ratio for the latest 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. state ratio, and is displayed as "7U.", "7P.", "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", and "5H.", respectively. For example, when "7U." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the cumulative favorable zone ratio, and when "6Y." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games. Note that the "." displayed on the ratio monitor refers to decimal points.

Of the information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment allows the calculation results of various ratios to be visually confirmed, and is displayed as a two-digit number using two seven-segment LEDs. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. The calculated result is rounded down to the nearest whole number. If the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. If the cumulative number of games played is less than 400, the ratio segment displays "00."

If the cumulative number of games does not reach the reference number of games, the identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, and is 175,000 games for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 175,000 games for the cumulative indicated role ratio, 6,000 games for the consecutive role ratio among the latest 6,000 games, 6,000 games for the role ratio among the latest 6,000 games, 17,500 games for the cumulative consecutive role ratio, 17,500 games for the cumulative role ratio, and 175,000 games for the cumulative role etc. state ratio.

The ratio segment blinks when the displayed value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to various ratios, and is 70 for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 70 for the cumulative indicated feature ratio, 60 for the consecutive feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 70 for the feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 60 for the cumulative consecutive feature ratio, 70 for the cumulative feature ratio, and 50 for the cumulative feature etc. state ratio. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold but the ratio segment displays "00", the ratio segment is displayed in a lit state.

To check whether the role ratio monitor is operating normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt process is started. The test pattern is displayed in a blinking manner by all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs that make up the role ratio monitor. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition to being displayed immediately after power is turned on, the test pattern may also be displayed when settings are being changed, settings are being confirmed, or an RWM (RAM) abnormal error occurs.

The segments are displayed in a blinking mode in the following cases: when the cumulative number of games played in the identification segment does not reach the reference number of games played; when the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold; and when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment. Specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between on and off every 300 ms, such as on 300 ms → off 300 ms → on 300 ms → off 300 ms → .... Also, when various ratio information is switched, it starts with the light on, so that the display period of various ratio information does not become longer or shorter depending on the timing of the light on and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instructed role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. state ratio displayed on the role ratio monitor are configured to switch display contents every 4800 ms, but by setting this 4800 ms to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking, it is possible to configure it so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit, even if the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking mode when they are switched.

By configuring it this way, the light starts on even when various ratio information is switched, so it is possible to display the display continuously without any sense of incongruity caused by a shift in the blinking cycle.

In addition, the display period of the test pattern after the power is turned on as described above is also set to 4800 ms, so when the test pattern has finished being displayed for 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED goes out, and the next timer interrupt process turns on and makes it possible to display information regarding the cumulative favorable zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio.

Next, we will explain how to control the blinking display on the role ratio monitor.

In order to blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is a 2-byte memory area, and executes a process of adding 1 for each timer interrupt process. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and thereafter cycles through the values 0 to 299 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. In other words, the value following 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "0", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "1". At this time, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 because a carry occurs as a result of calculating "0-299").

Example 2) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "298", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off will become "299". At this time, the carry flag will be 1 (the carry flag will be 1 because a carry occurs as a result of calculating "298-299").

Example 3) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "299", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "0". In this case, the carry flag becomes 0 (the result of calculating "299-299" is that no carry occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0).

As described above, if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is any value between 0 and 298, the carry flag will be 1, and if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is 299, the carry flag will be 0. In other words, the carry flag will be 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag becomes 0, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is updated. The blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stores 0) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, and when 1 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, it is possible to display (blink) the display mode of the role ratio monitor between the on mode and the off mode every 300 ms.

The display of the ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode when the cumulative number of games in the identification segment does not reach the reference number of games, when the display value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold value, or when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. In other cases, the monitor is displayed in a lit mode without referring to the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, since the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between on and off regardless of whether the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referenced or not is updated for each timer interrupt process, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is also updated from time to time, and it is possible to display the monitor without any discrepancy between the timing of turning on and off and the timing of switching the various ratio displays, even when the state is switched from not referring to the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) to referring to it.

<Program start processing flow> The program start processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in FIG. 5.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings related to the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it sets the interrupt mode, sets the functions of the main CPU, and performs a RAM check process to create power-off recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAM are normal, and if the conditions are met, it determines that the power-off recovery data is normal, and if the conditions are not met, it determines that the power-off recovery data is abnormal.

Then, the state of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal is checked to determine whether the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power interruption recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state. If the power interruption recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, a first initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. If the power interruption recovery data is not normal or in a recoverable state, a second initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. After the setting change process, the process proceeds to the main game progress of Figure 9.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power failure recovery data is abnormal or in an irrecoverable state, an irrecoverable error is notified and the game progress of the slot machine PS1 is stopped, and the process moves to an irrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if the power failure recovery data is not abnormal or in an irrecoverable state, the process moves to the power failure recovery process of Figure 8. After the power failure recovery process, the process moves to the main game progress of Figure 9. Note that after the power failure recovery process, the state that was saved when the power failure was detected is restored, so the process does not necessarily start from the beginning of the main game progress.

In addition, when processing an unrecoverable error, interrupts are prohibited and the output of the output port (output of sub-control commands, output of excitation signals to the stepping motor, etc.) is cleared. Then, the error is repeatedly displayed (announced) on the acquired number display 27.

<Power-off process> The power-off process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in FIG. 6.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned off or an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off, such as a power outage (also referred to as a power outage), the operating voltage for operating the slot machine PS1 drops, and when the operating voltage falls below a threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power outage and generates a power outage detection signal, which is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, in the determination process for determining whether or not the power outage detection signal has been input in the timer interrupt process, the power outage process is executed when it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input. When determining whether or not the power outage detection signal has been input in the timer interrupt process, the determination may be made in one timer interrupt process, or in two or more timer interrupt processes. In other words, when determining whether or not the power has been cut off in multiple timer interrupt processes, if it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input in the first process but not in the second process, the power outage process is not executed. This is to prevent the power outage process from being executed when noise or a momentary outage (a state in which the voltage falls below the threshold for just a moment, but then immediately rises above the threshold) occurs.

During power-off processing, output ports are cleared, interrupts that are executed periodically are prohibited from occurring, and the interrupt prohibited/enabled state at the time of power-off is saved. Next, the registers in use are saved, and the stack pointer is saved. Once saved, the power-off processing completed flag, which indicates that power-off processing has been performed, is turned on, and checksum data for all RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then RAM writing is prohibited, and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the saved stack pointer, the presence or absence of the power-off processing completed flag, and whether the checksums of all RAM areas are normal are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt processing> The timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in FIG. 7.

In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When timer interrupt processing begins, the necessary data stored in the registers is compared.

Next, it determines whether a power outage has been detected based on whether a power outage detection signal has been received, and if it determines that a power outage has been detected, it executes the power outage process.

Next, the input ports that determine the input from various sensors and operation switches are read, and the input port data generation process is executed.

Next, reel drive control is executed. In the reel drive control, control and update of the drive state are performed according to whether each reel is accelerating, rotating at a constant speed, starting to decelerate, decelerating, or stopped.

Next, data to be output for each output port (such as an excitation signal for the stepping motor or a drive signal for the hopper 44) is created and port output processing is performed to output various signals.

Next, a check is performed to see if any abnormalities have occurred. Examples of abnormalities include whether the current settings are normal, and whether the operation pattern of the dispenser and dispenser sensors is normal.

Next, external signals such as bonus signals, ART signals, security signals, medal insertion signals, and medal payout signals are set (controlled to on/off) to be output to external systems such as hall computers, and external signal output is performed to send them to the external terminal board.

Next, the control command transmission process is executed. In the control command transmission process, if a sub-control command has been set, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000.

Next, control is performed regarding the lighting of various LEDs. In controlling the lighting of various LEDs, the memory area of the RWM indicating whether various LEDs are on or off is checked, and if a value indicating that the LED is on ("1" in this embodiment) is stored, a lighting signal for that LED is output, and if a value indicating that the LED is off ("0" in this embodiment) is stored, a lighting signal for that LED is not output (or an off signal is output).

Various LEDs control the 1-3 bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, medal insertion lamp, credit number indicator, winning number indicator, stop switch lamp, and MAX bet lamp.

Next, it outputs notification data to be sent to the sub-control board, such as the sound of the stop switch being operated or the sound of a medal being inserted.

Next, it outputs a signal related to the performance test.

Then restore the registers.

Then, save the interrupt enable flag to on and end the timer interrupt processing.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command issued when the start switch is operated, a winning information command indicating the result of the internal lottery, a reel spin start command issued when the reels start accelerating, a left reel stop command, a middle reel stop command, a right reel stop command, and a all reel stop command issued when the stop switches for stopping the reels while they are spinning are operated, etc.

Also, timer measurement processing may be performed within the timer interrupt processing. In the timer measurement, a control process is performed to update information about the timer (time) stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, a process of updating (e.g., subtracting 1) the value stored in the RWM memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) that monitors (manages) the minimum play time (4.1 seconds) is performed. Note that in addition to the RWM memory area that monitors the minimum play time, the RWM may have memory areas related to multiple timers, such as a memory area of the RWM that monitors (manages) the insertion of game medals using the insertion button (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) and a memory area of the RWM that monitors (manages) the output time of an external signal (hereinafter also referred to as timer area C). In this case, the timer measurement executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the RWM memory area (hereinafter also referred to as the timer area) that stores information about the timer, such as a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area B, and a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area C. Also, if a timer measurement is performed when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0", the value stored in the certain timer area is configured to become "0".

Note that, as an example of the control process for updating the information related to the timer stored in the RWM, a process for subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area has been given, but a process for adding 1 to the value stored in the timer area may also be used.

Here, we will explain how to monitor (manage) the insertion of gaming medals using the insertion button. Monitoring (management) of the insertion of gaming medals using the insertion button is done by a timer that starts counting from the time the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19, and is a timer that does not execute the process of determining whether the next 1 bet switch 19 has been operated until the timer value reaches "0".

For example, in a predetermined situation where the number of credits is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, when the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1 bet switch 19), the value "20" is stored in the timer area B after the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19. After that, the value stored in the timer area B is subtracted by "1" by the timer measurement of the timer interrupt process. Then, when the timer interrupt process is executed 20 times, the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0". Note that if the value stored in the timer area B is not "0" (if the value stored in the timer area B is any of "1" to "20"), the game progress main process does not determine whether the 1 bet switch 19 has been operated. In other words, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in the timer area B is not "0", the bet process is not executed. After that, after the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0", the bet process can be executed when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated.

This configuration can prevent multiple bet processes from being executed due to a malfunction despite a single operation of the 1 bet switch 19. It can also prevent a malicious player from repeatedly tapping the 1 bet switch 19, which causes multiple bet processes based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 and causes commands based on the execution of bet processes to be sent to the sub-control means 1000 in succession.

<Power-off recovery process> The power-off recovery process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart in FIG. 8.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned on to turn on the power, the main control board 100 executes a power-off recovery process to restore various data to the state before the power was turned off.

In the power failure recovery process, the stack pointer is restored, and output data related to the sub-control command sent to the sub-control board 1000 is restored. After that, it is determined whether the set setting value data is within the normal range. If the determination results in an abnormality (value is outside the specified range), the process moves to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if the data is normal (value is within the specified range), the unused RAM area is initialized, an interrupt that is executed periodically is started, and the input port is read. After that, the power failure processing completion flag is cleared, the registers in use are restored, and the interrupt disabled/enabled state at the time of the power failure is restored, and the power failure recovery process is terminated. Note that when the power failure recovery process is terminated, the state before the power failure occurred is restored, and if it is not restored (when the settings have been changed), the main control process for game progress is performed from the beginning.

In this embodiment, the interrupt is started at a specific timing in the power failure recovery process, but the interrupt may be started after the power failure recovery process in the program start process.

<Description of main game progress> The main game progress control process executed by the main control board 100 in this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in Figure 9.

The main control board 100 executes the game value input process. In the game value input process, an automatic input process is executed by replay (if the game is not replayed, the medal input by the automatic input process is not executed). After that, the game enters a medal input waiting state, and in the game value input process, in the medal input waiting state, the game waits for the insertion of a game medal from the medal input port 17 or the operation of the bet switch. When the game medal is inserted or the bet switch is operated, it determines whether or not a bet is possible (whether or not the amount of the bet is stored in the credit, and whether or not the number of bets is the upper limit value), and if a bet is possible, it updates the number of bets or the number of credits. Then, it determines whether or not the number of bets that allows the game to be executed has been bet, and if it is determined that a bet has been made, it determines whether or not the start switch 12 has been operated, and if it is determined that no bet has been made, it waits for the insertion of a game medal, or, if the amount is stored in the credit, for the operation of the bet switch (if the amount is stored in the credit). If the bet amount that allows a game to be played has been placed and the start switch 12 has been operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on), an internal lottery process is performed, and if the start switch 12 has not been operated (the start switch signal is not determined to be on), the system waits for the start switch 12 to be operated.

In the internal lottery process, a random number for internal lottery is generated, and a predetermined calculation process is performed using the obtained internal lottery random number value to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After the winning combination is determined, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and preparations are made so that stop control can be executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after the acceptance of the stop switch operation after the reels have rotated.

The types of winning combinations available on the PS1 slot machine can be broadly divided into bonuses, small combinations, and replays.

A bonus is a device that operates under predefined circumstances. Generally, it operates when the symbol combinations "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" are displayed frozen on the winning line in the display window 4. The operation of bonus-related devices changes the number of symbol combinations related to winning per set number, and changes the probability of activating the condition device for the symbol combinations related to winning per set number. Bonuses are divided into RB, BB, CB, MB, and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called the first type of special role. RB is generally set as the end condition when 8 small roles are won or 12 game results are obtained, and during RB, roles are drawn using the RB role drawing table, which sets the probability of winning a small role higher than the normal role drawing table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called the continuous operation device for the first type special role. The end condition for BB is set to the payout of more than a specified number of game medals (for example, 269 medals) related to winning a small role, and during BB, a role is drawn using a BB middle role drawing table in which the probability of winning a small role (described later) is set higher than in the normal role drawing table. Note that a BB middle role drawing table does not need to be set during BB. For example, a table that continuously operates the RB middle role drawing table described later until the BB end condition is met may be called a BB middle role drawing table.

CB is an abbreviation for Challenge Bonus, and is also called the second type special feature. In CB, it is possible to set a state in which at least all minor roles are winning, regardless of the results of the role selection. In addition, during CB, stopping control different from normal stopping control is performed for predetermined reels. For example, it is possible to control the left reel 8a to stop within 75 milliseconds of 190 milliseconds.

The CB may be configured such that, as described above, at least all minor winning combinations are in a winning state, and therefore the symbol combination that can be displayed according to the operation procedure cannot be displayed (also called a miss). For example, during the CB, the left reel 8a may be controlled to stop within 75 milliseconds from 190 milliseconds, so that if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific symbol can be displayed on the pay line with any operation timing, but if it stops within 75 milliseconds, a specific symbol cannot be displayed with a specific operation timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operation device for the second type special role. MB is set to end when, for example, more than 153 medals are paid out for a small role win, when RB is won, or when SB, which will be described later, is won.

SB is an abbreviation for single bonus, and is also called a normal role. The end condition for SB is set to be the result of one game. During SB, the role is selected using the SB role selection table, which sets the probability of winning a small role higher than the normal role selection table.

In this embodiment, the BB is performed by using a BB medium role selection table to select roles, but this is not limited to this. During BB, the game may be played using a BB general role selection table in which the winning probability of a small role is set to the same probability as the normal role selection table and the winning probability of an RB is increased, and an RB medium role selection table in which the winning probability of a small role is set higher than that of the normal role selection table. Even in this case, the fact remains that the end condition for BB is set to a payout exceeding a predetermined number of medals related to winning a small role. Furthermore, the means that control these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means.

The minor prize is a prize in which a symbol combination based on a winning minor prize is displayed on a winning line and, when it is determined to be a winning prize by the winning prize determination process (described later), medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed on the winning prize.

A replay (also called a replay role) is a role that grants a replay (a game in which the next game can be played by an automatic bet without inserting new medals) when a symbol combination based on a winning replay is displayed frozen on an active line and the winning determination process determines that a win has been won. A replay cannot be missed in a winning game, so the next game after a winning replay is always a replay.

If the result of the lottery is that the player does not win any of the bonus, small prize, or replay prizes, it will be a loss and the winning process described below will not be carried out. If it is a loss, a symbol combination that does not relate to any prize will be displayed on the active line.

Among the roles that are drawn by the role lottery, for BB, RB, and MB, if the symbol combination is not displayed stopped on the valid line in the winning game, the winning flag can be carried over to the next game or later (special role carry-over means). While the winning flag is carried over, the role may be drawn using the role lottery table before the winning flag is carried over, or the role may be drawn using the carry-over role lottery table (also called the internal-internal lottery table or the internal-internal role lottery table) corresponding to the winning flag. When using the carry-over role lottery table, if the symbol combination based on the winning BB, RB, or MB is displayed stopped on the valid line, it is determined that the transition condition of the role lottery table is met, and a transition is made from the carry-over role lottery table to the role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

The winning probability for multiple types of roles is set in the role selection table, and multiple types of role selection tables are provided depending on the game state. For example, there is a BB role selection table used during BB, and an MB role selection table used during MB.

In the role selection table, single winning roles in which one type of symbol combination can be displayed on a valid line and multiple winning roles in which multiple symbol combinations can be displayed on one or multiple valid lines are set according to the results of the role selection.

For multiple symbol combinations set as overlapping winning roles, all symbol combinations may be set to be capable of displaying one winning role in a stop state depending on the operation mode, or some symbol combinations may be set to be unable to be displayed in a stop state. Among these overlapping winning roles, roles that correspond to some of the symbol combinations that cannot be displayed in a stop state are sometimes referred to as control roles.

The role of the control function is to be able to control the effective line to be displayed so that it is different depending on the type of control function set as the overlapping winning role, even if the same symbol combination can be displayed on the effective line as a result of multiple role selections.

The winning flag control means turns on the flag corresponding to the winning role when any role is selected as a winning role in the role selection process. Then, when the player operates all the stop switches 13 and the prize-winning process for the winning role is completed, the flag corresponding to the winning role is turned off.

Furthermore, for the above-mentioned BB, RB, and MB, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but if the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is not displayed stopped on the winning line when all stop switches 13 are operated, the flag is carried over to the next game onwards in the on state, the above-mentioned carryover role lottery table is set, and the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is displayed stopped and the winning process for the winning role is completed, and the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off.

The role selection table also includes an RT role selection table. RT is a game state in which the probability of winning a replay in the role selection is different from that of the normal role selection table, and is an abbreviation for replay time.

As a specific example of the use of RT, the losing area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a replay to increase the probability of winning a replay, or the replay area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a losing area to decrease the probability of winning a replay. Furthermore, the normal role lottery table and the replay area may be the same, but the type of replay that is won within the replay area may be different. The slot machine PS1 has multiple RT role lottery tables, each configured to transition to another RT state when a specific transition condition is met.

The transition conditions of the RT role lottery table can be listed as follows. Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to a bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, transition condition 2 is when a bonus is won, transition condition 3 is when BB, RB, or MB of the bonus ends, transition condition 4 is when a specified number of plays are consumed after a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is stopped and displayed, and transition condition 5 is when a specified number of plays are consumed after BB, RB, or MB ends. These transition conditions of the RT role lottery table can be set appropriately according to the game characteristics.

The number of entries is the number of winning entries for each lottery result set in the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means. For example, if the total number of entries is 65,536, the winning probability is calculated by dividing each number by 65,536. For example, the winning probability of a given lottery result with a number of entries of 4 is 1/16,384.

In addition, the number of replays can be changed if any of transition conditions 1 to 5 in the RT role lottery table described above is met. For example, if the replay probability for RT1 is 1/7.3, when transitioning from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability for RT2 can be changed to 1/1.5. This makes it possible to transition to a state with a high replay probability, thereby suppressing the loss of medals and adding excitement to the game.

Freezing may be performed after the start lever is operated, depending on the internal lottery results of the internal lottery means and whether or not the freeze number from the previous game or later has been stored. If freezing is performed with the start lever, reel spinning start processing may be performed at the end of freezing without performing processing to determine whether the next minimum game time has elapsed.

Next, it checks whether the minimum play time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum play time timer is 0), a new minimum play time is set, and if it is not determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum play time timer is not 0), it decrements the value of the minimum play time timer and then checks whether the minimum play time has elapsed. This minimum play time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, and it is configured so that no other process is executed as the main game progress process between the process of determining the minimum play time and the process of setting the new minimum play time. This prevents the minimum play time from being extended by other processes, making it possible to start playing as soon as possible. In other words, it is possible to prevent play from being prolonged without making the player wait.

However, this is not limited to the above, and the system may be configured to execute other processes as the main game progress process between the process of determining the minimum play time and the process of setting a new minimum play time. In this case, the other processes may be a process of clearing the RWM address, a process of storing other data in the RWM, or other commands with short processing times. These processes have extremely short processing times, so the user does not feel an extension to the minimum play time. After the new minimum play time is set, a process of preparing to start reel spinning is executed.

The reel spin start preparation process initializes the data related to reel stops saved in the previous game, sets the stop table to be used in the current game, requests the output of the start of rotation of all reels, and sets a sub-control command (reel spin start command) that indicates the start of rotation of the reels.

The stop table is set up in accordance with the symbol control number determined by the result of the role drawing by the internal drawing means, and predetermines the reel stop positions corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13.

After the reel spin preparation process is complete, processing related to the freeze effect (for example, the reel effect before the reels spin) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are moved slightly or rotated in reverse, primarily to indicate the likelihood of a winning combination.

When a freeze effect is not executed, or after a freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect has finished, a process to spin the reels (also called reel spin process, reel spin start process, or reel spin start process) is executed. There are four reel spin states: acceleration state, constant speed spin state, stop preparation state, and stopped state, and the acceleration state is set when spinning the reels. In the acceleration state, a process is executed to gradually rotate the stepping motor by timer interrupt processing.

The acceleration process executed in the accelerating state is a process executed from when the reel rotation is stopped to when the constant speed rotation process is executed. In the constant speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt process. However, if the constant speed rotation process is suddenly executed when the reel is stopped, the torque will be insufficient and there is a high possibility of stepping out. For this reason, the acceleration process is necessary to gradually rotate the reel. In the acceleration process in this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved one step after 50 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 30 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 10 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 5 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 2 timer interrupt processes, and then moved one step after one timer interrupt process. This is followed by the constant speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt process.

When constant speed rotation processing is being performed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter described above is incremented for each timer interrupt processing to detect rotation failure. Note that the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, so it is incremented for each timer interrupt processing, but if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the value of the rotation failure detection counter can be decremented for each timer interrupt processing, and it can be determined that a rotation failure has been detected when it reaches 0.

In addition, in the constant speed rotation state, the stop switch is permitted to be operated and operation of the stop switch is awaited. When the stop switch is permitted to be operated, the stop switch lamp is lit blue to notify the player that the stop switch is active (when the stop switch is not permitted to be operated, the lamp is lit red). The control of the stop switch lamp illumination may be performed by the main control means 100 or the sub control means 1000. In addition, when executing the push order navigation, the stop switch lamp illumination may be controlled by flashing the stop switch lamp, for example, to make it easier for the player to recognize which stop switch to operate.

In addition, a command indicating that the reels have started to spin is sent to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives this command, it sets a reel spin time measurement timer that measures the reel spin time and starts counting. Then, when the value of the reel spin time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes), it displays "Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) on the LCD to prompt the player to spin the reels. The reel spin time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the operation of the stop switch is accepted), and if there are any reels that are still spinning, it starts counting again. In this way, the reel spin time measurement timer continues to be updated until all the reels have stopped.

When the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, it is displayed in front of the push order navigation. This ensures visibility of the reel stop warning image even when the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, and clearly prompts the player to operate the stop switch. In addition, since there is a risk that the push order navigation may become difficult to see at this time, making it difficult to know which reel to stop, the reel stop warning image may be erased (or the reel stop warning image may be made smaller or moved) by operating a sub-switch or a switch for effects, etc., so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling the operation acceptance of the stop switch in the game progress main processing, the process of determining whether the stop switch operation is accepted (reel stop acceptance check process) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches have been operated, stop control (also called slip control) of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch transitions from a constant speed rotation state to a stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel is rotated to the desired stop position while rotating at a constant speed. Then, when the desired stop position is reached, the state transitions to a stop state, and all four-phase excitation is turned ON to apply the brakes. The slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds of the operation of the stop switch 13. In this embodiment, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, it is possible to pull in up to four symbols ahead.

The target stop position is determined by whether the currently passing pattern number matches the pattern number stored as the stop position, and if it is determined that they match, all four phase excitations are turned ON to indicate the target stop position. The currently passing pattern number is determined by the fact that the initial pattern number is set the moment the index sensor described above detects the index (when the index signal rises), and then when the timer interrupt process moves one pattern from there, the pattern number next to the initial pattern number is set.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it is checked whether all reels are stopped. If all reels are stopped, a winning determination process is executed, followed by a winning process. If all reels are not stopped, a process is executed to wait for acceptance of the stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. After all reels have stopped, the display contents of the status display monitor are updated, and the process moves to the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Then, a game end check process is executed to update the RT status, etc., and the main sequence of game progress is completed. Note that a software random number update process may be executed during the period from when the reels start spinning until the stop operation is accepted.

The winning determination process is a process that determines whether or not the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line. Since it determines whether or not the stopped symbols determined when the stop switch operation is accepted are abnormal, it is not determined based on the symbol combination that actually stopped on the winning line. After it is determined by the winning determination process that the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line, the winning process is performed, and if the winning determination process does not determine that the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line, processing based on a miss is performed.

The winning process is a process that awards a bonus to a player based on the symbol combination that stops on a winning line. The winning process when a symbol combination based on a minor win is stopped involves the payment of medals based on the stopped symbol combination and the process of changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. The winning process when a symbol combination based on a replay is stopped involves the granting of the right to replay and the process of changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. The winning process when a symbol combination based on a bonus is stopped involves the process of changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Note that in the case of a miss, the winning process is not performed.

However, it is not limited to this, and when the result of the winning judgment process is a miss, a winning process based on the miss may be performed, and a process of not giving a special prize to the player as a result of the winning process may be performed. In addition, as a winning process based on a miss, a game state may be shifted according to the operation mode at the time of the miss. For example, when all the stop switches 13 are operated according to a predetermined operation order at the time of the miss, a game state with a different probability of winning a freeze may be shifted. Even in the case of an apparent miss due to a missed small combination, a winning process such as a shift of the game state to a RT state without a payout may be performed. Furthermore, as a winning process based on a bonus, a medal may be paid out based on the symbol combination displayed in a stopped state, or a right to replay may be given.

The process of transitioning game states involves setting a role selection table according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting reel control according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be transitioned to, or a combination of these.

In the winning determination process, when a winning symbol combination is determined, winning symbol combination information (stopping number information) displayed on the active line and role selection result information are sent to the sub-control board 1000. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 1000 receives this information, it can output a performance according to the winning symbol combination information and role selection result information using the display device 32, lamp, or speaker S.

In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for all active lines, and if the result of the determination is that multiple symbol combinations based on overlapping winning roles are displayed on multiple active lines, winning processing is performed for each of the multiple symbol combinations that are displayed.

For example, when a minor win with a payout of 2 coins and a minor win with a payout of 10 coins are displayed on multiple active lines, the payout amount based on the minor win set to 2 coins and the payout amount based on the minor win set to 10 coins are added together to pay out 12 coins.

Then, an upper limit is set for the number of coins that can be paid out at one time, and when a symbol combination based on multiple minor winning symbols is displayed on an active line, if the number of coins that can be paid out exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit of coins will be paid out.

For example, if the upper limit of the payout number is set to 15 coins, and a minor win with a payout number of 12 coins and a minor win with a payout number of 10 coins are displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process will be as follows: if the combined value of the minor win set to 12 coins and the minor win set to 10 coins exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit of 15 coins will be paid out.

In this embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for minor winning combinations, but medals equal to the number of medals bet may be paid out as a winning process based on a replay, or a preset number of medals may be paid out as a winning process based on a bonus.

<Processing for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media> In the past, there were gaming machines that had a normal zone and an advantageous zone as gaming zones, and the advantageous zone ended when the MY of the advantageous zone exceeded 2400. (Prior art document: JP 2020-010896)

Here, in conventional gaming machines (prior art documents), the MY of the advantageous zone is set as the base (0) at the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed since the advantageous zone began, and the advantageous zone ends when the difference from the base exceeds "2400." Note that the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is synonymous with the point where the difference in the number of gaming media is the lowest.

As a result, conventional gaming machines (prior art documents) could only give a player a maximum profit of the difference of "2414" in one advantageous zone. Therefore, if a player spends a lot of gaming media while playing in an advantageous zone, he or she cannot get back the gaming media spent in that advantageous zone, and conventional gaming machines were not attractive to players.

For example, in conventional gaming machines, even if a game where the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone is -3000 reaches a specified game state (e.g., AT state), the game ends if the MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Therefore, at most, only about 2400 game media could be obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone was about -600 and the game ended).

Therefore, instead of ending the advantageous zone when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the advantageous zone is configured to end when the start of the advantageous zone is set as the starting point (0) and the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2400). Specifically, the total number of INs of gaming media in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of inputs or total number of bets) and the total number of OUTs of gaming media in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of payouts or total number of awards) are taken into consideration. In other words, the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference between the number of OUTs of gaming media in the advantageous zone and the number of INs of gaming media in the advantageous zone (hereinafter referred to as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone) exceeds 2400. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved playability compared to conventional machines while keeping the gambling nature within a certain range.

For example, with the gaming machine of the present invention, when a certain game state (e.g., AT state) is reached from a certain game in which the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000, the advantageous zone can be ended when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 starting from the start of the advantageous zone. Therefore, it becomes possible to obtain a maximum of approximately 5400 gaming media from a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000 (the difference in the number of gaming media in one advantageous zone becomes +2400, and the advantageous zone ends).

Note that if the system is configured to end the favorable zone when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one favorable zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the favorable zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the favorable zone) exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2,400), it is acceptable to end the favorable zone at a value less than this predetermined number. In other words, when the start of the favorable zone is taken as the starting point (0), the maximum difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one favorable zone becomes a predetermined number (more precisely, the predetermined number + α (α is the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game)).

In addition, even if the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous zone can also be ended if any end condition is met before the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds the predetermined number.

In this way, in order to end the game when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one favorable zone exceeds a predetermined value, it is necessary to be able to store the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone even if the difference in the number of gaming media is a negative value.

Below, we will use diagrams to explain the specific process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

<Processing for ending the favorable zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (addition version)> Figure 53 shows an example of processing for ending the favorable zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In FIG. 53, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the (total) difference number of game media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is not cleared by turning the power on and off. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is also cleared by clearing the RWM when the favorable zone ends. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is also cleared by turning the power on with a setting change (clearing the RWM with a setting change). Information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag area, and is not cleared when the stop state is reached.

Note that turning on the power with a setting change specifically refers to turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on. In other words, turning on the power with a setting change switches to setting change mode, and once the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met (for example, the setting key switch turning off after the start switch is turned on), and the setting change mode ends, play becomes possible.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is configured to be updated by playing in the advantageous zone.

Note that, in the following explanation, the favorable section difference counter is configured with 2 bytes, but the favorable section difference counter may be configured with 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in "favorable zone clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is not below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

The favorable zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the favorable zone.

In "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the answer is NO. Specifically, the answer is NO if the carry flag is not 1. In other words, if "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is judged as NO, it means that a value of 1 or greater is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for the current game. In other words, this means that the current game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

When asking "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?", the determination is made according to the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, a transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores information indicating a transition to an advantageous zone. Also, for example, if a transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (game in the normal zone) and the game state at the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores the game state at the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not according to information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not. If the next game will be in an advantageous zone, the result is YES, and if the next game will not be in an advantageous zone, the result is NO.

In "save favorable zone clear counter initial value", an initial value is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 4000, 4000 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Note that this initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one favorable zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 4000, but may be any predetermined value. For example, a number of games that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535) may be set.

In "Set initial value of favorable zone difference counter", the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. In other words, when the favorable zone starts (when the current game is a game in the normal zone and the next game is a game in the favorable zone), the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 63135 (65535-2400) and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 63135 is a value obtained by subtracting the value "2400" corresponding to the difference number of the gaming media in the advantageous zone at which the advantageous zone ends from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a storage area of 2 bytes (corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous zone difference number counter). In this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference number of the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to that the difference number of the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as that the difference number of the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference number of the gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, the initial value is set to 60735 (65535-4800).

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 16774815 (16777215-2400).

The effect of setting the initial value as "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be described later.

In addition, without being limited to this, the initial value of the favorable zone difference counter may be 63120 (65535-2415) when the size of the memory area for the favorable zone difference counter is 2 bytes. In this case, when the value of the favorable zone difference counter becomes 65521 or more, the end process of the favorable zone is executed.

When configured in this way, the value of the favorable zone difference counter will not exceed the upper limit when the favorable zone ends (the favorable zone ends when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400, so the maximum value of the favorable zone difference counter is 65534 since the initial value can only be incremented up to 2414, which is 2400-1 (1 coin bet) + 15 (15 coins paid out)), so it is possible to prevent the carry flag and zero flag from being raised when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 and the favorable zone ends.

For this reason, in the update process of the favorable zone difference number counter, the zero flag is set only when the value of the favorable zone difference number counter changes from 1 to 0, and the carry flag is set only when the value falls below the lower limit of the favorable zone difference number counter (when the result of subtracting the difference number of the game in question from the value of the favorable zone difference number counter is less than 0). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the lower limit of the favorable zone difference number counter has been exceeded simply by checking the carry flag, and therefore a specific value (e.g., "0", "1", etc.) can be stored in the favorable zone difference number counter when the carry flag = 1 in the update process of the favorable zone difference number counter.

This allows for more accurate decision-making using the carry flag, which can reduce program size and improve program readability.

"Before subtracting favorable zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the favorable zone clear counter was 1 before performing "favorable zone clear counter -1". For example, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the favorable zone clear counter has a value of 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before subtraction of favorable zone clear counter = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", a process is performed to store the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter in a specified register (e.g. HL register).

For "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a game based on a replay), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, if the results of the current game are: A) IN number = 3, OUT number = 0, then the answer is NO. B) If the IN number = 3, OUT number = 1, then the answer is NO. C) If the IN number = 3, OUT number = 3, then the answer is NO. D) If the IN number = 3, OUT number = 10, then the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the IN number minus the OUT number (if the carry flag is 1), the result is determined as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is determined as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is determined as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is determined as NO.

To give a specific example, as a result of this game, a) if the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 0, then the A register = 3 and the carry flag = 0. b) if the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 1, then the A register = 2 and the carry flag = 0. c) if the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 3, then the A register = 0 and the carry flag = 0. d) if the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 10, then the A register = 249 and the carry flag = 1.

Here, if the result of the previous game was that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was displayed (on an active line) and the number of bets for the current game was automatically bet (for example, "3" was set by the automatic bet), and the result of the current game was that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was not displayed (on an active line), then even if the number of bets was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the number of bets for the current game.

On the other hand, for the IN number and OUT number, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "IN number < OUT number?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the OUT number.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", we calculated the IN number - the OUT number, but we could also determine it by OUT number - IN number. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the difference in the number of game media for the current game using the IN number and the OUT number.

In "favorable section difference counter subtraction", the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?" is subtracted from the value of the favorable section difference counter stored in a specified register (for example, the HL register). If a carry flag occurs due to "favorable section difference counter subtraction", the carry flag becomes 1. For example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter (HL register value) is 2, a) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, the HL register = 65535 and the carry flag = 1. Note that 2 - 3 = -1, but negative values cannot be stored in registers. Therefore, a carry flag occurs and the value becomes 65535. b) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 1, the HL register = 0 and the carry flag = 0. c) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 3, the HL register = 2 and the carry flag = 0.

When "favorable section difference number counter < 0", "favorable section difference number counter subtraction" is used to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, a YES judgment is made, and if a carry has not occurred, a NO judgment is made. In the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0 judgment is made as YES. Also, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, b) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 1 judgment is made as NO. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, c) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 3 judgment is made as NO.

Note that if "favourable section difference counter < 0" returns YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Setting the lower limit of the favorable section difference counter", if a carryover occurs due to "Subtracting the favorable section difference counter", a predetermined lower limit (0) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 2, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, then "Subtracting the favorable section difference counter" causes the HL register to = 65535. In such a case, "Setting the lower limit of the favorable section difference counter" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, the lower limit value of 0 is stored in the HL register, making it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Set advantageous zone difference counter lower limit value" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set advantageous zone difference counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 53 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that, although FIG. 53 includes the process of "Set lower limit value of favorable section difference counter", the process of "Set lower limit value of favorable section difference counter" may not be included. Specifically, when "Favorable section difference counter < 0" is judged as YES, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 2, and the IN number and OUT number of the game are a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the value of the favorable section difference counter of the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with digits dropped) from being stored in the "favorable section difference counter". In addition, since the process corresponding to "Set lower limit value of favorable section difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a downgrade occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction," the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the downgrade, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered into the advantageous zone difference number counter value. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Favourable Zone Difference Counter Addition", the complement of the result of the calculation "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then added to the HL register.

Note that the complement in "advantageous section difference counter addition" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or a single instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (HL register value) is 2, if D) the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register will be 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 2+7 is calculated, and 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2+7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), so the carry flag becomes 0.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65530, if E) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 10, then the A register = 249, but the "favorable section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 65530 + 7, 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since it exceeds 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

In "save favorable zone difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone difference counter. In other words, it is a process that updates the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if 63135 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 63135 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activation" is YES, the value of the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save favorable zone difference counter" stores the same value as the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if "Is favorable zone difference counter < 0?" returns NO, the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "save favorable zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable section difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit (0) is stored in the HL register, so the lower limit (0) is stored in the favorable section difference counter by "save favorable section difference counter."

For example, after "adding favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by adding the difference number of the media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) to the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by adding the difference number of the game media for the current game to the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the favorable zone difference number counter.

In "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?", it is determined whether the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it is determined as YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it is determined as NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition". On the other hand, if a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag becomes 1 once, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", it is possible to determine whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is directly compared to a constant (2400).

In this way, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", whether the carry flag is 1 determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 63135 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area of the favorable zone difference number counter). In other words, when the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it exceeds 65535, so the carry flag becomes 1. In other words, "Favorable zone difference number > 2400?" is a process of determining whether the value of the favorable zone difference number counter exceeds 65535.

Also, as mentioned above, if the initial value of the favorable zone difference counter is set to "63120", "favorable zone difference number > 2400?" is a process to determine whether the value of the favorable zone difference counter exceeds 65520 (whether it is 65521 or more).

Furthermore, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 63135, a situation in which the value of the favorable zone difference counter is 13135 means that, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0), the difference is -50000.

As described above, by storing 63135 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone", it is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400. Also, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -63135 as the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. Note that although an example is given of storing 63135 as the initial value, values other than 63135 can be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

In "RWM Initialization", all parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function are updated to 0, and the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated. Parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. Then, by updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be a game in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. In the game in the advantageous zone, if "RWM Initialization" is not executed, the next game will be a game in the advantageous zone (the advantageous zone does not end).

In other words, if an abnormal value is stored in the HL register due to a carryover, it is possible to calculate the difference number of the favorable zone as accurately as possible by storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register. Note that even if "Set favorable zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the favorable zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the favorable zone. In other words, even in play after "Set favorable zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 53 is executed as long as the favorable zone continues.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. If configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number, when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO (when a borrow occurs in the A register), in "favorable section difference number counter subtraction", the complement is calculated by a predetermined calculation and stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming media of the current game), and then the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming media of the current game) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter). In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" is NO, it is sufficient to be configured to subtract the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media of the current game from the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter.

Similarly, if the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is configured, then when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES (when no carryover occurs in the A register), the "advantageous section difference number counter addition" simply adds the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming media in the current game) to the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is NO, then the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game should be added to the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

<Processing for ending the favorable zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (subtraction version)> Figure 54 is a diagram showing an example of processing for ending the favorable zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In FIG. 54, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is not cleared by turning the power on and off. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is also cleared by clearing the RWM when the favorable zone ends. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is also cleared by turning the power on with a setting change (clearing the RWM with a setting change). Information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag area, and is not cleared when the stop state is reached.

Note that, in the following explanation, the favorable section difference counter is configured with 2 bytes, but the favorable section difference counter may be configured with 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in "favorable zone clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is not below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

The favorable zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the favorable zone.

In "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the answer is NO. Specifically, the answer is NO if the carry flag is not 1. In other words, if "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is judged as NO, it means that a value of 1 or greater is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for the current game. In other words, this means that the current game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

When asking "Is the next game in an advantageous zone?", the determination is made according to the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, a transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores information indicating a transition to an advantageous zone. Also, for example, if a transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (game in the normal zone) and the game state at the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area that stores the game state at the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not according to information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not. If the next game will be in an advantageous zone, the result is YES, and if the next game will not be in an advantageous zone, the result is NO.

In "saving the initial value of the favorable zone clear counter", an initial value is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 4000, 4000 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Note that this initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one favorable zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 4000, and may be any predetermined value. For example, a number of games that cannot be completed in one day (for example, 65535) may be set.

In "Set initial value of favorable zone difference counter", the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. In other words, when the favorable zone starts (when the current game is a game in the normal zone and the next game is a game in the favorable zone), the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 2400 and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 2400 is the value "2400" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone. Note that in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, the initial value is set to 4800.

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 2400.

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone, which is determined as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be described later.

In addition, the initial value of the favorable zone difference counter may be 2415 when the size of the memory area of the favorable zone difference counter is 2 bytes. In this case, the end process of the favorable zone will be executed when the value of the favorable zone difference counter becomes less than 15.

When configured in this way, the value of the favorable zone difference counter will not exceed the lower limit when the favorable zone ends (the favorable zone ends when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400, so the minimum value of the favorable zone difference counter is 1 since the initial value can only be subtracted up to a maximum of 2414, which is 2400-1 (1 coin bet) + 15 (15 coins paid out)), making it possible to prevent the carry flag and zero flag from being raised when the difference in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 and the favorable zone ends.

For this reason, in the update process of the favorable zone difference number counter, the zero flag is set only when the value of the favorable zone difference number counter changes from 65535 to 0, and the carry flag is set only when the upper limit of the favorable zone difference number counter is exceeded (when the result of adding the difference number of the game to the value of the favorable zone difference number counter exceeds 65535). Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the upper limit of the favorable zone difference number counter has been exceeded simply by checking the carry flag, and therefore a specific value (for example, "65535", "65534", etc.) can be stored in the favorable zone difference number counter when the carry flag = 1 in the update process of the favorable zone difference number counter.

This allows for more accurate decision-making using the carry flag, which can reduce program size and improve program readability.

"Before subtracting favorable zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the favorable zone clear counter was 1 before performing "favorable zone clear counter -1". For example, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the favorable zone clear counter has a value of 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before subtraction of favorable zone clear counter = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", a process is performed to store the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter in a specified register (e.g. HL register).

For "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a game based on a replay), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, if the results of the current game are: A) IN number = 3, OUT number = 0, then the answer is NO. B) If the IN number = 3, OUT number = 1, then the answer is NO. C) If the IN number = 3, OUT number = 3, then the answer is NO. D) If the IN number = 3, OUT number = 10, then the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the IN number minus the OUT number (if the carry flag is 1), the result is determined as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is determined as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is determined as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is determined as NO.

To give a specific example, as a result of this game, a) if the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 0, then the A register = 3 and the carry flag = 0. b) if the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 1, then the A register = 2 and the carry flag = 0. c) if the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 3, then the A register = 0 and the carry flag = 0. d) if the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 10, then the A register = 249 and the carry flag = 1.

Here, if the result of the previous game was that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was displayed (on an active line) and the number of bets for the current game was automatically bet (for example, "3" was set by the automatic bet), and the result of the current game was that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was not displayed (on an active line), then even if the number of bets was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the number of bets for the current game.

On the other hand, for the IN number and OUT number, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "IN number < OUT number?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the OUT number.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", we calculated the IN number - the OUT number, but we could also determine it by OUT number - IN number. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the difference in the number of game media for the current game using the IN number and the OUT number.

In "favorable zone difference counter addition", the value of the favorable zone difference counter stored in a specified register (for example, the HL register) is added to the value of the favorable zone difference counter stored in the specified register (for example, the HL register) by the calculation result of "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number). If a carry occurs as a result of "favorable zone difference counter addition", the carry flag becomes 1. For example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter (HL register value) is 65534, a) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, the HL register = 1 and the carry flag = 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. As a result, a carry occurs and becomes 1. b) if the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 1, the HL register = 0 and the carry flag = 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 0. c) If the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 3, the HL register = 65534 and the carry flag = 0.

In "Favourable section difference number counter > upper limit value?", "Favourable section difference number counter addition" determines whether a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, it is judged as YES, and if a carry has not occurred, it is judged as NO. In the above example, when the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as YES if a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0. Also in the above example, when the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as YES if b) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 1. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as NO if c) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 3.

Note that if "Advantageous section difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Set favorable zone difference counter upper limit value", if a carry occurs due to "Add favorable zone difference counter", a predetermined upper limit value (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (HL register in this embodiment). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 65534, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, then "Subtract favorable zone difference counter" causes the HL register to = 1. In such a case, "Set favorable zone difference counter upper limit value" stores 65535 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, it is possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible by storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register. Note that even if "Set advantageous zone difference number counter upper limit value" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set advantageous zone difference number counter upper limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 54 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

In FIG. 54, the process of "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter" is provided, but the process of "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter" may not be provided. Specifically, when "Favorable section difference counter>Upper limit value" is determined as YES, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 65534, and the number of INs and the number of OUTs of the game are a) IN number=3 and OUT number=0, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter may be set to 65534 (the same value as the value of the favorable section difference counter of the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with digits dropped) from being stored in the "favorable section difference counter". In addition, since the process corresponding to "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the carry, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

Furthermore, although 65,535 (the maximum value that can be stored in the favorable zone difference number counter) has been described as an example of the upper limit value, this is not limited to this. For example, it may be a value such as 12,400, which is a numerical value less than the maximum value that can be stored in the favorable zone difference number counter. If 12,400 is adopted as the upper limit value, the favorable zone difference number counter can store a value up to the equivalent of -10,000 as the difference number of gaming media in the favorable zone.

In "Favourable Zone Difference Counter Subtraction", the complement of the result of the calculation "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is subtracted from the HL register.

Note that the complement in "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived by subtracting the value of the 0-A register, or by a single instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2, if E) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 10, then the A register = 249, but "favorable section difference counter subtraction" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 2-7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2-7 is less than 0 (because there is a carry), the carry flag becomes 1.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter (value of the HL register) is 10, if E) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 10, then the A register = 249, but the "favorable section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 10-7, 3 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 10-7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag becomes 0.

In "save favorable zone difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone difference counter. In other words, it is a process that updates the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if 2400 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 2400 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activation" is YES, the value of the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save favorable zone difference counter" stores the same value as the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter > upper limit?" is NO, the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) to the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "save favorable zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game to the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so the upper limit (65535) is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, after "subtracting favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by subtracting the difference number of gaming media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) from the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by subtracting the difference number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the favorable zone difference number counter.

In "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?", it is determined whether the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it is determined as YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it is determined as NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when a carry has been made due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction." On the other hand, if a carry has been made due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so that "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", it is possible to determine whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is directly compared to a constant (2400).

In this way, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", whether the carry flag is 1 determines whether the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 2400 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 2400 is a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will become 1. In other words, "Favorable zone difference number > 2400?" is a process of determining whether the value of the favorable zone difference number counter is less than 0.

Also, as mentioned above, if the initial value of the favorable zone difference counter is set to "2415", "favorable zone difference number > 2400?" is a process to determine whether the value of the favorable zone difference counter is less than 15.

Furthermore, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 2400, a situation in which the value of the favorable zone difference counter is 30,000 means that with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0), the difference is -27,600.

As described above, by storing 2400 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that is set as the end condition of the advantageous zone," it is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400. In addition, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -63135 as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. Note that although an example is given of storing 2400 as the initial value, a value other than 2400 (for example, 2401) can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

In "RWM Initialization", all parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function are updated to 0, and the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated. Parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. Then, by updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be a game in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. In the game in the advantageous zone, if "RWM Initialization" is not executed, the next game will be a game in the advantageous zone (the advantageous zone does not end).

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. If configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number, when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO (when a down-carry occurs in the A register), in "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the complement is calculated by a predetermined calculation and stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game), and then the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter) is added to the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game). In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES, the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game is added to the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

Similarly, if the configuration is such that the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES (when no carryover occurs in the A register), then in the "favorable section difference number counter subtraction", it is sufficient to subtract the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming media in the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter) without calculating the complement in the "favorable section difference number counter subtraction". In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is NO, it is sufficient to be configured to subtract the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game from the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter.

As described above, specific processing for ending the advantageous period with the difference in the number of gaming media has been explained using Figures 53 and 54, but the present invention is not limited to these. In other words, it is sufficient if the advantageous period can end with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In addition, in Figures 53 and 54, one of the conditions for ending the advantageous zone is that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone does not have to be that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number. In that case, it is not necessary to have the advantageous zone clear counter in Figures 53 and 54.

If a favorable zone clearing counter is not provided, the process corresponding to "favorable zone clearing counter -1" in Figures 53 and 54, the process corresponding to "before decrementing favorable zone clearing counter = 0?", and the process corresponding to "save favorable zone clearing counter initial value" may not be provided.

<Regarding the relationship between the initialization process accompanying the operation of the setting change device and the favorable zone difference counter> In the favorable zone difference counter described above, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is configured to be cleared by RWM clearing upon the end of the favorable zone or by powering on with a setting change (RWM clearing upon setting change), but it may be configured to be cleared only by RWM clearing upon the end of the favorable zone (and not by powering on with a setting change). Note that setting changes include not only changing to a different setting value (e.g., changing from setting value 1 to setting value 6), but also changing to the same setting value (e.g., changing from setting value 1 to setting value 1).

When configured in this way, if the power is turned on with a setting change while in an advantageous zone and a predetermined value is stored in the advantageous zone difference counter, play will start in the normal zone. After that, in order to prevent the advantageous zone difference counter from being updated in the normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter when moving to the advantageous zone will be the predetermined value before the setting change.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that limits gambling to a certain range while improving playability compared to when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM, which involves turning on the power and changing the settings.

For example, if a gaming establishment closes and play ends when the difference in the number of gaming media in a specified advantageous zone is -3000, even if the settings are changed the next day, play can be resumed in the advantageous zone after the setting change when the difference in the number of gaming media is -3000. Therefore, starting from the start of the advantageous zone after the setting change, it becomes possible to obtain a maximum of approximately 5400 gaming media in one advantageous zone.

In addition, by clearing the value of the advantageous zone difference counter at the gaming facility, it is possible to prevent the user from suffering significant losses when the performance related to the instruction function changes based on the advantageous zone difference counter.

For example, if the performance related to the instruction function is improved when the value of the favorable zone difference counter is below the initial value, and the probability of winning the AT or the rate of granting bonuses such as an AT extension is higher than when the value of the favorable zone difference counter is above the initial value, even if business ends with the value of the favorable zone difference counter being below the initial value and the settings are changed afterwards, the value of the favorable zone difference counter will not be cleared even when business begins the next day, so play can begin in a situation where the performance related to the instruction function has been improved.

The following explains the relationship between the initialization process that accompanies the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous zone difference counter.

<<Case 1>> When the initialization process due to a setting change does not initialize the favorable zone difference counter, but does initialize the favorable zone type.

When the game is in an advantageous zone (advantageous zone type = 1) and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value (predetermined value ≠ 0), the power is turned off, the setting change key is turned ON when no power is being supplied, and when the power is turned on, the setting change device is activated and an initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device is executed. In this initialization process, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized, but the advantageous zone is initialized (advantageous zone type = 0). In other words, when the initialization process is executed and the operation of the setting change device is then terminated, the game state is the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is the predetermined value.

Then, the first game after the operation of the setting change device is finished will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number (e.g., 3) is bet at the start of the first game, and the favorable zone transition process determines not to transition to the favorable zone for the next game, and no payout is made as a result of the first game, the next game will also be played in the normal zone, and the value of the favorable zone difference counter will be the predetermined value (the value of the favorable zone difference counter is not updated).

In addition, the first game after the setting change device is activated will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of the first game, and the favorable zone transition process determines not to transition to the favorable zone for the next game, and a specific number (e.g., 10) is paid out as a result of the first game, the next game will be played in the normal zone, and the value of the favorable zone difference counter will be the predetermined value.

Furthermore, the first game after the operation of the setting change device is finished will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of the first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous zone, and if no payout is made as a result of the first game, the next game will be played in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be a predetermined value.

Furthermore, the first game after the operation of the setting change device is finished will be played in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of the first game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous zone, and if a specific number of payouts is made as a result of the first game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be a predetermined value.

In other words, the process of updating the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not executed during play in the normal zone.

Then, in the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of a game when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the game is in an advantageous zone, a predetermined number of bets have been placed at the start of the game, and no payout has been made as a result of the game, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (value of the advantageous zone difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

In addition, in the advantageous zone difference counter value being a predetermined value, the game being played in an advantageous zone, a predetermined number of bets being placed at the start of the game, and a specific number of payouts being made as a result of the game, the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of the game allows the value of the advantageous zone difference counter to be updated (advantageous zone difference counter value = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In other words, when playing after a transition to a favorable zone, the process of updating the value of the favorable zone difference counter is executed.

In case 1, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, it is an advantageous zone, and the main gaming state is AT, when the initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be a predetermined value, it will be a normal zone, and the main gaming state will be a state corresponding to the normal zone (a state that is not AT) as the initialization state. Note that the RT state may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or may be maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by changing the settings can be determined in the specifications of each gaming machine.

With this configuration, even if the gaming establishment closes for the day during the AT and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be initialized, preventing the user from being given a significant advantage when the establishment opens.

In addition, in case 1, in order to initialize the value of the favorable zone difference counter, initialization processing is performed due to an RWM abnormality, and initialization processing is performed by favorable zone clear counter management processing at the end of the favorable zone. Initialization processing due to an RWM abnormality refers to initialization processing that is executed when an irreversible error occurs and the setting change device is then activated. Note that the initialization range is different between the initialization processing associated with the operation of the setting change device when an irreversible error occurs and the initialization processing associated with the operation of the setting change device when no irreversible error occurs. Initialization processing by favorable zone clear counter management processing refers to initialization processing when the value of the favorable zone difference counter reaches the upper limit value (so-called ending) or initialization processing when any favorable zone end condition is met.

Incidentally, if the initialization conditions for the value of the favorable zone difference counter in case 1 are limited to the initialization process due to an RWM abnormality and the initialization process due to the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone, it will not be possible to initialize the value of the favorable zone difference counter under any other condition. For example, since the value of the favorable zone difference counter cannot be initialized arbitrarily in a situation where the value of the favorable zone difference counter is below the initial value (a situation where the user's difference number is negative), it is possible to prevent the possibility of the user suffering significant losses.

In addition, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the favorable zone difference counter, the favorable zone difference counter may be initialized by operating the favorable zone difference counter clear switch.

In this case, the operation of the favorable zone difference counter clear switch includes turning on the power while pressing the favorable zone difference counter clear switch when the power is off, pressing the favorable zone difference counter clear switch once or pressing and holding it when the power source is shared, etc. The initialization scope of the initialization process based on the favorable zone difference counter clear switch may be either the favorable zone difference counter only, or the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type.

If the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be initialized under any other conditions, even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous zone difference counter, the gaming facility can easily resolve the malfunction.

In addition, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch can be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

In addition, when the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch is pressed during play, the operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

In addition, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is specified as turning on the power while pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch in a power-off state, there is a possibility that the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be pressed and the setting key switch may be ON in a power-off state.

In this case, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is started, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is not started, the advantageous zone difference counter is initialized and the advantageous zone type is not initialized, if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous zone difference counter is initialized and the advantageous zone type is not initialized, if the setting change mode is not started, the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous zone type is initialized, if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous zone type is initialized, and if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous zone type is initialized, and the setting change mode is not started.

In addition, in case 1, since the gaming establishment will not be able to grasp the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be indicated by a lamp or the like in a location that is not normally visible to the user (for example, behind the front door or inside the cabinet).

For example, when the red LED is off, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is equal to or greater than the initial value; when the red LED flashes at 5-second intervals, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is less than the initial value and greater than or equal to -5000; when the red LED flashes at 3-second intervals, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is less than the initial value -5000 and greater than or equal to -30000; and when the red LED is on, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is the lower limit (or the upper limit if the favorable zone difference counter is a system that adds the bet amount).

For example, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be displayed on a five-digit display (e.g., a display with five seven-segment displays arranged side by side).

In addition, as a method for allowing the gaming establishment to know the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, or the number of coins inserted (number of bets) and the number of coins paid out per game in the advantageous zone may be output to an external terminal so that they can be checked on the hall computer.

In addition, in case 1, since the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can easily become the lower limit, in order to determine whether the lower limit was reached by a normal route or due to fraudulent activity, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game are stored for each game, and when the difference between the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is found to be within a certain value (for example, 14), it is determined to be normal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is saved as the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game. When the difference between the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is found to be outside the certain value (for example, 14), it is determined to be abnormal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated, and the game is stopped by error processing, or the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated but an error command is sent to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means issues an error notification.

With this configuration, even if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is fraudulently set to the lower limit, the gaming facility can be notified.

In addition, in case 1, the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated during the normal zone, but the advantageous zone difference counter may be updated during the normal zone. In such a case, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is made updateable even during the normal zone, and the subtraction of the bet number and the addition of the payout number are performed on the value of the advantageous zone difference counter according to the progress of the game in the normal zone. In addition, in this modified example, it may happen that the upper limit value of the advantageous zone difference counter is reached during the normal zone. When the upper limit value of the advantageous zone difference counter is reached during the normal zone, the initialization process may be executed to initialize the advantageous zone difference counter and the advantageous zone type, or the advantageous zone difference counter may be initialized but the advantageous zone type may not be initialized (because the advantageous zone type is the initial value during the normal zone). In other words, the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit value of the advantageous zone difference counter during the advantageous zone is reached and the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit value of the advantageous zone difference counter during the normal zone is reached may be the same process or different processes.

<<Case 2>> When neither the favorable zone difference counter nor the favorable zone type are initialized during the initialization process due to a setting change.

When the game is in an advantageous zone (advantageous zone type = 1) and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value (predetermined value ≠ 0), the power is turned off, the setting change key is turned ON when no power is being supplied, and when the power is turned on, the setting change device is activated and an initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device is executed. In this initialization process, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter and the advantageous zone type are not initialized (advantageous zone type = 1 remains). In other words, when the initialization process is executed and the operation of the setting change device is then terminated, the game state is in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is the predetermined value.

The first game after the setting change device is activated will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a predetermined number (e.g., 3) is bet at the start of the first game, and no payout is made as a result of the first game, and the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines not to transition to the normal zone for the next game, then the next game will also be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value - 3).

In addition, the first game after the setting change device has finished operating will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, and a specific number (for example, 10) is paid out as a result of that first game, and even if the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines not to transition to the normal zone for the next game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

Furthermore, the first game after the operation of the setting change device is finished will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a specified number of bets are placed at the start of the first game, and no payout is made as a result of the first game, and the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines that the next game will be played in the normal zone (initialization process is executed in the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process), the next game will be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value.

Furthermore, the first game after the operation of the setting change device is finished will be played in the advantageous zone, and if a specified number of bets is placed at the start of the first game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of the first game, and if the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process determines that the next game will be played in the normal zone (initialization process is executed in the advantageous zone clear counter supervision process), the next game will be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value.

In other words, even after the initialization process when a setting change is performed in a favorable zone, the zone is still favorable, and the process of updating the value of the favorable zone difference counter is executed.

If the setting change device is activated and the initialization process is executed in a normal zone situation, the first game after the operation of the setting change device ends will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and no payout is made as a result of that first game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be set to its initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated).

In addition, if the setting change device is activated and the initialization process is executed in a normal zone situation, the first game after the operation of the setting change device ends will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that first game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter will be the initial value (the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated).

In addition, if the setting change device is operated and the initialization process is executed in a normal zone situation, the first game after the operation of the setting change device ends will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of that first game, and the favorable zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the favorable zone, and no payout is made as a result of that first game, the next game will be in the favorable zone, and the value of the favorable zone difference counter will be set to its initial value (the value of the favorable zone difference counter is not updated).

In addition, if the setting change device is activated and the initialization process is executed in a normal zone situation, the first game after the operation of the setting change device ends will be a game in the normal zone, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of that first game, and the favorable zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the favorable zone, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that first game, the next game will be in the favorable zone, and the value of the favorable zone difference counter will be set to its initial value (the value of the favorable zone difference counter is not updated).

In other words, if the setting change device is activated and the initialization process is performed during the normal section, play will begin from the normal section.

In case 2, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, it is an advantageous zone, and the main gaming state is AT, when the initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the state after initialization is that the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, it is an advantageous zone, and the main gaming state is another gaming state different from AT. For example, the other gaming state may be a gaming state with a high stay rate by design (for example, a normal advantageous zone state). Note that the RT state may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by changing the settings can be determined by the specifications of each gaming machine.

In addition, when the main game state before the setting change was during AT, the main game state after the setting change may be a predefined main game state (for example, a normal advantageous zone state).

In addition, even if the main game state before the setting change was a game state different from the AT, the main game state after the setting change may be a predefined main game state.

With this configuration, even if the gaming establishment closes for the day during the AT and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be initialized, preventing the user from being given a significant advantage when the establishment opens.

In addition, in case 2, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone is in a favorable zone, and the main gaming state is in AT, when an initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the state after initialization may be such that the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone is in a favorable zone, and the main gaming state is in AT.

This configuration eliminates the need to change the main game state during the initialization process associated with the operation of the setting change device, which reduces program capacity and improves program readability.

In addition, in order to allow gaming establishments to initialize the main gaming state, a separate main gaming state initialization switch may be provided to enable initialization of the main gaming state. Examples of the main gaming state initialization switch include turning on the power while pressing the advantageous zone difference number counter clear switch in a power-off situation, or pressing the advantageous zone difference number counter clear switch once or holding it down in a situation where the power source is shared. Initialization of the main gaming state may be the main gaming state selected immediately after transitioning to the normal zone or advantageous zone, or a pre-determined gaming state.

In addition, in case 2, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is initialized by an initialization process due to an RWM abnormality, and by an initialization process by favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone. The initialization process by the favorable zone clear counter management process refers to the initialization process when the value of the favorable zone difference counter reaches the upper limit value (so-called ending), or the initialization process when any favorable zone end condition is met.

Incidentally, if the initialization conditions for the value of the favorable zone difference counter in case 2 are limited to the initialization process due to an RWM abnormality and the initialization process due to the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone, it will not be possible to initialize the value of the favorable zone difference counter under any other condition. For example, since the value of the favorable zone difference counter cannot be initialized arbitrarily in a situation where the value of the favorable zone difference counter is below the initial value (a situation where the user's difference number is negative), it is possible to prevent the possibility of the user suffering significant losses.

In addition, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the favorable zone difference counter, the favorable zone difference counter may be initialized by operating the favorable zone difference counter clear switch.

In this case, the operation of the favorable zone difference counter clear switch includes turning on the power while pressing the favorable zone difference counter clear switch when the power is off, pressing the favorable zone difference counter clear switch once or pressing and holding it when the power source is shared, etc. The initialization scope of the initialization process based on the favorable zone difference counter clear switch may be either the favorable zone difference counter only, or the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type.

If the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be initialized under any other conditions, even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous zone difference counter, the gaming facility can easily resolve the malfunction.

In addition, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch can be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

In addition, when the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch is pressed during play, the operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

In addition, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is specified as turning on the power while pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch in a power-off state, there is a possibility that the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be pressed and the setting key switch may be ON in a power-off state.

In this case, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is started, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is not started, the advantageous zone difference counter is initialized and the advantageous zone type is not initialized, if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous zone difference counter is initialized and the advantageous zone type is not initialized, if the setting change mode is not started, the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous zone type is initialized, if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous zone type is initialized, and if the setting change mode is started, the advantageous zone difference counter is not initialized and the advantageous zone type is initialized, and the setting change mode is not started.

In addition, in case 2, since the gaming establishment will not be able to grasp the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be indicated by a lamp or the like in a location that is not normally visible to the user (for example, behind the front door or inside the cabinet).

For example, when the red LED is off, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is greater than or equal to the initial value; when the red LED flashes at 5 second intervals, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is less than the initial value and greater than or equal to -5000; when the red LED flashes at 3 second intervals, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is less than -5000 and greater than or equal to -30000; and when the red LED is lit, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is the lower limit value (the upper limit value if the advantageous zone difference counter is a type that adds the bet amount).

For example, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter may be displayed on a five-digit display (e.g., a display with five seven-segment displays arranged side by side).

In addition, as a method for allowing the gaming establishment to know the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter, or the number of coins inserted (number of bets) and the number of coins paid out per game in the advantageous zone may be output to an external terminal so that they can be checked on the hall computer.

In addition, in case 2, since the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can easily become the lower limit, in order to determine whether the lower limit was reached through a normal route or due to fraudulent activity, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game are stored for each game, and when the difference between the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is found to be within a certain value (for example, 14), it is determined to be normal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is saved as the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game. When the difference between the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the previous game and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the current game is found to be outside the certain value (for example, 14), it is determined to be abnormal and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is not updated, and the game is stopped by error processing, or the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is updated but an error command is sent to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means issues an error notification.

With this configuration, even if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is fraudulently set to the lower limit, the gaming facility can be notified.

In addition, in case 2, even if the initialization process is executed due to a setting change, the type of advantageous zone does not change, so even if the setting is changed while the zone is advantageous, the game immediately after the setting change will be played in the advantageous zone, and the process related to the instruction function can be executed based on the internal lottery results by the internal lottery means.

This allows the processing related to the instruction function to be executed from the game immediately after the setting change, minimizing the number of games in which the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed (games in the normal area), improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in case 2, the favorable zone difference counter is not updated during the normal zone, but as a variation of case 2, the favorable zone difference counter may be updated during the normal zone.

In such cases, the advantageous zone clear counter management process can be updated even during normal zones, and the number of bets is subtracted and the number of payouts is added to the value of the advantageous zone difference counter according to the progress of play in the normal zone.

Specifically, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and if no payout is made as a result of that game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to the advantageous zone, and no payout is made as a result of that game, the next game will be in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the next game will transition to an advantageous zone, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that game, the next game will be in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated (predetermined value + 10 - 3).

With this configuration, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated regardless of whether it is in a normal zone or an advantageous zone, improving playability in the normal zone. Also, since the advantageous zone difference counter update process can be realized in a common module without determining the play zone, it is possible to compress the program capacity and improve the readability of the program.

In addition, in a modified version of Case 2, the initialization conditions for the favorable zone difference counter may include the initialization process due to an RWM abnormality, the initialization process due to the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone, and the transition to the favorable zone.

The initialization process when transitioning to a favorable zone is a process that can be executed when it is decided to transition to a favorable zone for the next game during the favorable zone transition process in the normal zone, and is executed before the start of the next game.

This allows the value of the favorable zone difference counter to be initialized when transitioning to the favorable zone even if the value of the favorable zone difference counter exceeds the initial value during the normal zone, thereby preventing the favorable zone from ending when the user wins less than 2,400 coins if the AT is won immediately after the favorable zone begins. Note that the initialization process when transitioning to the favorable zone does not necessarily have to be executed when transitioning to the favorable zone, and the initialization process may be executed to set the value of the favorable zone difference counter to the initial value only if the value of the favorable zone difference counter when transitioning to the favorable zone exceeds the initial value.

In addition, whether or not to execute the initialization process for any end condition (favorable zone end condition other than reaching the favorable zone difference counter upper limit value) among the initialization processes by the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone may be determined according to the situation of the favorable zone.

For example, if an advantageous zone is terminated by satisfying an arbitrary termination condition in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is greater than the initial value, an initialization process is executed when the advantageous zone ends, and if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or less than the initial value, an initialization process is not executed when the advantageous zone ends.

In this case, it is advantageous for the user when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or less than the initial value, so even if the user is unable to obtain any winning balls in the advantageous zone, the winning balls can be retrieved at the next opportunity, so interest in the game can be prevented from declining when the advantageous zone ends.

For example, if an advantageous zone is terminated by satisfying an arbitrary termination condition in the advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is greater than the initial value, the initialization process is not executed when the advantageous zone ends, and if the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is equal to or less than the initial value, the initialization process is executed when the advantageous zone ends.

In this case, the possibility of winning more balls than expected can be reduced for the gaming establishment, enabling stable operation of the establishment.

Note that in a modified version of Case 2, it is possible that the upper limit of the favorable zone difference counter may be reached during the normal zone. If the upper limit of the favorable zone difference counter is reached during the normal zone, the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type may be initialized by executing an initialization process, or the favorable zone difference counter may be initialized but the favorable zone type may not be initialized (because the favorable zone type is the initial value during the normal zone). In other words, the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the favorable zone difference counter during the favorable zone is reached and the initialization process (initialization range) when the upper limit of the favorable zone difference counter during the normal zone is reached may be the same process or may be different processes.

The modified version of Case 2 can be combined with other configurations in Case 2 without any problems, and is a modification to a configuration in which the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated in the normal zone of Case 2. It goes without saying that for the changes, a configuration based on the modified version of Case 2 can be adopted, and for other common points (for example, the configuration of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch, etc.), the configuration of Case 2 can be adopted.

<<Common to Cases 1 and 2>> We will explain the common configurations related to the above-mentioned cases 1 and 2 (including modified examples).

The favorable zone clear counter management process is designed to be executed at the end of play (processing after all reels have stopped). For this reason, in a play zone in which the favorable zone difference counter can be updated, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, power-off processing is executed during the period (so-called "during play") from the start of play (start switch ON) to the end of play (when all reels stop and before the favorable zone clear counter management process is executed), and then when the power supply is stopped and the setting key is turned ON, the power supply is resumed, and initialization processing is executed by operating the setting change device, the number of bets is initialized, the number of credits is initialized, the reels do not spin and return to the state before the bet was made, and the value of the favorable zone difference counter is the predetermined value.

In other words, the timing for subtracting a predetermined number, which is the number of bets, from the advantageous zone difference counter is the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the end of a game, so if an initialization process is executed due to a setting change during a game, the number of bets used in that game is not updated.

This means that gaming establishments will be unable to repeatedly place bets and change settings to intentionally set the value of the advantageous zone difference counter below its initial value, preventing excessive gambling.

It is also possible to execute the advantageous zone clear counter management process at the start of a game. In this case, the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed at the start of a game (start switch ON) and at the end of a game (processing after all reels have stopped). For this reason, in a game zone in which the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, the power-off process is executed during the period from the start of a game (start switch ON) to the end of a game (when all reels stop and before the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed) (so-called "during a game"). If the power supply is then stopped and the setting key is turned ON, the power supply is resumed, and the initialization process is executed by operating the setting change device, the number of bets is initialized, the number of credits is initialized, the reels do not spin and return to the state before the bet was made, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is the predetermined value minus 3.

This allows the number of medals actually used to be subtracted from the value of the advantageous zone difference counter even if the settings are changed during play, enabling accurate updating of the advantageous zone difference counter.

In addition, when the advantageous zone clear counter management process is executed at the end of a game, it is executed after the payout of medals is completed. For this reason, in a game zone where the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, and the number of bets is a predetermined number, a small winning symbol combination that pays out a specific number when all reels are stopped is displayed as stopped, and the power-off process is executed in the middle of paying out a specific number of medals (including the middle of adding the payout number to the credits), and then, in a situation where the power supply is stopped, the setting key is turned ON and the power supply is resumed, and the initialization process is executed by the operation of the setting change device, the number of bets is initialized, the number of credits is initialized, the reels do not spin and return to the state before the bet, the payout of medals is not resumed, and the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value.

As a result, even if an initialization process is performed by changing settings while medals are being paid out, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter for the amount already paid out will not be updated, so the medal payout process will not become complicated.

<<Case 3>> When both the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type are initialized during the initialization process due to a setting change.

In case 3, both the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type are initialized by the initialization process by changing the settings, as in the conventional case, but the difference is that the favorable zone difference counter can also be updated in normal zones.

Specifically, when in the normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and if no payout is made as a result of that game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference number counter = predetermined value - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that there will be no transition to the advantageous zone for the next game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that game, the next game will also be in the normal zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference number counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, and if a predetermined number of bets are placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the game will transition to an advantageous zone for the next game, and no payout is made as a result of that game, the next game will be in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference number counter = predetermined value - 3).

In addition, when in a normal zone, the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter is a predetermined value, and if a predetermined number of bets is placed at the start of a game, and the advantageous zone transition process determines that the game will transition to an advantageous zone for the next game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of that game, the next game will be in an advantageous zone, and the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter can be updated (value of advantageous zone difference number counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

With this configuration, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be updated regardless of whether it is in a normal zone or an advantageous zone, improving playability in the normal zone. Also, since the advantageous zone difference counter update process can be realized in a common module without determining the play zone, it is possible to compress the program capacity and improve the readability of the program.

Then, in a situation where the game is in a favorable zone, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are made at the start of the game, and no payout is made as a result of the game, in the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the game, the value of the favorable zone difference counter can be updated (value of the favorable zone difference counter = predetermined value - 3).

In addition, in a situation where the game is in a favorable zone, the value of the favorable zone difference counter is a predetermined value, a predetermined number of bets are made at the start of the game, and a specific number of payouts is made as a result of the game, in the favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the game, the value of the favorable zone difference counter can be updated (value of the favorable zone difference counter = predetermined value + 10 - 3).

In other words, when playing after a transition to a favorable zone, the process of updating the value of the favorable zone difference counter is executed.

In case 3, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a predetermined value, it is an advantageous zone, and the main gaming state is AT, when the initialization process is executed in conjunction with the operation of the setting change device, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter will be the initial value, it will be a normal zone, and the main gaming state will be a state corresponding to the normal zone (a state that is not AT) as the state after initialization. Note that the RT state may be initialized (transitioned to non-RT) or may be maintained. This is because whether the RT state is initialized or maintained by changing the settings can be determined in the specifications of each gaming machine.

With this configuration, even if the gaming establishment closes for the day during the AT and the settings are changed the next day, the AT state can be initialized, preventing the user from being given a significant advantage when the establishment opens.

In addition, in case 3, in order to initialize the value of the favorable zone difference counter, in addition to the initialization process accompanying the operation of the setting change device, initialization process due to an RWM abnormality and initialization process by favorable zone clear counter management process at the end of the favorable zone are performed. Initialization process by favorable zone clear counter management process refers to initialization process when the value of the favorable zone difference counter reaches the upper limit value (so-called ending) and initialization process when any favorable zone end condition is met.

In addition, as another optional condition for initializing the value of the favorable zone difference counter, the favorable zone difference counter may be initialized by operating the favorable zone difference counter clear switch.

In this case, the operation of the favorable zone difference counter clear switch includes turning on the power while pressing the favorable zone difference counter clear switch when the power is off, pressing the favorable zone difference counter clear switch once or pressing and holding it when the power source is shared, etc. The initialization scope of the initialization process based on the favorable zone difference counter clear switch may be either the favorable zone difference counter only, or the favorable zone difference counter and the favorable zone type.

If the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be initialized under any other conditions, even if there is a malfunction based on the advantageous zone difference counter, the gaming facility can easily resolve the malfunction.

In addition, the operation of the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch can be disabled or enabled when the opening of the front door is detected.

In addition, when the advantageous zone difference counter clear switch is pressed during play, the operation of other main switches (start switch, stop switch, bet switch, settlement switch, reset switch, etc.) may be enabled or disabled.

In addition, if the operation of the advantageous section difference counter clear switch is specified as turning on the power while pressing the advantageous section difference counter clear switch in a power-off state, there is a possibility that the advantageous section difference counter clear switch may be pressed and the setting key switch may be ON in a power-off state.

In this case, if the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is activated, it is possible that the advantageous zone difference counter and advantageous zone type are initialized and the setting change mode is not activated.

<<Regarding the common configuration of cases 1, 2, and 3 regarding the relationship between the initialization process accompanying the operation of the setting change device and the advantageous zone difference counter>> We will explain the common configuration of the above-mentioned cases 1, 2 (including modified examples), and 3.

In either case, the hit difference counter for the complete function is initialized (set to an initial value) when the power is turned off or turned on.

In either case, the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be transmitted to the sub-control means.

For this reason, when the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is a certain number lower than the initial value, a suggestive effect can be given to the user with a certain probability, or the value of the advantageous zone difference counter can be displayed on a screen that can only be viewed by the gaming establishment while the settings are being checked or changed.

This is expected to improve the presentation effect for users and the maintenance effect for gaming facilities.

In the initialization process that accompanies the operation of the setting change device, irrecoverable errors, recoverable errors, number of bets, number of credits, and stop status can be initialized in either case where the advantageous zone difference counter is initialized or not initialized.

<Settings change process> The settings change process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in FIG. 10.

When the setting change mode is started (the setting change process is executed), it is determined whether the current setting value is within the normal range, and if it is within the normal range, the current setting value is obtained, and if it is outside the normal range, "1" is saved as the setting value and the setting value "1" is obtained.

After obtaining the set value, the set value display data is saved. After saving the set value display data, the lighting control is performed by referring to the set value display data every 5 interrupts using dynamic lighting control, which is a timer interrupt process.

Then, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the start switch 12 has not changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting switch has changed from off to on.

If it is determined that the setting switch has not changed from off to on, it is again determined whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, and if it is determined that the setting switch has changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is incremented; if the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is set to the initial value (0) and then incremented further. After the set value has been incremented, the updated set value is displayed and the process returns to the step of determining whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, the setting value is finalized and the system waits until it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off. When it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off, the system saves the determined setting value in the main control RAM, turns off the setting display LED, and turns on the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 (forming a passage for medals to flow down to the hopper 44), thereby ending the setting change mode.

Here, the setting change mode is a means for determining one of the setting values from 1 to 6 (displayed as setting values from 1 to 6). After a setting value has been determined, the internal lottery table (also called the role selection table) corresponding to the determined setting value continues to be set until the next time the setting value is changed by the setting change means. Note that role selection tables are provided for each setting value, with different probabilities of determining the results of the internal lottery (probability of winning a role).

When the setting key used for changing the settings is rotated by the gaming center manager while the slot machine PS1 is not powered on, and the slot machine PS1 is powered on with the setting key held in a rotation position where the setting key switch signal is turned on, the setting change means turns on the setting key switch signal when the slot machine PS1 is powered on. In this embodiment, the setting key switch signal is turned on when the setting key is turned on (OFF→ON), and if the setting key was on before the power was cut off, the setting key switch signal is not detected when the power is turned on, so the setting change mode is not entered. However, the setting key switch signal may be turned on as a level on, and the setting change mode may be entered when the setting key is on when the power is turned on again, even if the setting key was on before the power was cut off.

The setting change means, when it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the door open signal is on, and the setting change possible flag is on,
This starts a setting change mode in which the setting value of 1 can be changed.

The setting change possible flag is switched on and off depending on the game status. For example, a possible mode is that the setting change possible flag is turned off during the period from when the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and is turned on during other periods. However, this mode is not limited to this, and the setting change possible flag may be turned off only when a specific bonus game starts or when a specific bonus is in progress, or the setting change possible flag may not be set so that the setting can be changed in any state.

When the setting change mode is activated, the blocker installed in the medal selector 34 is turned off, preventing the start of play by inserting a medal. The setting value data that can be changed in the setting change mode has six levels: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". The higher the setting value, the higher the role selection table with a higher ball payout rate is set.

After the setting change mode is started, the setting display LED on the back of the front panel PS2 is lit to notify that the setting change mode is active. Then, setting value display data for displaying the set setting value data is set, and the credit number display 26 arranged in front of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the setting display LED (not shown) arranged on the back of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 are lit to display the setting value. When the setting value data is "1", the setting value display displays "1", when the setting value data is "2", when the setting value data is "3", when the setting value data is "4", when the setting value data is "5", when the setting value data is "6", the setting value display displays "6".

When the setting value data stored in the setting value data storage area is stored in six levels from "0" to "5", if the setting value data is "0", the setting value display will show "1", if the setting value data is "1", if the setting value data is "2", if the setting value data is "2", if the setting value data is "3", if the setting value data is "3", if the setting value data is "4", if the setting value data is "4", if the setting value data is "5", and if the setting value data is "5", the setting value display will show "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on or not, and when it is determined that the start switch 12 has been operated and the sensor signal of the start switch 12 has turned on, it determines the setting value and displays the current setting value on the setting display LED. In other words, if it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 has turned on during the setting change mode, the setting value will not be changed even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting switch signal is on without determining that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on, the setting switch rising data is cleared, and it is determined whether or not the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "6"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "6"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data is set to "1"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "1" to "5"), the current setting value is incremented. Note that, in the case where the setting value data has six stages from 0 to 5, the processing of the setting change mode is such that it is determined whether or not the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data is set to "0"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "0" to "4"), the current setting value is incremented.

In addition, when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is determined to be on after the setting change mode is activated, the setting value display mode of the setting display LED may be different from the setting value display mode when the setting can be changed, such as displaying "0" on the setting display LED to indicate that the setting value cannot be changed, or displaying "_X" on the setting display LED (where "X" is the set value after confirmation).

<Gameability using advantageous zones applicable to this embodiment> In this embodiment, the specified number of coins required to start playing is only three. In other words, playing cannot start with anything other than three coins, and even when a bonus is activated, playing can only start with three coins.

In this embodiment, the active line is one line consisting of the bottom left reel, the middle of the middle reel, and the bottom right reel. Hereinafter, when a symbol combination stops on an active line, it will be simply referred to as a symbol combination stopping.

In this embodiment, there are 10 types of symbols. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay. Note that the names and types of symbols are merely examples, and there is no problem if they are changed.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 11. As shown in FIG. 11, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in Figures 12 to 17. The "Winning symbol/Activation symbol/Pattern symbol name" item in the figure shows the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. Also, the "Specified number and game state" shows the bonus that is awarded when the symbol combination stops for each specified number. If "1 type BB" is written in the "Specified number and game state" item, it indicates that 1 type BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if it is written "Replay" it indicates that replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if a number is written, it indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops, and if it is written "-" it indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game state.

In this embodiment, the bonus is equipped with a Type 1 BB, and the end condition is the payout of more than 11 game medals. This Type 1 BB is a type in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends when either two wins or two games are met. When the end condition of the RB is met, the RB operates automatically until the end condition of the Type 1 BB (payout of more than 11 game medals) is met.

As shown in Figure 12, there are eight types of BB symbol combinations, and the rate at which symbols related to BB symbol combinations are drawn on each reel (probability that symbols related to the symbol combination will stop) is not 100%, so to display a BB symbol combination, it is necessary to press each reel with the right eye.

In this embodiment, the RT transition starts from non-RT (also referred to as not inside type 1 BB), and if type 1 BB is won during non-RT and the type 1 BB pattern combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of the game) transitions to RT1 (also referred to as inside type 1 BB), and if the type 1 BB pattern combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and type 1 BB is activated (also referred to as during type 1 BB) from the next game, and when the operation of type 1 BB ends, the next game transitions to non-RT. In addition, since the setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device is activated during RT1 or type 1 BB operation, non-RT is set when the operation of the setting change device ends. Note that in the case of a power outage in which the setting change device does not operate (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and type 1 BB operation state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, it starts from the state before the power outage. Specifically, if a power outage occurs during type 1 BB and the power is subsequently restored, the type 1 BB operating state is type 1 BB, and if a power outage occurs in a situation where the state is RT1 and the power is subsequently restored, the RT state is configured to be RT1.

The condition device in this embodiment is explained in FIG. 18. In FIG. 18, the "Winning Replay" item lists the numbers corresponding to the winning numbers. In addition, the "Condition Device" item lists the condition devices that will be activated. In addition, the "Common Name" item lists the simple names of the condition devices that will be activated. For example, the common name corresponding to the Replay-H condition device is "Right Push: Strong-Battle Eye", which indicates that the Strong Battle Eye will stop when the right reel is stopped for the first time, and the common name corresponding to the Winning-A1 condition device is "Push Order Bell Group A 123", which indicates that the operation mode of the left reel stopping first, the middle reel stopping second, and the right reel stopping third is the correct operation mode (in this case, the operation mode that stops the symbol combination of Winning 52 (a winning with a larger payout number than Winning 01-02, 09, 29-31)). In addition, the "Component" item shows the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device. For example, if the Replay-A condition device is activated (a win), it is possible to display Replay 01 or Replay 02. Note that the "0" in the "Winning Replay" section corresponds to a loss.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-type BB in this embodiment are explained using Figures 19 to 21. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-type BB are Type BB, Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C (+1 type BB), Replay-D (+1 type BB), Replay-E (+1 type BB), Replay-F (+1 type BB), Replay-G (+1 type BB), Replay-H (+1 type BB), Replay-I (+1 type BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-A7, Winning-A8, Winning-A9, Winning-B10, Winning-B20, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-B7, Winning-B8, Winning-B9, Winning-B10, Winning-B11, Winning-B12, Winning-B13, Winning-B14, Winning-B15, Winning-B16, Winning-B17, Winning-B18, Winning-B19, Winning-B20, Winning-B21, Winning-B22, Winning-B23, Winning-B24, Winning-B25, Winning-B26, Winning-B27, Winning-B28, Winning-B29, Winning-B30, Winning-B31, Winning-B32, Winning-B33, Winning-B34, Winning-B35, Winning-B46, Winning-B47, Winning-B48, Winning-B59, Winning-B61, Winning-B62, Winning-B63, Win The possible prizes are -A6, Winning -B1, Winning -B2, Winning -B3, Winning -B4, Winning -B5, Winning -B6, Winning -C1, Winning -C2, Winning -C3, Winning -C4, Winning -C5, Winning -C6, Winning -D (+1 type BB), Winning -E (+1 type BB), Winning -F (+1 type BB), Winning -G (+1 type BB), Winning -H (+1 type BB), Winning -I (+1 type BB), Winning -J (+1 type BB), Winning -K (+1 type BB), and there are no losing prizes.

The above-mentioned description of "Replay -C (+1 type BB)" indicates that Replay -C and 1 type BB are won at the same time, and corresponds to the fact that the names of both "Bonus Condition Device" and "Winning Replay" are written in Figures 19, 20, and 21. The "Internal Lottery" item in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicates whether or not the internal lottery is subject for each game state, with "○" indicating that the internal lottery is subject and "×" indicating that the internal lottery is not subject. The "Advantageous Zone Transition" item in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed and "×" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed. In this embodiment, when the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, 100% of the time, the game is configured to transition to the advantageous zone. Also, the items "R1" to "R6" in Figures 19, 20, and 21 indicate the number of winning settings for the internal lottery corresponding to the set value, with 65,536 settings being allocated for each game state. Note that "R1" corresponds to a setting value of "1," "R2" corresponds to a setting value of "2," "R3" corresponds to a setting value of "3," "R4" corresponds to a setting value of "4," "R5" corresponds to a setting value of "5," and "R6" corresponds to a setting value of "6."

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means within the Type 1 BB are any of: Re-play-A, Re-play-B, Re-play-C, Re-play-D, Re-play-E, Re-play-F, Re-play-G, Re-play-H, Re-play-I, Re-play-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K, and there are no losing results.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during Type 1 BB are Winning -K, Winning -L, or Losing.

In this embodiment, the conditions for moving from the normal zone to the advantageous zone are winning any of the following: Re-play-C, Re-play-D, Re-play-E, Re-play-F, Re-play-G, Re-play-H, Re-play-I, Re-play-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; winning Re-play-A or Re-play-B does not result in a move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, Win-K, you will be in the advantageous period from the next play.

In this embodiment, if any of the following is won during the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K, the player will always move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, Win-K, you will be in the advantageous period from the next play.

In this embodiment, in RT1 (inside the Type 1 BB), there are no misses (either the replay role or the winning role is always a winning role), so once you move to RT1, it is possible to stop the BB symbol combination with some of the operation modes when the push order bell group C (winning role-C1 to C6) is won. The part when the push order bell group C is won is, for example, the middle reel or the first stop position of the right reel when the winning role-C1 is won. Also, when WINNING-C1 is hit in the advantageous zone, the correct button press sequence (in this case, "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the LCD) is notified, and WINNING 38 stops and the BB symbol combination does not stop. With this configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by notifying the operation mode in which the BB symbol combination does not stop. Also, the number of losing positions during RT1 can be set to 4 (because the minimum winning probability designed is 1/17500 or more), and the BB symbol combination can be configured not to stop for other replay roles or winning roles, so that the BB symbol combination stops only when there is a loss.

In this embodiment, the game states managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone include the general advantageous zone state, chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and AT, with transitions occurring from the general advantageous zone state to CZ, from CZ to AT, and from AT to the general advantageous zone state or CZ, respectively. Furthermore, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal zone is only the general normal zone state, and there is no transition of the game state until a transition to the advantageous zone occurs. Note that in the general advantageous zone state and the general normal zone state, the flags relating to the game states managed by the main control means may be the same or different.

The normal state is when the internal lottery result is any of WINNER-A1 through WINNER-C6, and the advantageous winning button sequence is not announced.

The CZ is the state you enter when you win any of the internal lottery results from WINNER-D to WINNER-H under normal circumstances, and during the CZ, the transition to the AT is determined by the results of the internal lottery during the CZ and the lottery at the start of the CZ.

The AT is the state you enter when you win the AT lottery during the CZ, and is the state that notifies you of the advantageous operation mode (winning button press sequence) when you win any of WIN-A1 to WIN-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for always transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone are when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 1500 times), when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, when initialization processing is performed based on a setting change, and when the RAM clear switch is activated, and the AT end conditions and the advantageous zone end conditions do not match. However, some of the AT end conditions (such as when the ending is reached or when the number of winning coins exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2300 coins)) may also be used as the advantageous zone end conditions. Also, a transition to the normal zone may be made when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone. In this case, whether or not to end the advantageous zone is determined depending on the situation of the advantageous zone when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone.

The CZ is determined by drawing lots when one of the winning combinations, Winning-D through Winning-H (hereafter also referred to as rare combinations), is won, and basically the less likely the internal drawing result is to win, the more likely it is that the CZ will be won. In this embodiment, the order of likelihood of winning the CZ is Winning-G > Winning-E > Winning-H > Winning-F > Winning-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after winning, but after winning the CZ, the CZ starts when the game moves from the advantageous zone to the normal zone and then back to the advantageous zone (the CZ always starts when the game moves to the advantageous zone in RT1). This solves the problem that when the game goes from the CZ to the AT, the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is small, and balls cannot be put out. This is particularly effective when the specification has a small net increase (the expected number of coins to be won per game, also called the gradient value). For example, in the case of a net increase of 2 coins, the maximum number of coins to be won in the advantageous zone is about 2400 coins, so 1200 games are required to win 2400 coins. However, the AT is not always performed in the advantageous zone, and since various game states such as the normal state and the CZ described above are transitioned, the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is often small (for example, 500 games) at the start of the AT. In this case, even if 500 games are played, the net increase is 2 coins, so the game ends with about 1000 coins being won, making it difficult to meet the user's expectations for winning. Therefore, by ending the advantageous zone once when the CZ is won, and starting the CZ when moving to a new advantageous zone, even if the CZ has 100 plays, the advantageous zone can be played 1,400 times, creating the expectation that the user will win 2,400 coins.

The probability of winning the CZ from the second time onwards within the same favourable zone may also be varied depending on the number of coins won since the favourable zone began (cumulative number of coins paid out - cumulative number of coins inserted). For example, if a CZ is started when moving to a favourable zone and an AT is won, it is possible to vary the probability of winning the CZ in the remaining favourable zone after the AT ends depending on whether 50 coins are won in the AT or 1000 coins are won. In this case, it is possible to make the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins higher or lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins.

If the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins is made higher than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1,000 coins, it will be easier to award the next CZ to users who have not won much in the AT, allowing them to play while maintaining a sense of anticipation.

If the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins is made lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins, since there is little remaining advantageous period after winning 1000 coins (since it is close to the conditions for the advantageous period ending after 1500 plays or winning 2400 coins), even if the CZ probability is made high, the ball payout design will not significantly increase gambling spirit, and a new sense of expectation can be created for the user.

When a CZ is won, a congratulatory performance is performed in which text such as "success" or "victory" is displayed in the game in which the CZ was won, or after a certain number of games (which can be set arbitrarily depending on the specifications of the gaming machine). This allows the user to understand that some kind of privilege has been granted, and allows the user to intuitively understand the progress of the game. Then, from the next game onwards, the display "CZ preparation" is displayed by lighting the liquid crystal or lamp, and a sense of expectation for the CZ can be created in the user. When the CZ winning game is in an advantageous zone, the CZ preparation corresponds to the state from the end of the advantageous zone to the transition to the advantageous zone again in the subsequent normal zone. Since the "CZ preparation" is internally a normal zone, it is a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform any AT lottery or AT addition, but by lowering the ball output rate during the CZ preparation compared to the AT state, balls can be allocated to the AT, and a wave of balls can be created. In addition, since the CZ preparation creates a sense of expectation for the CZ, the user is less likely to feel that he or she has lost even if the ball output rate is lowered.

In addition, the advantageous zone ends with the next play after the CZ wins, but a predetermined number of plays may be played from the play after the CZ wins until the advantageous zone ends. In this case, the CZ win is not announced in the play after the CZ win, and a predetermined number of plays may be played to see whether the CZ wins or not through effects (so-called premonition effects or consecutive effects). Then, a congratulatory effect is executed at the timing when the predetermined number of plays are played, and the CZ is in preparation from the next play. This is because the advantageous zone lamp is lit during the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone lamp is turned off when the advantageous zone ends, so that it is not possible to tell whether the CZ wins or not from the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp between the CZ win play and the announcement that the CZ wins. Note that the advantageous zone may be switched to the normal zone during CZ preparation, and in this case, since it has already been announced that the CZ is in preparation, the result is not known in advance from the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp during CZ preparation.

Also, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal zone, and may be set to a favorable zone. Even in this case, the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a normal zone is relatively higher than the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a favorable zone, and the condition for executing CZ preparation in a favorable zone is that the number of remaining plays in the favorable zone is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times). By configuring in this way, CZ preparation is executed when there is a margin in the number of remaining plays in the favorable zone, so even if the CZ is executed after CZ preparation and the AT is executed as a result, a sufficient feeling of winning can be created. In addition, since the normal zone is not used during CZ preparation, it is also possible to create a surprise such as starting the AT immediately after CZ preparation (since information related to the AT is initialized at the end of the favorable zone, if the normal zone is used during CZ preparation, the CZ will be executed at the start of the favorable zone, and the AT cannot be started).

In addition, when executing the CZ preparation in the above-mentioned advantageous zone, it may be determined whether or not to grant the AT by drawing lots when any of WIN-D to WIN-H is won during CZ preparation. In this case, the order of rare roles that are likely to win the AT by AT drawing lots may be the same as the order that is likely to win the CZ, or may be slightly different, such as WIN-E>WIN-G>WIN-F>WIN-H>WIN-D. By configuring in this way, the user can expect to win a rare role even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, to prevent users who have won a rare role but not the AT from losing their desire to play, a bonus different from the AT may be awarded. Such a bonus may, for example, be displayed as a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user's terminal, or a setting suggestion effect that allows the setting value to be determined. Such a bonus may be made easier to award the closer the number of plays in the advantageous zone is to the aforementioned predetermined number (e.g., 1500 plays), or when the number of CZ plays is a specific number (e.g., a multiple of 5).

The process for changing settings in this embodiment is explained below.

When the setting change device is started, the aforementioned RAM initialization process is performed at the timing when the setting change device is started or when the setting value is confirmed. If the game state immediately before this RAM initialization process is performed is RT1, the RT1 information is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in Type 1 BB, the information in Type 1 BB is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT.

In addition, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is a favorable zone, the information of the favorable zone is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes a normal zone. In other words, the game state during the favorable zone can be a normal state, CZ, or AT, but in any state, when the RAM initialization process is performed, it transitions to the normal zone.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, play will start in a non-RT and normal zone, but in this embodiment, the CZ is started when moving from the normal zone to the favorable zone, so after the setting change, the game is in a favorable state (a state in which the CZ can be started by moving to the favorable zone without playing to win the CZ).

By configuring it this way, you can increase customer numbers by motivating them to visit the store in the morning, as the settings are changed to a favorable state.

In addition, if it is possible to set an overly favorable state after changing the settings (a state in which the machine transitions to the CZ after just a few plays), this could significantly stimulate gambling instincts (the so-called morning mode). For this reason, it is possible to change the contents of the CZ depending on the situation when the machine transitions to the favorable zone.

In this case, if the RT state of the next play that has been determined to transition to the favorable zone is RT1, a CZ will be started since this is the basic game flow, and if the RT state of the next play that has been determined to transition to the favorable zone is non-RT, a CZ will not be started as this is after a setting change. The games that have been determined to move into the favorable zone are those that have won any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, Winning-K.

In addition, since Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K overlap with Type 1 BB, the RT state of the next play after the winning will be RT1 and CZ will start, but Winning-A1, Winner-A2, Winner-A3, Winner-A4, Winner-A5, Winner-A6, Winner-B1, Winner-B2, Winner-B3, Winner-B4, Winner-B5, Winner-B6, Winner-C1, Winner-C2, Winner-C3, Winner-C4, Winner-C5, Winner-C6 do not overlap with Type 1 BB, so the next play after the win is non-RT and CZ will not start.

This configuration allows for a transition to a favorable zone during non-RT, which can suppress morning-related specifications such as transitioning to a CZ after just a few plays after changing the settings, thereby reducing the risk of gambling.

It is also possible to reduce gambling by using a specification that changes the game state managed by the main control means in the favorable zone by referring to the RT state of the next game in which a transition to the favorable zone has been decided. In this case, the favorable zone that has transitioned to a non-RT (not inside the Type 1 BB) may not perform an AT, and the favorable zone that has transitioned to an RT1 (inside the Type 1 BB) may have the possibility of performing an AT. With this configuration, if a transition to the favorable zone occurs in a non-RT after the setting is changed, the AT will not be performed and no balls can be earned, thereby reducing gambling. The condition for ending the favorable zone in this case may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or may be when a predetermined number of games have been played (for example, 1,500 games).

In addition, the transition of the CZ is controlled by referring to the RT state of the next game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery, but this is not limited to the above, and the transition of the CZ may be controlled by referring to the condition device in operation for the game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, when the prize-winning-A1 is won while inside a type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition devices for the type 1 BB and the prize-winning-A1 are in operation. In addition, when the prize-winning-A1 is won while not inside a type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled not to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition device for the prize-winning-A1 is in operation.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be the subject of the lottery.

<Playability with increased expected gain in game value at the start of the advantageous zone> We will now explain playability with increased expected gain in game value at the start of the advantageous zone, which is applicable to this embodiment. Note that, in order to increase the expected gain in game value at the start of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone is configured so that it does not end when a predetermined number of plays have been played. In other words, the advantageous zone is configured so that it does not end depending on the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

When a predetermined number of premonition games are played in the general state of the favorable zone after starting one favorable zone, the next game will transition to a predetermined AT (also called AT1), a predetermined lottery will be played in the AT1, and if the predetermined lottery is won, the AT1 will continue until the number of wins in the favorable zone exceeds 2400 (until the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit value), and if the end condition of the favorable zone is met, the favorable zone will end and the normal zone will start from the next game. Then, after passing through the normal zone and starting a new favorable zone, the AT1 will transition to a predetermined number of premonition games played in the general state of the favorable zone, and if the predetermined lottery is won in the AT1, the AT1 will continue until the number of wins in the favorable zone exceeds 2400, and if the end condition of the favorable zone is met, the favorable zone will end and the normal zone will start from the next game. In other words, the acquisition of about 2400 game value will loop until the predetermined lottery is not won in the AT1. The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to configure it so that there is a high probability of winning, such as 50% or more and less than 80%. In addition, a minimum guarantee (such as 50 AT games or 100 wins) is set during the execution period of AT1, and even if a specified lottery is not won in AT1, AT1 is not immediately terminated but is configured to continue until the minimum guaranteed AT is executed. The specified lottery may be configured to be executed at the start of AT1, or may be configured to be executed after the minimum guaranteed AT is executed in AT1.

In addition, if a player does not win in a specified lottery in AT1, the game will transition to the general advantageous zone state after the end of AT1 without ending the advantageous zone, and if a player wins a specified role (such as replay-A, replay-J, winning-J, etc.) that has a low probability of winning in the role lottery in the general advantageous zone state (for example, 1/8192, the lowest probability in the role lottery), the advantageous zone will end and the normal zone will start from the next play, and after passing through the normal zone and starting a new advantageous zone, the game will transition to AT1 once a specified number of premonition plays have been performed in the general advantageous zone state.

The general state of the advantageous zone to which the player transitions after failing to win in a predetermined lottery at AT1 is configured to have a lower expectation for the AT than the general state of the advantageous zone at the start of one advantageous zone.

In addition, the advantageous zone is configured to end when a predetermined role is won in the advantageous zone general state, which is entered after a predetermined lottery is not won in AT1, but it is not limited to this, and the advantageous zone may be configured to end when a predetermined CZ is executed to end the advantageous zone and a lottery is won during the predetermined CZ.

In addition, during AT1 or during a predetermined number of premonition games immediately after the start of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone is configured not to end even if the player wins the predetermined role. This configuration can improve the tempo of the game when the winning number 2400 is looping. Even if the player wins the predetermined role in a situation where it is confirmed that the player can win a predetermined lottery in AT1 and can win a game value of about 2400, AT1 will not end midway, so the risk of causing a disadvantage to the player can be prevented. Even if the player wins the predetermined role in a situation where a predetermined performance is being performed indicating that the player can win a predetermined lottery and can win a game value of about 2400, the predetermined performance will not end midway, so the risk of causing distrust to the player can be prevented. In addition, if the player wins the predetermined role during AT2, which will be described later, the advantageous zone may be configured to end with the game in which the predetermined role was won, or the advantageous zone may be configured to end after AT2 ends.

In this way, by increasing the expected value of game value gained at the start of the advantageous zone, a new gameplay element can be created in which the player aims to end the advantageous zone. Furthermore, by requiring a certain number of premonition plays from the start of one advantageous zone until the transition to AT1, the AT will not continue beyond 2,400 points even if a certain lottery is won in AT1, so excessive gambling element can be prevented.

In addition, even in the general advantageous zone state to which a player enters after failing to win a specified lottery in AT1, an AT lottery may be held, or a ceiling may be set so that the player enters the AT every time a ceiling number of games (e.g., 1,000 games) have been played (these ATs other than AT1 are collectively referred to as AT2), but it is preferable to configure AT2 so that the specified lottery is not held. In this way, by not holding the specified lottery in ATs other than AT1, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling and to increase the sense of anticipation for the specified lottery in AT1.

In addition, even if the expected value of game value gained at the start of the favorable zone is configured to be high in this way, if a transition to the favorable zone is decided during RT1 (within Type 1 BB) by the method described above, the game will transition to AT1 after a predetermined number of premonition plays from the start of the favorable zone, but if a transition to the favorable zone is decided during a non-RT, the AT will not be executed even after a predetermined number of plays from the start of the favorable zone; in other words, it is preferable to configure the game so that the AT will not be executed after a predetermined number of plays from the start of the favorable zone in the first favorable zone after the setting is changed. By configuring the game so that a transition to the favorable zone during RT1 is relatively more favorable than a transition to the favorable zone during a non-RT, the morning-related specifications can be suppressed.

In addition, when a specific number of games (for example, 5000 games) have been played without one advantageous period ending, the system may be configured to transition to a specific state in which the design value of the payout rate is a specific value (a value exceeding 100% and not exceeding 115%) from the next game until the advantageous period ends. The specific number of games can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to set it to the number of games that can be played within the business hours of the gaming establishment in one day.

In addition, in order to set the design value of the payout rate in a specified state to a specified value, 1) it may be configured to transition to AT2 every time a specified number of games (e.g., 100 games) are played in the general advantageous zone state, and the AT2 may always end after a specific number of games (e.g., 50 games), or 2) it may be configured to provide multiple scenarios in which the number of games to transition to AT2 and the number of games won in AT2 after the transition are predetermined so that the payout rate becomes a specified value, and to allow the game to proceed according to one of the scenarios.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to motivate a player to continue playing even in an unfavorable situation for the player, such as when one advantageous period continues for a long period of time.

In addition, in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone may be configured not to end even if a predetermined role is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value from being overly advantageous for the player.

In addition, even if the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantageous period may be configured to end if a predetermined combination is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation when a predetermined combination is won.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a specified value may be designed to be the same regardless of the set value. By doing so, in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a specified value, stable playability can be provided without any advantage/disadvantage due to the set value.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured to be higher as the set value is higher, such as set value 1 < set value 2 < ... < set value 6. By doing this, the higher the set value is, the sooner the advantageous zone can end when a transition is made to a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value in an advantageous zone, and therefore the transition to a state where the expected value of the game value to be acquired is higher can be made sooner.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured to be higher than the lowest set value (set value 1 in this embodiment) and lower than the highest set value (set value 6 in this embodiment). By configuring it in this way, even if a predetermined lottery is not won during AT1 of one advantageous zone, it is possible to continue playing, thereby increasing the significance of aiming for a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, while also preventing the significance of playing at the highest set value from being lost.

<Control corresponding to power cut while various switches are pressed according to this embodiment> In a situation where the front panel PS2 is closed, a game has ended, three bets have not been made (including a situation where an automatic bet has not been made), and a number equal to or greater than the number that allows three bets is stored as the number of credits (for example, the number of credits when no bets have been made is three or more, or the number of credits when one bet has been made is two or more) (hereinafter referred to as a MAX bet possible state), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), a MAX bet process is executed, which stores the number of bets as three, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off).

In addition, not only when the front panel PS2 is closed, but also when the front panel PS2 is open, if the game has ended, no 3 bets have been made (including when no automatic bets have been made), and the number of credits stored is equal to or greater than the number that allows 3 bets (for example, the number of credits when no bets have been made is 3 or more, or the number of credits when 1 bet has been made is 2 or more), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned on (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off). In the following, unless otherwise specified, when the power is turned on, the front panel PS2 is closed, but the same behavior may be performed even when the front panel PS2 is open.

The MAX bet possible state includes a situation where no bet has been made, a situation where one bet has been made, and a situation where two bets have been made, but when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are newly lit, this is the MAX bet possible state where no bet has been made. In the MAX bet possible state where one bet has been made, the 2 bet lamp and 3 bet lamp are newly lit when the 1 bet lamp is already lit, and in the MAX bet possible state where two bets have been made, the 1 bet lamp and 2 bet lamp are already lit and the 3 bet lamp is newly lit.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible, the MAX bet lamp is lit, informing the player that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. When the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the MAX bet lamp is lit in the MAX bet possible state (when the sensor that detects the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp goes out. In other words, the MAX bet lamp goes out even when the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (when the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 remains ON).

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed. Also, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, a new MAX bet process cannot be performed by pressing the MAX bet switch 18. In other words, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is on), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet process cannot be performed.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid by lighting it. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid can place a MAX bet (perform MAX bet processing) by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 that he had pressed (after the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON).

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and making the gaming machine unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again (the sensor that detects the 1 bet switch 19 turns from OFF to ON), the 1 bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp indicates that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated. Even in such a case, the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 is valid, so the game can continue.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, making the gaming machine unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and when the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bet lamp may be on or off after the power is turned on. If the MAX bet lamp is on after the power is turned on, it indicates that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, the state changes from 3 bets to 1 bet, and the difference "2" is returned to the credits (if the difference cannot be returned to credits in a 3 bet state and the number of credits is 50, the state does not change to 1 bet even if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, and the 3 bet state is maintained, so the MAX bet lamp does not light up (it is off) after the power is turned on). If the MAX bet lamp is off after the power is turned on, it is possible to indicate that the MAX bet process has been executed. In addition, even if the MAX BET lamp is on or off after power is turned on, it is possible to notify that the MAX BET process has been executed by outputting 3 BET sounds (1 BET sound three times) when the power is turned on.

Next, when the MAX bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) in the MAX bet enabled state (when no bet has been placed), the bet number is stored as 1 and the 1 bet lamp is lit. Also, since the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is still valid, the MAX bet lamp is also lit.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (when no bets have been placed), if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, if the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed. Also, because the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new 1 bet process by pressing the 1 bet switch 19.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp indicates that betting is possible, suggesting that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 or 1 bet switch 19 is valid can release the 1 bet switch 19 that he has pressed (after the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 has changed from ON to OFF), and then press the 1 bet switch 19 again.
A 1 bet process or a MAX bet process can be performed by pressing the bet switch 19, or by pressing the MAX bet switch 18 (the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 changes from OFF to ON) without releasing the pressed 1 bet switch 19 (the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 remains ON).

In addition, when the gaming machine is in a MAX bet enabled state (when no bets have been placed) and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making it unable to operate, if the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by operating (pressing) the MAX bet switch 18 again.

As a result, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp will notify the user that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the MAX bet switch 18 can be operated. Even in such a case, the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, so the game can continue.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the 1 bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bet lamp is lit after the power is turned on, indicating that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable, and when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the 1 bet state changes to the 3 bet state. Also, it is possible to notify that the 1 bet process has been executed by outputting a 1 bet sound when the power is turned on.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (no bet has been placed), if a power outage occurs causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and the gaming machine is unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case whether the front panel PS2 is not open or is already open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again while the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, the 1 bet process can be executed. In addition, when a power outage occurs in a state where a MAX bet is possible (when no bet has been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and making it impossible for the gaming machine to operate, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case when the front panel PS2 is not open or may already be open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 and operating (pressing) it again. In this case, even if the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, the 1 bet sound or the 3 bet sound may not be output. Alternatively, when the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, 3 bets are placed and the front panel PS2 is open, when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins, but the start sound may not be output.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can be lit to accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid.

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

Also, by enabling 1 bet processing using the 1 bet switch 19 even when the front panel PS2 is open, it becomes possible to check whether 1 bet processing is possible normally in conjunction with the work performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, checking settings, setting the administrator menu, etc.). Note that when playing at an amusement arcade, playing with the front panel PS2 open is not normal, so by deliberately not outputting the 1 bet sound, it is possible to make the player aware that it is not normal.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible (when no bets have been placed), when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be a state in which the front panel PS2 is not open or may already be open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will not light up, the MAX bet process will not be executed, and even if the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1 bet process will not be executed, and thereafter, when the front panel PS2 is closed (the closure is detected) while the operation (pressing) of the MAX bet switch 18 is continuing, the MAX bet lamp will light up, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1 bet process will become possible.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and by not lighting the MAX bet lamp, it is possible to make the player aware that he or she cannot continue playing. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be operated (pressed), the bet operation with the 1 bet switch 19 is enabled, making it possible to minimize the disruption of game progress.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs in the MAX bet enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. Also, in this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is still being pressed and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed. Similarly, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, and the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still pressed, and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the 1 bet process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can be lit to accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. Also, even in such a case, the game can continue because the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and normal effects are being displayed (effects other than continuous effects or AT effects) or a demo screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as a menu screen displayable state), if the sub switch 20 is operated (pressed) (the sensor that detects the sub switch 20 goes from OFF to ON), the display process for the menu screen is executed and the menu screen is displayed on the display device 32.

In addition, in a state where the menu screen can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the sub switch 20 remains ON), the sub switch lamp will light up and the menu screen will not be displayed.

As a result, even if the sub switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional menu screen is not displayed, and the lighting state of the sub switch lamp indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the sub switch 20 is valid can release the sub switch 20 that he has pressed (after the sensor of the sub switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then press the sub switch 20 again (the sensor of the sub switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), thereby allowing the menu screen to be displayed.

In addition, in a state where the menu screen can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the sub switch lamp may light up and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it is possible to indicate that the confirmation operation for each item on the menu screen was valid.

Furthermore, in a situation where a power outage occurs when the gaming machine is in a MAX BET enabled state and the menu screen can be displayed, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up, the MAX BET process will not be executed, the sub switch lamp will light up, and the menu screen will not be displayed. Also, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to newly execute a MAX BET process by pressing the MAX BET switch 18. In other words, if the MAX BET switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed, the MAX BET process will not be executed, the sub switch lamp will light up, and the menu screen will not be displayed. Also, because the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to newly execute a MAX BET process by pressing the MAX BET switch 18.
Since the X bet switch 18 is being pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is in an ON state), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet process cannot be performed.

This makes it possible to prevent unintentional bets and the display of the menu screen even in a situation where the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp can accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, and the lighting state of the sub switch lamp can notify that the display process of the menu screen is possible, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated.

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

Also, in a situation where a MAX BET is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine is unable to operate. In that situation, if the MAX BET switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may be lit, the MAX BET process is not executed, the sub switch lamp may be lit, and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen may be displayed immediately after the power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it may be possible to indicate that the confirmation operation for each item on the menu screen is valid. In this case, the MAX BET lamp may continue to be lit even after the menu screen is displayed, to notify that the MAX BET process can be executed.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and the number of credits is 1 or more (hereinafter referred to as the settlement-enabled state), the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch is operated (pressed), and the medals stored in the credits are paid out to the tray 28.

In addition, in a state where settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine unable to operate, and the settlement switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the settlement switch turns from OFF to ON), if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the settlement switch sensor is ON and the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and settlement processing will not be executed. Also, even if the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX BET process will not be executed.

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp will notify the player that there are medals remaining in the credits, preventing the player from leaving the seat with credits remaining.

In addition, in a state where settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and the gaming machine to become inoperable, the settlement switch is pressed, and if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and settlement processing will not be executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX bet processing will be executed.

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and because the operation of the MAX BET switch is valid, the progress of the game is not hindered as much as possible, so as not to reduce interest in the game.

In addition, in a state where settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and the gaming machine to become inoperable, the settlement switch may be pressed, and if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may be lit and settlement processing may be executed.

As a result, for example, if the power is turned on before the arcade opens, and the settlement switch is operated (e.g., hand is placed on the settlement switch), the settlement process can be performed immediately after the power is turned on, simplifying the power-on process before opening and the settlement process for remaining medals on the credit.

In addition, when the settlement is possible and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the lamp of the sub-switch 20 will light up and operation of the sub-switch 20 will be valid, regardless of whether the settlement process is executed or not (the menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of the sub-switch 20).

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated when powering on after a power outage, for example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating sub switch 20, and information useful for playing, such as checking game history and adjusting the volume, can be viewed or changed on the menu screen. Also, by enabling all operations related to the progress of the game at this time, all games other than settlement can be performed. The settlement process is only used at the end of play, and since the player is not put at a disadvantage by adjusting the number of medals inserted even if the settlement process is not performed, it is possible to carry out the process without interfering with the progress of the game as much as possible.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible and settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed, and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and settlement process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is still being pressed, and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed, and if the settlement switch is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still being pressed, and the settlement switch is operated (pressed) again while the MAX bet switch 18 is still being pressed, the settlement process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed and settlement processing even if the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage. In addition, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp can accurately notify the user that medals remain in the credits and that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, and three bets have been made (including when replay is activated) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotation enabled state), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed). Note that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum play time has elapsed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine unable to operate, and the start switch 12 is pressed and then power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp will light up but none of the reels will spin.

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, and it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that have been bet on. Also, even in such cases, the lighting of the start lamp can accurately notify the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

In addition, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light up and none of the reels may spin. In such a case, it is preferable that the start lamp light up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned off).

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, preventing the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that has been bet on. Also, by not lighting the start lamp in such a case, the player can be made aware that the reels will not spin until the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated, and the start lamp lights up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated, accurately informing the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

In addition, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are in a rotatable state, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and making the gaming machine unable to operate, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), all of the reels may rotate.

As a result, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and then the start switch 12 is operated before the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is operated (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all the reels will spin after the power is turned on, so it is possible for the game to progress (all the reels will spin) regardless of when the player operates the start switch 12, reducing the player's workload and improving the tempo of the game.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, all reels are spinning, and the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid (hereinafter referred to as the reel stoppable state), when the stop switch 13 is operated (pressed) (when any of the sensors detecting the left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, and right stop switch 13c turns from OFF to ON), a stop control process is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to a state in which all reels are spinning, and a state in which any one reel is spinning can also be referred to as the reel stoppable state.

In a state in which the reels can be stopped, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is lit to indicate that it is enabled, and in a state in which the reels cannot be stopped even when the stop switch 13 is operated, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is lit to indicate that it is disabled.

Here, the state where the reels cannot be stopped may be a state where the reels are rotating but the operation of the stop switch 13 is not accepted (such as when a rotation failure is being detected or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is being operated), or a state where the reels are not rotating (such as when all reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated when the left reel is stopped).

In addition, the lighting state indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is active is when it is lit in white or red, and the lighting state indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is inactive is when it is unlit (off) or when it is lit in a color (e.g. blue) different from the lighting color indicating that it is active.

In addition, in a state where the reels can be stopped, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine unable to operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the left stop switch 13a remains ON), the stop control process is not executed for the left reel. Also, if the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 is lit up to indicate that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch that corresponds to the final stop operation, and even if a power outage occurs while the left reel is in a stoppable state and the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on, the left stop switch 13a will not stop the rotation of the left reel, making it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as missing out on a minor role that requires careful pressing. It is also possible to prevent the stop switch 13 from accepting an operation in a different order from the correct order when an internal lottery result (the so-called "order of pressing role") is won, in which a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player stops depending on the order of pressing.

In addition, in a state where the reels can be stopped, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and making the gaming machine unable to operate, the left stop switch 13a may be pressed, and if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (if a power outage recovery process is executed), a stop control process may be executed for the left reel. Even in this case, if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 will be lit to indicate that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, if a power outage occurs during play, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and then the left stop switch 13a is pressed before the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the left reel stops after the power is turned on, so the game can proceed (the corresponding reel stops) regardless of when the player presses the stop switch 13, reducing the player's efforts and improving the game tempo. Note that when stopping the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that is pressed after power is turned on, the reel can be stopped even if the reel is accelerating, making it possible to approach the timing that the player originally wanted to stop it. However, if multiple stop switches 13 are pressed after power is turned on, none of the reels are stopped.

<Control to deal with power interruption during slip control according to this embodiment> When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, and the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, the reel is rotated from the acceptance position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control), and the reel stops when it has rotated to the stop position. If a power interruption process is executed during this slip control, slip control cannot be executed, and therefore the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is executed based on the determined stop position, so when it is determined that a small win has been won based on the stop position, regardless of whether the reels are actually stopped or not, the payout of medals based on the small win is executed.

For this reason, in a game in which a small prize is won by the internal lottery process, a power-off process is executed during slip control when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small prize can be stopped, and even if the symbol corresponding to the small prize is not stopped on a winning line after the power is restored, the winning determination process after all reels have stopped determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the small prize has been stopped, and medals are paid out according to the stopped symbol combination.

This is for the following reasons. That is, while it has the effect of preventing a situation in which a player is unable to receive a medal payout even though he or she performed a stop operation at the timing when the medal payout should be received, it also has the problem of not being able to recognize which symbol combination the medal payout is based on. To solve this problem, in a game in which a small prize has been won through internal lottery processing, a power cut process is executed during slip control (from the time the stop acceptance is accepted until the end of slip control) when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small prize can be stopped, and after the power is restored, the reel is rotated to detect the index, and based on the detected index information, the reel is controlled to rotate to the stop position and then stop at the stop position, and the medals are then paid out.

By configuring it this way, even if the power is cut off during slip control, the reels will rotate to the intended stop position after the power is restored, allowing the player to visually confirm which symbol combination has been stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, if a power cut process is performed during slippage control, and an index is detected during re-spin processing after power is restored, the reel will move to the planned stop position even if the same symbol is present during the movement to the planned stop position. If the reel stops on the same symbol just before the planned stop position, it may result in a stop prohibition display that will not stop during play, so a process is required to determine whether or not stopping is prohibited, but the reel is moved to the planned position to reduce the processing burden during re-spin processing.

In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and in the re-spin processing after power is restored, acceleration processing and constant speed processing are executed in the same way as the normal reel spin start processing. However, this is not limited to this, and acceleration processing and constant speed processing different from the normal processing may be executed. For example, it is possible to think of a state in which the acceleration time is shorter, the acceleration time is longer, the constant speed spin speed is slower, or the constant speed spin speed is faster. In this way, by changing the acceleration mode or constant speed mode from the normal state, it is possible to make the player aware that the spin is different from the normal state.

In addition, if the reel rotates to the same position as the stop acceptance position while rotating at a constant speed during re-spinning, the reel enters slip control as if a stop operation had been accepted, as in normal rotation processing, and when the reel rotates to the planned stop position, a full-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (in the case of a four-phase stepping motor, a four-phase excitation signal is output), stopping the re-spinning reel.

In addition, if power is cut off during slippage control, and the re-spin process is in progress after power is restored, it is possible to have the LCD display show "Re-spinning", output a voice message saying "Re-spinning", or have the error display show an error message to let the player know that the re-spin is occurring. This allows the player to know that the re-spin is not normal.

In addition, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, a flag indicating that slip control has not been completed is stored in a specified memory area, and when power is turned on, the specified memory area is checked, and if the flag is set, re-spin processing is executed. The flag is initialized when the re-spin processing is stopped as a result of being executed, so that the re-spin processing is not executed when power is turned on normally. The flag indicating that slip control has not been completed may be an error flag or a game status flag.

In addition, when a power cut process is performed during slip control, the re-rotation process may be performed automatically after the power is restored, or an error may occur after the power is restored and the re-rotation process is performed after the error is released using a reset switch. Either aspect is applicable to the re-rotation process in the following embodiments.

In addition, a power-off process may be performed during slip control, and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and at a constant speed, or during at a constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the above-mentioned 180), the acceleration process is performed again. Possible causes of rotation failure in this case include the reel being held by hand, loss of synchronism due to a motor malfunction, or deterioration of components over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized in the initialization process when the power is turned on, and the rotation failure detection counter starts updating (counting) as the re-spin process is executed. Then, after the index is detected for the first time after the power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter starts again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to the stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after the first index is detected in this way, even if the position of the reel stopped due to the power-off process is the position immediately after the index has passed, and the stop position is the position immediately before the index has passed, it is possible to stop the reel to the stop position without detecting a rotation failure. In other words, the reel rotates approximately two revolutions from when the power is turned on until it stops, but it is not determined that there is a rotation failure.

Note that the timing for initializing the rotation failure detection counter is when the power is turned on, but this is not limited to the above. The rotation failure detection counter may be initialized when the stop switch 13 is received, or when the reel state becomes a constant speed state.

In this way, power cut processing is performed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during re-rotation processing after power is restored, making it possible to prevent the stop position from shifting due to step-out, etc., even during re-rotation, and to stop the motor at the planned stop position. Furthermore, since rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not performed if step-out, etc., occurs during normal slip control.

Next, if a power cut process is executed during slip control and an error (recoverable error) is detected during the re-spin process after the power is restored, an error is notified after the re-spin process is completed. The errors detected at this time are any of the following errors: medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error, hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error, door open error, harness disconnection error, etc. In addition to the error code displayed on the number of acquired coins display 27, the error can be notified by an LCD, a speaker, or by lighting the upper or both side performance lamps or performance switch lamps in a specified color (for example, a highly visible and noticeable color such as red or blue). Note that the error can be notified by only one error notification or by a combination of multiple error notifications.

In this way, by making the error notification after the re-spin process is completed, it becomes possible to make it easier for players and game center personnel to recognize whether the notification is for a re-spin or an error. If a re-spin notification is being made during a re-spin, the re-spin notification is terminated after the re-spin is completed and switched to an error notification. During a re-spin, no error notification is made, and notifications related to re-spin that are not error notifications are not made.

The error modes during the re-spinning process described above are not limited to these, and only some errors may be detected (for example, a hopper accumulation error may be detected but a medal accumulation error may not be detected), and the error notification mode may be such that after an error is detected, the error is notified by the acquired coin count display 27, and when the re-spinning process is completed and the reels stop, the error is notified by the LCD or speaker, or the error is notified by the acquired coin count display 27, LCD, or speaker after an error is detected.

Then, power is cut off during slip control, and during the re-spin process after power is restored, the light on the stop switch 13 is disabled, so that the corresponding reel will not stop even if the stop switch 13 is operated.

In addition to power recovery after a power outage during slip control, situations in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on also include power recovery after a power outage during normal reel rotation. When power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation, the reel can be stopped, and the illumination state of the lamp on the stop switch 13 is in an effective state. Therefore, by checking the illumination state of the lamp on the stop switch 13 when the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel is undergoing a re-spin process or normal reel rotation is occurring.

Another situation in which the reels spin when the power is turned on is when the power is restored after being turned off while the reels are frozen. Types of freezes in which the reels spin include pseudo-games in which temporary stop control is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and reel effects in which the reels do not stop spinning even when the stop switch 13 is operated.

During simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 lamp is in an active state, and when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 lamp is in an active state, so when the reels spin when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reels are in the reel re-spinning process or are spinning normally by checking the light on the stop switch 13 lamp.

During reel performance, the light of the stop switch 13 is in an invalid state, and when power is restored after a power outage during reel performance, the light of the stop switch 13 is in an invalid state, so when the reel spins when the power is turned on, it is not possible to determine whether the reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress from the light of the stop switch 13. In this case, however, it is possible to determine this by checking a display device such as an LCD or an error display. Note that even if the light of the stop switch is in an invalid state during reel performance, when the operation of other main system switches (switches managed by the main control means 100) is enabled, the light of the other main system switches is in an valid state, so it is possible to determine whether the reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress by checking the light of the other main system switches.

In addition, when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play or reel presentation, the reels may not be rotated. In this case, since the reels do not rotate when power is restored, it is easy to determine whether or not a re-spin process is in progress based on the way the reels spin.

Next, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and then executed again during re-rotation processing after power is restored, the motor will rotate until the index is detected after power is restored, and then move to the planned stop position again and stop. Note that if power-off processing is executed just before the index is detected, and the index is not detected during acceleration after power is restored, the motor will rotate again until the index is detected, which can also be said to be the case.

In this way, the re-spin process can be executed even if the power is restored after a power outage during the re-spin process, making it possible to display the stopped symbols to the player even in an unstable situation where multiple power outages may occur.

Here, the timing when the power-off process is executed during slip control and then executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored can be either before the index is detected during the re-rotation process or after the index is detected during the re-rotation process.

<Pattern 1> If the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, before the index is detected during the re-rotation process, the motor may rotate until the index is detected during the second re-rotation process after the power is restored, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, the index is not detected in the first re-rotation process and the reference pattern position is not stored, so the second re-rotation process determines that the reference pattern position has not been stored and executes another rotation to detect the index, allowing the reel to stop at the planned stopping position.

<Pattern 2-1> Furthermore, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, this can be after the index is detected during the re-rotation process (as long as the sensor detects the index, this also includes the timing of the moment the sensor detects the index; the same applies below), then after the power is restored, the reel can be rotated to the planned stop position based on the reference pattern position according to the index detected before the power was removed, and then stopped.

In this case, since the index is detected during the first re-spin process, the reel can stop at the planned stopping position based on the stored reference symbol position, making it possible to shorten the time until gameplay can be resumed by the time it takes to detect the index.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-1, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (output of four-phase excitation), even if the timing when the power-off process is executed is that the rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position, or even if the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, the re-rotation process or stop control will be executed based on the stored reference pattern position without detecting the index again after the power is restored.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, so the process is not complicated and the program can be speeded up.

<Pattern 2-2> Also, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, and the timing is after the index is detected during the re-rotation process, it is possible to detect the index again after the power is restored, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, taking into consideration the possibility that the reel may have moved between the second power outage and when power is restored, the reel will rotate again until the index is detected again, allowing the reel to rotate more accurately to the intended stopping position.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-2, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (output of four-phase excitation), even if the timing when the power-off process is executed is that the rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position, or even if the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, a re-rotation process is executed to detect the index again after the power is restored, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped there.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, so the process is not complicated and the program can be speeded up.

<Pattern 2-3> Also, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the timing at which the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has not rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process or stop control is executed based on the stored reference pattern position without detecting the index again after the power is restored, and if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the timing at which the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored is after the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process to detect the index again after the power is restored is executed, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped.

In this way, the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process can be precisely controlled after the reference power source is restored, making it possible to execute appropriate processing according to the situation in which the power-off process was executed.

<Explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects applicable to this embodiment> Next, the relationship between the winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects applicable to this embodiment will be explained.

In the effects that can be applied to this embodiment described below, it is possible to simultaneously output both winning effects associated with the payout process of gaming medals based on the winning of minor roles such as push order roles, settlement effects associated with the settlement process, and deposit effects associated with betting operations, with the aim of preventing the player from mistakenly thinking that the settlement was not performed properly or that the deposit was not performed properly, and allowing the player to recognize that the gaming machine is functioning normally.

The configuration related to the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects that can be applied to this embodiment will be explained below.

<Main control means> The main processes of the main control means are as described in this embodiment, but details of the processes omitted in the description of this embodiment are explained below.

<Processing when gaming medals are inserted> If gaming medals are in a state where they can be inserted, when the gaming medals are inserted, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit, a bet (also called a bet) is set for the number of medals inserted, and if it is set to the upper limit, the number of medals inserted is added to the credit. Also, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit and the number of medals that can be bet is stored in the credit, a bet is set in response to the operation of the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Here, inserting a gaming medal is equivalent to the gaming medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 17 passing normally through the medal selector 34. Note that if the gaming medals have been bet set or are stored in the credit and before the game starts (after the required bet number has been set and before the start lever is operated), settlement processing can be performed by operating the settlement switch. Furthermore, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000, also referred to as the presentation control means) when a gaming medal is inserted, and transmits a reserve insertion command to the sub-control means according to the number of medals set for the bet when the bet switch is operated. When credits are accumulated (added), the main control means transmits a reserve number command indicating the current number of accumulated medals to the sub-control means. Based on these commands, the sub-control means can execute insertion presentations such as outputting the sound of a gaming medal being inserted.

<Winning Process (Payout Process)> The winning process (hereinafter also referred to as the payout process) is a process of paying out a predetermined game medal according to the winning minor combination (the stopped and displayed symbol combination) when it is determined that the minor combination has won a prize by the winning determination process. Paying out the game medal here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on a winning (whether it is the addition of credits or the payout from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on a winning. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means is capable of executing a winning performance such as outputting a payout sound of the game medals and executing a back lamp performance (also referred to as a BL performance). The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a win in replay). When there is a loss or a win in replay, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, and then the payout end command is sent.

<Settlement process> When the settlement switch is operated while no game is being played, a process (settlement) is executed in which game medals in a number corresponding to the set bet amount or the accumulated credit amount are paid out to the player from the hopper 44. When the settlement process is started, the main control means sends a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process is completed, the main control means sends a settlement end command to the sub-control means. Based on the settlement start command and settlement end command, the sub-control means can execute settlement effects such as outputting a settlement sound.

<Secondary control means> Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the results of the lottery (internal lottery results), push order navigation effects can be executed during the AT, and insertion effects, winning effects, settlement effects, etc. can be executed.

<Insert effect> This effect is executed when a gaming medal is inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insertion sound is output based on the medal insertion command or reserve insertion command sent from the main control means. The main control means sets the reserve insertion command as either a reserve insertion command (1 medal), a reserve insertion command (2 medals), or a reserve insertion command (3 medals) depending on the number of medals set for the bet, and the set reserve insertion command is sent to the sub-control means. When the reserve insertion command (1 medal) is received, insertion sound A indicating that one medal has been bet is output once (for example, a "da" sound is output), informing the player that one medal has been bet. When the reserve insertion command (3 medals) is received, insertion sound A is output three times, informing the player that three medals have been bet. When a medal insertion command is received, if the inserted gaming medals are set as a bet, insertion sound A is output once, and if they are stored, insertion sound B indicating that one medal has been stored is output once (for example, a "di" sound is output), to notify the player that a bet has been made or that medals have been stored. Note that when a stored insertion command (3 medals) is received, insertion sound C indicating that three medals have been bet may be output instead of outputting insertion sound A three times, or the same sound may be output when a bet has been made and when medals have been stored (for example, insertion sound A is output in all states). Also, a different sound (insertion sound D) may be output during normal times (non-AT) and during AT.

<Winning effect> This effect is executed when the game medals are paid out. It is executed based on the payout start command and the payout end command, and a payout sound is output to indicate that the game medals are being paid out, and a backlight effect is executed.

<Output of payout sound> There are two different payout sounds for game medals that are output during the execution of the payout process of game medals: payout sound A and payout sound B. Payout sound A is a payout sound that is output when a push order role is won during normal times (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops, and an advantageous payout is made. Payout sound B is a payout sound that is output when a push order role is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops, and an advantageous payout is made. If the correct push order is not used, an incorrect pattern combination may stop and an unfavorable payout may be made, but in that case, no payout sound is output. Payout sound A is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after repeating the output of the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) after receiving the payout end command. By outputting the payout sound A for a first payout sound period (the period during which the actual payout is being made plus the first specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being made (the period during which the payout process is being performed), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. In addition, by outputting the payout sound for a first payout sound period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being made, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed, which will make it easier for a performance based on the result of an internal lottery to be performed without being canceled midway, for example, when the performance is being performed over a certain period of time.

The payout sound B starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of the second sound (e.g., a "de" sound) until a payout end command is received, and ends after repeating the output of the second sound for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the payout end command is received. That is, the payout sound B outputs a sound for a second payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned second specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, and this second payout sound period is longer than the first payout sound period of the payout sound A. In this way, the payout sound B can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded by outputting the payout sound for a longer period than the payout sound A. In addition, by outputting the payout sound B, which is different from the payout sound A, during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in a favorable state that is different from the normal state. In addition, the payout sound is output until the first or second specific time has elapsed after the end payout command is received, but when the start payout command is received, the payout sound may be output for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals) plus the first or second specific time, without being triggered by the end payout command. Also, although the payout sound A during normal times and the payout sound B during AT are different, the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp performance> There are two different types of back lamp performance: back lamp performance A and back lamp performance B. Back lamp performance A is a back lamp performance that is output when the push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the correct pattern combination stops as a result of operation in the correct push order, resulting in an advantageous payout. Back lamp performance B is a back lamp performance that is executed when the push order role is won during AT, and the correct pattern combination stops as a result of operation in the correct push order, resulting in an advantageous payout. If the operation is not performed in the correct push order, an incorrect pattern combination may stop, in which case the back lamp performance is not executed. Back lamp performance A starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern until a payout end command is received, and after the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. By executing the back lamp performance A for a first back lamp performance period (the period during which the actual payout is being made plus the first specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being made, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Also, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance A for a first back lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being made, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which the back lamp performance A is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game, and furthermore, when a performance based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is more likely to be executed without being canceled midway.

The back lamp performance B starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the second pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the second pattern for a second specific time (for example, 2 seconds) and ends. In other words, the back lamp performance B is repeatedly turned on and off for a second back lamp performance period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the second specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, and this second back lamp performance period is longer than the first back lamp performance period. In this way, the back lamp performance B can be made to recognize that more game medals have been awarded by executing the back lamp performance for a longer period than the back lamp performance A. In addition, by executing the back lamp performance B, which is different from the back lamp performance A, during the AT, it is easier to recognize that the player is in an advantageous state that is different from the normal state.

Note that the back lamp performance is executed from the time the payout end command is received until the first specific time or the second specific time has elapsed, but when the payout start command is received, the back lamp performance may be executed for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer than the addition of credits and the payout of game medals) plus the first specific time or the second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. In addition, the back lamp performance is different during normal play and during AT, but the same back lamp performance may be executed. In addition, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a certain pattern, but a series of on and off patterns may be determined and output from the start to the end of the back lamp performance. In addition, the "first back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance A and the "first payout sound period" of the payout sound A are both the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the first specific time, and both are the same period, but these "first back lamp performance period" and "first payout sound period" may be different periods from each other. The same applies to the relationship between the "second back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance B and the "second payout sound period" of the payout sound B. In short, the "first payout sound period" and "second payout sound period" of the payout sounds A and B, and the "first back lamp performance period" and "second back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance A and B are each longer than the period during which actual payouts are being performed, and as long as the relationship is "first payout sound period" < "second payout sound period" and "first back lamp performance period" < "second back lamp performance period," these periods can be set appropriately.

<Settlement effect> This effect is executed when the game medals are settled, and is executed based on the settlement start command and settlement end command. A settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out and a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed are output. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and a sound different from the payout sound (for example, a "do" sound) is repeatedly output until the payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the sound ends with the output of a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed, such as "Settlement has been completed," within a third specific period (for example, 5 seconds). In other words, in the settlement effect, the sound is output over a predetermined settlement effect period (the period during which the actual payout is being performed plus the third specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the settlement process is being performed).

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to Figs. 22 to 26. Fig. 22 is a time chart when the insertion operation by the MAX BET switch is not performed after the payout process is completed, Fig. 23 is a time chart when the insertion operation by the MAX BET switch is performed after the payout process is completed, Fig. 24 is a time chart when the settlement operation by the settlement switch is performed after the payout process is completed, Fig. 25 is a time chart when the game medal is not inserted after the settlement process is completed, and Fig. 26 is a time chart when the game medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. Note that, for convenience of explanation, ON and OFF are used in Figs. 22 to 26, but the corresponding processing and the status of the performance are described in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/BL performance/settlement performance, ON indicates a state in which the performance is being performed, and OFF indicates a state in which the performance is not being performed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the processing etc. is started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that it is ended. For the payout sound/insertion sound, ON indicates that it is being output, and OFF indicates that it is not being output. For the MAX bet lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that it is lit, and OFF indicates that it is not lit. For the MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that it has been operated, and OFF indicates that it has not been operated. For the insertion of medals, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that the game medal has not been inserted.

<When the MAX BET switch is not used to insert a coin after the payout process is completed> As shown in FIG. 22, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts outputting a payout sound A (referred to as a payout sound in the figure, the same applies below) and a back lamp effect A (referred to as a BL effect in the figure, the same applies below) based on the payout start command received. At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means continues outputting the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A as a winning effect for the T1 period (first specific time) based on the payout end command. After the payout process is completed at time t1, the main control means performs a process such as updating the RT state (a game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert a coin. The main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert a coin at time t2. The MAX BET lamp continues to be lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, the T1 period has elapsed since time t1, so the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period and the first back lamp effect period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A while turning on the MAX BET lamp from time t1 onwards. By continuing to output the payout sound A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed> As shown in FIG. 23, up to the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is operated. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp performance A, and outputs the insertion sound A (written as the insertion sound in the figure, the same below) three times as the insertion performance from the timing of time t3 to the timing of time t4 (during the T2 period). Even if various situations such as outputting the payout sound A and outputting the insertion sound A are combined at the timing after time t3, smooth control is possible, and this allows the player to recognize that the payout has been performed, while also being aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been performed, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Also, at time t3, the payout sound A continues to be output, but by ending the back lamp effect A, the player is made aware by sound that a payout has been made, and is made aware by sight that a bet has been set. Note that while FIG. 23 illustrates the insertion operation using the MAX BET switch, the insertion sound can also be output by inserting a coin using the 1 BET switch or inserting a coin.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement button after the payout process is completed> As shown in FIG. 24, up to the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the insertion operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the settlement button is operated instead of the operation of the MAX bet switch. At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp performance A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the lapse of the T1 period. After that, it starts outputting the settlement sound as a settlement performance based on the settlement start command. At the timing of time t6, the main control means ends the settlement process and sends a settlement completion command to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the settlement completion command, it replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that settlement has been completed for the T3 period (third specific time). When the settlement process is started, if the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output simultaneously, it will confuse the player, so by ending the output of the payout sound A and the backlight effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, when the settlement process is started, the player can be made to accurately recognize that a settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<When no gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed> As shown in FIG. 25, at time t8, the main control means starts the settlement process, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the settlement start command received. Here, the back lamp effect is not executed (output) during settlement, so that the payout process and the settlement process can be visually different processes. At time t9, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the settlement end command, it replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed for a period of T3. After the settlement process is completed at time t9, the main control means turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert gaming medals. At time t10, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert gaming medals. Since no medals were inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T13, the T3 period has elapsed since time t9, so the sub-control means ends the output of the sound indicating that the settlement has been completed. As described above, the settlement presentation is being executed from time t10 onwards, but it is possible to insert a coin.

<When a gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed> As shown in FIG. 26, up to the timing of time t10, the situation is the same as when a gaming medal is not inserted after the settlement process is completed, and at the timing of time t11, the main control means inserts a gaming medal, sets a bet on one medal, and sends a medal insertion command to the sub-control means. Upon receiving the medal insertion command, the sub-control means outputs insertion sound A once as an insertion effect, and this output continues from the timing of time t11 to the timing of time t12. Even when various situations are combined after the timing of time t11, such as outputting a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed while outputting insertion sound A, smooth control is possible, and this makes it possible to make the player aware that the settlement process has been completed, while also making him aware that a medal has been inserted and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. In addition, in the example of Fig. 22 to Fig. 26, the payout sound is payout sound A and the BL effect is back lamp effect A, but in Fig. 22 to Fig. 26, the payout sound may be payout sound B and the BL effect may be back lamp effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the T1 period in Fig. 22 and Fig. 38 is to be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effect as described above is achieved.

<Changes in mode> A configuration has been described in which the same sound is repeatedly output during the payout process or the settlement process until it is completed. In addition to the above-mentioned commands, a command indicating that one coin has been paid out or a command that can identify the number of remaining coins to be paid out may be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means each time a coin is paid out, and the sub-control means may output a payout sound or a settlement sound each time one coin is paid out based on receiving these commands transmitted from the main control means. In addition, the settlement sound is a different sound from the payout sound, but it may be the same sound as the payout sound. By making them the same sound, the sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. If they are the same sound, the payout process and the settlement process can be distinguished by the presence or absence of a backlight effect, and the player can be made to recognize that the settlement process is being performed appropriately even if the settlement process is performed immediately after the payout process. In addition, the settlement sound may be the same sound as the error sound. In this case, the sound data can also be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. Also, during the AT, the payout sound B is output, but in addition to outputting the payout sound B from the start of the payout process, a sound such as "get" or "yes!" indicating the correct push order may be output from the start of the payout process to the end of the payout process and within a time period shorter than the second specific time (2 seconds) that has elapsed. By outputting the sound indicating the correct push order, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated correctly, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct push order, the player can recognize that the game medals have also been properly paid out. Also, although the MAX BET lamp is turned on and off by the main control means, the main control means may transmit to the sub-control means whether the MAX BET switch is in an operable state or not, and the sub-control means may turn the lamp on and off.

Also, as the insert effect, it has been described that an insert sound is output, but in addition to outputting the insert sound, an image indicating the insert may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the user that the insert has been made. As the winning effect, it has been described that a payout sound is output and a back lamp effect is executed, but an image indicating that a win has been made (for example, displaying GET) on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the user that the win has been made. In this case, when executing the insert effect, the display device 32 may end the display as the winning effect, or the LED lamp may end the notification, or the display device 32 may not display or the LED lamp may not be used as the insert effect. As the settlement effect, it has been described that a settlement sound is output and a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed is output, but an image indicating that the settlement process is being performed on the display device 32 (for example, displaying settlement in progress) may be displayed, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the user that the settlement is being performed. In this case, when the insertion effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 or the notification on the LED lamp as the settlement effect may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 or the notification on the LED lamp as the insertion effect may not be executed. Also, although the winning effect is executed for the push order role, it may be executed for other minor roles (such as the watermelon role, the bell role or the cherry role that do not require pushing order, etc.). For other minor roles, a payout sound different from the push order role is output, or a back lamp effect different from the push order role is executed, so that it is easy to recognize that a role different from the push order role has won. Also, the time and length of the period in this embodiment are merely examples, and various changes are possible.

<Explanation of errors related to the hopper 44 that can be applied to this embodiment and winning effects> Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 that can be applied to this embodiment and winning effects will be explained.

In the presentation applicable to this embodiment described below, the purpose is to allow the player to recognize the results of the game or presentation before a hopper empty error occurs when a winning presentation is performed following the start of the payout process or a presentation after the reels have stopped.

The following describes the configuration related to errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Main control means> The main processing of the main control means is as described in the present embodiment and the explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects that are applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processing that are omitted in the description of this embodiment are explained below.

<Winning Process (Payout Process)> The payout process is a process for paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor role (the symbol combination stopped and displayed) when it is determined by the winning determination process that a minor role has won. Paying out game medals here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. In order to pay out game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal to the hopper motor (ON state), and ejects game medals one by one by rotating the turntable, and when the payout sensor detects the game medal for a predetermined time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it is determined that one game medal has been paid out. In addition, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting a payout based on a win (whether it is adding credits or paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when it is to end the payout. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as displaying the payout number and the cumulative difference in the number of medals. The payout start command includes information on the number of medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are also transmitted when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a win in a replay). When there is a loss or a win in a replay, information on the number of medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Errors related to the hopper 44> As errors related to the hopper 44, a hopper retention error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected. The hopper retention error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the payout outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals when the game medals are paid out, the hopper empty error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper are empty, and the abnormality detection error is an error that occurs when it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor of the hopper 44. When the main control means detects an error and notifies the error, it transmits an error notification start command including information on the type of error to the sub-control means, and transmits an error recovery command when the error is released. Based on the error notification start command, the sub-control means displays error information (error screen) corresponding to the type of error detected on the display device 32, and based on the error recovery command, ends the error screen display and returns to the display before the error occurred. In addition, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing when the abnormality detection error is detected, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality has been detected based on the error detection command.

<Hopper retention error> When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor to perform the medal dispense operation that rotates the rotating wheel, and if the dispense sensor continues to detect the medal for a certain period of time (201 ms) or more, it is determined that the game medals are jammed, and a hopper retention error is set. <Hopper empty error> When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor to perform the medal dispense operation that rotates the rotating wheel, but if the dispense sensor does not detect any game medals for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds), it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, and a hopper empty error is set. <Abnormality detection error> When the dispense sensor detects an abnormal input for a certain period of time (3 ms) or more when the game medals are not being dispensed, it is determined that an abnormality has been input to the dispense sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. The error is displayed when no game is being played (when waiting for game medals to be inserted, when waiting for the start lever to be accepted).

<Secondary control means> Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the results of the role selection (internal lottery results), error notifications can be executed, push order navigation effects can be executed during the AT, winning effects can be executed, the result screen can be displayed, result announcement effects can be executed, etc.

<Winning Effects> These effects are executed when game medals are paid out, and include an acquisition display effect that indicates that a predetermined number of game medals are being paid out, and an accumulation display effect that indicates that the game medals won by the player have accumulated to a predetermined number. The acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect are executed based on the sub-control means receiving a payout start command.

<Acquisition display performance> The acquisition display performance is a performance executed when the push order role is won during the AT, and the correct symbol combination stops as a result of the correct push order operation, and an advantageous payout is performed. The acquisition display performance may be displayed as "GET" without specifying the game medals to be paid out, or may be displayed as "12 medals GET" so that it is specified that 12 game medals will be paid out. If the push order role is won during the AT and the correct push order operation is not performed, an incorrect symbol combination stops and an unfavorable payout (a payout of a smaller number of game medals than the correct symbol combination, such as a payout of 1 medal) may be performed, but in that case the acquisition display performance is not executed. The acquisition display performance starts when a payout start command is received, and is executed for a predetermined acquisition display performance period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed). Therefore, it is executed even if all the game medals to be actually paid out to the player have not been paid out. This is to prevent the display of winning from being canceled when the next game starts, or from being confused with the result of the next game, if the display of winning is executed after all medals have been paid out. Also, by executing the display of winning even if all game medals have not been paid out, the player can be made aware of the result of the game (that a payout will be obtained) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect> The cumulative display effect is an effect that is executed when the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT (also referred to as the total number of game medals) exceeds a specified number for the first time (500, 1000, 1500, 2000). Specifically, the cumulative number of acquired medals is counted during one AT from the start of the AT, and the cumulative display effect is executed (started) when it is determined that the cumulative number exceeds 500 due to the payout of game medals. After that, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and exceeds 500 again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. As for the mode of the cumulative display effect, "500 medals GET" is displayed according to the specified number. The cumulative display effect is started when a payout start command is received and it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed the specified number due to the payout, and is executed for a predetermined cumulative display effect period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). As with the acquisition display effect, it is executed even if the game medals actually paid out to the player do not exceed the specified number. This is to prevent the timing of the cumulative display effect being inconsistent when the cumulative display effect is executed when the specified number is actually exceeded, resulting in the effect being canceled when the next game starts, or being confused with the result of the next game. Also, by executing the cumulative display effect even if the specified number has not been exceeded, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of that game (exceeding the specified number) in advance. Note that while the conditions for executing both the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may be met in one game, in this embodiment, in games in which the cumulative display effect can be executed, as a general rule, only the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. However, cases in which the acquisition display effect is executed, which differs from the general rule, will be described later.

<Display of the result screen> The result screen displayed in this embodiment is a screen displayed when the AT ends, and displays the total number of game medals acquired during the AT, the number of games indicating the execution period of the AT, etc. When the result screen is displayed, a display for calling attention (a display to prevent addiction) is also displayed. When the final game of the AT ends (when the command to stop all reels is received), the display of the result screen begins, and the display of the result screen continues until the next game begins. Note that while the result screen is displayed in the final game, only the acquisition display effect can be executed, and even if any of the specified numbers is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect is not executed. For example, if a push order role is won and the correct push order is operated, the correct pattern combination stops, an advantageous payout is made, and the specified number of 500 coins is exceeded, if it is not the final game, the cumulative display effect is executed, but if it is the final game, the result screen is displayed, so the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. This is because the result screen displays the total number of medals won during the AT, and if the cumulative display effect is also performed, similar information will be displayed on top of each other, confusing the player.

<Result Notification Effects> The result notification effects are effects that notify the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and are effects that are executed in the final game of a series of effects. Specifically, the result notification effects are effects that notify the player of whether an advantageous result has been obtained, such as winning a bonus, winning an additional number of games remaining in the AT, or winning a specialized zone that increases the chances of additional bonuses. As an example, the result of a battle effect or the like notifies the player of whether an advantageous result has been obtained. If an advantageous result has been obtained, an image indicating success or victory is displayed, and if an advantageous result has not been obtained, an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. In a battle effect, a lever operation is triggered to display a screen in which an ally character and an enemy character face off against each other, and after all the reels have stopped (due to receipt of a command to stop all reels), the ally character and the enemy character compete against each other, and after a certain amount of time has passed and the effect branching timing, an image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. The timing for branching occurs 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result notification effect ends when an image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat, is displayed, which is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process. This means that the result notification effect ends before a hopper empty error occurs (is detected) and an error screen is displayed, allowing the player to check whether or not they have achieved a favorable result, regardless of the occurrence of an error. Note that since the command to stop all reels and the command to start payout are sent at approximately the same time, the start of the payout process described above may be replaced with after all reels have stopped.

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to Figs. 27 to 32. Fig. 27 is a time chart when payout is performed normally, Fig. 28 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), Fig. 29 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs), Fig. 30 is an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally, Fig. 31 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and Fig. 32 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). Note that, for convenience of explanation, ON and OFF are used in Figs. 27 to 29, but the status of the corresponding process or effect is described in parentheses. Specifically, ON of the payout process indicates a state in which it is being executed, and OFF
indicates a state where the game is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that processing, etc. is started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that the game is finished. ON for payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. ON for the acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect indicates a state where the effect is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that the effect is not being executed (not displayed). ON for the result notification effect indicates a state where the effect is being executed (the effect is progressing), and OFF indicates that the effect is not being executed (the effect has ended and the display has stopped on the screen announcing the result). ON for error (empty hopper) and error (hopper retention) indicates a state where an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates a state where no error has occurred. ON for error display indicates a state where an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates a state where no error code or error screen is displayed.

Figures 30 to 32 show the case where the acquisition display effect is executed, and when the cumulative display effect is executed, the notation "GET 12 coins" displayed in the acquisition display effect in the figures changes to the notation "GET 500 coins" displayed in the cumulative display effect.

It is possible to combine the winning effect, settlement effect and deposit effect described above, and times t0 and t1 in Figures 22 to 24 are the same as times t0 and t1 in Figure 27. Time t5 in Figures 22 and 23 is later than time t1 in Figure 27 and earlier than time t15.

<When payout is performed normally> As shown in FIG. 27, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. One second later, at time t14, the sub-control means ends the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect. After that, at time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. The time related to the payout process is 1.5 seconds when it is performed normally (in this example, 12 game medals are paid out normally). The acquisition display effect starts when the payout process starts and ends before the payout process ends. This allows the player to recognize that he will acquire game medals and that the cumulative number of acquired game medals will exceed a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. The result notification effect is executed from the start of the game, so it is already being executed when the payout process starts. At time t15, the result notification effect branches off, and the display from this point onwards differs between displaying an image indicating success or victory, and displaying an image indicating failure or defeat. At time t16, the result notification effect that was being executed ends. Time t15 is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<When payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs)> As shown in FIG. 28, at the timing of time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, the game medals are not paid out and the rotation of the wheel continues. Then, at the timing of time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of a hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means displays an error screen. At the other timings of t14, t15, and t16, as in FIG. 27, at the timing of time t14, the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect ends, at the timing of time t15, the effect branching timing occurs, and at the timing of time t16, the result notification effect ends. The period during which the winning display effect and the cumulative display effect are executed and the period until the result notification effect ends are set shorter than the period from when the payout process begins until the hopper empty error occurs, making it possible to check the contents of the winning display effect, the cumulative display effect, and the result notification effect before the hopper empty error occurs and the error screen is displayed. Note that the figure shows a case in which a hopper empty error occurs when not a single medal is paid out after the payout process begins, and if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing of the hopper empty error will be later than time t17 by the amount of time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out.

<When payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)> As shown in FIG. 29, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of the game medals is not executed because the game medals are stuck at the outlet of the hopper 44. Then, at time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 has been continuously detected for more than 201 ms since the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that the game medals are stuck, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. Also at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the acquisition display effect or cumulative display effect that was being executed and the result notification effect that was also being executed, and displays an error screen. The acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the start of the payout process, and is executed before the payout process starts and a hopper retention error occurs, so it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect before the error screen is displayed. Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs when not a single medal is paid out after the start of the payout process. If a hopper retention error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out, and the period for executing the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect will be longer.

Although the execution of the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect is canceled and not displayed, the effect itself may be executed while an error screen is displayed superimposed on the effect to make it invisible. In this case, if the error is cleared during the execution of an effect, the effect being executed becomes visible from the moment the error is cleared. However, a reset switch must be operated to clear the error, and since the reset switch is located inside the cabinet, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Normally, it takes more than three seconds from the start of the payout process to the end of the result notification effect before the error can be cleared, so even if a hopper retention error occurs and the hopper retention error is cleared in the shortest time possible, the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect will not return to being executed, but will return to the screen after all effects have finished.

<Display screen when payout is performed normally> Figure 30 shows an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally. Figure 30 shows a scene in which a game has been played with 11 games remaining in the AT and a total of 230 game medals have been won, and a battle effect (result announcement effect) is being executed. The number of remaining games is displayed in the upper left of the screen (since the game was played with 11 games remaining, one is subtracted and it is displayed as 10G (games)). The total number of game medals won in the AT is displayed as 230 in the upper right of the screen. Friendly characters (characters indicated by round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters indicated by star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

Figure (a) shows the screen when all reels have stopped during the battle performance (received command to stop all reels), and the performance progresses from this point on to announce the results. Figure (b) shows the screen at time t0 in Figure 27, which indicates the timing when the payout process has started. One game medal has been paid out, and the total number of game medals is increased from 230 to 231, and the display "GET 12 medals" moves from the right side of the screen toward the center so that it can be specified that 12 game medals will be paid out as an acquisition display performance. In the center of the screen, a competition between ally characters and enemy characters has begun. Figure (c) shows the time when three game medals have been paid out, and "GET 12 medals" is displayed large in the center of the screen so that it can be specified that 12 game medals will be paid out as an acquisition display performance. The competition between ally characters and enemy characters continues.

27(d) shows the timing when eight game medals have been paid out, and the large "12 medals GET" display in the center of the screen is moving toward the left side of the screen toward the end of the acquisition display effect. FIG. 27(e) shows the timing of time t15 in FIG. 27, when the payout of game medals has ended and the effect branching timing has occurred. Since the payout of game medals has ended, the total number of game medals is displayed as 242. In the center of the screen, the ally character and enemy character continue to compete. FIG. 27(f) shows the timing after the effect branching timing, and the process of displaying an image indicating success is displayed. The ally character is enlarged from the competition between the ally character and enemy character, and it is possible to recognize that it has been a success. FIG. 27(g) shows the timing of time t16 in FIG. 27, when the battle effect ends. "Success" is displayed in the lower right of the screen, clearly indicating that it was a success effect. The image displayed in FIG. 27(g) ends as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the next game starts. Figure (h) shows the timing after the branching point in the effect, and shows the process of displaying an image indicating failure. The enemy character is enlarged in the image of the friendly character competing with the enemy character, making it clear that this will result in failure. Figure (i) shows the timing of time t16 in Figure 27, when the battle effect ends. "Failure" is displayed in the bottom right of the screen, making it clear that the effect indicated failure. The image displayed in Figure (i) has ended as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the start of the next game.

<Display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs)> Figure 31 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). From (a) to (i) in the same figure, the flow of the acquisition display effect, the accumulation display effect, and the result notification effect is the same as in Figure 30. However, since no game medals are paid out after the payout process begins, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and is not updated. Figure 31 (j) is the timing of time t17 in Figure 28, when no game medals are detected for 3.5 seconds after the payout process begins, so the hopper empty error is set in the main control means and the error screen indicating the hopper empty error is displayed in the sub control means. The same image is displayed whether an image indicating success or failure is displayed before the hopper empty error occurs.

<Display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)> Figure 32 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). From (a) to (c) of the same figure, the flow of the acquisition display effect, the cumulative display effect, and the result notification effect is the same as in Figure 30. However, since no game medals have been paid out since the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and has not been updated. (k) of the same figure
is the timing of time t18 in Fig. 29, when a hopper retention error is set in the main control means and a screen indicating the hopper retention error is displayed in the sub-control means. If the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect for 201 ms or more after the start of the payout process, the main control means determines that game medals are jammed and sets a hopper retention error. When the main control means sets a hopper retention error, it transmits a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper retention error to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the command indicating the occurrence of a hopper retention error, it displays a screen indicating the hopper retention error on the display device 32.

<Changes in mode> The period during which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are performed is set to a shorter period (1 second) than the period (1.5 seconds) required when the payout process is performed normally, but it may be set to a longer period. Specifically, it may be set to a period longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period required to detect a hopper empty error (3.5 seconds). By setting the period longer than the period required when the payout process is performed, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect can be more easily seen by the player. In addition, the period required when the payout process is performed normally is set to 1.5 seconds, but the required time may be different depending on the number of coins in the payout process and whether the payout process is only the addition of credits or includes the payout of game medals from the hopper. In addition, although only one of the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect is performed, when the conditions for performing both effects are met, the cumulative display effect may be performed after the acquisition display effect. The winning display effect ends one second after the payout process begins, and the cumulative display effect is executed for one second thereafter, so that the player can recognize the contents of the cumulative display effect even if a hopper empty error occurs. In addition, the winning display effect is executed when a push order role is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order-independent role (a so-called shared bell) that results in an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) regardless of the push order is won, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order-independent role stops.

The acquisition display effect may have multiple types of modes when a favorable payout (payout of 12 coins) is executed. Specifically, the color and font when "GET 12 coins" is displayed may be different depending on the state. More specifically, the color and font may be different depending on whether the state is favorable for winning the AT addition, or the color and font may be different during the premonition of the occurrence of a continuous effect or during the premonition of the transition to the addition specialization zone. By varying the mode of the acquisition display effect, the player can be informed that he or she will acquire game medals, and can be made to expect that a favorable situation may occur in the next game or later. In addition, the color and font when "GET 12 coins" is displayed may be different depending on the setting value set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can be provided each time the acquisition display effect is executed. In addition, the cumulative display effect may have a mode that can be displayed only when a specific setting value is set, other than for each specified number. Specifically, when the set value is set to "2," "4," or "6," if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 246 for the first time, "GET 246" is displayed. This may be displayed whenever the number exceeds 246, or it may be displayed only if a lottery is held and a winner is drawn. By suggesting the setting with the content displayed in the cumulative display effect, not only can the player be notified of the cumulative number, but information for guessing the setting value set in the gaming machine can also be provided. Only when the set value is set to "6," "GET 666" may be displayed if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 666 for the first time. In addition, multiple display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. may be provided for each specified number, and the setting value set in the gaming machine or the state may be suggested depending on the displayed display mode.

The acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect can be executed during the AT, and even if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds a specified number only while the result screen is displayed, the acquisition display effect is executed without executing the cumulative display effect, but other situations in which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are not executed may be provided. Specifically, in a situation called a pseudo bonus, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. Also, in a situation during a pseudo bonus executed during the AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, and only the cumulative display effect may be executed. Also, in a situation such as a preparation period before starting the AT, an AT start screen, a consecutive effect executed during the AT, or a premonition of a consecutive effect, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. In an ending state that can be executed before the end of the advantageous zone, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. By providing cases where they are executed and cases where they are not executed depending on the game state managed by the main control means and the state of the effect managed by the sub-control means, the necessary information can be appropriately notified to the player.

Whether to execute the cumulative display effect was determined based on the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT and the number of game medals paid out by the payout process, but it may be determined using the value of the MY counter. Specifically, the main control means transmits a command indicating the value of the MY counter to the sub-control means after the game end check and when the lever is operated. The value of the MY counter after the game end check indicates the value after the payout process, and the value of the MY counter when the lever is operated indicates the value after the bet amount is subtracted. The number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the value of the MY counter when the payout start command is received as a result of the game, and it is determined whether the total value exceeds the specified number. If a value based on the MY counter value is displayed as the cumulative number during the AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be acquired before the advantageous zone ends. The result notification effect is a battle effect executed in the final game of the consecutive effects, but it may be an effect executed in one game instead of in the consecutive effects. In addition, the effects are not limited to battles in which friendly characters compete against enemy characters, but may be other effects that associate the results of the effects with results that are advantageous to the player, such as whether or not the player wins first place in a lottery or wins in a maze.

Although the result notification effect is described as displaying the result after the effect branch timing as time passes after all reels have stopped, the result may be displayed by operating the effect switch. Specifically, at the effect branch timing (timing of time t15), an image of a switch simulating the effect switch (also called an operation prompt image or operation prompt effect) is displayed, and an image indicating success or failure is displayed by the player operating the effect switch. By displaying the operation prompt image at the effect branch timing, even in a situation where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, it is possible to recognize that the operation prompt image is displayed before the error screen is displayed. In addition, after all reels have stopped (after all reels have stopped), a PUSH button effect may be executed to notify the stage change of the effect or the number of added games remaining in the AT. Specifically, after all reels have stopped and before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs, an image of a switch simulating the effect switch is displayed, and the player operates the switch to change the stage of the effect or to notify the number of added games. It is possible to recognize that an image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed (a push button performance is executed) before a hopper empty error occurs (an error screen is displayed). Also, before the image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed, an image of a switch simulating a performance switch may be displayed or teased, and it is possible to recognize that, as a result of teasing, an image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed before the error screen is displayed.

In addition to the result announcement effect and the PUSH button effect, a comment effect, etc., may be executed when the stop switch of the last reel is operated or when all reels are stopped. By executing these effects before the time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, at the timing of time t15 or the timing of time t1), the content of the effect can be recognized before the hopper empty error occurs. In addition, the effect is executed when the push order role is won, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops and an advantageous payout (12 coins payout) is made, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order irrelevant role (so-called shared bell), which executes an advantageous payout (12 coins payout) regardless of the push order, is won and the pattern combination (correct pattern combination) corresponding to the push order irrelevant role stops. In addition, the length of the time and period described in the above embodiment is an example and can be changed as needed.

<Navigation image> Next, the navigation image in this embodiment will be described. Note that, although the push order navigation image (sometimes called stop operation information) will be described here, it is not limited to the push order navigation image, and may also be applied to the above-mentioned button press navigation image and operation mode navigation image.

In this embodiment, for example, during an AT or other game in which the push order bell is selected as a result of an internal lottery, information suggesting advantageous operation of the stop switch (such as being awarded the maximum amount of gaming media that can be obtained in that game) can be displayed on the LCD as a push order navigation image. Specifically, the numbers "1," "2," and "3" can be used to indicate six different push orders, with "1" indicating the stop switch operated as the first stop operation, "2" indicating the stop button operated as the second stop operation, and "3" indicating the stop button operated as the third stop.

The first stop operation or the third stop operation may be configured as a two-choice push (whether to operate the stop switch at reel positions 1 to 10 or 11 to 20, for example, with the push order navigation image indicating either the image of the blue 7 or the image of the red 7), and combined with the six push order options to indicate 12 different operation modes. The push order navigation image displayed on the left side of the LCD corresponds to the left reel 8a, the push order navigation image displayed near the center of the LCD corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the push order navigation image displayed on the right side of the LCD corresponds to the right reel 8c. For example, when "123" is displayed as the push order navigation image, it indicates the push order for operating the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c. In this embodiment, a part of the push order navigation image, such as "1", may be referred to as the "push order navigation image", and the entire push order navigation image, such as "123", may be referred to as the "push order navigation image".

<Modes of push order navigation image> Figure 33 shows an example of a mode of the push order navigation image in this embodiment. In Figure 33, the push order navigation image for the first stop operation is explained as an example, but it is configured similarly for the second stop operation and the third stop operation.

The push order navigation image is composed of a "navigation number image" and a "navigation background image", and is configured to have at least four display modes for the push order navigation image: "normal mode", "highlighted mode", "failed mode", and "successful mode".

The navigation number image is an image of numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed. The navigation background image is a decorative image around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed, or an image that shows an effect around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed.

First, <1> in FIG. 33 is a push order navigation image in a normal mode, and a push order navigation image corresponding to a stop switch that should not be operated at present is displayed in a normal mode. Note that the configuration is such that the sound corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in the normal mode is not output. In addition, among the push order navigation images in the normal mode, a push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next and a push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated last may be displayed separately. In this case, a mode is considered in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated next is displayed larger than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated last, and is displayed smaller than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch to be operated currently.

Next, <2> in FIG. 33 is a push order navigation image in an emphasized state, in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated is displayed in an emphasized state. The push order navigation image displayed in an emphasized state is configured to output a sound corresponding to the push order navigation image from the speaker S. For example, when it is time to operate the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a, a sound saying "left" is output. The push order navigation image in an emphasized state has at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" larger than the push order navigation image in a normal state, and is configured to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated. Furthermore, in addition to the size, the push order navigation image in an emphasized state may be displayed brighter than the push order navigation image in a normal state, or displayed in a color or font different from the normal state, to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, <3> in FIG. 33 is a push order navigation image in a successful mode, and when the stop switch that is currently to be operated is operated (when the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image currently displayed in an highlighted mode is operated), the push order navigation image displayed in a highlighted mode is displayed in a successful mode. In other words, when the stop switch that is currently to be operated is operated in the correct operating mode, the push order navigation image displayed in a highlighted mode changes to a successful mode. In addition, when the stop switch that is currently to be operated is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, a sound corresponding to the next push order is output (for example, when the stop switch corresponding to the center reel 8b should be operated next, a sound "It's the middle" is output from the speaker S), and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that is to be operated next is displayed in a highlighted mode. In addition, the push order navigation image in a successful mode is configured to end its display after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, when the stop switch is operated in the correct manner, a sound effect or voice (sometimes called a success sound) indicating that the pressing sequence is correct may be output from the speaker S. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated in the correct manner not only visually but also audibly.

In addition, the push order navigation image in the successful mode is configured so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" is larger than the push order navigation image in the normal mode. Note that the push order navigation image in the highlighted mode and the push order navigation image in the successful mode are configured so that both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are approximately the same size.

Next, <4> in FIG. 33 is a push order navigation image in a failure mode, and when a stop switch that should not be currently operated is operated (when a stop switch corresponding to a push order navigation image displayed in a normal mode is operated), all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failure mode. In other words, when a stop switch that should not be currently operated is operated in an incorrect operation mode, all currently displayed push order navigation images change to a failure mode. In addition, when a stop switch that should not be currently operated is operated to display the push order navigation image in a failure mode, a sound indicating that the push order is incorrect (for example, a sound such as "What are you doing?", which may be called a failure sound) may be output from the speaker S, or a sound indicating that the push order is incorrect may not be output. In addition, the push order navigation image in the failure mode is configured to end display after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). In addition, when a stop switch that should not be currently operated is operated, the push order navigation image in the failure mode may not be displayed, and the display of all push order navigation images may be immediately ended (shorter than the predetermined time).

In addition, when a stop switch that should not currently be operated is operated and all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state, the size of the push order navigation images is configured to remain the same as it was before the stop operation. In other words, the push order navigation images that were displayed in an highlighted state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the highlighted state size, and the push order navigation images that were displayed in a normal state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the normal state size.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time from when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted to when the display of the push order navigation image in the successful mode is terminated is configured to be longer than the time from when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted to when the display of the push order navigation image in the unsuccessful mode is terminated.

This configuration gives players a sense of superiority when they succeed, and when they fail, it is less likely that other players will notice that they pressed the buttons incorrectly, which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, the push order navigation image may be configured to be displayed with effects for all modes, including the normal mode, the highlighted mode, the successful mode, and the unsuccessful mode, or may be configured to be displayed with effects for at least one mode of the push order navigation image.

Furthermore, the push order navigation image for all modes, including the normal mode, the highlighted mode, the successful mode, and the unsuccessful mode, may be configured to be displayed as moving images, or the push order navigation image for all modes may be displayed as still images, or the push order navigation image for at least one mode may be displayed as a moving image and the push order navigation image for the other modes may be displayed as still images.

Also, when the start switch 12 is operated to start a game, all push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, and then when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation) may be displayed in an highlighted manner. Also, when the start switch is operated to start a game, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first may be displayed in an highlighted manner, and the other push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, but from the start of display until the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as still images, and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as moving images involving some kind of movement.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the operation of the stop switch has been validated, and it is possible to prevent pressing the wrong button in the wrong order. When the operation of the stop switch is validated in this way, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, or the push order navigation image is changed from a still image to a moving image; this is sometimes referred to as a stop acceptance effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start switch 12 is operated to start the game and the push order navigation image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect (sometimes called a navigation display sound) is output from the speaker S.

The timing for outputting the sound (e.g., "left") corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first from the speaker S may be immediately after the start switch 12 is operated, or when the reels start to spin, or when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. In other words, it is sufficient that the speaker S is configured to output the sound at any timing between when the start switch 12 is operated and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective.

By configuring it this way, even if the display of the push order navigation image is delayed due to a malfunction of the LCD display, the player can audibly recognize which stop switch should be operated first, which does not impede the progress of the game and prevents pushing the wrong order.

In addition, Figure 34 is an example of a case in which the push order navigation image is displayed on the LCD in this embodiment, and by displaying "123" on the LCD, it is shown that the correct push order is to operate the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a → the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b → the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c. In Figure 34, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated first, "1" is displayed in the push order navigation image in an highlighted state, and "2" and "3" are displayed in the normal state.

<Configuration relating to display of push order navigation image and power cut> Next, the display of the push order navigation image when a power cut occurs while the push order navigation image is being displayed and the power is restored without changing the settings will be described using an example in which the winning-A1 condition device is won during the AT and the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order of "left, center, right" is displayed on the LCD. Note that the configuration relating to the display of the push order navigation image and power cut described below can be applied in appropriate combinations even when the timing of the power cut or the appearance of the push order navigation image is different (such as the push order navigation image "213" corresponding to the correct push order of "center, left, right"). It can also be applied in appropriate combinations with the <Configuration relating to display of push order navigation image and specified errors> described below.

(1) When the power is turned off before the first stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an highlighted state, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal state. Also, because the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated as the first stop operation, the voice "Go left" is output from the speaker S. Note that the voice such as "Go left" that corresponds to the stop switch that should currently be operated is sometimes simply referred to as the navigation voice.

After that, while the first stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs and all display on the LCD is terminated (power is not turned on). After that, at a timing (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a specified navigation timing) such as when a drive voltage is supplied to the sub-control board after the power is restored and the drawing process can be executed, or when a drive voltage is supplied to the main control board and a command regarding the push order is sent to the sub-control board, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed again on the LCD. Note that the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an highlighted state, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal state. At this time, the navigation sound is not output again. At this time, the configuration may be such that the navigation display sound is not output again, or that it is output.

In this way, if the power is turned off after the push sequence navigation image is displayed but before the first stop operation, and then the power is restored, the push sequence navigation image will return but the navigation voice will not. By not outputting the navigation voice when the power is restored, the processing of the sub-control board when the power is restored is reduced, and the push sequence navigation image can be displayed quickly.

The navigation voice may be output again when the power is restored. By configuring it in this way, the game can be played without any sense of incongruity between before the power was cut and after the power is restored.

In addition, if the above-mentioned operation acceptance effect is executed when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, the push order navigation image may be displayed together with the stop acceptance effect when the power is restored after a power outage. By configuring in this way, the game can be played without any sense of incongruity between before and after the power is restored.

In addition, when the power is restored after a power outage, the push order navigation image may be configured to be displayed without the stop acceptance display. This configuration reduces the processing load on the sub-control board when the power is restored after a power outage, and allows the push order navigation image to be displayed quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation image is displayed again when the power is restored after a power outage, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation may be configured to display both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image," while the other push order navigation images may be configured to display only the "navigation number image." This configuration reduces the processing load on the sub-control board when the power is restored after a power outage, allowing the push order navigation image to be displayed quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation images are displayed again when the power is restored, both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" can be displayed for all push order navigation images displayed when the power is restored. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to play without any sense of incongruity between before the power was lost and after the power is restored.

(2) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

Afterwards, while the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which power is not turned on). Then, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful state, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal state. In other words, the same images are displayed as after a stop is accepted when the push order for the first stop on the stop switches is the correct push order.

In addition, at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output.

Also, at this time, as before the power failure, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in a normal mode. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if it was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the power failure. Note that, when the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is displayed again after the power failure is restored, it may be configured to be terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if the power is restored during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made aware that the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage was the correct mode.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to concentrate on the stopping operations that the player currently needs to perform.

(3) When the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and the power is subsequently turned off before the second stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, because the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in a failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images is terminated. Also, a sound saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD display is terminated (power is not turned on). After that, even if the drawing process can be executed after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is not displayed. Also, no failure sound is output at this time to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image will not be displayed again after the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

Furthermore, as described above, if the stop switch is operated in a correct manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal manner. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored (referred to as navigation timing even if navigation is not actually performed), the push order navigation image is not displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the display after power recovery can be appropriately performed according to the game situation before the power was cut, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was cut, the player can return to play without lowering his or her expectations (without inadvertently raising his or her expectations).

Note that if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed again in a failed manner at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. Note that even in this case, no failure sound or navigation voice indicating that the push order was incorrect is output after the power is restored. Furthermore, when the push order navigation image in a failed manner is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to be terminated when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

When configured in this manner, if the stop switch is operated in a correct manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation will be displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation will be displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation will be displayed in a normal manner; on the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, all push order navigation images will be displayed in an unsuccessful manner.

This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was cut off, even if it takes several minutes for the power to be restored after the power is cut off, the push order navigation image for the failed mode is displayed after the power is restored, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

(4) When the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, and the power is then turned off before the third stop operation When the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, and is therefore displayed in an emphasized manner, while the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, before the third stop operation is performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD display is terminated (power is not turned on). After that, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored,
The push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the power failure, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" of both are displayed at approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image of the successful mode of "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display started before the power failure. Incidentally, the push order navigation image of the successful mode of "2" may be configured to be terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display was started again, when the power failure is restored, or may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started again.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted manner.

By configuring it this way, even if the power is turned off and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was turned off can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the wrong order. In particular, since the press order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can focus on the third stop.

In addition, if the first and second stop operations are performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power outage is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" may be displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in an emphasized mode. In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" in the successful mode are configured to be displayed again when the power outage is restored, even if they had ended because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display began before the power outage. When the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" are displayed again after the power is restored after a power outage, they may be configured to cease display a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after they are displayed again, or they may be configured to cease display immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed after they are displayed again. In other words, before the power is cut off, the display mode of the push order navigation images changes with each stop operation, so the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" cease displaying at different times, but after the power is cut off, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" cease displaying at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if the power is cut off and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was cut can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the buttons incorrectly. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation images corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful manner, it is possible to clearly show that only the third stop remains and that the correct push order has been followed.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to concentrate on the stopping operations that the player currently needs to perform.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" ceases. In addition, the sound "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, even if the specified navigation timing arrives after the power is restored, the push order navigation image will not be displayed. At this time, no failure sound will be output to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image is not displayed again when the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

Also, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, then the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful manner at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed manner. Also, in this case, no failure sound is output after the power is restored to indicate that the push order was incorrect. Note that when the push order navigation image in the failed manner is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, by redisplaying the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop operation in the correct mode, the player can understand which stop operation he or she performed incorrectly.

Also, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct mode, then the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed in a failed mode at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. Also, in this case, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect after the power is restored. Note that the push order navigation image in the failed mode may be configured to end its display when it is displayed again after a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if it takes several minutes from the power outage to the power recovery, the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed after the power is restored, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because there is no payout or only one coin or the like is paid out despite the AT being in progress.

(6) When the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the power is then turned off before the third stop operation, the third stop is performed after the power is restored, and then the power is turned off again. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs, and all LCD displays end (a state where the power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful state, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. When the push order navigation image for the successful state of "2" (the push order navigation images for the successful states of "1" and "2" if the push order navigation for the successful state of "1" is also configured to be displayed), if it is displayed again after the power is restored from the power outage, it may be configured to end its display when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to immediately end its display even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

Then, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is terminated (if the push order navigation for the successful mode of "1" is also configured to be displayed, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is also terminated), and in a situation where the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, if the third stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the successful mode. Also, at this time, a specified image (sometimes called a GET image) is configured to be displayed indicating that all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode.

After that, when the stop operation is performed up to the third stop, the power is cut off again and all display on the LCD screen is terminated. After that, even after the power is restored, the push order navigation image and the GET image are not displayed. At this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation are not output.

By configuring it in this way, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, since no new stop operation is required after the third stop, by not reproducing the push order navigation image, the player can effectively understand that no new stop operation is required.

In addition, if the operation is performed correctly up to the third stop operation and then a power outage occurs again, the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be configured to be displayed again in the successful mode at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly see that all stop operations have been performed in the correct manner.

If the second power outage occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful state at the specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted state. If the second power outage occurs after the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image is not displayed at the specified navigation timing after the power is restored. In this way, the display content after the power is restored may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the power outage was before or after the payout process was executed.

<Explanation of Rare Role Navigation Image> In addition, in this embodiment, in a game in which a so-called rare role such as a cherry role or a watermelon role is won, a navigation image (sometimes called a rare role navigation image) indicating the possibility of winning a rare role is configured to display "!!!". The navigation background image of the rare role navigation image and the navigation background image of the push order navigation image are displayed in the same or approximately the same manner. In other words, the push order navigation image and the rare role navigation image are configured to be similar images, although the "numbers" and "!" are different. The rare role navigation image may be configured to be displayed only when any rare role is won, or may be configured to be displayed even in a game in which the result of the internal lottery is a miss or a replay, as an effect suggesting the possibility of the specified benefit being awarded when it has been determined that a specified benefit (for example, first hit of the AT, addition of the AT, transition to a chance zone, etc.) will be awarded.

In addition, since there is no advantage or disadvantage to the rare role navigation image depending on the push order, it is configured to always be displayed at the same size during one game (the size does not differ between the normal mode and the highlighted mode, as with the push order navigation image).

In addition, in a game in which the rare role navigation image is displayed, a power outage occurs at any timing before the third stop operation is performed (when the start switch 12 is operated, when the first stop operation is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), and all LCD display ends (state where power is not turned on). After that, the rare role navigation image is configured to be displayed again at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. Note that, regardless of when the power outage occurs, the rare role navigation image that is displayed again when the power is restored is displayed in the display mode after the start switch 12 is operated, such as "!!!".

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, it allows the player to maintain a sense of hope that they may win a rare combination. It also prevents the player from missing out on a rare combination.

In addition, in a game in which a rare role navigation image is displayed, if a power outage occurs at any time before the third stop operation is performed (the time when the start switch 12 is operated, the time when the first stop operation is performed, the time when the second stop operation is performed, the time when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), the rare role navigation image may be configured not to be displayed again after the power is restored.

By configuring it in this way, players can avoid confusing the push order navigation image with the rare role navigation image.

The rare role navigation images may be configured to end display one by one in response to a stop operation, or may be configured to display all rare role navigation images at the timing when the first stop operation is performed. In addition, when configured to end display of the rare role navigation images one by one for each stop operation, the display may be configured to end in response to the stop ancestor operation in the order of the left rare role navigation image, the middle rare role navigation image, and the right rare role navigation image, regardless of which stop switch 13 was operated, or the display may be configured to end in response to the stop ancestor operation of the rare role navigation image at the position corresponding to the stop switch 13 where the stop operation was performed.

<Configuration for displaying push order navigation image and errors> Next, regarding the display of the push order navigation image after a specified error (medal retention error, medal backflow error, hopper empty error, etc.) occurs while displaying the push order navigation image and the specified error is then cleared, an example will be described in which the winning-A1 condition device is won during the AT, the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order of "left, middle, right" is displayed on the LCD, and a hopper empty error occurs as a specified error. Note that the configuration for displaying the push order navigation image and the specified errors described below can be applied in appropriate combinations even when the timing of the occurrence of the specified error or the appearance of the push order navigation image is different. It can also be applied in appropriate combinations with the above-mentioned <Configuration for displaying push order navigation image and power cut>.

(1) When the first stop operation is performed correctly, and then a specified error occurs before the second stop operation. First, as shown in FIG. 35, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image becomes invisible (this can be made invisible by ending the display, or by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the LCD screen), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed.

Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image of "3" displayed in a normal mode. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image of the successful mode of "1" is configured to be displayed again when the power is turned off and restored, even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display was started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a specified error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made aware that the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred was the correct mode.

Also, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode.

By configuring it this way, the player can concentrate on the stopping operation that he or she is currently performing.

The display mode of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 35 and the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are configured to have different designs (pictures, font of numbers, color, etc.). In this way, the design of the push order navigation image may be configured to be changed appropriately depending on the game situation. For example, when the expectation degree for the addition of AT is in a normal state, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, and when it is in a high probability state, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 35. In addition, it may be configured to be possible to select a presentation mode related to the presentation tendency during the AT, and when a predetermined presentation mode is set, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, and when a specific presentation mode is set, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 35.

By configuring it in this manner, the player can visually grasp the current game situation by the design of the push order navigation image.

(2) When the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, and then a specified error occurs before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the display of the push order navigation image becomes invisible (it may be made invisible by ending the display, or may be made invisible by displaying an image related to the error in front of the LCD), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state, so that the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of both are displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if the display has ended because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the display began before the power was turned off.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then a specified error occurs before the third stop operation, then at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the specified error can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. In particular, since the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can focus on the third stop.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in a correct manner and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image for "2" may be displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in an highlighted manner.

In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted mode, so that the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" are configured to be displayed again when the hopper empty error is cleared, even if they had ceased to be displayed because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since their display began before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. Note that the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" may be configured to cease to be displayed when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since their re-display, or may be configured to cease to be displayed immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since their re-display. In other words, before the hopper empty error occurs, the display mode of the push order navigation image changes with each stop operation, so the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" end displaying at different times, but after the hopper empty error is cleared, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" end displaying at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the wrong button in the wrong order. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation image corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful mode, it is possible to clearly show that only the third stop remains, and that the correct push order has been followed.

Also, if the first and second stop operations are performed in the correct manner, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" may not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" may not be displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in the normal manner. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. By configuring in this manner, the player can concentrate on the stop operation that should currently be performed.

(3) When the first three stop operations are performed correctly and a specified error occurs afterwards First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, because the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, when the third stop operation is performed (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c, which was the last stop operation, is operated), the push order navigation image "3" is displayed in a successful mode. At this time, all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode, so the GET image is displayed.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and the push order navigation image of "1", "2", and "3" is displayed again in the successful mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, the push order navigation images of the successful mode of "1", "2", and "3" are configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is released, even if their display ended because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the start of their display before the hopper empty error occurred. At this time, the GET image may be configured to be displayed again, or not displayed.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1," "2," and "3" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, after a specified error is resolved, all push order navigation images are reproduced in a successful manner, making it clear that all stop operations were performed in the correct manner.

In addition, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation images of "1" and "2" are not displayed, and the push order navigation image of "3" may be displayed in a successful mode. In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. In addition, at this time, even if the push order navigation image of the successful mode of "3" was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display started before the hopper empty error occurred, it may be configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is released, and the display may be terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be immediately terminated even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to clearly show that the third stop operation was performed as the stop operation immediately before the occurrence of the specified error, and that the third stop operation was performed in a correct manner.

Also, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed correctly and then a hopper empty error occurs, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, and none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be displayed. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize that the final stop operation has already been completed.

In addition, if the specified error occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation images "1" to "3" are configured to be displayed in a successful manner at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, and if the specified error occurs after the payout process is executed, none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" are displayed at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared. In other words, the display content after the specified error is cleared may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the specified error occurred was before or after the payout process was executed.

(4) When the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then a specified error occurs before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in a failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images is terminated. Also, a sound saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

Afterwards, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error ends and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed correctly, the second stop operation is performed incorrectly, and then a specified error occurs before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images ceases. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

Afterwards, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error ends and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed state. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify which stop operation caused the push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed state. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify which stop operation caused the push order error.

In addition, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of a failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

(6) When the first or second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and a specified error occurs after the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, the push order navigation image that is displayed at the time when the push order is incorrectly performed is displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the push order navigation image was displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation image is terminated. In addition, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order has been incorrect.

Then, after the third stop operation is performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error ends and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to the game without lowering his/her expectations.

<Configuration for displaying push order navigation image and reel stop warning image> In addition, in a game in which the push order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery and the push order navigation image is displayed, the above-mentioned reel stop warning image (also called a stop promotion image) is displayed because a predetermined time (3 minutes) has passed since the start of reel rotation (or the first stop operation or the second stop operation) without a stop operation being performed, and then the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation image are displayed at the same time, a power outage occurs, and then at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is displayed again, but the reel stop warning image may not be displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a game, the player can concentrate on the push order navigation image, so it is possible to prevent mistakes in pushing the buttons. Note that the above-mentioned <Configuration for displaying push order navigation image and power outage> can be applied as appropriate to the display mode of the push order navigation image at this time.

<Description of hopper 44-related errors and winning lamp effects applicable to this embodiment> Next, the relationship between hopper 44-related errors and winning lamp effects applicable to this embodiment will be described.

In the effects applicable to this embodiment described below, the purpose is to properly let the player know that he or she has won by executing winning lamp effects based on winning minor roles such as push order roles, or winning lamp effects based on winning replay roles such as replay roles. Also, even if a hopper empty error occurs after winning, the purpose is to let the player know the results of the game before the error occurs.

The following describes the configuration related to errors related to the hopper 44 and the winning lamp effect that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Winning LED lamp> This is part (not shown) of the performance lamp (LED lamp) installed on the front panel PS2, and is a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when a prize is won. It is also a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when an error such as a door open error or a hopper empty error occurs.

<Main control means> The main processes of the main control means are as described in this embodiment, the explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects that are applicable to this embodiment, and the errors and winning effects related to the hopper 44 that are applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processes omitted in the description of this embodiment are described below.

<Push Order Role> This is a role that can be won in the role lottery (internal lottery). The symbol combination corresponding to the winning push order role is displayed on the winning line, and when it is determined to be a winning role by the winning determination process, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed. There are two types of symbol combinations that can be displayed: correct symbol combinations that are displayed when the correct push order is used, and incorrect symbol combinations that are displayed when the correct push order is not used. A correct symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a bell symbol, mainly consisting of yellow, such as bell-bell-bell, on the winning line, and 12 coins are paid out. An incorrect symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a symbol combination, such as blank-replay-watermelon, on the winning line, and 1 coin is paid out.

<Cherry role> This is a role that can be won in the role lottery (internal lottery). The symbol combination corresponding to the winning Cherry role is displayed frozen on the winning line, and when it is determined to be a win by the winning determination process, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is frozen. The symbol combination that corresponds to the Cherry role is a symbol combination in which cherry symbols that are mainly composed of red, such as Cherry-Cherry-Cherry, are displayed frozen on the winning line, and one medal is paid out.

<Replay role> This is a role that can be won in the role lottery (internal lottery). The symbol combination corresponding to the winning Replay role is displayed frozen on the winning line, and when it is determined to be a winning prize by the winning determination process, a replay is awarded based on the symbol combination that is frozen. The symbol combination that corresponds to the Replay role is a symbol combination that displays replay symbols, mainly composed of blue, frozen on the winning line, such as Replay-Replay-Replay.

<Winning Process (Payout Process)> The winning process is a process for paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor winning combination (the stopped and displayed symbol combination) when it is determined by the winning determination process that a minor winning combination has been won. Paying out game medals here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on a winning combination (whether it is an addition of credits or a payout from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on a winning combination. Based on the payout start command and payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning combinations such as outputting the payout sound of the game medals, executing a back lamp effect (also called a BL effect), and executing a winning lamp effect. The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a replay win). When there is a loss or a replay win, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by a payout end command. When a replay win is won, the secondary control means can execute winning effects such as outputting the winning sound of the replay and backlight effects based on the payout start command and payout end command.

<Automatic insertion process> The automatic insertion process (automatic bet process) is a process that is executed when it is determined by the winning determination process that a replay role has won. In the automatic insertion process, a bet is automatically set (the number of inserted medals is stored) for the same number of medals as the number of medals bet on the game in which the replay role won, without inserting game medals. When the automatic insertion process is executed, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits an automatic insertion command to the sub-control means according to the number of medals that has been bet (inserted). Note that in this embodiment, the sub-control means does not execute an insertion effect (output of an insertion sound) based on the automatic insertion command, but may execute an insertion effect such as outputting an insertion sound in the same way as when a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received.

In addition, in the automatic insertion process, the bet number is increased by one at a time. For example, if a replay role is won in a game with a bet number of three and the automatic insertion process is then executed, the process of adding one to the bet number is repeated three times. However, because the addition process is executed in an extremely short time, it is visually perceived by the human eye as if the 1 to 3 bet lamps are all lit at the same time. Note that, if the 1 to 3 bet lamps are to be lit in sequence, a timer is set after the bet number is added, and the next bet number is not added until the timer value reaches 0.

Even after the automatic insertion process, if the settlement switch is operated, settlement processing is possible in the same way as before starting play when game medals have been bet or stored in the credits (after the required bet number has been set and before the start lever has been operated). However, in the settlement processing after the automatic insertion process, the bet amount set for the bet is not paid out, and instead, a number of game medals corresponding to the amount of stored credits is paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement) processing is executed.

<Secondary control means> Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects such as those described in the explanation of the winning effect, settlement effect, and deposit effect that are applicable to this embodiment, and errors and winning effects related to the hopper 44 that are applicable to this embodiment, are executed. In this embodiment, a winning lamp effect is also executed.

<Winning Effects> These effects are executed when game medals are paid out, or when a symbol corresponding to a replay role wins (is displayed), and are executed based on a payout start command, a payout end command, etc. When game medals are paid out, a payout sound indicating that game medals are being paid out, a backlight effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. When a symbol corresponding to a replay role wins, a winning sound indicating that a replay has won, a backlight effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. Note that if a push order role is won in the role lottery (internal lottery) and an incorrect symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line, it is possible to prevent the winning effect from being executed.

<Output of payout sounds> There are two different payout sounds for game medals that are output during the execution of the game medal payout process: payout sound A and payout sound C. Payout sound A is the payout sound that is output when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops, and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 game medals) is made. Payout sound C is the payout sound that is output when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the pattern combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and a payout (payout of 1 game medal) is made.

Payout sound A starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after repeating the output of the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second). Payout sound A outputs a sound for a first payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is performed, e.g., about 1.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by outputting the payout sound for a predetermined payout sound period that is longer than the period during which payout is being performed, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. As a result, when a performance according to the result of an internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to perform the performance without being canceled midway.

The payout sound C starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a third sound (e.g., a buzzing sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after repeating the output of a predetermined sound for a fourth specific time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) after receiving the payout end command. That is, the payout sound C outputs a sound for a third payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the fourth specific time to the period during which actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (e.g., about 0.2 seconds), and this third payout sound period is shorter than the first payout sound period of the payout sound A because the number of game medals paid out is smaller. In this way, the payout sound C is shorter than the payout sound A, but by outputting the payout sound for a period longer than the period during which payout is performed, the player can be sure not to miss the payout, even though it is a small number of medals, and can recognize that game medals have been awarded. The output of the payout sound is not canceled (ended) by betting settings (receiving a coin insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Note that the payout sound starts to be output after the start payout command is received, and is output until a predetermined time has elapsed after the end payout command is received. However, once the start payout command is received, the payout sound may be output for a predetermined time that is the sum of the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals) plus a first specific time or a fourth specific time, without being triggered by the end payout command. Also, although payout sound A and payout sound C are different in the above embodiment, the same payout sound may be output.

<Output of winning sound> There is a winning sound A as a winning sound output when a replay role is won. The winning sound A starts when a payout start command is received, and is a winning sound that outputs a fourth sound (e.g., a "ji" sound) until a fifth specific time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the winning sound for a certain period of time, the player can ensure that he does not miss the sound, and can recognize that the replay role has won. The output of the winning sound is not canceled (ended) by a payout end command or a bet setting (reception of an automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch acceptance command). The output time of the winning sound A may be configured to end before automatic insertion is performed, or may be configured to end before a game start operation becomes possible.

<Backlamp Effects> There are three different types of backlamp effects: backlamp effect A, backlamp effect C, and backlamp effect D. Backlamp effect A is a backlamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), the correct symbol combination stops as a result of the correct push order, and 12 coins are paid out. Backlamp effect C is a backlamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and 1 coin is paid out. Backlamp effect D is a backlamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

The back lamp performance A starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The back lamp performance A is executed for a first back lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (for example, about 1.2 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance A for a first back lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which payout is performed, the player can recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the back lamp performance A is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game can be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of an internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. In addition, backlight performance A is canceled (ended) when a bet is set (a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received).

The back lamp performance C starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the third pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the third pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The back lamp performance C is executed for a third back lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (for example, about 0.2 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance C for a third back lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player can recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the back lamp performance C is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game can be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. In addition, like Back Lamp Performance A, Back Lamp Performance C is canceled (ended) when a bet is set (a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received).

The back lamp effect D starts when a payout start command is received, and ends after repeatedly turning on and off the back lamp in the fourth pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second). By executing the back lamp effect D for the fourth back lamp effect period (the same period as the first specific time), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a replay role has been won. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect D for the fourth back lamp effect period, the player is made to recognize that processing based on the replay role is being performed during the period in which the back lamp effect D is being executed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. Furthermore, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that the back lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch reception command).

<Winning lamp effects> There are three different winning lamp effects: winning lamp effect A, winning lamp effect C, and winning lamp effect D. Winning lamp effect A is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops and 12 coins are paid out. Winning lamp effect C is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the pattern combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and 1 coin is paid out. Winning lamp effect D is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

The winning lamp performance A starts when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in yellow until a payout end command is received (fifth pattern), and after the payout end command is received, the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the fifth pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The winning lamp performance A is executed for a first winning lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (for example, about 1.5 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp performance A for a first winning lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which the payout is performed, the player can recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the winning lamp performance A is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. In addition, the winning lamp effect A is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by the game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp effect C starts when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp repeatedly turns on and off in red (sixth pattern) until a payout end command is received, and ends after the payout end command is received by repeatedly turning on and off the winning LED lamp in the sixth pattern for a sixth specific time (e.g., 2.3 seconds). The winning lamp effect C is executed for a third winning lamp effect period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the sixth specific time, which is the same length as the first winning lamp effect period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (e.g., about 0.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect C for a third winning lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which payouts are being made, the player is made to perceive the period during which the winning lamp effect C is being executed as if payouts were being made, which is expected to delay the start of the next game, and furthermore, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being executed over a certain period of time, it becomes easier to execute the effect without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect C is not canceled (ended) by betting settings (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp effect D starts when the payout start command is received, and ends after the winning LED lamp is repeatedly lit and extinguished in blue for a seventh specific time (for example, 2.5 seconds) (seventh pattern). The winning lamp effect D is executed for the fourth winning lamp effect period (the same period as the seventh specific time and the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), making it easier for the player to recognize that a replay role has been won. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect D for the fourth winning lamp effect period, the player is made to recognize that a process based on a replay role is being performed during the period in which the winning lamp effect D is being executed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. Furthermore, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute the effect without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch reception command).

Winning lamp effects A, C, and D are configured so that the colors of the winning LED lamp when it lights up are different, but the lighting and blinking patterns and the length of the execution period are the same. By making the only difference in color, it becomes easier to recognize that the winning lamp effect is an effect caused by a winning role. Also, by making the execution period the same as the length of winning lamp effect A, when a cherry or replay role is won, the next game can start earlier than when the correct pattern combination for the push order role is displayed, but because the winning lamp effect is being executed, it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed until the winning lamp effect ends.

Note that the winning lamp effects A and C were executed from the time the payout end command was received until the first specific time or the sixth specific time had elapsed, but when the payout start command was received, the winning lamp effect may be executed for a predetermined time that is the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between the addition of credits and the payout of game medals) plus the first specific time or the sixth specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. Also, the "first winning lamp effect period", "third winning lamp effect period", and "fourth winning lamp effect period" of the winning lamp effects A, C, and D are set to the same period as the "first payout sound period" of the payout sound A, but the "first winning lamp effect period", "third winning lamp effect period", and "fourth winning lamp effect period" may be set to a period different from the "first payout sound period". It is preferable that the "first winning lamp performance period," "third winning lamp performance period," and "fourth winning lamp performance period" are the same period, and may be longer than the time required to pay out the maximum number of game medals that can be paid out in one game.

<Error Notification> When an error such as an error related to the hopper 44 or a door open error occurs, the main control means displays an error code on the winning number display 27, and the sub-control means notifies the occurrence of the error with the LCD (display device), speaker S, and winning LED lamp. The winning LED lamp lights up in red during the period when an error is being notified. The winning LED lamp also lights up in red when a cherry wins, but by keeping the red light on during an error notification, the pattern differs from when a cherry wins, making it possible to distinguish whether the error is being notified or a win.

<Settlement Presentation> This presentation is executed when the game medals are settled, and a settlement sound (settlement presentation) is output to indicate that the game medals are being paid out, and a sound is output to indicate that the settlement has been completed. In the settlement presentation, since presentations using winning LED lamps and back lamps are not executed, it is easy to recognize that this is different from presentations based on winning of small roles or replay roles, even if a payout is performed.

Hereinafter, various effects that are executed according to the progress of the game will be described with reference to Figures 36 to 45. Figure 36 is a time chart when the insertion operation is not performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, Figure 37 is a time chart when the insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, Figure 38 is a time chart when the insertion operation is not performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed, Figure 39 is a time chart when the insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed, and Figure 40 is a time chart when no game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay role is completed. FIG. 41 is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 42 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push order role is completed, FIG. 43 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 44 is a time chart when a payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 45 is a time chart when a payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper retention error occurs).

Note that, for convenience of explanation, ON and OFF are used in Figs. 36 to 45, but the status of the corresponding process or presentation is described in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/winning lamp presentation (winning LED lamp)/BL presentation/settlement presentation/error notification (winning LED lamp), ON indicates that the process is being executed, and OFF indicates that the process is not being executed. When it changes from OFF to ON, the process starts, and when it changes from ON to OFF, the process ends. For the payout, ON indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. For the payout sound/insertion sound/winning sound, ON indicates that the game medal is being output, and OFF indicates that no game medal is being output. For the MAX bet lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that the lamp is lit, and OFF indicates that the lamp is off. For the MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that the switch has been operated, and OFF indicates that the switch has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 normally (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that no game medal has been inserted. For error (hopper empty) and error (hopper stuck), ON indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. For error display, ON indicates that an error code is being displayed by the main control means or an error screen is being displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates that no error code or error screen is being displayed.

It can also be combined with the previously explained acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, result announcement effect, push effect, and comment effect, and times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 22 to 32 are the same as times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 36 to 45.

<When the MAX BET switch is not used to insert the coin after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed> Figure 36 shows a case where the correct push order role is played and the correct symbol combination is displayed and stopped, resulting in a win. At time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of payout sound A (referred to as payout sound in the figure, the same applies below) based on the payout start command received, the winning LED lamp produces a winning lamp effect A (referred to as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same applies below), and the back lamp produces a back lamp effect A (referred to as BL effect in the figure, the same applies below). The time required for the payout process is 1.5 seconds if the payout process is performed normally (in this example, 12 game medals are paid out normally). At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means continues the output of payout sound A, winning lamp effect A, and back lamp effect A as winning effects for a period T1 (first specific time) based on the payout end command.

After the payout process is completed at time t1, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. The main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert game medals at time t2. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, since the T1 period has passed since time t1, the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound A, winning lamp presentation A, and back lamp presentation A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period, the first back lamp presentation period, and the first winning lamp presentation period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of payout sound A, the winning lamp presentation A, and the back lamp presentation A, while turning on the MAX BET lamp, from time t1 onwards. By continuing the output of payout sound A, the winning lamp presentation A, and the back lamp presentation A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET, improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed> Figure 37 shows the case where the correct push order is performed, the correct symbol combination is displayed and the winning of the push order role is completed. Up until the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is operated. As a result of the operation of the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp performance A, and outputs the insertion sound A (referred to as the insertion sound in the figure, the same below) three times as the insertion performance from the timing of time t3 to the timing of time t4 (during the T2 period). From time t3 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting the payout sound A, performing the winning lamp presentation A, and outputting the insertion sound A. This allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, while also being aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and a bet has been set, improving the performance of the gaming machine. Also, at time t3, the payout sound A is output and the winning lamp presentation A continues, but by ending the back lamp presentation A, the player can visually recognize that a bet has been set. Note that, although the explanation was given above regarding the insertion operation using the MAX bet switch, the back lamp presentation A ends and the insertion sound A is output in the same way when the insertion operation using the 1 bet switch and the insertion of a coin are performed.

<When the MAX BET switch is not used to insert the coin after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry symbol is completed> Figure 38 shows a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the Cherry symbol is displayed on the pay line and wins. At time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound C (denoted as payout sound in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command, the winning LED lamp produces a winning lamp effect C (denoted as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same below), and the back lamp produces a back lamp effect C (denoted as BL effect in the figure, the same below). The time required for the payout process is 0.2 seconds when the payout process is performed normally (in this example, one game medal is normally paid out). At time t19, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues to output the payout sound C as a winning effect for a T4 period (fourth specific time) until the timing of time t24, to execute the winning lamp effect C for a T6 period (sixth specific time) until the timing of time t5, and to execute the back lamp effect C for a T1 period (first specific time) until the timing of time t23.

After the payout process is completed at time t19, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. The main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp at time t20 based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. (Note that this diagram assumes that there is enough credit accumulated to allow a bet to be set by operating the MAX BET switch. If a bet cannot be set by operating the MAX BET switch, the game medals can be inserted at time t20, but the MAX BET lamp does not light up.)

At time t23, a T1 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to t23 can be considered the third back lamp effect period. At time t24, a T4 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound C. That is, the period from time t0 to t24 can be considered the third payout sound period. At time t5, a T6 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends the winning lamp effect C. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the third winning lamp effect period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C, while turning on the MAX BET lamp, from time t19 onwards. By continuing the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed> Figure 39 shows the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role is displayed on the pay line and wins. Until the timing of time t20, it is the same as the case where the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed, and at the timing of time t21, the MAX bet switch is operated. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp performance C, and outputs the insertion sound A (written as insertion sound in the figure, the same below) three times since three coins are bet by the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch as the insertion performance from the timing of time t21 to the timing of time t22 (during the T2 period). At the timing after time t21, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting the payout sound C, performing the winning lamp effect C, and outputting the insertion sound A. This allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, while also being aware that the MAX BET switch has been operated and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.
continues, but by ending the back lamp effect C, the player can visually recognize that a bet has been set.

In addition, in FIG. 39, it is assumed that there are enough credits stored to allow a bet to be set by operating the MAX bet switch. If a bet cannot be set by operating the MAX bet switch, the machine will be in a state in which a gaming medal can be inserted at time t20, but the MAX bet lamp will not light up. Also, while the explanation was given for inserting a medal using the MAX bet switch, inserting a medal using the 1 bet switch will also end the back lamp effect C and output insertion sound A.

<When no game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role> As shown in FIG. 40, at the timing of time t0, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means with the number of game medals to be paid out being 0, and the sub-control means starts output of winning sound A (written as winning sound in the figure, the same below), winning lamp effect D on the winning LED lamp (written as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same below), and back lamp effect D on the back lamp (written as BL effect in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command. The sub-control means continues output of winning sound A as a winning effect for the T5 period (fifth specific time), winning lamp effect D for the T7 period (seventh specific time), and back lamp effect D for the T1 period (first specific time) based on the payout start command. At the timing of time t25, the main control means starts automatic insertion process and transmits an automatic throwing command to the sub-control means. After the automatic insertion process ends at time t26, the main control means turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals.

At time t26, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that a gaming medal can be inserted. As no medals are inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T29, the sub-control means ends the back lamp presentation D because a period T1 has passed since time T09. In other words, the period from time t0 to t29 can be considered the fourth back lamp presentation period. At time t5, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp presentation D because a period T7 has passed since time t0. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the fourth winning lamp presentation period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D while turning on the medal insertion possible lamp from time t26 onwards, and by continuing the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D, the player is made aware that a payout has been made and is also made aware that medals can be inserted, improving the performance of the gaming machine. Note that this diagram assumes that the credit accumulation has not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process, and if it is not possible to insert gaming medals, the medal insertion possible lamp will not be lit at time t26 (the blocker will not be turned ON.

<When a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role> As shown in FIG. 41, up to the timing of time t26, it is the same as when a gaming medal is not inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role, and at the timing of time t27, a gaming medal is inserted, so that the main control means stores one gaming medal in the credit and transmits a storage number command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means ends the back lamp performance D based on receiving the storage number command, outputs the insertion sound B (written as insertion sound in the figure, the same below) once as the insertion performance, and outputs it from the timing of time t27 to the timing of time t28. Even if various situations such as the output of the insertion sound B are combined while performing the winning lamp performance D at the timing after time t27, smooth control is possible, and this allows the player to recognize that the replay role has won, while also recognizing that a valuable insertion has been made and one medal has been stored, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Also, at time t27, the winning lamp effect D continues, but by ending the back lamp effect D, the player can visually recognize that the credits have been saved. Note that in this figure, it is assumed that the saved credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process (the saved number is 48 or less), and the state in which game medals can be inserted continues even if one game medal is inserted.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed> As shown in FIG. 42, up to the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the insertion operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the settlement switch is operated instead of the operation of the MAX bet switch. At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp performance A, and the back lamp performance A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the lapse of the T1 period. After that, it starts outputting the settlement sound as a settlement performance based on the settlement start command. Note that, although the settlement sound is output as a settlement performance, the performance using the back lamp or the winning LED lamp is not performed. When the settlement process is started, in order to prevent the player from being confused by the simultaneous output of the payout sound A and the settlement sound, the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, are terminated when the settlement process is started, and effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed, etc., so that the player can be accurately made aware that a settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after completion of automatic insertion process based on winning of a replay role> As shown in FIG. 43, up until the timing of time t26, the process is the same as when a gaming medal is inserted after completion of automatic insertion process based on winning of a replay role, and at the timing of time t30 the settlement switch is operated. At the timing of time t30, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the medal insertion possible lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp performance D at the timing of time t30, without waiting for the T7 period to elapse, and the back lamp performance D to elapse for the T1 period. After that, it starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement performance based on the settlement start command. Note that although the settlement sound is output, no performance using the back lamp or winning LED lamp is performed. When the settlement process has started, the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D, which were scheduled to continue for the T7 and T1 periods, are ended, and effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed, allowing the player to recognize that the settlement process is being performed. Note that this diagram assumes that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process and that 19 or more credits have been accumulated.

<When normal payout is not performed after the cherry wins (hopper empty error occurs)> As shown in FIG. 44, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, the game medals are not paid out and the rotation of the wheel continues. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the hopper 44 is empty of game medals, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of a hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, and displays an error screen and uses the winning LED lamp to notify the error. Note that until time t17, the payout sound C is output, and the winning lamp effect C and back lamp effect C are executed continuously. Until time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red and flashes repeatedly as a winning lamp effect, but at time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as an error notification, so although it is the same red color, the lighting pattern is different, so it is possible to recognize that the winning lamp effect has switched to an error notification. Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs without a single medal being paid out after the start of the payout process. If a hopper empty error occurs after multiple medals have been paid out, the timing of the hopper empty error will be later than time t17 by the amount of medals paid out.

<When normal payout is not performed after the cherry wins (hopper retention error occurs)> As shown in FIG. 45, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of the game medals is not executed because the game medals are stuck in the outlet of the hopper 44. Then, at time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 has been continuously detected for more than 201 ms since the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that the game medals are stuck, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. At the same time, at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, and displays an error screen.

The output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are executed from the timing of the start of the payout process, and are executed before the payout process starts and a hopper retention error occurs, so it is possible to check the winning effects such as the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C before the error screen is displayed. Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs when not a single medal is paid out after the start of the payout process. In a situation where multiple game medals are being paid out, if a hopper retention error occurs after some of the multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of time it takes to pay out some of the game medals, and the period for the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C to be executed will be longer.

<Changes in mode> The time required to normally pay out 12 game medals is 1.5 seconds, and the time required to normally pay out one game medal is 0.2 seconds, but the payout time may vary depending on the number of medals paid out and whether the payout process only adds credits or includes the payout of game medals from the hopper 44. In this case, the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44 may be configured to be longer than the time required to add one game medal to credits. Conversely, the time required to add one game medal to credits may be configured to be longer than the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44.

In the winning lamp performance, the color corresponding to the type of winning combination (yellow light is emitted when the push order combination is won and the correct symbol combination is won, red light is emitted when the cherry combination is won, and blue light is emitted when the replay combination is won) is described, but the color of light may be a common color (for example, white) regardless of the type of winning combination. By using a common color, it is possible to simply notify that a certain combination has been won regardless of the symbol combination (outcome) that stops on the reel. In addition, the winning lamp performance can be executed regardless of the color of the symbol corresponding to the combination that stops on the active line, and misidentification can be prevented. In addition, the common color regardless of the type of combination may be the same white for all combinations, or may be divided into several groups according to the type of combination (white for bell and replay roles, purple for cherry and watermelon roles).

The winning lamp performance is executed for a time determined by the role after receiving the payout end command, but it may be executed for a time determined by the role after receiving the payout start command. For example, it may be 2.5 seconds when the correct symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role are stopped. The execution period of the winning lamp performance is the same as the output period of the payout sound, but it may be a different period. Also, the execution period of the winning lamp performance is the same as the output period of the back lamp performance, but it may be a different period. The execution period of the winning lamp performance may be longer than the time required for the payout process (1.5 seconds) and shorter than the time required for the hopper empty error to be set (3.5 seconds).

Although it has been stated that the winning lamp effect A is executed during normal times (non-AT), it may also be executed during the AT. Also, the color may be the same, but the pattern of lighting and extinguishing and the execution time may be different. Also, it may not be executed during the AT. By not executing it during the AT, the winning lamp effect is executed each time for the correct pattern combination of the push order role, which has an increased winning frequency, and it is possible to avoid causing inconvenience to the player. Similarly, other roles (cherry role, replay role) may be executed during the AT, or may be configured not to be executed during the AT.

Although it has been stated that the winning lamp effect does not end with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (receiving the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a game medal (receiving the reserve number command), it may also be configured to end with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (receiving the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a game medal (receiving the reserve number command). After a replay role is won, the winning lamp effect may not end in the automatic bet processing, but may be configured to end if a game medal is inserted thereafter. Although it has been stated that the back lamp effect ends with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (receiving the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a game medal (receiving the reserve number command), it may also be configured not to end.

Although it has been stated that the winning LED lamp will not be used as the settlement effect, it may be used. This may be the same as the error notification that is performed when an error occurs, or it may be a different effect from the winning lamp effect that is performed when an error is notified or when a winning combination is won. As a different effect, it is desirable that one of the light color, blinking pattern, or time of the winning LED lamp is different, so that it can be recognized as being different from the error notification and winning lamp effects.

When an error occurs, an error is notified using the winning LED lamp, but when the power is turned on or a door open error occurs, the winning LED lamp may also be used to notify an error in the same manner as when a hopper empty error occurs. When the power is turned on, the winning LED lamp continues for a certain period of time after the power is turned on, and in the case of a door open error, the winning LED lamp continues until the door is closed or until a certain period of time has passed since the door was closed. In these situations, game play can continue, and there is a possibility that the execution of the error notification and the execution of the winning lamp presentation may overlap. In the event that they overlap, the error notification may be prioritized over the winning lamp presentation. Prioritizing the error notification may be configured so that while the error notification is being executed, it is not executed even if the opportunity to execute the winning lamp presentation is met. Also, when an error notification is executed while a winning lamp presentation is being executed, the winning lamp presentation may be ended and the error notification executed.

Also, giving priority to error notification can mean that the winning LED lamp will light up in a way that corresponds to the error notification when an error notification is being executed. Specifically, when the trigger for executing the winning lamp effect is met, the winning lamp effect is executed, while the winning LED lamp only emits light corresponding to the error notification when it is the period for executing the error notification, and when the period for executing the error notification ends and the period for executing the winning lamp effect continues, the winning LED lamp will emit light corresponding to the winning lamp effect.

The winning lamp performance is executed when the correct symbol combination stops in a game in which the push order role is won, when the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops, but it can also be configured to be executed when a push order doesn't matter role (a so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is executed regardless of the push order is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the push order doesn't matter role (the correct symbol combination) stops. It can also be configured to be executed when other roles such as the watermelon role or chance role are won. Also, the times and durations described in the above embodiment are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

<Explanation of ball output specifications across favorable zones> All parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function are updated to 0 by the RAM initialization process (also called RAM initialization process at the end of the favorable zone) when the favorable zone ends and the normal zone is entered. Therefore, in conventional gaming machines, when one favorable zone ends and the player moves to a new favorable zone via the normal zone, no information about the instruction function in the previous favorable zone can be carried over. For this reason, even if there are 500 games left in the AT in one favorable zone, if the upper limit of the favorable zone is reached, the AT ends and the number of remaining games in the AT is initialized, which often makes the player feel like they have lost. In view of this issue, a method of indirectly carrying over predetermined parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function (for example, a predetermined mode related to the AT winning, a predetermined point related to the AT winning, etc., also called carryover parameters) to the next favorable zone by winning a bonus before the end of the favorable zone will be described.

Note that the reel arrangement, symbol combination, condition device, and internal lottery placement number are basically the same as those in Figures 11 to 21, but the replay probability is configured not to change (maintain non-RT) even if the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop in a game in which Type 1 BB is won. In other words, it is configured not to have RT1 (RT inside Type 1 BB). It is also configured to have RT2, which is entered after the end of Type 1 BB and ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games). It is also configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone even in a game in which Replay-A or Replay-B is won, so that a transition to the advantageous zone is determined at approximately 1/1 (65532/65536) in the normal zone. Also, for ease of explanation, non-RT and not inside Type 1 BB will be referred to as non-RT1, and non-RT and inside Type 1 BB will be referred to as non-RT2, but non-RT1 and non-RT2 are the same RT, and the internal lottery numbers are also the same, except that a single Type 1 BB win with a number of 4 in non-RT1 will result in a loss in non-RT2.

The RT transition starts from non-RT1, and if a type 1 BB is won during non-RT1 and the type 1 BB pattern combination does not stop, it becomes non-RT2 from the next game (which may be the end of that game), if a type 1 BB pattern combination stops during non-RT2, non-RT2 ends and type 1 BB is activated from the next game (also referred to as during type 1 BB), when the activation of type 1 BB ends, it moves to RT2 (finite RT after type 1 BB ends) from the next game, and when a predetermined number of games have been played in RT2, RT2 ends and it moves to non-RT1 from the next game. In addition, when a Type 1 BB is won during RT2, if the Type 1 BB symbol combination stops, RT2 ends and Type 1 BB activates from the next game, and if the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, RT2 is not terminated, and if five games are played in RT2, RT2 ends and the next game transitions to non-RT2. In addition, since the game starts from non-RT (non-RT1) when the setting is changed, if the setting change device is activated while the Type 1 BB condition device is operating (during non-RT2) or while Type 1 BB is operating, non-RT (non-RT1) is set when the setting change device is finished operating. In addition, in the case of a power outage in which the setting change device does not operate (sometimes called a normal power outage), the RT state and Type 1 BB operating state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, the game starts from the state before the power outage.

In addition, in games in which a Type 1 BB is won during non-RT1, games in which a loss occurs during non-RT2, and games in which one of the push order bell group C (winning - C1 to C6) is won during non-RT2, the type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped according to the operation mode of the stop switch. Note that in games in which one of the push order bell group C is won during an advantageous zone, the operation mode of the stop switch that does not stop the type 1 BB symbol combination is notified except in some circumstances, so the user can maintain non-RT2 by playing according to the operation mode notified.

In this embodiment, in order to indirectly carry over carryover parameters (also referred to as the expectation level regarding the AT, the expectation level regarding the notified game state, and the specified information regarding the notified game state) in one advantageous period (hereinafter also referred to as advantageous period 1) to the next advantageous period (hereinafter also referred to as advantageous period 2), first, in advantageous period 1, if a specific condition is met during the AT (for example, the number of coins won during the AT exceeds 2,000, the number of times played during the AT reaches a specified number, the number of times played in one advantageous period reaches a specified number, etc., also referred to as an ending condition), the AT is configured to continue until the specified condition is met (for example, until the value of the MY counter exceeds a specified value (for example, a value less than the upper limit value of the MY counter, such as 2,350)) regardless of the remaining period of the AT at the time the specific condition is met. In addition, if the upper limit of the advantageous zone is not set when MY exceeds 2400, but when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone described above exceeds 2400, the description "MY counter value" will be replaced with "difference in the number of gaming media in one advantageous zone."

Then, in a game in which the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value and in which the 1st type BB symbol combination can be stopped, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination to stop. Note that when executing the predetermined effect to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination to stop, the operation mode of the stop switch that can stop the 1st type BB symbol combination is not notified, but the operation mode of the stop switch that does not stop the 1st type BB symbol combination even if one of the push order bells C group is won. Also, if the 1st type BB symbol combination does not stop in a game in which a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination to stop, the predetermined effect is executed again in a subsequent game in which the 1st type BB symbol combination can be stopped.

After that, when the operation of the Type 1 BB ends, the next game will transition to RT2, and the advantageous zone 1 will end in either the game in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or in any game during RT2, and all parameters will be updated to 0, and the next game will transition to the normal zone and non-RT1. Note that which game, either the game in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or any game during RT2, will end the advantageous zone 1 in is configured to be determined at the end of the game in which the ending conditions were satisfied in the advantageous zone 1, depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the game in which the ending conditions were satisfied.

Then, after passing through the normal zone and moving to advantageous zone 2, the value of the carryover parameter can be newly determined according to the number of games played in RT2.

Specifically, when the value of the carry-over parameter at the end of a game that satisfies the ending condition in the advantageous zone 1 is a first value, it is determined that the advantageous zone 1 ends in the game in which the operation of the first type BB ends, and the game moves from the normal zone to the advantageous zone 2 in the first game of RT2, so that four games are executed in RT2 at the start of the advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games are executed in RT2 at the start of the advantageous zone 2, the value of the carry-over parameter is set to a first value. Also, when the value of the carry-over parameter at the end of a game that satisfies the ending condition in the advantageous zone 1 is a second value, it is determined that the advantageous zone 1 ends in the first game of RT2 after the operation of the first type BB ends, and the game moves from the normal zone to the advantageous zone 2 in the second game of RT2, so that three games are executed in RT2 at the start of the advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three games are executed in RT2 at the start of the advantageous zone 2, the value of the carry-over parameter is set to a second value. In this way, the value of the carried-over parameter at the time of transition to non-RT in favorable zone 2 is configured to differ depending on the value of the carried-over parameter at the end of a game in which the ending condition is satisfied in favorable zone 1.

In this way, by changing the number of times to play in RT2 at the start of the next favorable zone depending on the value of the carryover parameter in one favorable zone, it is possible to roughly know the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the previous favorable zone based on the number of times to play in RT2 at the start of the favorable zone, and it is possible to indirectly carry over the value of the carryover parameter to the next favorable zone.

In this embodiment, the timing for deciding which of the games in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or any of the games during RT2 will end the advantageous zone 1 is the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous zone 1, but it is not limited to this and may be the end of the game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous zone 1 (for example, the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, a value less than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as 2350)), or the end of the game in which the Type 1 BB pattern combination stops after satisfying the predetermined condition in the advantageous zone 1.

In addition, in cases where the ending conditions are not met during the AT but the advantageous zone ends after the AT ends, the value of the carryover parameter may be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous zone using a similar method. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system to execute a predetermined effect that encourages the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination in a game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the AT ends. In this case, the system may be configured to determine whether the advantageous zone will end in the game in which the Type 1 BB operation ends or in any game during RT2 at the end of the final game of the AT, depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the final game of the AT.

In addition, if a player accidentally stops a type 1 BB symbol combination when a specified effect that encourages the player to stop the type 1 BB symbol combination is not being executed, the advantageous zone will not end but will continue even after the operation of the type 1 BB has ended. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the advantageous zone from ending at an unintended timing. This configuration also makes it possible to prevent a player from using a strategy such as intentionally ending the advantageous zone depending on the game situation.

<<Specific example 1 of ball output specifications across favorable zones>> Next, using Figure 50, we will explain the case where a certain number of points related to winning the AT are carried over to the next favorable zone as a carryover parameter.

The specific points related to winning the AT are managed by a specific counter (details omitted), and are accumulated when an unfavorable event occurs to the player during gameplay, such as when a consecutive performance fails or when a CZ fails. When the points reach 100, a specific benefit such as winning the AT or adding to the remaining time of the AT is awarded.

Pattern A in Figure 50 shows the case where the specified points for winning the AT are 0 to 30 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A of FIG. 50, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB ends, and the first game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. And based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the system is configured to set the specified point related to winning the AT to 30.

Pattern B in Figure 50 shows a case where the specified points for winning the AT are 31 to 50 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of FIG. 50, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the first play of RT2 ends favorable zone 1, and the second play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to favorable zone 2, so that three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 2, the specified points related to winning the AT are set to 50.

Pattern C in Figure 50 shows a case where the specified points for winning the AT are 51 to 70 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of FIG. 50, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the second play of RT2 ends favorable zone 1, and the third play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to favorable zone 2, so that two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 2, the specified point related to the AT winning is set to 70.

Pattern D in Figure 50 shows a case where the specified points for winning the AT are 71 to 100 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern D of FIG. 50, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, it is determined that advantageous zone 1 ends with the third play of RT2, and that the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 occurs with the fourth play of RT2, so that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play has been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the specified points related to winning the AT are set to 100.

<<Specific example 2 of ball output specifications across favorable zones>> Next, using Figure 51, we will explain the case where a specified mode related to winning the AT is carried over to the next favorable zone as a carryover parameter.

Details of the specified modes for winning the AT are omitted, but there are four modes: Normal A, Normal B, Heaven Preparation, and Heaven. The expected probability of winning the AT in the general advantageous zone state differs depending on which mode you are in.

Pattern A in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in normal A at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A in FIG. 51, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB ends, and the first game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, normal A is set as the specified mode for winning the AT.

Pattern B in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in normal B at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of FIG. 51, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the first play of RT2 ends favorable zone 1, and the second play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to favorable zone 2, so that three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 2, normal B is set as the specified mode for winning the AT.

Pattern C in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in Heaven Preparation at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in the advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of FIG. 51, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the second play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the third play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, heaven preparation is set as a specified mode for winning the AT.

Pattern D in Figure 51 shows the case where the player is in heaven at the end of the game after satisfying the ending conditions.

In pattern D of FIG. 51, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, it is determined that advantageous zone 1 ends with the third play of RT2, and that the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 occurs with the fourth play of RT2, so that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play has been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, heaven is set as the specified mode for winning the AT.

<<Specific example 3 of ball output specifications across favorable zones>> Next, using Figure 52, we will explain the case where specific information regarding the AT execution period is carried over to the next favorable zone as a carryover parameter.

Note that, here, the game of RT2 that ends the advantageous zone is determined depending on the number of remaining stocks in the AT at the end of the advantageous zone, but if the remaining stocks in the AT are configured to be cleared when the ending conditions are met, it may be configured to determine the game of RT2 that ends the advantageous zone depending on the number of remaining stocks in the AT at the time the ending conditions are met. Also, instead of the remaining number of stocks in the AT as the specified information regarding the execution period of the AT, if the AT is a game number management type AT, the number of remaining games in the AT may be used as the carryover parameter, or if the AT is a difference number management type AT, the remaining number of wins that can be won in the AT may be used as the carryover parameter.

The number of remaining stocks in the AT is information about the remaining period of the AT in a so-called set-managed AT, and although details are omitted, for example, in the case of an AT that lasts for 50 games per set, if there are remaining stocks after 50 games of the AT are played, the AT will move on to the next set, and if there are no remaining stocks, a lottery to continue the AT is held and the AT will end if not won.

Pattern A in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stock number of AT is 0 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A of FIG. 52, it is decided that advantageous zone 1 will end with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB has ended, and it is decided to move from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the first game of RT2, so that four games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 0 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern B in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stock in the AT is 1 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of FIG. 52, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the first play of RT2 determines that advantageous zone 1 will end, and the second play of RT2 determines that the normal zone will transition to advantageous zone 2, so that three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 1 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern C in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stock number of AT is 2 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of Fig. 52, after the operation of the Type 1 BB is completed, it is decided to end the advantageous zone 1 in the second play of RT2, and it is decided to move from the normal zone to the advantageous zone 2 in the third play of RT2, so that two games are executed in RT2 at the start of the advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two games are executed in RT2 at the start of the advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 2 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern D in Figure 52 shows the case where the remaining stock number of AT is 3 or more at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern D of FIG. 52, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, it is decided to end advantageous zone 1 at the third play of RT2, and it is decided to move from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 at the fourth play of RT2, so that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 3 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

By configuring as in specific examples 1 to 3 above, the value of the carried-over parameters in one favorable zone can be indirectly carried over to the next favorable zone, preventing the carried-over parameters in one favorable zone from being initialized by the initialization process at the end of the favorable zone, causing the player to lose money. In addition, it is possible to create an incentive to continue playing even when one favorable zone ends and the next favorable zone begins.

As shown in Figures 50 to 52, the timing of the end of the advantageous zone is delayed as the carry-over parameter value increases, because there is a 4/65536 probability that the normal zone will continue. For example, in pattern B of Figure 50, the specified point related to winning the AT is set to 50 at the start of advantageous zone 2, but if the normal zone continues for two plays, two plays will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, and so the specified point related to winning the AT is set to 70. In this way, by configuring the timing of the end of the advantageous zone to be delayed as the carry-over parameter value increases, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering losses even if the normal zone happens to continue for more than two plays.

The system may be configured so that the timing of the end of the advantageous period is earlier the larger the carryover parameter value. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the gaming facility from incurring losses even if the normal period happens to continue for two games.

Note that RT2 is configured to end after five plays, but the number of plays after which RT2 ends can be set appropriately depending on the carryover parameters that you want to indirectly carry over to the next favorable zone.

It is also possible to indirectly carry over multiple carryover parameters to the next favorable zone by increasing the number of plays that will end RT2. For example, any one of the specified points related to winning the AT, the specified mode related to winning the AT, and the specified information related to the remaining period of the AT may be used as a carryover parameter, any two of them may be used as carryover parameters, or all three may be used as carryover parameters. It should be noted that carryover parameters may be set in addition to the three mentioned above, so that four or more parameters may be used as carryover parameters.

As described above, we have explained a method of indirectly carrying over a specific parameter that affects the performance related to the instruction function in one favorable zone to the next favorable zone using RT2 (finite RT after the end of Type 1 BB), but it is also possible to award a player gaming media that exceeds the upper limit value of the favorable zone by connecting multiple favorable zones using RT2. This will be explained below using Figures 88 and 89.

<<Specific example 4 of ball payout specifications across favorable zones>> Here, using Figure 88, we will explain an example of granting a player gaming media that exceeds the upper limit of the difference in the number of gaming media (gaming value) in one favorable zone when a specific flag is won in the first favorable zone after the setting is changed (for example, this refers to a game in which a combination of 4/65536 is won or a game in which a combination of 4/65536 is won and a specified ball payout lottery is won; winning a specific flag can be referred to as a case in which a specific condition is satisfied).

In the example shown in Figure 88, it is configured to be able to determine which game will end the advantageous period, either the game at which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or any game during RT2, based on the value stored in a specified storage means (also called an RT2 counter) that can store the number of games played in RT2 at the start of one advantageous period.

The value of the RT2 counter may be configured to count the number of plays performed in RT2 at the start of one favorable period, or may be configured to store the remaining number of plays in RT2 at the start of one favorable period. The value of the RT2 counter is configured to be initialized at the end of the favorable period.

In addition, RT2 is configured to end after five plays have been performed.

In addition, during play in the normal zone, if the player is in an RT state (non-RT1, non-RT2, RT2) in which a transition to the favorable zone can be determined, the transition to the favorable zone is determined with approximately a 1/1 chance (not based on the RT state) based on the results of the internal lottery. Note that in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the transition to the favorable zone is not determined during a type 1 BB, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that a transition to the favorable zone is determined with approximately a 1/1 chance based on the results of the internal lottery even during a type 1 BB, or a transition to the favorable zone may be determined with a probability lower than approximately 1/1 (such as 1/10) based on the results of the internal lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 88, first, in the favorable zone 1 (the first favorable zone after the setting change), when a specific flag is hit (when a specific condition is satisfied), the AT is executed until the difference number of the game media in the favorable zone 1 exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 2350), and after the difference number of the game media exceeds the predetermined value, in a game in which the 1st type BB pattern combination can be stopped, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the 1st type BB pattern combination. Here, the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the 1st type BB pattern combination may be any effect that the player can judge to be appropriate for stopping the 1st type BB pattern combination, such as displaying an image such as "Aim for 7!". When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner according to the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the 1st type BB pattern combination, the player can stop the 1st type BB pattern combination (win). Note that the favorable zone 1 is the first favorable zone after the setting change, and since the game starts from a non-RT and non-1st type BB inside after the setting change, the value of the RT2 counter in the favorable zone 1 is 0. In addition, even if a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the player to stop the BB symbol combination, if the stop switch is operated in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner without following the predetermined effect to prompt the player to stop the BB symbol combination, the BB symbol combination cannot be stopped (a prize cannot be won). In such a case, the predetermined effect to prompt the player to stop the BB symbol combination is executed again in a subsequent game in which the BB symbol combination can be stopped.

After that, when the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with a predetermined presentation that prompts the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination stops (wins) and the Type 1 BB operation starts.

After that, advantageous zone 1 ends with a game that satisfies the end condition of Type 1 BB (a game in which the operation of Type 1 BB ends) based on the value of the RT2 counter being 0. Then, the transition to advantageous zone 2 is determined with the game following the game that ended advantageous zone 1 (the first game of RT2 (a game in the normal zone)). After that, four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, so the value of the RT2 counter in advantageous zone 2 becomes 4.

In favorable zone 2, when transitioning to non-RT, AT is executed until the difference in the number of game media in favorable zone 2 exceeds a predetermined value based on the value of the RT2 counter being 4, and in a game in which the type 1 BB pattern combination can be stopped after the difference in the number of game media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB pattern combination. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB pattern combination, the type 1 BB pattern combination is stopped (a prize is won) and the operation of the type 1 BB is started.

After that, based on the RT2 counter value being 4, the first play of RT2 ends favorable zone 2. Then, the transition to favorable zone 3 is determined in the play following the play that ended favorable zone 2 (the second play of RT2). After that, three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 3, so the value of the RT2 counter in favorable zone 3 becomes 3.

In favorable zone 3, when transitioning to non-RT, AT is executed until the difference in the number of game media in favorable zone 3 exceeds a predetermined value based on the value of the RT2 counter being 3, and in a game in which the type 1 BB pattern combination can be stopped after the difference in the number of game media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB pattern combination. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB pattern combination, the type 1 BB pattern combination is stopped (a prize is won) and the operation of the type 1 BB is started.

After that, the second play of RT2 ends favorable zone 3 based on the value of the RT2 counter being 3. Then, the transition to favorable zone 4 is determined in the play following the play that ends favorable zone 3 (the third play of RT2). After that, two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 4, so the value of the RT2 counter in favorable zone 4 becomes 2.

In favorable zone 4, when transitioning to non-RT, AT is executed until the difference in the number of game media in favorable zone 4 exceeds a predetermined value based on the value of the RT2 counter being 2, and in a game in which the type 1 BB pattern combination can be stopped after the difference in the number of game media exceeds the predetermined value, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the type 1 BB pattern combination. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect that prompts the stopping of the type 1 BB pattern combination, the type 1 BB pattern combination is stopped (a prize is won) and the operation of the type 1 BB is started. Then, a type 1 BB is won.

After that, based on the RT2 counter value being 2, favorable zone 4 ends with the third play of RT2. Then, the transition to favorable zone 5 is determined with the play following the play that ends favorable zone 4 (the fourth play of RT2). After that, one play is executed in RT2 at the start of favorable zone 5, so the value of the RT2 counter in favorable zone 5 becomes 1.

In the favorable zone 5, the lottery state for the AT is set to a predetermined suppression state based on the value of the RT2 counter being 1. The predetermined suppression state may be configured to allow the AT to be won, but is configured so that the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone does not exceed a predetermined value. In other words, the predetermined suppression state is controlled so that the favorable zone does not end when the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeds an upper limit (e.g., 2400). Note that, in order to maintain the predetermined suppression state so that gambling does not become excessively high, it is preferable to configure so that the favorable zone does not end when a predetermined number of plays have been played, but it may also be configured so that the predetermined suppression state can end by setting an upper limit (e.g., 4000) based on the number of plays in the favorable zone.

In this way, based on the value of the RT2 counter, it is configured to be possible to determine which game, either the game in which the operation of the first type BB ends or the game during RT2, will end the advantageous zone. Also, based on the value of the RT2 counter, it is configured to be possible to determine whether to execute the AT until the difference in the number of game media exceeds a predetermined value, or to set the lottery state related to the AT to a predetermined suppression state. In other words, it is configured to be possible to determine the expectation degree related to the AT (the degree of profit given to the player) based on the value of the RT2 counter. Specifically, when the value of the RT2 counter is 1, it is configured to be in a predetermined suppression state, and when the value of the RT2 counter is other than 1, it is configured not to be in the predetermined suppression state and to be able to execute the AT until the difference in the number of game media exceeds a predetermined value. It is to be noted that, regardless of whether to set it to a predetermined suppression state or not, it is also possible to configure that the expectation degree related to the AT, such as the expectation degree of winning the AT, the expectation degree of adding during the AT, and the expectation degree of continuing the AT, can be determined based on the value of the RT2 counter.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to award gaming media across multiple advantageous zones based on hitting a specific flag, and it is possible to award to a player gaming media that exceeds the upper limit of gaming media that can be awarded in one advantageous zone, thus eradicating the negative image of gaming machines equipped with advantageous zones that only allow a maximum of 2,400 positive coins to be obtained in one win. Furthermore, in the final advantageous zone (corresponding to advantageous zone 5 described above) to which the player moves based on hitting a specific flag, a predetermined suppression state is established, so that excessive gambling tendency is prevented.

In addition, the advantageous zone may be configured so that it does not occur in the game where the operation of the Type 1 BB ends, but only ends in the game during RT2, and it may be configured so that it is possible to determine in which game during RT2 the advantageous zone will end based on the value of the RT2 counter. In this case, if a specific flag is hit in advantageous zone 1, advantageous zone 1 ends in the first game of RT2, advantageous zone 2 ends in the second game of RT2, advantageous zone 3 ends in the third game of RT2, and the value of the RT2 counter for advantageous zone 4 becomes 1, so that a predetermined suppression state is entered in advantageous zone 4. By configuring in this way, the RT state when the advantageous zone ends will be in one of the games in RT2, so that processing does not become complicated.

In addition, if a player mistakenly wins a Type 1 BB when a specified effect that encourages the stopping of a Type 1 BB pattern combination is not being executed, specified information indicating that a Type 1 BB has been mistakenly won is stored in a specified RWM, and when specified information indicating that a Type 1 BB has been mistakenly won is stored, the advantageous zone is configured not to end even after the operation of the Type 1 BB ends regardless of the value of the RT2 counter, and the value of the RT2 counter is configured not to be updated in RT2 after the operation of the mistakenly won Type 1 BB ends. Note that the specified information indicating that a Type 1 BB has been mistakenly won is configured to be initialized in a game that transitions from RT2 to non-RT. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from suffering a loss even if he or she mistakenly wins a Type 1 BB.

In addition, RT2 is configured to end after five plays, but the number of plays after which RT2 ends can be set as appropriate.

In the example of FIG. 88, the AT is configured to start immediately after a specific flag is hit and the game transitions from RT2 to non-RT, but the AT may be configured to start after a predetermined number of premonition games (non-AT games) have passed.

<<Specific example 5 of ball payout specifications across favorable zones>> Here, using Figure 89, we will explain an example of granting a player gaming media that exceeds the upper limit of the difference in the number of gaming media (gaming value) in one favorable zone when a specific flag is won in the first favorable zone after the setting is changed (for example, this refers to a game in which a combination of 4/65536 is won or a game in which a combination of 4/65536 is won and a specified ball payout lottery is won; winning a specific flag can be referred to as a case in which a specific condition is satisfied).

In the example shown in FIG. 89, the lottery state for the AT is determined based on the RT state in which the player remains by referring to the RT state, and when the RT state is RT2 (finite RT after the operation of the first type BB ends), the lottery state for the AT is configured to be a predetermined preferential state (also called a super preferential state). In the super preferential state, if the player is not in the AT, the player wins the AT regardless of the winning role, or the player has a higher probability of winning the AT compared to a predetermined game state (for example, a specific game state different from the super preferential state). In addition, if the player is in the AT, the AT is configured to continue until the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds the upper limit (2400). The lottery state for the AT is a state that affects the result of the lottery for the AT, such as the AT transition lottery (also called the AT first win lottery), the AT additional lottery, the update of the AT end condition (addition/subtraction of the number of AT plays, addition/subtraction of the number of AT execution notifications), and the execution of the AT (notification of the operation mode).

RT2 is configured to end after 2000 plays have been performed.

In addition, the advantageous period does not end when a certain number of games have been played, but is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous period exceeds an upper limit (2,400) or when an arbitrary end condition is met.

In addition, regardless of the lottery status regarding the AT, the AT is configured to be executed as soon as an advantageous zone other than advantageous zone 1 starts. In addition, the AT may be configured to be executed after a predetermined number of premonition games (e.g., 32 games).

Furthermore, favorable zone 1 is a favorable zone to which it has been determined that a transition will occur during play during a normal zone and during non-RT1 (non-RT and not inside type 1 BB). Specifically, it is the first favorable zone after the setting change. Moreover, favorable zones 2 to 5 are favorable zones other than the first after the setting change. A flag (referred to as the favorable zone 1 flag) for distinguishing favorable zone 1 from favorable zones other than favorable zone 1 is configured to be storable in a specified memory area, and favorable zone 1 is configured to distinguish from favorable zones other than favorable zone 1 based on the favorable zone 1 flag. Moreover, the favorable zone 1 flag is configured to be initialized at the end of the favorable zone.

Here, we will explain the specific method for distinguishing between advantageous zone 1 and advantageous zones other than advantageous zone 1. Note that in the example shown in Figure 89, it is configured so that a transition to an advantageous zone can be determined even in the case of a single win on Type 1 BB.

In the example shown in Figure 89, a single win of Type 1 BB occurs in the normal section, followed by Replay -C (+1 type BB), Replay -D (+1 type BB), Replay -E (+1 type BB), Replay -F (+1 type BB), Replay -G (+1 type BB), Replay -H (+1 type BB), Replay -I (+1 type BB), Replay -J (+1 type BB), Winning -D (+1 type BB), Winning -E (+1 type BB), Winning -F (+1 If the player wins any of the following prizes, a transition to the advantageous zone will be determined if the RT state of the game is non-RT1, but a transition to the advantageous zone will not be determined if the RT state of the game is non-RT2 or RT2. In addition, if any of the following wins are won in the normal zone: WIN-A1, WIN-A2, WIN-A3, WIN-A4, WIN-A5, WIN-A6, WIN-B1, WIN-B2, WIN-B3, WIN-B4, WIN-B5, WIN-B6, WIN-C1, WIN-C2, WIN-C3, WIN-C4, WIN-C5, WIN-C6, the system is configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone regardless of the RT state of the game.

For this reason, the following will be awarded: single win of Type 1 BB, replay -C (+1 type BB), replay -D (+1 type BB), replay -E (+1 type BB), replay -F (+1 type BB), replay -G (+1 type BB), replay -H (+1 type BB), replay -I (+1 type BB), replay -J (+1 type BB), winning -D (+1 type BB), winning -E (+1 type BB), winning -F (+1 type BB), winning -G (+1 type BB), winning - If a transition to a favorable zone is determined in a game in which either H (+1 type BB), winning -I (+1 type BB), winning -J (+1 type BB), or winning -K (+1 type BB) has been won (a game in which a type 1 BB has been won), the favorable zone in question is determined to be a favorable zone to which a transition was determined during non-RT1, so it is determined to be favorable zone 1, and the favorable zone 1 flag is turned on in the game in which a transition to a favorable zone has been determined. In addition, there may be cases where the game at the end of RT2 overlaps with the game at the end of the advantageous zone. In this case, the next game may be in the normal zone and non-RT1. Therefore, there is a risk that the transition to the advantageous zone may be decided during non-RT1, other than immediately after the setting change. However, if you win a single 1-type BB, re-play -C (+1-type BB), re-play -D (+1-type BB), re-play -E (+1-type BB), re-play -F (+1-type BB), re-play -G (+1-type BB), re-play -H (+1-type BB), re-play -I (+1-type BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Winning-D (+1 type BB), Winning-E (+1 type BB), Winning-F (+1 type BB), Winning-G (+1 type BB), Winning-H (+1 type BB), Winning-I (+1 type BB), Winning-J (+1 type BB), Winning-K (+1 type BB) are designed to be 21918/65536 (approximately 1/3) as shown in Figure 19, so the probability of remaining in non-RT1 even after 2000 plays have been played and RT2 has ended is close to zero. Therefore, the favorable zone into which a transition is determined during non-RT1 is considered to be the first favorable zone after the setting has been changed.

In addition, if a transition to a favorable zone is determined in a game in which any of the following has been won: Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, it is not possible to determine whether the favorable zone is favorable zone 1 or a favorable zone other than favorable zone 1 in the game in which a transition to the favorable zone has been determined, so the RT state and the operating state of the type 1 BB condition device are referenced in the first game of the favorable zone. Then, if the first game of the favorable zone is non-RT1 (non-RT and not inside type 1 BB), it is determined that the favorable zone is a favorable zone to which a transition was determined during non-RT1, so it is determined to be favorable zone 1 and the favorable zone 1 flag is turned on. Furthermore, if the first play in the advantageous zone is non-RT2 (non-RT and within Type 1 BB) or RT2, it is determined that the advantageous zone is not an advantageous zone to which a transition was determined during non-RT1, so it is determined to be an advantageous zone other than advantageous zone 1, and the advantageous zone 1 flag is not turned on.

In addition, the system is configured so that the advantageous zone does not end while the Type 1 BB is in operation, and the transition to the advantageous zone is not determined while the Type 1 BB is in operation, so the transition to the advantageous zone is determined when playing non-RT1, non-RT2, or RT2.

By controlling the advantageous zone 1 flag in this way, it is possible to distinguish between advantageous zone 1 and advantageous zones other than advantageous zone 1.

In the example shown in Figure 89, first, during the AT in favorable zone 1 (the first favorable zone after the setting change), if a specific flag is hit (if a specific condition is met), a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination in a game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped. When the player operates the stop switch in a predetermined manner in accordance with the predetermined effect that prompts the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination, the Type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped (a win is made) and the operation of the Type 1 BB is started.

Next, when the operation of Type 1 BB ends, the next game will transition to RT2. In RT2, the lottery state for the AT will become a super-favorable state, and the AT will continue until the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone 1 exceeds the upper limit (2400), and when the difference in the number of game media in the favorable zone 1 exceeds the upper limit, the favorable zone 1 will end.

Next, after passing through the normal zone, when the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met (when a decision is made to move to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 2 begins. Since the RT state is still RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the lottery state for the AT becomes a super-favorable state, and the AT continues until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 2 exceeds the upper limit value, and advantageous zone 2 ends when the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 2 exceeds the upper limit value.

Next, after passing through the normal zone, when the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met (when a decision is made to move to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 3 begins. Since the RT state is still RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 3, the lottery state for the AT becomes a super-favorable state, and the AT continues until the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 3 exceeds the upper limit value, and when the difference in the number of gaming media in advantageous zone 3 exceeds the upper limit value, advantageous zone 3 ends.

Next, when the conditions for starting the advantageous zone are met after passing through the normal zone (when a decision is made to move to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 4 starts. Since the RT state is still RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 4, the lottery state for the AT is a super preferential state, and the AT continues until the difference in the number of game media in advantageous zone 4 exceeds the upper limit value, and when the difference in the number of game media in advantageous zone 4 exceeds the upper limit value, advantageous zone 4 ends.

Next, after passing through the normal zone, when the start conditions of the advantageous zone are met (when a decision is made to move to the advantageous zone), advantageous zone 5 starts. Even at the start of advantageous zone 5, the RT state is still RT2, so the lottery state related to the AT becomes the super-favorable state and the AT is executed, but RT2 ends during a certain game in advantageous zone 5 and it moves to non-RT. When moving from RT2 to non-RT, the state related to the AT is controlled to a predetermined suppression state. In the predetermined suppression state, it may be configured so that the AT can be won, but it is configured so that the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone does not exceed a predetermined value. In other words, in the predetermined suppression state, it is controlled so that the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone does not exceed the upper limit value, thereby preventing the advantageous zone from ending. Also, in the predetermined suppression state, it is configured so that a specific flag is not drawn, or a specific flag is drawn but not won.

After that, in a specified suppression state, the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone is controlled so as not to exceed the upper limit value, so that if the AT end condition is met in a game in advantageous zone 5, it becomes non-AT, and thereafter advantageous zone 5 is controlled so as not to end.

In this way, in the example shown in Figure 89, the RT state is referenced and the lottery state for the AT is determined based on the RT state in which the player remains, and when the RT state is RT2 (finite RT after the end of operation of Type 1 BB), the lottery state for the AT is configured to be a super preferential state. Also, when it is non-RT in favorable zone 1 (the first favorable zone after the setting change), the lottery state for the AT is configured to be a normal state, and when it is non-RT in favorable zones other than favorable zone 1, the lottery state for the AT is configured to be a specified suppressed state.

By configuring it in this way, a Type 1 BB is awarded based on hitting a specific flag, and by controlling the RT2 transition to an ultra-favorable state after the Type 1 BB ends, it becomes possible to award gaming media across multiple favorable zones, and gaming media that exceed the upper limit of gaming media that can be awarded in one favorable zone can be awarded to the player, thus eradicating the negative image of gaming machines equipped with favorable zones that can only earn a maximum of 2,400 coins per hit. Furthermore, when RT2 ends and the transition to non-RT occurs, a specified suppression state is entered, so that excessive gambling tendency is prevented.

In addition, the advantageous zone 1 may be configured so that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone 1 exceeds the upper limit value and the advantageous zone 1 ends without hitting a specific flag in the advantageous zone 1. In this case, the next advantageous zone after the advantageous zone 1 starts with an AT (or the AT is executed after a predetermined number of premonition games), but since the RT state remains non-RT, it does not become an ultra-favorable state, and when the AT ends, it is controlled to a predetermined suppression state and the advantageous zone does not end. In this way, by suppressing the expected value of winning gaming media when a specific flag is not hit, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature of the entire gaming machine while increasing the expected value of winning gaming media when a specific flag is hit.

In addition, during RT2 after hitting a specific flag, approximately one game of normal play (non-AT play) is played each time an advantageous zone ends, but the presentation on the LCD is configured to allow the AT presentation to continue. The display of the number of winnings during the AT displayed on the LCD at this time is also configured to display the cumulative number of winnings awarded across multiple advantageous zones, rather than being cleared each time an advantageous zone ends. By configuring it in this way, a seamless presentation can be achieved even if the system is configured to allow gaming media to be awarded across multiple advantageous zones.

In addition, the system is configured so that a specific flag can be won in advantageous zone 1, but so that a specific flag cannot be won in advantageous zones other than advantageous zone 1. By configuring it in this way, a specific flag can be won again in the super-favorable state, and RT2 will be reset after the end of Type 1 BB, so the super-favorable state will not be extended in effect, and excessive gambling can be prevented.

In addition, if a player mistakenly wins a type 1 BB in a situation where a specific flag has not been won in the advantageous zone 1, the lottery state for the AT is configured not to become a super-favorable state even when the game shifts to RT2, and the number of game media difference in the advantageous zone does not exceed the upper limit value without winning a specific flag during RT2, and the advantageous zone does not end. In addition, if a player mistakenly wins a type 1 BB in a super-favorable state in an advantageous zone other than advantageous zone 1, RT2 is reset, but the super-favorable state is not set during the reset RT2, and the number of game media difference in the advantageous zone does not exceed the upper limit value during the reset RT2, and the advantageous zone does not end. In addition, if a player mistakenly wins a type 1 BB in a predetermined suppressed state in an advantageous zone other than advantageous zone 1, the predetermined suppressed state is maintained even when the game shifts to RT2. By configuring it in this way, a player who accidentally wins a Type 1 BB will end up losing money, but it is possible to prevent players from intentionally winning a Type 1 BB to win a lot of game media.

Also, in a game in which a type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after hitting a specific flag in the advantageous zone 1, a predetermined effect is executed to encourage the stopping of the type 1 BB symbol combination, but the player fails to stop the type 1 BB symbol combination. Instead of executing the predetermined effect again in the subsequent game, the same effect as when the type 1 BB symbol combination is stopped in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed is executed, and the AT is continued until the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone 1 exceeds the upper limit value and the end condition of the advantageous zone 1 is met, and when the end condition of the AT executed at the start of the next advantageous zone is met, the AT is ended, and thereafter the lottery state regarding the AT is set to a predetermined suppression state. In other words, the expected value of the game value when the type 1 BB is not won in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed may be configured to be smaller than the expected value of the game value when the type 1 BB is won in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed. By reducing the expected value of the game value when the eye-pressing fails in this way, the expected value when the eye-pressing is successful can be increased. Furthermore, even if the player fails to press the button properly, the presentation will be the same as if the player had succeeded, so the presentation can proceed without giving the player any sense of discomfort.

In addition, while the system is configured to draw a specific flag during play during the AT in the advantageous zone 1, the system is not limited to this, and a specific flag may also be drawn during play during non-AT play in the advantageous zone 1, and if the specific flag is won, a Type 1 BB is awarded, and when the system transitions to RT2 after the Type 1 BB ends, the lottery status for the AT is changed to a super-favorable status and the AT begins.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be the subject of the lottery.

<Regarding the stop difference counter that stores the difference from when the power is turned on> In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the value (difference) calculated for each game is calculated by subtracting the number of medals inserted (sometimes called the number of medals inserted, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of medals bet, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of points inserted, the bet points, or the number of INs) from the number of medals paid out (sometimes called the number of medals paid out, the number of game media paid out, the number of medals given, the number of game media given, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals acquired, the number of game media acquired, the number of points paid out, the number of points given, the number of game media acquired, the number of points paid out, the number of points acquired ... In addition, the process of updating the stop difference counter before executing the stop process and the process related to the judgment are referred to as the stop monitoring process.

Note that, in the following, an example will be mainly described in which the stop processing is executed when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a predetermined value, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0), but this is not limited to this. For example, the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed after the power is turned on may be set as the reference (0), and the stop processing may be executed when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds a predetermined value. In other words, the stop processing may be executed by MY.

For example, after power is turned on, the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0), and if a stop-play process is executed when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds a predetermined value, the stop-play difference counter can store the difference in the number of game media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0), or a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0) (a value that allows the difference in the number of game media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0) to be understood).

This end-of-game monitoring process is performed not only in advantageous zones but also in normal zones (regardless of the game zone).

For example, in a certain game in which the total number of medals paid out since the power was turned on is 50,001, and the total number of medals inserted since the power was turned on is 31,000, the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, so information indicating that the stop condition has been met in that certain game is stored in the stop flag memory area, making it possible to execute the stop process.

The cap flag memory area is an area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, if the difference in the number of game media from the time the power is turned on exceeds 19,000, a specified value (e.g., a predetermined number such as "1" or "255") is stored in the cap flag memory area as information indicating that the cap condition has been met.

Then, if information indicating that the halt condition has been met is stored in the halt flag storage area, the halt process can be executed.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized by simply turning the power on without changing the settings (normal power ON) or turning the power off normally (power switch turned off). Furthermore, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized by clearing the RWM at the end of the favorable period. Note that turning the power on without changing the settings corresponds, for example, to turning the power switch on when the setting key switch is off.

In other words, if the power is turned off (the power switch is turned off) while the stop process is being executed, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the stop process will not be canceled and the stop process will be executed. Also, even if the game at the end of the advantageous zone is a game that satisfies the stop condition, clearing the RWM at the end of the advantageous zone will not initialize the value of the stop difference counter related to the stop condition, nor will it clear the information stored in the stop flag memory area, and the stop process will be executed.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a change in settings (RWM clear process with a change in settings) (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

Also, an RWM clear switch different from the setting key switch may be provided, and the information stored in the stop flag storage area may be cleared when the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated (when the RWM clear switch is on). When the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated, the setting change mode is not entered, but the RWM clear process associated with the RWM clear switch is performed.

The RWM clear switch may also serve as the reset switch. In other words, when the power is turned on while the reset switch is being operated (while the reset switch is on), the information stored in the stop flag storage area may be cleared.

As described above, if the power is turned off while the limiting process is being executed and then turned on again with a change of settings, the machine will transition to setting change mode, and once the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met and the setting change mode is ended, the limiting process will not be executed and the machine will enter a state in which play can be played (a state in which betting can be made).

In addition, the information stored in the stop flag memory area is not initialized by operating a reset switch that can release a certain error state (door open error, medal retention error, etc.), and the stop processing is executed.

In other words, even if the reset switch is operated while the stop process is being executed, the stop process will not be canceled and will be executed.

Note that, here, the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the capped flag storage area have been explained, but the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the capped temporary flag storage area, which will be described later, are similar to the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the capped flag storage area.

The stop processing may be any or all of the following processing: not adding the number of bets or credits when a medal is inserted, turning off the blocker so that the number of bets or credits is not added even when a medal is inserted, not executing bet processing even if the operation of the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch is accepted, not accepting the operation of the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch, not executing reel spin start processing even if the operation of the start switch is accepted, not accepting the operation of the start switch, not executing reel stop processing even if the operation of the stop switch is accepted, or not accepting the operation of the stop switch.

In other words, the stop processing prevents operations to be performed to play the next game (also called stopping the progress of the game). In this way, the state in which the stop processing is being executed is sometimes called the stop state or the activation of the complete function.

Even if the game progress is stopped by the stop processing, the operation of the settlement switch is valid, and the settlement processing can be executed. In gaming machines that do not use actual medals (so-called medal-less gaming machines), the operation of the settlement switch for moving the betted gaming medals (electronic medals) to the gaming medal count display device (a device that can store up to 16,383 gaming medals based on the concept of the tray 28 of conventional gaming machines) and the operation of the counting switch for moving the number of gaming medals stored in the gaming medal count display device to the lending unit are valid, and the processing based on the operation of each switch is configured to be executable.

When game progress is stopped by the stop processing, it cannot be released even by turning the power on. The stopped game progress (stopped state) can be released by turning the power on, which involves changing the settings and executing the RWM initialization process. In other words, if a gaming machine is put into a stopped state during the opening hours of the gaming center, that gaming machine cannot be operated during the opening hours of that day.

In this way, if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, it may cause the player to become overly gambling-minded. Therefore, by stopping the game when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds the predetermined value, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game.

The stop difference counter may also be referred to as difference number counter, difference number storage means, difference number storage means, difference number storage area, difference number storage area, number of gaming media storage means, number of gaming media storage area, number of gaming medals storage means, number of gaming medals storage area, MY counter at power-on, MY storage means at power-on, MY storage area at power-on, stop counter, stop difference number counter for stop, difference number of medals counter for stop, MY counter for stop, MY storage means for stop, MY storage area for stop, complete difference number counter, complete MY counter.

The value stored in the stop difference counter is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on in a stop state or when the power is not turned on. In this embodiment, the initial value of the stop difference counter is 0 and increments from the initial value, so initialization at power-on means setting the value of the stop difference counter to 0. However, if the initial value of the stop difference counter is 19,000 and the counter is a subtractive counter, initialization at power-on means setting the value of the stop difference counter to 19,000. Note that power-on includes normal power-on, power-on with a setting change, and power-on with an RWM abnormality. Also, the value stored in the stop difference counter is not initialized by the RWM initialization process that is executed when the end condition of the favorable zone (for example, MY during the favorable zone exceeds 2,400, or the number of games during the favorable zone reaches a predetermined number, etc.) is met.

In addition, since the hit difference counter is easily initialized by fraud if it is initialized only by turning on the power, the hit difference counter may be configured to be cleared by turning on the power while pressing a specific switch that cannot be operated by the player, such as a setting change switch, reset switch, or RAM clear switch, when no power is being supplied.

In addition, if a power outage occurs when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds a predetermined value and game progress is stopped, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the OFF position and the machine starts up normally (normal power on), the value of the stop difference counter is initialized, but game progress remains stopped. This is because the stop process is executed when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, and this stop process is configured to repeat the same process indefinitely using jump commands, etc., so even if a power outage occurs during the stop process and the power is turned on again, the stop process will start. Note that when the stop process is executed, an interrupt process is executed, and the interrupt process is executed as usual, but the stop process will loop without returning from the interrupt process to the normal main loop process.

Note that because interrupt processing is executed normally while the termination process is being performed, the above-mentioned power-off process can be executed normally even if an event that cuts off the power supply (for example, turning off the power switch) occurs during the termination process.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent unauthorized power-off and power-on that would allow gameplay to continue after gameplay has been halted by the game-stopping process.

The shot difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out for each game, and a specific example of updating the shot difference counter value is described below. The process of updating the shot difference counter value is executed at a predetermined timing between after all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (betting for the next game is possible). Because the process of updating the shot difference counter value is executed when one game ends, the predetermined timing is sometimes referred to as when one game ends. The shot difference counter is described as 2-byte data. The "/" indicating 2-byte data indicates the separator between each byte, and the number in parentheses after the binary value indicates the binary value in decimal.

<When the hit difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)> When the value of the hit difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the hit difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the hit difference counter in the hit difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the hit difference counter is 00000000/01101011b (107).

<When the hit difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)> When the value of the hit difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the hit difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the hit difference counter in the hit difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the hit difference counter is 00000000/01100001b (97).

<When the hit difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)> When the value of the hit difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the hit difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the hit difference counter in the hit difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the hit difference counter is 00000000/00000111b (7).

<When the hit difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)> When the value of the hit difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the hit difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the hit difference counter in the hit difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the hit difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771).

The result of the calculation explained above in <When hit difference counter = 00000000b (0), number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)> is -00000011b (-3), but the value stored in the hit difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771) because the most significant bit is configured so that a 0 indicates a positive value and a 1 indicates a negative value. With a 2-byte counter, values up to 01111111/11111111 (32767) of the hit difference counter can be stored correctly without using the most significant bit. In other words, if the value of the hit/stop difference counter is 11111111/11111111b, it can indicate -32767, so in the above example, -3 would be 10000000/00000011b.

In addition, in each of the above examples of calculations, there are some parts that are omitted. More specifically, the current value of the stop difference counter is acquired, and it is determined whether the most significant bit of the acquired stop difference counter value is 0 or not. If the most significant bit of the acquired stop difference counter value is 0, the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of paid medals, the subtracted value is added to the acquired stop difference counter value, and the added value is updated as the value of the stop difference counter. Also, if the most significant bit of the acquired stop difference counter value is 1, the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of paid medals, and the subtracted value is subtracted from the acquired stop difference counter value by a fixed value of 10000000/00000000b (32768), and the subtracted value is updated as the value of the stop difference counter.

In addition, if the result of calculating the value to be updated as the value of the stop difference counter is a negative value, the most significant bit of the absolute value of the result of calculating the value to be updated as the value of the stop difference counter is set to 1, and the value is updated as the value of the stop difference counter.

In addition, in each of the above calculation examples, the result of subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out in the register was added to the obtained value of the stop difference counter, but the order of calculations may be such that first the number of medals paid out is added to the obtained value of the stop difference counter, and then the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the result of that addition, or the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the obtained value of the stop difference counter first, and then the number of medals paid out is added to the result of that subtraction.

In addition, when the number of medals paid out is not 0, it means that a small role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the small role has stopped. When a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals paid out may be 3 or 0. If the number of medals paid out is 3 when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals inserted is 3, and if the number of medals paid out is 0 when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals inserted is 0.

In addition, when a replay role is won, a process for updating the stop difference number counter may be executed, or the process for updating the stop difference number counter may not be executed.In addition, when a replay role is won, a process for determining whether to stop the difference number counter may be executed, or the process for determining whether to stop the difference number counter may not be executed.

The stop difference counter does not have to be 2 bytes, but may be 3 bytes or 4 bytes. When the stop difference counter is 3 bytes, the fixed value is 10000000/00000000/00000000b (8388608), and when the stop difference counter is 4 bytes, the fixed value is 10000000/00000000/00000000/00000000b (2147483648). Note that the stop difference counter is initialized when the power is turned on, so even if the number of medals paid out is 0 in 10,000 games, which corresponds to about a whole day during the business hours of the game arcade, only up to -30,000 (10,000 (number of games that can be played in a day) x 3 (number of medals inserted)) is stored, so a stop difference counter of 2 bytes is sufficient storage capacity.

<Another aspect of the stop difference counter update> The gaming machine may be configured to include a payout medal count storage area that stores the total number of payout medals since the gaming machine is powered on, a medal count storage area that stores the total number of medals inserted since the gaming machine is powered on, and a stop difference counter that stores the difference since the gaming machine is powered on, and the payout medal count storage area, the medal count inserted storage area, and the stop difference counter are configured to be initialized when the power is turned on. When updating the stop difference counter in the stop difference counter update process executed after one game is completed, if the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area from the value stored in the payout medal count storage area is a positive value, the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area from the value stored in the payout medal count storage area is stored in the stop difference counter, and if the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area from the value stored in the payout medal count storage area is a negative value, 0 is stored in the stop difference counter.

In such a configuration, it is desirable that the payout medal count storage area, the inserted medal count storage area, and the stop difference counter are 2-byte storage areas, but the payout medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, the inserted medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, and the stop difference counter may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more.

The medal payout count storage area, medal insertion count storage area, and stop difference counter are initialized when the power is turned on, and the initialization process stores 0 in each storage area. As with the above, the events that occur when the power is turned on include setting changes and RWM abnormalities.

The number of medals paid out memory area is a memory area that accumulates and stores the number of medals paid out for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of medals paid out memory area update process). For example, when 100 is stored in the number of medals paid out memory area, if the Nth game is played and 10 medals are paid out, 110 will be stored in the number of medals paid out memory area after the Nth game is completed, and if the N+1th game is played and 0 medals are paid out (no medals were paid out), 110 will be stored in the number of medals paid out memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The number of medals inserted memory area is a memory area that accumulates and stores the number of medals inserted for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of medals inserted memory area update process). For example, when 50 is stored in the number of medals inserted memory area, if the Nth game is played and three medals are inserted, 53 will be stored in the number of medals inserted memory area after the Nth game is completed, and if the N+1th game is played and two medals are inserted, 55 will be stored in the number of medals paid out memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The stop difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game. Here, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a positive value, the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is updated as the value of the stop difference counter, but if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the value of the stop difference counter is updated to 0. For this reason, the value of the stop difference counter is not necessarily the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid medals for each game, but this is not a problem because the stop difference counter is a counter for determining whether the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000.

Also, in the above description, if the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the stop difference counter is set to 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the stop difference counter may not be updated, a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 may be stored in the stop difference counter, a fixed value of 19,000 or more may be stored in the stop difference counter, or the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the paid out medal count storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game may be stored as is.

When the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the stop difference counter is not updated, or a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 is stored in the stop difference counter. Even if the process of determining whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 is executed every game, the value of the stop difference counter will not exceed 19,000, so the progress of the game will not be stopped. When the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game is a positive value, an accurate value is stored in the stop difference counter, so there is no problem. Also, when the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the process of determining whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 may not be executed.

In the case of a mode in which a fixed value of 19,000 or more is stored in the stop difference counter when the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game is negative, or the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game is stored as is, if the process of determining whether the stop difference counter value exceeds 19,000 is executed every game, there is a possibility that it will be determined that it has exceeded 19,000. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game is negative, there is no problem in not executing the process of determining whether the stop difference counter value exceeds 19,000.

The stop difference counter update process is similar to the above-mentioned process, and is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (bet for the next game can be placed). The stop difference counter update process may include a payout medal count memory area update process and an inserted medal count memory area update process.

<Hit-stop difference counter judgment process when the consecutive operation device of the reel or the first type special reel is operating> Before executing the judgment process of whether the value of the hit-stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 as the hit-stop difference counter judgment process, it may be possible to judge whether the consecutive operation device of the reel is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, or whether the consecutive operation device of the reel or the first type special reel is operating, and if it is judged that they are operating in either case, the hit-stop difference counter judgment process may not be executed.

This is because if play stops while the continuous role operation device or the first type special role is operating (so-called during a bonus), it is highly likely that the player's motivation to play will be significantly diminished. Therefore, by allowing play to proceed during a bonus even if the value of the hit stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, and by stopping the progress of play after the bonus ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment without diminishing their motivation to play. It is also possible to increase the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls won during a bonus.

Even in this type of configuration, the update process for the hit and stop difference counter is performed even when the continuous reel operation device is operating or the first type special reel is operating. Therefore, it is preferable that the program processing order is configured as follows: "update process for the hit and stop difference counter" → "processing to determine whether the continuous reel operation device is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, and whether the continuous reel operation device or the first type special reel is operating" → "hit and stop difference counter determination process."

Also, if the value of the hit difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and the value of the hit difference counter falls below 19,000 when the bonus ends, the game may be stopped after the bonus ends.

In this case, even during a bonus, it is judged whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19000, and if it is judged that the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1", "255", etc.) is stored in the temporary stop flag (temporary stop flag storage area), and it is judged whether the value of the temporary stop flag is the predetermined value at the end of the bonus, and if it is the predetermined value, the progress of the game is stopped. Note that if it is judged whether the value of the temporary stop flag is the predetermined value at the end of the bonus and it is judged that it is not the predetermined value, the progress of the game is not stopped. In addition, if the configuration is such that a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag even when it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000 when not in a bonus, it is possible to configure the game to stop depending on whether the temporary stop flag is at a predetermined value after the end of each game, whether in a bonus or not, and to stop the game depending on the value of the temporary stop flag.If the configuration is such that a predetermined value is not stored in the temporary stop flag when it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000 when not in a bonus, it is possible to configure the game to stop depending on whether the value of the stop difference counter has exceeded 19,000 after the end of each game, when not in a bonus, without determining whether the temporary stop flag is at a predetermined value.

The temporary limit flag is not initialized by the initialization of the RWM at power-on, but is cleared by the initialization of the RWM at power-on that involves a setting change.

In the above embodiment, an example was described in which game progress is not stopped even if the value of the hit-stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured such that game progress is not stopped even if the value of the hit-stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during an AT. However, as described above, since the AT allows the end conditions to be extended (changed), game progress is not stopped only in an AT in which the end conditions are not extended.

When there are multiple prescribed numbers for starting a game, there are cases where the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one prescribed number, and when the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one prescribed number, it cannot be said that the end condition has changed, so the game is not stopped even if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000. Specifically, when three and two coins are possible as the prescribed numbers for starting a game, the end condition of the AT can be updated with three coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference can be updated), but the end condition of the AT cannot be updated with two coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference cannot be updated), and when the stop difference counter reaches 19,000 during the AT, the game is not stopped until the end condition of the AT is met.

This ensures that even if the AT is made to look like a bonus, it operates in the same way as a bonus, so that the player's interest in the game does not decrease. It also increases the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls they win during the bonus.

In addition, if the game progress is not stopped even if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus or AT, lotteries that are advantageous to the player, such as AT lotteries or CZ lotteries, will not be executed during the bonus or during play during the AT after the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000.

This will help to prevent players from becoming overly gambling-minded when it is certain that the game will stop.

Note that, during the bonus, it is determined whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, and if it is determined that the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in the temporary stop flag (temporary stop flag storage area), and when the bonus ends, it is determined whether the value of the temporary stop flag is the predetermined value, and if so, the progress of the game is stopped. However, it is not necessary to provide the temporary stop flag.

Specifically, if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the value of the stop difference counter may be configured not to be updated during subsequent play during the bonus, and the stop process may be executed by the stop difference counter judgment process after the bonus ends. For example, if the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus (e.g. 19001), the stop difference counter may not be updated during subsequent play after that, and the value of the difference number counter at the end of the bonus may be configured to exceed 19,000.

<Initialization of the strike-stop difference counter> In the above embodiment, when the strike-stop difference counter is initialized at power-on, the initial value is set to 0 if it is an additive counter, and 19,000 if it is a subtractive counter. However, this is not limiting, and any value may be used as the initial value.

For example, if the shot difference counter is a 2-byte counter, it can count from 0 to 65535. If the game is to be stopped when the difference from when the power was turned on exceeds 19,000, the shot difference counter is required to count up to 19,000, so the initial value is set to 46,535 (65,535-19,000). In this case, the game is stopped when the value of the shot difference counter exceeds 65,535, so it is easy to determine whether the difference from when the power was turned on has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag stores 1 or 0. The carry flag stores 1 even when it falls below 0, but as mentioned above, the theoretical maximum number of coins inserted per day is around 30,000 coins, so there is a sufficient margin of 16,535 coins (46,535-30,000). In reality, the number of coins that can be inserted in a day is unlikely to decrease by 30,000 coins because small prizes and replay prizes are won, so the probability of it falling below 0 is extremely low.

By configuring it in this way, the process of updating the hit/stop difference counter can be simplified and the program size can be reduced.

Also, for example, as described above, if the difference exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the progress of the game may be stopped at the end of the bonus. In such a case, if the stop difference counter can only count up to 19,000, the increase during the bonus cannot be counted, so the initial value of the stop difference counter when it is a 2-byte counter may be set to a value smaller than 46,535. For example, a value smaller than 46,535 may be 40,000. In this case, since there is a margin for winning up to 6,535 coins after the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus, the counting of the difference can be continued until the bonus ends. Also, even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the AT can only win up to a maximum of 2,414 coins due to the relationship with the advantageous zone, so even if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the counting of the difference can be continued until the AT ends. When the initial value of the stop difference counter is set to 40,000, it is possible to determine whether the difference exceeds 19,000 by whether the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 59,000. In addition, if the value of the hit difference counter exceeds 59,000, it will determine whether the game is in a bonus state, and if so, the game will continue to progress until the bonus ends.

Although an example has been given in which the initial value of the hit difference counter is a value smaller than 46,535, it is preferable to set the initial value to a value (32,767 or greater) greater than half the maximum value (65,535) that can be counted with two bytes. This is because when the setting value of a gaming machine is a value that indicates the smallest ball payout rate (for example, setting value 1), the ball payout rate is often designed to be below 100%, making it more likely that the difference will decrease rather than increase. For this reason, by setting the initial value of the hit difference counter to a value greater than half the maximum value that can be counted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the value of the hit difference counter will become 0, making it easier to achieve normal operation in the market.

It is also possible that the difference is not counted correctly when the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000. In this case, even if the initial value of the stop difference counter is set to 46,535, the game will not be stopped even if the difference exceeds 19,000 during the bonus. In this case, when the stop difference counter exceeds 65,535 (when it is determined that it has exceeded 65,535, or when it is determined that 1 has been stored in the carry flag), a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag, and whether or not to stop the game progress is determined depending on whether the temporary stop flag is at a predetermined value. In this way, if the difference exceeds 19,000 during the bonus, the stop difference counter will exceed 65,535 and count from 0, but since the decision on whether to stop the game progress is based on the temporary stop flag, it is possible to achieve normal operation overall, even though the value of the stop difference counter is not normal.

Although it has been explained that the shot difference counter subtracts the number of medals inserted and adds the number of medals paid out, it may also be configured to do the opposite, adding the number of medals inserted and subtracting the number of medals paid out. In this case, the initial value of the shot difference counter may be set to 19,000, or a value between 19,000 and 32,766 inclusive.

The hit and stop difference counter has been explained as a 2-byte counter, but it can also be a 3-byte or 4-byte counter. If the hit and stop difference counter is a 3-byte counter, the initial value can be set to 16758215 so that the carry flag will store 1 when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins. By making it 3 bytes or more, even if there are gaming parlors that do not turn off the power to their gaming machines, and the set value is always below 100% and 10,000 games are played every day, the hit and stop difference counter will not fall below 0 for several years, further reducing the possibility of malfunctions in the market.

<Regarding the test signal related to stopping> As described above, when the stopping process is executed, the game progress stops (a stopped state occurs). If the game progress suddenly stops during testing by the testing institution, it is not possible to accurately determine whether the game progress stopped due to a malfunction or because the stopping process was activated. For this reason, when the stopping process is executed, the device may be configured to execute a process for outputting a test signal related to stopping, which makes it possible to know that the game progress has stopped due to the execution of the stopping process. By configuring in this way, when the game progress stops due to the stopping process, the testing institution can determine that the game progress has stopped due to the execution of the stopping process, rather than due to a malfunction, and the testing institution can determine the correct results of the test.

In this case, the process for outputting the test signal related to the stop may be executed continuously during the stop state, or may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), or may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)).

In addition, when the stopping process is executed, the process for outputting the test signal related to the stopping process, which allows the player to know that the progress of the game has been stopped by the execution of the stopping process, can be executed, but the process for outputting the test signal related to the stopping process may be executed from the game before the occurrence of the stopping process. In other words, the process for outputting the test signal related to the stopping process may be executed in advance. For example, in a specification in which the stopping process is executed when the difference number from the start point of the power-on exceeds 19,000, the process for outputting the test signal related to the stopping process may be executed from the time when the difference number from the start point of the power-on becomes 18,500. In this case, since the difference number from the start point of the power-on has not yet reached 19,000, the game can be progressed even in a situation where the test signal related to the stopping is output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the testing organization in advance that the stopping process may be executed, and the testing by the testing organization can be performed smoothly.

At this time, the process for outputting the test signal related to the cutoff may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) or may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)). Also, it may be executed when the difference number from the start point at power-on is a value of 18,500 or more (if the difference number from the start point at power-on becomes less than 18,500, the process for outputting the test signal related to the cutoff may not be executed).

Note that the timing for executing the process to output the test signal related to the pre-canceling is set to when the difference number from the start point when the power is turned on reaches 18,500, but the difference number from the start point when the power is turned on can be set to any value, such as 18,000 or 18,985.

Furthermore, as the timing for executing the process to output a test signal related to the stoppage in advance, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the reference (0), and if the stoppage state is to occur when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds 19,000, the time can be set to any value, such as when the difference in the number of gaming media becomes 18,500, 18,000, or 18,985.

In addition to the test signal, processing may also be performed to output an external signal. In this case, the output mode and output timing of the test signal related to the limiting process described above can be applied to the external signal (e.g., a security signal). By outputting an external signal in this way, it is possible to notify hall staff in advance that there is a possibility that the limiting process will be executed.

The security signal may also be configured to be output when a specific error occurs (when a specific error occurs and until the specific error is cleared).

For example, the specified error that outputs a security signal may be any one or all of the following: errors related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error) and errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, abnormality detection error). Also, it is not limited to the errors mentioned above, and other errors may also be used.

The security signal may be configured to be output not only when a specific error occurs, but also during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, the security signal may be configured to be output when the setting key switch is on.

In other words, the security signal may be configured to be output when any of the following conditions are met: a) when a stalled state is reached, b) when a specified error occurs, c) when a transition to setting change mode is made, or d) when a transition to setting confirmation mode is made.

By configuring it in this way, the amusement facility can prevent not only certain errors, but also fraudulent turning on of the setting key switch (for example, fraudulent changes to setting values or fraudulent confirmation of setting values) by outputting a security signal.

The conditions for outputting a security signal are not limited to adopting all of the above conditions A) to D), but may adopt any part of the conditions or may include other conditions.

<External signal related to the stoppage> A security signal is output as an external signal related to the stoppage. For example, it can be configured to start outputting the security signal at a certain timing when the stoppage state is reached, and end outputting the security signal when a predetermined period (e.g. 30 seconds) has elapsed. In other words, when the stoppage state is reached, the security signal is output for a predetermined period. Then, after the stoppage state is reached and the security signal has been output for the predetermined period, outputting of the security signal ends even in the stoppage state.

Specifically, when starting to output a security signal, a timer value corresponding to a predetermined period is stored as a timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period. Then, at every predetermined cycle (e.g., each time a timer interrupt process is executed), a process of updating the timer value for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period (e.g., a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value stored in the RWM) is executed.

For example, the timer value corresponding to the specified period can be "13429", and the specified cycle can be "2.234 ms (cycle of timer interrupt processing)". Then, by updating the timer value to output a security signal for the specified period, the security signal is configured to be output for the period until the timer value becomes "0". In this case, the security signal can be output for approximately 30 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, a security signal can be output to the hall computer (also called hall computer) for a specified period of time, allowing game store staff to know that some kind of event has occurred on a gaming machine that has been discontinued.

In addition, after the security signal has been output for a predetermined period of time, the output of the security signal is terminated, so that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not output a security signal without turning off the power (without turning off the power switch) of the gaming machine that has reached a stoppage state.

In addition, gaming establishments (store staff) may wish to appeal to players about gaming machines that have been stopped playing by showing a notification that is issued when a game is stopped playing (this corresponds to a stop-play notification, described below) without turning off the power to the machine (without turning off the power switch).

In this way, even if the gaming machine is left in a stopped state, the security signal output will end a predetermined period after the security signal output starts, so the hall computer will not continue to receive the security signal. In other words, it is possible to prevent gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) from feeling annoyed by the security signal.

In addition, if a specified error (a specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting a security signal) occurs after the output of the security signal has been stopped and a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, the security signal may be output again.

In other words, a security signal is output from the timing (timing A) when the security signal output starts until a timing (timing B) a predetermined period later. Thereafter, if a predetermined error occurs (a predetermined error is detected) under a predetermined situation where a security signal is not being output, output of the security signal starts from the timing (timing C) when the predetermined error occurs (a predetermined error is detected). Note that when the predetermined error is cleared, output of the security signal ends.

By configuring it in this way, if a specific error occurs in a gaming machine that has been left in a stopped state, the security signal is output again, making it possible to notify the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that some kind of fraud may have occurred on the stopped gaming machine.

Also, if the device is in a stopped state and enters the setting confirmation mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started, the security signal may be output again.

In other words, the security signal is output from the timing (timing A) when the security signal output starts until a predetermined time later (timing B). After that, if the setting confirmation mode is entered under a predetermined situation where the security signal is not being output, the security signal output starts from the timing (timing C) when the setting confirmation mode is entered (the setting key switch is turned on). Note that when the setting confirmation mode ends, the security signal output ends.

By configuring it in this way, if a gaming machine that has been left in a stopped state goes into setting confirmation mode, the security signal is output again, making it possible to notify the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that some kind of fraud may have been committed on the stopped gaming machine.

<When a specified error occurs while the security signal is being output after the stop state is reached (1)> If a specified error (a specified error is an error that is a condition for the output of the security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since the start of the output of the security signal when the stop state is reached and the specified error is released after the specified period of time has elapsed since the start of the output of the security signal, the security signal may be configured to be output beyond the specified period of time.

In other words, suppose that a specified error occurs (a specified error is detected) at a timing (timing B) before a specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the timing (timing A) when the security signal started to be output. Then, suppose that the specified error is cleared at a timing (timing C) after the specified period has elapsed since timing A (e.g., 40 seconds after timing A).

In this case, the security signal is output from timing A to timing C. In other words, the security signal can continue to be output until the specified error is resolved (the security signal is not output when power is not being supplied).

By configuring it in this way, even if the specifications are such that a security signal is output for a specified period of time when a gaming machine is in a stopped state, if a specified error occurs before the specified period has elapsed and the specified error is cleared after the specified period has elapsed, the security signal will be output until the specified error is cleared, so that the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) can be appropriately notified that some event has occurred with the gaming machine that has been stopped.

The system is also configured to execute a timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a specified period even during a period in which a specified error occurs.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the above, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, if a halted state is reached and a specified error (the specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, and the specified error is released after the specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, the security signal may be output until the specified period of time has elapsed since the specified error was released.

If the security signal is configured to be output until a specified period of time has elapsed after the specified error is cleared, it is conceivable that, when the specified error is cleared, the timer value corresponding to the specified period of time may be reset in order to output the security signal for the specified period of time.

By configuring it in this way, the security signal is output until a specified period of time has passed since the specified error is cleared, so even if a specified error occurs, the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) can accurately understand that the game has been stopped.

In addition, for example, if a halted state occurs and a specified error (the specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting the security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, and the specified error is released after the specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, the security signal may be configured to be output until the remaining period of the specified period has elapsed since the specified error was released.

For example, if the timing when the output of the security signal starts is defined as timing A, the timing when a specified error occurs (a specified error is detected) is defined as timing B, the timing when the specified error is cleared is defined as timing C, and the timing when the output of the security signal ends is defined as timing D, then the specified period may be defined as (the period from timing A to timing B) + (the period from timing C to timing D).

In this case, the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period may not be executed during the period from timing B to timing C. Note that even in this case, the timer interrupt process may be executed.

By configuring it this way, even if a certain error occurs midway, a security signal can be output (combined) for a certain period of time to notify the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that the game has been stopped.

<When a specified error occurs while the security signal is being output after the stop state is reached (2)> When a specified error (a specified error is an error that is a condition for the output of the security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since the start of the security signal output when the stop state is reached and the specified error is released before the specified period of time has elapsed since the start of the security signal output, the output of the security signal may be configured to end when the specified period of time has elapsed since the start of the security signal output.

In other words, suppose that a specified error occurs (a specified error is detected) at a timing (timing B) before a specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the timing (timing A) when the security signal output started. Then, suppose that the specified error is released (timing C) before the specified period has elapsed from timing A (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). Furthermore, the output of the security signal is terminated at a timing (timing D) after timing C, when the specified period has elapsed from timing A.

In this case, a security signal is output from timing A to timing D (a specified period from timing A). In other words, even if a specified error occurs, a timer value update process is executed to output a security signal for a specified period. Furthermore, even if a specified error occurs, the timer value corresponding to the specified period is not reset. Furthermore, even after the specified error is cleared, the security signal can continue to be output from timing A until the specified period (a security signal is not output when power is not being supplied).

By configuring it in this way, in a specification where a security signal is output for a specified period of time when a play-stop state is reached, if a specified error occurs within the specified period of time after the start of outputting the security signal and the specified error is cleared, the output time of the security signal will not be extended due to the occurrence of the specified error (because the output time of the security signal is the specified period), so it is possible to prevent gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) from feeling annoyed by the security signal.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the one described above, and other configurations may be used.

For example, if a halted state occurs, a specified error (the specified error is an error that is a condition for outputting a security signal) occurs before a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of a security signal started, and the specified error is released before the specified period of time has elapsed since the output of a security signal started, the security signal may be output until the specified period of time has elapsed since the specified error was released.

If the security signal is configured to be output until a specified period of time has elapsed after the specified error is cleared, it is conceivable that, when the specified error is cleared, the timer value corresponding to the specified period of time may be reset as the timer value for outputting the security signal for the specified period of time.

By configuring it in this way, the security signal will be output until a specified period of time has passed since the specified error was cleared, allowing the gaming establishment (and gaming establishment staff) to accurately understand that play has been stopped.

<When the system enters a stop state and transitions to the setting check mode while the security signal is being output (1)> When the system enters a stop state and transitions to (starts) the setting check mode before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started, and the setting check mode ends after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started, the security signal may be configured to be output beyond the predetermined period of time.

In other words, the setting key switch is turned on and the setting confirmation mode is entered at a timing (timing B) before a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the timing (timing A) when the security signal output started. Then, the setting key switch is turned off and the setting confirmation mode ends at a timing (timing C) after the predetermined period has elapsed since timing A (e.g., 40 seconds have elapsed since timing A).

In this case, the security signal is output from timing A to timing C. In other words, the security signal can continue to be output until the setting confirmation mode is released (the security signal is not output when power is not being supplied).

In addition, even in the setting confirmation mode, the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a specified period is performed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the specifications are such that a security signal is output for a specified period of time when a gaming machine reaches a stoppage state, if the machine transitions to setting confirmation mode before the specified period has elapsed, and the setting confirmation mode ends after the specified period has elapsed, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, so that the gaming establishment (gaming establishment staff) can be notified that some event has occurred with the gaming machine that has reached a stoppage state.

In addition, because the security signal output time is not extended when the setting confirmation mode is entered, gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) are not bothered by the security signal.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the one described above, and other configurations may be used.

For example, if the device is in a stopped state and transitions to setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started, and the setting confirmation mode ends after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started, the security signal may be output until the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ended.

If the security signal is configured to be output until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the setting check mode ends, it is possible to reset the timer value corresponding to the predetermined period of time when the setting check mode ends in order to output the security signal for the predetermined period of time.

By configuring it in this way, the security signal will be output until a specified period of time has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ended, allowing the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) to accurately grasp that the game has been stopped.

Also, for example, if the device is in a stopped state and transitions to the setting confirmation mode before a predetermined period has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, and the setting confirmation mode ends after the predetermined period has elapsed since the output of the security signal started, the security signal may be output until the remaining period of the predetermined period has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode ended.

For example, if the timing when the security signal output starts is timing A, the timing when the setting check mode is entered is timing B, the timing when the setting check mode ends is timing C, and the timing when the security signal output ends is timing D, the specified period may be set to (period from timing A to timing B) + (period from timing C to timing D).

In this case, the timer value update process for outputting the security signal for a predetermined period may not be executed during the period from timing B to timing C. Note that even in this case, the timer interrupt process may be executed.

By configuring it this way, even if a certain error occurs midway, a security signal can be output (combined) for a certain period of time to notify the gaming establishment (or gaming establishment staff) that the game has been stopped.

<When the system enters a stopped state and transitions to the setting check mode while the security signal is being output (2)> When the system enters a stopped state and transitions to (starts) the setting check mode before a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started, and the setting check mode ends before the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started, the system may be configured to end the security signal output when the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the security signal output started.

In other words, the setting key switch is turned on and the setting confirmation mode is entered at a timing (timing B) before a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the timing (timing A) when the security signal output started. Then, the setting key switch is turned off and the setting confirmation mode ends at a timing (timing C) before a predetermined period has elapsed since timing A (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A).

In this case, a security signal is output for a predetermined period from timing A. In other words, even in the setting check mode, a timer value update process is executed to output a security signal for a predetermined period. In addition, even after the setting check mode ends, the security signal can continue to be output for a predetermined period from timing A (a security signal is not output when power is not being supplied).

By configuring it in this way, in a specification where a security signal is output for a predetermined period of time when a play-stop state is reached, if the setting check mode is switched to and the setting check mode is terminated within the predetermined period of time after the start of outputting the security signal, the output time of the security signal is not extended in conjunction with the switch to the setting check mode (because the output time of the security signal is the predetermined period of time), so gaming establishments (and gaming establishment staff) can be spared the inconvenience of the security signal.

<When the power is turned off while the security signal is being output after the device has entered a stopped state, and then the power is turned on with a setting change> If the device enters a stopped state and the power switch is turned off before a specified period of time has elapsed since the output of the security signal began, the device will enter a state in which no power is being supplied. If the power switch is then turned on while the setting key switch is on (also referred to as powering on with a setting change), the device will transition to setting change mode after the power is restored. In this case, the device may be configured to output a security signal in the setting change mode. Note that the device may be configured to end the output of the security signal when the setting change mode ends.

In other words, the power switch is turned off before a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the security signal output started (timing A), and the power-off process is executed at timing B (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). After that, in a situation where no power is being supplied, the power is turned on with a setting change, causing a transition to setting change mode at timing C. Then, the conditions for terminating the setting change mode are met, and the setting change mode ends at timing D.

For example, assume that the time from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the time from timing C to timing D is 8 seconds (the period of the setting change mode is 8 seconds). In this case, the total time (18 seconds) of the security signal output time from timing A to timing B and the security signal output time from timing C to timing D may be shorter than the predetermined period (30 seconds).

When configured in this way, the timer value corresponding to the specified period may be initialized when the power is turned on with a setting change (by the RWM initialization process executed when the power is turned on with a setting change).

For example, if the RWM initialization process executed by powering on with a setting change occurs at the start of the setting change mode, the timer value is not updated by the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a specified period during the setting change mode (the timer value remains at 0). However, the security signal is output.

For example, if the RWM initialization process executed by powering on with a setting change is at the end of the setting change mode, the timer value update process is executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time even in the setting confirmation mode. In this case, the timer value update process may be executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time using a value that is reset to the timer value corresponding to the specified period by powering on with a setting change, or the timer value update process may be executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time using the remaining period obtained by subtracting (the period from timing A to timing B) from the specified period. However, regardless of the timer value (even if it becomes the initial value (0)), the security signal is output.

In either case, when the setting change mode ends, the output of the security signal can be terminated.

Also, for example, assume that the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the period from timing C to timing D is 50 seconds (the period of the setting change mode is 50 seconds). In this case, the total time (60 seconds) of the security signal output time from timing A to timing B and the security signal output time from timing C to timing D may be longer than the specified period (30 seconds).

In other words, if a power outage occurs while the security signal is being output and the power is then turned on again with a setting change, the security signal is configured to be output for the period from when the setting change mode starts until when the setting change mode ends.

In other words, the total output time of the security signal does not necessarily correspond to a specified period.

However, depending on the combination of the period from timing A to timing B and the period from timing C to timing D, the total output time of the security signal may be a specified period.

For example, if the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the period from timing C to timing D is 20 seconds (the period of the setting change mode is 20 seconds), the total output time of the security signal may be a predetermined period (30 seconds).

By configuring it in this way, even if the specifications are such that a security signal is output for a specified period of time when a halted state occurs, the power is turned off before the specified period has elapsed since the start of security signal output, and then the halted state is released by turning the power on with a setting change (by the RWM initialization process executed by turning the power on with a setting change), so the output time of the security signal after the power is restored can be set to a time that corresponds to the period of the setting change mode.

Note that turning on the power with a setting change not only releases the stopped state (by the initialization process of the RWM executed by turning on the power with a setting change), but also clears the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a specified period of time.

For example, if the RWM initialization process executed by powering on with a setting change occurs at the start of the setting change mode, the timer value is not updated by the timer value update process for outputting a security signal for a specified period during the setting change mode (the timer value remains at 0). However, the security signal is output.

For example, if the RWM initialization process executed by powering on with a setting change is at the end of the setting change mode, the timer value update process is executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time even in the setting confirmation mode. In this case, the timer value update process may be executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time using a value that is reset to the timer value corresponding to the specified period by powering on with a setting change, or the timer value update process may be executed to output a security signal for a specified period of time using the remaining period obtained by subtracting (the period from timing A to timing B) from the specified period. However, regardless of the timer value (even if it becomes the initial value (0)), the security signal is output.

Also, for example, if the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, and the period from timing C to timing D is 50 seconds (the period of the setting change mode is 50 seconds), a security signal may be output during the period from timing A to timing B, and a security signal may be output during the period from timing C to 20 seconds. In other words, the output period of the security signal may be constant even when the setting change mode is entered (the setting change mode may end midway).

<If the power is turned off while the device is in a stopped state and a security signal is being output, and then the power is turned on without changing settings> If the device is in a stopped state and the power switch is turned off before a certain period of time has elapsed since the device started to output a security signal, the device will enter a state where no power is being supplied. If the power switch is then turned on while the setting key switch is off (also called powering on without changing settings), the device will enter a stopped state after the power is restored.

In other words, the power switch is turned off before a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the security signal output started (timing A), and the power-off process is executed at timing B (e.g., 10 seconds after timing A). After that, in a situation where no power is being supplied, the device transitions to a stopped state at timing C when the power is turned on without changing any settings.

Furthermore, a certain timing after timing C is defined as timing D. Timing D is defined as a timing where the sum of the period from timing A to timing B and the period from timing C to timing D corresponds to the specified period. For example, if the specified period is 30 seconds and the period from timing A to timing B is 10 seconds, then the period from timing C to timing D is 20 seconds.

Furthermore, a certain timing after timing D is timing E. Timing E is a timing where the period from timing C to timing E corresponds to a predetermined period. For example, when the predetermined period is 30 seconds, the period from timing C to timing E is 30 seconds.

Note that the period from timing C to timing E is considered to be a dead end.

When configured in this way, the security signal output can be one of the following (Pattern 1) to (Pattern 3).

(Pattern 1) After power is turned on, the security signal is not output. For example, the security signal is output during the period from timing A to timing B. However, the security signal is not output during the period from timing C to timing D. Similarly, the security signal is not output during the period from timing D to timing E.

For example, by executing a process to clear the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a specified period when the power is restored (setting the timer value to 0), it is possible to prevent the security signal from being output during the period from timing C to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, the security signal will not be output even if the power is cut off.

In other words, the security signal is not output again when the power is restored, reducing the annoyance caused by the security signal.

Note that if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing D, the security signal may be output from the time the specified error occurs until the specified error is cleared. Similarly, if a specified error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing D to timing E, the security signal may be output from the time the specified error occurs until the specified error is cleared.

In addition, if the setting check mode is entered during the period from timing C to timing D, a security signal may be output from the start of the setting check mode until the end of the setting check mode. Similarly, if the setting check mode is entered during the period from timing D to timing E, a security signal may be output from the start of the setting check mode until the end of the setting check mode.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming establishment (or its staff) can know that some kind of event has occurred with the gaming machine when the hall computer receives the security signal.

(Pattern 2) After power is turned on, the security signal is output for the remaining period. For example, a security signal is output from timing A to timing B. A security signal is also output from timing C to timing D. However, a security signal is not output from timing D to timing E.

For example, by not executing the process of clearing the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a specified period when the power is restored (continuing to use the timer value stored before the power was cut off), it is possible to output a security signal during the period from timing C to D, and not output a security signal during the period from timing D to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, a security signal can be output for the time period corresponding to the remaining period of the specified period, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud. In addition, if the process of clearing the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a specified period is not executed when power is restored, the control process can be simplified.

Note that if a specific error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing D, and the specific error is cleared at a certain timing before timing D, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing D.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing D, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing before timing D, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing D.

Also, if a specific error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing D, and the specific error is cleared at a certain timing (timing F) after timing D, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing F.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing D, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing (timing F) after timing D, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing F.

With this configuration, the gaming establishment (or its staff) can know that some kind of event has occurred with the gaming machine when the hall computer receives the security signal.

(Pattern 3) After power is turned on, the security signal is output for a predetermined period of time. For example, the security signal is output from timing A to timing B. The security signal is also output from timing C to timing E.

For example, by executing a process to set (store) again a value corresponding to a predetermined period as the timer value (one of the values stored in the RWM) for outputting a security signal for a predetermined period when the power is restored, a security signal can be output for the period from timing C to timing E.

By configuring it in this way, when power is restored after a power outage, a security signal can be output for a period of time corresponding to a continuous predetermined period of time, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that is resistant to fraud.

Note that if a specific error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing E, and the specific error is cleared at a certain timing before timing E, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing E.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing E, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing before timing E, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing E.

Also, if a specific error that is a condition for outputting a security signal occurs during the period from timing C to timing E, and the specific error is cleared at a certain timing (timing G) after timing E, the security signal may be output from timing C to timing G.

Similarly, if the setting confirmation mode is entered (started) during the period from timing C to timing E, and the setting confirmation mode ends at a certain timing (timing G) after timing E, a security signal may be output from timing C to timing G.

By configuring it in this way, the gaming establishment (or its staff) can know that some kind of event has occurred with the gaming machine when the hall computer receives the security signal.

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the hit difference counter> The main control means is configured to be able to transmit information regarding the value of the hit difference counter to the sub-control means. This makes it possible to notify the player before the progress of the game stops.

For example, if the difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000 coins, the LCD display could display an ending message saying "100 coins remaining" or play a sound. Then, each time the difference is updated and the remaining difference gets smaller, the ending message could be updated to say "90 coins remaining" or "85 coins remaining," etc. When the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory message such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" could be displayed or a sound could be played, giving the player a sense of accomplishment.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, which increases the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference of 100 exceeds 19,000, and an ending display of "100 remaining" is displayed on the LCD, if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100, the ending display of the remaining difference can be erased (made non-display). When the remaining difference again becomes 100, the ending display of "100 remaining" is displayed on the LCD.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the difference number continuing to fall below the limit and the ending display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and the game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Also, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment is not hindered by the disappearance of the celebration display, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the above example, the remaining difference was displayed as the ending display, but this is not limited to this and a story-like presentation may be displayed. Even in this case, the ending display can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below a threshold that triggers the execution of the ending display, so that the ending display is not executed more than necessary.

In addition, when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, if a congratulatory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops, there is a possibility that players who are unaware of the existence of the limiting process may lose their motivation to play. Therefore, a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or sound such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or sound such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Regarding output of a signal to the outside based on the value of the stop difference counter> When the main control means during the stop process or the monitoring process updates the value of the stop difference counter and the result is a specific value (18,900 in this embodiment) that is before the predetermined value (19,000 in this embodiment) at which the stop process is executed, a process is executed to output a test interrupt request signal to the test IF board.

This allows the testing to be interrupted before the gaming machine reaches a deadlock state during testing and game progress stops; when testing is interrupted, the tester can turn the gaming machine off and then back on to initialize the value of the deadlock difference counter, allowing the gaming machine testing to continue until the value of the deadlock difference counter exceeds 19,000 again. In other words, by turning the power off and back on when the value of the deadlock difference counter is 18,900, it is possible to prevent game progress from stopping until the value of the deadlock difference counter effectively exceeds 37,900, allowing for stable testing.

Note that the specific value before the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed (19,000 in this embodiment) is set to 18,900, but this is not limited to this, and any value between 9,500, which is half the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed, and 18,985, which is the value at which the stop processing is not executed even if it is the maximum payout number, can be set as the specific value.

In addition, in this embodiment, a process was executed to output a test interruption request signal to interrupt the test, but any signal may be output as long as it is conveyed to the tester. As a result, the signal output to the test IF board when a specific value is reached before the predetermined value at which the cut-off process is executed may be referred to as a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal), and the process for outputting to the test IF board may be referred to as a process for outputting a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal).

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the value of the stop difference counter> When the stop process is executed by the main control means, information based on the value of the stop difference counter can be sent to the sub-control means. This makes it possible to notify the player that the game progress has stopped (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a "stop notification").

For example, when the remaining difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000 coins, it is possible to display the remaining difference of "100 coins remaining" on the LCD display, and to play an ending effect or sound. Then, each time the remaining difference is updated and the remaining difference becomes smaller, the remaining difference display is updated to "90 coins remaining" or "85 coins remaining", etc. Then, when the remaining difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory display such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" or sound is played, giving the player a sense of accomplishment. A state in which such a sub-control means displays the remaining difference until the end of the game, plays an ending effect or sounds, or a state in which the remaining difference until the end of the game is not displayed but an ending effect or sound related to the end of the game is played is referred to as an operation advance notification state (related to the end of the game). Note that the operation advance notification state is a state related to the sub-control means.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, which increases the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference exceeds 19,000 sheets with a difference of 100 sheets remaining, and the LCD display shows the remaining difference as "100 sheets remaining," if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100 sheets, the remaining difference display can be erased (made non-display). At this time, when the remaining difference again becomes 100 sheets, the LCD display will show the remaining difference as "100 sheets remaining."

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the difference continuing to fall below the limit and the remaining difference display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and the game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Also, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment is not hindered by the disappearance of the celebration display, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

The ending performance or sound may be a continuous performance with a storyline, or may be a still image. Even in this case, the ending performance or sound can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below a threshold that triggers the execution of the ending performance or sound, so that the ending performance or sound is not executed more than necessary.

In addition, when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, if a congratulatory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops, there is a possibility that players who are unaware of the existence of the limiting process may lose their motivation to play. Therefore, a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or sound such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or sound such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Regarding the processing of lamps managed by the main control means or sub-control means based on the value of the stop difference counter> This section explains the lighting control of lamps managed by the main control means or sub-control means when the value of the stop difference counter exceeds 19,000, which satisfies the stop condition.

The lamps managed by the main control means are the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, advantageous zone lamp, credit number indicator, and number of coins won indicator, while the lamps managed by the sub control means are the stop switch lamp, lower panel lamp, and frame lamp.

The MAX bed lamp may be managed by the main control means or the sub control means.

<<Lamp status at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated>> Here, a game in which the complete function is not activated refers to a game in which the activation conditions (stopping conditions) of the complete function are not met.

At the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated (when waiting for bets after all the reels have stopped), the bet lamp corresponding to the number of bets in the previous game is lit. For example, if a game has been played with 3 bets, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are still lit at the end of the game, and the start lamp is off.

In addition, the advantageous zone lamp will be lit at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated and the advantageous zone lamp is lit (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped) and the next game will also be in the advantageous zone.

In addition, when the complete function is not activated and a replay is selected, the replay lamp and start lamp are lit at the end of the game (when the start switch is waiting to be operated or when a coin is waiting to be inserted after the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is displayed).

In addition, in a game in which the complete function is not activated, when a winning symbol combination corresponding to a minor prize is displayed at the end of a game in which a minor prize has been won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the number of coins acquired indicator is lit. For example, in a game in which 10 gaming media have been awarded and the conditions for activating the complete function are not met, the segment corresponding to "10" is lit (10 is displayed) in the number of coins acquired indicator. Note that the number of gaming media displayed on the number of coins acquired indicator may be configured not to be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 60 seconds) after the awarding of gaming media has ended.

In addition, at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated and a winning combination that is not a replay (for example, a small combination or a miss) is won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), and the credit number indicator shows a value equal to or greater than the number of bets required to start the next game, the MAX BET lamp is lit. Note that the number of bets required to start the next game is "3" if a game can be played by betting three gaming media (the same applies below).

In addition, when the completion function is not activated and the game ends (waiting for a bet after all reels have stopped) when a non-replay winning combination (e.g., a small winning combination or a miss) is won, and the credit number indicator displays a value less than the number of bets that can be used to start the next game, the MAX BET lamp is turned off. Note that when the credit number indicator displays a value of 1 or more, the MAX BET lamp may be turned on. In other words, when the credit number indicator displays a value less than the number of bets that can be used to start the next game (e.g., 1 or 2), the MAX BET lamp may be turned on. When the MAX BET lamp is turned on, it may be possible to bet the number of game media according to the value displayed on the credit number indicator by operating the MAX BET switch. For example, when the MAX BET lamp is turned on when the number of credits is 1, it is possible to bet 1 by operating the MAX BET switch. Also, for example, when the MAX BET lamp is turned on when the number of credits is 10, it is possible to bet 3 (the number of bets that can be used to start the next game by operating the MAX BET switch). On the other hand, when the MAX BET lamp is off, even if the MAX BET switch is operated, gaming media cannot be bet. In this way, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp can inform the player of the status of whether the operation of the MAX BET switch is valid or invalid.

In addition, when the complete function is not activated and the replay is at the end of a winning game (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all the reels have stopped, or when a coin is waiting to be inserted), the MAX BET lamp is turned off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit number display.

In addition, at the end of a game where the complete function is not activated (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all the reels have stopped, or when waiting for a medal to be inserted) if the credit number display shows a value less than the upper limit, the medal insertion possible lamp will be lit.

In addition, when the credit number indicator shows a value of 1 or more at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated (while waiting to place a bet after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the credit number indicator is lit.

In addition, at the end of a game where the complete function is not activated (when waiting for bets after all the reels have stopped), the stop switch lamp is lit in a manner that indicates that the operation of the stop switch is invalid. For example, the stop switch lamp may be lit in red or may be turned off.

In addition, at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated (when waiting to place a bet after all the reels have stopped), the lower panel lamp is lit and the frame lamp is lit in a manner that corresponds to the waiting state of the game.

<<Lamp status at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated>> Here, a game in which the complete function has been activated refers to a game in which the activation conditions (stopping conditions) of the complete function have been met.

At the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting to place a bet after all the reels have stopped), the bet lamps corresponding to the number of bets from the previous game are not lit and all bet lamps are off. For example, even at the end of a game in which 3 bets have been placed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off, and the start lamp is also off.

In addition, when the complete function is activated and the game ends in an advantageous zone where the advantageous zone lamp is lit (while waiting for bets after all the reels have stopped), the advantageous zone lamp is turned off. In other words, the complete function is activated even if the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone are not met in a game in which the complete function is activated. In addition, the advantageous zone lamp is turned off even if the conditions for the end of the advantageous zone are not met in a game in which the complete function is activated.

In addition, when the complete function is activated and a replay is selected, the replay lamp and start lamp are turned off at the end of the game (when the reels have all stopped and the start switch is waiting to be operated or when a coin is waiting to be inserted).

In addition, in a game in which the complete function is activated, when the winning symbol combination corresponding to the minor prize is displayed at the end of the game in which the minor prize is won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the number of coins acquired indicator is turned off. For example, if the conditions for activating the complete function are met in a game in which 10 gaming media have been awarded, the segment corresponding to "10" is lit (10 is displayed) in the number of coins acquired indicator, and thereafter, while the complete function is activated, the segment corresponding to "10" is not lit (10 is not displayed) in the number of coins acquired indicator. In other words, the segment corresponding to "10" is not lit in the number of coins acquired indicator before a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds) has elapsed since the awarding of the gaming media ended.

In addition, when the complete function is activated and the winning symbol combination corresponding to the minor winning combination is displayed at the end of the game in which the minor winning combination has been won (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped), the MAX BET lamp is turned off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit number display.

In addition, when a game in which the complete function has been activated and a replay has been won ends (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all the reels have stopped, or when a coin is waiting to be inserted), the MAX BET lamp is turned off regardless of the number of credits displayed on the credit number display.

In addition, when a game in which the complete function has been activated ends (when the start switch is waiting to be operated after all the reels have stopped, or when waiting for a medal to be inserted) and the credit number display shows a value less than the upper limit, the medal insertion possible lamp is turned off.

In addition, when a value of 1 or more is displayed on the credit number indicator at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting for bets after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the credit number indicator is lit.

In addition, at the end of a game in which the complete function is activated (while waiting for a bet after all the reels have stopped), the stop switch lamp is lit in a manner indicating that the operation of the stop switch is invalid. Or, at the end of a game in which the complete function is activated (while waiting for a bet after all the reels have stopped), the stop switch lamp is lit in a manner different from the manner indicating that the operation of the stop switch is invalid (also different from the manner indicating that the operation of the stop switch is valid). An example of the stop switch lamp being lit in a manner different from the manner indicating that the operation of the stop switch is invalid (also different from the manner indicating that the operation of the stop switch is valid) is when the stop switch lamp is lit in red to indicate that the operation of the stop switch is invalid in a game in which the complete function is not activated, and when the stop switch lamp is turned off to indicate that the operation of the stop switch is invalid in a game in which the complete function is activated.

In addition, at the end of a game in which the complete function has been activated (while waiting for bets after all the reels have stopped), the lower panel lamp is lit, and the frame lamp is lit in a manner that corresponds to the activation of the complete function.

The above-mentioned configurations of the lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated and the lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is activated can be combined.

Also, as a different aspect from the above-mentioned embodiment, at the end of a game in which the complete function is not activated (waiting for a bet after all the reels have stopped), the bet lamp corresponding to the number of bets in the previous game may be turned off. For example, if a game in which 3 bets have been placed, at the end of the game, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off, and the start lamp is turned off.

In addition, as a different aspect from the above-mentioned embodiment, the advantageous zone lamp may be lit at the end of a game in which the complete function is activated and the advantageous zone lamp is lit (while waiting to bet after all the reels have stopped).

Also, as an aspect different from the above-mentioned embodiment, when a game in which the complete function is activated ends and a replay is won (while waiting for the start switch to be operated after all the reels have stopped, or while waiting for a coin to be inserted), the replay lamp may be on and the start lamp may be off.

Also, as a different aspect from the above-mentioned embodiment, when a game in which the complete function is activated is played and a winning symbol combination corresponding to a minor winning combination is displayed at the end of the game in which a minor winning combination has been won (while waiting for a bet after all the reels have stopped), the corresponding segment of the winning number indicator may be lit.

Even in the different modes described above, the configurations of the lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is not activated and the lamp state at the end of a game when the complete function is activated can be combined.

<Presentation mode in the operation notice state> A display mode on the display device in the operation notice state can be as shown in Fig. 60. In Fig. 60, as the presentation image in the normal state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means) which is neither the operation notice state nor the stop state, a lion and girl character display, a heart effect display, a dialogue display of "Today was fun," and a total acquisition number display of "TOTAL: 18,000 coins" are performed. In addition to the presentation image displayed in the normal state as the presentation image in the operation notice state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means), a remaining difference display of "The complete function will be activated soon. 100 coins remaining until activation" is performed. In addition, as the presentation image in the limit notification state (state where the game progress is stopped), the presentation image displayed in the normal state and the operation notice notification state is not displayed, and instead, a black background and a limit display (notification regarding the limit processing, limit notification) of "Complete function has been activated" are displayed. Note that the total number of acquisitions display in the normal state does not need to be displayed all the time, but is displayed when the total number of acquisitions reaches or exceeds a predetermined threshold value (for example, 18000 shown in FIG. 60, or 18900 which is the value for sending a test interruption request signal to the test IF board).

In the operation preview notification state, the remaining difference display prevents the player from seeing all of the total wins display, part of the girl character display, and all of the effect display. However, since the display area of the remaining difference display is smaller than 50% of the full screen display area, the player can generally see the performance image being executed. Note that in Figure 60, the transparency (transparency) of the remaining difference display is set to 0%, so the display of layers behind the remaining difference display cannot be seen, but the transparency of the remaining difference display can be set to any value between 10% and 90%. This makes it possible to see both the remaining difference display and the performance image.

In addition to the congratulatory display described above, the limit notification may be a limit text display such as "The limit has been reached" or "The game has ended" or a voice. The limit text display may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the congratulatory display may be terminated after the congratulatory display is performed and the limit text display or voice may be executed. In addition, a warning display such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch" may be executed together with the limit text display. In addition, the remaining difference display in the operation advance notification state is displayed on the upper side of the display area of the display device, but this is not limited to this, and the remaining difference display may be displayed on the lower side or in the center of the display area of the display device. However, when displayed on the lower side or in the center, there is a possibility that it may overlap with the display area of various information displays (not shown) (game medal number display, awarded number display, or bet number display) and most of the performance images, so the transparency of the remaining difference display can be set to any value between 20% and 90% to allow the player to see the various information displays and performance images.

In addition, when any of the AT end conditions (for example, the number of AT play times, the difference during the AT, or the number of AT navigation times) are met during the activation notice state, the addiction prevention display is displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. This allows the player to see the addiction prevention display before the remaining difference display, effectively preventing addiction to the game.

Also, in contrast to the above-described embodiment, when any of the AT termination conditions (e.g., the number of AT play attempts, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigation attempts) is met in the activation notice state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the addiction prevention display. This allows the player to quickly visually confirm the remaining difference until the end of the game.

In addition, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of times an AT is executed, the difference during the AT, or the number of times AT navigation is performed) is met in the activation notice state, the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display may be displayed in different display areas. This allows the player to view both pieces of information. Note that in this case, if the display area of the anti-addiction display and the remaining difference display are configured to be displayed in a display area that would normally overlap, the display area of the anti-addiction display may be changed, or the display area of the remaining difference display may be changed. Also, the display areas of the anti-addiction display and the remaining difference display may be predetermined to be display areas that do not overlap even when displayed simultaneously.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit, a notification is issued to encourage counting (counting switch prompting display), so when the total score threshold is reached or there is an abnormality in the total score upper limit during the operation advance notification state, both the remaining difference display and the counting switch prompting display are displayed. This allows the player to be aware of both the remaining difference display and the need to operate the counting switch.

Also, when the total score threshold has been reached or an abnormality has occurred in the total score upper limit during the activation notification state, the counting switch prompting display may be displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. In this case, when the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompting display is displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment), the remaining difference display is displayed. This allows the total score threshold reaching state to be cancelled by operating the counting switch promptly, and the player can then become aware of the remaining difference display.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the activation notification state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the count switch prompt display. This provides a sense of satisfaction when the player wants to prioritize recognition of the remaining difference.

<Presentation mode in the limit notification state> In the limit notification state, the lion and girl character displays, effect displays, dialogue displays, and total number acquired displays are all invisible. Also, a limit display is shown instead of the remaining difference display. In Figure 60, the limit display is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device, but the presentation image is not displayed (the transparency of the limit display is 0%), so it may be displayed anywhere in the display area, including the top or bottom.

In addition, the limit display in the limit notification state may be 50% or more of the display area of the entire screen. However, when other information is displayed (such as a display indicating that the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub-switch or a warning display), it is desirable for the limit display in the limit notification state to be any value between 50% and 90% of the display area of the entire screen.

In the game limit notification state in FIG. 60, no congratulatory display is displayed, but a congratulatory display using a character may be displayed instead of a black background image. However, even when the congratulatory display is displayed, the in-game presentation image is not displayed.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of AT execution games, the difference in the number of times during the AT, or the number of AT navigations, etc.) are not met but the limit conditions are met), an anti-addiction display may be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the anti-addiction display that would normally be displayed on the AT end screen from not being displayed. The anti-addiction display at this time may be in the same display form and for the same display time as when it is displayed on the AT end screen, or may be in a different display form and for a different display time than when it is displayed on the AT end screen. In addition, the display area of the anti-addiction display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display area of the limit display, but if the anti-addiction display is configured to be hidden (not visible) for a specified time, the display area of the anti-addiction display and the display area of the limit display may overlap.

Also, contrary to the above-mentioned embodiment, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit condition is met), the addiction prevention display does not need to be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the limit state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the limit display.

In addition, even if a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's ending conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is played, the difference in the number of times during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit conditions are met), and the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the limit display is displayed, if any of the AT's ending conditions are met and the limit conditions are met (when any of the AT's ending conditions and the limit conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the AT has ended even when the limit state is reached, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's ending conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit conditions are met), the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the limit display is displayed, and even when any of the AT's ending conditions are met and the limit conditions are met (when any of the AT's ending conditions and the limit conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may not be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the limit state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the limit display.

<Regarding the processing of the main control means or sub-control means during the stop processing> When the stop processing is executed by the main control means, the main control means and/or the sub-control means notifies the player that the progress of the game has stopped (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a "stop notification").

The main control means may notify the user that a limit has been reached by displaying a message on a specified display device controlled by the main control means.

Examples of the specified indicators controlled by the main control means include an acquired coins indicator and a credits indicator.

For example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the number of coins acquired display is displaying (e.g., EE) a message indicating that the limit has been reached, the number of coins acquired display may be configured to display (e.g., E1) a message indicating that the specific error has occurred. Then, when the specific error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the number of coins acquired display may be configured to display again a message indicating that the limit has been reached.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a stalled state has been reached even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a specified error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a specified error has occurred even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when the specified error is resolved, it is possible to notify the user that the specified error has been resolved and that a stalled state has been reached.

In addition, for example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the acquired coin count display is displaying a message indicating that the limit has been reached (e.g., EE), the acquired coin count display may not display a message indicating that the specific error has occurred (e.g., E1). In other words, even if a specific error has occurred, the acquired coin count display may continue to display a message indicating that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, the player will not be confused as to whether a specific error has occurred or the game has stopped, and the player can be accurately notified that a game has stopped.

Note that although the number of coins acquired indicator is given as an example of a specific indicator controlled by the main control means, as mentioned above, it may also be a credit number indicator.

For example, the credit number display displays the number of credits. However, when a limit condition is met (when information indicating that the limit condition is met is stored in the limit flag storage area), an automatic settlement, which will be described later, may be performed. In this configuration, after the limit condition is met and automatic settlement is performed, the number of credits becomes 0, so that a display (e.g., EE) can be executed on the credit number display to indicate that a limit state has occurred.

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle accounts when a limiting condition is met, after the player operates the settlement switch and the number of credits becomes 0, a display (e.g., EE) can be displayed on the credit number display to indicate that a limiting condition has occurred.

When the number of coins acquired is not displaying anything and the credit number display is displaying an indication that a limit has occurred, if a specified error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs, the number of coins acquired may display an indication that a specified error has occurred (e.g., E1) and the credit number display may display an indication that a limit has occurred. Then, when the specified error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the indication on the number of coins acquired indicating that a specified error has occurred disappears (terminating the display process), and the credit number display may continue to display an indication that a limit has occurred.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a stalled state has been reached even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a specified error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a specified error has occurred even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when the specified error is resolved, it is possible to notify the user that the specified error has been resolved and that a stalled state has been reached.

In addition, for example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the credit number display is displaying (e.g., EE) an indication that the limit has been reached, the acquired coin number display may not display (e.g., E1) an indication that the specific error has occurred. In other words, even if a specific error has occurred, the credit number display may continue to display the indication that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, the player will not be confused as to whether a specific error has occurred or the game has stopped, and the player can be accurately notified that a game has stopped.

In addition to the congratulatory display described above, the sub-control means may also display or sound a message indicating that the game is over, such as "The complete function has been activated," "The game has reached a limit," or "The game has ended," as shown in FIG. 60. The message indicating that the game is over may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the message indicating that the game is over may be terminated after the congratulatory display is displayed, and the message indicating that the game is over or sound may be displayed. In addition, a warning message such as "Please press the settlement switch" (various switch prompting messages) or sound may also be displayed together with the message indicating that the game is over.

To notify the user of the limit, a limit process may be executed before the congratulatory display is executed and the congratulatory display may be displayed during the limit process, or a freeze may be executed for a predetermined period before the limit process is executed, the congratulatory display may be executed during the predetermined period, and the limit text may be displayed when the limit process is executed after the predetermined period.

In addition, when the limit character is displayed after the blessing display, the warning display will not be executed while the blessing display is being executed, but will be executed when the limit character is displayed.

This prevents players from forgetting to operate the settlement switch or counting switch, and does not hinder the sense of accomplishment that comes from executing the congratulatory display, increasing the fun of the game.

In addition, during the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text sound such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" and "Please press the counting switch" are not output, and the system is silent. In addition, during the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text sound such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" may be output at a volume lower than the volume during error notification.

By configuring it in this way, players are less likely to have a negative impression of the dead end, and it becomes easier for them to recognize it as something to aim for, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the functions of the sub-switch managed by the sub-control means are enabled during the limit notification. For this reason, even during the limit process (limit notification), it is possible to open the menu screen or the volume change screen by operating the sub-switch. Note that the volume that can be changed from the volume change screen does not include the volume related to the limit notification, so it is not possible to change the volume during the limit notification.

In addition, by opening a menu screen during the limit-play process and displaying a two-dimensional code including the game history, a service (a so-called "game machine linked service") can be provided to the player in which the game history is read by a mobile device and saved on a server. Note that since the limit-play display is being displayed on the display device, the two-dimensional code is displayed in a specified area in the center of the display device's screen when displayed from the menu screen except when the limit-play notification is in progress. However, since the specified area overlaps with the limit-play notification when the limit-play notification is in progress, the display area of the two-dimensional code during the limit-play notification is displayed in an area different from the specified area that does not overlap with the limit-play notification.

In addition, as another mode for displaying the limit indication and the two-dimensional code, even if the display areas of the limit indication and the two-dimensional code overlap, the limit indication and the two-dimensional code may be displayed alternately, making it possible to read the two-dimensional code while issuing a limit notification.

In addition, when the limit process is executed, the gaming media may be automatically settled. For example, when the limit process is executed when the number of credits stored is "50," "50" gaming media will be automatically settled (discharged into the lower tray) even if the settlement switch is not operated. By configuring it in this way, the gaming media electronically stored in the gaming machine can be returned to the player even if the player does not operate the settlement switch. In other words, it is possible to avoid issuing warning sounds such as "Please press the settlement switch" or warning displays such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch."

Furthermore, the stop notification will not end due to the passage of time during the stop processing. In other words, the stop notification will continue until the stop state is released (until a setting change process or RWM abnormality process is executed).

Even if an event occurs during the termination process that could be one of the recoverable errors described above, the system may be configured not to detect the specified error, or it may be configured to detect the specified error but not execute the specified error processing. In either case, the system is configured not to issue a notification regarding the specified error.

As mentioned above, this is because the stop processing is looped during the stop processing, so even if a specific error is detected in the interrupt processing, the specific error processing in the main loop processing is not executed. Note that if interrupt processing is prohibited during the stop processing, the specific error will not be detected.

This makes it possible to prevent the trouble of having to clear an error when the game cannot continue by executing a stop-play process, and reduces the workload of game parlor staff.

Note that if the system is configured to execute a specified error process within an interrupt process, the specified error process will be executed even during stop processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specified error process from being executed during stop processing by determining whether stop processing is in progress before executing the specified error process and not executing the specified error process if stop processing is in progress. This can also be achieved by prohibiting interrupt processing during stop processing.

In addition, considering that fraud can be detected quickly by executing a specified error process even during the stop process, the system may be configured to be able to execute a specified error process during the stop process.

In this case, interrupt processing is permitted even during the stop processing, and when a specified error is detected during the interrupt processing, a specified error processing is executed within the interrupt processing to notify the specified error, or when a specified error is detected during the stop processing, the specified error processing is executed, and the specified error notification processing is executed during the specified error processing in the loop processing of the stop processing after the specified error is detected during the interrupt processing.

By doing this, fraudulent processing can be carried out even during the termination process, preventing fraudulent activity.

In addition, when the stop-play process is executed, an external signal may be configured to be output. For example, an external signal may be output as a security signal for a specified period of time (e.g., 30 seconds). The security signal is a signal that is output due to a specified error. When the security signal is output, the gaming facility is able to know that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine on which the stop-play process was executed, and therefore fraudulent behavior can be deterred even if an error notification is not made during the stop-play process.

The specified error that outputs a security signal may be, for example, any or all of the following errors related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error) and errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, abnormality detection error). Also, it is not limited to the errors mentioned above, and other errors may also be used.

The security signal may be configured to be output not only when a specific error occurs, but also during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, the security signal may be configured to be output when the setting key switch is on.

By configuring it in this way, the amusement facility can prevent not only certain errors, but also fraudulent turning on of the setting key switch (for example, fraudulent changes to setting values or fraudulent confirmation of setting values) by outputting a security signal.

<Other configurations related to the stoppage monitoring process or the stoppage processing> The stoppage monitoring process and the stoppage processing are configured to be executed outside the area of use. Also, the stoppage monitoring process may be configured to be executed outside the area of use and the stoppage processing to be executed within the area of use, or the stoppage monitoring process and the stoppage processing may be configured to be executed within the area of use.

In addition, in the case of medal-less gaming machines, the stoppage monitoring process and the stoppage process may be executed outside the usage area of the main control board, or the stoppage monitoring process and the stoppage process may be executed outside the usage area of the gaming medal count control board.

The system is configured to continue executing the process to output an external signal during the termination process.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to notify the outside world that the game is being stopped, allowing the amusement center manager to quickly grasp the status of the gaming machine.

The end of the game notification may be not only by the LCD display or sound output from the speaker, but also by the lighting of the LEDs such as the frame lamp, lower panel lamp, number of coins acquired indicator, or number of credits indicator.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player that a game has stopped even on gaming machines that do not have a liquid crystal display.

A specific example of the end-of-game monitoring process will be described below with reference to the drawings. Here, the end-of-game monitoring process is configured to be executed at a predetermined timing after the awarding of game media (the winning awarding process related to the displayed symbol combination in FIG. 9) is completed. For example, the end-of-game monitoring process may be configured to be executed as one of the processes executed in the game end check in FIG. 9.

The end-of-game monitoring process is executed in all games. Specifically, it is executed regardless of the game zone (normal zone, advantageous zone). It is also executed regardless of the game state (non-AT state, AT state, during bonus (bonus game state), inside bonus state). It is also executed regardless of the number of gaming media bet (game with one bet, game with two bets, game with three bets).

<End of game monitoring process (version without end of game difference counter) In Figure 55, there is a storage area for the number of inserted medals and a storage area for the number of paid out medals.

The number of inserted medals memory area (also called the total IN counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of gaming media inserted (total number of bets). For example, the number of inserted medals memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area capable of storing values from 0 to 65535).

The number of medals paid out memory area (also called the total OUT counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out (total payouts). For example, the number of medals paid out memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area capable of storing values from 0 to 65535).

The value stored in the number of medals inserted memory area is set to an initial value (0) when the power is turned on. Similarly, the value stored in the number of medals paid out memory area is set to an initial value (0) when the power is turned on. In other words, if a power outage occurs when the value stored in the number of medals inserted memory area is 1000 and the value stored in the number of medals paid out memory area is 2000, and then the power is turned on, the initial value (0) is stored in the number of medals inserted memory area and the initial value (0) is stored in the number of medals paid out memory area.

Note that "power-on" includes both power-on without a setting change and power-on with a setting change. However, the initial value may not be stored when the power is turned on without a setting change, and the initial value may be stored when the power is turned on with a setting change.

Furthermore, the values stored in the number of medals inserted memory area and the number of medals paid out memory area are not stored as initial values (0) when the RWM is cleared following the end of the favorable zone. In other words, the favorable zone ends (the RWM is cleared following the end of the favorable zone) when the value stored in the number of medals inserted memory area is 1000 and the value stored in the number of medals paid out memory area is 2000, and the next game (game in the normal zone) is configured to start with 1000 stored in the number of medals inserted memory area and 2000 stored in the number of medals paid out memory area. Note that it is assumed that the power is not turned off between the end of the favorable zone and the next game.

First, in "Replay activation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role is won by the internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed, the answer is YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role is won by the internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not stopped and displayed), the answer is NO. Note that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay can also be referred to as a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role (the same applies below).

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the current game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will be YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

The "total OUT counter update process" updates the value stored in the number of medals paid out storage area. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is added to the value stored in the number of medals paid out storage area. The result of adding the number of medals paid out in the current game to the value stored in the number of medals paid out storage area is then stored in the number of medals paid out storage area. For example, if "1000" is stored in the number of medals paid out storage area, and the number of medals paid out as a result of the current game is "9", then "1009" is stored in the number of medals paid out storage area.

The "total IN counter update process" updates the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area. Specifically, the number of inserted medals for the current game is added to the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area. The result of adding the number of inserted medals for the current game to the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area is then stored in the number of inserted medals memory area. For example, if "3000" is stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and the number of bets for the current game is "3", then "3003" is stored in the number of inserted medals memory area.

Note that even if the current game is bet by an automatic bet, the number of bets for that automatic bet will be the number of balls thrown in the current game. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the previous game and "3" is bet by an automatic bet, the number of balls thrown in the current game will be "3". However, for example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in both the previous game and the current game (two consecutive games), the answer to "Replay activation symbol display?" in the end-of-game monitoring process for the current game will be YES, and the end-of-game monitoring process will end without executing the "Total IN counter update process".

"Total OUT counter < total IN counter?" determines whether the total number of payouts after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is less than the total number of put-in coins after being updated by the "total IN counter update process."

Specifically, a subtraction process is performed to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". If the result of this subtraction process shows that the carry flag is 1, then a YES judgment is made and the limit monitoring process is terminated. In other words, the next process, "difference number > 19000", is not executed. On the other hand, if the result of this subtraction process shows that the carry flag is not 1 (if it is 0), then a NO judgment is made.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "1000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", then "2000" - "1000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, no carry occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0. In other words, the result is determined to be NO.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "2000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "1000", then "1000" - "2000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, a carry flag is set to 1, as a carry is carried over. In other words, the answer is YES.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "2000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", then "2000" - "2000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, no carry occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0. In other words, the result is determined to be NO.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media when the power is turned on is greater than 19000, starting from the point (0). Specifically, the determination is made by comparing the result of the subtraction process performed in "Total OUT counter < Total IN counter?" with the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state." Here, the determination is made by setting the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state" to "19001."

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "1000" and the total output number after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", the result of subtracting "2000" from "1000" is "1000". As a result of the comparison between "1000" and "19001" (1000 - 19001), the carry flag becomes 1, so the answer is NO (the difference does not exceed 19000).

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "10,000" and the total output number after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "29,000", the result of subtracting "29,000" from "10,000" is "19,000". As a result of the comparison between "19,000" and "19001" (19,000" - "19001"), the carry flag becomes 1, so the answer is determined to be NO (the difference does not exceed 19,000).

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "10,000" and the total output number after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "29,005", then the result of subtracting "29005" from "10,000" is "19005". As a result of the comparison between "19005" and "19001" (19005 - 19001), the carry flag becomes 0, so the answer is YES (the difference exceeds 19,000).

In "Save stop flag", information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the stop flag storage area.

In addition, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power off process). In addition, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (if information indicating that the limit conditions have been met has been stored, the information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Cap Flag" stores information indicating that the cap condition has been met in the cap flag memory area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the values stored in the number of medals inserted memory area and the number of medals paid out memory area will be reset to their initial values (0), but the information stored in the cap flag memory area (information indicating that the cap condition has been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, when information indicating that the conditions for the limit have been met is stored in the limit flag memory area, if the power is turned off and then turned on without changing any settings, the limit state will be reached even though the difference between the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area does not exceed 19,000 (the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) does not exceed 19,000).

When information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (when the stop state is reached), it is not possible to perform a bet operation to execute the next game. For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the blocker is (set to) a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in a gaming machine that automatically settles gaming media after information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag memory area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In other words, the limit monitoring process in FIG. 55 performs a subtraction process to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". Then, if the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'" is greater than the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'", it is determined whether or not it is greater than a specified value (19,000). If it is determined that the value is greater than the specified value (19,000) as a result of this determination, information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag memory area. Therefore, it is configured such that the next game cannot be played unless the settings are changed.

In addition, in the limit monitoring process of FIG. 55, a subtraction process is performed to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". Then, if the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'" is smaller than the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'", it is not determined whether it is greater than the specified value (19,000). Therefore, information indicating that the limit condition has been met is not stored in the limit flag memory area, so the next game can be played.

In other words, if the total number of coins paid out is greater than the total number of coins put in, it is compared with the specified value, but if the total number of coins paid out is less than the total number of coins put in, it is not compared with the specified value.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed when the total payout number is smaller than the total input number. In other words, it is possible to shorten the processing time of the main control means and reduce erroneous decisions due to noise, etc.

Note that although the initial value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the initial value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area have been explained as "0" as an example, the initial value is not limited to "0." As long as the initial value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the initial value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area are the same, any value can be used.

In addition, the inserted medal count storage area is a 2-byte storage area, and the paid out medal count storage area is a 2-byte storage area, but the inserted medal count storage area may be a 3-byte storage area, and the paid out medal count storage area may be a 3-byte storage area.

In addition, if the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0), the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area and the value stored in the paid out medal count storage area may be configured not to be updated.

For example, if the lower limit is set to -10,000, in a game in which the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0) and is below -10,000, the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area will not be updated based on the number of bets in that game. Also, the value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area will not be updated based on the number of paid out medals in that game.

By setting a lower limit in this way, it is possible to reach a cap when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a maximum of 29,000 (the absolute value of the lower limit (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when no lower limit is set, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before reaching a cap. In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

Note that although the lower limit is described as -10,000, the lower limit is not limited to -10,000 and can be any value.

<Ending monitoring process (end difference counter addition version)> In Figure 56, there is a end difference counter. The explanation of the end difference counter is omitted as it has been described above. Note that the size of the memory area for the end difference counter is assumed to be 2 bytes.

Note that the initial value of the stop difference counter in FIG. 56 is the value obtained by subtracting the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be stopped" from the "value corresponding to the memory area of the stop difference counter."

The "value corresponding to the memory area of the hit difference counter" is 65,535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the memory area of the hit difference counter if the memory area of the hit difference counter is 2 bytes. Also, if the memory area of the hit difference counter is 3 bytes, it is 16,777,215, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the memory area of the hit difference counter.

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state" is, for example, 19,000 if the capped state is to be reached when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0). Also, for example, if the capped state is to be reached when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 10,000, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0), the value is 10,000. Also, for example, if the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the standard (0), and the capped state is reached when the difference in the number of gaming media from that standard exceeds 19,000, the value is 19,000.

In Figure 56, the explanation will be given assuming that the "value corresponding to the memory area of the stop difference counter" is 65,535, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be stopped" is 19,000, and the initial value is 46,535.

The initial value of the stop difference counter is stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on without changing the settings (not shown). Note that the initial value of the stop difference counter is also stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on with a change in settings (not shown).

First, in "Replay Activation Symbol Display?", it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role has been won by the internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been stopped and displayed, the answer is YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role has been won by the internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has not been stopped and displayed), the answer is NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the current game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will be YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In "Set Hit Difference Counter", the value stored in the hit difference counter is stored in a specified register. For example, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 10,000, 10,000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the hit difference counter at this time is the value before the hit difference counter was updated using the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media in the current game.

"Is the number of coins inserted < the number of coins paid out?" determines whether the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins inserted.

For example, if the result of the current game is: A) number of coins inserted = 3, number of coins paid out = 0, the answer is NO. B) number of coins inserted = 3, number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is NO. C) number of coins inserted = 3, number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO. D) number of coins inserted = 3, number of coins paid out = 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of coins inserted minus the number of coins paid out is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the number of coins inserted minus the number of coins paid out (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the number of coins paid out, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the number of coins paid out, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, as a result of this game, a) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0. b) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, then the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0. c) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, then the A register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0. d) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if the result of the previous game was that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was displayed (on an active line) and the number of bets for the current game was automatically bet (for example, "3" was set by the automatic bet), and the result of the current game was that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was not displayed (on an active line), then even if the number of bets was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the number of bets for the current game.

On the other hand, regarding the number of inserts and the number of payouts, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "number of inserts < number of payouts?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the number of inserts. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the number of payouts.

Note that in "Number of Inserts < Number of Payouts?", we calculated number of inserts - number of payouts, but we could also determine this by number of payouts - number of inserts. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the number of inserts and the number of payouts.

In "stop difference counter < 0?", the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is subtracted from the value stored in the stop difference counter to determine whether the result is below the lower limit (0). Specifically, the result of subtracting the value stored in the A register (number of coins inserted for the current game - number of coins paid out for the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the stop difference counter) is used to determine whether there is a borrowing. If there is a borrowing, the answer is YES, and if there is no borrowing, the answer is NO. If there is a borrowing, the carry flag is set to 1, and if there is no borrowing, the carry flag is set to 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, if the hit and stop difference counter (HL register) has a value of 2 stored, and the results of this game are as follows: a) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins out is 0 (when A register = 3), then the HL register will be 65535 and the carry flag will be 1. Note that 2-3 = -1, but registers cannot store negative values. As a result, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535. b) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1 (when A register = 2), then the HL register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0. c) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3 (when A register = 0), then the HL register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins removed = 0, the answer is YES. Also, b) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is NO. Also, c) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO.

Note that if "Is the hit difference counter < 0?" returns YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Lower limit value set", if a carryover occurs due to "stop difference number counter <0?", a predetermined lower limit value (0) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (HL register in this embodiment). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the stop difference number counter is 2, if a) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 0, then "stop difference number counter <0?" causes the HL register to = 65535. In such a case, "lower limit value set" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, the difference number of gaming media can be calculated as accurately as possible by storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register. Note that the next game can be played even if "Lower Limit Set" is executed. In other words, the process in FIG. 56 is executed even in games after "Lower Limit Set" is executed.

Note that, although FIG. 56 includes a "lower limit value set" process, the "lower limit value set" process may not be included. Specifically, when "stop difference counter < 0?" is judged to be YES, the value stored in the stop difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the stop difference counter is 2 and the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out in the game are a) number of coins inserted = 3 and number of coins paid out = 0, the value stored in the stop difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the value of the stop difference counter of the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with lower digits) from being stored in the "stop difference counter". In addition, since there is no process equivalent to the "lower limit value set", the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a downgrade occurs due to "stop difference counter < 0?", the stop difference counter is not updated using the value at the time of the downgrade, so that an abnormal value does not occur as the value of the stop difference counter. In other words, even if the difference in the number of gaming media becomes a negative value, the stop state can be generated as accurately as possible using the difference in the number of gaming media. Also, for values below the lower limit, the lower limit or the previous value is set as the value of the stop difference counter, so that too many gaming media are not awarded before the stop state is reached. In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

In "difference update," the complement of the result of the calculation in "stop difference counter < 0?" (number inserted - number paid out) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then added to the HL register. In other words, it executes "value stored in the stop difference counter" + "absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game."

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, when the value stored in the bet/stop difference counter (HL register value) is 2, if E) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 10, the A register will be 249, but in "difference update", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 2 + 7 is calculated, and 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2 + 7 does not exceed 65,535 (there is no carry), so the carry flag becomes 0.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the bet/stop difference counter (HL register value) is 65530, if D) the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249, but in "update bet/stop difference counter", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65530+7 is calculated, and 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530+7 is 65537, but since this exceeds 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

In "Update hit/stop difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the hit/stop difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is the stop difference counter < 0?" is NO, the updated value based on the absolute value of the difference between the stop difference counter for the previous game and the number of gaming media for the current game (number of inserts - number of payouts, or number of payouts - number of inserts) is stored in the HL register, so "update stop difference counter" subtracts or adds the absolute value of the difference between the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the stop difference counter for the previous game and stores the value in the stop difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is the stop difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit (0) is stored in the HL register, so the lower limit (0) is stored in the stop difference counter by "update stop difference counter."

In "Difference > 19000?", it is determined whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) exceeds 19000. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it is determined as YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it is determined as NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when a carry has occurred due to "Difference update". On the other hand, if a carry has occurred due to "Number inserted < Number paid out?", the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to reset the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" makes it possible to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) with a constant (19,000).

In this way, in "Difference > 19000?", the carry flag is set to 1 to determine whether the difference in the number of game media since the power-on start point (0) has exceeded 19000, so 46535 is stored as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 46535 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "19000", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media at the end of the play state, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area of the play-stop difference counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media from the starting point (0) at power-on exceeds 19000, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will become 1.

Furthermore, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46535 as the difference in the number of gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 46535, a situation in which the value of the play-stop difference counter is 16535 means that the difference in the number of gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), is -30000.

Also, by storing 46535 as the initial value and setting the lower limit to 0, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before reaching a limit can be limited to approximately 65535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46535) and the lower limit (0) (46535) + 19000).

As described above, by storing 46535 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be stopped," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000. Also, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store up to a value equivalent to -46535 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. Note that although an example is given of storing 46535 as the initial value, a value other than 46535 can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

In "Save stop flag", information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the stop flag storage area.

In addition, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power off processing is executed). In addition, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a change in settings (RWM clear process with a change in settings) (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Stop Flag" stores information indicating that the stop conditions have been met in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the initial value (46535), but the information stored in the stop flag storage area (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while the information indicating that the conditions for stopping have been met is stored in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned on again without changing any settings, the stop difference counter will return to its initial value, but the device will still be in the stopped state.

When information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (when the stop state is reached), it is not possible to perform a bet operation to execute the next game. For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the blocker is (set to) a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In addition, in "Is the hit difference counter < 0?", the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media in the current game subtracted from the value stored in the hit difference counter is subtracted to determine whether it falls below the lower limit (0). However, taking into account the case where the lower limit is not 0, it can also be expressed as "Is the hit difference counter < lower limit?" instead of "Is the hit difference counter < 0?".

For example, if the lower limit is 36,535, "stop difference counter < lower limit?" determines whether the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game from the value stored in the stop difference counter falls below the lower limit (36,535). If the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game from the value stored in the stop difference counter falls below the lower limit (36,535), "set lower limit" may be used to store 36,535 in the HL register.

By setting the lower limit to 36,535 in this way, the game can be capped when the maximum difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46,535) and the lower limit (36,535) (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when the lower limit is set to 0, the number of differences in gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the game is capped can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to prevent the gambling element from becoming excessively high.

Also, even if the lower limit is set to 36535, if the answer to the question "Is the hit difference counter < lower limit?" is YES, the value stored in the hit difference counter from the previous game may be used.

The lower limit is 3653
Although the case where the lower limit is 5 has been described, the lower limit is not limited to 36535 and can be any value.

In addition, the example described above uses the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000. However, the example can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls is set as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

When the point where the player has the lowest number of balls put out is set as the reference (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to set the lower limit to the same as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 46,535, which is the "value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the stop difference counter" minus the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media to be stopped", the lower limit is also set to 46,535. By doing this, when the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, "stop difference counter < lower limit?" (in the figure, "stop difference counter < 0?") becomes YES, and 46,535 is stored as the lower limit. Therefore, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls put out can be set as the reference (0), and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

Similarly, if the point where the player has the lowest number of balls put out is set as the reference (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, the initial value is set to 0 and the lower limit is also set to 0, so that when the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Stop difference counter < lower limit?" (in the figure, "Stop difference counter < 0?") becomes YES and 0 is stored as the lower limit. Then, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the value stored in the stop difference counter updated by "Stop difference counter update" is less than 19,001. By configuring in this way, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls put out can be set as the reference (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

<End of game monitoring process (subtraction version of the end of game difference counter)> In FIG. 57, there is a end of game difference counter. The explanation of the end of game difference counter is omitted as it has been described above. Note that the size of the memory area for the end of game difference counter is assumed to be 2 bytes.

Note that the initial value of the stop difference counter in FIG. 57 is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be stopped."

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the capping state" would be 19,000 if the capping state is to be established when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0). Also, for example, if the capping state is to be established when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 10,000, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0), the value would be 10,000.

In Figure 57, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped" is set to 19,000, and the explanation will be given assuming that the initial value is 19,000.

The initial value of the stop difference counter is stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on (not shown). Note that the initial value of the stop difference counter is also stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on with a setting change (not shown).

First, in "Replay Activation Symbol Display?", it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role has been won by the internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been stopped and displayed, the answer is YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role has been won by the internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has not been stopped and displayed), the answer is NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the current game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will be YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In "Set Hit Difference Counter", the value stored in the hit difference counter is stored in a specified register. For example, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 10,000, 10,000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the hit difference counter at this time is the value before the hit difference counter was updated using the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media in the current game.

"Is the number of coins inserted < the number of coins paid out?" determines whether the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins inserted.

For example, if the result of the current game is: A) number of coins inserted = 3, number of coins paid out = 0, the answer is NO. B) number of coins inserted = 3, number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is NO. C) number of coins inserted = 3, number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO. D) number of coins inserted = 3, number of coins paid out = 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of coins inserted minus the number of coins paid out is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the number of coins inserted minus the number of coins paid out (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the number of coins paid out, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the number of coins paid out, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, as a result of this game, a) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0. b) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, then the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0. c) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, then the A register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0. d) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249 and the carry flag will be 1.

Here, if the result of the previous game was that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was displayed (on an active line) and the number of bets for the current game was automatically bet (for example, "3" was set by the automatic bet), and the result of the current game was that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay was not displayed (on an active line), then even if the number of bets was set by the automatic bet, it will be treated as the number of bets for the current game.

On the other hand, regarding the number of inserts and the number of payouts, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "number of inserts < number of payouts?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the number of inserts. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on a valid line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the number of payouts.

Note that in "Number of Inserts < Number of Payouts?", we calculated number of inserts - number of payouts, but we could also determine this by number of payouts - number of inserts. In other words, it is sufficient to be able to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the number of inserts and the number of payouts.

"Exceeding upper limit?" determines whether the result of adding the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game to the value stored in the stop difference counter exceeds the upper limit (for example, 65,535). Specifically, it determines whether the result of adding the value stored in the A register (number of coins inserted in the current game - number of coins paid out in the current game) to the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the stop difference counter) has a carry. If there is a carry, it is determined as YES, and if there is no carry, it is determined as NO. If there is a carry, the carry flag is set to 1, and if there is no carry, the carry flag is set to 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the play/stop difference counter (HL register value) is 65534, a) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, then the HL register will be 1 and the carry flag will be 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. As a result, a carry occurs and the value becomes 1. b) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, then the HL register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store values greater than 65535. As a result, a carry occurs and the value becomes 0. c) if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, then the HL register will be 65534 and the carry flag will be 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins removed = 0, the answer is YES. Also, b) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is YES. Also, c) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO.

Note that if "Exceeded upper limit?" is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Upper limit set", if a carry occurs due to "Upper limit exceeded?", a predetermined upper limit (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (HL register in this embodiment). Note that the upper limit in this embodiment is 65535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in 2 bytes, but the upper limit is not limited to 65535 and may be any predetermined value.

In the above example, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 65534, if a) the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the HL register is set to 2 due to "exceeding upper limit?". In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register due to "setting upper limit."

Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 65534, if (a) the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the HL register is set to 0 due to "exceeding upper limit?". In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register due to "setting upper limit."

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, it is possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media as accurately as possible by storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register. Note that the next game can be played even if "upper limit value set" is executed. In other words, the process in FIG. 57 is executed even in games after "upper limit value set" is executed.

Note that, although FIG. 57 includes a process for "setting the upper limit", the process for "setting the upper limit" may not be included. Specifically, when "exceeds the upper limit?" is judged to be YES, the value stored in the stop difference counter for the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the stop difference counter is 65534 and the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for the game are a) number of coins inserted = 3 and number of coins paid out = 0, the value stored in the stop difference counter may be set to 65534 (the same value as the value of the stop difference counter for the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values that have been carried over) from being stored in the "stop difference counter". In addition, since the process equivalent to "setting the upper limit" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a carry occurs due to "exceeding upper limit?", the value at the time of the carry is not used to update the stop difference counter, so that an abnormal value does not occur as the value of the stop difference counter. In other words, even if the difference number of game media becomes a negative value, the stop state can be generated as accurately as possible using the difference number of game media.

In addition, for values that exceed the upper limit, the upper limit or the previous value is set as the value of the stop difference counter, so that it is not possible to award a difference that greatly exceeds the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media until the stop state is reached (for example, 19,000). Specifically, by storing 19,000 as the initial value and setting the upper limit to 65,535, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the stop state is reached can be limited to approximately 65,535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit value (65,535) (46,535) + 19,000). In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

In "Difference Update", the complement of the result of the calculation in "Upper Limit Exceeded?" (Number of Inserts - Number of Payouts) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register. In other words, it executes "Value stored in the Stop Difference Counter" - "Value of the Difference in the Number of Game Media for the Current Game".

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the bet/stop difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65534, if (E) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 10, then the A register will be 249, but in "difference update", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65534-7 is calculated, and 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that since the result of 65534-7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag will be 0.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the bet/stop difference counter (value in the HL register) is 2, if D) the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249, but in "update bet/stop difference counter", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 2-7 is calculated, and 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2-7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (because there is a carryover), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carryover, the carry flag becomes 1.

In "Update hit/stop difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the hit/stop difference counter.

For example, if "Upper limit exceeded?" is NO, the value updated by the difference between the value of the stop difference counter from the previous game and the number of gaming media in the current game (number of inserts - number of payouts, or number of payouts - number of inserts) is stored in the HL register, so "update stop difference counter" stores the value updated (subtracted or added) by the absolute value of the difference between the value of the stop difference counter from the previous game and the number of gaming media in the current game in the stop difference counter.

For example, if "Exceeded upper limit?" is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so "Update stop difference counter" stores the upper limit (65535) in the stop difference counter.

In "Difference > 19000?", it is determined whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) exceeds 19000. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it is determined as YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it is determined as NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when there has been a carry down due to "Difference update". On the other hand, if there has been an increase due to "Number inserted < Number paid out?", the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to reset the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" makes it possible to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) with a constant (19,000).

In this way, in "Difference > 19000?", the carry flag is set to 1 to determine whether the difference in the number of game media from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0) has exceeded 19000, so 19000 is stored as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 19000 is the value "19000" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media at the end of the game. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on (starting point (0)) exceeds 19000, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will become 1.

Furthermore, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46,535 as the difference in the number of gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 19,000, a situation in which the value of the play-stop difference counter is 49,000 means that the difference in the number of gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), is -30,000.

As described above, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the limit is reached," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000. In addition, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -46,535 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. Note that although an example is given of storing 19,000 as the initial value, any value other than 19,000 can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

In "Save stop flag", information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a specified value is stored in the stop flag storage area.

In addition, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power off processing is executed). In addition, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a change in settings (RWM clear process with a change in settings) (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Stop Flag" stores information indicating that the stop conditions have been met in the stop flag memory area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the initial value (19,000), but the information stored in the stop flag memory area (information indicating that the stop conditions have been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while the information indicating that the conditions for stopping have been met is stored in the stop flag storage area, and then the power is turned on again without changing any settings, the stop difference counter will return to its initial value, but the device will still be in the stopped state.

When information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (when the stop state is reached), it is not possible to perform a bet operation to execute the next game. For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the blocker is (set to) a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In the above explanation, 65,535 was used as the upper limit, but if the upper limit was set to 29,000, "Upper limit exceeded?" would determine whether the value stored in the stop difference counter plus the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game exceeds the upper limit (29,000). If the value stored in the stop difference counter plus the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game exceeds the upper limit (29,000), "set upper limit" could be used to store 29,000 in the HL register.

By setting the upper limit at 29,000 in this way, the game can be stopped when the maximum difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit (29,000) (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when the upper limit is set to 65,535, the number of differences in gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the game is stopped can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to prevent the gambling element from becoming excessively high.

Also, even if the upper limit is set to 29,000, if the answer to "Exceeded upper limit?" is YES, the value stored in the stop difference counter from the previous game may be used.

Note that although the upper limit has been set to 29,000 in the above description, the upper limit is not limited to 29,000 and can be any value.

In addition, the example described above uses the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000. However, the example can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls is set as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

If the point where the player has the lowest number of balls put out is set as the reference (0) and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to set the upper limit value to the same as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 19,000, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media that will cause the game to be stopped," the upper limit value will also be 19,000. By doing this, if the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Upper limit exceeded?" will become YES, and 19,000 will be stored as the upper limit value. Thus, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls put out can be set as the reference (0), and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

As described above, by performing the processing shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57, an example has been shown in which, starting from the time the power is turned on, when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, information (a predetermined value) indicating that the capping condition has been met can be stored in the capping flag memory area (the capping process can be executed).

Also, by performing the processing shown in Figures 56 and 57, the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the reference (0), and when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, information indicating that the stop condition has been met (a predetermined value) can be stored in the stop flag storage area (the stop processing can be executed) as an example.

Note that the control processes shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 are just examples, and any order of control processes may be used as long as the same effect is achieved, even if the order of control processes is different.

Similarly, the control processes shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 are merely examples, and even if the control processes involve different additions and subtractions (for example, when addition and subtraction are reversed), any arithmetic process may be used as long as it produces the same effect. In other words, "adding" and "subtracting" can be expressed as "updating."

The capping monitoring process shown in Figures 55, 56, and 57 is also executed in the bonus game state. In other words, even in the middle of the bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the capping condition has been met (a predetermined value) is stored in the capping flag storage area, so that the capping state is entered even in the middle of the bonus game state.

Similarly, the limit monitoring process shown in Figures 56 and 57 sets the point where the player's ball output is at its lowest as the reference (0) even in the middle of a bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), and when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, stores information (a predetermined value) indicating that the limit condition has been met in the limit flag memory area, so that a limit state is reached even in the middle of a bonus game state.

By configuring it in this way, even in a bonus game state, the game can be stopped when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), providing a gaming machine that does not excessively increase gambling.

However, stopping the bonus game in the middle of the game can be unpleasant for the player.

Therefore, in the middle of a bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), even if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), the game is not immediately put into a halt state. Instead, when the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met, information (a predetermined value) indicating that the halt condition has been met is stored in the halt flag memory area, and an example of putting the game into a halt state is described below.

<End-of-game monitoring process (subtraction version of the end-of-game difference counter, end-of-game state after the bonus game state ends due to the temporary end-of-game flag)> Figure 58 is a modified example of Figure 57. Figure 58 has a temporary end-of-game flag storage area.

The provisional limit flag memory area is one of the RWM areas of the main control board. Specifically, it is a memory area that stores information (for example, a predetermined value such as "1") indicating that the provisional limit condition is met when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0).

The information stored in the temporary limit flag memory area is not initialized by simply turning the power on and off. Also, the information stored in the temporary limit flag memory area is not initialized by clearing the RWM at the end of the favorable period.

In addition, the information stored in the tentative limit flag memory area can be initialized (e.g., to "0") by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (information indicating that the tentative limit condition has been met can be cleared).

Note that if a game in which information indicating that the provisional limit conditions are met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is in a bonus game state, information indicating that the limit conditions are met is not stored in the provisional limit flag storage area. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional limit conditions are met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is in a bonus game state, the game will not be in a limit state.

If a game in which information indicating that the provisional limiting condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limiting flag memory area is in a bonus game state, information indicating that the limiting condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limiting flag memory area in a game in which the bonus game state has ended. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional limiting condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limiting flag memory area is in a bonus game state, the game will enter a limiting state after the game in which the bonus game state has ended has ended.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from Figure 57.

First, "Temporary limit flag ON?" determines whether information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the temporary limit flag storage area.

If the answer to "Is the temporary limit flag ON?" is YES, the system determines whether the game is in a bonus game state.

If the answer to "Is the temporary stop flag ON?" is NO, the system checks whether the "Replay activation symbol is displayed?"

"Replay activation symbol display?" is the same as "Replay activation symbol display?" in Figure 57, so the explanation will be omitted.

The "stop difference counter set" is the same as the "stop difference counter set" in Figure 57, so the explanation is omitted.

"Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" is the same as "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" in Figure 57, so the explanation will be omitted.

"Upper limit exceeded?" is the same as "Upper limit exceeded?" in Figure 57, so the explanation is omitted.

The "Upper limit set" is the same as the "Upper limit set" in Figure 57, so the explanation is omitted.

"Update Difference Number" is the same as "Update Difference Number" in Figure 57, so the explanation is omitted.

"Update hit/stop difference counter" is the same as "Update hit/stop difference counter" in Figure 57, so the explanation is omitted.

"Difference > 19000?" is the same as "Difference > 19000?" in Figure 57, so the explanation is omitted.

In "save tentative limit flag", information indicating that the tentative limit condition is met is stored in the tentative limit flag storage area. For example, the information indicating that the tentative limit condition is met corresponds to numerical information such as a predetermined value (e.g., "1").

"Bonus game state?" determines whether the next game will be a bonus game state game. Specifically, it checks the bonus activation flag and determines whether Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB is activated.

Here, the bonus activation flag is one of the RWM areas of the main control board. For example, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a type 1 BB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the type 1 BB in the bonus activation flag turns on (1), and when the type 1 BB is completed, it changes from on to off (0). Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a type 2 BB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the type 2 BB in the bonus activation flag turns on (1), and when the type 2 BB is completed, it changes from on to off (0). Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to an RB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the RB in the bonus activation flag turns on (1), and when the RB is completed, it changes from on to off (0).

Note that the on/off status of the bonus activation flag is stored in a process that occurs before the end-of-game monitoring process.

For example, even if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), if the current game ends in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the answer to "Bonus game state?" will be determined to be NO.

For example, if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) and the current game did not end in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the "Bonus game state?" will be answered with YES.

For example, if the previous game was not in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) (non-bonus game state), and the current game is in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the answer to "Bonus game state?" will be YES.

"Save stop flag" is the same as "Save stop flag" in Figure 57, so the explanation will be omitted.

As described above, by providing a temporary cap flag storage area, even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the cap condition is met is not stored in the cap flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), the cap state will occur after the game when the bonus game state ends.

In addition, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, the limit difference counter is not updated. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing.

However, the stop difference counter may be updated even after information indicating that the stop condition is met is stored in the stop flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the processing.

In addition, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, no determination is made as to whether the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing.

As is also clear from FIG. 58, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, even if the difference in the number of gaming media falls below 19,000, the information stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is not updated (the information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is not cleared). By configuring in this manner, if the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, the game can be put into a limit state even if the difference in the number of gaming media is below 19,000 in the game in which the bonus game state ends.

<Relationship between the hours that an amusement facility can operate and the difference in the number of gaming media required to reach the limit> Gaming machines that have a limit-reaching function (also called a complete function) may be designed so that the following formula holds true.

(Difference in number of gaming media until the game reaches a dead end) / (Expected increase in gaming media per game in the most favorable game state for the player) x Minimum game time (s) / 3600 < Opening hours of an amusement establishment as stipulated by the Entertainment and Amusement Act (h)

The minimum game time (s) in the above formula is the minimum game time mentioned above, which is equivalent to 4.1 seconds. Specifically, it is the shortest time from the start of reel rotation for a certain game to the start of reel rotation for the game following that game (next game). Also, 3600 is a constant for converting seconds to hours (1 hour = 60 minutes x 60 seconds = 3600 seconds). The Entertainment and Amusement Act is a law that regulates the entertainment and amusement business and regulates its operations.

The expected increase in gaming media per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player is generally referred to as the net increase (net increase in number of coins) per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

A simple example will be used to explain the expected increase in gaming media per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

For example, the most advantageous game state is the AT state (it is assumed that in the AT state, playing with a 3-coin bet is the most advantageous). Also, a 10-coin role (small role) is won by the internal lottery with a probability of 3/4, and a symbol combination corresponding to the 10-coin role can be stopped and displayed. Also, a loss is determined by the internal lottery with a probability of 1/4, and a symbol combination corresponding to a loss (0 coins) is stopped and displayed. In this AT state, in a game in which a small role is won by the internal lottery, the player operates the stop switch in an advantageous manner by following the advantageous operation manner notified. In other words, when a 10-coin role (small role) is won by the internal lottery, a symbol combination corresponding to the 10-coin role can be stopped and displayed with a probability of 100%.

In this case, the expected increase per game in the most advantageous game state for the player is (3/4 x 10 + 1/4 x 0)/3 = 2.5. Note that in this example, games in which a replay is won are not considered, but games in which a replay is won by the internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed will be calculated as 0 coins bet and 0 coins out.

In addition, in a gaming machine that has multiple gaming states such as bonus gaming state A, bonus gaming state B, and AT state as gaming states that are advantageous to the player, the gaming state that has the largest expected increase in gaming media per game among these multiple gaming states is considered to be the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

For example, when the expected increase in gaming media per play in bonus gaming state A is 3.5, the expected increase in gaming media per play in bonus gaming state B is 2.0, and the expected increase in gaming media per play in the AT state is 2.5, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is bonus gaming state A.

Note that the expected increase in gaming media per game in each of the above-mentioned game states is merely an example, and may be other values.

Furthermore, the Entertainment and Amusement Business Act stipulates that the hours (h) that an amusement establishment may operate are 18 hours. Specifically, Article 13 of the Entertainment and Amusement Business Act states, "Entertainment and Amusement Business Operators may not operate their business late at night (meaning the hours between midnight and 6:00 a.m.; the same applies below)." In other words, the hours that an amusement establishment may operate are 18 hours a day, excluding late night hours.

In addition, the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached is set at 19,000.

The conditions for reaching the stop state can be either a) when the difference in the number of game media from the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed after power-on exceeds 19,000, using the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed as the base (0), or b) when the difference in the number of game media from the point at which the power-on is used as the starting point (0) exceeds 19,000.

Therefore, when applying the numerical values to the above formula, we get 19,000/(expected increase in gaming media per game in the most advantageous gaming state for the player) x 4.1/3,600 < 18.

In other words, by setting the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached to 19,000, if the expected increase in the number of gaming media per game in the most advantageous game state for the player is greater than approximately 0.83, the limit will be reached before the game establishment closes, even if the most advantageous game state for the player begins immediately after the game establishment opens and continues (when the most advantageous game state for the player is played continuously).

In other words, even if a gaming machine designed for an extremely large expected increase in gaming media per play in the most advantageous gaming state (for example, a value greater than 2.5) is installed in an amusement facility, by setting the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached to 19,000, the limit can be reached within the business hours of the gaming facility even if the most advantageous gaming state for the player continues (if the most advantageous gaming state for the player is played continuously), so that a gaming machine that does not have a significantly high gambling nature can be provided, even if the expected increase in gaming media per play in the most advantageous gaming state is an extremely large value.

Note that the shortest business hours set by prefectures are 13 hours, so the right-hand side of the above formula, 18 (h), can be replaced with 13 (h) to make the formula valid.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the gambling nature is not significantly higher when the right-hand side of the above formula is set to 13(h) than when the right-hand side of the above formula is set to 18(h).

<Advantageous Zone Difference Counter and Hit-and-Stop Difference Counter> We will explain the features (main differences) of the advantageous zone difference counter and the hit-and-stop difference counter.

<<Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter>> (1) Overview This is a memory area for storing the difference in the number of gaming media related to the end (forced termination) of an advantageous zone. For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media in an advantageous zone exceeds 2,400, the advantageous zone is controlled to end. (2) When counting begins The difference in the number of gaming media is calculated from the game in which the advantageous zone starts, and updating of the advantageous zone difference number counter begins. In other words, in cases where the first game after the power is turned on is in the normal zone, for games in the normal zone, counting of the advantageous zone difference number counter does not begin based on the difference in the number of gaming media for games in the normal zone.

Note that if the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met during a game in the normal zone, it is acceptable to configure the advantageous zone difference counter to be set to an initial value (e.g., 46535) during that game.

(3) At the end of counting The counting ends with the game in which the advantageous zone ends. In other words, the updating of the advantageous zone difference number counter starts from the game in which the advantageous zone starts, and the advantageous zone difference number counter is then updated until the game in which the advantageous zone ends. Note that for the game in which the advantageous zone ends, the advantageous zone difference number counter does not need to be updated, or the advantageous zone difference number counter may be updated.

(4) Example of initializing favorable zone difference counter a) The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is initialized (e.g., 0 is stored) by the RWM clear process associated with the end of the favorable zone. b) The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is initialized (e.g., 0 is stored) by power-on accompanied by a setting change (RWM clear process associated with the setting change mode entered by turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on).

The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter by initializing the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter (initialized value) and the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter by satisfying the start condition of the favorable zone (initial value) may be configured to be different values.

For example, an example of the value (initialized value) stored in the favorable zone difference counter by initializing the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is "0."

In addition, examples of the value (initial value) that is stored in the advantageous zone difference counter when the advantageous zone start condition is met include "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the advantageous zone end condition," or "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the advantageous zone end condition."

Here, an example of "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone" is "2400", and an example of "the value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference counter" - "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone" is "63135". Note that these numerical values are merely examples and are not limited to these.

In addition, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter by initializing the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter (initialized value) may be configured to be the value (initial value) stored in the favorable zone difference counter when the favorable zone count start condition is satisfied.

Specifically, by initializing the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter, the value stored in the favorable zone difference number counter (initialized value) may be "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone defined as the end condition of the favorable zone," or "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the favorable zone difference number counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone defined as the end condition of the favorable zone."

(5) Examples of when the value of the favorable zone difference counter is maintained: A) Even if a specified error (a recoverable error) occurs and the reset switch is operated to clear the specified error, the favorable zone difference counter is not reset to its initial value (the specified error becomes recoverable).

For example, if a specified error occurs when the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 100, and the specified error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter will remain at 100. In other words, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter will not be updated. In this case, the favorable zone will also be maintained.

a) If power is restored after power-off processing (also called power-off processing) is performed and the power is then turned on without changing the settings (power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the difference counter for the favorable zone will not be reset to its initial value.

For example, if the power switch is turned off and power-off processing is executed when the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is 100, and then the power is restored by turning the power on without changing any settings, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter will remain at 100. In other words, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter will not be updated. In this case, the favorable zone will also be maintained.

Note that the above-mentioned (4) example of initializing the favorable zone difference counter and (5) example of maintaining the value of the favorable zone difference counter are just examples. For example, some or all of the examples may be adopted. In addition, the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter may be reset to its initial value or the value of the favorable zone difference counter may be maintained due to the occurrence of other events. <<Battle-End Difference Counter>> (1) Overview This is a memory area for storing the difference in the game media related to the limit. For example, when the difference in the game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, the game is controlled to enter a limit state (also called a complete state).

In this embodiment, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop refers to either (a) or (b) below. (a) The current difference in the number of gaming media, with the time when the power was turned on as the starting point (0). (b) The current difference in the number of gaming media from the reference point (0) where the player has the lowest number of balls after the power was turned on. (2) When counting begins The difference in the number of gaming media is calculated from the first game after the power is turned on (power on without changing the settings, and power on with changing the settings), and updating of the stop difference counter begins. In other words, counting begins whether the first game after the power is turned on is a game in the normal zone or a game in the advantageous zone.

The count of the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the limit to be reached is configured so that the gaming machine is provided with a specified switch (the so-called limit switch), and the gaming establishment cannot choose whether or not to count by operating the specified switch (different from conventional limit functions). In other words, when playing on the same type of gaming machine (same model of gaming machine), there are cases where the limit is reached and cases where it is not, depending on the gaming establishment. In other words, when the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the limit to be reached is exceeded, the limit will be reached across the board.

(3) At the end of the count The count ends with a game that meets the stop condition. In other words, the stop difference counter starts updating from the game when the power is turned on, and then continues to update until the stop condition is met. Note that for a game that meets the stop condition, the stop difference counter does not need to be updated, or the stop difference counter may be updated.

(4) Example of initializing the strike difference counter A) When a power-off process is executed and then power is restored by turning on the power with a setting change (turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on), the value stored in the strike difference counter is initialized (for example, 0 is stored).

For example, if the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter is 200, the power switch is turned off to perform the power-off process, and then the power is restored by turning the power on with a setting change, the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter will be 0 (the value after initialization).

a) If a power-off process is executed and then power is restored by turning the power on without changing any settings (turning the power switch on with the setting key switch off), the value stored in the strike-off difference counter is initialized (for example, 0 is stored).

For example, if the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter is 200, the power switch is turned off to perform the power-off process, and then the power is restored by turning the power on without changing any settings, the value stored in the hit/stop difference counter will be 0 (the value after initialization).

In addition, if an event occurs that initializes the hit difference counter, the value stored in the hit difference counter may be initialized so that the value stored in the hit difference counter becomes the initial value of the hit difference counter.

By configuring it in this way, the process of initializing the value stored in the strike difference counter can be the same as the process of storing (setting) an initial value in the strike difference counter. Therefore, there is no need to provide two processes, one for initializing the value stored in the strike difference counter and one for storing (setting) an initial value in the strike difference counter, and the program capacity can be reduced.

In addition, when the value stored in the strike difference counter by initializing the value stored in the strike difference counter and the value for storing (setting) the initial value in the strike difference counter are the same or different, two processes may be provided: a process for initializing the value stored in the strike difference counter and a process for storing (setting) the initial value in the strike difference counter.

For example, when the value stored in the hit difference counter is initialized, the value stored in the hit difference counter may be configured to be 0, and then the initial value may be stored (set) in the hit difference counter to 0.

In addition, when the value stored in the strike difference counter is 0, the strike difference counter may be configured to store 19,000 by a process of storing (setting) an initial value therein.

(5) Examples of when the value of the hit/stop difference counter is maintained: A) Even if a specified error (a recoverable error) occurs and the reset switch is operated to clear the specified error, the hit/stop difference counter is not reset to its initial value (the specified error becomes recoverable).

For example, if a specific error occurs when the value stored in the hit and stop difference counter is 200, and the specific error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the value stored in the hit and stop difference counter will remain at 200. In other words, the value stored in the hit and stop difference counter will not be updated.

A) The initial value is not reset by the RWM clear process at the end of the favorable period. In other words, the hit difference counter is not subject to RWM clearing at the end of the favorable period.

For example, even if the favorable period ends when the value stored in the hit difference counter is 200 and the RWM is cleared in response to the end of the favorable period, the value stored in the hit difference counter after the RWM is cleared in response to the end of the favorable period remains at 200. In other words, the value stored in the hit difference counter is not updated.

Note that the above-mentioned (4) example of initializing the hit difference counter and (5) example of maintaining the value of the hit difference counter are just examples. For example, some or all of the examples may be adopted. In addition, the value stored in the hit difference counter may be reset to its initial value or the value of the hit difference counter may be maintained when another event occurs.

<Notification states related to limiting> There are a first state, a second state, and a third state as notification states related to limiting. Note that the notification states related to limiting are states controlled by the sub-control means.

The first state is the state before the capping condition is met. It also refers to a state in which the difference between the number of gaming media related to the capping and the number of gaming media required to reach the capping state is greater than a specific value (e.g., 100).

For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached is 19,000 and the specific value is 100, then the first state corresponds to a situation in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is between 0 and less than 18,900. In this embodiment, the first state is also referred to as the "normal state," the "pre-operation notice state," and the "pre-limit operation notice state."

The second state is the state before the capping condition is met. It also refers to a state in which the difference between the number of gaming media required to cap and the number of gaming media required to reach the capping state is equal to or less than a specific value.

For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached is 19,000 and the specific value is 100, the second state corresponds to a situation in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is between 18,900 and 19,000. In this embodiment, the second state is also referred to as the "operation notice state," the "operation notice notification state," and the "limit operation notice notification state."

The third state is a state in which the conditions for stopping are met. Specifically, it refers to a state in which the conditions for stopping are met and stopping processing (stopping state) is being executed.

For example, if the difference in the number of gaming media until the capping state is reached is 19,000, the situation in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping state exceeds 19,000 (the capping state is reached) corresponds to the third state. In this embodiment, the third state is also referred to as the "operation state," the "operation notification state," and the "capping operation notification state."

In other words, the transition of the notification state related to the stoppage from when the power is turned on until the stoppage state is reached is the first state followed by the second state, and then the second state followed by the third state.

Note that the transition of the notification state related to the cutoff does not necessarily go from the first state to the second state to the third state. Details will be described later, but it may go, for example, from the first state to the second state to the first state to the second state to the third state.

<Notification mode according to the notification state related to the limit> Next, the notification mode according to the notification state related to the limit will be explained using the figure.

<<Notification state related to the limit: normal state>> Figure 75 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state." Below, the presentation (images) displayed on the display device 32 will be explained in the order of Figure 75 (1), Figure 75 (2), and Figure 75 (3).

<<<<Figure 75 (1)>>> This is an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state" and during play (in this example, during the AT state).

PAYOUT and CREDIT are displayed on the bottom left side of the display device 32. PAYOUT displays the number of gaming media obtained as a result of one game (number of gaming media awarded). In Figure 75 (1), "00" is displayed because it shows the state before one game has ended (for example, when all reels have spun).

CREDIT also displays the current number of credits. Figure 75 (1) shows an example in which the player is playing with 50 credits, so "50" is displayed.

The "Total" and "G" are displayed in the upper right corner of the display device 32. "Total" is displayed according to the number of game media acquired in the AT state. Figure 75 (1) shows an example in which the number of game media acquired in the AT state is 2000, so "Total 2000" is displayed.

G also displays the number of games played in the AT state. Figure 75 (1) shows an example in which the number of games played in the AT state is 1000 games, so "1000G" is displayed.

The center of the display device 32 displays an image that includes a character image to enhance the enjoyment of the game. In addition, in the AT state, the center of the display device 32 may display an image indicating an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (not shown).

When the notification state regarding the limit is "normal state" and the power is turned off during play (in this example, during AT state), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch off (power-on without changing settings), PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G are configured to display the same information as was displayed when the power was turned off.

In addition, an example was shown in which the notification state related to the limit is "normal state" and information on PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G is displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state), but these do not necessarily have to be displayed.

For example, the information on Total and G may be displayed, but the information on PAYOUT and CREDIT may not be displayed. Also, while G was displayed according to the number of plays performed in the AT state, G may be displayed according to the number of plays remaining in the AT state. In this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state", and the information displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) can be any information.

As described above, when the notification state related to the stoppage is the "normal state" and the game is in progress (in this example, in the AT state), no advance notification is given until the stoppage condition is met, and no notification is given indicating that the game is in a stoppage state. Note that although the AT state is given as an example, no advance notification is given until the stoppage condition is met, and no notification is given indicating that the game is in a stoppage state, regardless of the game state (in a bonus game state or in a normal game state (not in an AT, not in a bonus game state, not inside a bonus, inside a bonus)).

<<<<Figure 75 (2)>>> This is an example of an effect (also called a demo effect or demo screen) when the notification state related to the end of the game is the "normal state" and the game is in standby. For example, the demo effect is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain point after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process has been performed).

In addition, when the game is in a specific game state such as an AT state or a bonus game state, the demo effect may not be executed even if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain timing after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process).

In addition, the demo effect may be set not to be executed when in menu mode (when a menu image is displayed) even if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain point after the end of a game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process has been performed).

In other words, even if the menu mode is entered before a predetermined time has elapsed from a certain point after the end of a game (for example, 30 seconds after the certain point), and the menu screen remains displayed, the demo performance does not have to be executed.

When the menu mode is entered, the demo performance may be executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the menu mode was started, or when a specific time (e.g., 120 seconds) different from the predetermined time has elapsed since the menu mode was started.

Also, when the mode is switched to menu mode (when the menu image is displayed), the demo performance may not be executed.

As an example of a demo presentation, I remember a case where a character image is displayed, but corporate logo images and warning images (images to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game) are displayed in sequence.

In addition to the demo effects described above, an image indicating that the machine is equipped with a stop function may also be displayed as a demo effect. For example, an image such as "This machine is equipped with a stop function" or "This machine is equipped with a complete function" may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) as an image indicating that the machine is equipped with a stop function.

In this way, when an image indicating that the game machine is equipped with a stop function is displayed as a demo effect, the player can be made aware in advance that the game machine is equipped with the stop function. In other words, the player can select a game machine to play on based on whether the game machine is equipped with a stop function or not. Even if the game machine reaches a stop state, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the game facility (for example, a complaint from the player when the game machine reaches a stop state in the middle of the AT).

In addition, in cases where a warning image (an image to prevent players from becoming addicted to playing) and an image indicating that the game has a limit function are displayed as demo effects, if the display period of the warning image (an image to prevent players from becoming addicted to playing) is T1 and the display period of the image indicating that the game has a limit function is T2, T1 may be set to be equal to or less than T2. By configuring the game in this way, the message that the game has a limit function can be more strongly emphasized.

Also, if the display period of the warning image (an image to prevent addiction to gaming) is T1 and the display period of the image indicating that the game-stopping function is installed is T2, T1 > T2 may be set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to further emphasize the message that reduces dependency (addiction) on the gaming machine.

In addition, as another form of displaying an image indicating that the machine is equipped with a limit function as a demo effect, while a character image is displayed as a demo effect, or a company logo image or a warning image (an image to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game) is displayed in sequence, images such as "This machine is equipped with a limit function" or "This machine is equipped with a complete function" may also be displayed at the same time.

As described above, when the notification state related to the limit is "normal state" and the demo performance is in progress, no advance notification is given until the limit condition is met, and no notification indicating that the limit state is in progress is given. However, the system may be configured to display an image indicating that the limit function is installed during the demo performance.

<<<<Fig. 75 (3)>>> This is an example of a menu image that is displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state" and the sub-switch 20 is operated during game standby (also called "menu mode").

The menu image displays the items the player can select and information about the player's game history.

The seven items that the player can select by operating a specific switch (for example, the sub-cross key switch 21) are "Member registration", "Password entry", "Quick my slot", "QR display at end", "View interim record", "Clear data", and "Volume adjustment".

For example, when the "volume adjustment" item is selected by operating a specific switch, and a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20) is operated, an image that allows volume adjustment is displayed.

For example, by operating a specific switch to select the "Member Registration" option, and then operating a specific switch, a two-dimensional code containing the server's URL information is displayed. (By reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile device or the like, it is possible to access the server managed by the manufacturer of the gaming machine.)

For example, by operating a specific switch to select the "Password Entry" option and then operating a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20), an image is displayed that allows the player to enter a password. After the password is entered, the game history is stored according to the progress of the game.

For example, when the "QR display at end" option is selected by operating a specific switch, and a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20) is operated, a two-dimensional code corresponding to the game history according to the progress of the game since the player entered the password is displayed. Note that when the condition for ending the display of the two-dimensional code (e.g., selecting "End QR display" with a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20)) is met, the game history according to the progress of the game since the player entered the password is erased.

For example, when the "View Interim Record" item is selected by operating a specific switch, and a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20) is operated, a two-dimensional code corresponding to the game history according to the progress of the game since the player entered the password is displayed. Note that even if the condition for ending the display of the two-dimensional code is met (e.g., selecting "End QR Display" with a specific switch (e.g., sub-switch 20)), the game history according to the progress of the game since the player entered the password is retained. Unlike when the "Display QR at End" item is selected, this is an item for players who intend to continue playing but would like to check the game history up to that point using a mobile device or the like.

For example, by selecting the "View progress record" option and using a mobile device or the like to check the game history that corresponds to the progress of the game after the player inputs the password, the player can estimate the setting value, estimate the current difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone, and estimate the current difference in the number of game media related to the limit, and then continue playing without erasing the game history.

We will not go into detail about all the items, but when a menu image is displayed, the player can select an item and an image corresponding to the item selected by the player will be displayed.

Note that, although seven items have been given as examples of items that the player can select, the number of items is not limited to these. For example, the player may select one item (e.g., volume adjustment), or the player may select two items (e.g., password entry and volume adjustment). In addition, the items that the player can select may be partially or entirely different from the seven items listed above.

Information about your game history is displayed below the menu image.

Examples of information about game history displayed on the menu image include five items: "HBB," "BB," "RB," "Number of AT entries," and "Total number of games played."

"HBB" displays the cumulative number of times the Hyper Bonus has been executed (entered) since the settings were changed. A Hyper Bonus is the bonus that is most advantageous to the player among multiple bonuses. Figure 75 (3) displays information indicating that the HBB has been executed once.

"BB" shows the total number of times that a big bonus has been executed (entered) since the settings were changed. A big bonus is a bonus that is less advantageous to the player than a hyper big bonus. In Figure 75 (3), information is displayed indicating that BB has been executed five times.

"RB" displays the cumulative number of times a regular bonus has been executed (entered) since the settings were changed. A regular bonus is a bonus that is less advantageous to the player than a big bonus. Figure 75 (3) displays information indicating that RB has been executed once.

"AT Entry" displays the cumulative number of times the AT state has been entered since the settings were changed. The AT state corresponds to a game state in which advantageous operation of the stop switch can be notified. In Figure 75 (3), information indicating that the AT has been entered five times is displayed.

"Total number of plays" displays the cumulative number of plays since the settings were changed. The total number of plays may be the number of plays in all play states, including the number of plays in states that are advantageous to the player (various bonuses, AT states, etc.), or it may be the number of plays in some play states excluding the number of plays in states that are advantageous to the player (various bonuses, AT states, etc.). In Figure 75 (3), information is displayed indicating that the total number of plays is 2000.

In this way, on gaming machines that display information about gaming history, it becomes possible for players to predict the difference in the number of gaming media until the game reaches a dead end.

For example, if the total number of plays is small but the number of times an advantageous play state such as "AT entry" has been reached is large, the player can predict that the difference in the number of game media until the end of the game is small. In other words, the player can predict that the end of the game is likely to occur soon.

On the other hand, for example, if the total number of plays is large but the number of times an advantageous play state such as "AT entry" is reached is small, the player can predict that there will be a large difference in the number of game media until the end of the game state. In other words, the player can predict that the end of the game state will not be reached yet.

The information about the game history displayed on the menu image is the cumulative number of times since the settings were changed. Therefore, even after the power is turned off and then turned on with the setting change key off (power on without changing the settings), the number of times each type of information is displayed before the power is turned off is the same as the number of times each type of information is displayed after the power is turned on with the setting change key off. When a setting change is made, the various types of information are displayed with their initial values (for example, 0). After a setting change is made (after the power is turned on with the setting change key on), the hit difference counter is set to its initial value. Similarly, after the power is turned on with the setting change key off, the hit difference counter is set to its initial value.

However, the information on the game history displayed on the menu image does not have to be the cumulative number of times since the setting was changed. For example, the information on the game history displayed on the menu image may be the cumulative number of times since the power was turned on. In this case, after the power is turned off and then turned on with the setting change key off (power on without changing the setting), various information is displayed with an initial value (for example, 0). Note that after the setting is changed (after the power is turned on with the setting change key on), the hit difference counter is set to its initial value. Similarly, after the power is turned on with the setting change key off, the hit difference counter is set to its initial value.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the information on the game history displayed on the menu image does not allow the player to distinguish between a case where a setting change has been made (including setting the same setting value) and a case where a setting change has not been made (power recovery without changing the setting).

In addition, five items, "HBB", "BB", "RB", "AT entry count", and "total play count", have been exemplified as information relating to game history displayed in the menu image, but the information is not limited to these five items. For example, the information relating to game history displayed in the menu image may display one item (for example, total play count) or two items (for example, AT entry and total play count). Furthermore, the information relating to game history displayed in the new image may be information that is partially or entirely different from the above five items (for example, a graph showing the progress of the difference in the number of game media (a so-called slump graph)). Furthermore, the information relating to game history does not have to be displayed in the menu image.

As described above, when the notification state regarding the limit is "normal state" and you are in menu mode, there will be no advance notification until the limit condition is met, and no notification indicating that the limit state has been reached.

<<Notification state related to the limit: Activation notice state>> Figure 76 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state". Below, the presentation (image) displayed on the display device 32 will be explained in the order of Figure 76 (1), Figure 76 (2), and Figure 76 (3). Note that the explanation of the parts that overlap with the explanation of Figure 75 will be omitted, and the characteristic configuration will be explained. <<<Figure 76 (1)>>> This is an example of the presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state" and during play (in this example, during the AT state). This example of the presentation is an example when the number of coins until the completion function is activated is notified to the display device 32.

Unlike Figure 75 (1), an image (also called an advance notification image) of "100 remaining until the complete function is activated" is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32. In other words, it notifies the player that the limit will be reached if the difference in the number of game media increases by 100 from the current difference in the number of game media. In other words, an advance notification is given until the limit condition is met.

The content of the advance notification image changes each time the difference in the number of game media remaining until the capping state changes. For example, when the difference in the number of game media remaining until the capping state is 90, it will say "90 remaining until the complete function is activated," when the difference in the number of game media remaining until the capping state is 50, it will say "50 remaining until the complete function is activated," when the difference in the number of game media remaining until the capping state is 10, it will say "10 remaining until the complete function is activated," etc. This is not limited to the example of the advance notification image in Figure 76 (1), but is similar to other examples of advance notification images.

The message "XX coins remaining until the complete function is activated" is just one example, and the contents of the advance notification image may be other messages such as "XX coins remaining until the limit is reached."

In addition, in games in which an image (also called a navigation image) relating to an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is also displayed while the advance notification image is displayed, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is configured to be visible.

For example, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch and the advance warning image may be configured to be displayed in a position (area) where they do not overlap. Also, for example, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch and the advance warning image may be configured to be displayed in a position (area) where they partially overlap. Specifically, the position (area) where the advance warning image is displayed may be a position (area) where more than half of the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch does not overlap. In any case, by configuring it in this way, the image relating to the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is visible, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not disadvantage the player.

In addition, the position (area) where the advance warning image is displayed and the size of the advance warning image may be configured not to change between a game in which an image relating to an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is displayed in the AT state and a game in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not displayed in the AT state. By configuring in this way, the burden of the control process for displaying the advance warning image can be reduced.

In addition, an example was shown in which the advance notification image displayed the number of frames remaining until the limit was reached, but the number of frames remaining until the limit is reached does not have to be displayed.

For example, an image such as "The game will soon reach the limit" may be displayed as the advance warning image. In this case, the same advance warning image is displayed when the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached is 90 and when the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached is 10. Note that although the notation (message) of the advance warning image is the same depending on the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached, it may also be in a different form (for example, the color of the advance warning image changes depending on the number of gaming media remaining until the limit is reached).

In this way, by providing advance notice until the stop condition is met, it is possible to prevent problems between players and the gaming facility, compared to when the stop process (stop state) occurs suddenly.

Furthermore, the advance warning image is configured so as not to overlap with the display of PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a decrease in visibility of the information relating to PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G due to the display of the advance warning image. Note that the display of the advance warning image may overlap with some of the information relating to PAYOUT, CREDIT, Total, and G.

When a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as the AT state or bonus game state, ends, a warning image (an image to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game) is displayed for a specified period of time (for example, until a period of 3 seconds has elapsed, or until a specified operation for the next game (such as a bet operation or operation of the start switch) is performed).

For example, when the advance warning image is displayed, the AT state ends and a warning image is displayed, and the configuration may be any of A) to C) below. A) At least a portion of the display area of the advance warning image and the display area of the warning image overlap. In other words, there are cases where the advance warning image and the warning image are displayed simultaneously.

When configured in this manner, the visibility of the pre-warning image is lower when the warning image is displayed compared to when the warning image is not displayed, since there is at least a partial overlap. However, since the pre-warning image is visible, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the gaming facility. a) The display area of the pre-warning image and the display area of the warning image do not overlap. In other words, there are cases where the pre-warning image and the warning image are displayed simultaneously.

When configured in this manner, the display areas of the warning image and the advance warning image do not overlap, so it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance warning image from changing between when the warning image is not displayed and when it is displayed (for example, the visibility of the advance warning image decreasing due to the display of the warning image). In other words, because the advance warning image is visible, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the gaming facility. C) The advance warning image is temporarily hidden before the warning image is displayed, and after the display of the warning image has ended, the advance warning image is displayed (the images are displayed in the order of advance warning image → warning image → advance warning image). In other words, the advance warning image and the warning image are not displayed simultaneously.

When configured in this way, the advance warning image is not displayed when the warning image is displayed, so the attention to the warning image can be increased. In addition, the advance warning image is displayed after the display of the warning image has ended, so trouble between the player and the gaming facility can be prevented in advance.

<<<<Figure 76 (2)>>> This is an example of a case where the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state" and a pre-notification image is displayed when a performance during game standby (also called a demo performance) is being executed.

Unlike Figure 75 (2), the advance notification image is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32.

In addition, this advance notification image will continue to be displayed even if the images displayed as demo effects are switched sequentially.

In this way, by providing advance warning during the demo performance until the stop condition is met, players who are thinking of playing can be notified that the gaming machine is about to enter a stop processing (stop state). Therefore, compared to when the stop processing (stop state) occurs suddenly, it is possible to prevent trouble between players and the gaming facility.

The notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state", and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" are configured to be the same image (image of the same size). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the memory area for storing images compared to when multiple advance notification images are provided.

On the other hand, the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and in the demo performance may be configured to be different images (images of different sizes or images using different colors).

For example, the notification state related to the limit can be an "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) can be an image that is larger (the display area of the advance notification image is larger) than the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance, in which the notification state related to the limit is an "activation notification state."

By configuring it in this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state", and the difference in the number of game media until the limit condition is reached can be emphasized during play (in this example, during the AT state). In other words, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player how much time is left until the limit is reached during play.

In addition, for example, the notification state related to the limit can be an "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) can be an image that is smaller (the display area of the advance notification image is smaller) than the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance, in which the notification state related to the limit is an "activation notification state."

By configuring it in this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state," and the demo presentation can emphasize the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit condition is reached. In other words, it is possible to clearly inform players who are thinking about playing that the gaming machine is about to enter a limit process (limit state).

In addition, as an example where the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the pre-notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) is different from the pre-notification image displayed in the demo performance when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state", an example where the pre-notification images are different in size has been given, but this is not limited to the size of the pre-notification image.

For example, the advance warning image may be configured to use different colors, to have a different shape, to display different notations (messages) on the advance warning image, or to use different fonts for the notations (messages) on the advance warning image.

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image should be different between the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the advance notification image displayed in the demo performance when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state."

Note that, although we have described a case where a pre-notification image is displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and a demo performance is being performed, it is also possible not to display the pre-notification image when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and a demo performance is being performed.

In this case, when the player places a bet, the demo presentation is switched to the game screen, and when the game screen is displayed, a pre-notification image is displayed (see FIG. 76 (1)). In other words, the player is notified that the stopping condition has been met before he or she starts playing (before he or she places a specified number of bets and operates the start switch), which can prevent any trouble between the player and the gaming establishment.

<<<<Fig. 76 (3)>>> This is an example of a menu image that is displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notice state" and the sub-switch 20 is operated during game standby (also called "menu mode").

Unlike Figure 75 (3), the advance notification image is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32.

In this way, by performing advance notification in the menu mode until the stop condition is met, a player who is about to play on a gaming machine that has been left in the menu mode can be notified that the gaming machine is about to enter a stop processing (stop state). Therefore, compared to a case where the stop processing (stop state) occurs suddenly, it is possible to prevent trouble between the player and the gaming facility.

The notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state", and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the advance notification image displayed in the menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" are configured to be the same image (image of the same size). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the memory area in which the images are stored, compared to when multiple advance notification images are provided.

On the other hand, the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and during play (in this example, during the AT state) and the pre-notification image displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and in the menu mode may be configured to be different images (images of different sizes or images using different colors).

For example, the notification state related to the limit can be an "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) can be an image that is larger (the display area of the advance notification image is larger) than the advance notification image displayed in menu mode, in which the notification state related to the limit is an "activation notification state."

By configuring it in this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state", and the difference in the number of game media until the limit condition is reached can be emphasized during play (in this example, during the AT state). In other words, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player how much time is left until the limit is reached during play.

Also, for example, the notification state related to the limit can be an "activation notification state," and the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) can be an image that is smaller (the display area of the advance notification image is smaller) than the advance notification image displayed in menu mode, in which the notification state related to the limit is an "activation notification state."

By configuring it in this way, the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notice state," and the menu mode can emphasize the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit condition is reached. In other words, it is possible to clearly inform a player who is thinking about playing that the gaming machine is about to enter a limit process (limit state).

In addition, as an example where the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the pre-notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) is different from the pre-notification image displayed in the menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state", an example where the sizes of the pre-notification images are different has been given, but this is not limited to the size of the pre-notification image.

For example, the advance warning image may be configured to use different colors, to have a different shape, to display different notations (messages) on the advance warning image, or to use different fonts for the notations (messages) on the advance warning image.

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance notification image should be different between the advance notification image displayed during play (in this example, during the AT state) when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state" and the advance notification image displayed in the menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state."

In addition, when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notice state" and the menu mode is selected, if a pre-warning image is displayed, the pre-warning image is configured so as not to overlap with the display of each item selectable in the menu mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in visibility of the display of each item selectable in the menu mode due to the display of the pre-warning image.

The display of the advance notification image may reduce the visibility of the images of some of the items that can be selected in the menu mode. Even in this case, the items may be configured to be identifiable to the player, even if the visibility is reduced. By configuring in this way, each item can be selected by the player.

Note that, although we have described a case where the advance warning image is displayed when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation advance warning state" and the mode is menu mode, it is also possible not to display the advance warning image when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation advance warning state" and the mode is menu mode.

<<Notification state related to limit: Activation notification state>> Figure 77 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when the notification state related to limit is the "activation notification state". Below, the presentation (images) displayed on the display device 32 will be explained in the order of Figure 77 (1), Figure 77 (2), Figure 77 (3), Figure 77 (4), Figure 77 (5), and Figure 77 (6). Note that explanations of parts that overlap with the explanations of Figures 75 and 76 will be omitted, and only the characteristic configuration will be explained.

The timing at which the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notification state is, for example, after the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (for example, processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be granted) has ended.

Here, "processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be awarded" refers to processing that updates the information displayed on the payout number display (also called the number of coins acquired display), processing that updates the information displayed on the credit number display, processing that updates the information displayed on a display that can display the total score (also called the total score display), and processing that pays out game media from a hopper.

Note that "the process of updating the information displayed on the display" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11" when dispensing (awarding) 11 gaming media. For example, the time required to update the value to "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Also, the time required for the process of dispensing one gaming medium from the hopper is designed to be an average of 50 ms.

When designed in this way, the notification state related to the limit is configured to become the activated notification state, for example, within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing gaming media from the hopper is completed. In other words, it is preferable that the image indicating that the limit has been reached ("Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" in Figure 77) is configured to be displayed within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing gaming media from the hopper is completed.

Note that 50 ms is an example and is not limited to 50 ms. In other words, it is sufficient that the following formula is satisfied: Time required to award 1 gaming medium > Time from completion of awarding of gaming medium to displaying an image indicating that the award is over

By configuring it in this way, an image indicating that the game is over is displayed immediately after the game media is completely dispensed, so the player can recognize that the game media dispensing for that game has ended. The player can also recognize that the game is over.

Note that, although the timing when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 and the notification state related to the limit becomes the activated notification state has been described as the timing after the end of the granting of game media for the game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit becomes 19,000 (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media granted), it may also be the timing before the end of the granting of game media for the game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media paid out).

For example, the timing at which the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notification state may be before the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, or it may be at the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, or it may be midway through the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000.

In addition, in a gaming machine that performs automatic settlement (of the number of credits) after the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000, the notification state related to the limit may become an activated notification state after the automatic settlement is completed, or the notification state may become an activated notification state before the automatic settlement starts, or the notification state related to the limit may become an activated notification state when the automatic settlement starts, or the notification state related to the limit may become an activated notification state while the automatic settlement is starting.

<<<<Fig. 77 (1)>>> This is an example of a presentation when the notification state related to a limit is an "operation notification state". This example of a presentation is an example of a case where a notification that a limit has been reached is displayed on the display device 32 in a gaming machine that does not use physical medals as a gaming medium (also called a medalless gaming machine).

Here, we will provide a brief explanation of medalless gaming machines.

A medalless gaming machine is a gaming machine that does not use physical medals as a gaming medium, but allows players to play using electronic medals as a gaming medium.

The medal-less gaming machine can communicate bidirectionally with a rental device (rental unit) that can rent out gaming media.

For example, by operating a lending switch provided on the lending device once, a predetermined number of gaming media (e.g., 50) can be sent to the medalless gaming machine, and the medalless gaming machine can store the number of gaming media received. In addition, games (betting, etc.) can be executed using the stored gaming media.

Furthermore, by operating (pressing and holding) a counting switch provided on the medalless gaming machine, the medalless gaming machine can transmit a predetermined number (50) of gaming media stored therein to the lending device at predetermined intervals (e.g., every 300 ms). The lending device then stores the received gaming media, and by operating a return button provided on the lending device, it can eject a card that stores the number of gaming media.

As described above, in a medal-less gaming machine, the number of gaming media stored in the medal-less gaming machine can be transmitted to the rental unit by operating the counting switch. Then, by ejecting the card on which the number of gaming media is stored, it can be exchanged for a prize at the gaming establishment.

Please note that unless otherwise specified, the gaming machines in this specification can also be applied to medal-less gaming machines.

Let's return to the explanation in Figure 77 (1).

The information "Complete function in operation" and "Please call an attendant" are displayed near the center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 issues a notification that indicates that play is at its limit, and a notification that indicates that a staff member (store attendant) should be called. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that play is at its limit. The player can also recognize that a store attendant needs to be called. Note that when a notification is being issued that indicates that play is at its limit, the advance notification image is not displayed.

In addition, among the images displayed on the display device 32, the image corresponding to "Complete function in operation" in FIG. 77 (1) may be referred to as an operation notification image, a complete function operation notification image, or a stop state notification image.

Furthermore, among the images displayed on the display device 32, the entire image of FIG. 77 (1) may be referred to as an operation notification image, a complete function operation notification image, or a hit-stop state notification image.

In addition, the message "Please count" is displayed at the top center of the display device 32.

That is, the display device 32 notifies the player to operate the counting switch. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize that he needs to operate the counting switch to transmit the gaming media (the number of gaming media) stored in the gaming machine to the rental device.

In addition, after the gaming media (number of gaming media) stored in the gaming machine reaches 0, the notification to the player to operate the counting switch may be terminated. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the gaming media (number of gaming media) stored in the gaming machine has reached 0 (transmission to the lending device has finished) by operating the counting switch.

In addition, the information "Press PUSH to display the menu screen" is displayed at the bottom of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player that the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) is active. In addition, when the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20), a notification is issued indicating that the mode will change to menu mode. By configuring it in this way, the player can be made aware that although the game is at a standstill, it is possible to change to menu mode by operating the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) and to obtain a two-dimensional code containing the game history, etc.

In addition, when a notification is displayed on the display device 32 indicating that the game is over, information about the game (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is not displayed on the display device 32 (it cannot be seen by the player).

For example, the display device 32 is configured to display a single-color (e.g., black) image with notifications indicating that play has stopped, notifications indicating that an attendant (store attendant) should be called, notifications indicating that the player should operate the counting switch, and notifications indicating that the PUSH button (also called the sub-switch 20 or sub-button) is active.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to emphasize and notify the user that the game has reached a dead end.

In addition, as examples of the notification state related to the end of a game being an "operation notification state", notifications indicating that the game is in a limit state, notifications indicating that an attendant (store clerk) should be called, notifications indicating that the player should operate the counting switch, and notifications indicating that the PUSH button (also called the sub-switch 20 or sub-button) is active have been explained, but the present invention is not limited to these notifications.

For example, it is possible to provide some notifications, such as a notification that the game is over, a notification that a staff member (store attendant) should be called, and a notification that the player should operate the counting switch, but not a notification that the player can press the PUSH button (sub-switch 20, also called the sub-button).

In addition, when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state", a notification different from the notifications described above may be made.

<<<<Fig. 77 (2)>>> This is an example of a presentation when the notification state related to a limit is the "operation notification state". This presentation example is an example of a case where a notification that a limit has been reached is displayed on the display device 32 on a gaming machine that uses physical medals as the gaming medium and does not automatically settle the number of credits after a limit condition is met.

Note that we will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 77 (1) and will explain only the distinctive parts.

Unlike Figure 77 (1), the message "Please settle your bill" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player to operate the settlement switch. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that he or she needs to operate the settlement switch to settle the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine.

In addition, after the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine becomes 0, the notification to the player to operate the settlement switch may be terminated. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine has become 0 by operating the settlement switch.

<<<<Fig. 77 (3)>>> This is an example of a presentation when the notification state related to a limit is the "operation notification state". This presentation example is for a gaming machine that uses physical medals as the gaming medium, and is an example of a case where a notification that a limit has been reached is displayed on the display device 32 in a gaming machine in which the number of credits is automatically settled after a limit condition is met.

Note that we will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 77 (1) and will explain only the distinctive parts.

Unlike Figure 77 (1), the information "Automatic settlement in progress" is displayed in the upper center of the display device 32.

In other words, the display device 32 notifies the player that the number of credits is being settled (notification that automatic settlement is being performed). By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the number of credits is being settled even if he or she has not operated the settlement switch.

In addition, after the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine becomes 0 (after automatic settlement is completed), the notification to the player that the number of credits is being settled (notification that automatic settlement is being performed) may be terminated. For example, in a gaming machine that displays the information "automatic settlement in progress" when automatic settlement is being performed, the information "automatic settlement in progress" is not displayed after automatic settlement is completed. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize that the gaming medium (number of credits) stored in the gaming machine has become 0 due to automatic settlement.

<<<<Fig. 77 (4)>>> This is an example of a presentation in which the notification state related to the end of the game is the "operation notification state". This presentation example is an example of a case where the end of the game condition is met during play (in this example, during the AT state), and the display device 32 notifies the user that the end of the game has been reached.

We will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 76 (1), Figure 77 (1) and Figure 77 (2) and will explain only the distinctive parts.

First, we will explain the distinctive features compared to Figure 76 (1).

Figure 76 (1) displays an image (pre-alert image) stating "100 frames remaining until the complete function is activated," while Figure 77 (4) displays an image (alert image) stating "Complete function activated, please call an attendant."

In other words, while FIG. 76(1) notifies the player of the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the end of the game, FIG. 77(4) notifies the player that the game is at its end. Also, FIG. 76(1) does not notify the player about calling a staff member (store attendant).

It is preferable that the image (activation notification image) of FIG. 77(4) "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" be displayed more emphatically than the image (pre-notification image) of FIG. 76(1) "100 frames remaining until complete function is activated."

For example, the activation notification image may be emphasized by making the display area of the display device 32 larger than the display area of the display device 32 occupied by the advance notification image.

In this way, by highlighting the operation notification image more than the advance notification image, the player can be properly notified that the game has reached a dead end (the next game cannot be played).

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance warning image is less than the degree of emphasis of the operation warning image, so that the advance warning image does not interfere with the progress of the game.

Note that, although we have given an example of emphasizing the operation notification image more than the advance notification image by changing the size of the area it occupies in the display area, this is not limiting.

For example, the thickness of the text in the advance warning image and the thickness of the text in the operation notification image may be different. Also, the color of the text in the advance warning image and the color of the text in the operation notification image may be different.

The degree of emphasis of the advance notification image and the operation notification image may be approximately the same (approximately the same includes the same).

In addition, while Fig. 76 (1) does not display the image "Press PUSH to display the menu screen," Fig. 77 (4) displays the image "Press PUSH to display the menu screen."

In other words, FIG. 76 (1) does not notify that the operation of the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) will transition to the menu mode, but FIG. 77 (4) does not notify that the operation of the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) will transition to the menu mode.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to properly notify the player that a menu image can be displayed when the game is at its limit.

Next, we will explain the distinctive features in comparison with Figure 77 (1) or Figure 77 (2).

The difference between Figure 77(1) and Figure 77(2) is that information related to the game (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is not displayed on the display device 32 (it cannot be seen by the player), whereas Figure 77(4) is that information related to the game (TOTAL, G, PAYOUT, CREDIT, etc.) is displayed on the display device 32 (it can be seen by the player).

In other words, Figure 77 (4) is configured to display both the effect (image) executed in a game that has reached a stop state, and the image (activation notification image) that says "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant."

By configuring it in this way, the operation notification image is displayed in a situation where the specified information (TOTAL or G) when the play is stopped is displayed, so that the player can, for example, use the camera function of a mobile device owned by the player to take a commemorative image containing the specified information when the play is stopped. <<<Figure 77 (5)>>> This is an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the stop is an "operation notification state". This example of a presentation is another example of a case where the display device 32 notifies the player that the play is stopped when the stop condition is met during play (in this example, during the AT state).

In this example, the same demo performance as that described in FIG. 75(2) is performed, but a demo performance different from that in FIG. 75(2) may also be performed.

We will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 75 (2) and Figure 76 (2) and will explain only the distinctive parts.

Figures 75 (2) and 76 (2) are demo effects that are executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed without a new bet being made from a certain point after the end of a game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process), while Figure 77 (5) is a demo effect that is executed when a stop-play condition is met. In other words, it is a demo effect that is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed from a certain point after the end of a game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process).

Note that FIG. 77 (5) has been described as a demo effect that is executed when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since a certain timing after the end of a game (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process), but the demo effect may also be executed when the notification state related to the game ending becomes an activated notification state. In other words, the demo effect may be executed from a certain timing (before a predetermined time has elapsed) after the game ending (after all reels have stopped or after a payout process) of a game that satisfies the game ending condition.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified that they will not be able to play the next game when the game screen switches to the demo presentation.

In Fig. 76 (2), an image (pre-alert image) of "100 frames remaining until the complete function is activated" is displayed, whereas in Fig. 77 (5), an image (alert image) of "Complete function activated, please call an attendant" is displayed.

That is, Fig. 76(2) informs the player of the difference in the number of game media until the limit is reached, whereas Fig. 77(5) informs the player that the limit is reached. Also, Fig. 76(2) does not inform the player of the need to call a staff member (store attendant).

It is preferable that the image (activation notification image) of FIG. 77(5) "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" be displayed more emphatically than the image (pre-notification image) of FIG. 76(2) "100 frames remaining until complete function is activated."

For example, the activation notification image may be emphasized by making the display area of the display device 32 larger than the display area of the display device 32 occupied by the advance notification image.

In this way, by highlighting the operation notification image more than the advance notification image, the player can be properly notified that the game has reached a dead end (the next game cannot be played).

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance warning image is less than the degree of emphasis of the operation warning image, so that the advance warning image does not interfere with the demonstration performance as much as possible.

Note that, although we have given an example of emphasizing the operation notification image more than the advance notification image by changing the size of the area it occupies in the display area, this is not limiting.

For example, the thickness of the text in the advance warning image and the thickness of the text in the operation notification image may be different. Also, the color of the text in the advance warning image and the color of the text in the operation notification image may be different.

The degree of emphasis of the advance notification image and the operation notification image may be approximately the same (approximately the same includes the same).

Note that while FIG. 77 (5) describes a demo effect that is executed when the stop condition is met, the demo effect may be configured not to be executed when the stop condition is met.

<<<<Fig. 77 (6)>>> This is an example of a presentation when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state". This example of a presentation is an example of what happens when the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) and transitions to menu mode after meeting the limit conditions.

In other words, this is an example of a situation in which the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20) to switch to the menu mode while any of the images in Figure 77 (1), Figure 77 (2), Figure 77 (3), Figure 77 (4), or Figure 77 (5) is being displayed.

We will omit the explanation of the points common to Figure 75 (3) and Figure 76 (3) and will explain the distinctive parts.

In Fig. 76 (3), an image (pre-alert image) of "100 frames remaining until the complete function is activated" is displayed, whereas in Fig. 77 (6), an image (alert image) of "Complete function activated, please call an attendant" is displayed.

In other words, while FIG. 76(3) notifies the player of the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the end of the game, FIG. 77(6) notifies the player that the game is at its end. Also, FIG. 76(3) does not notify the player about calling a staff member (store attendant).

It is preferable that the image (activation notification image) of FIG. 77(6) "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant" be displayed more emphatically than the image (pre-notification image) of FIG. 76(3) "100 frames remaining until complete function is activated."

For example, the activation notification image may be emphasized by making the display area of the display device 32 larger than the display area of the display device 32 occupied by the advance notification image.

In this way, by highlighting the operation notification image more than the advance notification image, the player can be properly notified that the game has reached a dead end (the next game cannot be played).

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the advance warning image is less than the degree of emphasis of the operation warning image, so that the advance warning image does not interfere as much as possible with the visibility of the selection items instructed in the menu image.

Note that, although we have given an example of emphasizing the operation notification image more than the advance notification image by changing the size of the area it occupies in the display area, this is not limiting.

For example, the thickness of the text in the advance warning image and the thickness of the text in the operation notification image may be different. Also, the color of the text in the advance warning image and the color of the text in the operation notification image may be different.

The degree of emphasis of the advance notification image and the operation notification image may be approximately the same (approximately the same includes the same).

Furthermore, the display of the operation notification image may reduce the visibility of the images of some of the items that can be selected in the menu mode. Even in this case, although visibility will be reduced, the items need only be configured to be identifiable by the player. By configuring in this way, each item can be selected by the player.

In addition, when the notification state related to the cutoff is the "operation notification state" and the menu mode is selected, the operation notification image may be hidden.

In addition, the items selectable on the menu screen in FIG. 77(6) are the same as the items selectable on the menu screens in FIG. 75(3) and FIG. 76(3), but they may be different.

For example, when the notification state related to the cutoff is the "operation notification state" and the mode is the menu mode, the "QR display at end" item can be selected, but the "volume adjustment" item cannot be selected (or the "volume adjustment" item may not be displayed).

By configuring it in this way, after the limit is reached, only the minimum number of items can be selected (the number of selectable items is reduced), so items that are unnecessary for the player will not be selected.

Also, if the push button is operated when the notification state related to the play limit is the "operation notification state", the two-dimensional code containing the play history may be displayed without transitioning to the menu mode (without displaying FIG. 77 (6)). In other words, the two-dimensional code containing the play history may be displayed without selecting the "QR display at end" item.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of steps required to display information necessary for the player after the game has reached a limit.

When the notification state related to the cutoff is the "normal state", "activation notice state", or "activation notification state", the menu mode can be ended by satisfying a certain condition (for example, by selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)).

However, the control process of the sub-control means may be configured to be different when the menu mode is ended when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state" from when the menu mode is ended when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state" or the "operation notice state". Below, the difference in the control process of the sub-control means (difference when ending the menu mode) is explained with an example.

(Example 1) Differences in conditions for exiting the menu mode When the notification state for the limit is "normal state" or "activation notice state", the menu mode can also be exited by betting (betting by operating the 1 bet button, betting by operating the MAX bet button, or betting by inserting a coin into the slot).

For example, in menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is "normal state" or "activation notification state", if the number of bets is 0 and the number of credits is 50, and the 1 bet button or the MAX bet button is operated, or if a medal is inserted from the slot, the menu mode can be ended. Note that when the menu mode is ended under these conditions, the notification state related to the limit does not change. For example, when the notification state related to the limit is "activation notification state", the notification state related to the limit after the menu mode is ended will be "activation notification state".

On the other hand, if the menu mode is to be ended when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state", the menu mode cannot be ended by betting processing (betting processing by operating the 1 bet button, betting processing by operating the MAX bet button, or betting processing by inserting medals through the slot). Specifically, when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state", the betting processing is controlled not to be executed, so the menu mode cannot be ended.

For example, if the menu mode is in the "operation notification state" and the number of bets is 0 and the number of credits is 50, if the 1 bet button or the MAX bet button is operated, or if a medal is inserted through the slot, the menu mode cannot be exited.

(Example 2) Differences in presentation after exiting menu mode In principle, a demo screen is displayed after exiting menu mode when the notification state related to the end of play is "normal state" or "activation notice state." However, if the menu mode is entered while a specific presentation is being executed (for example, during a game in the middle of a presentation that spans multiple games (continuous presentation)) or if the menu mode is entered during a specific game state (for example, during AT), the demo screen does not have to be displayed after exiting menu mode. For example, after exiting menu mode, a screen (image) related to the presentation that was being executed before entering menu mode may be displayed.

In other words, when the notification state related to the limit is the "normal state" or the "activation notification state", a specific presentation (such as a presentation that is completed in one play) is executed, then the menu mode is entered, and after that, a specific condition is met (such as selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), and the menu mode is ended, and a demo screen is displayed. Note that the notification state related to the limit does not change even after the menu mode is ended. For example, when the notification state related to the limit is the "activation notification state", the notification state related to the limit after the menu mode is ended is the "activation notification state".

On the other hand, after exiting the menu mode when the notification state related to the limit is the "operation notification state", a screen (image) related to the performance that was being performed when the mode was switched to the menu mode is displayed.

For example, when the image in FIG. 77(2) is displayed, the device transitions to menu mode, and then, after a predetermined condition is met (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), the device ends the menu mode and displays the image in FIG. 77(2).

Similarly, for example, when the image in FIG. 77(4) is displayed, the device transitions to menu mode, and then, after a predetermined condition is met (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), the device ends the menu mode and displays the image in FIG. 77(4).

However, it may also be configured so that a demo image is displayed after the menu mode is terminated. In that case, for example, when the image in FIG. 77(2) is displayed, the menu mode may be entered, and then after a predetermined condition is met (for example, selecting the "Exit menu mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), the menu mode may be terminated and the image in FIG. 77(5) may be displayed.

Similarly, for example, when the image in FIG. 77(4) is displayed, the menu mode may be entered, and then, after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, selecting the "Exit Menu Mode" item (not shown) and operating a specific switch (PUSH button)), the menu mode may be ended, and the image in FIG. 77(5) may be displayed.

Note that Figure 77 (6) has been described as an image displayed in the menu mode that is executed when the stop condition is met, but the system may be configured so that when the stop condition is met, the menu mode is not entered even if the player operates the PUSH button (sub-switch 20).

<Restoring from power outage in activation warning state> When the notification state related to the shutdown is the activation warning state, the system is configured to be able to display a pre-warning image, as shown in FIG. 76. In this way, when the power-off process (also called power-off process) is performed while the pre-warning image is being displayed, if the power is then turned on without changing the settings (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the pre-warning image is not displayed.

Specifically, if the power-off process is performed when the notification state related to the limit is in the activation notice state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the sub-control means will return the notification state related to the limit to the normal state without receiving a command related to the limit difference counter from the main control means.

For example, if a power-off process is performed when the game state controlled by the main control means is a specified game state (e.g., AT state), and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, game play can be resumed from the specified game state (e.g., AT state). However, the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the initial value (the difference in the game media related to the stop is 0).

For example, if the power is turned off while the image in Figure 76 (1) is being displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the message "100 sheets remaining until the complete function is activated" will not be displayed. At this time, other information (TOTAL, G, etc.) is configured to be displayed in the same way as before the power was turned off.

Similarly, if the power is turned off while the image in Figure 76 (2) or the image in Figure 76 (3) is being displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the message "100 sheets remaining until the complete function is activated" will not be displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the advance warning image can be hidden immediately, compared to when the advance warning image is hidden based on receiving a command including the value of the stop difference counter (the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop) after the power is restored. This prevents the player from misunderstanding that the difference between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop and the difference in the number of gaming media until the stop state is small due to the image displayed after the power is restored.

Note that when the game state controlled by the main control means is a specified game state (for example, AT state), power-off processing is performed, and then when power is turned on with a setting change (power switch turned on with the setting key switch on), the game state becomes a specific one (for example, normal section and normal state). Also, the value stored in the play-stop difference counter becomes the initial value (the difference number of game media related to the play-stop is 0).

Even in this case, after the power is restored, the sub-control means is configured to set the notification state related to the cutoff to the normal state and not display the advance notification image.

<Settings confirmation in the activation notice state> When the notification state related to the limit is the activation notice state, the advance notification image can be displayed as shown in FIG. 76. In this way, when the advance notification image is displayed and in a specific situation where the number of bets is 0 (a situation where bets can be accepted), if the transition condition for the setting confirmation mode is met (for example, turning on the setting key switch when the front door is open), the mode is configured to be able to transition to the setting confirmation mode.

If the notification state related to the cutoff is the activation notice state and the device transitions to the setting confirmation mode, the device will be notified that it is in the setting confirmation mode. For example, an image indicating that the device is in the setting confirmation mode will be displayed, or a sound indicating that the device is in the setting confirmation mode will be output. Note that it may also be possible to display a pre-notification image during the setting confirmation mode.

First, an example of an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is the display of an image that reads "Checking settings." An example of an audio notification indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is the audio that reads "Checking settings" being output from a speaker.

In other words, if the notification state related to the limit is the activation notice state and the setting confirmation mode is entered, both an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress and a pre-notification image may be displayed. By configuring it in this way, even during setting confirmation, it is possible to know that there is only a small difference in the number of gaming media until the limit state is reached. In other words, the gaming store staff can know that the limit state will be reached soon.

At this time, the pre-alert image displayed during the setting confirmation mode may be the same as the pre-alert image displayed before switching to the setting confirmation mode. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide multiple types of pre-alert images, so the ROM capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced. Also, since there is no process for switching pre-alert images, the program capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced.

However, the advance notification image may be displayed in a different manner than before the transition to the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to immediately distinguish between playing and setting confirmation by checking the advance notification image.

Note that although an example of displaying a pre-notification image during the setting confirmation mode has been described, it is not necessary to display a pre-notification image during the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, the gaming store staff can concentrate on checking the setting values.

In addition, even if the advance warning image is displayed during the setting confirmation mode, or even if the advance warning image is not displayed during the setting confirmation mode, the advance warning image is configured to be displayed when the front door is closed after the setting confirmation mode termination condition (for example, turning off the setting key switch) is met, the door open error is cleared, and the game screen is displayed. In other words, the difference in the number of game media related to the stop does not change before and after switching to the setting confirmation mode (the value stored in the stop difference counter is maintained).

<Restoring from power outage in operation notification state> When the notification state related to the stop is the operation notification state, the operation notification image is configured to be displayed as shown in FIG. 77. In this way, when the power outage process (also called power outage process) is performed while the operation notification image is displayed, if the power is then turned on without changing the settings (power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the operation notification image is configured to continue.

Specifically, if a power-off process is performed when the notification state related to the limit is the operation notification state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the notification state related to the limit will become the operation notification state without receiving a command related to the limit difference counter from the main control means.

When the notification state related to the stop is the operation notification state, the main control means is executing the stop processing (is in the stop state). If a power-off process is performed while the main control means is in the stop state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings (power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the main control means will enter the stop state. However, the value stored in the stop difference counter will be the initial value (the difference number of game media related to the stop is 0).

For example, if the power is turned off while the image in Fig. 77(1) is displayed, and then the power is turned on without changing any settings, the image in Fig. 77(1) will be displayed. This is true not only for Fig. 77(1), but also for Fig. 77(2), Fig. 77(3), Fig. 77(4), Fig. 77(5), and Fig. 77(6).

When the notification state related to the stop is the operation notification state, the main control means is executing the stop processing (the stop state is reached). If a power-off process is performed when the main control means is in the stop state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings (the power switch is turned on with the setting key switch off), the game enters a specific gaming state (for example, the normal section and normal state). Also, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the initial value (the difference number of game media related to the stop is 0).

By configuring it in this way, although the hit difference counter stores an initial value, it is possible to notify the player of appropriate information (information indicating that the hit state is reached) corresponding to the state (the hit state) controlled by the main control state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being misled (into thinking that the hit state is no longer reached) by the image displayed after the power is restored.

When the game state controlled by the main control means is in a stop state, the power is turned off and then, if the power is turned on with a setting change (the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is on), the game moves to a setting change mode, and after the end conditions of the setting change mode are met, the game enters a specific game state (for example, the normal section and normal state). Also, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the initial value (the difference number of game media related to the stop is 0).

In this case, after the power is restored (during the setting change mode), the sub-control means is configured to set the notification state related to the limit to the normal state, and not to notify information indicating that the limit has been reached. Similarly, after the setting change mode ends (before the first game starts), the notification state related to the limit is also configured to set the notification state related to the limit to the normal state, and not to notify information indicating that the limit has been reached.

Although it has been stated that information indicating that play has been stopped is not announced after power is restored (during setting change mode), information indicating that play has been stopped may be announced after power is restored (during setting change mode). In this case, after the setting change mode ends (before the first game begins), the notification state regarding the stop is set to the normal state, and information indicating that play has been stopped is not announced.

<Setting confirmation in operation notification state> When the notification state related to the limit is an operation notification state (limit state), an operation notification image can be displayed as shown in FIG. 77. In this way, in a specific situation in which the operation notification image is displayed (a situation in which no bets are being accepted), if the transition condition for the setting confirmation mode is met (for example, turning on the setting key switch when the front door is open), the setting confirmation mode can be transitioned to.

If the notification state related to the cutoff is an operation notification state and the mode transitions to the setting confirmation mode, a notification is issued that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode. For example, an image indicating that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode is displayed, or a sound indicating that the mode is in the setting confirmation mode is output. Note that it may also be possible to display an operation notification image during the setting confirmation mode.

First, an example of an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is the display of an image that says "Checking settings." An example of an audio notification indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is the audio that says "Checking settings" being output from a speaker.

In other words, if the notification state related to the limit is an activation notification state and the mode transitions to the setting confirmation mode, both an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress and an activation notification image may be displayed. By configuring in this way, the arcade staff can know that the limit has been reached even during setting confirmation. In addition, because it is possible to check the setting value when the limit has been reached, it is possible to check whether any fraud has been committed (whether the setting value is different from the setting value set by the arcade), etc.

At this time, the activation notification image displayed during the setting confirmation mode may be the same as the activation notification image displayed before switching to the setting confirmation mode. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide multiple types of activation notification images, so the ROM capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced. In addition, since there is no process for switching activation notification images, the program capacity of the sub-control means can be reduced.

However, the operation notification image may be displayed in a different manner than before the transition to the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to immediately distinguish between the stopped state and the setting confirmation state by checking the operation notification image.

Note that, although an example has been described in which an operation notification image is displayed during the setting confirmation mode, it is not necessary to display the operation notification image during the setting confirmation mode. By configuring it in this way, the gaming store staff can concentrate on checking the setting values.

In addition, even if the operation notification image is displayed during the setting check mode, or even if the operation notification image is not displayed during the setting check mode, the operation notification image is configured to be displayed after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared after the setting check mode termination condition (for example, turning off the setting key switch) is met.

Also, an example has been described in which the setting confirmation mode can be entered when the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode (for example, turning on the setting key switch when the front door is open) are met in a specific situation in which the operation notification image is displayed (a situation in which a bet is not being accepted), but the setting confirmation mode may also be configured not to be entered even if the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode (for example, turning on the setting key switch when the front door is open) are met in a specific situation in which the operation notification image is displayed (a situation in which a bet is not being accepted).

By configuring it in this way, there is no need to provide special processing to enable transition to setting confirmation mode even in a stalled state, so the program capacity of the main control means can be reduced.

<Transition of notification state related to limit> Next, using FIG. 78, we will explain the transition of notification state related to limit in this embodiment.

The game zones (1) to (7) will be described as advantageous zones. In addition, (1) to (7) will be described as advantageous game states (e.g., AT states) for the player.

However, the game zones (1) to (7) are not limited to advantageous zones. The game zones (1) to (7) may be normal zones, or a part of (1) to (7) may be normal zones and another part may be advantageous zones. In addition, the game zones may be gaming machines that do not have normal zones and advantageous zones (so-called normal machines).

Let's return to the explanation in Figure 78.

As the game progresses, the status changes in the following order: (1) → (2) → (3) → (4) → (5) → (6) → (7). In other words, the horizontal axis corresponds to the number of games played after the power is turned on.

The vertical axis corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit (for example, the value stored in the limit difference counter).

The dotted line indicates that the notification status regarding the cutoff is normal.

The lined portion (non-dotted portion) indicates that the notification state related to the cutoff is the activation notice state.

The first difference number corresponds to the difference number of gaming media related to the limit at which the display of the advance warning image is started. For example, the first difference number corresponds to a value such as 18,900. Note that 18,900 is an example and is not limited to 18,900. For example, the first difference number may be a numerical value such as 18,500. Furthermore, if the timing for starting the process to output the test signal related to the limit is when the difference number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 18,500, the timing for starting the display of the advance warning image may also be when the difference number (first difference number) of gaming media related to the limit also exceeds 18,500.

In other words, the difference number of gaming media related to the limit that will start the process to output the test signal related to the limit and the difference number of gaming media related to the limit that will start the display of the advance warning image (first difference number) may be the same value. By configuring it in this way, the advance warning image is displayed when the process to output the test signal related to the limit is started, so that during the development stage of the gaming machine, it can be confirmed whether the difference number of gaming media related to the limit managed by the main control means is accurately transmitted to the sub-control means.

The second difference number corresponds to the difference number of the gaming media related to the cutoff point at which the display of the advance notification image ends. For example, if the first difference number is 18,900, the second difference number corresponds to a value such as 18,850. Note that 18,850 is an example and is not limited to 18,850. For example, if the first difference number is 18,500, the second difference number may be a value such as 18,450.

<<Figure 78 (1)>> In the AT state, the difference number of game media related to the limit increases as the game progresses, and this is the period until it becomes the second difference number (less than the second difference number). During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During play during the period shown in FIG. 78(1), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play during the period shown in FIG. 78(1) are as explained in FIG. 75(1).

During the game standby period (demo screen) in the period of FIG. 78(1), for example, an image such as that in FIG. 75(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo presentation during the period of FIG. 78(1) are as explained in FIG. 75(2).

In the menu mode during the period of FIG. 78(1), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period of FIG. 78(1) are as explained in FIG. 75(3).

<<Figure 78 (2)>> In the AT state, the difference number of the gaming media related to the limit increases as the game progresses, and this is the period from the second difference number to the first difference number (greater than or equal to the second difference number and less than the first difference number). During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

In a game played during the period shown in FIG. 78(2), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed in a game played during the period shown in FIG. 77(1) are as explained in FIG. 75(1).

During the game standby period (demo screen) in the period of FIG. 78(2), for example, an image such as that in FIG. 75(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo presentation during the period of FIG. 78(2) are as explained in FIG. 75(2).

In the menu mode during the period of FIG. 78(2), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period of FIG. 78(2) are as explained in FIG. 75(3).

<<Figure 78 (3)>> This is the period during which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference as the game progresses due to the AT state, and then the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit again becomes the first difference. During this period, the notification state related to the limit is the activation notice state. Therefore, the advance notification image is displayed on the display device 32.

For example, the timing when the difference in the gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference and the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notice state is the timing after the granting of gaming media for the game in which the difference in the gaming media related to the limit becomes the first difference (the processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out) is completed.

Here, "processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out" refers to processing to update the information displayed on the payout number display (also called the number of coins acquired display), processing to update the information displayed on the credit number display, processing to update the information displayed on the display capable of showing the total score (also called the total score display), and processing to pay out gaming media from the hopper.

Note that "the process of updating the information displayed on the display" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11" when dispensing (awarding) 11 gaming media. For example, the time required to update the value to "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Also, the time required for the process of dispensing one gaming medium from the hopper is designed to be an average of 50 ms.

When designed in this way, the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notice state, for example, within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing the gaming media from the hopper is completed. In other words, the advance notification image is configured to be displayed within 50 ms after the process of updating the information displayed on the display is completed, or after the process of dispensing the gaming media from the hopper is completed.

Note that 50 ms is an example and is not limited to 50 ms. In other words, it is sufficient that the following formula is satisfied: Time required to award 1 gaming medium > Time from completion of awarding of gaming medium to display of advance notification image

By configuring it in this way, the advance notification image is displayed immediately after the dispensing of the game media is completed, so the player can recognize that the dispensing of the game media for that game is complete. In addition, the player can recognize that the game will soon be over.

The timing at which the difference in the game media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference and the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notice state is set to the timing after the granting of game media for the game in which the difference in the game media related to the limit becomes the first difference number (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be paid out) is completed, but it may also be set to the timing before the granting of game media for the game in which the difference in the game media related to the limit becomes the first difference number (processing corresponding to the determined number of game media to be paid out).

For example, the timing at which the notification state related to the limit becomes the activation notice state may be before the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is the first difference number, or it may be at the start of the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is the first difference number, or it may be midway through the granting of game media for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is the first difference number.

In addition, even in the AT state, the difference in the number of game media related to the stoppage may be small if, for example, a minor role such as a push order role is won through an internal lottery, and even though the player is notified of the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, the player operates the stop switch in a manner that does not follow the content of the notification.

During play during the period shown in FIG. 78(3), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play during the period shown in FIG. 78(3) are as explained in FIG. 76(1).

During game standby (also called demo performance) during the period of FIG. 78(3), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo performance during the period of FIG. 78(3) are as explained in FIG. 76(2). Note that, as explained in the explanation of FIG. 76(2), it is not necessary for a pre-notification image to be displayed when a demo performance is being performed.

In the menu mode during the period of Fig. 78(3), for example, an image such as that shown in Fig. 76(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period of Fig. 78(3) are as described in Fig. 76(3). As also described in Fig. 76(3), in the menu mode, the advance notification image does not have to be displayed.

Note that during the period shown in FIG. 78 (3), when a specific error (e.g., some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the advance notification image may be configured not to be displayed.

For example, if the front door is opened while an image like that in Figure 76 (1) is displayed on the display device 32, a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image is not displayed (it cannot be seen), but a warning image indicating that the front door is open is displayed. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, an image like that in Figure 76 (1) is displayed on the display device 32 again.

Note that although the above explanation uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can pay attention to the content of the error notification and quickly resolve the error that has occurred.

On the other hand, during the period shown in FIG. 78 (3), when a specific error (e.g., some of the recoverable errors or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the pre-notification image may also be displayed.

For example, if the front door is opened while an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32, a door open error occurs, and a pre-alarm image and an alarm image indicating that the front door is open are displayed. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32 again.

Note that although the above explanation uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can not only know the details of the error that has occurred, but also know that the game will soon be stopped, and can respond quickly when the game is stopped.

<<Figure 78 (4)>> The AT state is a period in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit becomes less than the first difference as the game progresses, and thereafter the difference in the number of game media related to the limit does not fall below the second difference (is equal to or greater than the second difference). The notification state related to the limit during this period is an activation notice state. Therefore, a pre-notification image may be displayed on the display device 32.

Note that even in the AT state, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit may decrease if, for example, a minor role such as a push order role is won through an internal lottery, and the player is notified of the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, but the player operates the stop switch in a manner that does not follow the notification. This is also the case in the situation in Figure 78 (5) described below, where the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit decreases as the game progresses.

During play during the period in FIG. 78(4), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play during the period in FIG. 78(4) are as explained in FIG. 76(1).

During game standby (also called demo performance) during the period of FIG. 78(4), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo performance during the period of FIG. 78(4) are as explained in FIG. 76(2). Note that, as explained in the explanation of FIG. 76(2), it is not necessary for a pre-notification image to be displayed when a demo performance is being performed.

In the menu mode during the period of Figure 78 (4), for example, an image such as that shown in Figure 76 (3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period of Figure 78 (4) are as explained in Figure 76 (3). Note that, as explained in the explanation of Figure 76 (3), in the menu mode, the advance warning image does not have to be displayed.

As described above, even if the difference number of gaming media related to the limit falls below the first difference number at which the advance warning image starts to be displayed, the advance warning image is configured to be displayed until the difference number of gaming media related to the limit becomes the second difference number.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the advance warning image stops being displayed immediately after the difference number of game media exceeds the first difference number and the display of the advance warning image starts. In other words, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the advance warning image display is repeatedly started and ended, making it less annoying for the player.

It is preferable that the difference between the first difference number and the second difference number is greater than the maximum difference number of game media in one game.

Here, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game is the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the maximum number of awards (payouts) on that gaming machine. For example, if a gaming machine can pay out 15 coins with a bet of 3 coins, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game is 12, which is 15 minus 3.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the difference between the gaming media related to the limit is the first difference, if a minor role that can obtain the maximum number of awards is won through an internal lottery, but the player is unable to stop and display the predetermined pattern combination that corresponds to the minor role that can obtain the maximum number of awards by operating the stop switch, the advance notification image can continue to be displayed because the result of one game will not make the difference fall below the second difference.

Moreover, it is more preferable that the difference between the first difference number and the second difference number is greater than 1 time and less than 20 times the maximum difference number of gaming media in one game.

In this embodiment, the first difference number is 18,900, and the second difference number is 18,850. However, the first difference number and the second difference number are not limited to these values, and can be designed as appropriate.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is the first difference, and a minor role that can obtain the maximum number of awards is won through an internal lottery over multiple plays (e.g., about 20 plays), but the player is unable to stop and display the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the minor role that can obtain the maximum number of awards by operating the stop switch, the difference between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit and the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached becomes too large, so the advance notification image can be temporarily not displayed.

Note that during the period shown in FIG. 78 (4), when a specific error (e.g., some or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the advance notification image may be configured not to be displayed.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32), a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image is not displayed (is not visible), and a warning image indicating that the front door is open is displayed on the display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation like that shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32) occurs again.

Note that although the above explanation uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can pay attention to the content of the error notification and quickly resolve the error that has occurred.

On the other hand, during the period in FIG. 78 (4), when a specific error (e.g., some of the recoverable errors or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the pre-notification image may also be displayed.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32), a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image and a warning image indicating that the front door is open are displayed on the display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation like that shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32) occurs again.

Note that although the above explanation uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can not only know the details of the error that has occurred, but also know that the game will soon be stopped, and can respond quickly when the game is stopped.

<<Figure 78 (5)>> This is the period after the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit decreases as the game progresses and falls below the second difference, until the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit again becomes the second difference (becomes less than the second difference). The notification state related to the limit during this period is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During the game during the period shown in FIG. 78 (5), for example, an image like that shown in FIG. 75 (1) is displayed on the display device 32.

During the game standby period (demo screen) in the period shown in FIG. 78 (5), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75 (2) is displayed on the display device 32.

In the menu mode during the period shown in Figure 78 (5), for example, an image like that shown in Figure 75 (3) is displayed on the display device 32. << Figure 78 (6) >> Due to the AT state, the difference number of game media related to the limit increases as the game progresses, and this is the period after it becomes equal to or greater than the second difference number and before it reaches the first difference number (below the first difference number). The notification state related to the limit during this period is the normal state. Therefore, the advance notification image is not displayed on the display device 32.

During the game during the period shown in FIG. 78 (6), for example, an image like that shown in FIG. 75 (1) is displayed on the display device 32.

During the game standby period (demo screen) in the period shown in FIG. 78 (6), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75 (2) is displayed on the display device 32.

In the menu mode during the period shown in FIG. 78 (6), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 75 (3) is displayed on the display device 32.

<<Figure 78 (7)>> This is a period during which the AT state causes the difference number of gaming media related to the cap to again become equal to or greater than the first difference number as the game progresses, and is less than the difference number of gaming media that will result in the capped state. The notification state related to the cap during this period is the activation notice state. Therefore, the advance notification image is displayed on the display device 32.

During play during the period shown in FIG. 78(7), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(1) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image displayed during play during the period shown in FIG. 78(7) are as explained in FIG. 76(1).

During game standby (also called demo performance) during the period of FIG. 78(7), for example, an image such as that shown in FIG. 76(2) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the demo performance during the period of FIG. 78(7) are as explained in FIG. 76(2). Note that, as explained in the explanation of FIG. 76(2), it is not necessary for a pre-notification image to be displayed when a demo performance is being performed.

In the menu mode during the period of Fig. 78(7), for example, an image such as that shown in Fig. 76(3) is displayed on the display device 32. The characteristics of the image (menu image) in the menu mode during the period of Fig. 78(7) are as described in Fig. 76(3). As also described in Fig. 76(3), in the menu mode, the advance notification image does not have to be displayed.

Note that, during the period shown in FIG. 78 (7), when a specific error (e.g., some of the recoverable errors or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the advance notification image may be configured not to be displayed on the display device 32.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32), a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image is not displayed (is not visible), and a warning image indicating that the front door is open is displayed on the display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation like that shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32) occurs again.

Note that although the above explanation uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can pay attention to the content of the error notification and quickly resolve the error that has occurred.

On the other hand, during the period shown in FIG. 78 (7), when a specific error (e.g., some of the recoverable errors or all of the recoverable errors) occurs and the display device 32 notifies the user that a specific error has occurred, the pre-notification image may also be displayed.

For example, if the front door is opened in a situation like that shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32), a door open error occurs, and the advance warning image and a warning image indicating that the front door is open are displayed on the display device 32. After that, after the front door is closed and the door open error is cleared, the situation like that shown in FIG. 76(1) (a situation in which an advance warning image is displayed on the display device 32) occurs again.

Note that although the above explanation uses a door open error as the specified error, it is not limited to door open errors. As mentioned above, the same behavior can be achieved for some or all of the recoverable errors.

By configuring it this way, the store staff can not only know the details of the error that has occurred, but also know that the game will soon be stopped, and can respond quickly when the game is stopped.

In other words, as explained in FIG. 78 (4), if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the first difference, but then becomes less than the first difference, and the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit becomes equal to or greater than the second difference, the advance notification image can be displayed.

On the other hand, as explained in FIG. 78 (6), the pre-notification image is configured not to be displayed during the period when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is less than the first difference, even if it is equal to or greater than the second difference. However, as explained in FIG. 78 (7), if the difference again becomes equal to or greater than the first difference, the pre-notification image can be displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the condition for starting to display the advance warning image when the advance warning image is not being displayed can be set to when the difference number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds the first difference number, thereby reducing the burden on the control processing of the sub-control means.

In this embodiment, the first difference number is 18,900 and the second difference number is 18,850 (different values), but the first difference number and the second difference number may be the same value. In other words, the difference number of gaming media related to the limit at which the display of the advance warning image starts and the difference number of gaming media related to the limit at which the display of the advance warning image ends may be the same value.

In other words, if the first difference number = second difference number = 18,900, the advance notification image will be displayed in a game (a certain game) in which the difference number of game media related to the limit is 18,901, but if the difference number of game media in a certain game is -3, after the certain game ends, the difference number of game media related to the limit will be 18,898, and the advance notification image will no longer be displayed. In other words, the advance notification image will not be displayed in the next game of a certain game.

<Difference in number of gaming media related to capping in bonus gaming state and temporary capping flag> Figure 79 is a diagram explaining the relationship between the difference in number of gaming media related to capping in bonus gaming state and the temporary capping flag.

The temporary limit flag is as described above. To briefly explain the characteristics of the temporary limit flag, in a gaming machine equipped with a bonus (at least one of type 1 BB, type 2 BB, and RB), if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000, the temporary limit flag is turned on (a predetermined value is stored in the temporary limit flag memory area).

When the temporary limit flag is on, play can be continued until the bonus game state ends, and when the bonus game state ends, the limit flag is turned on based on the temporary limit flag (a predetermined value is stored in the limit flag storage area).

Also, after the stop flag is turned on, the stop state will be entered based on the fact that the stop flag is turned on.

In this embodiment, the situation where a predetermined value is not stored in the temporary limit flag area is referred to as the temporary limit flag being off, and the situation where a predetermined value is stored in the temporary limit flag area is referred to as the temporary limit flag being on, for the sake of simplicity.

Similarly, in this embodiment, the situation where a specified value is not stored in the limit flag area is referred to as the limit flag being off, and the situation where a specified value is stored in the temporary limit flag area is referred to as the limit flag being on, for the sake of simplicity.

Let's return to the explanation in Figure 79.

First, we will explain an example in which the power was not interrupted during the bonus game mode (the power remained on).

<<If the power is not interrupted during the bonus game state>> First, the timing corresponding to (1) is the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is stopped and displayed. In other words, the bonus game state starts from the next game of (1).

As a result of the game (1), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is less than 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,990.

Furthermore, as a result of the game (1), the temporary limit flag is off (remains off).

Next, the timing corresponding to (2) is during the bonus game state (not the game where the bonus game state ends) and is a game where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is 19,001.

As a result of the game (2), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000.

Furthermore, as a result of the game (2), the temporary limit flag is turned on (updated from off to on).

Next, the timing corresponding to (3) is the game in which the bonus game state ends. In other words, it is the game in which the conditions for ending the bonus game state (for example, the number of game media awarded in the bonus game state exceeds 200) are met.

In the game of (3), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit does not exceed 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,991.

In addition, in the game of (3), the temporary limit flag is on (maintaining the information that was on in the game of (2)).

In other words, after the game of (3) is completed (after the payout process of the gaming media is completed), the game will be stopped.

As described above, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping exceeds 19,000 even once during a bonus gaming state, the capping state will be established after the game that ends the bonus gaming state is completed (after the payout process of the gaming media is completed). At this time, it is not determined whether the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping exceeds 19,000 in the game that ends the bonus gaming state.

In other words, in a game in which the bonus game state ends, even if the difference in the number of game media related to the cap is 19,000, if the difference in the number of game media related to the cap exceeds 19,000 even once in the bonus game state, the system is configured to enter a cap state after the game in which the bonus game state ends is completed.

By configuring it in this way, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, it is not necessary to determine again whether the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping exceeds 19,000 after the bonus ends, so the processing time until the capping state is reached can be shortened.

In addition, in gaming machines that automatically settle the number of credits when a game reaches a limit (including immediately before the game reaches a limit, when the game reaches a limit, and immediately after the game reaches a limit), automatic settlement is not performed after the game of (2) is completed, but is performed after the game of (3) is completed.

Next, we will explain what happens if a power outage occurs while the bonus game mode is in progress.

<<If power is interrupted during a bonus (Pattern 1)>> If power is interrupted during a bonus (Pattern 1), this occurs when the power is interrupted during play between (1) and (2) in Figure 79, and then power is restored and the bonus play continues from where it was.

First, the timing corresponding to (1) is the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is stopped and displayed. In other words, the bonus game state starts from the next game of (1).

As a result of the game (1), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is less than 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,990.

Furthermore, as a result of the game (1), the temporary limit flag is off (remains off).

Next, a power outage occurs during the bonus game state. Note that a power outage here refers to a power outage event occurring (for example, the power switch being turned off) and power outage processing (also called power outage processing) being executed.

In addition, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit when the power outage occurs is less than 19,000. For example, the value of the limit difference counter is 18,998. In other words, it is assumed that a power outage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,998.

In addition, the temporary limit flag is assumed to be off when a power outage occurs. In other words, after the power is turned on, there is no game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000.

Then, by turning the power on without changing the settings (for example, turning the power switch on with the setting key switch off), the bonus game state will resume from where it left off. For example, if a power outage occurs after the first game ends after starting the bonus game state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state can be resumed from the second game.

However, if the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state will be resumed from where it left off after the stop difference counter is reset to its initial value (e.g., 0). In other words, the bonus game state will be resumed from where it left off when the difference in the game media related to the stop is 0.

In other words, if a power outage does not occur during the bonus game state (between (1) and (2) in Figure 79), the difference in the number of game media related to the cap will exceed 19,000 as a result of game (2), and the temporary cap flag will be turned on, resulting in a capped state after the bonus game state ends. However, if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state (between (1) and (2) in Figure 79), the difference in the number of game media related to the cap will not exceed 19,000 as a result of game (2) (for example, the difference in the number of game media related to the cap will be 3), so the temporary cap flag will be turned off (remains off), and the capped state will not occur after the bonus game state ends.

By configuring it in this way, when the power is turned on without changing the settings, the initial value can be uniformly stored in the stop difference counter when the power is turned on (power-on process) without determining whether or not the game is in a bonus game state, simplifying the process.

In addition, by configuring it in this way, the initial value is stored in the play stop difference counter (the difference in the number of gaming media related to the play stop is 0), which can prevent problems between players and game store staff who mistakenly believe that the play stop state is due to a power outage.

<<If power is interrupted during a bonus (Pattern 2)>> If power is interrupted during a bonus (Pattern 2), the power interruption occurs during play between (2) and (3) in Figure 79, and then the power is restored and the bonus play continues from where it was.

First, the timing corresponding to (1) is the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is stopped and displayed. In other words, the bonus game state starts from the next game of (1).

As a result of the game (1), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is less than 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,990.

Furthermore, as a result of the game (1), the temporary limit flag is off (remains off).

Next, the timing corresponding to (2) is during the bonus game state (not the game where the bonus game state ends) and is a game where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000. For example, the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is 19,001.

As a result of the game (2), the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000.

Furthermore, as a result of the game (2), the temporary limit flag is turned on (updated from off to on).

Next, a power outage occurs during the bonus game state. Note that a power outage here refers to a power outage event occurring (for example, the power switch being turned off) and power outage processing being executed.

In addition, it is assumed that the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit at the time the power outage occurs does not exceed 19,000. For example, it is assumed that the power outage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,999.

Note that the temporary stop flag is on when a power outage occurs.

Then, by turning the power on without changing the settings (for example, turning the power switch on with the setting key switch off), the bonus game state will resume from where it left off. For example, if a power outage occurs after the third game has ended since the start of the bonus game state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state can be resumed from the fourth game.

However, if the power is turned on without changing the settings, the value of the stop difference counter will be reset to its initial value (e.g., 0), and the bonus game state will be resumed from where it left off. In other words, the bonus game state will be resumed from where it left off when the difference in the game media related to the stop is 0.

On the other hand, if the power is turned on without changing any settings, the temporary limit flag remains on. In other words, if the power is turned on without changing any settings, the temporary limit flag is not cleared.

Therefore, if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state (between (2) and (3) in FIG. 79), even if the stop difference counter is reset to its initial value, the temporary stop flag will be on (remain on), and the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

Note that, although it has been assumed that the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit when a power outage occurs does not exceed 19,000, the same applies when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit when a power outage occurs exceeds 19,000. For example, even if a power outage occurs when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 19,005, the limit state can be entered after the end of play that meets the conditions for ending the bonus game state.

In other words, once the conditions for a halt state are met in the middle of the bonus game state (when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the halt exceeds 19,000), the bonus game state can be continued even if a power outage occurs and the power is then turned on without changing the settings, and the halt state can be entered after the end of the game that meets the conditions for ending the bonus game state.

In other words, once the conditions for a stop state are met during the bonus game state (when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop state exceeds 19,000), the stop state can be entered regardless of the value of the stop difference counter (the stop state can be entered using the temporary stop flag).

By configuring it in this way, we can provide a gaming machine that cannot increase gambling potential by shutting off the power.

As described above, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit in the bonus gaming state and the temporary limit flag have been explained using FIG. 79, but the same configuration may be used in a specific state such as an AT state other than the bonus gaming state.

You can also configure it as follows:

(1) If a power outage occurs during a bonus game state, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the stop difference counter does not need to be set to its initial value. On the other hand, in a predetermined game state other than the bonus game state (for example, a bonus internal state (a state in which bonus winning information is carried over), etc.), the stop difference counter is set to its initial value.

In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit may be configured to be maintained in the bonus game state.

For example, if a power outage occurs when the difference in the gaming media related to the stop at the end of a certain game in the bonus game state is 18,900 (e.g., the value of the stop difference counter is 18,900), and the power is then turned on without changing the settings, game play in the bonus game state can be executed from the situation of 18,900 (e.g., the value of the stop difference counter is 18,900).

By configuring it in this way, even if a power outage occurs during the bonus game state, if the power is turned on without changing the settings, the bonus game state can be resumed with the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit maintained, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that does not significantly increase the player's gambling tendency.

(2) If the difference in the number of gaming media related to the halt exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, the halt state may be established after the game ends (after the payout process is completed).

In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the halt during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000, the halt may be set even if the game is before the bonus game state ends.

For example, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the stop at the end of a certain game in the bonus game state is 18999 (e.g., the value of the stop difference counter is 18999), if the difference in the number of gaming media in the next game of the certain game (a game in the bonus game state) becomes 3 (e.g., the number of bets is 3 and the number of payouts is 6), the game will be stopped after the next game of the certain game ends.

Note that if configured in this way, the temporary limit flag does not need to be provided.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not significantly increase the player's tendency to gamble.

In addition, by configuring it in this way, the capacity of the RWM of the main control means can be reduced compared to when a temporary limit flag is provided.

In addition, by configuring it in this way, it is not necessary to determine whether the current gaming state is a bonus gaming state, so the program capacity of the main control means can be reduced.

<Pre-notification image in bonus game state> Next, using Figure 80, we will explain the pre-notification image displayed on the display device 32 in the bonus game state.

In the following explanation, we will omit the points that are the same as those in Figure 76 (1) and focus on the distinctive points.

<<When notifying the number of coins remaining until the complete function is activated on the gaming screen in the bonus gaming state>> Figure 80 (1) is an example of when notifying the number of coins remaining until the complete function is activated on the gaming screen in the bonus gaming state.

Note that Figure 80 (1) is an example of a presentation in a situation where the temporary limit flag described above is off. In other words, it is an example of a presentation displayed on the display device 32 when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit has never exceeded 19,000 during the bonus game state (the game before the game shown in Figure 79 (2)).

Similar to FIG. 76 (1), PAYOUT, CREDIT, and Total are displayed on the display device 32. Note that Total may be the sum of the number of wins in the AT state and the number of wins in the bonus game state, or the number of wins in the bonus game state may be displayed as Total without taking into account the number of wins in the AT state.

An image (effect) corresponding to the bonus game state is displayed in the center of the display device 32.

The advance notification image is displayed on the upper side of the display device 32, similar to that of FIG. 76 (1). The advance notification image of FIG. 80 (1) is an example of the case where the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is increased by +10 and the difference in the number of game media related to the limit reaches 19,000.

For this reason, the advance warning image shows "10 frames left until the complete function is activated."

By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize the difference in the number of gaming media remaining until the game is stopped even in the bonus game state.

Note that the notification state regarding the end of the game when Figure 80 (1) is displayed corresponds to the activation notice state. Therefore, when the sub switch 20 is operated, the same state as Figure 76 (3) will occur. The characteristics of Figure 76 (3) are the same as those explained for Figure 76 (3), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the menu screen may be configured not to be displayed even if the sub switch 20 is operated during a bonus.

Similarly, if a demo screen is displayed during a bonus, the display will be the same as that shown in Figure 76 (2). The features of Figure 76 (2) are the same as those explained in Figure 76 (2), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the display may be configured so that the demo screen is not displayed during a bonus.

<<When notifying the player that the complete function is activated on the game screen in the bonus game state>> Figure 80 (2) is an example of a notification that the difference in the number of game media related to the capping has exceeded 19,000 during the bonus game state.

In other words, this is an example of a presentation that is displayed on the display device 32 from when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state (a predetermined timing after the end of the game, which is (2) in FIG. 79) until the bonus game state ends.

For example, the difference in the number of game media related to the limit becomes 19001, and the image display of Figure 80 (2) starts from a predetermined timing after the temporary limit flag is turned on.

In the following explanation, we will omit the points that are the same as those in Figure 80 (1) and focus on the distinctive points.

In Figure 80 (1), the advance notification image displays "10 coins remaining until the complete function is activated," whereas in Figure 80 (2), the advance notification image displays "Waiting for the complete function to be activated. The complete function will be activated when the bonus ends."

In other words, in Figure 80 (1), a notification is provided that allows the player to recognize the difference between the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capping out and the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in the capping out state, whereas in Figure 80 (2), a notification is provided that allows the player to recognize that the capping out state will occur when the bonus game state ends.

By configuring it in this way, if the difference in the number of gaming media related to the termination during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the timing at which the termination will occur. This allows the player to play in the bonus game state with peace of mind.

Note that the notification state regarding the end of the game when Figure 80 (2) is displayed corresponds to the activation notice state. Therefore, when the sub switch 20 is operated, the state becomes the same as that of Figure 76 (3). The characteristics of Figure 76 (3) are the same as those explained for Figure 76 (3), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the menu screen may be configured not to be displayed even if the sub switch 20 is operated during a bonus.

Similarly, if a demo screen is displayed during a bonus, the display will be the same as that shown in Figure 76 (2). The features of Figure 76 (2) are the same as those explained in Figure 76 (2), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the display may be configured so that the demo screen is not displayed during a bonus.

In addition, the notification state related to the end of the bonus game state after the end of the bonus game state will be the end activation notification state.

Therefore, after the bonus game state ends, one of the images in FIG. 77(1), FIG. 77(2), FIG. 77(3), or FIG. 77(4) is displayed. In other words, the image notifying the capped state when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state and the image notifying the capped state when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap exceeds 19,000 in other states (for example, the AT state) are configured to be the same image.

Note that the features of Figures 77(1), 77(2), 77(3), and 77(4) are the same as those explained in Figures 77(1), 77(2), 77(3), and 77(4), and therefore will be omitted.

Furthermore, if the sub switch 20 is operated during the stall state, the same behavior as that shown in FIG. 77(6) will result. The features of FIG. 77(6) are the same as those explained for FIG. 77(6), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the sub switch 20 may be configured to be inoperable (the menu screen is not displayed) during the stall state.

Similarly, if the specifications are such that a demo screen is displayed during a pause state, the appearance will be the same as that of Figure 77 (5). The features of Figure 77 (5) are the same as those explained for Figure 77 (5), so an explanation will be omitted. Note that the configuration may be such that the demo screen is not displayed during a pause state.

<When power-off processing is executed in a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000> Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 each illustrate, with an example, the control processing that corresponds to the timing at which power-off processing (also called power-off processing) is executed in a game in which the notification state related to the limit before the start of the game (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is in the activation notice state, and the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 as a result of playing the game.

Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 correspond to, for example, a predetermined gaming state that is not a bonus state, and a situation in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit before the start of the game (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is 18,999. Also, in this game, the number of bets is 3, a minor role in the push order role is won as a result of the internal lottery, the stop switch is operated in the correct push order, and a symbol combination with 11 awarded gaming media is displayed stopped. Note that the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit, the result of the internal lottery, the number of awarded gaming media, etc. are merely examples and are not limited to these.

In addition, the occurrence of a power outage in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to an event that causes the power to the gaming machine to be turned off (power outage), such as the power switch being turned off, the power being unplugged, or the power to the gaming facility being cut off.

Furthermore, the power interruption processing in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the main control means detecting the occurrence of a power interruption and executing the power interruption processing. For example, the time required from the occurrence of a power interruption to the power interruption processing is designed to take an average of 1 ms to 20 ms. Furthermore, the power interruption processing is designed to be completed in an average of 0.5 ms.

In addition, power-on in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to the occurrence of an event that turns the power to the gaming machine on (power recovery), such as turning on the power switch, plugging a power source that has been unplugged back into the outlet, or turning on the power to an amusement facility that has been turned off.

The power-on process in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 refers to power-on without changing settings. Specifically, this refers to the process that is executed when the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is off.

The payout process in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85 corresponds to the process from when the number of game media to be awarded is determined to when the process corresponding to the determined number of game media to be awarded is completed.

Note that "processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out" refers to processing to update the information displayed on the payout number display (also called the number of coins acquired display), processing to update the information displayed on the credit number display, processing to update the information displayed on the display capable of showing the total score (also called the total score display), and processing to pay out gaming media from the hopper.

Note that "the process of updating the information displayed on the display" refers to the process of sequentially updating the value displayed on the display, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "11" when dispensing (awarding) 11 gaming media. For example, the time required to update the value to "1" is designed to be an average of 50 ms. Also, the time required for the process of dispensing one gaming medium from the hopper is designed to be an average of 50 ms.

Therefore, for example, when paying out (awarding) 11 gaming media, the time required for "processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be paid out" is designed to be an average of 550 ms (11 x 50 ms).

As a result, the time required for the payout process corresponds to the time from when the number of gaming media to be awarded is determined to when the processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be awarded is completed.

In addition, as the notification state related to the end of the game in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85, in the case of an activation notice state, it is assumed that the device is configured to be able to execute the performance corresponding to the activation notice state described above.

Similarly, as the notification state related to the end of the game in Figures 81, 82, 83, 84, and 85, in the normal state, it is assumed that the above-mentioned performance corresponding to the normal state can be executed.

<<When power-off processing is executed after the payout processing of a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 is completed>> Figure 81 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which power-off processing is executed after the payout processing of a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 is completed. Here, "after the payout processing is completed" refers to, for example, a certain timing before the limit state is reached (before a notification of the limit is executed) after the payout processing is completed and the limit monitoring processing is executed and the limit monitoring processing is completed.

First, the notification state related to the end of the game before the game starts (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is the activation notice state. The difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the stop difference counter related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed as the number of bets, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (so-called a minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in an operation mode that can stop a symbol combination that can award a payout of X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of gaming media. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of gaming media for that game is 8.

Then, after the last stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released, the payout process begins, awarding X as the number of gaming media awarded.

A power outage occurs during the payout process to award X gaming media.

After X is awarded as the number of game media awarded, the power failure processing begins. Note that the limit monitoring processing is assumed to have ended before the power failure processing begins. Also, the notification state related to the limit is assumed to be the activation notification state.

Then, when the power is turned on and the power-on process is executed, the notification state related to the stop is the operation notification state (remains in the operation notification state). In addition, the control in the main control means is controlled so that the stop state is established after the power-on process is executed.

When the power-on process is executed, the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to an initial value (e.g., 0).

As described above, even if a power outage occurs during the dispensing process, if the stop monitoring process has ended before the power outage process begins, the notification state related to the stop after the power is turned on can be the operating notification state.

By configuring it in this way, the notification state regarding the end of play after the power is restored and the control state of the main control means after the power is restored can be made appropriate, reducing trouble between players and game center staff.

<<When power-off processing is executed in the middle of payout processing for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (1)>> Figure 82 is a diagram showing an example of when power-off processing is executed in the middle of payout processing for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit exceeds 19,000. Here, "in the middle of payout processing" refers to a certain timing from when the number of gaming media to be awarded is determined to when the processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be awarded is completed.

First, let us explain Figure 82(a).

First, the notification state related to the end of the game before the game starts (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is the activation notice state. The difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the stop difference counter related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed as the number of bets, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (so-called a minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in an operation mode that can stop a symbol combination that can award X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of game media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of game media for that game is 8.

Then, after the last stop switch (for example, the third stop switch) is released, the payout process begins, awarding X as the number of gaming media awarded.

A power outage occurs during the payout process to award X gaming media.

In addition, the power failure process is started in the middle of the payout process in which X is awarded as the number of game media to be awarded. In other words, the power failure process is started before the payout process ends.

Then, the power is turned on, and after the power-on process is executed, the notification state related to the halt becomes the operation advance notification state (remains in the operation advance notification state). In addition, after the power-on process is executed, the control in the main control means starts in the middle of the payout process (continuing the payout process that was being performed before the power-off process was executed).

In addition, "starting from the middle of the payout process (the continuation of the payout process that was being performed before the power outage processing was executed)" refers to, for example, when the power outage processing is executed between command A and command B (command B is the next command after command A is executed) among the multiple commands that make up the payout process, execution will start from command B.

In addition, when the power-on process is executed, the value stored in the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to an initial value (e.g., 0).

In addition, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the difference in the number of game media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of payouts is X, a value corresponding to X-Y is stored in the stop difference counter.

Therefore, the game will not be stopped after the game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs during a payout process and power outage processing occurs during the payout process, the payout process can be resumed from where it left off after the power is turned back on. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the next game can be played without entering a stopped state. Furthermore, the notification state related to the stoppage after the payout process is completed can be the normal state, rather than the operation notification state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of trouble between players and gaming store staff, compared to gaming machines in which a power outage occurs in the middle of a payout process, and the game is stopped when the power is turned on after the power is turned off in the middle of a payout process. Specifically, it is possible to prevent trouble with players who think that the game has been stopped because a power outage occurred in the middle of a payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 82(b). Note that we will omit the explanation of the parts that are the same as Figure 82(a).

In FIG. 82(a), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the operation preview state, whereas in FIG. 82(b), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in FIG. 82(a), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation that corresponds to the operation preview state is executed, whereas in FIG. 82(b), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation that corresponds to the normal state is executed.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 82 (b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the performance executed during the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that the game will not end and can continue playing without any doubts.

<<When power-off processing is executed in the middle of payout processing for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap exceeds 19,000 (2)>> Figure 83 is a diagram showing an example of when power-off processing is executed in the middle of payout processing for a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap exceeds 19,000. Here, "in the middle of payout processing" refers to a certain timing from when the number of gaming media to be awarded is determined to when the processing corresponding to the determined number of gaming media to be awarded is completed.

First, let us explain Figure 83(a).

First, the notification state related to the end of the game before the game starts (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is the activation notice state. The difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the stop difference counter related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed as the number of bets, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (so-called a minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in an operation mode that can stop a symbol combination that can award X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of game media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of game media for that game is 8.

Then, a power outage occurs before the last stop switch (e.g., the third stop switch) is released. For example, a power outage occurs after the last stop switch is operated, while the last stop switch continues to be operated. In other words, at the time the power outage occurs, the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped. However, the payout process has not started.

After the last stop switch operation is released, the payout process begins, awarding X gaming media.

In addition, the power failure process is started in the middle of the payout process in which X is awarded as the number of game media. In other words, the power failure process is started before the payout process ends.

Then, the power is turned on, and after the power-on process is executed, the notification state related to the halt becomes the operation advance notification state (remains in the operation advance notification state). In addition, after the power-on process is executed, the control in the main control means starts in the middle of the payout process (continuing the payout process that was being performed before the power-off process was executed).

Note that "starting from the middle of the payout process (the continuation of the payout process that was being carried out before the power outage process was executed)" refers to, for example, when the power outage process is executed between command A and command B (command B is the next command after command A is executed) among the multiple commands that make up the payout process, execution will start from command B.

In addition, when the power-on process is executed, the value stored in the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to an initial value (e.g., 0).

In addition, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the difference in the game media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of awards is X, a value corresponding to X-Y is stored in the stop difference counter related to the stop.

Therefore, the game will not be stopped after the game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs while the payout process has not started but the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded is stopped, and power outage processing occurs during the payout process, the payout process can be resumed from where it left off after the power is turned back on. Also, after the payout process is completed, the next game can be played without entering a stopped state. Also, the notification state related to the stoppage after the payout process is completed can be the normal state rather than the operation notification state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of trouble between players and gaming store staff compared to gaming machines in which a power outage occurs when the payout process has not started but the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped, the power outage process is performed in the middle of the payout process, and the machine reaches a halt state when the power is then turned on. Specifically, it is possible to prevent trouble with players who think that the game has reached a halt because the power outage occurred before the payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 83(b). Note that we will omit the explanation of the parts that are the same as Figure 83(a).

In FIG. 83(a), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the operation advance notification state, whereas in FIG. 83(b), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in FIG. 83(a), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation corresponding to the operation advance notification state is executed, whereas in FIG. 83(b), during the payout process that is executed after the power is turned on, a presentation corresponding to the normal state is executed.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 83 (b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the performance executed during the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that the game will not end and can continue playing without any doubts.

<<When power-off processing is executed before payout processing for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (1)>> Figure 84 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which power-off processing is executed before payout processing for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000. In Figure 84, "before payout processing" refers to a certain timing from when the pattern combination that awards game media stops until before the number of game media to be awarded is determined.

First, let us explain Figure 84(a).

First, the notification state regarding the end of the game before the game starts (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is the activation notice state. The difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the stop difference counter at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed as the number of bets, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (so-called a minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in an operation mode capable of stopping a symbol combination that awards X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of game media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of game media for that game is 8.

Then, a power outage occurs before the last stop switch (e.g., the third stop switch) is released. For example, a power outage occurs after the last stop switch is operated, while the last stop switch continues to be operated. In other words, at the time the power outage occurs, the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped.

Also, before the last stop switch is released (while the last stop switch is still being operated), power failure processing begins.

Before the power is turned on (while the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off), the last stop switch is released.

Then, the power is turned on, the power-on process is executed, and then the payout process is executed. Also, the notification state regarding the stoppage while the payout process is being executed is the operation notification state (it remains in the operation notification state).

When the power-on process is executed, the value stored in the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to an initial value (e.g., 0).

In addition, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the difference in the game media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of awards is X, a value corresponding to X-Y is stored in the stop difference counter related to the stop.

Therefore, the game will not be stopped after the game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs while the payout process has not started but the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded is stopped, and power outage processing occurs before the payout process, the payout process can be started after the power is turned back on. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the next game can be played without entering a stopped state. Furthermore, the notification state related to the stoppage after the payout process is completed can be the normal state, not the operation advance notification state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of trouble between players and gaming store staff, compared to a gaming machine in which a power outage occurs when the payout process has not started but a symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped, the power outage process is performed before the payout process starts, and then the machine is turned on after the final stop switch operation is released, resulting in a stopped state. Specifically, it is possible to prevent trouble with players who think that the game has stopped because the power outage occurred before the payout process.

Next, Fig. 84(b) will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as Fig. 84(a) will be omitted.

In FIG. 84(a), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the operation advance notification state, whereas in FIG. 84(b), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in FIG. 84(a), the payout process executed after the power is turned on executes an effect corresponding to the operation advance notification state, whereas in FIG. 84(b), the payout process executed after the power is turned on executes an effect corresponding to the normal state.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 84 (b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the performance executed in the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that the game will not end, and can continue playing without any doubts.

<<When power-off processing is executed before payout processing for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (2)>> Figure 85 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which power-off processing is executed before payout processing for a game in which the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000. In Figure 85, "before payout processing" refers to a certain timing from when the symbol combination that awards game media stops to before the number of game media to be awarded is determined.

First, let us explain Figure 85(a).

First, the notification state regarding the end of the game before the game starts (before the specified number of bets is made and the start switch is operated) is the operation advance notification state. The difference in the number of game media related to the end of the game at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999. The value stored in the stop difference counter at this time is assumed to be, for example, 18,999.

Next, a bet of Y (Y is a numerical value) is placed as the number of bets, and as a result of the internal lottery, a predetermined lottery result (so-called a minor prize) is won. Then, the stop switch is operated in an operation mode capable of stopping a symbol combination that awards X (X is a numerical value, satisfying Y<X) as the number of game media to be awarded. For example, Y is 3 and X is 11. In other words, the difference in the number of game media for that game is 8.

Then, a power outage occurs before the last stop switch (e.g., the third stop switch) is released. For example, a power outage occurs after the last stop switch is operated, while the last stop switch continues to be operated. In other words, at the time the power outage occurs, the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped.

Also, before the last stop switch is released (while the last stop switch is still being operated), power failure processing begins.

Then the power is turned on. At this point, the final stop switch is still being operated.

The final stop switch operation is released while the power-on process is running.

After the power-on process is executed, the payout process is executed. Also, the notification state regarding the stoppage when the payout process is being executed is the operation advance notification state (it remains in the operation advance notification state).

When the power-on process is executed, the value stored in the strike-stop difference counter is configured to be set to an initial value (e.g., 0).

In addition, when the payout process is completed and the stop monitoring process is executed, the value stored in the stop difference counter becomes the difference in the number of game media for that game. In other words, if the number of bets is Y and the number of payouts is X, a value corresponding to X-Y is stored in the stop difference counter.

Therefore, the game will not be stopped after the game ends. In other words, the next game can be played.

As described above, if a power outage occurs while the payout process has not started but the symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded is stopped, and power outage processing occurs before the payout process, the payout process can be started after the power is turned back on. Furthermore, after the payout process is completed, the next game can be played without entering a stopped state. Furthermore, the notification state related to the stoppage after the payout process is completed can be the normal state, not the operation advance notification state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of trouble between players and gaming store staff, compared to a gaming machine in which a power outage occurs when the payout process has not started but a symbol combination that can award X as the number of gaming media to be awarded has stopped, the power outage process is performed before the payout process starts, and then the machine is turned on and the final stop switch operation is released during the power-on process, resulting in a stopped state. Specifically, it is possible to prevent trouble with players who think that the stop state has occurred because the power outage occurred before the payout process.

Next, we will explain Figure 85(b). Note that we will omit the explanation of the parts that are the same as Figure 85(a).

In FIG. 85(a), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the operation advance notification state, whereas in FIG. 85(b), the notification state regarding the termination after the power-on process is executed is the normal state.

In other words, in FIG. 85(a), the payout process executed after the power is turned on produces an effect corresponding to the operation advance notification state, whereas in FIG. 85(b), the payout process executed after the power is turned on produces an effect corresponding to the normal state.

By configuring it as shown in Figure 85 (b), the advance notification image is not displayed during the performance executed in the payout process, so after turning on the power, the player can immediately recognize that the game will not end, and can continue playing without any doubts.

<Number of gaming media granted to a player in a game that reaches a capped state> This section explains the number of gaming media granted to a player when a game is executed when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capped state is X, and the result of adding the difference in the number of gaming media (A) for that game to the difference in the number of gaming media related to the capped state (X) exceeds the difference in the number of gaming media until the capped state is reached (Y). In other words, this is a game that satisfies X+A>Y.

The following explanation uses specific numerical values to make the technical details easier to understand.

For example, the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap is 18,999 (corresponding to X in the above formula), the difference in the number of gaming media for the game is 8 (corresponding to A in the above formula. Note that the number of bets is 3 and the number of gaming media awarded is 11), and the difference in the number of gaming media until the cap is reached is 19,000 (corresponding to Y in the above formula). Note that the various numerical values are merely examples and are not limited to these.

<<Pattern 1: Limit state after all determined gaming media have been awarded>> Pattern 1 is a pattern in which, when the difference in the limit-related gaming media is 18,999, three coins are bet and play is played, and as a result, a predetermined symbol combination that can award 11 gaming media is displayed in a stopped state, and after 11 gaming media have been awarded, the limit state is reached after play ends.

In other words, in pattern 1, even if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, which is the difference in the number of game media until the limit is reached, the player is awarded all of the determined number of game media. Then, after the awarding of game media is completed, the limit is reached.

By configuring it like pattern 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not put players at an excessive disadvantage by reaching a dead end.

When the game media is being dispensed, a pre-notification image is displayed. However, when the game media is being dispensed, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<<<If a specified error occurs during the dispensing of game media in a game that results in a capped state in pattern 1>>> In pattern 1, if a specified error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs before dispensing more than 19,000 game media, which is the difference in the number of game media from when dispensing of game media began to when the capped state is reached (e.g., the difference in the number of game media related to the capped state is 18,999), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the specified error (e.g., processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error).

When the main control means is executing an error process corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the specified error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, it is not necessary to display a pre-alarm image. By configuring in this way, the sub-control means can notify the occurrence of a specified error without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-notification image. By configuring it in this way, the store staff can know that the game is approaching a dead-end state, and can also know that a specified error has occurred.

In addition, in pattern 1, if a specified error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs after more than 19,000 game media, which is the difference in the number of game media from the start of game media dispensing until the capping state, has been dispensed (e.g., the difference in the number of game media related to the capping state is 19,001), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the specified error (e.g., processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error).

When the main control means is executing an error process corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the specified error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, it is not necessary to display a pre-alarm image. By configuring in this way, the sub-control means can notify the occurrence of a specified error without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-notification image. By configuring it in this way, the store attendant can know that the game is nearing a dead end, and can also know that a specified error has occurred.

When the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may display an operation notification image instead of the advance notification image. By configuring it in this way, the store staff can know that the game will be stopped and can also know that a specified error has occurred.

Note that, although a hopper empty error has been used as an example of a specified error, the specified error is not limited to a hopper empty error, and may be a recoverable error such as a door open error.

<<Pattern 2-1: Limit state after awarding part of the determined number of gaming media>> Pattern 2-1 is a pattern in which, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit is 18,999, three coins are bet and a game is played, a predetermined symbol combination that can award 11 gaming media is displayed in a stopped state, and the limit state is reached after awarding five gaming media.

In other words, in pattern 2-1, the limit is reached when the number of gaming media reaches 19001, exceeding the 19000 difference in the number of gaming media required to reach the limit. In other words, the player has not been given all of the gaming media that had been determined.

By configuring it as in pattern 2-1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached uniform.

When the game media is being dispensed, a pre-notification image is displayed. However, when the game media is being dispensed, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<Pattern 2-2: End of game after part of the determined number of game media to be awarded>> Pattern 2-2
is a pattern in which, when the difference in the number of gaming media related to the cap is 18,999, three coins are bet and a game is played, a predetermined symbol combination which can award 11 gaming media is displayed in a stopped state, and the cap is reached after four gaming media are awarded.

In other words, in pattern 2-2, the limit is reached when the difference in the number of gaming media to be awarded reaches 19,000. In other words, not all of the determined number of gaming media to be awarded has been awarded to the player.

By configuring it as in pattern 2-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can make the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached uniform.

When the game media is being dispensed, a pre-notification image is displayed. However, when the game media is being dispensed, an operation notification image may be displayed instead of the pre-notification image.

<<<<If a specified error occurs during the dispensing of game media in a game that results in a capped state in Pattern 2-1 or Pattern 2-2>>> In Pattern 2-1 or Pattern 2-2, if a specified error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs before dispensing more than 19,000 game media, which is the difference in the number of game media from the start of dispensing of game media to the capped state (e.g., the difference in the number of game media related to the capped state is 18,999), the main control means executes error processing corresponding to the specified error (e.g., processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error).

When the main control means is executing an error process corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means displays an image corresponding to the specified error. Note that when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, it is not necessary to display a pre-alarm image. By configuring in this way, the sub-control means can notify the occurrence of a specified error without requiring complex control processing.

On the other hand, when the sub-control means is displaying an image corresponding to a specified error, the sub-control means may also display a pre-notification image. By configuring it in this way, the store staff can know that the game is approaching a dead-end state, and can also know that a specified error has occurred.

Note that, although a hopper empty error has been used as an example of a specified error, the specified error is not limited to a hopper empty error, and may be a recoverable error such as a door open error.

<When a specified error occurs while automatic settlement is being performed> Next, in a gaming machine that performs automatic settlement when a play is stopped, an example of a notification when a specified error occurs while automatic settlement is being performed will be explained using Figures 86 and 87. Note that, although a hopper empty error will be used as an example of a specified error, the specified error is not limited to a hopper empty error, and may be a recoverable error such as a door open error.

For example, assume that in a non-bonus state (a specified gaming state), after the end of a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media related to the limit has exceeded 19,000 (after the end of the limit monitoring process), 50 is displayed on the credit number display. Then, when automatic settlement is started, settlement of the 50 gaming media displayed on the credit number display begins. Specifically, the value displayed on the credit number display is decremented by one each time, such as 50, 49, 48, ..., 0, as a result of automatic settlement. Also, as the value displayed on the credit number display is decremented by one, gaming media are returned one by one through the return port.

If a hopper empty error occurs while this automatic settlement is being performed, the main control means executes error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error). For example, assume that a hopper empty error occurs when the credit number display shows 30 (after 20 has been automatically settled as gaming media).

<<When a specific error (hopper empty error) occurs during automatic settlement (1)>> Figure 86 (1) shows an example of a case where automatic settlement is performed after the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (after the limit monitoring process ends), and a hopper empty error occurs during this automatic settlement.

In FIG. 86 (1), the completion function operation notification period is in progress while automatic settlement is in progress. In other words, the notification state related to the stoppage during automatic settlement is an operation notification state. In other words, the system is configured to be able to execute a notification corresponding to the operation notification state while automatic settlement is in progress. It is possible to adopt a notification mode such as that shown in FIG. 77 (3) as a notification mode corresponding to the operation notification state while automatic settlement is in progress. In other words, while automatic settlement is in progress, a notification is issued that the stoppage state has occurred and that automatic settlement is in progress.

When a hopper empty error occurs during the execution of this automatic settlement (for example, when the credit number display shows 30), the sub-control means can adopt any one of the following notification modes (a), (b), or (c).

(A) The normal hopper empty error (also called HE error) screen is displayed. At this time, information (images) related to the complete function cannot be seen.

The specific notification mode of the above (A) is shown in Figure 87 (A).

Figure 87 (A) is an image that is also displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the game is not at its limit (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is 10).

In other words, the occurrence of a hopper empty error is notified in the same manner whether it occurs when the hopper empty error occurs in a stalled state or when the hopper empty error occurs in a non-stalled state.

By configuring it in this way, even if a hopper empty error occurs during a stoppage, it is possible to notify the user that a hopper empty error has occurred without requiring complex control processing.

(a) The normal hopper empty error (also called HE error) screen is displayed. At this time, information (images) related to the complete function can be seen.

The specific image display form of (a) above is shown in Figure 87 (a).

Figure 87 (a) is composed of an image that is also displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the game is not at capacity (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the capacity is 10), and an image indicating that the game is at capacity (the image "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant").

In other words, the same image is used when a hopper empty error occurs in a stuck state and when a hopper empty error occurs in a non-stuck state. However, when a stuck state occurs, an image indicating that the stuck state is also displayed.

By configuring it in this way, even if a hopper empty error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to notify the player that a hopper empty error has occurred and that a stalled state has occurred without requiring complex control processing. In other words, the gaming store clerk will also be able to understand that a stalled state will occur after the hopper empty error is cleared, saving the player and the gaming store clerk the trouble (the player having to call the gaming store clerk again after the error is cleared).

(c) Displays information (images) related to the complete function. At this time, information (images) related to the hopper empty error can be seen.

A specific example of the image display mode of (c) above is shown in Figure 87 (c).

Figure 87 (c) notifies the player of a hopper empty error in a manner different from the image (Figure 87 (a)) that is displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the game is not at capacity (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the capacity is 10). It also displays an image indicating that the game is at capacity (an image that reads "Complete function in operation, please call an attendant").

The image indicating this stalled state may be the image that was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred, or it may be an image that is different from the image that was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred.

In other words, different images are used when a hopper empty error occurs in a jammed state and when a hopper empty error occurs in a non-jammed state. Also, when the jammed state occurs, an image indicating that the jammed state exists is also displayed. Note that the image indicating that the jammed state exists may be the same as that shown in Figure 77 (3) (however, the message "Press PUSH to display the menu screen" in Figure 77 (3) does not need to be displayed).

By configuring it in this way, if a hopper empty error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to notify the player that a hopper empty error has occurred, and also to notify the player that a stalled state has occurred. In other words, the gaming store clerk can also understand that a stalled state will occur after the hopper empty error is cleared, which saves the player and the gaming store clerk the trouble of having to call the gaming store clerk again after the error is cleared.

In addition, if the image indicating that the supply is stalled is the image that was displayed before the hopper empty error occurred, the burden of the display process can be reduced, and it is possible to notify the user that a hopper empty error has occurred and also to notify the user that the supply is stalled.

As in (i) and (iii) above, if a hopper empty error occurs while automatic settlement is being performed, a notification will be sent to inform you that a hopper empty error has occurred and that the settlement has been halted.

In the above (a), (b), and (c), after the hopper empty error is cleared, automatic settlement will be resumed from where it left off. In this case, the same presentation as before the hopper empty error occurs will be executed. In other words, instead of notifying the user that a hopper empty error has occurred, the user will be notified that the game has been stopped and that automatic settlement is in progress.

Then, when automatic settlement is completed, a notification that the payment has been stopped is executed (continued). In other words, the notification that automatic settlement is being executed is terminated.

Note that if power interruption processing (also called power off processing) is executed while automatic settlement is being performed, and then the power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing any settings, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off after power on processing is executed. In this case, the same presentation as before the power off processing was executed is executed. In other words, it notifies you that automatic settlement is being performed.

After that, when automatic settlement ends, the service will be stopped.

In addition, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement and the main control means is executing error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error), power interruption processing (also called power interruption processing) is executed, and then if power is turned on without changing settings (setting key switch off, power switch on), error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error) will be resumed after power on processing is executed.

After that, after the hopper empty error is cleared, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off. In this case, the same presentation will be performed as before the hopper empty error occurred. In other words, there will be no notification that a hopper empty error has occurred, but rather a notification that automatic settlement is being performed.

After that, when automatic settlement ends, the service will be stopped.

In this way, if power outage processing is performed while automatic settlement is being performed, or if a hopper empty error occurs while automatic settlement is being performed and power outage processing is performed while error processing is being performed, when power is turned on without changing settings, the device is configured to resume from where it left off before power outage processing was performed after power on processing.

In other words, the power-on process resets the stop difference counter related to the stop to an initial value (e.g., 0), but the device is configured to enter a stop state.

<<When a specific error (hopper empty error) occurs during automatic settlement (2)>> Figure 86 (2) shows an example of a case where automatic settlement is performed after the difference in the number of game media related to the limit exceeds 19,000 (after the limit monitoring process ends), and a hopper empty error occurs during this automatic settlement.

In FIG. 86 (2), the completion function operation notification period does not occur while automatic settlement is in progress. In other words, the notification state related to the termination of automatic settlement during its execution is not an operation notification state. In other words, there is no notification that termination has occurred while automatic settlement is in progress.

When automatic settlement is being performed, for example, a presentation corresponding to the activation advance notification state as shown in FIG. 76 (A) (display of "XX coins remaining until complete function is activated") may be executed, or a presentation indicating that the game is about to reach a halt (display of "Complete function in preparation") may be executed.

First, when automatic settlement begins, the effects that are displayed when automatic settlement is being performed are executed. If a hopper empty error occurs while this automatic settlement is being performed (in the middle of being performed), a notification is issued indicating that a hopper empty error has occurred.

As an example of a notification indicating that a hopper empty error has occurred, the image shown in FIG. 87(A) is displayed on the display device 32. Note that FIG. 87(A) is also an image that is displayed when a hopper empty error occurs in a situation where the game is not at its limit (for example, when the difference in the number of game media related to the limit is 10).

Automatic settlement will resume after the hopper empty error is cleared.

Then, after the automatic settlement is completed, the completion function activation notification period begins. In other words, after the automatic settlement is completed, the notification state related to the limit becomes an activation notification state. In other words, after the automatic settlement is completed, it becomes possible to notify that the limit state has been reached.

Note that if power interruption processing (also called power off processing) is executed while automatic settlement is being performed, and then the power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing the settings, automatic settlement will be resumed from where it left off after power on processing is executed (after the hit difference counter is reset to its initial value). In this case, the same presentation as before the power off processing is executed is executed. In other words, it is notified that automatic settlement is in progress.

Then, after the automatic settlement is completed, the completion function activation notification period begins. In other words, after the automatic settlement is completed, the notification state related to the limit becomes an activation notification state. In other words, after the automatic settlement is completed, it becomes possible to notify that the limit state has been reached.

In addition, if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement and the main control means is executing error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error), power interruption processing (also called power interruption processing) is executed, and then, if power is turned on (setting key switch off, power switch on) without changing settings, error processing (processing to display an error code corresponding to the hopper empty error) is resumed after power-on processing is executed (after the striking difference counter is reset to its initial value).

After that, after the hopper empty error is cleared, automatic settlement will resume from where it left off. In this case, the same presentation will be performed as before the hopper empty error occurred. In other words, no notification will be given that a hopper empty error has occurred, and the presentation will be the same as when automatic settlement is being performed.

After automatic settlement is completed, the completion function activation notification period begins. In other words, after automatic settlement is completed, the notification state related to the limit becomes an activation notification state. In other words, after automatic settlement is completed, it becomes possible to notify that the limit state has been reached.

By configuring it this way, the player is notified that play is over after the automatic settlement is complete, preventing the player from leaving the venue in the middle of the automatic settlement, etc.

In addition, in Figures 86 (1) and (2), when automatic settlement is being performed, power interruption processing (also called power interruption processing) is executed, and then when power is turned on (setting key switch on, power switch on) with a setting change, the device transitions to setting change mode, and when the setting change mode termination conditions are met and the setting change mode is terminated, the device is configured to return to the situation before the start of play (the situation in which bets on gaming media are accepted) rather than resuming automatic settlement from where it left off. In other words, automatic settlement can be terminated midway and prevented from coming to a halt. In addition, during this setting change mode and after the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent notifications from being issued that play has been halted or that automatic settlement is in progress.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the end of business hours of an amusement establishment occurs during automatic settlement, the amusement establishment can simultaneously shut off the power supplied to all gaming machines (power off), but still provide gaming media to players up until the end of business hours. After the end of business hours, an amusement establishment employee can change the settings to return the situation to before the start of play without having to collect the gaming media that are in the middle of automatic settlement from the return port, which can facilitate smooth operation of the amusement establishment.

Note that while Figure 58 has been explained as a modified example of Figure 57, it can also be applied to Figures 55 and 56.

For example, a process corresponding to "Temporary limit flag ON?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Display replay activation symbol?" in FIG. 55, a process corresponding to "Temporary limit flag save" in FIG. 58 is provided after "Difference number > 19000?" in FIG. 55 becomes YES, and a process corresponding to "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Save limit flag" in FIG. 55. By configuring in this way, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 from the time of power-on during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), information indicating that the limit condition is met is not stored in the limit flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of game media exceeds 19000 from the time of power-on during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), the game can be put into a limit state after the bonus game state ends.

Similarly, for example, a process corresponding to "Temporary Limit Flag ON?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Replay Activation Symbol Display?" in FIG. 56, a process corresponding to "Temporary Limit Flag Save" in FIG. 58 is provided after "Difference Number > 19000?" in FIG. 56 becomes YES, and a process corresponding to "Bonus Game State?" in FIG. 58 is provided before "Limit Flag Save" in FIG. 56. By configuring in this way, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the limit condition is met is not stored in the limit flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), the game can be limited after the bonus game state ends.

Note that FIG. 58 can also be applied to a case where the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from the base exceeds 19,000.

For example, the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and even if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, information indicating that the condition for the game to be stopped is met is not stored in the stop flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

<End-of-play monitoring process (subtraction version of the stop-of-play difference counter, end-of-play state after bonus game state ends due to the stop-of-play difference counter)> Figure 59 is a modified version of Figures 57 and 58. Like Figure 58, Figure 59 is the same in that it starts from the time the power is turned on during the bonus game state (0), and if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, it enters a stop-of-play state after the bonus game state ends. However, unlike Figure 58, it differs in that it does not have a temporary stop-of-play flag memory area.

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be put into the stop state" is set to 19001. In other words, when the power is turned on without changing the settings from a power-off state, the initial value stored in the stop difference counter is 19001. Similarly, when the power is turned on with a setting change from a power-off state, the initial value stored in the stop difference counter is 19001.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from Figure 58.

First, in "stop difference counter = specific value?", it is determined whether the value stored in the stop difference counter is a specific value. For example, if the specific value is set to 0, it is determined whether the value stored in the stop difference counter is 0. Note that in FIG. 58, the specific value is set to 0, but it can be any value other than 0 as long as it is a predetermined value.

In addition, a game that determines YES for "Is the stop difference counter equal to a specific value?" is a game that has occurred during a bonus game state after the number of game media has exceeded 19,000, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), and is a game that has occurred until the "save stop flag" is executed. Details will be described later.

"Replay activation symbol display?" is the same as "Replay activation symbol display?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation will be omitted.

The "stop difference counter set" is the same as the "stop difference counter set" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation is omitted.

"Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" is the same as "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation will be omitted.

"Upper limit exceeded?" is the same as "Upper limit exceeded?" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation is omitted.

The "Upper limit set" is the same as the "Upper limit set" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation is omitted.

In "Difference Update", the complement of the result of the calculation in "Exceeding Upper Limit?" (Number of Inserts - Number of Payouts) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register. In other words, "Value stored in the Stop Difference Counter" - "Value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game" is executed. If the result of this calculation is below a specific value, the specific value is stored in the HL register.

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, if the value stored in the bet/stop difference counter (HL register value) is 65534, and the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249, but the "difference update" will first derive 7, the complement of 249. Next, 65534-7 is calculated, and 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that since the result of 65534-7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag will be 0.

When there is no carry (when the carry flag is 0), the value of the HL register is not updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register is the result of the calculation of "the value stored in the play end difference counter" - "the value of the difference in the number of game media in the current game."

For example, when the value stored in the bet/stop difference counter (HL register value) is 2, if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but the "bet/stop difference counter update" first derives 7, the complement of 249. Next, 2-7 is calculated, and 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2-7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (because there is a carryover), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carryover, the carry flag becomes 1.

When there is a carry (when the carry flag is 1), the value of the HL register is updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register becomes a specific value (0).

"Update hit/stop difference counter" is the same as "Update hit/stop difference counter" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation is omitted.

"Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of game media from the time the power was turned on (0) exceeds 19,000. Specifically, it determines whether the value stored in the stop difference counter is a specific value (0). If the value stored in the stop difference counter is the specific value (0), it judges as YES, and if the value stored in the stop difference counter is not the specific value (0), it judges as NO.

The value stored in the stop difference counter is a specific value (0) when a) the result of the calculation performed by "difference update" of "value stored in the stop difference counter" - "value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game" falls below the specific value (0), or b) the result of the calculation performed by "difference update" of "value stored in the stop difference counter" - "value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game" becomes a specific value (0).

Specifically, the above A) corresponds to a case where the difference in the number of gaming media from the time when the power is turned on (starting point (0)) is greater than 19001, and the above B) corresponds to a case where the difference in the number of gaming media from the time when the power is turned on (starting point (0)) is 19001.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" can determine whether the difference in the number of game media since the power was turned on (0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the value stored in the play-stop difference counter is a specific value (0).

Also, by storing 19001 as the initial value when the power is turned on without a setting change or when the power is turned on with a setting change, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46534 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 19001, a situation in which the value of the play-stop difference counter is 49001 means that the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on as the starting point (0) is -30000.

As described above, by storing 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be capped," as the initial value, it is possible to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000 by determining whether the value of the capped difference counter is "0," thereby reducing the program capacity. Also, by storing 19001 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -46534 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. Note that although an example is given of storing 19001 as the initial value, values other than 19001 can be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

"Bonus game state?" is the same as "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 58, so some of the explanation will be omitted. If "Bonus game state?" is judged as YES, "Save stop flag" is not executed and stop monitoring processing is executed. In other words, if "Bonus game state?" is judged as YES, a specific value (0) is stored in the stop difference counter, and the next game (game in the bonus game state) can be executed in a situation where no information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area.

In other words, when the next game is played while the specific value (0) is stored and the stoppage monitoring process is executed, the first determination in the stoppage monitoring process, "Is the stoppage difference counter = specific value?", is judged as YES. In other words, if the number of game media since the power-on start point (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state and "save stoppage flag" has not been executed, the determination is made as YES for "stoppage difference counter = specific value?" and it is determined whether or not the game is in the bonus game state without performing processes such as "update stoppage difference counter".

"Save stop flag" is the same as "Save stop flag" in Figure 58 (Figure 57), so the explanation is omitted.

As described above, the limit monitoring process shown in FIG. 59 does not require a temporary limit flag storage area (without taking up space in the RWM storage area), and can enter a limit state after the bonus game state ends, even if the number of game media counted from the time the power is turned on (0) during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000.

If the number of gaming media, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, the machine can be put into a stop state even if the number of gaming media, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), falls below 19,000 in the game in which the bonus game state ends. By configuring the machine in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not require the player to have any strategy.

In addition, since the stoppage monitoring process in FIG. 59 does not have a temporary stoppage flag storage area, if a power outage occurs (the power is turned off) during a specific game in the bonus game state after the number of game media from the start point (0) at the time of power-on during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000 and a specific value is stored in the stoppage difference counter, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the stoppage difference counter will be reset from the specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state continues), and the game will not be stopped after the bonus game state ends.

In other words, if a power outage occurs during a bonus game state after the number of game media, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), exceeds 19,000, the game will not be stopped if the power is turned on again and the bonus game state is resumed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give the player the misunderstanding that the game has been stopped due to a power outage that occurred during a bonus.

Note that while Figure 59 has been explained as a modified version of Figures 57 and 58, it can also be applied as a modified version of Figure 56.

Specifically, in FIG. 59, the initial value is 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be capped", but when applied as a modified example of FIG. 56, the initial value is "value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter" - "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be capped". For example, if the memory area of the stop difference counter is 2 bytes, the "value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the stop difference counter" is 65535, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be capped" is 19001, and the initial value is 46534.

In addition, in Figure 59, the specific value is set to 0, but when applied as a modified example of Figure 56, the specific value is set to 65535.

As described above, the initial values and specific values in Figure 59 can be set to any predetermined value.

In addition, while a specific example was given in Figure 59, the processing order and contents are not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends, even if the number of game media since the power-on time (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, without providing a temporary stop flag storage area (without putting pressure on the RWM storage area).

In addition, FIG. 59 can also be applied to a case where the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from the base exceeds 19,000.

For example, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends. However, if the power is turned off during the bonus game state and then turned on without changing the settings, the stop difference counter will be reset from a specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state will continue), so it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped after the bonus game state ends.

<Example 1 of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display> The configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 applicable to this embodiment will be described. Figures 61 to 63 are diagrams showing an example of the configuration of the bet number display lamp 25 and the payout number display applicable to this embodiment. Note that "payout in progress" in Figures 61 to 63 refers to the period from the start to the end of the payout process, and "payout number not displayed" may refer to a situation in which the payout number display is turned off (nothing is displayed), a situation in which a predetermined display (for example, "0") is displayed on the payout number display, a situation in which information corresponding to a predetermined recoverable error is displayed on the payout number display in a predetermined recoverable error state, or a situation in which information corresponding to a setting value or information corresponding to the setting check mode is displayed in the setting check mode. In addition, in Figures 61 to 63, when there are "3" or more credits, the MAX bet switch 18 is operated to place a bet of three coins, a win is won on any of the push order bells, a high bell is won, and 10 game values are paid out.

In Figure 61, first, three bets are made by operating the MAX BET switch 18 at the timing shown in Figure 61 (1), and the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are lit. Note that the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, but this is not limiting and they may be configured to light up in the order 1 BET lamp 25a → 2 BET lamp 25b → 3 BET lamp 25c.

Then, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels begin to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 61 (2).

Then, the player stops all the reels at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (3), and the payout process is started by the winning of a high-level bell, and the payout number is displayed as "10" on the payout number display (the number may be updated one by one at a speed that is visible to the player, such as "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 9 → 10", or the number of payouts alone may be displayed, such as "0 → 10".). Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (3), a specific timer starts measuring the lighting time of the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c and the display time of the payout number on the payout number display. Note that the specific timer is a decrement timer, and when the specific timer reaches a specific value (for example, "0"), it is determined that the specific time has elapsed.

Then, the payout process ends at the timing shown in Figure 61 (4).

After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 61 (5), when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0") (when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since all reels stopped), the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c go out and the payout number display becomes invisible.

In the example shown in FIG. 61, when a predetermined time has elapsed since all the reels have stopped, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off and the payout number display is hidden.

By configuring it this way, when a player tries to play on an empty machine, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that another player is playing on the machine and avoiding playing.

<Example 2 of the configuration related to the bet number display lamp 25 and payout number display> Figure 62 shows an example in which a specific recoverable error (selector-related error (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), hopper 44-related error (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness coming loose error, etc.) occurs during measurement of a specific time after all reels have stopped.

In FIG. 62, first, three bets are made by operating the MAX BET switch 18 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (1), and the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are lit. Note that the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, but this is not limiting and they may be configured to light up in the order 1 BET lamp 25a → 2 BET lamp 25b → 3 BET lamp 25c.

Then, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels begin to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 62 (2).

Then, the player stops the reels at the timing shown in Figure 62 (3), and the payout process begins when a high-level bell is won, and the payout number indicator shows "10" as the payout number. Also, a specific timer starts measuring a specified time (for example, 1 minute) at the timing shown in Figure 62 (3).

Then, the payout process ends at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (4).

Then, at the timing of Figure 62 (5), a specific recoverable error occurs, causing an error state, and the payout number display on the payout number display becomes invisible. At this time, the payout number display is configured to display information corresponding to the specific recoverable error. For example, if there is a hopper empty error, "HE" is displayed. Also, even during the specific recoverable error, the 1 bet lamp 25 to the 3 bet lamp 25c are configured to continue to be lit. Furthermore, even during the specific recoverable error, the specific timer is configured to continue measuring the specific time.

Then, at the timing shown in Figure 62 (6), the specified recoverable error is cleared, the system returns to normal, and the payout number display again shows "10" as the payout number.

After that, when the value of a specific timer reaches a predetermined value at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (7), the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off, and the payout number display is hidden.

In addition, FIG. 62 shows a case where the value of a specific timer becomes a specific value after a specific recoverable error is cleared, but if the value of the specific timer becomes a specific value during a specific recoverable error, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off when the value of the specific timer becomes a specific value even during the specific recoverable error, and then when the specific recoverable error is cleared, the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c remain turned off and the payout number display remains hidden without displaying the payout number again.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 62, the specific timer is configured to continue measuring the specific time even during a specific recoverable error. Also, even during a specific recoverable error, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are configured to remain lit until the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value. Also, the payout number display is configured to hide the payout number and display information corresponding to the specific recoverable error during a specific recoverable error, and if the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value during a specific recoverable error, it becomes hidden without displaying the payout number again after the specific recoverable error is cleared, and if the value of the specific timer does not reach a specific value during a specific recoverable error, it displays the payout number again after the specific recoverable error is cleared, and becomes hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value.

By configuring it in this way, if a specific recoverable error occurs, an error notification can be properly executed, and the bet number display lamp 25 can be kept lit to maintain the notification of the bet number of the previous game. In addition, even if the payout number is displayed again after the specific recoverable error is cleared, it is possible to prevent excessive payout numbers from being displayed.

Also, when a predetermined recoverable error occurs and an error state occurs, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, the payout number display does not display the payout number, and displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error, and when the predetermined recoverable error is then released, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is resumed from the middle, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, the payout number display displays "10" as the payout number again, and when the value of the specific timer then reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c go out, and the payout number display does not display the payout number. Note that in this case, even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels actually stopped, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit until the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value. Specifically, at a specific timing during a specific recoverable error, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit even if a specific time has passed since all the reels actually stopped.

By configuring it in this way, even if an error occurs before a certain amount of time has elapsed since all the reels stopped, the number of bets and the amount of payouts from the previous game can be notified for an appropriate period of time.

Also, when a predetermined recoverable error occurs and an error state occurs, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off, the payout number display is hidden and displays information corresponding to the predetermined recoverable error, and when the predetermined recoverable error is subsequently released, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is newly started, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned on again, and the payout number display is again displayed as "10" as the payout number, and when the measurement of the predetermined time is subsequently started again and the value of the specific timer becomes a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off, and the display of the payout number on the payout number display is hidden. Note that in this case, even if a predetermined time has already passed since all the reels stopped at the timing when the predetermined recoverable error is released, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit until the value of the specific timer becomes a predetermined value. By configuring it in this way, the type of error can be properly notified by the payout amount during an error, and the player can be properly notified of the bet amount and payout amount of the previous game.

Also, when a specific recoverable error occurs and an error state occurs, the measurement of the specific time by a specific timer is terminated (the value of the specific timer is cleared), the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off, and the payout number display does not display the payout number and displays information corresponding to the specific recoverable error, and then when the specific recoverable error is released, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain turned off and the payout number display on the payout number display remains hidden.

By configuring it in this way, the lighting state of the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c and the payout number display can be made constant after the error is cleared.

<Example 3 of the configuration related to the bet number display lamp 25 and payout number display> Figure 63 shows an example of transitioning to the setting confirmation mode during the measurement of a predetermined time after all reels have stopped. Note that in this embodiment, the configuration is such that transitioning to the setting confirmation mode is possible when the door open signal is on and the setting key switch signal is on when no bets have been placed.

In FIG. 63, first, three bets are made by operating the MAX BET switch 18 at the timing shown in FIG. 63(1), and the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are lit. Note that the 1 BET lamp 25a, 2 BET lamp 25b, and 3 BET lamp 25c are configured to light up approximately simultaneously, but this is not limiting and they may be configured to light up in the order 1 BET lamp 25a → 2 BET lamp 25b → 3 BET lamp 25c.

Then, the start switch 12 is operated, and the reels begin to rotate at the timing shown in Figure 63 (2).

Then, the player stops the reels at the timing shown in Figure 63 (3), and the payout process begins when a high-level bell is won, and the payout number display shows "10" as the payout number. Also, at the timing shown in Figure 63 (3), a specific timer starts measuring a specified time (for example, one minute).

Then, the payout process ends at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (4).

Then, at the timing of FIG. 63 (5), the mode changes to the setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, and the payout number display continues to display the payout number. Also, when the mode changes to the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the specified time by a specific timer is stopped.

Then, at the timing of FIG. 63 (6), the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, and the payout number display continues to display the payout number. Also, when the setting confirmation mode ends, the specific timer resumes measuring the specified time.

After that, when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value at the timing of FIG. 63 (7), the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c go out and the payout number display goes off. Note that in this case, even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have actually stopped, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit and the payout number display will continue to display the payout number until the value of the specific timer reaches the predetermined value. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the setting confirmation mode, even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have actually stopped, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c will remain lit and the payout number display will continue to display the payout number.

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 63, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted during the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is resumed from the middle. Also, even during the setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamps 25a to 3 bet lamps 25c remain lit, the payout number display continues to display the payout number, and when the value of the specific timer after the setting confirmation mode ends reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamps 25a to 3 bet lamps 25c turn off and the payout number display becomes invisible. Note that, even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have actually stopped at this time, the 1 bet lamps 25a to 3 bet lamps 25c remain lit and the payout number display does not become invisible until the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value. Specifically, at a predetermined timing during the setting confirmation mode, even if a predetermined time has passed since all the reels have actually stopped, the 1 bet lamps 25a to 3 bet lamps 25c remain lit and the payout number display does not become invisible.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to continue to notify the number of bets and the number of payouts from the previous game even while the settings are being confirmed.

Also, during the setting confirmation mode, the specific timer continues to measure a predetermined time, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit, and the payout number display does not display the payout number, but displays information corresponding to the set value (displaying a number corresponding to the set value, displaying a number corresponding to the set value and turning on the DP of the payout number display, displaying a number corresponding to the set value and an alphabet such as A or C, etc.). In this case, if the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the payout number display displays information corresponding to the set value, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c turn off and the payout number display becomes non-displayed. In addition, if the value of a specific timer does not reach a specified value during the setting confirmation mode, the payout number display may be configured to display the payout number again when the setting confirmation mode ends, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off and the display of the payout number on the payout number display may be made non-display.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to continue to notify the number of bets from the previous game even during setting confirmation, and even if the payout number is displayed on the payout number display again after the setting confirmation mode ends, it is possible to prevent excessive payout numbers from being displayed.

Also, during the setting confirmation mode, the specific timer may continue to measure the predetermined time, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c may remain lit, and the payout number display may display a value corresponding to a door open error. In this case, even during the setting confirmation mode, if the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c may be turned off, the payout number display may maintain a display corresponding to a door open error, and when the setting confirmation mode ends, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c may remain turned off, and the payout number display may be hidden. Also, if the value of the specific timer does not reach a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the payout number display may display the payout number again when the setting confirmation mode ends, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c may be turned off, and the payout number display may be hidden.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to continue to notify the number of bets from the previous game even during setting confirmation, and even if the payout number is displayed on the payout number display again after the setting confirmation mode ends, it is possible to prevent excessive payout numbers from being displayed.

In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the measurement of a predetermined time by a specific timer is terminated (the value of the specific timer is cleared), and during the setting confirmation mode, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c remain lit and the payout number display displays information corresponding to the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation mode is ended, the 1 bet lamp 25a to the 3 bet lamp 25c are turned off and the payout number display is hidden.

By configuring it in this way, the lighting state of the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c and the payout number display can be made constant after the setting confirmation mode ends.

In the examples of Figures 61 to 63, the trigger for starting the measurement of a specific timer is set to be when all reels have stopped, but this is not limited, and it may be set to be when the payout process has started, or when the payout process has ended. In other words, it is sufficient to configure the specific timer to start measuring a specific time at a predetermined timing after at least all reels have stopped.

In the examples of Figures 61 to 63, a specific timer is used to measure the lighting time of the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c and the display time of the payout number by the payout number display, but this is not limited to the above, and a first timer that measures the lighting time of the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c and a second timer that measures the display time of the payout number by the payout number display may be provided separately. In this case, the time until the 1 bet lamp 25a to 3 bet lamp 25c go out and the time until the payout number display becomes invisible may be configured to be the same or different.

<<Configurations for the bet number display lamp 25 in normal mode>> One or more of the following configurations can be applied as the configuration for the bet number display lamp 25 in normal mode. Note that normal mode refers to a situation in which game progress is possible except during setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, error, etc. (1) The lamp goes out when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since all reels have stopped. (2) The lamp remains lit even after a predetermined time has passed since all reels have stopped. <<Configurations for the bet number display lamp 25 in setting confirmation mode>> One or more of the following configurations can be applied as the configuration for the bet number display lamp 25 in setting confirmation mode. (1) The lamp remains lit even during setting confirmation mode, and continues to measure a predetermined time using a specific timer during setting confirmation mode, and goes out when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value even during setting confirmation mode. (2) The light remains on during the setting check mode, continues to measure the predetermined time by the specific timer during the setting check mode, and goes off when the setting check mode ends if the setting check mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting check mode, and goes off when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value after the setting check mode ends if the setting check mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting check mode. (3) The light remains on during the setting check mode, suspends the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer when the setting check mode is entered, resumes the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer after the setting check mode ends, and goes off when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value. (4) The light remains on during the setting check mode, ends the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer when the setting check mode is entered, and goes off when the setting check mode ends. (5) The light remains on during the setting check mode, ends the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer when the setting check mode is entered, and starts measuring the predetermined time by the specific timer again after the setting check mode ends, and goes off when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value. (6) When the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the light turns off, and the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer continues during the setting check mode. If the setting check mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value during the setting check mode, the light remains off even after the setting check mode ends. If the setting check mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value during the setting check mode, the light turns on again when the setting check mode ends, and turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value. (7) When the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the light turns off, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is interrupted, the light turns on again when the setting check mode ends, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed, and the light turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value. (8) When the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the light turns off, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer ends, and the light remains off even after the setting check mode ends. (9) When the mode is changed to the setting check mode, the light turns off, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer ends, the light turns on again when the setting check mode ends, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is newly started, and the light turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches the specified value.

<<Configurations for the bet number display lamp 25 during a specified error>> One or more of the following configurations can be applied as the configurations for the bet number display lamp 25 during a specified error. (1) The lamp remains lit even during a specified error, continues to measure a specified time by a specific timer even during a specified error, and turns off when the specific timer reaches a specified value even during a specified error. (2) The lamp remains lit even during a specified error, continues to measure a specified time by a specific timer even during a specified error, and turns off when the specified error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during a specified error, and turns off when the specific error is cleared when the specific error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during a specified error. (3) The lamp remains lit even during a specified error, interrupts the measurement of a specified time by a specific timer when a specified error occurs, resumes the measurement of a specified time by a specific timer after the specified error is cleared, and turns off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value. (4) The lamp remains lit even during a specified error, ends the measurement of a specified time by a specific timer when a specified error occurs, and turns off when the specified error is cleared. (5) The light remains on even during a specified error, and when a specified error occurs, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer ends, and after the specified error is cleared, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is started again, and then goes off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value. (6) The light goes off when a specified error occurs, and continues to measure the specified time by the specific timer even during a specified error, and if the specified error is cleared after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during a specified error, the light remains off even after the specified error is cleared, and if the specified error is cleared before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during a specified error, the light turns on again when the specified error is cleared, and then goes off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value. (7) The light goes off when a specified error occurs, and stops measuring the specified time by the specific timer, and when the specified error is cleared, the light goes on again, and when the specified error is cleared, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed, and then goes off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value. (8) The light goes off when a specified error occurs, and ends measuring the specified time by the specific timer, and then goes off when the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value. (9) When a specific error occurs, the light goes out, the specific timer stops measuring the specific time, and when the specific error is cleared, the light goes out again, the specific timer starts measuring the specific time anew, and then goes out when the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value.

The bet number display lamp 25 may be configured to turn off in one or more of the following situations: (1) When the demo screen is displayed (2) When the settlement process is started (3) When the settlement process is completed (4) When the menu screen display is started (5) When the menu screen display is completed

<<Configuration for the payout number display in normal mode>> One or more of the following configurations can be applied as a configuration for the payout number display in normal mode. Note that normal mode refers to a state in which game progress is possible except in setting confirmation mode, setting change mode, during an error, etc. (1) When it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since all reels have stopped, the display is hidden. (2) The display of the payout number is maintained even after a predetermined time has passed since all reels have stopped. <<Configuration for the payout number display in setting confirmation mode>> One or more of the following configurations can be applied as a configuration for the payout number display in setting confirmation mode. (1) The display of the payout number is maintained even during setting confirmation mode, a specific timer continues to measure a predetermined time even during setting confirmation mode, and when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the display is hidden even during setting confirmation mode. (2) The display of the payout number is maintained during the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is continued during the setting confirmation mode, and if the setting confirmation mode is ended after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the display is hidden when the setting confirmation mode ends, and if the setting confirmation mode is ended before the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the display is hidden when the specific timer reaches a predetermined value after the setting confirmation mode ends. (3) The display of the payout number is maintained during the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted when the setting confirmation mode is switched to, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is resumed after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the display is hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value. (4) The display of the payout number is maintained during the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is terminated when the setting confirmation mode is switched to, and the display is hidden when the setting confirmation mode is terminated. (5) The display of the payout number is maintained during the setting confirmation mode, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is terminated when the setting confirmation mode is switched to, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is newly started after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the display is hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value thereafter. (6) When the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is terminated, and the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is continued even during the setting confirmation mode. If the setting confirmation mode is terminated after the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the display is hidden after the setting confirmation mode ends. If the setting confirmation mode is terminated before the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value during the setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is resumed when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value. (7) When the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is terminated, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is interrupted, the display of the payout number is resumed when the setting confirmation mode ends, and the display is hidden when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value. (8) When the mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is terminated, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is terminated, and the display is hidden after the setting confirmation mode ends. (9) When the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the display of the payout number is terminated, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is terminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is terminated, the payout number is displayed again, the measurement of the predetermined time by the specific timer is newly started, and when the value of the specific timer reaches a predetermined value, the display is turned off. Note that in the above (6) to (9), during the setting confirmation mode, the display may be turned off, or a display corresponding to the setting value may be displayed, or a display corresponding to the setting confirmation mode may be displayed, or a display corresponding to a door open error may be displayed.

<<Configuration of the payout number display during a specified error>> As a configuration of the payout number display during a specified error, one or more of the following configurations can be applied. (1) When a specified error occurs, a display corresponding to the specified error is displayed, and even during the specified error, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is continued, and if the error is released after the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the display becomes non-displayed when the specified error is released, and if the error is released before the value of the specific timer reaches a specified value during the specified error, the display returns to the payout number when the specified error is released, and the display becomes non-displayed when the value of the specific timer subsequently reaches the specified value. (2) When a specified error occurs, a display corresponding to the specified error is displayed, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is interrupted, and when the specified error is released, the display returns to the payout number, and the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is resumed, and when the value of the specific timer subsequently reaches the specified value, the display becomes non-displayed. (3) When a specified error occurs, a display corresponding to the specified error is displayed, the measurement of the specified time by the specific timer is terminated, and the display becomes non-displayed when the specified error is released. (4) When a specific error occurs, a display corresponding to the specific error appears, the specific timer stops measuring the specific time, and when the specific error is cleared, the payout number appears again, the specific timer starts measuring the specific time anew, and then when the value of the specific timer reaches a specific value, the display disappears.

The payout amount indicator may be configured to turn off in one or more of the following situations: (1) When the demo screen is displayed (2) When the settlement process is started (3) When the settlement process is completed (4) When the menu screen display is started (5) When the menu screen display is completed

The configurations related to the bet number display lamp 25 and the configurations related to the payout number display described above can be combined as appropriate.

<Configuration regarding the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member> We will explain the configuration regarding the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member that can be applied to this embodiment.

Figure 64 shows the positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2 that can be applied to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 64, a chute member is provided on the back surface of the front panel PS2 adjacent to the medal selector 34 to guide medals that are permitted to pass through by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44.

The medal selector 34 requires regular maintenance, such as having a staff member at the game arcade check whether there are any abnormalities in the sensor when an error related to the selector occurs, and removing dirt that has accumulated due to the passage of medals. For this reason, in this embodiment, a gap is provided between the medal selector 34 and the chute member to make maintenance work on the medal selector 34 easier.

Furthermore, on the back surface of the front panel PS2, below the medal selector 34, a return member is provided for returning medals paid out from the hopper 44 and medals rejected from the medal selector 34 to the tray 28 from the medal payout outlet 45. The return member has a medal return receiving opening (sometimes referred to as the entrance of the return passage) that receives medals rejected from the medal selector 34, and a medal payout receiving opening that receives medals paid out from the hopper 44. Furthermore, when the return member is attached to the front panel PS2, a return passage is formed in the space between the return member and the front panel PS2.

As shown in FIG. 64, the chute member has a medal guide passage for guiding medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44. The medal guide passage has a gentle downward slope from the upstream (the medal selector 34 side) to the downstream (the hopper 44 side). The medal guide passage is gently curved at approximately 90 degrees from the middle of the medal guide passage toward the hopper 44 side in order to guide medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 to the hopper 44 side. The chute member has a bottom surface portion that constitutes the bottom surface of the medal guide passage, an outer wall portion that constitutes the outer side surface of the medal guide passage, and an inner wall portion that constitutes the inner side surface of the medal guide passage, and the top of the medal guide passage is open. The chute member also has a step portion at about the middle of the medal guide passage at the bottom surface portion, the upstream side being higher than the downstream side. The chute member also has a fixing portion for fixing the chute member to the back surface of the front panel PS2 with a predetermined locking part (screw). The fixing part is located at a position protruding upward from near the end of the outer wall on the medal selector 34 side, and when the chute member is attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2, the fixing part and the specified locking part are configured to be located above the medal guide passage.

The specified locking parts that secure the chute member to the back surface of the front panel PS2 are made of metal and are configured to conduct electricity, so that if the specified locking parts come off and fall into the auxiliary tank, the full detection electrode of the auxiliary tank 46 can become electrically conductive via the specified locking parts. The specified locking parts are also made of a magnetic material such as iron and are configured to be attracted to a magnet. On the other hand, the medals used in the game are made of stainless steel and are configured not to be attracted to a magnet. By configuring it in this way, even if the specified locking parts come off due to deterioration over time or the player's actions such as hitting the surface of the front panel PS2 and fall into the hopper 44 or auxiliary tank 46, the specified locking parts alone can be easily removed by the magnet.

In addition, although not shown, a locking portion is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member for locking the chute member to the back surface of the front panel PS2. The chute member can be fixed to the back surface of the front panel PS2 by inserting a screw through the screw hole in the fixing portion while the chute member is locked to the back surface of the front panel PS2 by hooking the claw of the locking portion onto the front panel PS2. Therefore, even if the screw that fixes the chute member comes loose, the chute member is configured not to fall off the back surface of the front panel PS2.

Figures 65 and 66 are diagrams explaining the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

As shown in FIG. 65, an upper edge portion that corresponds to the edge portion surrounding the upper return receiving opening of the return member is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. In other words, the return receiving opening is not located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 65, when the thickness of a medal is "A", the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is "B", and the width of the upper edge is "C", the following configurations are satisfied: (1) B>A In other words, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is larger than the thickness of one medal. (2) B≒2×A In other words, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is approximately equal to the thickness of two medals. (3) C>A In other words, the width of the upper edge is larger than the thickness of one medal. (4) C>B In other words, the width of the upper edge is larger than the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

For this reason, it is configured so that medals can be inserted into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. In addition, since an upper edge is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, it is configured so that a medal can be placed on the upper edge and retained in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Also, as shown in FIG. 66, a medal placed on the upper edge and inserted into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will block the exit of the medal passage. Therefore, when a medal is present in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, as a medal inserted through the medal insertion port 17 moves from the exit of the medal passage toward the medal guide passage of the chute member, it will collide with a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member and stop, becoming stuck at the exit of the medal passage. At this time, the inserted medal causes insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 to remain on (it may be configured so that only insertion sensor 2 remains on), so that an error related to the selector is detected by the main control means, and a medal retention error is reported as an error related to the selector.

As shown in Figure 66, when an inserted medal collides with a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member and becomes stuck at the exit of the medal passage, the upper end of the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is located higher than the center of the inserted medal. Therefore, the inserted medal cannot pass over the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

By configuring it in this way, it is not possible to directly detect the presence of a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, but by being notified of an error related to the selector, it is possible to indirectly know that a medal is in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member.

Furthermore, by configuring it in this way, when an amusement store clerk checks whether the medal selector 34 is properly detecting an error related to the selector, if the clerk inserts a medal through the medal insertion port 17 with the medal inserted in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the inserted medal will not be able to pass through the exit of the medal passage due to the medal inserted in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, so a situation can be created in which the inserted medal remains detected by insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2, making it easy to check whether the selector error is being properly detected.

As mentioned above, the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member is larger than the thickness of one medal, so that a medal placed by an arcade staff member in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will not get stuck and become impossible to remove.

Figure 67 shows the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, and the positional relationship with the hopper 44 when the front panel PS2 is closed.

As shown in Figure 67, when the front panel PS2 is closed, the hopper 44 is arranged below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member. Therefore, when the medal is placed on the upper edge and remains in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the front panel PS2 is closed,
Even if the impact causes medals to fall from the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the fallen medals can be stored in the hopper 44.

By configuring it in this way, even if an amusement store employee forgets that they have placed a medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member to check whether the medal selector 34 is properly detecting an error related to the selector, and closes the front panel PS2, causing the medal to fall, the fallen medal will enter the medal return receiving port and will not be discharged from the medal payout outlet 45 to the tray 28, so it is possible to prevent the amusement store employee from mistakenly giving the medal used in the operation to a player.

In addition, by lowering the position where the return member is attached, the medal in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member will not block the medal passage even when the medal is placed on the upper edge and remains in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member (the top of the medal will be discarded below the medal passage between the medal selector 34 and the chute member even when the medal is placed on the upper edge), and the medal that has been inserted and allowed to pass by the medal selector 34 can pass beyond the exit of the medal passage and pass through the medal guide passage. By configuring it in this way, even if a store employee accidentally drops a medal while replenishing medals and the medal gets stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, it is possible to insert the medal, so that the progress of the game is not hindered.

Figure 68 is a diagram explaining the radius of the medal, the height of the medal guide passage, the height of the step of the medal guide passage, and the width of the medal guide passage.

As described above, the medal guide passage is gently curved at approximately 90 degrees to guide medals permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 toward the hopper 44. Therefore, when a medal permitted to pass by the medal selector 34 passes through the medal guide passage, it comes into contact with the outer and inner walls of the medal guide passage, causing it to decelerate.

In this embodiment, therefore, a step is provided at a position about halfway along the medal guide passage on the bottom surface, with the upstream side being higher than the downstream side. The medal is then dropped as it passes through the step, and the medal, which has decelerated due to contact with the outer and inner walls of the medal guide passage, can be accelerated.

By configuring it in this way, even if multiple medals are inserted at once through the medal insertion port 17, the inserted medals can be stored in the hopper 44 without becoming stuck in the medal guide passage.

Furthermore, when the thickness of the medal is "A" as shown in FIG. 65, the radius of the medal is "D" as shown in FIG. 68, the height of the medal guide passage is "E", the height of the step of the medal guide passage is "F", and the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G", the following configurations are satisfied: (1) G>A That is, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is greater than the thickness of the medal. (2) G<2×D That is, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the diameter of the medal. (3) F<D That is, the height of the step of the medal guide passage is smaller than the radius of the medal. (4) F<E That is, the height of the step of the medal guide passage is smaller than the height of the medal guide passage.

By configuring as described above in (1) and (2), when a medal passes through the medal guide passage, it can pass through while rolling in an upright position, instead of stopping halfway through the medal guide passage lying sideways.

Furthermore, by configuring as in (3) and (4) above, it is possible to accelerate the medal by the step in the medal guide passage, while preventing the medal from flying out of the medal guide passage due to the impact of the medal falling when passing through the step in the medal guide passage. In addition to the configurations in (3) and (4), it is also possible to make E>D (the height of the medal guide passage is greater than the radius of the medal). In this case, it is possible to more reliably prevent the medal from flying out of the medal guide passage due to the impact of the medal falling when passing through the step in the medal guide passage.

Figure 69 is a diagram explaining the position and dimensions of the locking parts that secure the chute member when the fixing portion of the chute member is fixed to the front panel PS2 by a specified locking part (screw).

As shown in Figure 69, when the chute member is fixed to the front panel PS2 with a screw, a medal guide passage is located vertically below the screw that fixes the chute member, and a medal return receiving opening is not located. Therefore, even if the screw that fixes the chute member comes loose and falls, the screw that fixes the chute member is configured not to come out of the tray 28 from the medal return receiving opening through the return passage and medal payout opening 45.

By configuring it in this way, even if the screw that secures the chute member comes loose and falls, it is possible to prevent a player from cutting their hand by grabbing the screw that secures the chute member together with the medal with too much force. It is also possible to prevent the screw that secures the chute member from flying out of the gaming machine due to the impact of the fall and being lost.

As mentioned above, the chute member is configured so that it can be engaged with the rear surface of the front panel PS2 by the engaging portion of the chute member, so that the chute member will not fall off the rear surface of the front panel PS2 even if the screw that secures the chute member comes loose.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69, when the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G", the total length of the screw (also referred to as the longitudinal length) is "H", and the diameter of the screw head (also referred to as the lateral length) is "I", the following configuration is satisfied: (1) G<H In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the total length of the screw that secures the chute member. (2) G<I In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is smaller than the diameter of the screw head that secures the chute member.

By configuring it in this way, even if the screw that secures the chute member comes loose and falls, the screw that secures the chute member will not get into the medal guide passage, so the screw that secures the chute member will not obstruct the passage of medals.

Alternatively, it may be configured so that "G<H" and "G>I". In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage may be configured to be smaller than the overall length of the screw that secures the chute member and larger than the diameter of the screw head that secures the chute member.

When configured this way, if the screw that secures the chute member comes loose and falls, there is a possibility that it may get caught in the medal guide passage. However, even if the screw gets caught in the medal guide passage, it will get caught in the middle of the guide passage and stop, so the loose screw will not get lost.

Alternatively, it may be configured so that "G>H" and "G>I". In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage may be configured to be larger than the overall length of the screw that secures the chute member and larger than the diameter of the screw head that secures the chute member.

When configured this way, if the screw that secures the chute member comes loose and falls, it will get into the medal guide passage, but the loose screw will pass through the medal guide passage and fall, so it is possible to prevent the passage of medals from being impeded.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fixing portion of the chute member is configured to be located at a position that protrudes upward from the outer wall of the medal guide passage, but this is not limited to the above. The outer wall of the medal guide passage may be configured to have a recess that is recessed toward the front panel PS2 side, and a screw hole may be provided in the recess to serve as the fixing portion. In this case, it is preferable that the depth of the recess is greater than the overall length "H" of the screw that fixes the chute member. By configuring it in this way, even if the screw that fixes the chute member becomes loose, it will not get into the medal guide passage and obstruct the passage of medals.

The medal insertion port 17 also has a placement section that can hold multiple medals stacked and vertically oriented, and is configured so that multiple medals stacked and vertically oriented on the placement section can be inserted continuously from the medal insertion port 17.

Then, when the thickness of the medal is "A", the maximum width of the medal guide passage is "G", and the number of medals that can be stacked and placed vertically on the placement section is "J", it is configured so that "G < (A x J) ÷ 2". In other words, the maximum width of the medal guide passage is configured to be smaller than half the thickness of the number of medals that can be stacked and placed vertically on the placement section.

In addition, when the return member is attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2, the upper edge may be configured to gently incline toward the hopper 44. By configuring it in this way, even if a medal rests on the upper edge and falls into the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, it will roll down, so that medals in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member do not obstruct the passage of the inserted medal, and errors related to the selector are less likely to occur.

Figure 70 shows another form of positional relationship when the medal selector 34, chute member, and return member are attached to the back surface of the front panel PS2 applicable to this embodiment. The size of the medal return receiving opening is different from that in Figure 64, but the other configurations are the same as in Figure 64.

As shown in Figure 70, a medal return receiving opening is located vertically below the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, rather than at the upper edge. In the example shown in Figure 70, the length and width of the medal return receiving opening are designed to be greater than the diameter of the medal. With this configuration, even if an arcade staff member accidentally drops a medal while replenishing medals and the medal gets stuck in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member, the medal will pass through the return passage from the medal return receiving opening and be discharged from the medal payout outlet 45 to the tray 28. This prevents medals in the gap between the medal selector 34 and the chute member from obstructing the passage of inserted medals, and also makes it less likely that selector-related errors will occur.

<Explanation of Error History> The display of error history applicable to this embodiment will be explained. The error history can be displayed on the LCD during the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, an administrator menu screen (sometimes called a setting confirmation screen) is displayed on the LCD. On this administrator menu screen, multiple administrator menus are displayed, and "Error History" is provided as one of the items in the administrator menu. When "Error History" is selected by operating the sub cross key switch 21, the sub switch 20 is operated (when the sub switch 20 is turned on), the error history is displayed on the LCD. Note that in this embodiment, when the door open signal is on and the setting key switch signal is turned on when no bet is made, the setting confirmation mode can be entered.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error notification start command is received from the main control means, the sub-control means notifies an error, and the error content and the time when the error occurred are linked and stored as an error history in a specified storage area of the sub-control RAM controlled by the sub-control means. Note that information regarding the time when the error occurred is configured to be obtained, for example, using an RTC (real-time clock) function provided in the gaming machine.

The error history is configured so that it will not be erased when the power is turned on or off or when settings are changed. The error history is also configured to be able to store a specified number of histories (for example, 120), and when the specified number is exceeded, the oldest error history will be erased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation mode, but the error history may also be checked in the setting change mode.

The error history may be displayed on the LCD when the sub-switch 20 is operated on the administrator menu screen, or the error history may be displayed on the LCD when the system transitions to the setting confirmation mode, or the LCD may be used as a touch panel so that the error history is displayed on the LCD when the error history item is touched on the administrator menu screen.

Furthermore, the operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated to select an item displayed on the administrator menu screen is configured to be different from the operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated to select an item displayed on the user menu screen. Note that the operation sound of the sub-cross key switch 21 may be configured not to be output on the administrator menu screen, so that the sound output from the speaker S is different from that on the user menu screen. The operation sound output from the speaker S when the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated on the administrator menu screen may be a sound that is not output at all except on the administrator menu screen. Furthermore, the user menu screen may be configured to output a predetermined background music from the speaker S, but the administrator menu screen may be configured to be in a silent state in which no background music is output. By configuring in this way, the difference between the user menu screen and the administrator menu screen can be easily recognized, and operational errors by the administrator can be prevented.

Figure 71 shows an example of an error history screen. Note that in Figure 71, door open corresponds to the state where the door open signal is on, and door closed corresponds to the state where the door open signal is off.

As shown in Figure 71, the error history screen displays the details of each error along with the time when it occurred.

The error history screen is also configured to display the most recent errors in descending order.

In addition, opening/closing the front door, turning the power on/off, starting/ending a setting change, and starting/ending a setting check are not errors, but are configured to be displayed in the error history.

The system is also configured to display the start and end points of each error content, such as the occurrence and cancellation of an error, the start and end of a setting change, and the start and end of a setting check, as an error history. However, this is not limited to this, and the system may be configured to display only the start point of an error content as an error history.

The error history is configured to display up to 12 errors per page, and the pages of the error history screen can be switched by operating the sub-cross key switch 21.

Note that in this embodiment, the "occurrence time" of each error is displayed on the error history screen, such as "007 Medal retention error occurred 2021/11/11 10:01:01" in Figure 71, but in reality, the "time when notification started" of each error is stored in the error history as the "occurrence time" and displayed on the error history screen. Also, the content of the error and the time when the error occurred are stored as the error history at the time when notification of the error started (the time when the sub-control means received the error notification start command), rather than the time when the error occurred (the time when the error was detected).

This configuration is because there may be cases where an error is detected but not notified, such as while the reels are spinning, i.e., there may be a time lag between the detection of an error and the notification of the error. For example, if a specific error (such as an error related to the hopper 44 or an error related to the selector) is detected during the rotation of the reels in one game, the error is not notified at the timing when the specific error is detected (the specific error occurs), but the specific error state occurs at a specific timing after the end of the game (such as when all the reels have stopped or when the payout process has ended), preventing the game from progressing and notifying the specific error. In this case, if the player leaves his seat while the reels are spinning and it takes about three minutes to stop all the reels, there will be a delay of about three minutes between the detection of the error and the notification of the error. Even in such cases, by displaying the time when the error notification started as the time when the error occurred, there is no difference between the timing of the error notification and the time when the error occurred on the error history screen, which prevents the gaming facility staff from mistakenly assuming that there is a malfunction in the gaming machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Furthermore, if a specified error is detected while the reels are spinning in one game as described above, and the power is turned off before the game ends, the power outage occurs before the game ends, and the specified error and the time when the specified error occurred are not stored in the error history. If the game then transitions to the setting change mode after the power is restored, the information about the specified error is erased in the initialization process in the setting change process, so that the specified error is not notified even after the setting change mode ends, and is not stored as error history. With this configuration, errors that are not notified are not stored as error history and are not displayed on the error history screen, so that the notified error can be consistent with the error history, and it is possible to prevent game store staff from mistakenly assuming that there is a malfunction in the gaming machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

Furthermore, the error history screen may be configured to display error history in a predetermined color (e.g., red), and other history (power on/off, start/end of setting changes, etc.) in a specific color (e.g., white or black). By configuring it in this way, the error history can be displayed more prominently than other history, making it easier to check the error history.

In addition, instead of displaying the start/end of setting changes and the start/end of setting checks in the error history, a separate item called "setting change history" can be set up so that the history of the start/end of setting changes and the start/end of setting checks are displayed together with the time in the setting change history. By configuring it in this way, the content displayed on the error history screen can be simplified, so that arcade staff will not overlook anything when checking the error history or setting change history.

In addition, the setting change completion history may be displayed as, for example, "Setting change completed (6)" (where (6) indicates the setting value), so that the setting value set in the setting change process can also be confirmed in the setting change history. By configuring it in this way, if it is suspected that the setting value has been illegally rewritten, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the previous setting change process, thereby confirming whether or not there was any illegality.

Also, the time that has elapsed since the power was turned on may be displayed in the error history, starting from the time when the power was turned on. Specifically, if the error contents occur in the order of "power on" → "door open" → "door close" → "medal retention error occurred", the error history screen may be configured to display the following (starting from the most recent history) from the top of the screen: "medal retention error occurred: 0 hours 10 minutes 0 seconds elapsed" → "door close: 0 hours 0 minutes 10 seconds elapsed" → "door open: 0 hours 0 minutes 1 second elapsed" → "power on: 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds elapsed". The time that has elapsed since the power was turned on is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation process using the time when the power was turned on and the time when each error content occurred, which are stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-control RAM. By configuring in this way, the time from when the power was turned on to when the error content occurred can be intuitively grasped.

The error history may be configured to display the time that has passed since the error occurred. If the error occurred in the order of "power on" → "door open" → "door close" → "medal retention error occurred" ..., the error history may be configured to display the following (from the top of the error history, starting from the most recent): "medal retention error occurred: 0 hours, 0 minutes, 0 seconds ago" → "door close: 0 hours, 9 minutes, 50 seconds ago" → "door open: 0 hours, 9 minutes, 59 seconds ago" → "power on: 0 hours, 10 minutes, 0 seconds ago". The time that has passed since the error occurred is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation process using the time that each error occurred, which is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub-control RAM, and the current time obtained by the RTC function. By configuring in this way, the time that has passed since the error occurred can be intuitively grasped. When configuring in this way, if a predetermined period (for example, 31 days) or more has passed since the error occurred, it is preferable to display "predetermined period or more has passed".

Figure 72 shows an example of the error history screen when the front door is opened and closed while the error history screen is displayed. In Figure 72 (1), the front door is open, and "Start setting confirmation" is displayed in 001 (latest error content). When the front door is then closed, the door open signal turns off, the error history is updated, and "Door closed" is displayed in 001. When the front door is then opened again, the door open signal turns on, the error history is updated, and "Door open" is displayed in 001.

In this way, if the front door is opened or closed while the error history screen is displayed, the error history related to opening and closing of the front door is updated in real time each time the opening/closing of the front door is detected, and the error history screen is also updated.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to accurately determine whether the error history display is working correctly.

Note that while the error history screen is displayed, the error history is updated each time the opening/closing of the front door is detected, but the error history screen can be configured not to be updated, and then the error history screen is updated when the display of the error history screen is ended and the error history screen is displayed again. By configuring it in this way, the error history screen will not be updated even if the front door is opened or closed while checking the error history, so that if you want to check old error history, old error history will not be unintentionally erased from the error history screen by opening or closing the front door.

In addition, while the error history screen is displayed, the opening/closing of the front door is detected, but if the timing at which the opening/closing of the front door is detected is less than a predetermined time (about one minute) since the previous error history update, no error history is recorded, and if a predetermined time has passed since the previous error history update, the error history is updated and the error history screen is also updated. In other words, the opening/closing of the front door while the error history screen is displayed may be configured so that it is not recorded in the error history if a predetermined time has not passed since the previous error history update, and is recorded in the error history if the predetermined time has passed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately determine whether the display of the error history is operating correctly. Also, since opening/closing of the front door before a predetermined time has passed since the error history update is not recorded in the error history, it is possible to prevent old error history from being erased from the error history screen even in cases where the front door is repeatedly opened and closed unintentionally.

The system may also be configured so that opening/closing of the front door is not detected while the error history screen is displayed, or so that it is detected but not stored as error history. By configuring it in this way, the error history screen will not be updated even if the front door is opened or closed while checking the error history, so that if you want to check old error history, old error history will not be unintentionally erased by opening or closing the front door.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the opening of the front door is detected (when the door opening signal is turned on), a predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal as a display corresponding to a door opening error (such as "The door is open"), "dE" is displayed on the payout number display, and a door opening sound is output from the speaker S. However, when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the display of the predetermined image is ended and the output of the door opening sound is stopped (or the volume is set to "0"). Note that, even after entering the setting confirmation mode, the payout number display may be configured to continue displaying the door opening error, or the display corresponding to the door opening error by the payout number display may be ended when entering the setting confirmation mode. Also, when entering the setting confirmation mode and the administrator menu screen is displayed, the output of the door opening sound may be continued, and the output of the door opening sound may be stopped when the error history screen is displayed. By configuring in this way, the administrator menu settings and error history in the setting confirmation mode can be checked in a quiet environment.

The door-opening sound may be configured to continue to be output from the speaker S even during the setting confirmation mode or while the error history screen is displayed. By configuring it in this way, even if an amusement store employee forgets to exit the setting change mode and leaves the gaming machine, the employee can be notified by the door-opening sound.

In addition, in this embodiment, "Time setting" is provided as one of the setting items in the administrator menu, and when "Time setting" is selected by operating the sub-cross key switch 21 and the sub-switch 20 is operated (when the sub-switch 20 is turned on), a time setting screen is displayed on the LCD, and the time can be changed on the time setting screen.

Figure 73 is a diagram showing an example of a time setting screen. Figure 73 shows an example in which the time setting screen is displayed when the current time on the gaming machine is 11:11:11 on November 11, 2021.

As shown in FIG. 73, when the time setting screen is displayed, the current time is displayed on the LCD. The time setting screen is configured so that the values of each of the items "year," "month," "day," "hour," "minute," and "second" can be changed, and the time setting screen is displayed with the "year" item selected initially. On the time setting screen, the cursor can be moved to the item to be changed by operating (pressing) the left switch and right switch of the sub cross key switch 21, and the value of the item to be changed can be changed by operating (pressing) the up switch and down switch of the sub cross key switch 21. The change to the current time is then confirmed by operating the sub switch 20, and the changed time is set as the current time.

Note that the current time displayed when switching to the time setting screen is configured not to be updated even as time passes on the time setting screen, but internally the current time is configured to continue to be measured.

In addition, when the changed time is confirmed on the time setting screen, the number of seconds in the current time is reset to "0" when the changed time is confirmed, and then the clock starts to count the current time.

The system is also configured to be able to detect the opening and closing of the front door even while setting the time, and is also configured to store this in the error history. Here, if the front door is opened before confirming the change to the current time on the time setting screen, the change to the current time has not been confirmed, so the door open history is configured to be stored based on the current time before the change. Also, if the front door is closed before confirming the change to the current time on the time setting screen, the change to the current time has not been confirmed, so the door closed history is configured to be stored based on the current time before the change. By configuring it in this way, the accurate time can be stored as error history even if time setting is ended without confirming the change to the current time.

The error history screen is configured to display the most recent errors in descending order according to the order in which they were stored in the error history. For example, suppose that a first error occurs when the error history is not displayed, and the first error is notified when the current time is "t1", and then, after the first error is cleared, a time earlier than "t1" is set as the current time on the time setting screen, and then a second error occurs and the second error is notified when the current time is "t2" (a time earlier than t1). In this case, the time when the first error occurred is "t1", and the time when the second error occurred is "t2", both of which are stored in the error history, but the error history screen is configured to display the second error as the most recent error. With this configuration, the order of the error history cannot be intentionally changed by setting the time, and it is possible to reliably leave a history of fraud.

Figure 74 is a list of the error history display patterns when multiple errors occur. In the setting check mode, errors are detected just as when the reels are spinning, but the error is not notified. For example, if a specific error (such as an error related to the hopper 44 or an error related to the selector) is detected during the setting check mode, the specific error is not notified at the time when it is detected (when the specific error occurs), but is notified at a specific time after the setting check mode ends, and the error content and the time when the error occurred (the time when the error was notified) are stored as error history. In addition, the error is not cleared even if the reset switch is operated during the setting check mode.

In Figure 74, "Checking" corresponds to the setting confirmation mode, and "Normal" corresponds to a state in which errors can be reported when the reels are spinning or when not in setting confirmation mode. "Combined and reported" corresponds to reporting multiple errors that have not been reported together, for example, "First error and second error occurred." "Combined and displayed" corresponds to the error history when errors are reported together, for example, "First error and second error occurred." "First error" and "second error" correspond to errors related to the hopper 44 and errors related to the selector, respectively, and the first error is set to have a higher priority in error reporting than the second error.

We will now explain pattern 1 in Figure 74. First, if errors occur during confirmation in the order of a first error → a second error, the first error is notified after the setting confirmation mode ends, and then the second error is notified when the first error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display the second error occurrence → first error occurrence from the top (starting with the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur during confirmation in the order of second error → first error, the first error is notified after the setting confirmation mode ends, and then the second error is notified when the first error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display second error occurrence → first error occurrence from the top (starting with the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur in the order of first error → second error during normal operation, the first error is notified immediately after the first error occurs, and then the second error is notified after the first error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of first error occurrence → second error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display the second error occurrence → first error occurrence from the top (starting with the most recent history).

Next, if errors occur in the order of second error → first error during normal operation, the second error is notified immediately after the second error occurs, and then the first error is notified after the second error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of second error occurrence → first error occurrence, and the error history screen is also configured to display the first error occurrence → second error occurrence from the top (starting with the most recent history).

In this way, in pattern 1 of FIG. 74, if multiple errors are detected during the setting check mode, the errors are notified in order of the highest priority after the setting check mode ends, and if multiple errors occur during normal play, the errors are notified in the order in which they occurred. Even with this configuration, the error history is stored in the order in which the errors were notified, not in the order in which they occurred, so that the order in which the errors were notified can be consistent with the order in which the error history is stored, preventing game arcade staff from mistakenly assuming that there is a malfunction in the game machine or that some kind of fraud has occurred.

We will now explain pattern 2 in Figure 74. First, if errors occur in the order of a first error and then a second error during confirmation, the first error and the second error are combined and notified after the setting confirmation mode ends. In this case, the error history stores the combined error content of the first error and the second error, and the error history screen is also configured to display the combined content of the first error and the second error.

Next, if errors occur during confirmation in the order of second error → first error, the first error and second error are combined and notified after the setting confirmation mode ends. In this case, the error history stores the combined error content of the first error and second error, and the error history screen is also configured to display the combined content of the first error and second error.

When multiple errors are reported together, the system may be configured so that a single error clearing operation (operation of the reset switch) can clear the multiple errors reported together, or it may be configured so that an error clearing operation is required for each error reported together.

In addition, if errors occur in the order of a first error → a second error during normal operation, or if errors occur in the order of a second error → a first error during normal operation, the same applies as pattern 1 in FIG. 74.

When configured in this way, multiple errors can be notified at once, simplifying the content of the error notification.

For example, if errors occur in the order of third error → fourth error (with the same error notification priority as the third error) during the setting check mode, the third error is notified after the setting check mode ends, and then the fourth error is notified when the third error is cleared. In this case, the error history is stored in the order of occurrence of the third error → occurrence of the fourth error, and the error history screen is also configured to display the fourth error → occurrence of the third error from the top (starting with the most recent history). In this way, even if multiple errors occur during setting check, if the error notification priorities are the same, the errors are notified in the order in which they occurred, and are stored in the error history in the order in which they occurred.

The system may also be configured not to detect errors during the setting confirmation mode. If configured in this way, even if an error occurs, the error will not be reported, and so the error will not remain in the error history. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent an administrator from mistakenly assuming that the gaming machine is broken or that some kind of fraud has occurred, due to an error that has not been reported remaining in the error history.

In addition, if an error is detected while the error history screen is displayed during setting confirmation mode, the system may be configured to update the error history in real time and update the error history screen as well. By configuring it in this way, the administrator can immediately know that an error has occurred even if the error history is being displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a specific error occurs, the specific error and a monitoring error of the sensor that detects the specific error may be notified. Note that a "specific error" is an error whose detailed cause can be identified, and a "monitoring error of the sensor that detects the specific error" is an error whose detailed cause cannot be identified. For example, when a hopper congestion error occurs, the hopper congestion error and the hopper 44
The device may be configured to notify the user of a dispensing sensor monitoring error, which indicates that any of the errors related to the dispensing sensor has occurred.

Here, if a hopper jam error occurs during normal operation (when an error can be reported when the reels are not rotating or the setting confirmation mode is not in effect), a hopper jam error and a payout sensor monitoring error are reported, and the error history is stored in the order of payout sensor monitoring error occurrence → hopper jam error occurrence, and the error history screen may be configured to display from the top (starting with the newest history) as hopper jam error occurrence → payout sensor monitoring error occurrence. In addition, the error history when the hopper jam error is cleared at this time may be stored in the order of payout sensor monitoring error clear → hopper jam error clear, and the error history screen may be configured to display from the top (starting with the newest history) as hopper jam error clear → payout sensor monitoring error clear. In other words, if a hopper jam error occurs during normal operation and the error history screen is displayed after the hopper jam error is cleared, the following may be displayed from the top (starting with the newest history) as hopper jam error clear → payout sensor monitoring error clear → hopper jam error occurrence → payout sensor monitoring error occurrence.

On the other hand, if a hopper congestion error occurs while the error history screen is displayed during the setting confirmation mode, a hopper congestion error and a dispensing sensor monitoring error are notified after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the error history is stored in the order of hopper congestion error occurrence → dispensing sensor monitoring error occurrence, and when the error history screen is displayed again, the error history screen may be configured to display from the top (starting from the newest history) as dispensing sensor monitoring error occurrence → hopper congestion error occurrence. In addition, the error history when the hopper congestion error is cleared at this time may be stored in the order of dispensing sensor monitoring error clear → hopper congestion error clear, and the error history screen may be configured to display from the top (starting from the newest history) as hopper congestion error clear → dispensing sensor monitoring error clear → dispensing sensor monitoring error occurrence → hopper congestion error occurrence. In other words, if a hopper congestion error occurs during the setting confirmation mode and the error history screen is displayed again after the hopper congestion error is cleared, the error history screen may be configured to display from the top (starting from the newest history) as hopper congestion error clear → dispensing sensor monitoring error clear → dispensing sensor monitoring error occurrence → hopper congestion error occurrence.

By configuring it this way, if a specific error occurs while the error history screen is displayed, when the error history screen is displayed again, it will be displayed from the top (starting with the most recent history) as follows: specific error, then monitoring error of the sensor that detected the specific error. This means that even if fraud is attempted in order to learn the type of error, the type of error will not be immediately revealed.

In addition, by configuring it in this way, the error resolution history on the error history screen will be the same both during normal operation and when the error history screen is displayed, so an accurate history can be kept.

<Time required for various processes> This embodiment describes the time required for various processes to realize various operations.

The clock frequency of the main control CPU included in the main control chip mounted on the main control board in this embodiment is 10 MHz, so the time per cycle, which is the smallest unit of the number of cycles indicating the execution time of various instructions, is 0.0001 ms. In other words, the time that elapses due to the execution of an instruction is determined according to the number of cycles required to fetch and execute the instruction.

For example, in the LD instruction (LD_r,n) for storing a value n in a register r, the number of cycles is 2, which means that 0.0002 ms elapses when the LD instruction is executed.

In order to execute a software module consisting of multiple instructions, the time required is equal to the total number of cycles defined for each instruction, so the number of cycles is an important parameter when creating a software module.

<<Explanation regarding the lighting control of the bet number display lamp>> Here, regarding the lighting process of the bet number display lamp, we will explain the case where a replay is determined as the internal drawing result by the internal drawing means of a specified game that has been started with three bets in a specified game state, and three bets are automatically bet as a process to grant a replay after the specified game ends.

The lighting control of the bet number display lamp is controlled by dynamic lighting control. Specifically, the execution cycle of the interrupt process is 2.235 ms, the parts to be lit are changed for each interrupt process, and the parts to be lit are rotated through multiple interrupt processes (five interrupt processes in this embodiment). For example, when the value of the LED display counter is 1, the upper and lower digits of the credit number display are lit and the other LEDs are not lit; when the value of the LED display counter is 2, the upper and lower digits of the acquired number display are lit and the other LEDs are not lit; when the value of the LED display counter is 3, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit and the other LEDs are not lit; when the value of the LED display counter is 4, the replay lamp is lit and the other LEDs are not lit; when the value of the LED display counter is 5, the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are lit and the other LEDs are not lit.

By dynamically controlling all lamps managed by the main control means, power consumption can be reduced and lamp wear can be reduced compared to static lighting, in which the lamps are always on. In the case of dynamic lighting control, the various lamps will blink at high speed, but because the various lamps are periodically turned on again before they are completely turned off, it feels to the human eye like they are still on. In other words, 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts) after a specific lamp (e.g., bed 1 lamp, bed 2 lamp, bed 3 lamp) is turned off by interrupt processing, the specific lamp is not yet completely turned off. It takes approximately 20 ms from when the specific lamp is turned off until it is completely turned off.

Note that the combination of the LED display counter value and the target lamp is just an example, and the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp do not have to be lit when the LED display counter value is the same (the 1 BET lamp may be lit when the LED display counter value is 1, the 2 BET lamp may be lit when the LED display counter value is 2, and the 3 BET lamp may be lit when the LED display counter value is 3, etc.). Lamps lit with this kind of dynamic lighting control are also treated as "lit" here.

Also, the lighting control of the bet number display lamps may be controlled by static lighting control. In this case, while the 1 to 3 bet lamps are lit, the value of the RWM area for lighting display of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will not become 0 in the interrupt processing, but when the 1 to 3 bet lamps are turned off as in the dynamic lighting processing, the value of the RWM area for lighting display of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stored as 0 in the interrupt processing. Furthermore, as in the case of dynamic lighting control, it takes about 20 ms for the bet lamps to be completely turned off after the value of the RWM area for lighting display of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stored as 0 in the interrupt processing.

The bet number display lamp remains lit during the specified game described above. In other words, during a game that has started with three bets, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit. When the specified game ends, the game end check process of the main game progress in FIG. 9 is executed. Note that the game end check process may be referred to as the process related to the end of one game. Furthermore, the game value input process executed thereafter may be referred to as the process related to the start of one game. Furthermore, when indicating either the game end check process or the game value input process, it may be referred to as the predetermined process executed at a predetermined timing after all the reels have stopped.

There are multiple possible patterns for the lighting of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp after a given game has ended, so each pattern will be explained below.

<<Pattern 1: The input number display data clear process included in the game end check process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp display memory areas to 0, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp light up simultaneously in the automatic input process included in the game value input process>>

The game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 (inserted number display data clear process). In this way, by once clearing the values in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be lit.

Note that even if the game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the value of the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will not turn off immediately. This is because the interrupt process executes control over the lighting of various LEDs, and the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, and if it is 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off. Note that even when the control over the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a certain lamp switches from on to off, it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to be turned off, so there will be a slight lag before a person actually feels that the lamp has been turned off.

For this reason, even if the game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps to 0 (a process to turn them off), in order for the lights to actually be turned off, it will take a total of the time from when the game end check process executes the process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps to 0 until the interrupt process stops the output of the lighting signal for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, plus the time until the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are actually completely turned off.

After the game completion check process is executed in the game progress main process, the game value insertion process is executed. In the automatic insertion process executed in the game value insertion process, if replay is activated, the number of inserted medals is stored and the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating lighting) (lighting process).

Note that even if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for indicating the lighting of the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp to 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will not light up immediately. Instead, the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for indicating the lighting of the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp, and if it is 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will light up. Similarly, there will be a slight lag until the lamps are fully lit depending on the signal transmission time and the lighting time of the lamps.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the game end check process for the game in which the replay was won are turned off, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned on during the automatic insertion process.

In this configuration, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up by an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off by the execution of a game end check process for a game in which a replay is won. In other words, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up by an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off after the value of the RWM's memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is cleared to 0 by the execution of a game end check process for a game in which a replay is won.

Here, Figure 90 shows the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM, and the lighting state of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis of Figure 90 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 90 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM becomes 0 during the game end check process.

Timing T2 in Figure 90 is the timing when the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp start to turn off in the interrupt process executed after the game end check process.

Timing T3 in Figure 90 is the timing when the value of the memory area for lighting the RWM 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 90 is the timing when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp start to light up during the interrupt process executed after the automatic insertion process.

Timing T5 in Figure 90 is when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T4 in FIG. 90 vary depending on the timing of starting the interrupt process. For example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check process. Also, for example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check process. Also, for example, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps is set to 1 in the automatic insertion process. For example, if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for lighting the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp is set to 1 in the automatic insertion process, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until the control related to lighting the various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms.

As shown in FIG. 90, when a replay is won, the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stored as 1 in the automatic insertion process before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off after the game end check process, making it possible to turn on the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely turned off.

To configure in this way, it is necessary to design the total time (cycle number A x 0.0001 ms) from when the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp is set to 0 in the game end check process until the game value input process, the time (cycle number B x 0.0001 ms) from when the game value input process starts until the process for setting the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp to 1 by the automatic input process executed when replay is activated, and 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2 times), which is the maximum value for two interrupt processes, to be less than the approximately 20 ms it takes for the lamps to be completely turned off. Note that in order to make the lamps appear to be continuously lit (not turned off), it is preferable to design it to be less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. The maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time for the interrupt process when turning off the lamp and the interrupt process when turning on the lamp.

In other words, the following holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B must be less than 155,300. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), the following holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the total number of cycles A + B is set to approximately 1,000, so both relationships hold.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp before the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are completely turned off.

<<Pattern 2: The input number display data clear process included in the game end check process clears (initializes) the values in the memory areas for the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps, and then the automatic input process included in the game value input process turns on the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp in sequence>>

The game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the values in the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 (inserted number display data clear process). In this way, by once clearing the values in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be lit.

Note that even if the game end check process executes a process to clear (initialize) the value of the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will not turn off immediately. This is because the interrupt process executes control over the lighting of various LEDs, and the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, and if it is 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off. Note that even when the control over the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a certain lamp switches from on to off, it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to be turned off, so there will be a slight lag before a person actually feels that the lamp has been turned off.

For this reason, even if the game end check process executes the process of clearing (initializing) the values in the RWM 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting display memory area to 0, in order for the lights to actually be turned off, it will take the time from the time the game end check process executes the process of clearing (initializing) the values in the RWM 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp lighting display memory area to 0 until the interrupt process stops the output of the lighting signal for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, plus the time until the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are actually completely turned off.

After the game completion check process is executed in the game progress main process, the game value insertion process is executed. The automatic insertion process executed in the game value insertion process executes the following processes when replay is activated: storing the number of inserted medals and setting the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit), setting the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2 bet lamp to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit), and setting the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3 bet lamp to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit).

Note that even if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bed lamp to 1, the memory area for displaying the 2 bed lamp to 1, and the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamp to 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will not light up immediately; instead, the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp is checked using interrupt processing to control the lighting of various LEDs, and if it is 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will be turned on. Similarly, there will be a slight lag until the lamps are fully lit depending on the signal transmission time and the lighting time of the lamps.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the game end check process for the game in which the replay was won are turned off, and then the 1 bet lamp, the 2 bet lamp, and the 3 bet lamp are turned on during the automatic insertion process.

In this configuration, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the game end check process for the game in which the replay is won. In other words, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the game end check process for the game in which the replay is won.

Here, Figure 91 shows the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp of the RWM, and the lighting state of the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis of Figure 91 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM becomes 0 during the game end check process.

Timing T2 in Figure 91 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to turn off in the interrupt process executed after the game end check process.

Timing T3 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value in the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 bed lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value in the memory area for displaying the RWM 2 bed lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T5 in Figure 91 is the timing when the value in the memory area for displaying the RWM 3 bed lamps becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process.

Timing T6 in Figure 91 is the timing when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp start to light up during the interrupt process executed after the automatic insertion process.

Timing T7 in Figure 91 is when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T6 in Fig. 91 are different times depending on the start timing of the interrupt process. For example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until the control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for lighting display of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check process. Also, for example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until the control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for lighting display of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the game end check process. For example, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt processing is executed if an interrupt processing is started immediately after the automatic insertion processing sets the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1st bed lamp to 1, the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2nd bed lamp to 1, and then the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3rd bed lamp to 1. For example, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt processing is executed plus 2 ms, if an interrupt processing is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1st bed lamp to 1, the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2nd bed lamp to 1, and then the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3rd bed lamp to 1.

As shown in FIG. 91, when a replay is won, the automatic insertion process stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp as lit before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off from the game end check process, stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the 2 bet lamp as lit, and stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the 3 bet lamp as lit, making it possible to light up the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely turned off.

In order to configure in this manner, it is necessary to design the total of the time from when the values in the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps are set to 0 in the game end check process to the game value input process (number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms), the time from the start of the game value input process to the process of setting the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp to 1 by the automatic input process executed when re-play is activated in the game value input process (number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms), the time until the process of setting the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2 bet lamp to 1 (number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms), the time until the process of setting the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3 bet lamp to 1 (number of cycles D x 0.0001 ms), and the maximum value of 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2 times) for two interrupt processes, to be less than approximately 20 ms, which is the time it takes for the lamps to be completely turned off. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (as if it is not turned off), it is preferable to design it so that it is less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time for the interrupt process when turning the lamp off and the interrupt process when turning the lamp on.

In other words, the following holds: cycle number A x 0.0001 ms + cycle number B x 0.0001 ms + cycle number C x 0.0001 ms + cycle number D x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B + C + D must be less than 155,300. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), the following holds: cycle number A x 0.0001 ms + cycle number B x 0.0001 ms + cycle number C x 0.0001 ms + cycle number D x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the total number of cycles A + B + C + D is approximately 1,500, so both relationships hold.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp before the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are completely turned off.

In addition, the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is extremely short (shorter than the interrupt processing cycle), but it is possible that the interrupt processing will be executed between T3 and T5. In such a case, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp may be completely turned off. However, because the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is shorter than the interrupt processing, it is possible to immediately turn on the turned-off lamps with the next interrupt processing, making it possible to quickly turn on the lamps even in the rare event that occurs, and maintain the tempo of the game.

<<Pattern 3: The input number display data clear process included in the game value input process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp display memory areas to 0, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp light up simultaneously during the automatic input process>>

During the game value insertion process, a process is executed to clear (initialize) the values in the memory area of the RWM for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 (inserted number display data clear process). In this way, by once clearing the values in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be lit.

Note that even if the value of the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is cleared to 0 (initialized) during the input number display data clear process of the gaming value input process, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp do not turn off immediately. This is because the interrupt process controls the lighting of various LEDs, and the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps, and if it is 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off. Note that even when the control of the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a certain lamp switches from on to off, it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to be turned off, so there will be some lag before a person actually feels that the lamp has been turned off.

For this reason, even if the process of clearing the inserted number display data in the game value insertion process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, in order for them to actually be turned off, it will take the time from the process of clearing the inserted number display data in the game value insertion process clearing (initializing) the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 until the interrupt process stops the output of the lighting signal for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, plus the time until the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are actually completely turned off.

The game value insertion process in the game progress main process includes an automatic insertion process (which is executed after the process of clearing the data displaying the number of inserted medals). In the automatic insertion process, when replay is activated, the number of inserted medals is stored and the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 1 (the value indicating illumination).

Note that even if the process of setting the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 1 is executed during the game value insertion process, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will not light up immediately. Instead, the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is checked using the control related to the lighting of various LEDs by interrupt processing, and if it is 1, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp will be lit. Similarly, there will be a slight lag until the lamps are fully lit depending on the signal transmission time and the lighting time of the lamps.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the input coin count display data clear process of the game value input process after a game in which a replay is won are turned off, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned on during the automatic input process of the game value input process.

In this configuration, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process is executed, before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the insertion number display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process after a game in which a replay is won. In other words, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process is executed, before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the insertion number display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process after a game in which a replay is won.

Here, Figure 92 shows the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM, and the lighting state of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis in Figure 90 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 92 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM becomes 0 during the input number display data clear process of the game value input process.

Timing T2 in Figure 92 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to turn off in the interrupt process executed after the input number display data clear process of the game value input process.

Timing T3 in Figure 92 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 92 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up in the interrupt process executed after the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process.

Timing T5 in Figure 92 is when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T4 in Fig. 92 are different times depending on the start timing of the interrupt process. For example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until the control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed when the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the insertion number display data clear process of the game value insertion process. Also, for example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until the control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms when the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the insertion number display data clear process of the game value insertion process. Also, for example, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for lighting display of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 1 in the automatic input process of the gaming value input process.Also, for example, the time from T3 to T4 is the time until control regarding the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for lighting display of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 1 in the automatic input process of the gaming value input process.
This time is the sum of the time taken to execute control relating to the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process and 2 ms.

As shown in FIG. 92, when a replay is won, the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is stored as 1 in the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off from the insertion number display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process. This makes it possible to turn on the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely turned off.

To configure in this way, it is necessary to design the total time (cycle number A x 0.0001 ms) from when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 0 by the input number display data clear process of the game value input process until the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 1 by the automatic input process of the game value input process, plus the maximum value of 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2 times) for two interrupt processes, to be less than the time it takes for the lamp to be completely turned off, which is about 20 ms. Note that in order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), it is preferable to design it to be less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control. Note that the maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time of the interrupt process when turning off the lamp and the interrupt process when turning on the lamp.

In other words, the following relationship holds: cycle number A x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the cycle number A must be less than 155,300. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), the following relationship holds: cycle number A x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the cycle number A must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the cycle number A is set to approximately 800, so both relationships hold.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp before the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are completely turned off.

<<Pattern 4: The input number display data clear process included in the game value input process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp display memory areas to 0, and then the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp light up in sequence during the automatic input process>>

In the game value insertion process, the insertion number display data clear process executes a process to clear (initialize) the value in the memory area of the RWM for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 (insertion number display data clear process). In this way, by once clearing the value in the RWM area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, the bet lamps corresponding to the next automatically inserted number can be lit.

Note that even if the value of the RWM memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is cleared to 0 (initialized) during the input number display data clear process of the gaming value input process, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp do not turn off immediately. This is because the interrupt process controls the lighting of various LEDs, and the interrupt process checks the value of the RWM area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamps, and if it is 0, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off. Note that even when the control of the lighting of various LEDs is executed and a certain lamp switches from on to off, it takes time for the signal to be transmitted and for the lamp to be turned off, so there will be some lag before a person actually feels that the lamp has been turned off.

For this reason, even if the process of clearing the inserted number display data in the game value insertion process clears (initializes) the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0, in order for them to actually be turned off, it will take the time from the process of clearing the inserted number display data in the game value insertion process clearing (initializing) the values in the RWM's memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp to 0 until the interrupt process stops the output of the lighting signal for the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp, plus the time until the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are actually completely turned off.

The game value insertion process in the game progress main process includes an automatic insertion process (which is executed after the process of clearing the data displaying the number of inserted medals). In the automatic insertion process, when replay is activated, the number of inserted medals is stored, and the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the RWM's 1 bet lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit), the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 2 bet lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit), and the value of the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 3 bet lamp is set to 1 (a value indicating that it is lit).

Note that even if the automatic insertion process sets the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bed lamp to 1, the memory area for displaying the 2 bed lamp to 1, and the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamp to 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will not light up immediately; instead, the value of the RWM area for displaying the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp is checked using interrupt processing to control the lighting of various LEDs, and if it is 1, the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp will be turned on. Similarly, there will be a slight lag until the lamps are fully lit depending on the signal transmission time and the lighting time of the lamps.

In this way, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp that were lit during the input number display data clear process of the game value input process for the game in which the replay was won are turned off, and then during the automatic input process, the 1 bet lamp, the 2 bet lamp, and the 3 bet lamp are turned on.

In this configuration, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the insertion number display data clear process of the game value insertion process of the game in which the replay is won. In other words, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up due to an interrupt process after the automatic insertion process is executed before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off due to the execution of the insertion number display data clear process of the game value insertion process of the game in which the replay is won.

Here, Figure 93 shows the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp of the RWM, and the lighting state of the 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, and 3 BET lamp. Note that there is no correlation between the length of the horizontal axis of Figure 93 and the elapsed time.

Timing T1 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM becomes 0 during the input number display data clear process of the game value input process.

Timing T2 in Figure 93 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to turn off in the interrupt process executed after the input number display data clear process of the gaming value input process.

Timing T3 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 1 bet lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process.

Timing T4 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 2 bet lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process.

Timing T5 in Figure 93 is the timing when the value of the memory area for displaying the RWM 3 bet lamp becomes 1 during the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process.

Timing T6 in FIG. 93 is the timing when the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp start to light up in the interrupt process executed after the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process.

Timing T7 in Figure 93 is when the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are fully lit.

The time from T1 to T2 and the time from T3 to T6 in FIG. 93 vary depending on the timing of starting the interrupt process. For example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control over the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if the interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the input number display data clear process of the game value input process. Also, for example, the time from T1 to T2 is the time until control over the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms if the interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp of the RWM is set to 0 in the input number display data clear process of the game value input process. For example, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until control over the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed if an interrupt process is started immediately after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1st bet lamp is set to 1 in the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process, the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2nd bet lamp is set to 1, and then the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3rd bet lamp is set to 1. For example, the time from T3 to T6 is the time until control over the lighting of various LEDs in the interrupt process is executed plus 2 ms in the case where an interrupt process is started 2 ms after the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 1st bet lamp is set to 1 in the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process, the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2nd bet lamp is set to 1, and then the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3rd bet lamp is set to 1.

As shown in FIG. 93, when a replay is won, the automatic insertion process of the gaming value insertion process stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 1 bet lamp, stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 2 bet lamp, and stores a value of 1 in the memory area for displaying the illumination of the 3 bet lamp, before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are completely turned off after the insertion number display data clear process of the gaming value insertion process. This makes it possible to light up the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp before they are completely turned off.

In order to configure in this manner, it is necessary to design the total time (cycle number A x 0.0001 ms) from the time when the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp is set to 0 by the process of clearing the display data of the number of inserted coins in the game value insertion process until the process of setting the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the RWM's 1 bet lamp to 1 by the automatic insertion process of the game value insertion process, the time until the process of setting the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 2 bet lamp to 1 (cycle number B x 0.0001 ms), the time until the process of setting the value of the memory area for displaying the lighting of the 3 bet lamp to 1 (cycle number C x 0.0001 ms), and the maximum value of 4.47 ms (2.235 ms x 2 times) for two interrupt processes, to be less than the time it takes for the lamps to be completely turned off, which is approximately 20 ms. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (not turned off), it is preferable to design it so that the delay is less than 11.175 ms (2.235 ms x 5 interrupts), which is the time for one cycle of dynamic lighting control.The maximum value for two interrupt processes is the maximum delay time for the interrupt process when turning the lamp off and the interrupt process when turning the lamp on.

In other words, the following holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 20 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B + C must be less than 155,300. In order to make the lamp appear to be continuously lit (appear not to be turned off), the following holds: number of cycles A x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles B x 0.0001 ms + number of cycles C x 0.0001 ms + 4.47 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the total number of cycles A + B + C must be less than 67,050. In this embodiment, the total number of cycles A + B + C is approximately 900, so both relationships hold.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to turn on the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp before the 1 bed lamp, 2 bed lamp, and 3 bed lamp are completely turned off.

In addition, the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is extremely short (shorter than the interrupt processing cycle), but it is possible that the interrupt processing will be executed between T3 and T5. In such a case, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp may be completely turned off. However, because the time from T3 to T4 and from T4 to T5 is shorter than the interrupt processing, it is possible to immediately turn on the turned-off lamps with the next interrupt processing, making it possible to quickly turn on the lamps even in the rare event that occurs, and maintain the tempo of the game.

The above-mentioned patterns 1 to 4 were explained assuming dynamic lighting control, but the same relationship between the number of cycles and the time it takes for the bed lamp to turn off applies even with static lighting control. This is because the time it takes from when the bed lamp starts to turn off until it is completely turned off is the same (20 ms) whether dynamic lighting control or static lighting control is used.

In the above-mentioned patterns 2 and 4, the automatic insertion process adds one to the bet number, but it appears as if the bets are being added simultaneously. However, this is not limited to the above. A timer can be set to indicate a waiting time each time the bet number is added by one, and when the timer value reaches 0 in the timer update process for each interrupt process, the bet number can be updated from 1 to 2 and the timer can be set again, allowing the player to visually perceive the bet lamps as being lit sequentially.

In this case, the memory area for displaying the 1 bed lamp is set to store 1 after being cleared until the 1 bed lamp is completely turned off, and the memory area for displaying the 2 bed lamp and the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamp may be set to be completely turned off after being cleared, or the 1 bed lamp may be set to be completely turned off. Note that the timer value set when visually indicating the number of bets one by one in order must be longer than the interrupt period of 2.235 ms in the case of static lighting control, and longer than the dynamic lighting period of 11.175 ms in the case of static lighting control or dynamic lighting control. As an example, the timer value of the timer is 30 ms.

Next, we will explain how the bet number display lamp is lit when the bet switch is operated.

When the game is in a waiting state (waiting for a bet) with 0 bets, and the bet switch (a concept that includes the MAX bet switch and 1 bet switch) is operated, the 1 bet lamp can be lit (when the MAX bet switch is operated, the 1 to 3 bet lamps can be lit).

Whether or not the bet switch has been operated is determined by executing the input port reading process and input port data generation process, which are executed in the interrupt process. When the bet switch is operated, data regarding the operation of the bet switch is generated.

The game value input process, which is the main part of game progress, determines whether data regarding the operation of the bet switch has been stored, and if data regarding the operation of the bet switch has been stored, determines whether a bet is possible, and if a bet is possible, executes a process to add game medals one by one.

In the process of adding game medals one by one, 1 is added to the RWM area that stores the number of bets, and then data displaying the number of inserted medals is generated and saved. Also, if the MAX bet switch is operated, the bet-related process is repeated until the number of bets reaches 3 or until it is determined that a bet is no longer possible.

In such a situation, the time from when the bet switch operation is accepted to when the value of the data displaying the number of coins inserted for one bet is stored is configured to be shorter than the cycle of the interrupt process. Also, the time from when the bet switch operation is accepted to when the value of the data displaying the number of coins inserted for one bet is stored may be configured to be shorter than the cycle of the dynamic lighting control.

To realize such a configuration, A should be set so that the number of cycles from the start of the game value input process to the saving of the input number display data is A x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms. In other words, the number of cycles A from the start of the game value input process to the saving of the input number display data is configured to be less than 22,350. In addition, in the case where the time from when the operation of the bet switch is accepted to when the value of the input number display data for one bet is stored is configured to be shorter than the period of dynamic lighting control, A should be set so that the number of cycles A from the start of the game value input process to the saving of the input number display data is A x 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms. In other words, the number of cycles A from the start of the game value input process to the saving of the input number display data is configured to be less than 111,750.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to light up the 1 bet lamp in the shortest cycle of interrupt processing or dynamic lighting processing, so the tempo of play is not hindered from operating the bet switch until the 1 bet lamp lights up, improving the enjoyment of the game.

Even if the lighting control of one bed lamp is static lighting control, there is no problem in comparing it with the shortest period of dynamic lighting control.

In addition, when the number of bets is 0 and the MAX bet switch is operated, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are displayed to light up in sequence, the time between storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet and storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets is configured to be longer than the dynamic lighting period.

In order to configure it in this way, if the number of cycles is set so that the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets × 0.0001 ms > 11.175 ms, the bet processing becomes redundant and this leads to a strain on the program capacity of the main control means, so the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets × 0.0001 ms + standby time > 11.175 ms is configured. In other words, the number of cycles and standby time are determined so that the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets × 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms and the standby time > 11.175 ms - (the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets × 0.0001 ms).

The waiting time is set after the value of the inserted coin count display data for 1 bet is stored and before the value of the inserted coin count display data for 2 bets is stored. During this time, the waiting time is updated, and when the waiting time becomes 0, the process for 2 bets is executed.

In this case, the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for bet 1 to storing the value of the inserted number display data for bet 2 is approximately 120, which is 120 (number of cycles) x 0.0001 ms < 11.175 ms, and 0.012 ms < 11.175 ms, satisfying the above relationship. In addition, the waiting time is 15 ms, which is 15 ms (waiting time) > 11.175 ms - (number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for bet 1 to storing the value of the inserted number display data for bet 2 x 0.0001 ms), and 15 ms > 11.163 ms, satisfying the above relationship.

In the case of static lighting control, the time between storing the value of the inserted number display data for one bet and storing the value of the inserted number display data for two bets can be configured to be longer than the interrupt processing period.

To achieve this configuration, the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets × 0.0001 ms + standby time > 2.235 ms. In other words, the number of cycles and standby time are determined so that the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets × 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, and the standby time > 2.235 ms - (the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet until storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets × 0.0001 ms).

In this case, the number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet to storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets is approximately 120, which is 120 (number of cycles) x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, and 0.012 ms < 2.235 ms, satisfying the above relationship. In addition, the waiting time is 15 ms, which is 15 ms (waiting time) > 2.235 ms - (number of cycles from storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 bet to storing the value of the inserted number display data for 2 bets x 0.0001 ms), and 15 ms > 2.223 ms, satisfying the above relationship.

Regardless of whether dynamic lighting control or static lighting control is used, as long as the above-mentioned relationship is satisfied, the number of cycles and waiting time from when the value of the inserted number display data for one bet is stored until when the value of the inserted number display data for two bets is stored can be changed as appropriate.

The process between 1 bet and 2 bets described above is the same as the process between 2 bets and 3 bets.

By configuring it this way, when the 1 to 3 bet lamps are lit in sequence, it is possible to prevent the bet lamps from lighting up simultaneously at the timing of the interrupt process, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo and increasing the interest of the game.

Also, the waiting time may be set by the lighting process of the interrupt process. In this case, the process of storing the value of the inserted number display data for 1 to 3 bets is executed at the same interval or at a shorter interval than the interrupt process, but the 2 bet lamp is not lit if the waiting time has not elapsed after the 1 bet lamp is lit by the interrupt process, and the 3 bet lamp is not lit if the next set waiting time has not elapsed after the 2 bet lamp is lit after the waiting time has elapsed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the bet lamps from being lit simultaneously at the timing of the interrupt process in a specification in which the 1 to 3 bet lamps are lit in order, so that the game can be played at a good tempo and the interest of the game can be improved.

<<Explanation regarding the lighting control of the credit number display>> Here, regarding the lighting process of the credit number display, we will explain the case where 8 game medals are added to the credits as the game medal awarding process after all reels have stopped when a small winning combination is determined as the internal drawing result by the internal drawing means of a specified game that has been started with 3 bets in a specified game state.

For example, if a symbol combination that pays out eight medals stops when "10" is stored as credit data in a specified memory area of the RWM, the credit number display will increment from 11 to 12 to 13 to ... to 18.

The process of displaying the credit number on the credit number display is a control related to the lighting of various LEDs in interrupt processing, and for each interrupt processing, the value of the credit data stored in a specified memory area of the RWM is obtained and the corresponding segment is lit.

At this time, the credit data is updated by 1 as a credit addition process, from 10 to 11 to 12 to ... to 18.

The update interval for the credit data is configured to be longer than the cycle of the interrupt process. Specifically, the update interval for the credit data is 60 ms, and the cycle for the interrupt process is 2.235 ms. When the credit number display is lit using dynamic lighting control, it is desirable to set the update interval for the credit data > one cycle of dynamic lighting.

In this embodiment, the number of cycles of the program to add 1 credit is approximately 120, so 120 x 0.0001 ms = 0.012 ms, which is shorter than the period of the interrupt process. For this reason, in the credit addition process, a timer is set that becomes the waiting time after the credit data is changed from 10 to 11 in a specified memory area of the RWM, and if the timer value becomes 0 in the timer update process for each interrupt process, it is updated from 11 to 12 and the timer is set again. The timer value to be set is 60 ms.

In this way, when adding credit data to increment the credit display, a timer is set for each addition of 1 credit, and if the timer value becomes 0 as a result of updating the timer, the process of adding 1 to the credit data again is repeated.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the size of the program, improve the readability of the program, and make it possible to display updates to the credit count display in increments, improving the tempo of the game and making it more interesting to play.

Furthermore, regarding the process of lighting up the credit number display, we will explain the process when the settlement switch is operated while the credit number display shows 10, causing the credit number display to become 0.

For example, when the number of bets is 0 and "10" is stored as credit data in a specified memory area of the RWM, if the settlement switch is operated to execute the settlement process, the credit number display will decrement as follows: 9 → 8 → 7 → ... → 0.

The process of displaying the credit number on the credit number display is a control related to the lighting of various LEDs in interrupt processing, and for each interrupt processing, the value of the credit data stored in a specified memory area of the RWM is obtained and the corresponding segment is lit.

At this time, as part of the settlement process, the credit data is updated by 1, from 10 → 9 → 8 → ... → 0.

The update interval for the credit data is configured to be longer than the cycle of the interrupt process. Specifically, the update interval for the credit data is 40 ms, and the cycle for the interrupt process is 2.235 ms. When the credit number display is lit using dynamic lighting control, it is desirable to set the update interval for the credit data > one cycle of dynamic lighting.

In this embodiment, the number of cycles of the program that subtracts 1 credit during the settlement process is approximately 120, so 120 x 0.0001 ms = 0.012 ms, which is shorter than the cycle of the interrupt process. For this reason, during the settlement process, a timer is set that becomes the standby time after the credit data is changed from 10 to 9 in a specified memory area of the RWM, and if the timer value becomes 0 during the timer update process for each interrupt process, it is updated from 9 to 8 and the timer is set again. The timer value to be set is 40 ms.

In this way, in order to cause the credit display to decrement, a timer is set each time one credit is subtracted during the settlement process, and if the timer value becomes 0 as a result of the timer update, the process of subtracting one from the credit data again is repeated.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce the size of the program, improve the readability of the program, and make it possible to display updates to the credit number display in decrements, improving the tempo of the game and making it more interesting to play.

<<Explanation of the start lamp>> Here, we will explain the lighting process of the start lamp when the MAX bet switch is operated and 3 bets are made after a specified game ends in a specified game state, causing the start lamp to light up.

For example, when the number of bets is 0 and "10" is stored as credit data in a specified memory area of the RWM, if the MAX BET switch is operated, the 3 BET lamp will light up and then the START lamp will light up. Note that if the previous game is a replay and 3 bets are placed by the automatic insertion process, the 3 BET lamp will light up and then the START lamp will light up.

At this time, the time from when "1" indicating that the 3 bed lamps are on is stored in the memory area for displaying the lighting to when "1" indicating that the start lamps are on is stored in the memory area for displaying the lighting is less than the interrupt period.

To achieve this design, the number of cycles of processing from the processing after storing "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamps on until storing "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the memory area for displaying the start lamp on x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms. In other words, the number of cycles of processing from the processing after storing "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the memory area for displaying the 3 bed lamps on until storing "1" indicating that the lamp is on in the memory area for displaying the start lamp on is less than 22,350.

Note that even if "1" indicating lighting is stored in the 3 bed lamp display memory area, it takes time until the LED lighting process is executed in the next interrupt process and time until the 3 bed lamp is fully lit before it lights up. Therefore, by setting the number of cycles of processing from the processing after storing "1" indicating lighting in the 3 bed lamp display memory area to storing "1" indicating lighting in the start lamp display memory area x 0.0001 ms < 2.235 ms, it is possible for the 3 bed lamp and the start lamp to light up simultaneously or with a delay of one interrupt. In other words, if "1" indicating lighting is stored in the start lamp display memory area after storing "1" indicating lighting in the 3 bed lamp display memory area and before the start of the next interrupt process, the 3 bed lamp and the start lamp will light up simultaneously, and if "1" indicating lighting is stored in the start lamp display memory area after executing the interrupt process after storing "1" indicating lighting in the 3 bed lamp display memory area, the 3 bed lamp and the start lamp will light up with a delay of one interrupt.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to inform the player that they can play without delay after the 3-bet lamp turns on, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

Here, we will also explain the process of turning on the start lamp, which occurs when the start switch is operated while the start lamp is on and the start lamp is turned off.

For example, when the start switch is operated while the start lamp is on, the internal lottery process is executed to determine the internal lottery result. The start lamp also turns off.

At this time, the system is designed so that the time from when the start switch is operated to when the internal lottery result is determined is less than the time from when the start switch is operated to when the start lamp is completely turned off.

To achieve this design, the number of processing cycles from when the start switch is operated to when the internal lottery result is determined x 0.0001 ms < the time from when the start switch is operated to when the start lamp is completely turned off (20 ms). In other words, the number of processing cycles from when the start switch is operated to when the internal lottery result is determined is less than 200,000.

By configuring it in this way, the internal lottery result can be determined before the start lamp goes out, so even if someone tries to obtain the internal lottery result fraudulently, it becomes difficult to tell when the internal lottery process was executed, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activity.

<Game sounds related to bets and starts> Game sounds are output by various triggers on gaming machines, but here we will explain the bet sounds that can be output by operating the bet switch or inserting a gaming medal, the wait sounds that can be output by operating the start switch, and the reel start sounds that can be output when the reels start spinning.

The bet sound is output for each bet, and when three bets are made by operating the MAX bet switch, the same bet sound is output three times.

The betting sound is a "dap" sound that is output for 0.13 seconds per bet. If 3 bets are made, the betting sound is output for 0.13 seconds x 3 = 0.39 seconds.

The bet sound can be output when a command related to a bet is sent from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command related to a bet, and the sub-control means executes the process related to outputting the bet sound. In addition, since the bet sound is output in one shot, once the bet sound is output, it will not be output repeatedly for that bet.

The wait sound is a sound that notifies the player of the minimum time of one game, which is 4.1 seconds. If it is less than 4.1 seconds from the start of reel rotation based on the operation of the start switch of a certain game to the start of reel rotation based on the operation of the start switch of the next game of the certain game, a waiting period (wait period) occurs during which the player waits for the start of reel rotation of the next game of the certain game to begin, from the start of reel rotation based on the operation of the start switch of the certain game until 4.1 seconds have elapsed, and the wait sound is configured to be output during this waiting period.

The output period of the wait sound changes depending on the remaining waiting period, but since it takes a minimum of about 1.1 seconds from when the reels start to spin until the start switch for the next game is operated, the waiting period may be output for a maximum of about 3 seconds. Also, during the waiting period, the wait sound is output as "Tero, tero, tero...", which is the sound data "terror" that is output in a loop during the waiting period. The sound "terror" is output for 0.2 seconds. In the case of "tero, tero," it is output for 0.2 seconds x 3 = 0.6 seconds.

The wait sound can be output when a command regarding start switch acceptance is transmitted from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command regarding start switch acceptance, and can be stopped when a command regarding starting reel rotation is transmitted from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command regarding starting reel rotation, and the sub-control means executes the process regarding output of the wait sound. Therefore, since the wait sound is output in a loop, the wait sound does not stop from when the command regarding start switch acceptance is received until the command regarding starting reel rotation is received. Note that if a command regarding starting reel rotation is received between "te" and "ro" of the wait sound "tero", the output of the wait sound is stopped at that point, so "te" is output but "ro" is not output.

The reel start sound is the sound that is output when the reels start to rotate based on the operation of the start switch. If there is a waiting period, the reel start sound is configured to be output when the reels start to rotate after the start switch is operated.

The reel start sound is a "bang" sound that is output for 0.1 seconds each time the reel spins. Even if there are multiple reels, the reel start sound is only output once. In other words, the reel start sound can be output when all reels that stopped in the previous game start to spin by operating the start switch for the current game.

The reel start sound can be output when a command to start reel rotation is sent from the main control means and the sub-control means receives the command, and the sub-control means executes the process to output the reel start sound. In addition, since the reel start sound is output in one shot, once the reel start sound is output, it is not output repeatedly for the start of that reel rotation.

The reel start sound is output when the reels start to spin, allowing the player to gauge the time between when the reels start to spin and when the stop switch is activated. For this reason, the reel start sound provides the player with the information they need to comfortably press the buttons.

The output times of the bet sound, wait sound, and reel start sound mentioned above do not indicate the playback time of each data, but the time from when the first sound is output until the last sound can no longer be heard. For example, if there is 0.1 seconds of silence before and after the sound "da-da" as bet sound data, the playback time of the bet sound data is 0.1 seconds + 0.13 seconds + 0.1 seconds = 0.33 seconds, which indicates that the output time of the bet sound is 0.13 seconds.

Here, we will explain the volume of various sounds using Figure 94.

The administrator volume in FIG. 94 is a volume that cannot be changed by players and can only be changed by the administrator. For example, conditions for adjusting the administrator volume include operating a specific sub-switch (sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, or a switch for effects) while checking settings, operating a specific sub-switch (sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, or a switch for effects) while changing settings, operating a specific sub-switch (rotary switch) inside the cabinet (behind the front door or inside the cabinet), etc. In other words, the conditions for adjusting the administrator volume include device conditions that cannot be operated by players. FIG. 94 shows that three levels (low, normal, high) can be selected.

The player volume in Figure 94 is the volume that can be changed by the player. For example, it is the volume that can be changed on a volume adjustment screen that can be selected on a menu screen that can be displayed by operating a sub-switch, or the volume that can be changed by pressing the left or right arrow key on the directional pad. Figure 94 shows that there are 10 levels to choose from.

The numbers assigned to each sound in Figure 94 indicate the volume, measured in decibels. For example, when the administrator volume is "low" and the player volume is "1," the volume of the betting sound is 12 decibels.

In this embodiment, the administrator volume and the player volume are adjustable, but it is also possible to adjust only one of them. In that case, the volume relationship between the game sounds and system sounds will not change.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the weight sound and the reel start sound.

The wait sound and reel start sound can first be triggered by operating the start switch. As mentioned above, the wait sound can be output when the start switch acceptance command is received, and the reel start sound can be output when the reel rotation start command is received after operating the start switch. In other words, the wait sound and the reel start sound are output at very close intervals.

And under certain volume conditions (when the administrator volume and player volume are set to certain levels), the wait sound is made quieter than the reel start sound.

By configuring it this way, the reel start sound that is output after the wait sound becomes easier to hear, making it easier for the player to recognize when the reels have started to spin. This makes it clearer when the reels start to spin, and makes it easier to understand when to operate the stop switch, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

As mentioned above, one loop of the wait sound is output for 0.2 seconds, and the reel start sound is output for 0.1 seconds.

This configuration allows the player to intuitively determine which sound was output when the start switch was turned on. In other words, the wait sound may be output for a maximum of approximately three seconds, but the reel start-up sound is output for only 0.1 seconds. Therefore, by making the time for one loop of the wait sound longer than the time for the reel start-up sound, the player can intuitively determine that the wait sound was output, for example, 0.2 seconds after the start switch was operated. This improves the tempo of the game and increases the interest in the game.

Here, we will explain the relationship between the weight sound and the bed sound.

The bet sound can be output in response to the operation of the bet switch, and the wait sound can be output in response to the operation of the start switch. When the operation of the bet switch results in a bet number that allows play, the operation of the start switch is validated. For this reason, the bet sound and the wait sound are output at very close times.

And under certain volume conditions (when the administrator volume and player volume are set to certain levels), the volume of the wait sound is lower than the bet sound.

If things continue as they are, there is a possibility that the wait sound will be drowned out by the bet sound, but since the bet sound is an important sound that allows the player to determine whether or not a bet has been placed as a result of the player's operation of the bet switch, it is not advisable to make the bet sound quieter than the wait sound.

To solve this problem, the bet sound output period and the wait sound output period are configured not to overlap. For example, when three bets are made by operating the bet switch, "dadda dadda" is output for 0.39 seconds, but even if the start switch is operated and the wait sound is output the shortest time after the bet switch operation that the start switch operation becomes effective, the output of the final "dadda" of the bet sound will end before the "te" sound that starts the wait sound is heard, and it will no longer be audible.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the betting sound from blocking the sound of the waiting, and also makes the volume of the betting sound louder than the sound of the waiting, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

Note that there are cases where game sounds other than the bet sound are output when placing a bet, but since these game sounds are not bet sounds, they do not fall under the above-mentioned function of the bet sound. Game sounds other than the bet sound output when placing a bet are, for example, when "Press the MAX bet switch!!" is displayed on the LCD screen while waiting for a bet, and when the MAX bet switch is operated to notify the player of a result favorable to the player, such as winning the AT, and the like. In other words, game sounds when the bet switch is used for anything other than placing game medals are not bet sounds.

The volume of each game sound shown in FIG. 94 increases in proportion to the increase in the player volume, but it is not limited to this and may be configured so that the increase in the volume of certain game sounds is smaller. For example, with regard to the wait sound, when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low", the volume is 8, and when the player volume is "2" and the administrator volume is "low", the volume is 12, and the volume of the wait sound is 1.2 times higher when the player volume is "1" than when it is "2", but when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low", the volume is 8, and when the player volume is "2" and the administrator volume is "low", the volume is 9, so that the increase in the volume of the wait sound may be smaller (other bet sounds and reel start sounds increase by the same amount).

In addition to the game sounds shown in FIG. 94, there is also background music (Background Music), voices, and sound effects (Sound Effects) that are played during gameplay. The volume of the background music, voices, and sound effects is set to be louder than the bet sounds, wait sounds, and reel start sounds. For example, when the player volume is "1" and the administrator volume is "low," the volume of the bet sounds is "12," the volume of the wait sounds is "8," and the volume of the reel start sounds is "10," but in this situation the volume of a certain background music is "30," the volume of a certain voice is "45," and the volume of a certain sound effect is "50." Note that this does not mean that all BGM, voices, and sound effects are louder than the bet sounds, wait sounds, and reel start sounds under certain volume conditions, but rather that more than half of all BGM, voices, and sound effects are set to volumes louder than the bet sounds, wait sounds, and reel start sounds. Note that the volume of BGM, voices, and sound effects also increases proportionally, or simply increases, as the player volume or administrator volume increases.

Also, we have already mentioned the output time and volume of the bet sound, wait sound, and reel start sound, but we will now explain the data capacity of each sound.

The relationship between the data capacity of bet sound data that can be output for one bet, the data capacity of wait sound data for one loop of wait sound, and the data capacity of the reel start sound data for the reel start sound is wait sound data > reel start sound data > bet sound data. In this way, the reel start sound has a shorter output period than the bet sound data, but has a larger data capacity. This is because the reel start sound is not composed of a simple sound, so that it leaves a stronger impression on the player than the bet sound. This makes it easier for players to remember the reel start sound, which can improve the tempo of the game.

<<About game sounds during simulated play>> We will explain the various game sounds that occur during simulated play.

As mentioned above, pseudo-game is a freeze effect that is triggered by the operation of the start switch. In particular, during the freeze effect, all reels spin, and the corresponding reel stops when the stop switch is operated.

Although this type of pseudo game executes swing fluctuation processing and random delay processing, it operates in the same manner as the actual game, making it difficult for the player to tell whether a pseudo game or an actual game is being played. In particular, since the pseudo game and the actual game have similar operating modes when the reels start to spin, players who are unable to predict that it is a pseudo game can be surprised and delighted by the unique stopping mode of the pseudo game as a result of operating the stop switch, which is an element that increases the interest of the game.

In this embodiment of the gaming machine, the difference between the actual game and the simulated game is made harder to distinguish than in conventional gaming machines, further increasing the interest of the player.

In this game, a wait sound can be output. The wait sound is output during the wait period. Since the pseudo game is started before the acceleration process, the pseudo game is executed for a period equivalent to the wait period. If the pseudo game is started without setting a wait period when there is still some wait period remaining, the player will feel uncomfortable when the reels start to spin. Therefore, if there is still some wait period remaining, the reels do not start to spin during the period equivalent to the wait period when the pseudo game starts, and the reels start to spin when the period equivalent to the wait period ends. Note that the same wait sound as in this game is output during the period equivalent to the wait period.

In this case, the timer value for the wait period is obtained when the pseudo game starts, the timer value for the wait period obtained at the beginning of the pseudo game operation is set, the timer value for the wait period that has been set is updated, and when it is determined that the timer value is 0, the reel spin start process related to the pseudo game is executed.

In this case, when switching from the actual game to the pseudo game, the pseudo game is started before determining whether the wait period has elapsed. Also, the timer value for the wait period is either continued to be updated during the pseudo game, or initialized after the pseudo game starts. Then, by making the shortest play time in the actual game + the shortest play time in the pseudo game longer than 4.1 seconds, the shortest play time can be guaranteed, and since there is no wait period remaining when the actual game starts after the pseudo game ends, the actual game can be started smoothly.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to tell whether a real game or a pseudo game has started, creating a sense of surprise when it turns out to be a pseudo game.

Note that, while an example of managing a period equivalent to a wait period during a pseudo game has been described above, this is not limiting, and the reel spin start process for the pseudo game may be executed when the wait for the actual game ends. In other words, before the pseudo game starts, it is determined whether or not it is in a wait period, and if it is determined that it is in a wait period, the determination process is repeated until it is determined that it is not in a wait period, and if it is determined that it is not in a wait period, the reel spin start process for the pseudo game is executed.

In addition, when two pseudo games are executed consecutively, a timer is set at the start of reel rotation (the timer's initial value is 4.1 seconds) to determine whether 4.1 seconds have elapsed between the start of reel rotation in the previous pseudo game and the start of reel rotation in the current pseudo game, and if the timer value is not 0 and the operation of the start switch that marks the start of the current pseudo game is accepted, the reel rotation start process for the current pseudo game is not executed until the timer value becomes 0.

Between the previous and current simulated games, a simulated bet sound will be output when the bet switch is operated, but no credits will be subtracted.

When the start switch operation is accepted for this simulated game, random delay processing may or may not be performed.

Even if a random delay is not implemented, the wait period and betting sounds are expressed through effects, so it is possible to some extent to prevent the fact that the game is a pseudo game from being discovered in advance. Note that when a random delay is implemented, it is more difficult to tell whether the game is a pseudo game or a real game than when a random delay is not implemented.

When a random delay is implemented after the simulated game, the reel start sound is output when the reels start spinning. In this case, the timing of outputting the reel start sound may be in response to the first reel to start spinning, in response to the last reel to start spinning, for each reel that starts spinning, or no reel start sound may be output at all.

When outputting the reel start sound in response to the first reel to start spinning, the reel start sound is output when the first reel spins after the delay time caused by the random delay process has run out. In other words, the reel start sound is output for the reel that first starts spinning out of the left reel, center reel, or right reel.

When outputting the reel start sound in accordance with the reel that last started spinning, the reel start sound is output when the reel that last rotated after the delay time caused by the random delay process has run out. In other words, the reel start sound is output for the reel that last started spinning among the left reel, center reel, and right reel.

When outputting the reel start sound for each reel that starts spinning, the reel start sound is output each time a reel spins after the delay time caused by the random delay process has run out. In other words, the reel start sound is output when all reels, the left reel, center reel, and right reel, have started spinning.

When the reel start sound is output in this way even with a random delay, the reel start sound is output at the same timing as in the actual game, which reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player when transitioning from the pseudo game to the actual game, improves the tempo of the game, and increases the interest of the game.

When the reel start sound is not output, the reel start sound is not output even if the reel spins after the random delay process has eliminated the delay time. In other words, the reel start sound is not output regardless of whether the left reel, center reel, or right reel starts spinning. In this case, the absence of a reel start sound makes the player feel more uncomfortable than if a reel start sound were present, but since it is possible to prevent the reel start sound from being output at a time not intended by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable in that respect.

In addition, when transitioning from a pseudo game to a main game, the reel spinning start process for the main game may be executed after waiting for the wait period from when the reels start spinning in the pseudo game to when the reels start spinning in the main game. The reels start spinning in the main game is executed after executing a random delay process. In other words, a wait period can be created by operating the start switch for the main game when transitioning from a pseudo game to a main game, and a wait sound can be output.

When configured in this way, it is possible to minimize changes when transitioning from the actual game to the pseudo game, when transitioning from the pseudo game to the pseudo game, and when transitioning from the pseudo game to the actual game, so it is possible for the player to play without being aware of whether he is playing a pseudo game or an actual game, improving the tempo of the game and increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, while an embodiment in which a wait period is set at the start of a simulated game has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are cases in which a wait period is set at the start of a simulated game and cases in which it is not set, and it may be possible to make it so that not setting a wait period increases the rate at which a result advantageous to the player is awarded as a lottery result related to instruction functions such as AT. With such a configuration, the player feels a sense of discomfort due to the lack of a wait, and at the same time, can hope for a favorable lottery result, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, although an embodiment in which a wait period is set at the start of a simulated game has been described, this is not limiting, and no wait period may be set at the start of a simulated game.

In addition, when starting a pseudo game even if there is still a waiting period remaining from the start of reel rotation in the main game when transitioning from the main game to the pseudo game, the wait sound may not be looped during the maximum remaining waiting period (the period when playing in the shortest time from the start of reel rotation in the main game to the start of reel rotation in the pseudo game). For example, if the maximum remaining waiting period is 2.1 seconds, one loop of the wait sound is set to 2.1 seconds or more. By configuring in this way, the wait sound does not loop when transitioning from the main game to the pseudo game in the shortest period, so boredom with the game caused by continually hearing the same sound can be reduced.

<Regarding measures against fraudulent gaming machines and preventing dangerous installations> In recent years, due to the fact that the installation ratio of each type of gaming machine in an arcade is stipulated, there have been cases where gaming machines are installed in a way that differs from the usual installation method in order to increase the installation ratio of a certain type of gaming machine.

In addition, in order to differentiate themselves from neighboring stores, the layout of the gaming machines in each store is becoming more diverse.

In addition, there has been an increase in cases where players purchase gaming machines and play at home. These players are not necessarily skilled in operating gaming machines, and there is a risk that they may create dangerous installation situations.

The purpose of the gaming machine in this embodiment is to prevent some extreme installation methods in order to allow safe play in a variety of installation situations.

First, the correct installation of the gaming machine is as shown in Figure 1, with the bottom plate resting on a horizontal surface (or placement space) and the top plate positioned horizontally above the bottom plate. In addition, the left and right side plates and the back plate stand at approximately right angles to the horizontal surface (or placement space).

If the machine is properly installed like this, it is safe to play.

Next, we will explain dangerous installation situations using Figure 95.

As shown in Figure 95, dangerous gaming machines are installed so that the bottom plate is on an inclined surface (for example, a surface that is inclined 45 degrees downward to the left). Or, the left side plate is installed so that it is on a horizontal surface (in other words, the left side plate is the bottom, the top plate and bottom plate are standing at approximately right angles to the horizontal surface, and the right side plate is located horizontally above the left side plate). Note that Figure 95 shows the bottom plate installed on a surface that is inclined 45 degrees downward to the left when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and when the inclination of the surface becomes 90 degrees, the left side plate is installed so that it is on a horizontal surface.

In such dangerous installation conditions, there is a risk that the gaming machine may fall over, making it impossible to guarantee safe play.

<<Preventing dangerous installation situations with the selector>> For this reason, when the gaming machine is tilted to the left (45 degrees to 90 degrees), an error occurs in the gaming machine and the game stops. When the gaming machine is in a normal installation situation, it is said that the gaming machine is installed in the correct position, or that the selector is installed in the correct position. In the following explanation of this example, it is assumed that the gaming machine is powered on and is in a waiting state after one game has ended and no bets have been placed.

Specifically, one method for causing an error in a gaming machine is for the movable piece of the aisle sensor mounted on the selector to swing when the gaming machine is tilted to the left (45 degrees to 90 degrees), inducing a selector error and halting game progress. Note that if the aisle sensor detects a situation where it is not in its initial position for a specified period of time, it will be deemed a selector error.

Figure 96 shows a movable piece mounted on a selector and a sensor that detects the movable piece, where Figure 96(A) is a diagram of the selector when the gaming machine is in a normal installation state, and Figure 96(B) is a diagram of the selector when the gaming machine is in a dangerous installation state.

For example, the sensor in Figure 96 is a passage sensor, and has a selector on which a movable piece constituting the passage sensor mounted on a selector is supported by a pivot, and when the selector is installed in the correct position, the movable piece is configured to pop out onto the medal passage so that it can come into contact with medals, etc. When a medal, etc. comes into contact with the movable piece, the movable piece rotates, and the sensor constituting the passage sensor changes on or off due to the swinging of the movable piece, thereby detecting the medal, etc.

As shown in Fig. 96(A), in the case of such a selector, when a medal or the like is not inserted through the medal insertion slot and the selector is installed in the correct position, the movable piece is prevented from swinging by an elastic member such as a spring, so that the movable piece is set to its initial position. Also, when a medal or the like is not inserted through the medal insertion slot and the selector is installed in the correct position, the swing of the movable piece is not restricted by an elastic member such as a spring, but the swing of the movable piece may be restricted by gravity acting on the movable piece, so that the movable piece is set to its initial position. In such a case, if the selector is installed at an angle so that the movable piece faces downward, it becomes more susceptible to the effect of gravity, and the movable piece can be stably present in its initial position.

In a gaming machine equipped with such a selector, when the gaming machine is installed in the correct position, the movable piece of the selector is in the initial position, and in this situation the passage sensor does not determine that there is an abnormality, so the progress of the game is not stopped.

As shown in FIG. 96(B), in the case of such a selector, when no medals or the like have been inserted through the medal insertion slot and the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous installation condition, the elastic member such as a spring and the gravity vector received by the movable piece are made different from those in a normal gaming machine condition so that the movable piece will swing, and the movable piece is displaced to a position different from its initial position. Also, when no medals or the like have been inserted through the medal insertion slot and the selector is installed in the correct position, the swing of the movable piece is not restricted by an elastic member such as a spring, and the swing of the movable piece can be restricted by gravity acting on the movable piece so that the movable piece is set to its initial position, the point at which the movable piece is subjected to gravity changes, and the movable piece is displaced to a position different from its initial position.

In a gaming machine equipped with such a selector, if the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous installation condition, the movable piece will swing due to the different points on the movable piece receiving gravity, and when the power is turned on, the sensor will no longer detect the movable piece moving from its initial position, and the passage sensor will determine that there is an abnormality, making it possible to stop the progress of the game.

Another dangerous situation for installing an amusement machine is when the back panel of the machine is placed on a surface that is horizontal to the ground, and the bottom panel, top panel, or left and right side panels are at approximately right angles to the surface.

Even if such a gaming machine is installed in a dangerous installation condition, the operation mode of the selector's movable piece is the same as that described above, and the operation of the movable piece as shown in Figure 96 (B) makes it possible to detect a selector error and stop the progress of the game when the power is turned on.

In addition, using a dedicated sensor to determine whether the gaming machine is in a dangerous installation situation would increase the number of parts and costs, so the situation of the gaming machine can be detected using a sensor equipped in the selector. Therefore, when the gaming machine is in a normal installation situation and the power is on, if the orientation of the selector is the same as when the gaming machine is in a dangerous installation situation, the above-mentioned selector error can occur. For example, if the selector is tilted 45 to 90 degrees to the left from the normal position or tilted 90 degrees backwards from the normal position, a selector error can be detected and the progress of the game can be stopped.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent gameplay from progressing when the gaming machine is placed in a dangerous installation state, thereby making it possible to prevent dangerous installation methods for gaming machines. In addition, tilting the selector in a direction similar to a dangerous installation state will result in a selector error, so it is expected that this will have the effect of detecting fraud when a selector that has been removed due to fraudulent activity is reinstalled in the wrong direction.

If the gaming machine is installed in a dangerous condition and the selector error is prevented from occurring, when the start switch is operated with three bets, the reels will spin and can be stopped by operating the stop switch (play can proceed).

<<Preventing dangerous installation conditions related to medal payout>> Dangerous installation conditions for gaming machines are explained using Figure 97.

Figure 97 shows the rear of the front door when the left side panel of the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface. Although not shown, the front door is actually in a closed state. Note that the black arrow in Figure 97 indicates an enlargement of the area surrounded by the dotted line.

In machines that do not stop play because a specified error occurs when the left side panel of the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface, or that do not stop play even when the situation in Figure 97 occurs because a specified error is not detected during play, if the situation in Figure 97 occurs during play and a symbol combination that can result in a specified number of payouts after all reels have stopped is stopped, the payout process can be executed.

When a predetermined number of payout processes are executed in the situation shown in Figure 97 (a situation in which more than a predetermined number of medals are stored in the hopper), the medals are not discharged into the tray 28, and are configured to be able to be stored in the receiving section of Figure 97.

In addition, under normal installation conditions, the hopper discharge outlet and the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage are a specified distance apart even when the front door is closed. In other words, medals paid out from the hopper fly out from the hopper discharge outlet, pass through the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage and are guided to the tray 28. The medals remain in the air for at least a specified distance from when they fly out from the hopper discharge outlet until they pass through the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage.

When a dangerous installation situation occurs, as shown in Figure 97, the gravity vector acting on the medals in the air differs from that of a normal installation situation, but the medals flying out of the hopper's discharge outlet do not collide with the edge of the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage, but pass through the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage and are stored in the receiving section of the return passage.

In addition, the receiving section of the return passage is designed to be wide and deep enough to hold 15 25Φ medals (the maximum number of medals that can be paid out according to gaming machine regulations) in a dangerous installation situation, so even if the specifications are such that 15 medals can be paid out, they can still be stored in the receiving section of the return passage.

Also, medals can be stored in the receiving section of the return passage that protrudes forward as shown in <the right side view of the part surrounded by the dotted line> in Figure 97. Since the size of game medals is generally about 1.6 mm thick and 25 mm in diameter, in order to be able to store 15 of these medals, the capacity of the receiving section of the return passage (the capacity of the protruding part around the medal payout outlet of the return passage) must be 600 ^mm2 or more.

By configuring it in this way, when medals are paid out in a dangerous installation situation, they do not come out to the tray 28 but are stored in the receiving section of the return passage, so that the progress of the game can be essentially stopped by not paying out the medals, and it is possible to prevent playing in a dangerous installation situation.

In addition, when the payout process is executed with the back plate of the gaming machine placed on a horizontal surface, the medals collide with the edge of the medal payout outlet 45 of the return passage, preventing them from being guided to the receiving tray 28.

Even with this configuration, gameplay cannot progress, so dangerous installation situations can be prevented.

<<Speaker fraud prevention measures>> In recent years, there have been cases of fraudsters committing fraud against speakers in order to intentionally make it harder to hear error sounds and unusual sounds (such as the same sound being output continuously or a specific sound being output in a situation where it cannot be output) that are generated when a fraudster performs a fraudulent operation.

The aim of the gaming machine of this embodiment is to make it possible to hear as much sound as possible even if tampering is performed on the speaker.

Figure 98 shows the front view of the gaming machine, which is equipped with lower and upper speakers. The speakers are fixed to the back side of the front door.

The area indicated by the dashed line in Figure 98 is the entire circumference of the lower speaker's cone paper, so that the entire speaker cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine. The diameter of the speaker's cone paper is 70 mm.

A cover member is placed on the front door of the gaming machine to cover the speaker's cone paper and center cap, and the cover member has many holes formed in it to output the speaker's sound to the player. The cover member is made of a non-magnetic metal. Note that Figure 98 is an image, and the number of holes in the cover member is not as shown in the figure.

The diameter of the holes in the cover is 2 mm, and there are 300 holes in the cover corresponding to one of the lower speakers.

In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is 942 square millimeters ((2/2) x (2/2) x 3.14 x 300). In contrast, the area of the cone paper and center cap is 3,846.5 square millimeters ((70/2) x (70/2) x 3.14). In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is less than 1/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap.

By configuring it in this way, even if a wire or the like penetrates through all the holes in the cover member and creates holes in the cone paper and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, more than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap will remain.

As a result, even if the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or the like entering through all the holes in the cover member, more than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap will remain. The volume reduction rate is set to less than 20% when more than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap remains, so error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine can be heard adequately even through a torn speaker.

In addition, in a situation where the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or the like entering through all the holes in the cover member, even if the volume that the player can set is the lowest (excluding silence), the game sound will be above 50 decibels on average and will be loud enough to be heard. Note that the volume of the error sound cannot be changed by the player.

In addition, the above explanation describes a situation in which the cone paper and center cap are torn by wires or the like entering through all the holes in the cover member, but even if all the holes in the cover member are only on the front surface of the cone paper and only the cone paper is torn and holes are made in the cone paper equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, more than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper will remain.

And because the volume reduction rate is less than 20% when more than 3/4 of the cone's surface area remains, error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine can be heard easily.

The number of holes in the cover member, the size of the holes, the size of the cone paper, and the center cap described above are examples, and as long as the cone paper and center cap are configured so that the wire or the like can be inserted through all the holes in the cover member and more than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper remains, the design of each can be any value.

In the upper speaker in Figure 98, the area of the speaker's cone paper and center cap is approximately the same as the area of the cover member. In addition, a hole in the cover member is formed on approximately the front surface of the cover member. The speaker's cone paper and center cap are approximately rectangular, measuring 100 mm in length and 30 mm in width.

The diameter of the holes in the cover is 2 mm, and there are 480 holes in the cover corresponding to one of the upper speakers.

In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is 1507.2 square millimeters ((2/2) x (2/2) x 3.14 x 480). In contrast, the area of the cone paper and center cap is 3000 square millimeters (100 x 30). In other words, the total area of the holes in the cover member is approximately 1/2 (1/1.99) of the area of the cone paper and center cap.

In the case of such an upper speaker, even if wire or the like penetrates through all the holes in the cover member and holes are created in the cone paper and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, the structure is such that 1/1.5 or more and less than 1/2.5 of the area of the cone paper and center cap remains.

The configuration is such that the reduction in sound volume is less than 50% when 1/1.5 or more and less than 1/2.5 of the area of the cone paper and center cap remains.

With this configuration, the area of the speaker's cone paper and center cap is approximately the same as the area of the cover member, and even if wire or the like penetrates through all the holes in the cover member and creates holes in the cone paper and center cap equal to the total area of the holes in the cover member, the error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine can be heard sufficiently, making it possible to prevent fraudulent play on the gaming machine.

In the case of the upper speaker, similar to the case of the lower speaker, if the cone paper and center cap are torn by wire or the like entering through all the holes in the cover member, even if the volume that the player can set is the minimum (excluding silence), the game sound will be above 40 decibels on average and will be sufficiently audible. Note that the volume of the error sound cannot be changed by the player.

The number of holes in the cover member, the size of the holes, the size of the cone paper, and the center cap described above are examples, and as long as the cone paper and center cap are configured so that wires or the like can be inserted through all the holes in the cover member and 1/1.5 or more and less than 1/2.5 of the area of the cone paper remains, the design of each can be any value.

Although not shown, the volume reduction rate is set to less than 40% when 1/2.5 to less than 3/4 of the area of the cone paper and center cap remains. Therefore, even if wire or the like penetrates through all the holes in the cover member and the cone paper and center cap are made with holes in the cone paper and center cap as many as the total area of the holes in the cover member, the error sounds and game sounds from the gaming machine can be heard sufficiently, and fraudulent acts against gaming machines can be prevented.

<<Preventing problems caused by liquids flowing into the coin slot>> In recent years, there have been a number of incidents in which tea or other beverages have been poured into the medal slot.

The medal slot has holes to allow medals to be inserted into the gaming machine. If the medal slot has a large hole, it is easier to insert all the medals at once, and if the medal slot has a small hole, it is easier to insert medals one at a time.

In addition, medals inserted through the medal insertion port may be guided to the hopper through the selector, or from the selector through the return passage to the tray 28.

This is because the medal specifications are actually fixed, and because the medal slot is designed to guide the medals to a specific location inside the gaming machine, it is designed not to guide the medals to any other location than the specific location (although there may be irregular instances where medals spill out).

However, when liquid is poured into the coin slot, it can splash into unexpected places, causing fires and breakdowns.

The aim of this embodiment of the gaming machine is to prevent malfunctions from occurring even if liquid is poured into the medal insertion port.

Figure 99 is a view of the front door from the back, and Figure 100 is a view of the selector from the right side.

The liquids that may be poured in first are likely to be tea, water, coffee, or juice sold in stores, and their volumes are generally 150 ml to 500 ml. Among these, water has the lowest kinetic viscosity of 1.004×10 ⁻⁶ m ² /S (20° C.).

The following explanation uses water as an example, as it has the lowest kinetic viscosity of any liquid that may be added, but it goes without saying that the configuration will still be satisfactory if water is replaced with tea, coffee, or juice, which have a higher kinetic viscosity than water.

If the liquid inserted through the medal slot were to flow into the power box, it could cause an electrical short circuit and result in a fire. Also, if the liquid inserted through the medal slot were to flow into the hopper, it could cause the hopper to break down.

For this reason, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is configured to guide as much of the liquid inserted through the medal insertion port as possible into the tray 28.

First, the size of the medal insertion hole, which is the entrance through which the liquid flows in, is made roughly rectangular, with a length of 1.7 mm to less than 3 mm and a width of 25 mm to less than 30 mm. This is to make it smaller than the 30 mm diameter of a typical plastic bottle.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the liquid from flowing out of the medal slot all at once, and the liquid's flow speed can be kept below a certain level. This makes it possible to prevent the liquid from increasing in speed and splashing into the gaming machine cabinet.

Next, the liquid flowing in from the medal insertion port enters the selector, so to prevent it from being led from the selector to the hopper, the width of the passage through which the medals roll from the selector to the hopper (width A in Figure 100) is made less than 3 mm.

By configuring it in this way, medals can be passed through the selector, but the liquid can spill out of the passage and be led to the return passage. This makes it difficult for the liquid to be led to the hopper, preventing damage to the hopper. In addition, because the passage to the hopper is provided with a chute member as shown in Figure 99, even if some liquid is led to the hopper, it is possible for it to be stopped by the chute member.

The liquid that has been guided to the return passage is then guided through the return passage to the tray 28. The return passage is fixed to the back surface of the front door with screws in multiple places (not shown) and is configured to prevent liquid from leaking around the return passage. The medal payout outlet is also configured so that it is not positioned in the liquid's flow path, preventing liquid from splashing out of the medal payout outlet. The area behind the front door that is covered by the return passage is configured so that there are no gaps as it is made of a single member.

By configuring it in this way, the liquid guided from the selector to the return passage can flow down the return passage and be guided to the tray 28. This makes it less likely for the liquid to spill into the housing, and therefore makes it less likely for the liquid to be guided to the power supply box, preventing fires and breakdowns.

The tray 28 is designed to prevent liquid from spilling out of the tray 28. Specifically, the tray's volume is set to 500 ml or more.

By configuring it in this way, even if liquid the size of a typical plastic bottle is poured into the coin insertion port, it can be received in the tray 28 and is less likely to spill onto the store, reducing the cleaning burden on the store.

Note that 100% of the liquid poured from the medal insertion port does not have to be guided to the tray. This is because, as the liquid normally flows down, some of it remains in each passage and on the walls, so even if 500 ml of liquid is poured from the medal insertion port, less than 500 ml of liquid will accumulate in the tray 28. Also, since a small amount of liquid spilling onto the bottom of the housing is unlikely to cause a fire or malfunction, the purpose can be achieved by configuring the device so that 50% or more of the liquid poured from the medal insertion port accumulates in the tray 28.

<Regarding the roulette effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment> We will explain the roulette effect, which is one of the effects in the gaming machine described in this embodiment.

The sub-control means can receive information from the main control means, such as the results of the internal lottery, the results of processing related to the instruction function, and game states such as the main game state and RT state, and can execute effects according to the received information. For example, based on the information from the main control means, the sub-control means can execute effects that notify the player of advantageous results, or effects that do not give advantageous results but give the player hope for an advantageous result. A roulette effect is provided as one such effect.

The roulette effect is a series of effects that divide the display area of the display device 32, display the bonuses to be given to the player in each divided area, and after moving the cursor display cyclically, display that one of the divided areas has been selected, either automatically or by the player's operation. Note that the cursor display is an effect that indicates which of the divided display areas is currently selected, and is an effect display that lights up in accordance with the frame image in each divided display area.

For example, in (A) of FIG. 101, the display area of the display device is divided into four areas: (1) upper left area, (2) upper right area, (3) lower left area, and (4) lower right area, and the cursor display is displayed cyclically in the order of (1) upper left area, (2) upper right area, (3) lower left area, (4) lower right area, (1) upper left area, (2) upper right area, (3) lower left area, (4) lower right area, etc., and after a predetermined period of time, it is displayed that one of the divided areas has been determined, either automatically, when the player operates the performance switch, or when the final stop button is operated. Note that which divided area is to be stopped is determined at the start of the roulette performance, so even when a divided area is determined and displayed when the player operates the performance switch, the predetermined divided area is determined and displayed regardless of the timing of the player's operation of the performance switch. Therefore, when the cursor display is displayed cyclically after the start of the roulette performance, the cursor display is displayed so that it moves cyclically at high speed. In the case of a four-split display as shown in FIG. 101(A), the interval at which the cursor display is cyclically displayed at high speed (for example, the interval at which it moves from (1) to (2)) can be approximately 50 ms. Note that the order of cyclical display in FIG. 101(A) may be (1) upper left region, (2) upper right region, (4) lower right region, and (3) lower left region, in a clockwise circular order. Also, each of the split display areas into which the display area is divided may be referred to as a square.

For example, in FIG. 101B, the display area of the display device is divided into four areas: (1) left area, (2) center left area, (3) center right area, and (4) right area, and the cursor display is displayed cyclically in the order of (1) left area, (2) center left area, (3) center right area, (4) right area, (1) left area, (2) center left area, (3) center right area, (4) right area, etc., and a display is made that a divided area has been determined automatically after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or in response to the player's operation of a performance switch. Note that which divided area the cursor will stop in is determined at the start of the roulette performance, so that even when a divided area is determined and displayed in response to the player's operation of the performance switch, the predetermined divided area is determined and displayed regardless of the timing of the player's operation of the performance switch. For this reason, when the cursor display is displayed cyclically after the start of the roulette performance, the cursor display is displayed so that it moves cyclically at high speed. In the case of a four-split display as shown in FIG. 101(B), the interval at which the cursor is displayed cyclically at high speed (for example, the interval at which it moves from (1) to (2)) can be approximately 50 ms.

In the roulette presentation, the interval at which the cursor display is cyclically displayed at high speed (for example, the interval at which it moves from (1) to (2)) is exemplified as approximately 50 ms, but this is not limited thereto, and in Figs. 101(A) and (B) it may be 40 ms or 60 ms. In addition, while an example in which the cursor display is cyclically displayed at high speed in four split display areas has been described, it may be a mode in which the cursor display is cyclically displayed at high speed in three split display areas, or a mode in which the cursor display is cyclically displayed at high speed in five split display areas. Regardless of the number of split display areas, if the interval at which the cursor display is cyclically displayed at high speed for one revolution in the roulette presentation is 150 ms to 300 ms, the player will be less likely to feel that the cursor display has been intentionally stopped, even if the cursor display is stopped at the timing of the player's operation of the presentation switch.

In addition, the interval at which the cursor display in the roulette presentation is displayed cyclically at high speed does not have to be constant. The cursor display may make one revolution slowly in the first revolution after starting to move, and gradually approach maximum speed from the second revolution onwards, or it may make one revolution slowly in the first revolution, and move at maximum speed from the second revolution onwards.

By providing the roulette effect in this way, the notification method becomes more interesting and the excitement of the game increases. Also, by moving the cursor display more slowly in the first lap than in the second lap, it becomes easier for the player to understand the display contents of each divided display area.

The cursor display that remains displayed even after the roulette performance has started is a display that indicates that one of the split display areas is currently selected, and is, for example, a display that brightens the currently selected split display area (or darkens the split display areas other than the currently selected split display area), displays a predetermined color effect around the currently selected split display area, or displays a predetermined icon display in a certain location of the currently selected split display area. This cursor display that remains displayed even after the roulette performance has started is sometimes simply referred to as an effect display (effect display when moving) to indicate the performance effect it provides.

The roulette effect can be executed after the start lever operation to start a game is accepted or after all the reels have stopped. In other words, the cursor display starts moving in the roulette effect when the start lever operation to start a game is accepted or after all the reels have stopped. Also, each divided display area of the roulette effect may be displayed in the previous game, and the cursor display may start moving when the start lever operation to start the next game is accepted.

When the roulette performance starts, the display contents of the split display areas are displayed. For example, as shown in (1) of FIG. 102, the bonuses that can be obtained are displayed in each split display area. Here, the bonus contents may be displayed in the order of the upper left area, upper right area, lower left area, and lower right area, or the bonus contents may be displayed in all split display areas simultaneously.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (2), the cursor is displayed to indicate that "No overlay" in the upper left area is selected first.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (3), the cursor is displayed to indicate that "+10" in the upper right area is currently selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (4), the cursor is displayed to indicate that "+50" in the lower left area is currently selected.

Next, as shown in Figure 102 (5), the cursor is displayed to indicate that "+100" in the lower right area is currently selected.

Next, as shown in (2) of Figure 102, the cursor is displayed in the lower right area to indicate that "No overlay" is currently selected, and the cursors are displayed in order until they stop.

In (2), (3), (4), and (5) of FIG. 102, the split display area selected by the cursor display is bright, and the other split display areas are dark. Note that visibility may be reduced to the extent that background pictures and text are visible.

As shown in FIG. 102, the prize in the split display area that is selected first when the roulette performance starts is the lowest prize (including no prize) compared to the prizes in the other split display areas. With this configuration, by displaying the lowest prize with the cursor first, it is possible to easily create a sense of anxiety about the roulette performance, making the roulette performance more thrilling. On the other hand, if the highest prize is displayed with the cursor first, it is likely to create a sense of security, and if the roulette performance results in a bad outcome, the gap with expectations may lead to a motivation to stop playing. In order to embody this psychological effect, the lowest prize is displayed with the cursor first.

Furthermore, the bonuses displayed in each divided display area shown in FIG. 102 are examples, and a presentation pattern may be provided in which multiple types of bonuses are displayed so that various bonuses can be displayed. In other words, multiple presentation patterns are provided according to the expectation of the bonus being awarded. However, in all cases, the position where the cursor is first displayed is the upper left area, and the order of movement of the cursor display is the same. Also, the configuration is such that the lowest bonus is displayed in the upper left area.

In addition, the percentage of all presentation patterns in which the cursor is initially displayed in the upper left area may be higher than the percentage of all presentation patterns in which the cursor is initially displayed in other areas different from the upper left area, or the percentage of all presentation patterns in which the lowest bonus is displayed in the upper left area may be higher than the percentage of all presentation patterns in which the lowest bonus is displayed in other areas different from the upper left area.

Furthermore, the display contents of the bonus displayed in each divided area may be the same. For example, the display contents of the bonus in FIG. 102(1) may be "+10G" in the upper left area, "+10G" in the upper right area, "+50G" in the lower left area, and "+100G" in the lower right area, or "+100G" in the upper left area, "+100G" in the upper right area, "+100G" in the lower left area, and "+100G" in the lower right area.

Note that the bonus to be awarded is already determined before the roulette effect begins, and the game that determines the bonus may be the game that starts the roulette effect or a game that occurs before the roulette effect begins.

This configuration makes it easier to understand the regularity of the roulette display, making it easier for players to understand the game.

In addition, by rotating the cursor in the order of (2), (3), (5), and (4) in Figure 102, it is possible to create a greater sense of anxiety by using the clockwise rule, and to draw interest in the roulette presentation.

Figure 103 shows an example in which an image is displayed prompting the user to operate a switch for the effect after the roulette effect shown in Figure 102 has started, and the effect switch is operated and the cursor display stops.

(1) in Figure 103 shows that an image prompting the user to operate a performance switch is displayed after the cursor shown in Figure 102 has made at least one revolution (one revolution is when the cursor starts moving from the upper left area and moves to the lower right area). As the image prompting the user to operate the performance switch, an image imitating a performance switch with the word "PUSH" written on it is displayed so as to cover a portion of all of the split display areas.

In this way, by displaying an image encouraging the player to operate the effect switch after the cursor has made at least one revolution, the roulette effect does not end immediately after it starts when the effect switch is operated, allowing the player to recognize that the roulette effect has started. In addition, by operating the effect switch after the roulette effect has started and causing the cursor to stop displaying in a split display area that the cursor has not yet reached, the effect of the effect of the player's sense of self-reliance by operating the effect switch is prevented from being reduced. Note that an image encouraging the player to operate the effect switch may be displayed when the cursor has made one or more revolutions.

This configuration can be expressed as a display device that displays certain information related to the progress of a game in each of the display areas divided into a plurality of areas, sequentially switches between displaying a selection display indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, and can display a predetermined effect that stops the display of the selection display in one of the display areas when a predetermined condition is met, the predetermined condition including receiving a press of a performance switch, and can display an operation promotion effect to encourage the operation of the performance switch when the selection displays are sequentially switched between and displayed, and the operation promotion effect can be displayed after each display area has been selected and displayed at least once after the predetermined effect has begun.

And in (2) of Figure 103, the cursor display has moved to the upper right area while the image prompting the user to operate the performance switch remains displayed.

And in (3) of Figure 103, the cursor display has moved to the lower left area while the image prompting the user to operate the performance switch remains displayed.

In FIG. 103 (4), the cursor display has moved to the lower right area while the image prompting the user to operate the performance switch remains displayed. After that, the cursor is displayed cyclically moving in the order of FIG. 103 (1), (2), (3), and (4).

In this way, the cyclical cursor movement display does not end while the image prompting the user to operate the effect switch is displayed and the cursor is cyclically moved and displayed, and the cursor display is stopped when the effect switch is operated. However, when the roulette effect is started when a game is started by operating the start switch, if the final stop switch is operated, the cursor display may be stopped in the same manner as when the effect switch is operated, even if the effect switch is not operated.

In (5) of Figure 103, the effect switch is operated at the same time that the cursor display selects the upper right area.

Because it has been decided that the bonus to be awarded before the start of the roulette effect shown in FIG. 103 described above will be an additional amount of "+100G" (indicating that the number of AT plays will be extended by 100 plays), even if the effect switch is operated at the timing of (5) in FIG. 103, the cursor display will not stop at "+10G" displayed in the upper right area.

In addition, when the performance switch is operated at the timing of (5) in FIG. 103, the cursor display does not move to the lower left area, but moves and stops in the lower right area as shown in (6) in FIG. 103. In other words, regardless of the timing of the performance switch operation, when the performance switch is operated, the cursor display is moved to a predetermined cursor display position and then stopped.

Because it takes 50 ms for the cursor display to move one space, it is difficult for a player to reliably operate the effect switch at any desired cursor display position, and since the player has no way of proving this, even if the cursor display does not stop at the predetermined stop position after moving the space in order after the effect switch is operated, it is difficult to sense that the cursor has been intentionally stopped and displayed in the predetermined split display area.

With this configuration, the result of the roulette effect can be announced immediately when the player operates the effect switch, allowing for a fast-paced gameplay and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in a game in which a roulette effect is executed, even if the game is played in the theoretically fastest time possible from the operation of the start switch to the stopping of all reels, an image prompting the operation of the effect switch is displayed before all reels have stopped.

This configuration makes it easier for players who play quickly to recognize that a roulette effect is being performed, and by getting players interested in the roulette effect, the fun of playing the game is increased.

In addition, as an image for encouraging the operation of a special effect switch, FIG. 103 displays an image that imitates a special effect switch, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute an introductory effect before the special effect switch is displayed, or to display a text image such as "Press it!", or to prompt the user to operate the special effect switch by voice after a character image is displayed.

In addition, when a roulette effect is executed and an image is displayed encouraging the operation of the effect switch, the lamp on the effect switch is made to flash. In this case, the flashing cycle of the lamp on the effect switch (the time from when it is turned on to when it is turned off) is configured to be longer than the time it takes for the cursor display to make one revolution. This configuration makes it possible for the player to feel that the speed at which the cursor display moves is relatively fast.

When the effect switch is operated to stop the cursor display, the split display area where the cursor display has stopped is configured to blink. Blinking means that the brightness of the split display area where the cursor display has stopped is switched at high speed, and the split display area where the cursor display has stopped is displayed by switching between a bright display state and a dark display state at regular intervals.

In this case, the time required for the blinking display to switch from a bright display mode to a dark display mode is set to 20 ms. In other words, the time required for the blinking display to switch from a bright display mode to a dark display mode is set to be shorter than the interval (50 ms) for cyclically displaying the cursor display at high speed.

This configuration makes it visually easier to see that the cursor has stopped, increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, the time for which the blinking display is performed in the split display area where the cursor display has stopped is set to be longer than the time it takes for the cursor display to make one revolution when the cursor display is displayed cyclically at high speed. For example, the time for which the blinking display is performed in the split display area where the cursor display has stopped is set to 500 ms.

This configuration makes it easier to visually see that the cursor has stopped, increasing the fun of the game.

When expressing such a configuration, the display device is capable of displaying certain information regarding the progress of a game in each of the display areas divided into a plurality of areas, sequentially switching and displaying a selection display indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, and displaying a predetermined effect in which the selection display is stopped in one of the display areas when a predetermined condition is met, and the display device is capable of displaying a stopped display mode in which the stopped display mode of the selection display when the predetermined condition is met and the selection display is stopped in one of the display areas is switched alternately multiple times between a mode in which the selected and displayed display area is bright and a mode in which the selected and displayed display area is dark, and when comparing the time T1 from when a certain display area is selected and displayed in the display device when the selection display indicating that one of the display areas has been selected is switched and displayed sequentially to a mode in which the selected and displayed display area is dark, it can be said that T1 > T2.

Furthermore, the blinking display executed in the split display area where the cursor display is stopped is made to stand out more than the movement of the cursor display. For example, the maximum brightness of the blinking display is brighter than the maximum brightness when the cursor display is moving, the difference between the maximum brightness and maximum darkness when the cursor display is moving is larger in the blinking display, and the range of the effect when the cursor display is moving is larger in the blinking display.

This configuration makes it easier to visually see that the cursor has stopped, increasing the fun of the game.

This configuration can be expressed as a display device that displays certain information related to the progress of a game in each of the display areas divided into a plurality of areas, sequentially switches between displaying a selection display indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect in which the selection display is stopped in one of the display areas when a predetermined condition is met, and is capable of displaying a specific effect display in the selected display area as the stop display mode of the selection display when the selection display is stopped in one of the display areas when the predetermined condition is met, and in a situation in which the selection displays are sequentially switched between and displayed, a specific effect display is performed in a certain display area to indicate that a certain display area is selected and displayed, and a specific effect display is not performed in a certain display area to indicate that a certain display area is not selected and displayed, and the specific effect is configured to be more easily visible than the specific effect.

Before the roulette effect begins, the side lamps on the front panel PS2 are flashed. For example, if the roulette effect is executed after all reels have stopped, the side lamps are flashed after all reels have stopped, and then the cursor movement display of the roulette effect begins. An example of the side lamp flashing effect is a side lamp that repeatedly lights up and goes out in white. The time from when the side lamps turn on to when they go out is called the flashing cycle, and in this embodiment, the flashing cycle is 100 ms. The color of the side lamps is not limited to white and may be changed to other colors as appropriate.

This configuration allows the player to recognize when the roulette effect begins by the side lamp, increasing the player's sense of anticipation for playing the roulette effect.

The blinking cycle of the side lamp blinking pattern is configured to be longer than the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one split display area to the next split display area when the cursor display in the roulette effect moves at its fastest speed. For example, the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one split display area to the next split display area is 50 ms, and the blinking cycle is 100 ms.

With this configuration, the movement time of the cursor display in the roulette effect is shorter than the blinking cycle of the side lamps, making it possible to visually confirm the movement of the cursor display at high speed. By not giving the player any certainty that he or she has accurately pressed a certain split display area of the roulette effect, it is possible to prevent the player's enthusiasm for playing from diminishing even if the cursor display stops in an unexpected position.

In this configuration, the display device displays certain information related to the progress of the game in each of the display areas divided into a plurality of areas, sequentially switches between selection displays indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, and when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined effect can be displayed in which the selection display stops being displayed in one of the display areas, and a predetermined lamp can flash in a predetermined flashing pattern while the predetermined effect is being performed. When the display device sequentially switches between selection displays indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, the time T1 from when a certain display area is selected and when the display area is selected and the next display area to be selected and displayed after the certain display area are compared, the time T2 from when the predetermined lamp is turned on and when it is turned off in the predetermined flashing pattern of the predetermined lamp can be expressed as T1<T2.

Furthermore, regarding the effect switch for stopping the cursor display of the roulette effect, the distance from when the effect switch is pressed to when it is pushed to a position where the ON state of the effect switch can be detected is set to 0.8 cm. This means that it takes about 0.3 ms to push the effect switch 0.8 cm when the effect switch is operated, assuming that the movement speed of the hand of the player operating the effect switch is 100 km/h. Because of this time of about 0.3 ms, it is possible to prevent the player from being certain that he or she has definitely pressed a certain divided display area of the roulette effect, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing even if the cursor display stops in an unexpected position. In addition, since the distance that the player's hand moves to reach the effect switch when operating the effect switch is generally about 50 cm, it takes 18 ms from when the player starts moving his or her hand to press the effect switch until the player's hand reaches the effect switch. By adding this 18 ms to the time it takes for the effect switch to turn on, it is possible to prevent the player from being certain that they have definitely pressed a certain split display area of the roulette effect, and to prevent the player's enthusiasm for playing from decreasing even if the cursor display stops in an unexpected position.

In addition, when executing a cyclical effect in which the cursor display moves periodically, such as a roulette effect, the cyclical effect is configured so that the cyclical effect does not synchronize with the reel rotation speed so as not to assist in the eye-pressing of the main reel. In this embodiment, when the cursor display movement speed is at its highest speed, it takes 50 ms for the cursor display to switch from one split display area to the next split display area, and when the main reel rotation speed is at its highest speed (constant speed), a 20-symbol reel rotates 79.5 times per minute, so the movement time from one symbol on the reel to the next symbol is approximately 37.7 ms, and the time for the cursor display to switch from one split display area to the next split display area is greater than the movement time from one symbol on the reel to the next symbol.

With this configuration, the cursor display cycle of the roulette effect and the movement cycle of the symbols drawn on the reels can be shifted, preventing assistance with eye-pressing the main reels.

In addition, if the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one split display area to the next split display area when the cursor display movement speed is at its fastest is set to 20 ms, and the time it takes for the cursor display to move from one symbol on the reel to the next symbol on the reel is approximately 37.7 ms because a 20-symbol reel rotates 79.5 times per minute when the main reel rotation speed is at its fastest (constant speed), the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one split display area to the next split display area may be set to be less than the time it takes for the cursor display to move from one symbol on the reel to the next symbol on the reel.

Even with this configuration, the cursor display period of the roulette presentation and the movement period of the symbols on the reels can be shifted, so that assistance with eye-pressing the main reel can be prevented. In other words, the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one split display area to the next split display area ≠ the movement time from one symbol on the reel to the next symbol, and the time it takes for the cursor display to switch from one split display area to the next split display area and the movement time from one symbol on the reel to the next symbol are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments.

In this configuration, the display device displays certain information related to the progress of the game in each of the display areas divided into a plurality of areas, sequentially switches between selection displays indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, and when a predetermined condition is met, a predetermined effect can be displayed in which the selection display is stopped in one of the display areas. When the display device sequentially switches between selection displays indicating that one of the display areas has been selected, the time T1 from when a certain display area is selected and when the next display area is selected and when the next time a certain display area is selected and when the reel is rotating at a constant speed, the time T2 from when a certain symbol is displayed at a predetermined position and when the symbol following the certain symbol is displayed at a predetermined position, is compared, it can be expressed as T1 ≠ T2.

In addition, when a game is started by operating the start switch, a wait period may occur depending on the progress of the previous game. The wait period can be a maximum of 2 to 3 seconds. If the start timing of the roulette effect is set after the start switch is accepted, and there is a maximum wait period after the start switch is accepted, the roulette effect is configured to start after the stop switch can be accepted. Even if there is no wait period after the start switch is accepted (if 4.1 seconds or more have passed since the reels began spinning in the previous game), the roulette effect is configured to start before the stop switch can be accepted.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the roulette effect from being skipped by the operation of the stop switch. For example, when the roulette effect is ended by the operation acceptance of any of the stop switches, when the roulette effect is ended by the operation acceptance of the third stop operation, when the roulette effect is ended by the operation acceptance of the bet operation for the next game, or when the roulette effect is ended by the operation acceptance of the start switch for the next game, there is a possibility that the roulette effect will end without being fully enjoyed. In order to prevent such a situation, the start timing of the roulette effect is set to a timing before the timing when the stop switch can be operated. In particular, by starting the roulette effect and making one revolution or more around all the divided display areas or by making the moving speed of the cursor display of the roulette effect reach the maximum speed before the timing when the stop switch can be operated, it is possible to make the roulette effect more enjoyable and to improve the interest of the game.

This configuration can be expressed as follows: in a display device, certain information regarding the progress of a game is displayed in each of a number of display areas divided into areas, a selection display indicating which of the display areas has been selected is switched on and off in sequence, and when a specified condition is met, a predetermined effect can be displayed in which the selection display is stopped in one of the display areas; the predetermined effect can be executed by operating the start switch; and when the predetermined effect is executed by operating the start switch in a situation in which no wait is occurring, the predetermined effect can be executed by the time the stop switch is operated to be enabled.

In addition, if the start timing of the roulette effect is set after the start switch is accepted, a freeze may be generated after the start switch is accepted (before the reels spin), and the roulette effect may start during the freeze. If the roulette effect is started during a freeze, the freeze is executed for several seconds and the roulette effect starts during the freeze, but the roulette effect may end during the freeze, or may end when the freeze ends, or the roulette effect may continue even after the freeze ends.

With this configuration, the roulette effect can be started during the freeze, allowing players to enjoy the roulette effect.

Furthermore, in the roulette presentation, there may be multiple patterns for the stop display pattern of the cursor display. For example, there may be a pattern in which the cursor moves from the cursor display position when the presentation switch is received to a predetermined cursor display position in the shortest possible time, a pattern in which the cursor moves from the cursor display position when the presentation switch is received to the predetermined cursor display position after making one revolution, and a pattern in which the cursor moves from the cursor display position when the presentation switch is received to the predetermined cursor display position after making one revolution, and the cursor movement speed is slow. The selection rate of each of these cursor display movement patterns is varied depending on the expectation of whether it has been determined that a relatively advantageous privilege will be awarded to the player among the privileges displayed in the divided display area.

By configuring it in this way, players can feel a sense of anticipation when they see the stopping pattern of the cursor display, which can increase the excitement of the game.

As mentioned above, the movement cycle of the cursor display in the roulette presentation is 50 ms, and this movement cycle is configured not to be synchronized with the dynamic lighting cycle. In this embodiment, the dynamic lighting cycle is 11.175 ms, and each time the cursor display advances by one position, a certain lamp (any of the credit number indicator, acquired coin number indicator, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, replay lamp, start lamp, and medal insertion possible lamp) is not lit.

With this configuration, the brightness of the various lamps and the LCD are not synchronized, reducing light irritation, reducing fatigue caused by playing and preventing the onset of photosensitivity, allowing players to play for long periods of time with peace of mind.

<Setting confirmation effect> In this embodiment, there are effects to convince the player of the setting value corresponding to the payout rate of the gaming machine, and effects to convince the player of the range of setting values corresponding to the payout rate of the gaming machine, and these effects are called setting confirmation effects.

The effect that allows the player to be convinced of the setting value corresponding to the payout rate of the gaming machine is an effect that only appears with one setting value. For example, if a setting confirmation effect that only appears when the setting value is 6 is executed, the player can be convinced that the setting value is 6 when he sees that effect. Such a setting confirmation effect that confirms one setting is called a setting confirmation effect (single).

An effect that allows a player to be certain of the range of setting values (excluding the range of all setting values) that correspond to the payout rate of the gaming machine is an effect that only appears when the setting value is within a certain range. For example, if a setting confirmation effect is executed that only appears when the setting value is 4, 5, or 6, the player can be certain that the setting value is one of 4, 5, or 6 when he sees that effect. Such a setting confirmation effect that confirms a setting within a certain range is called a setting confirmation effect (range).

Note that when simply written as "setting confirmation performance," it is a broader concept that includes both setting confirmation performance (single) and setting confirmation performance (range).

Note that, in this embodiment, effects that allow players to predict a setting value that may appear with all settings but is particularly likely to appear with a certain setting value are not included in the setting confirmation effects. For example, if the appearance rate of a certain effect is 10% with setting 1, 10% with setting 2, 10% with setting 3, 10% with setting 4, 10% with setting 5, and 20% with setting 6, a certain effect is likely to appear with setting 6, but since it may appear with all settings, the player cannot be sure of the setting value when seeing the certain effect, so in this embodiment, it is not included in the setting confirmation effects. Note that, in the case where the appearance rate of a certain effect is 0% with setting 1, 10% with setting 2, 10% with setting 3, 10% with setting 4, 10% with setting 5, and 20% with setting 6, the certain effect does not appear with setting 1, so the player can be sure that the setting is 2 to 6 when seeing the certain effect, so it is included in the setting confirmation effects in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 104, the setting confirmation effects include sound patterns output by operating an effect switch on the start screen of a game state such as CZ or AT, the end screen of a game state such as CZ or AT, and the end screen of a game state such as CZ or AT, a display of the number of game medals acquired during the AT, a display of the number of medals added during the AT, and sounds output at specific times (when a button press is successful, at the start of a certain game state, at the end of a certain game state, etc.).

Incidentally, when an end screen for a game state such as CZ or AT is displayed, there may be cases where the start switch for the next game is operated to continue and start the CZ or AT (so-called revival effect), and in this case, it may be possible to select a presentation pattern for a setting confirmation effect with a different setting value on the said end screen. For example, when a revival effect is executed by operating the start switch for the next game when the end screen is displayed in a setting value 2 situation, a setting confirmation effect of "setting 4 or higher confirmed" may be selected on the said end screen. In this way, the condition for the setting confirmation effect may or may not include the fact that a revival effect does not occur (when the relationship between the setting value and the setting confirmation effect is correct even if a revival effect occurs).

The information on the setting values revealed by such setting confirmation effects is important information for the player when playing the game, so players can use each timing when the setting confirmation effects appear as a guide for deciding whether or not to continue playing, and for setting goals to be achieved in the game.

In addition, if the setting value 6, which has the highest payout rate, is determined too early, other gaming machines in the same arcade will be deemed not to have setting value 6, which will lead to a decrease in operation of the entire arcade.

For this reason, the trigger and frequency of appearance of setting confirmation effects are important parameters for increasing the interest of the game.

In particular, the setting confirmation effect that confirms setting values 5 and 6, which are setting values with the highest ball payout rate of all setting values (called high settings), is one of the effects that players are most interested in, so if it appears frequently, players will think that not seeing the setting confirmation effect means that the setting value with the lowest ball payout rate of all setting values (called low settings) is selected, which can be a factor in causing players to quit playing early.

In light of this, when the numerator of the setting confirmation effect (single) in which the setting value 6 is confirmed on the CZ end screen, which is a predetermined setting confirmation effect among the setting confirmation effects, is set to 1, the denominator is set to a value of approximately 10,000 times or more, which is the upper limit number of times of play in one day (12-hour business). For example, if the winning probability of setting values 1 to 6 CZ is 1/120 (the CZ end screen is always displayed when CZ is won) and the winning probability of the setting confirmation effect (single) in which the setting value 6 is confirmed on the CZ end screen for each game is set to 1/100, then 1/120 x 1/100 = 1/12,000, and the denominator (12,000) when the numerator is 1 is 1, which is the upper limit number of times of play in one day (12-hour business). Note that the probability of winning 1/10,000 times or more when playing 10,000 times is 63.21%. In other words, the probability of winning the 1/10,000 prize in 10,000 tries is 63.21%, and the probability of not winning the 1/10,000 prize in 10,000 tries is 36.79%.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of the appearance of a setting confirmation effect (single) that confirms the setting value 6 on the CZ end screen after 10,000 plays is 56.54%, which is less than 63.21%, and even if a setting confirmation effect (single) that confirms the setting value 6 does not appear on the CZ end screen, the possibility that the setting value is 6 is 43.46%, which is more than 36.79%, so even if a setting confirmation effect (single) that confirms the setting value 6 does not appear on the CZ end screen, it is unlikely to be a factor in causing players to quit playing. Also, since the denominator when the numerator is 1 is an indication of the number of plays that will result in a hit with a probability of 50% or more if playing up to that point, by setting the probability denominator to a value of 10,000 or more, even if it does not appear after playing in one day, it cannot be concluded that it is a low setting, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to visit the gaming center next time.

In addition, when the numerator of the setting confirmation effect (single) in which the setting value 6 is confirmed on the AT end screen, which is a specific setting confirmation effect, is set to 1, the denominator is set to a value of approximately 10,000 times or more, which is the upper limit number of times play can be performed in one day (12 hours of operation). For example, if the probability of winning an AT with setting values 1 to 6 is 1/500 (the AT end screen is always displayed when the AT is won), and the probability of winning a setting confirmation effect (single) in which the setting value 6 is confirmed on the AT end screen is 3/100, then 1/500 x 3/100 = 1/16666.67, and the denominator (16666.67) when the numerator is 1 is 1, which is more than 10,000 times, which is the upper limit number of times play can be performed in one day (12 hours of operation).

By configuring it in this way, the probability of the appearance of a setting confirmation effect (single) that confirms the setting value 6 on the AT end screen after 10,000 plays is 45.12%, which is less than 63.21%, and even if a setting confirmation effect (single) that confirms the setting value 6 does not appear on the AT end screen, the possibility that the setting value is 6 is 54.88%, which is more than 36.79%. Therefore, even if a setting confirmation effect (single) that confirms the setting value 6 does not appear on the AT end screen, it is unlikely to be a factor in causing players to abandon play.

In addition, when the numerator of the probability of occurrence of the combined setting confirmation effect (single) in which the setting value 6 is confirmed on the CZ end screen and the AT end screen, which are the specified setting confirmation effects, is 1, the denominator is less than 10,000 times, which is the upper limit of the number of times play can be performed in one day (12 hours of operation).

For example, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the probability of occurrence of a setting confirmation effect (single) in which a setting value of 6 is confirmed on the CZ end screen for each game is 1/12,000, and the probability of occurrence of a setting confirmation effect (single) in which a setting value of 6 is confirmed on the AT end screen for each game is 1/16,666.67, so the combined probability of occurrence of a setting confirmation effect (single) in which a setting value of 6 is confirmed on the CZ end screen and the AT end screen is 1/6,976.74, and the denominator (6,976.74) when the numerator is 1 is less than 10,000 times, which is the maximum number of times play can be performed in one day (12-hour operation).

The combined probability of occurrence of all the setting fixed effects (single) with a fixed setting value of 6 is not 1/2000 or more. This is because the average number of times a game is played in a day (12-hour operation) is about 2000 times, and if the combined probability of occurrence of all the setting fixed effects (single) with a fixed setting value of 6 is set to more than this average number of times, players will think that no setting fixed effects (single) will appear = a low setting, which may increase the possibility of causing early withdrawal from the game. For this reason, the combined probability of occurrence of all the setting fixed effects (single) with a fixed setting value of 6 is set to 1/2000 or more.

By configuring it in this way, even if the setting confirmation effect (single) is not displayed, it is less likely to be a factor in causing players to abandon the game, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play by continuing to play until there is a chance that the setting confirmation effect (single) will be displayed.

The selection ratio of the presentation pattern with such a configuration will be explained based on Figure 105. Note that the ball payout rates for setting values 1 to 6 in Figure 105 are the same as those of the gaming machine of this embodiment, with setting value 1 having the lowest ball payout rate and setting value 6 having the highest ball payout rate. Also, for setting values 2 to 5, the ball payout rate increases as the setting value increases.

The winning probability of the CZ shown in FIG. 105 is 1/120, and the winning probability of the AT is 1/500. Note that the winning probability of the CZ and the winning probability of the AT can be freely designed in the specifications of the gaming machine. In addition, the probability of winning the CZ and the probability of winning the AT may change for each setting value. For example, the probability of winning the CZ for setting value 1 is 1/139, the probability of winning the AT is 1/556, the probability of winning the CZ for setting value 2 is 1/130, the probability of winning the AT is 1/541, the probability of winning the CZ for setting value 3 is 1/128, the probability of winning the AT is 1/538, the probability of winning the CZ for setting value 4 is 1/126, the probability of winning the AT is 1/532, the probability of winning the CZ for setting value 5 is 1/124, the probability of winning the AT is 1/528, the probability of winning the CZ for setting value 6 is 1/120, the probability of winning the AT is 1/500, etc. The higher the setting value (the higher the ball payout rate), the higher the probability of winning the CZ and the probability of winning the AT may be, or conversely, the higher the setting value (the higher the ball payout rate), the lower the probability of winning the CZ and the probability of winning the AT may be.

In the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 105, "default" is a normal presentation pattern that is not a setting confirmation presentation. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that can appear with any setting value.

"Setting 2 or higher confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms the setting value to one of the following: setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, or setting value 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 1.

"Setting 3 or higher confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms the setting value to be either setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, or setting value 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 1 or setting value 2.

"Setting 4 or higher confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms the setting value to be either setting value 4, setting value 5, or setting value 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 1, setting value 2, or setting value 3.

"Setting 5 or higher confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms the setting value to either setting value 5 or setting value 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, or setting value 4.

"Setting 6 Confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms the setting value to 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.

"Even number setting confirmed" is a presentation pattern that, when it appears, confirms setting value 2, setting value 4, or setting value 6. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 1, setting value 3, or setting value 5.

"Setting 2 Negation" is a presentation pattern in which the setting value is determined to be one of setting values 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 when it appears. In other words, it is a presentation pattern that does not appear with setting value 2. Note that the winning probability of the presentation pattern of "Setting 2 Negation" with a setting value with a ball output rate lower than the setting value to be negated (setting value 1 in FIG. 105) is lower than the winning probability of the presentation pattern with a ball output rate setting value higher than the setting value to be negated (setting values 3, 4, 5, and 6 in FIG. 105). Therefore, when the setting confirmation presentation of "Setting 2 Negation" appears, it is expected that the setting value is 3 or higher. In addition, the setting value may be set to appear more frequently as the setting value becomes larger. In this case, when the setting confirmation presentation of "Setting 2 Negation" appears, the possibility of the setting value being 6 increases, and the higher the setting, the more reliable the setting value can be estimated.

This type of configuration has multiple setting values with different ball payout rates, a first setting value negation effect that is recognizable as not being the first setting value, a second setting value different from the first setting value, and a third setting value different from the first and second setting values, with the third setting value being set to have a higher ball payout rate than the second setting value, and it can be expressed as saying that a game played with the third setting value is more likely to produce a first setting value negation effect than a game played with the second setting value.

In addition, in FIG. 105, the presentation pattern belonging to the setting confirmation presentation (single) is the presentation pattern of "setting 6 confirmed", and the presentation patterns belonging to the setting confirmation presentation (range) are the presentation patterns of "setting 2 or higher confirmed", "setting 3 or higher confirmed", "setting 4 or higher confirmed", "setting 5 or higher confirmed", "even number setting confirmed", and "setting 2 negated".

In addition, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the CZ end screen is 1%, and since the probability of winning the CZ is 1/120, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the CZ end screen for each game is 1/12,000.

In addition, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the AT end screen is 3%, and since the probability of winning the AT is 1/500, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game is 1/16666.67.

Also, even if the "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect pattern is not won when the setting value is 6, the setting value may be confirmed as 6. This is the case when it becomes clear as a result of winning the setting confirmation effect (range) multiple times.

For example, in the case of the pattern of the CZ ending screen in Figure 105, if the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern are won, it is determined that the setting value is 6. If the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern is won, either the setting value 5 or the setting value 6 is confirmed, and if the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern is then won, it is determined that the setting value is 6 because the setting value 5 is an odd number.

In this way, when the setting value is determined by multiple setting determination effects (ranges), the probability of winning a performance pattern with multiple setting determination effects (ranges) is higher than the probability of winning a performance pattern with a setting determination effect (single).

To explain this using Figure 105, the probability of winning the ``Setting 6 confirmed'' presentation pattern on the CZ end screen when the setting value is 6 is 1%, the probability of winning the ``Setting 5 or higher confirmed'' presentation pattern on the CZ end screen when the setting value is 6 is 2%, and the probability of winning the ``Even number setting confirmed'' presentation pattern on the CZ end screen when the setting value is 6 is 5%. Therefore, in the case of a 1/120 CZ winning probability, the CZ end screen will be displayed an average of 83 times in 10,000 plays, so the probability that the "Setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern, which is a setting confirmation presentation (single) presentation pattern, will appear on 83 CZ end screens in a setting value 6 situation is 1-(1-1/100) to the power of 83 x 100, or 56.58%, and the probability that both the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and the "Even setting confirmed" presentation pattern, which are setting confirmation presentation (range) presentation patterns, will appear on 83 CZ end screens in a setting value 6 situation is (1-(1-2/100) to the power of 83) x (1-(1-5/100) to the power of 82) x 100, or 80.09%, so the probability that multiple setting confirmation presentation (range) presentation patterns will appear and reveal the setting value 6 is higher than the probability that a setting confirmation presentation (single) presentation pattern will appear and reveal the setting value 6.

In addition, the probability of the "Setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the CZ end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/12,000, the probability of the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the CZ end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/6,000, and the probability of the "Even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the CZ end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/2,400, so the probability of the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the CZ end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) and the probability of the "Even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern appearing are such that the denominators (6,000 and 2,400) when the numerator is 1 are less than 10,000 times, which is the upper limit number of games played in one day (12-hour operation).

For this reason, in the case of a setting value of 6, there is a high possibility that either the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern or the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern will appear within a day. As a result, if a player plays for a day, they can expect either the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern or the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern to appear, and it is also possible to expect both the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern to appear. This means that players who have played for a long time are more likely to discover the setting value of 6 than players who have played for a short time, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

This configuration can be expressed as follows: in play with a specified setting value, a first setting value confirmation effect can be executed that allows the player to recognize that the setting value is the specified setting value; in play with a specified setting value, a second setting value confirmation effect can be executed that allows the player to recognize that the setting value is any setting value including the specified setting value; in play with a specified setting value, a third setting value confirmation effect can be executed that allows the player to recognize that the setting value is any setting value including the specified setting value; in play with a specified setting value, when the second setting value confirmation effect and the third setting value confirmation effect are executed, the player can recognize that the setting value is the specified setting value; and in play with a specified setting value, the probability of the first setting value confirmation effect being executed is lower than the probability of both the second setting value confirmation effect and the third setting value confirmation effect being executed.

Also, like the CZ end screen, when the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and the "Even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern are combined on the AT end screen, it is determined that the setting value is 6. And, the probability of the "Setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern being won on the AT end screen in a setting value 6 situation is 3%, the probability of the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern being won on the AT end screen in a setting value 6 situation is 4%, and the probability of the "Even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern being won on the AT end screen in a setting value 6 situation is 10%. Therefore, in the case of an AT winning probability of 1/500, the AT end screen will be displayed an average of 20 times in 10,000 plays, so the probability that the "Setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern, which is a setting confirmation presentation (single) presentation pattern, will appear on 20 AT end screens in a setting value 6 situation is 1-(1-3/100) to the power of 20 x 100, or 45.62%, and the probability that both the "Setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and the "Even setting confirmed" presentation pattern, which are setting confirmation presentation (range) presentation patterns, will appear on 20 AT end screens in a setting value 6 situation is (1-(1-4/100) to the power of 20) x (1-(1-10/100) to the power of 19) x 100, or 48.26%, so the probability that multiple setting confirmation presentation (range) presentation patterns will appear and the setting value 6 will be revealed is higher than the probability that a setting confirmation presentation (single) presentation pattern will appear and the setting value 6 will be revealed.

In addition, the probability of the "setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/16666.67, the probability of the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/12500, and the probability of the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) is 1/5000, so the probability of the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation) and the probability of the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern appearing are equal to or greater than the probability of the "setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern appearing on the AT end screen for each game in one day (12-hour operation).

For this reason, in the case of a setting value of 6, there is a high possibility that either the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern or the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern will appear within a day. As a result, if a player plays for a day, they can expect either the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern or the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern to appear, and it is also possible to expect both the "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern to appear. This means that players who have played for a long time are more likely to discover the setting value of 6 than players who have played for a short time, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

In addition, for a setting value of 6, the probability that a "setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern will appear, in which setting value 6 is confirmed, on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen within a day, is 100 - ((100 - 56.58) x (100 - 45.62)), or 76.39%, and the probability that both a "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern and an "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern will appear on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen within a day, is 100 - ((100 - 80.09) x (100 - 70.32) x (100 - 54.97) x (100 - 48.26)), or 98.62%. Additionally, the probability of a "setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern in which a setting value of 6 is confirmed on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen within a day, or of a setting value of 6 being revealed in either a "setting 5 or higher confirmed" presentation pattern or an "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen within a day, is 100 - ((100 - 76.39) x (100 - 98.62)), which is 99.67%.

For this reason, when the setting value is 6, the player can see the effect of playing for a long time almost finalizing the setting value of 6, which increases the player's desire to play for a long time and promotes operation.

In Figure 105, when the setting value is 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the CZ end screen is 1/100, and the denominator (100) when the numerator is 1 is smaller than the average number of CZ wins (83 times) when playing 10,000 times, which corresponds to the maximum number of plays per day, and is greater than the average number of CZ wins (16 times) when playing 2,000 times, which corresponds to the average number of plays per day. This makes it difficult for the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern to appear on the CZ end screen even with a single day of play.

In addition, in FIG. 105, when the setting value is 6, the probability of winning any of the setting confirmation effects on the CZ ending screen is 20/100, and the denominator (5) when the numerator is 1 is smaller than the average number of CZ wins (83 times) when playing 10,000 times, which corresponds to the maximum number of times played per day, and is also smaller than the average number of CZ wins (16 times) when playing 2,000 times, which corresponds to the average number of times played per day.

With this configuration, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect pattern appearing on the CZ end screen during one day of play under a setting value of 6 is low (56.58%), but the probability of any of the setting confirmation effects appearing is high (99.99%), so seeing any of the setting confirmation effects leads to a desire to play, and players who see any of the setting confirmation effects can continue playing until they see the next setting confirmation effect, leading to a desire to play for the long term.

Such a configuration has multiple setting values with different ball payout rates, has a first setting value with the highest ball payout rate among the multiple setting values, and when playing with the first setting value, it is possible to execute a first setting value confirmation display that allows the player to recognize that the first setting value is displayed on the ending screen indicating that a specified gaming state has ended, and when playing with the first setting value, it is possible to execute a second setting value confirmation display that allows the player to recognize that the setting value is any setting value including the first setting value on the ending screen indicating that a specified gaming state has ended, and there are multiple types of second setting value confirmation displays, and when the setting value is the first setting value, it is possible to execute a second setting value confirmation display that allows the player to recognize that the setting value is displayed ... The average number of times that an end screen indicating the end of a specified game state may be displayed in 10,000 plays is smaller than the denominator when the numerator of the probability that a first setting value confirmation effect will be executed on an end screen indicating the end of a specified game state is set to 1, and the average number of times that an end screen indicating the end of a specified game state may be displayed in 10,000 plays in a first setting value situation can be expressed as being greater than the denominator when the numerator of the probability that any one of the multiple types of second setting value confirmation effects will be executed on an end screen indicating the end of a specified game state is set to 1.

In Figure 105, when the setting value is 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the AT end screen is 3/100, and the denominator (33.33) when the numerator is 1 is larger than the average number of AT wins (20 times) when playing 10,000 times, which corresponds to the maximum number of times played per day, and is also larger than the average number of AT wins (4 times) when playing 2,000 times, which corresponds to the average number of times played per day.

In addition, in Figure 105, the probability of winning any of the setting confirmation effects on the AT end screen when the setting value is 6 is 39/100, and the denominator (2.56) when the numerator is 1 is smaller than the average number of AT wins (16 times) when playing 2000 times, which corresponds to the average number of times played in a day.

With this configuration, the probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" effect pattern appearing on the AT end screen during one day of play under a setting value of 6 is low (45.62%), but the probability of any of the setting confirmation effects appearing is high (99.99%), so seeing any of the setting confirmation effects leads to a desire to play, and players who see any of the setting confirmation effects can continue playing until they see the next setting confirmation effect, leading to a desire to play for the long term.

As with the CZ end screen, the denominator of the winning probability of the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on the AT end screen when the numerator is set to 1 may be smaller than the average number of AT wins (20 times) when playing 10,000 times, which corresponds to the maximum number of times played per day.

In addition, players often use the end of the first AT as a criterion for deciding whether or not to continue playing.

For this reason, it is unlikely that a setting confirmation presentation (single) will occur within the average number of plays required to see the initial AT end screen, but it is desirable to configure the game so that there is a possibility that some kind of setting confirmation presentation will occur.

When the probability of winning the AT is 1/500, the average number of plays until the AT is reached is 500, and the number of plays from the start of the AT to its end varies depending on the AT stay ratio, but if the AT stay ratio is set to 30%, which is less than the upper limit of 70%, the average number of plays per AT is 150 ((maximum number of plays per day 10,000 times x 30%) / (maximum number of plays per day 10,000 times x probability of winning the AT 1/500)), so the number of plays from the start of play to the end of the first AT is 650. In a situation where this setting value is 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 650 plays is 1-(1-1/100) to the power of 5 + 1-(1-3/100) to the power of 1 x 100 (%), or 7.90%. In addition, the probability that a setting confirmation presentation pattern will be won on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 650 plays when the setting value is 6 is (1-(80/100) to the power of 5) x (1-(61/100) to the power of 1) x 100 (%), which is 26.22%. In other words, the probability that a "setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern will be won on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 650 plays when the setting value is 6 is < the probability that a setting confirmation presentation pattern will be won on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 650 plays when the setting value is 6.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the setting confirmation presentation (single) is unlikely to appear within the average number of plays required to see the initial AT end screen, but some kind of setting confirmation presentation may appear. This makes it difficult for the setting value to be confirmed after the initial AT ends when the setting value is 6, but some kind of setting confirmation presentation is likely to appear, which can increase the desire to play for a long time.

In addition, players often aim to play until the number of plays at which the AT or CZ is determined (the so-called ceiling number of plays) as a criterion for deciding whether or not to continue playing.

For this reason, it is unlikely that a setting confirmation presentation (single) will occur within the average number of plays required to see the CZ end screen or AT end screen after reaching the ceiling number of plays, but it is desirable to configure it so that there is a possibility that some kind of setting confirmation presentation will occur.

When the ceiling number of plays at which the AT is determined is 1000, the number of plays from the start of the AT to the end of the AT varies depending on the AT stay ratio, but if the AT stay ratio is set to 30%, which is a value less than the upper limit of 70%, the average number of plays per AT is 150 ((maximum number of plays per day 10,000 times x 30%) / (maximum number of plays per day 10,000 times x AT winning probability 1/500)), so the number of plays from the start of play to the end of the first AT is 1150. In a situation where this setting value is 6, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern on the CZ end screen after 1150 plays is 1-(1-1/100) to the power of 8, or 7.73%. Also, since the AT has not been won in 1000 plays, it is the ceiling, so the probability of winning the "Setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern on the AT end screen is 3%. In other words, the probability that the "setting 6 confirmed" presentation pattern appears when the ceiling is reached is 1-(1-0.0773) x (1-0.03) x 100 (%), which is 35.41%. Also, the probability that any presentation pattern of the setting confirmation presentation will be won on the CZ end screen after 1150 plays in a situation where the setting value is 6 is (1-(80/100) to the 8th power) x 100 (%), which is 83.22%. Also, since the AT has not been won in 1000 plays, it is the ceiling, so the probability that any presentation pattern of the setting confirmation presentation will be won on the AT end screen is 31%. In other words, the probability that any presentation pattern of the setting confirmation presentation will be won when the ceiling is reached is 1-(1-0.8322) x (1-0.61) x 100 (%), which is 93.46%. In other words, the probability of winning the "Setting 6 Confirmed" presentation pattern on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 1,150 plays when the setting value is 6 is < the probability of winning any setting confirmation presentation pattern on either the CZ end screen or the AT end screen after 1,150 plays when the setting value is 6.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the setting confirmation presentation (single) is unlikely to appear within the average number of plays required to see the AT end screen after the ceiling is reached, but some kind of setting confirmation presentation may appear. This makes it difficult for the setting value to be confirmed after the first AT ends when the setting value is 6, but some kind of setting confirmation presentation is likely to appear, which can increase the desire to play for a long time.

Also, in FIG. 105, if the ceiling number of plays is 1000 times and the probability of winning the CZ is 1/120, the average number of CZ wins up to the ceiling is 8 times. And since the probability that any of the setting confirmation effects will appear on the CZ end screen is 1/5, the average number of CZ wins up to the ceiling is greater than the denominator (5) when the numerator of the probability that any of the setting confirmation effects will appear on the CZ end screen is 1.

As a result, even if the player has played up to the ceiling, the setting confirmation effect is more likely to appear at least once, so the player can maintain the desire to continue playing even after the AT ends after the ceiling is reached.

In addition, although it is different from the present embodiment, if the ceiling number of times of play is 1000 times, the probability of winning the CZ is 1/120, and the probability of any setting confirmation effect appearing on the CZ end screen is 1/10, the average number of times of winning the CZ up to the ceiling will be smaller than the denominator (10) when the numerator of the probability of any setting confirmation effect appearing on the CZ end screen is 1. In this case, since the setting confirmation effect is unlikely to appear even if the ceiling is reached and the setting confirmation effect does not appear, there is still a possibility of a high setting, so the motivation to continue playing can be maintained.

The above-mentioned AT end screen is a normal end screen, and a special end screen different from the normal end screen may be provided for the AT. For example, the special end screen is an end screen associated with an ending performance that is executed when the number of acquisitions exceeds a predetermined number or when the number of consecutive ATs exceeds a predetermined number.

When the condition for reaching the ending is when the number of coins won exceeds a predetermined number, it is possible to use MY2400 coins, which is the difference in coins that ends the advantageous zone, as the predetermined number. In other words, since the advantageous zone ends at MY2400 coins, the ending presentation can be started during the 50 to 100 plays that reach the ending, and the ending presentation end screen (special end screen) can be displayed when MY reaches 2400 coins and the advantageous zone ends. Note that any number of coins won can be used as the basis, not limited to MY2400 coins.

When the condition for reaching the ending is when the number of consecutive ATs exceeds a predetermined number, any number of consecutive ATs may be used as the standard. For example, if the ending performance is to be executed after 10 times, the ending performance may be executed and the ending screen for the ending performance may be displayed after the number of consecutive ATs reaches 10 times, regardless of the number of games played.

Since such special end screens appear less frequently than normal end screens, they are configured to increase the probability of the setting confirmation effect appearing more than on normal end screens.

This configuration makes it easier for the setting confirmation effect to appear when the player feels a sense of accomplishment, such as reaching the ending, which can increase the player's motivation to play and prevent the player from quitting the game after the ending (so-called immediate quitting).

In this configuration, during play at a specified setting value, a setting confirmation effect can be executed that is recognizable by the player as the specified setting value or that is any setting value including the specified setting value, and the setting confirmation effect can be executed on an ending screen that indicates the end of a specified game state, the ending screen having a first ending screen that can be displayed when a specified condition is met, and a second ending screen that can be displayed when a specific condition is met, and it can be expressed as the setting confirmation effect being more likely to appear on the second ending screen than on the first ending screen.

In FIG. 105, the same type of presentation pattern can be selected on the CZ end screen and the AT end screen, but the present invention is not limited to this. Different types of presentation patterns can be selected on the CZ end screen and the AT end screen. For example, the CZ end screen can be configured to select "setting 2 or higher", "setting 3 or higher", and "setting 4 or higher", while the AT end screen can be configured to select "setting 2 or higher", "setting 3 or higher", "setting 4 or higher", "setting 5 or higher", and "setting 6" are selectable. This is because the AT end screen has a lower appearance probability than the CZ end screen, so even if it is made easier to make a setting confirmation presentation related to a highly accurate high setting appear on the AT end screen, it will not appear frequently due to the low appearance rate of the AT end screen, so it is possible to prevent the appearance of a setting confirmation presentation for a high setting from appearing too early, and it is also possible to prevent a setting confirmation presentation for a high setting from appearing too early on the CZ end screen.

In addition, conversely, the CZ end screen may be configured to show a setting confirmation effect related to a higher setting than the AT end screen. In this case, the player's goal is more likely to be the CZ (the winning probability is higher for the CZ than for the AT), lowering the hurdle to playing until the CZ is won, and improving motivation to play.

In this embodiment, a setting confirmation effect different from the setting confirmation effect shown in FIG. 105 may be provided. For example, it may be "Setting 1 Negated" or "Setting 3 Negated" that negate a certain setting value, "Setting 5 Confirmed" or "Setting 4 Confirmed" that confirms a certain setting value, "Odd Setting Confirmed" that confirms an odd setting value, or "Setting Increase Confirmed" that confirms that the setting value has been changed to a higher ball output rate than the previous day's setting value. Even in such a case, "Setting 5 Confirmed" and "Setting 4 Confirmed" belong to the setting confirmation effects (single) described above, and "Setting 1 Negated", "Setting 3 Negated", "Odd Setting Confirmed", and "Setting Increase Confirmed" belong to the setting confirmation effects (range). The configuration of the invention described above may be fulfilled in an embodiment different from this embodiment.

We will now go into more detail about the "Setting Increase Confirmation" effect, one of the setting confirmation effects mentioned above.

When the "Setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern appears, a higher setting value is confirmed for the same gaming machine than the previous day. For example, if the setting value for the previous day is 1 and the setting value for the next day is 2, the "Setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern may be selected, but if the setting value for the previous day is 3 and the setting value for the next day is 2, the "Setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern is not selected.

The sub-control means stores multiple set values between power outages to determine whether it is the previous day or the next day. This is because a power outage is always required when changing settings. The set values after a certain power outage are stored in a specified memory area of the sub-control means, and the set values after the power outage following the certain power outage are stored in a specific memory area different from the specified memory area of the sub-control means. The specified memory area and the specific memory area are also configured so that they are not initialized by a power outage or a change in settings. The number of set values stored across power outages is not limited to two, and three or more may be stored.

By configuring it in this way, the power will not be cut off during normal business hours; a power cut means that business has ended for the day, and a power back on means that the arcade is opening the next day. Therefore, the sub-control means stores the setting values between power cuts, and if the setting value stored in a specific memory area is greater than the setting value stored in a prescribed memory area, a presentation table that allows the selection of a "setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern is used. In order to use a presentation table that allows the selection of a "setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern, a flag for making the setting increase confirmed presentation pattern selectable can be stored in a certain memory area of the sub-control means.

If a power outage occurs during business hours and the power is turned back on, the setting values remain unchanged after the power outage and power on, so after the power is turned back on, a presentation table that does not select the "Setting up confirmed" presentation pattern will be selected. As a result, the "Setting up confirmed" presentation pattern will no longer appear, but as this does not display information that is disadvantageous to the player, trouble can be prevented.

Furthermore, the flag for enabling the selection of the setting increase confirmation performance pattern stored in a certain memory area of the sub-control means is configured to be initialized by the initialization process when the power is turned on. With this configuration, the setting increase confirmation performance pattern can be prevented from being selected once the power is turned on after a power outage, so that it is difficult for a flag for enabling the selection of the setting increase confirmation performance pattern due to a malfunction to be stored when the setting value has decreased before and after a power outage.

In addition, to determine whether or not to cause the "setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern to appear, the sub-control means stores the setting values between power outages multiple times, but this is not limited to the above, and the sub-control means may store the setting values between setting changes multiple times. Even in this case, by initializing a flag that allows the setting increase confirmed presentation pattern to be selected when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the setting increase confirmed presentation pattern from appearing even if the setting change device is not operated in preparation for opening the store the next day (so-called fixed setting).

Also, a real time clock (RTC) may be installed, and the RTC information may be used to determine whether it is the next day, and the setting value information for the previous day and the next day may be compared. If the setting value has increased, a "setting increase confirmed" presentation pattern may be selected.

In this configuration, the main control means has a first setting value memory area capable of storing setting values, the sub-control means has a second setting value memory area capable of storing setting values, the first setting value memory area is configured to be initialized by an initialization process associated with a setting change, and the second setting value memory area is configured not to be initialized by an initialization process associated with a setting change, and when a setting change is executed in a situation where the setting is the first setting value and the setting is changed to a second setting value having a higher ball payout rate than the first setting value, it can be expressed as being possible to execute a first setting value confirmation presentation in which the player can recognize that the current setting value has a higher ball payout rate than the previous setting value in a game executed in a situation where the setting is the second setting value.

In this embodiment, the device may be configured so that the more times the game is played since the power is turned on, the more likely the setting confirmation effect will appear.

For example, in the CZ end screen in Figure 106, the appearance rate of each presentation pattern of the setting confirmation presentation is configured to differ for 1000G or less (G indicates the number of times played), 1001G to 3000G or less, 3001G to 5000G or less, and 5001G or more. Also, as the number of times played progresses from less than 1000G, to 1001G to 3000G, to 3001G to 5000G, to 5001G or more, the appearance rate of each presentation pattern of the setting confirmation presentation increases.

In addition, the appearance rate of the setting confirmation effect of the CZ end screen in Figure 105 is an effect table that can be selected between 3001 and 5000G, and if the number of plays is earlier than that, the appearance rate of each effect pattern is lower. For example, if the number of plays is 1000G or less, the appearance rate of the default screen on the CZ end screen is 95% or more for all setting values.

This configuration prevents the setting value from being determined first thing in the morning, while motivating players to play the number of times that the setting determination effect is likely to appear, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Note that while only the CZ end screen is explained in FIG. 106, the appearance rate of the other setting confirmation effects shown in FIG. 104 also increases as the number of games played increases.

In this embodiment, an example has been described in which the setting values are set to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 in order of decreasing ball output rate, but the gaming machine may also be equipped with a setting value L with a lower ball output rate than setting value 1.

The set value L is designed for a ball output rate of about 80% to 90%, which is 10% or more lower than the ball output rate of setting 1. For example, the ball output rate of set value L is 80%, the ball output rate of set value 1 is 97%, the ball output rate of set value 2 is 98%, the ball output rate of set value 4 is 101%, the ball output rate of set value 5 is 105%, and the ball output rate of set value 6 is 110%. The difference between set value 1 and set value 2 is only about 1%, but the difference between set value L and set value 1 is 17%. In this way, it can be said that set value L is the set value that is the largest difference lower than the adjacent set value when the set values are arranged in order of ball output rate. Note that since a maximum of six set values can be provided, if set value L is provided, one of set values 1 to 6 will be missing. In the above example, set value 3 is not present.

Even in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a setting value L, the storage range of the setting value memory area that stores the setting value of the main control means is 0 to 5. In other words, the value of the setting value memory area for setting value L is 0, the value of the setting value memory area for setting value 1 is 1, the value of the setting value memory area for setting value 2 is 2, the value of the setting value memory area for setting value 4 is 3, the value of the setting value memory area for setting value 5 is 4, and the value of the setting value memory area for setting value 6 is 5.

Furthermore, when initializing the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting value goes out of range due to fraudulent behavior or the like and causes an abnormal state, the setting value storage area may store 0 or 1. When 0 is stored in the setting value storage area, the setting value with the lowest ball payout rate can be set after fraudulent behavior is committed, thereby reducing losses to the gaming facility, and when 1 is stored in the setting value storage area, losses to the player can be reduced even if the setting value becomes 1 due to a malfunction.

In addition, since the setting value L is a setting value for testing purposes and is not generally expected to be used in the operation of an amusement arcade, when the setting value L is set, the "setting L confirmed" presentation pattern is made more likely to be selected. In other words, the "setting L confirmed" presentation pattern is included in the setting confirmation presentation.

The "Setting L Confirmed" presentation pattern is one in which a special screen or sound is displayed frequently (50% to 100%) when the start switch is operated, or a special screen is displayed frequently (50% to 100%) on the ending screen of the CZ or AT, allowing players to immediately notice that the setting value is L and to avoid gaming machines with a setting value of L.

Also, when the setting value is L, the lower panel 5 may be turned off while the demo screen is displayed (when the setting value is 1 or higher, the lower panel 5 is lit while the demo screen is displayed), or the lower panel 5 may be turned off at all times (when the setting value is 1 or higher, the lower panel 5 is lit by default), to inform the player that the setting value is L. Note that the lower panel 5 may be turned off in eco mode, etc., but in this case, the setting value L is not being notified.

In other words, the probability of meeting certain conditions when the setting value is L and executing the setting confirmation effect of "Setting L Confirmed" is higher than the probability of meeting certain conditions when the setting value is 6 and executing the setting confirmation effect of "Setting 6 Confirmed". Examples of certain conditions include conditions under which the setting confirmation effect can be executed, such as when the start switch is operated or when the CZ or AT ending screen is displayed.

This makes it easier for players to recognize that the set value L is set, and discourages them from playing at a payout rate that is too low.

In addition, out of all the setting confirmation effects, the "Setting L Confirmed" effect pattern is the most likely to be selected.

This allows players to quickly recognize that the set value L is set, and discourages them from playing at a ball payout rate that is too low.

Also, by not having setting value 3 when setting value L is provided (using six settings: setting value L, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6), it is possible to make it easier for the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern to appear. If setting value 4 were to disappear, there would be six settings: setting value L, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 5, and setting value 6, so when the "even number setting confirmed" presentation pattern is displayed, the player will have to choose between setting value 2 and setting value 6 (because setting value L is not an even number). This would result in a large drop in the ball payout rate when "even number setting confirmed" appears and the setting value is 2, lowering the repeat rate of players for that gaming machine, and even if the proportion of setting value 6 for "even number setting confirmed" is increased, it would no longer be possible to differentiate it from "setting 6 confirmed".

Therefore, by not having one odd setting value when the setting value L is provided, the playability of "even setting confirmation" is expanded, and the interest of the game can be improved.

This configuration has multiple setting values with different ball payout rates, a first setting value with the highest ball payout rate among the multiple setting values, and a second setting value that is the setting value with the lowest ball payout rate among the adjacent setting values when the multiple setting values are arranged in order of ball payout rate and has the largest difference in ball payout rate from the adjacent setting value, and in playing with the first setting value, a first setting value confirmation effect that allows the player to recognize that it is the first setting value can be executed, in playing with the second setting value, a second setting value confirmation effect that allows the player to recognize that it is the second setting value can be executed, and in playing with a setting value classified as an even number, a third setting value confirmation effect that allows the player to recognize that the setting value is an even number can be executed, and the probability of the first setting value confirmation effect being executed in playing with the first setting value is lower than the probability of the second setting value confirmation effect being executed in playing with the second setting value, and it can be expressed as having a greater variety of setting values among the multiple setting values classified as even numbers than among the multiple setting values classified as odd numbers.

However, in cases where the ball output design has a higher ball output rate or more volatile ball output than the setting value 6, or where the setting value 5 is the highest setting, or where an "odd number setting confirmed" presentation pattern is provided, the excitement of the game can be increased by not having one even number setting value when the setting value L is provided.

In addition, when the setting value is L, the presentation patterns for setting confirmation presentations such as "Setting 1 negation," "Setting 2 negation," and "Setting 3 negation" (if there is a setting value 3) that negate a certain setting value are not selected.

This makes it possible to reduce the gambling aspect of setting L, making it easier for players to realize that it is not a very good setting.

Also, when the setting value is L, the CZ or AT end screen may be configured to display only the default end screen. In this case, the setting confirmation effect will not be displayed on the CZ or AT end screen.

This makes it possible to reduce the gambling aspect of setting L, making it easier for players to realize that it is not a very good setting.

In addition, when the setting value is L, the average number of plays or the average number of coins won when the AT is won is configured to be lower than the other setting values. In other words, the setting value L has a lower AT stay ratio than the other setting values.

This makes it possible to reduce the gambling aspect of setting L, making it easier for players to realize that it is not a very good setting.

Figures 107 and 108 show the internal lottery data when the setting value L is provided. In Figures 107 and 108, the lowest payout rate is set to setting value L, followed by setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6. Also, if a BB is won during a non-RT, the game will transition to RT1, and since it is extremely difficult to win a BB during RT1, the gameplay is such that the machine is played in RT1 except when shipped from the factory.

The items in Figures 107 and 108 are the same as those in Figure 19. Figures 107 and 108 have an item called "role", which explains the role of each condition device. For example, "push order bell-123" indicates that when the stop switches are operated in the order of the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch, the high bell is stopped and displayed on the active line. If the stop switches are operated in an order other than the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch, the high bell is not displayed on the active line, and depending on the operation timing of the stop switch, the low bell or the drop bell is stopped and displayed on the active line. Also, "biased bell-312" is a group of small roles in which the high bell is not stopped and displayed on the active line when a certain stop switch is stopped first, and in Figures 107 and 108, only the first stop of the right stop switch is provided with a group of small roles in which the high bell can be stopped. In this case, if the right stop switch is stopped first without any particular instruction (not AT, etc.), a penalty such as not executing the processing related to the instruction function will be imposed. In addition, "1 coin role (1/4)" indicates that when the left stop switch or the right stop switch is stopped first, a 1 coin role with a payout of 1 coin at 1/4 can be displayed on the active line, and a spillover role at 3/4 can be displayed. In addition, "common bell" indicates that a small role with a payout equivalent to a high bell can be displayed on the active line, regardless of the pressing order and timing of the stop switch operation.

In Figures 107 and 108, in the push order bell group (Winning-A1 to Winning-A14), the number of settings for setting value L is the smallest compared to the other settings. For example, the number of settings for setting value L is 1080 for all condition devices, while the number of settings for setting value 1 is 2466 for all condition devices, the number of settings for setting value 2 is 2462 for all condition devices, the number of settings for setting value 4 is 2456 for all condition devices, the number of settings for setting value 5 is 2446 for all condition devices, and the number of settings for setting value 6 is 2438 for all condition devices.

In this way, when the setting value is L, the probability that the result of the internal lottery will be one of the push order bell groups is lower compared to other setting values, so it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the number of balls dispensed (reducing the variance) caused by the push order bell appearing more or less than average, and it is possible to maintain a stable low ball dispense rate.

Also, in Figures 107 and 108, the biased bell group (Winner-B1 to Winner-B4) also has the smallest number of settings for the setting value L compared to the other settings.

For this reason, even in the case of the biased bell group, when the setting value is L, the probability that the result of the internal lottery will be one of the biased bell group is lower compared to other setting values, so it is possible to prevent the fluctuations in the ball payout from occurring (reducing the variance) due to biased bells appearing more or less than average, and it is possible to maintain a stable low ball payout rate.

Also, in Figures 107 and 108, the difference between the setting value L and setting value 1 of the winning-A1 condition device of the push order bell group is larger than the difference between the setting value L and setting value 1 of the winning-B1 condition device of the biased bell group. This is true for all condition devices.

As a result, the number of push order bells (12,960) is greater than the number of biased bells (8,140), so in the condition device group with a high probability of winning, lowering the number of set values L is more effective in maintaining a stable low ball payout rate.

In addition, in Figures 107 and 108, for the 1-coin roles (Winning-D1 to Winning-D4) that do not win simultaneously with Type 1 BB, the number of settings for the setting value L is the largest compared to the other setting values. For example, the number of settings for the setting value L is 6140 for all condition devices, whereas the number of settings for the setting value 1 is 1000 for all condition devices, the number of settings for the setting value 2 is 1000 for all condition devices, the number of settings for the setting value 4 is 1000 for all condition devices, the number of settings for the setting value 5 is 1000 for all condition devices, and the number of settings for the setting value 6 is 1000 for all condition devices.

In this way, since 1-coin roles are won more frequently at set value L than at other set values, the payout rate can be prevented from becoming too low. Also, even if the payout rate of 1/4 of a coin becomes higher than average at set value L, the payout rate does not rise suddenly, so the payout rate can be maintained at a stable low rate.

Also, in Figures 107 and 108, in the 1-coin role (Winning-E1 to Winning-E4) that simultaneously wins a Type 1 BB in non-RT, the number of settings for the setting value L is the smallest compared to the other setting values. For example, the number of settings for the setting value L is 1131 for all condition devices, while the number of settings for the setting value 1 is 2302 for all condition devices, the number of settings for the setting value 2 is 2299 for all condition devices, the number of settings for the setting value 4 is 2290 for all condition devices, the number of settings for the setting value 5 is 2277 for all condition devices, and the number of settings for the setting value 6 is 2269 for all condition devices.

As a result, other set values are more likely to transition to Type 1 BB in a simulation test (a test in which all winning condition devices win) than the set value L, so the payout rate at other set values different from the set value L in the simulation test can be suppressed. Note that the payout rate is less than 100% during Type 1 BB.

Also, in Figures 107 and 108, for weak watermelon (winning - F), the number of settings for setting value L is the smallest compared to the other settings. For example, the number of settings for setting value L is 27, while the number of settings for setting value 1 is 601, the number of settings for setting value 2 is 603, the number of settings for setting value 4 is 619, the number of settings for setting value 5 is 651, and the number of settings for setting value 6 is 667.

This reduces the probability of winning a weak watermelon at the set value L, and therefore reduces the probability that a weak watermelon will cause a process related to the instruction function to be executed. For example, it is possible to reduce the chances of winning a CZ or AT from a weak watermelon, and to maintain a stable low ball payout rate.

Also, in Figures 107 and 108, in the common bell (winning-M), the number of settings for setting value L is the largest compared to the other settings. For example, the number of settings for setting value L is 4842, while the number of settings for setting value 1 is 4, the number of settings for setting value 2 is 51, the number of settings for setting value 4 is 122, the number of settings for setting value 5 is 241, and the number of settings for setting value 6 is 336.

This increases the probability that a minor symbol with the same payout as a high-point bell will be displayed at the set value L, preventing the payout rate at the set value L from becoming too low. Note that at the set value L, the push order bell group is less likely to win than at other set values, so the common bell compensates for the high-point bell being less likely to be displayed at this time.

In addition, in FIG. 107, the lottery for moving to the favorable zone (100% moving to the favorable zone) can be executed for Winning-E1 to Winning-E4, but in FIG. 108, the lottery for moving to the favorable zone cannot be executed. Therefore, depending on whether or not the favorable zone is moved to when Winning-E1 to Winning-E4 are won, it can be determined whether the favorable zone end condition is met during the favorable zone at the time of shipment from the factory (non-RT) or in the favorable zone within the type 1 BB. Therefore, the profit given to the player is greater in the game state at the start of the favorable zone when Winning-E1 to Winning-E4 are won during RT1 and the player moves to the favorable zone than in the game state at the start of the favorable zone when Winning-E1 to Winning-E4 are won during non-RT and the player moves to the favorable zone, so that the player can continue to obtain a large profit even after reaching the difference in number of 2400 coins, which is the end condition of the favorable zone, and the favorable zone can be continued even across the favorable zone.

<Structure of the lower panel 5> In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a lower panel 5 is provided below the front door PS2. As shown in FIG. 1, the lower panel 5 is approximately 1/4 to 1/3 the area of the front side of the front door PS2 (the side visible to the player), and can be made to stand out in the gaming center by turning on a lower panel lamp provided inside the lower panel 5.

The lower panel 5 is constructed to protect the design sheet depicting characters and the titles of game machines with a translucent transparent acrylic plate, and the lower panel locking portion extending from the edge of a predetermined position of the lower panel 5 from the front side of the front door PS2 is inserted into the opening of the front door PS2 and locked to the back side of the front door PS2 so as to cover the LED board on which the lower panel lamp arranged in the front door PS2 is mounted. The lower panel locking portion may be located in one place or in multiple places.

The lower panel locking portion extending from the lower panel 5 is also part of the acrylic plate and is a transparent material with translucency. The lower panel locking portion is hook-shaped and elastically deformable. After the lower panel locking portion is inserted into the opening of the front door PS2 while deforming, the lower panel locking portion elastically deforms and hooks onto the back side of the front door PS2 to lock it in place, so that the lower panel locking portion can be seen from the back side of the front door PS2.

Because the lower panel 5 is hooked to the back side of the front door PS2 in this way, it is difficult to remove from the front side of the front door PS2, but it can be easily removed from the back side of the front door PS2 by releasing the hook of the lower panel locking part.

The lower panel lamp is a full-color LED that can light up in white or red, and may be used to notify the status of the gaming machine. The lighting color of the lower panel lamp may be approximately white, close to white.

When the lower panel lamp is lit white, the entire lower panel 5 (including the lower panel locking portion) glows white, and when the lower panel lamp is lit red, the entire lower panel 5 (including the lower panel locking portion) glows red.

The back side of the front door PS2 will be further explained using Figure 109.

In addition to the lower panel lamp provided on the front side of the front door PS2, the front door PS2 also has a reel illumination lamp provided at the top or bottom of the display window on the back side of the front door PS2 to illuminate the reels from the front side. In Figure 109, it is provided at the bottom of the reel display window, but it may also be provided at the top, or in two places, at the top and bottom. The reel illumination lamp lights up in white or nearly white to increase the visibility of the patterns.

In addition, on the back side of the front door PS2, there is a specified opening (harness opening) for passing a specified harness connected to the LED board on which the lower panel lamp is mounted, and the LED board on which the lower panel lamp is mounted and the sub-board on which the lamp control means is mounted can be connected with a specified harness through the harness opening.

In addition, a transparent member is provided at the position where the lower panel is covered on the back side of the front door PS2, allowing part of the back side of the lower panel to be seen. The back side of the front door PS2 is made of a sheet metal frame made of non-translucent resin or sheet metal, but has a transparent member and openings that are partially translucent.

The lower panel locking portion, harness opening, and transparent member shown in FIG. 109 do not have to be all present, and only one of them may be present. In addition to those exemplified, there may also be a specified viewing means that allows the light from the lower panel to be visible from the back side of the front door PS2.

Next, we will explain the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp.

The lower panel lamp has a lighting pattern in which it lights up in white when the front door PS2 is closed. For example, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp lights up in white at a predetermined timing after the power is turned on, and then the lower panel lamp maintains the white lighting pattern even as the game progresses with bet processing, reel rotation, and payout. Also, when a demo screen is displayed on the LCD after a predetermined time has elapsed when no bets have been placed, the lower panel lamp switches to a demo lighting pattern. The demo lighting pattern repeatedly turns on and off to indicate that play is not in progress, and can inform the player that the machine is vacant. Note that the lower panel lamp may maintain the white lighting even when a demo screen is displayed. Also, the lower panel lamp may be turned off during play to inform the player of expectations or the game status.

Then, when the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected) in a specific situation where the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is lit in white (waiting to play, during play, etc.), the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp is switched. Below, the lighting pattern when the front door PS2 is open is explained by branching into multiple patterns.

<<Pattern 1>> When the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is lit in white (waiting to play (waiting to bet), during play, when the lower panel lamp is not lit in the demo pattern, etc.), if the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected), the lighting pattern will change to one in which the lower panel lamp is lit in red.

As a result, when the front door PS2 is open, red light is visible from the lower panel latch, the harness opening, and the transparent member on the back side of the front door PS2, making it possible to reduce visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 compared to when the lower panel lamp is lit in white.

Because red is less bright than white, even if the light transmitted from the lower panel lamp leaks through the lower panel fastening portion, the harness opening, and the transparent member, the internal structure is less visible when the lamp is emitting red light than when it is emitting white light. In particular, the lights may be turned down during amusement arcade operating hours, making it even more difficult to see the internal structure when the lamp is installed in the arcade.

By configuring it in this way, even if someone tries to open the front door PS2 and commit a fraudulent act, the visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 is reduced, making it difficult to commit the fraudulent act and thus preventing fraudulent acts.

This type of configuration has a front door and a lower panel section provided at the bottom of the front door, and in a specified situation where the front door is closed and a bed is waiting, the lower panel section can emit light in a specified color, and when the front door is opened from the specified situation where the front door is closed and a bed is waiting, the lower panel section can emit light in a specific color different from the specified color.

<<Pattern 2>> When the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is lit in white in a specific situation (waiting to play (waiting for a bet), playing, the lower panel lamp is not lit in the demo pattern, etc.), if the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected), the lighting pattern will switch to one in which the lower panel lamp is turned off.

As a result, when the front door PS2 is open, light from the lower panel does not leak through the lower panel latch, the harness opening, or the transparent member on the back side of the front door PS2, so visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 can be reduced more than if the lower panel lamp were lit in white.

When the lower panel lamp is turned off to prevent light from leaking from the lower panel fastening portion, the harness opening, and the transparent member, the internal structure is less visible than when it is emitting white light. In particular, the lights may be turned down during amusement arcade opening hours, making it even more difficult to see the internal structure when the arcade is installed.

By configuring it in this way, even if someone tries to open the front door PS2 and commit a fraudulent act, the visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 is reduced, making it difficult to commit the fraudulent act and thus preventing fraudulent acts.

This configuration has a front door and a lower panel section provided at the bottom of the front door, and in a specified situation where the front door is closed and a bed is waiting, the lower panel section can be illuminated in a specified color, and when the front door is opened from the specified situation where the front door is closed and a bed is waiting, the lower panel section can be turned off.

<<Pattern 3>> When the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is illuminated in white (waiting to play (waiting for a bet), during play, when the lower panel lamp is not lit in the demo pattern, etc.), if the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected), the lower panel lamp will switch to a lighting pattern (blinking pattern) where it flashes white. An example of a blinking pattern is a pattern where the lamp alternates between turning on and off every second.

As a result, when the front door PS2 is open, the light of the lower panel lamp flashes white and can be seen from the lower panel locking portion, the harness opening, and the transparent member on the back side of the front door PS2, so the visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 can be reduced more than if the lower panel lamp was lit in white.

Even if the color of the lower panel lamp is white, by making it flash, the internal structure is less visible compared to when the light transmitted from the lower panel lamp is white and the light leaking from the lower panel engaging portion, the harness opening, and the transparent member is lit. In particular, since the lights may be turned down during the operating hours of the amusement arcade, it is possible to make the internal structure even more difficult to see when the arcade is installed.

By configuring it in this way, even if someone tries to open the front door PS2 and commit a fraudulent act, the visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 is reduced, making it difficult to commit the fraudulent act and thus preventing fraudulent acts.

This configuration has a front door and a lower panel section provided at the bottom of the front door, and when the front door is closed and a bed is waiting, the lower panel section can emit light in a specified color, and when the front door is opened from the specified situation of the front door being closed and a bed being waiting, the lower panel section can emit light in a flashing pattern.

In addition, the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp when the front door PS2 is open is not limited to a white flashing pattern, but by changing it to a red flashing pattern, the visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 can be further reduced.

As a configuration common to the above-mentioned <<Pattern 1>>, <<Pattern 2>>, and <<Pattern 3>>, when the front door PS2 is closed, the light may be a specified color other than white. However, since a bright color is preferable, a color with high brightness or high saturation such as orange or pink is preferable.

In addition, as a common configuration, the reel illumination lamp that is lit when the front door PS2 is closed may be turned off when the front door PS2 is opened. In other words, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp is lit in a predetermined color, and the reel illumination lamp is lit in white, if the front door PS2 is opened, the lower panel lamp may be lit in a specific color darker than the predetermined color, turned off, or flash in the predetermined color, and the reel illumination lamp may be turned off.

This further reduces visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 when the front door PS2 is open, making it possible to prevent unauthorized activity.

In addition, as a common configuration, when the LCD display when the front door PS2 is closed under a specified situation switches to a front door PS2 open display (door open error notification) as the front door PS2 is opened, the front door PS2 open display may be displayed in a darker color when comparing the LCD display before switching to the front door PS2 open display with the front door PS2 open display. An example of a dark color is the display "Door open error" in red letters on a black background.

This makes it possible to dim the light from the LCD when the front door PS2 is open, reducing visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

In addition, as a common configuration, when the setting confirmation mode is entered after the front door PS2 is opened, the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp after the front door PS2 is opened may be switched to the lighting pattern of the lower panel lamp in the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp is lit in a predetermined color, and the reel illumination lamp is lit in white, if the front door PS2 is opened, the lower panel lamp lights up in a specific color darker than the predetermined color, goes out, or flashes in the predetermined color, and then, when the transition conditions for the setting confirmation mode are met and the mode is entered, the lower panel lamp switches to the lighting pattern corresponding to the setting confirmation mode.

The lighting pattern corresponding to the lower panel lamp setting confirmation mode may be a pattern in which the lamp lights up in a specified color, a pattern in which the lamp lights up in a color brighter than a specific color, the same lighting pattern as when the front door PS2 is closed, or a blinking pattern that is different from the blinking pattern when the front door PS2 is open (for example, a pattern in which the lamp turns on and off repeatedly every two seconds).

In such a case, in order to prevent fraudulent activity, the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 are made difficult to see when the front door PS2 is open, and then when the game arcade staff switches to the setting check mode to perform the setting check work, the lower panel lamps are switched to a lighting pattern that makes it easier to see the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 than the lighting pattern when the front door PS2 is open, thereby increasing the work efficiency of the game arcade staff. Note that if the front door PS2 is open when the setting check mode is ended by meeting the conditions for ending the setting check mode, the lower panel lamps are switched back to the lighting pattern when the front door PS2 is open.

In addition, as a common configuration, when the front door PS2 is closed, the lower panel lamp is lit in a predetermined color, a demo screen is displayed on the LCD, and the back lamp is lit in a demo pattern, if the front door PS2 is opened, the lower panel lamp will light up in a specific color darker than the predetermined color, turn off, or switch to a pattern where it flashes in the predetermined color, and the back lamp will switch to a lit pattern.

As a result, the back lamp lights up when the front door PS2 is open, improving visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3, making it easier for arcade staff to troubleshoot errors and other malfunctions and check settings.

When the issue is focused on improving the work efficiency of game center staff rather than preventing fraudulent activities, the lower panel lamps may be configured to maintain the lighting pattern of lighting in the specified color and the back lamps to switch to the lighting pattern when the front door PS2 is opened in a situation where the lower panel lamps are lit in a specified color when the front door PS2 is closed, a demo screen is displayed on the LCD, and the back lamps are lit in a demo pattern.

As a result, the backlight lights up when the front door PS2 is open, improving visibility behind the front door PS2 and inside the cabinet PS3, making it easier for arcade staff to troubleshoot errors and check settings, and also achieving more energy savings than controlling the backlight to blink.

Also, as an alternative to the above-described embodiment, the back side of the front door PS2 may not be provided with a translucent lower panel locking portion, an opening for the harness, or a transparent member, and all members visible from the back side of the front door PS2 may be made of non-translucent members.

Even in this case, it is possible to reduce visibility of the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 when the front door PS2 is open, thereby preventing fraudulent activities.

Also, as an aspect different from the above-described embodiment, when the front door PS2 is closed and the lower panel lamp is illuminated in white in a specific situation (waiting to play, during play, etc.), if the front door PS2 is opened (when the opening of the front door PS2 is detected), the illumination pattern of the lower panel lamp may not change (the illumination pattern of the white lamp is maintained).

With this configuration, when the front door PS2 is open, the back side of the front door PS2 and the inside of the cabinet PS3 can be easily seen by the light transmitted from the lower panel latch, the harness opening, and the lower panel lamp leaking through the transparent member, making it easier for arcade staff to resolve errors and other malfunctions and check settings.

<New mode for starting advantageous gaming state (AT gaming state)> Next, we will explain the new mode for starting an advantageous gaming state. Note that the following explanation will be given by taking the AT gaming state as a specific example of an advantageous gaming state.

However, the advantageous gaming state is not limited to the AT gaming state. For example, it may be a gaming state in which executable play in an AT gaming state, such as an AT-add specialized gaming state, can be extended. In other words, the advantageous gaming state may be any gaming state that is advantageous to the player compared to a predetermined gaming state that is different from the advantageous gaming state (for example, either a normal gaming state designed to have the highest stay ratio or a gaming state immediately before the advantageous gaming state begins).

Furthermore, a new mode for initiating an advantageous gaming state will be described, but in the gaming machine described in this embodiment, the advantageous gaming state may be initiated using the new mode, or the advantageous gaming state may be initiated using another mode (e.g., a conventional mode). In other words, the advantageous gaming state may be initiated without using a new mode.

Here, conventionally, there was a chance zone for starting the AT in a non-AT state, and in this chance zone, a push order role (push order minor role or push order replay) was won in a role drawing (internal drawing), and the AT was started when the stop switch was operated in the correct push order for this push order role (push order minor role or push order replay), and the chance zone was ended (considered to be in the normal state of the non-AT state) when the stop switch was operated in the incorrect push order. (Patent Publication No. 2020-72791)

In the case of the conventional gameplay described above, the AT state does not start unless the push order role (push order minor role or push order replay) is won in the chance zone and the stop switch is operated with the correct push order. Therefore, it is necessary to wait for the push order role (push order minor role or push order replay) to be won, and there is a problem that the chance zone may be prolonged depending on the probability of winning the push order role (push order minor role or push order replay) in the role drawing. In addition, if the push order role (push order minor role or push order replay) is won, the player may operate the stop switch with the incorrect push order, which ends the chance zone and forces the player to continue playing until the chance zone starts again.

On the other hand, the new method for starting the advantageous game state described below makes it possible to reduce the number of plays required before the advantageous game state starts, compared to the conventional method. Also, even if the player erroneously operates the stop switch, the number of plays required before the advantageous game state starts can be reduced, compared to the conventional method. These effects can relieve the player's stress.

<<Explanation of the main game states>> First, we will explain the characteristics of the main game states, including the AT game state.

In the following explanation, it is possible to transition to the AT gaming state in the following order: normal gaming state → premonition gaming state → AT preparation gaming state → AT gaming state.

Therefore, four game states will be described: normal game state, premonition game state, AT preparation game state, and AT game state. Note that the transitions between these game states are controlled by the main control means.

Furthermore, four game states are described: normal game state, premonition game state, AT preparation game state, and AT game state; however, these four game states do not necessarily represent all game states. In other words, other game states different from these four game states may be present. Similarly, it is not necessary to have all game states of these four game states (it is sufficient to have at least the AT preparation game state and the AT game state).

1) Normal gameplay state The characteristics of the normal gameplay state are as follows:

A) The normal gaming state is the gaming state designed to have the highest dwell rate.

A) The normal game state is one of the game states in the advantageous zone. For example, it can be the main game state "0".

Note that the main game state refers to the game state related to the instruction function that can be controlled by the main control means.

C) In the normal game mode, the AT transition lottery can be executed as a process related to the instruction function.

e) In the normal game state, as a process related to the instruction function, it is possible to execute an update of the number of remaining plays until the ceiling is reached (the number of plays until a game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state, such as the AT game state, the AT preparation state, or the premonition game state, is established). For example, in a situation where the number of remaining plays until the ceiling is reached is 500, the number of remaining plays until the ceiling is reached will be 499 by playing with the non-penalty press described below. Note that the ceiling number of plays can be set arbitrarily depending on the gaming machine, such as 1000 or 1500.

E) In the normal game mode, when a player first operates the stop switch corresponding to the left reel (also called "non-irregular press" or "non-penalty press") to play, it is possible to execute the AT transition drawing and update of the remaining number of plays until the ceiling is reached as processing related to the instruction function. On the other hand, when a player first operates the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel (also called "irregular press" or "penalty press") to play, the AT transition drawing and update of the remaining number of plays until the ceiling is reached are not executed. In other words, it is configured so that penalty processing is executed when a game is played with irregular presses.

Note that even if you play using irregular button presses, you may still be able to perform an AT transition drawing or update the number of remaining plays until the ceiling is reached.

However, when playing with irregular buttons, the probability of winning the AT (the probability of obtaining the right to move to the AT) and the frequency of updating the number of remaining plays are lower than when playing with non-irregular buttons. Therefore, playing with non-irregular buttons is more advantageous for the player than playing with irregular buttons.

F) If the AT transition lottery is won, information indicating that the AT transition lottery has been won can be stored in the RWM.

Here, "storing information indicating that the AT transition lottery has been won in the RWM" means, for example, storing the premonition play number (e.g., "16") in a memory area capable of storing the premonition play number, or storing information corresponding to the next main game state in a memory area capable of storing the main game state (e.g., updating the information in the memory area for the main game state from "normal game state" to "premonition game state"). Note that other information may also be stored in the RWM.

K) If you win the AT transition lottery, the game state for your next game can be set to the premonition game state.

In addition, if the AT transition lottery is won, the game may enter the AT preparation game state without going through the premonition game state.

H) The designed payout rate in normal game mode is less than 100% regardless of the setting value.

2) Premonition game state The characteristics of the premonition game state are as follows:

A) A premonition gaming state is a gaming state in which the player has the right to transition to the AT.

A) The premonition gaming state is one of the gaming states in the advantageous zone. For example, it can be the main gaming state "1".

C) The premonition play state allows for updating the number of premonition plays as a process related to the instruction function.

D) In the premonition game state, if the player plays using non-irregular button presses, the premonition game count can be updated (e.g., the premonition game count can be decreased by 1). On the other hand, if the player plays using irregular button presses, the premonition game count cannot be updated.

Note that the premonition play count may be updated even if irregular button presses are performed.

However, when playing with irregular button presses, the premonition game count is updated less frequently than when playing with non-irregular button presses. Therefore, playing with non-irregular button presses allows the premonition game state to end more quickly.

O) When the conditions for ending the premonition game state are met (for example, when the number of premonition games becomes "0"), information indicating that the premonition game state has ended can be stored in the RWM.

Here, "storing information in the RWM indicating that the premonition game state has ended" means, for example, storing information corresponding to the next main game state in a memory area capable of storing the main game state (for example, updating the information in the memory area for the main game state from "premonition game state" to "AT preparation game state"). Note that other information may also be stored in the RWM.

F) When the conditions for ending the premonition game state are met, the game state for the next game will be the AT preparation game state.

K) The display device 32 is configured to be able to execute a presentation corresponding to a premonition gaming state. The presentation corresponding to the premonition gaming state can make the player anticipate whether or not he has the right to transition to the AT. However, even when the gaming state is in the normal state, the display device 32 may execute a presentation similar to the premonition gaming state to make it appear to the player as if the gaming state is in the premonition gaming state. In this way, a state in which the gaming state is in the normal state but appears to be in the premonition gaming state is sometimes referred to as a premonition gaming state.

H) The designed payout rate for the premonition game state is less than 100% regardless of the setting value.

3) AT preparation game state (AT preparation in progress state) The characteristics of the AT preparation game state are as follows.

A) The AT preparation gaming state is a gaming state in which the player has the right to transition to the AT.

A) The AT preparation gaming state is one of the gaming states in the advantageous zone. For example, it can be the main gaming state "2".

C) In the AT preparation game state, as a process related to the instruction function, it is possible to notify the player of the stop operation mode of the stop switch (also referred to as "AT") using the instruction monitor and the display device 32. Details of the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch in the AT preparation game state will be described later.

D) In a game in which the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state can be satisfied, when the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state are satisfied, information indicating a transition to the AT gaming state is stored in the RWM.

Here, "storing information indicating a transition to an AT gaming state in the RWM" means, for example, storing information corresponding to the next main gaming state in a memory area capable of storing the main gaming state (for example, updating the information in the memory area of the main gaming state from "AT preparation gaming state" to "AT state"), or storing initial values related to the AT gaming state (for example, AT game number information, AT difference number information, etc.). Note that other information may also be stored in the RWM.

The conditions for transitioning to the AT game mode will be described in detail later.

E) In a game in which the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state can be satisfied, if the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state are not satisfied, the AT preparation gaming state will continue. In other words, even if the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state can be satisfied in a game in which the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state are not satisfied, there will be no transition to the normal gaming state.

F) In a game in which the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state can be satisfied, if the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state are satisfied, the gaming state of the next game will be the AT gaming state.

K) The display device 32 is configured to be able to execute effects corresponding to the AT preparation gaming state. The effects corresponding to the AT preparation gaming state allow the player to understand that he has the right to transition to the AT. Specific examples of effects by the display device 32 in the AT preparation gaming state will be described later.

H) The designed payout rate in the AT preparation game state is less than 100% regardless of the setting value.

4) AT gaming state (AT) The characteristics of the AT gaming state are as follows:

A) The AT gaming state is one of the gaming states in the advantageous zone. For example, it can be the main gaming state "3".

A) The AT game state can be notified to the player of the stop switch stop operation state using the instruction monitor and the display device 32 as a process related to the instruction function.

The AT gaming state is synonymous with "AT", "sub-bonus", "AT state", etc., and these have been described above. Therefore, a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

C) The AT gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, the designed payout rate in the AT gaming state is designed to exceed 100% regardless of the set value.

<<Variations in the transition to the AT preparation game state>> The example of transitioning to the AT preparation game state in the order of normal game state → premonition game state → AT preparation game state has been described above. However, the order of transitioning to the AT preparation game state is not limited to the above example.

For example, the transition to the AT preparation game state may be in the following order: normal game state → CZ (chance zone) game state → AT preparation game state.

In such a case, a lottery for transition to the CZ gaming state can be executed in the normal gaming state. If the lottery for transition to the CZ gaming state is won, transition to the CZ gaming state can be made.

In the CZ gaming state, an AT transition lottery can be executed. If the AT transition lottery is won through the AT transition lottery, a transition to the AT preparation gaming state can be made. On the other hand, if the AT transition lottery is not won through the AT transition lottery, a transition to the normal gaming state can be made.

Note that the above-mentioned modified example is merely one example, and any gaming state may be passed through as long as it is possible to transition to the AT preparation gaming state before starting the AT gaming state.

<<Features of internal lottery during AT preparation game state and AT game state 1>>

The same role selection table is used in the AT preparation game state and the AT game state. In other words, even if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met in the AT preparation game state, the role selection table does not change. In other words, if the setting values are the same in the AT preparation game state and the AT game state, the type of winning role and the probability of winning the role are the same. In other words, even if the main game state changes, the RT state does not change.

By configuring it in this way, the number of types of winning draw tables is not increased, so the capacity of the main control ROM is not strained.

In addition, the same winning combination table can be used in the normal game state, the AT preparation game state, and the AT game state. By configuring it in this way, the number of types of winning combination tables does not increase, and the capacity of the main control ROM can be further reduced.

Similarly, when a premonition game state is present, the same winning combination table can be used in the normal game state, the premonition game state, the AT preparation game state, and the AT game state. By configuring in this way, the number of types of winning combination tables does not increase, and the capacity of the main control ROM can be further prevented from being strained.

Similarly, when a CZ gaming state is present, the same winning combination table can be used in the normal gaming state, the CZ gaming state, the AT preparation gaming state, and the AT gaming state. By configuring it in this way, the number of winning combination tables does not increase, and the capacity of the main control ROM is further reduced.

<<Explanation of internal drawing in AT preparation game state and AT game state>> The internal drawing (role drawing) in the AT preparation game state and the AT game state will be explained using Figure 110. Note that the same internal drawing as in Figure 110 is also performed in the normal game state. The same internal drawing as in Figure 110 may also be performed in other game states.

Figure 110 is intended to explain the roles related to the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state in the AT preparation gaming state.

In other words, other roles that are not related to the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state in the AT preparation gaming state are not shown in the figure.

For example, in the AT preparation game state, there are roles that are not related to the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state, such as replay roles, small roles that do not depend on the press order (e.g., common 10-coin roles), and 1-coin roles. However, explanations of these roles will be omitted here.

Furthermore, this aspect is designed on the assumption that the player will play with a bet count of 3 while the bonus winning information is being carried over. Specifically, by design, the state in which the player plays with a bet count of 3 will be in a situation in which the bonus winning information is being carried over 90% or more of the time. In other words, the game is such that the player can play with a bet count of 3 while the bonus winning information is being carried over, and transition from the AT preparation game state to the AT game state is possible.

Therefore, the explanation using FIG. 110 is for the case where a game is played with a bet of 3 when the winning bonus information is carried over. Therefore, when a game is played with a bet of 3 when the winning bonus information is not carried over, the number of game media awarded and the stop operation mode of the stop switch that maximizes the number of game media awarded may differ from the explanation using FIG. 110.

It should be noted that even in a game where the number of bets is three and bonus winning information is not carried over, it is possible to adopt a new mode for starting an advantageous game state (AT game state).

In addition, winning a certain role may be referred to as "winning a specified role," "determining a specified role," "determining a certain winning number," "determining a specified winning number," "determining a certain lottery result," "determining a specified lottery result," etc.

First, the terms used in FIG. 110 will be explained.

The name is used to distinguish each role (lottery result).

The correct stop operation pattern refers to the stop switch stop operation sequence that results in the greatest number of game media being awarded among the number of game media that can be awarded if the winning combination is achieved. For example, the correct stop operation pattern of "left → middle → right" refers to the sequence in which the first stop operation is the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, the second stop operation is the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel, and the third stop operation is the stop switch corresponding to the right reel.

As mentioned above, the number of entries corresponds to the number of winning combinations defined in the internal lottery table. For example, if the total number of entries is 65,536 (the possible range of random numbers is 0 to 65,535), then dividing each number by 65,536 gives the probability of winning. For example, the number of entries for the winning A1 combination is 4, so the probability of winning is 4/65,536. Note that the number of entries shown in Figure 110 is just an example, and can be set to any value.

The number of correct awards refers to the number of game media awarded when the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping operation mode.

The number of awards for an incorrect answer refers to the number of game media awarded when the stop switch is not operated in the correct stopping operation mode.

The navigation in the normal game state indicates the type of navigation of information corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switch that is notified to the player in the normal game state. Specifically, "x" indicates that information corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified to the player. In other words, in the normal game state, information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is not notified on the instruction monitor and display device 32. However, information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode may be notified on the instruction monitor and display device 32 at a lower frequency (e.g., 1/10 or less) compared to the AT game state.

The navigation for the AT preparation game state refers to the type of navigation for information corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switch that is notified to the player in the AT preparation game state. Specifically, the correct navigation refers to the information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode being notified on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. In addition, the special navigation refers to the information corresponding to the special stop operation mode being notified on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. Note that the information corresponding to the special stop operation mode is different from the information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. This point will be described later.

The navigation in the AT game state refers to the type of navigation of information corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switch that is notified to the player in the AT game state. Specifically, the correct answer navigation refers to the information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode being notified on the instruction monitor and the display device 32.

Next, we will explain how many points are awarded for correct answers and incorrect answers.

The roles can be broadly categorized into Group A, which consists of A1 through A6, and Group B, which consists of B1 through B6.

Details of each role in the winning group A will be described later, but if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that awards "X (X is a number)" as the number of game media to be awarded can be displayed as a stopped symbol. On the other hand, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that awards X (X is a number) as the number of game media to be awarded will not be displayed as a stopped symbol.

In the following, "X" will be described as 10, but it is not limited to 10 and can be any value.

Furthermore, in the following description, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that awards 1 (a value smaller than X) as the number of game media awarded can be displayed as a stopped symbol. However, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that is a losing combination (number of game media awarded is 0) may be displayed as a stopped symbol depending on the timing of the stop switch stop operation.

The winning combinations in Group B will be described later, but if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that awards "Y (Y is a number)" as the number of game media awarded can be displayed as a stopped combination. On the other hand, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that awards Y (Y is a number) as the number of game media awarded will not be displayed as a stopped combination.

In the following, "Y" is explained as 10, but it is not limited to 10 and can be any value.

Furthermore, in the following description, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that awards 1 (a value smaller than Y) as the number of game media awarded can be displayed as a stopped symbol. However, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that is a losing combination (number of game media awarded is 0) may be displayed as a stopped symbol depending on the timing of the stop switch stop operation.

The magnitude relationship between "X" and "Y" can be X=Y, X>Y, or X<Y.

When the stop switch is operated in the correct stopping operation mode, it is preferable that the number of game media awarded is equal to or greater than the number of bets. Therefore, it is preferable that 3≦X and 3≦Y are satisfied.

Next, we will explain each winning role in Group A.

A) Name: Winning A1 (biased push order 10 coin role) The probability of winning the winning A1 role is 4/65536. When the winning A1 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a pattern combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning A1 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a pattern combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a pattern combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning A1 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of left → middle → right. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel.

On the other hand, when the winning A1 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated to stop in the order of left → center → right, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → right → center, center → left → right, center → right → left, right → left → center, or right → center → left, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

When the winning A1 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 is performing the normal presentation.

When the winning A1 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=1" and the display device 32 displays "1, 2, 3."

When the winning A1 role is won during AT gaming, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=1" and the display device 32 displays "1, 2, 3."

a) Name: Winning A2 (biased push order 10 coin role) The probability of winning the winning A2 role is 4/65536. When the winning A2 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a pattern combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning A2 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a pattern combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a pattern combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning A2 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of left → right → middle. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel.

On the other hand, when the winning A2 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of left → right → middle, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

When the winning A2 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 performs the normal presentation.

When the winning A2 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=2" and the display device 32 displays "1, 3, 2."

When the winning A2 role is won during AT play, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=2" and the display device 32 displays "1, 3, 2."

c) Name: Winning A3 (biased push order 10 coin role) The probability of winning the winning A3 role is 7314/65536. When the winning A3 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a pattern combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning A3 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a pattern combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a pattern combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning A3 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of center → left → right. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the center reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel.

On the other hand, when the winning A3 role is won, if the stop switches are not operated in the order of center → left → right, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switches are operated in any of the following orders: left → center → right, left → right → center, center → right → left, right → left → center, or right → center → left, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

However, if the reels are stopped in any of the following orders: left → center → right, left → right → center, or center → right → left, a symbol combination that awards 1 gaming medium will be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop switch operation. However, if the reels are stopped in any of the following orders: right → left → center, or right → center → left, a symbol combination that corresponds to a loss may be displayed depending on the timing of the stop switch operation.

When the winning A3 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 performs the normal performance.

When you win the winning A3 role in the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the special stop operation mode,
The result can be notified by the indication monitor and the display device 32. For example, "=7" is notified on the indication monitor, and "x.?.?" is notified on the display device 32.

Here, information corresponding to a special stopping operation mode is information suggesting that the first stopping operation that satisfies the condition for transitioning to AT is not to the left, and information suggesting that the first stopping operation that may satisfy the condition for transitioning to AT is to the middle or right. In the following, information corresponding to a special stopping operation mode refers to information suggesting that the first stopping operation that satisfies the condition for transitioning to AT is not to the left, and information suggesting that the first stopping operation that may satisfy the condition for transitioning to AT is to the middle or right.

In addition, examples of cases where the conditions for transitioning to the AT are met in a game in which information corresponding to a special stop operation mode is notified will be described later.

In other words, when the winning A3 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the winning A3 role is won during AT play, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=3" and the display device 32 displays "2, 1, 3."

D) Name: Winning A4 (biased push order 10-coin role) The probability of winning the winning A4 role is 7314/65536. When the winning A4 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning A4 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a symbol combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a symbol combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning A4 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of center → right → left. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the center reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel.

On the other hand, when the winning A4 role is won, if the stop switches are not operated in the order of center → right → left, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switches are operated in any of the following orders: left → center → right, left → right → center, center → left → right, right → left → center, or right → center → left, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

However, if the reels are stopped in any of the following orders: left → center → right, left → right → center, or center → left → right, a symbol combination that awards 1 gaming medium will be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop switch operation. However, if the reels are stopped in any of the following orders: right → left → center, or right → center → left, a symbol combination that corresponds to a loss may be displayed depending on the timing of the stop switch operation.

When the winning A4 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 performs the normal presentation.

When the winning A4 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the special stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "x???".

In other words, when the winning A4 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the winning A4 role is won during AT play, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=4" and the display device 32 displays "3, 1, 2."

E) Name: Winning A5 (biased push order 10 coin role) The probability of winning the winning A5 role is 7314/65536. When the winning A5 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a pattern combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning A5 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a pattern combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a pattern combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning A5 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of right → left → middle. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel.

On the other hand, when the winning A5 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of right → left → middle, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

However, if the reels are stopped in any of the following orders: left → center → right, left → right → center, or right → center → left, the reels will display a symbol combination that awards one gaming medium regardless of the timing of the stop switch operation. However, if the reels are stopped in the order of center → left → right, or center → right → left, the reels may display a symbol combination that corresponds to a loss depending on the timing of the stop switch operation.

When the winning A5 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 performs the normal presentation.

When the winning A5 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the special stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "x???".

In other words, when the winning A5 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the winning A5 role is won during AT play, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=5" and the display device 32 displays "2, 3, 1."

K) Name: Winning A6 (biased push order 10 coin role) The probability of winning the winning A6 role is 7314/65536. When the winning A6 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a pattern combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning A6 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a pattern combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a pattern combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning A6 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of right → middle → left. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel.

On the other hand, when the winning A6 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of right → center → left, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → center → right, left → right → center, center → left → right, center → right → left, or right → left → center, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

However, if the reels are stopped in any of the following orders: left → center → right, left → right → center, or right → left → center, the reels will display a symbol combination that awards one gaming medium regardless of the timing of the stop switch operation. However, if the reels are stopped in the order of center → left → right, or center → right → left, the reels may display a symbol combination that corresponds to a loss depending on the timing of the stop switch operation.

When the winning A6 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 performs the normal presentation.

When the winning A6 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the special stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "x???".

In other words, when the winning A6 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the winning A6 role is won during AT play, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=6" and the display device 32 displays "3, 2, 1."

Next, we will explain each of the winning roles in Group B.

K) Name: Winning B1 (6-choice push order 10-coin role) The probability of winning the winning B1 role is 2080/65536. When the winning B1 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a pattern combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning B1 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a pattern combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a pattern combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning B1 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of left → middle → right. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel.

On the other hand, when the winning B1 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated to stop in the order of left → center → right, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → right → center, center → left → right, center → right → left, right → left → center, or right → center → left, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

When the winning B1 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 is performing the normal presentation.

When the winning B1 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=1" and the display device 32 displays "1, 2, 3."

When the winning B1 role is won in the AT game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be notified on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, "=1" is notified on the instruction monitor, and "1, 2, 3" is notified on the display device 32.

H) Name: Winning B2 (6-choice push order 10-coin role) The probability of winning the winning B2 role is 2080/65536. When the winning B2 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a pattern combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning B2 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a pattern combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a pattern combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning B2 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of left → right → middle. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel.

On the other hand, when the winning B2 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of left → right → middle, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

When the winning B2 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 is performing the normal presentation.

When the winning B2 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=2" and the display device 32 displays "1, 3, 2."

When the winning B2 role is won during AT play, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=2" and the display device 32 displays "1, 3, 2."

K) Name: Winning B3 (6-choice push order 10-coin role) The probability of winning the winning B3 role is 2080/65536. When the winning B3 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning B3 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a symbol combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a symbol combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning B3 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of center → left → right. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the center reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel.

On the other hand, when the winning B3 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated to stop in the order of center → left → right, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → center → right, left → right → center, center → right → left, right → left → center, or right → center → left, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

When the winning B3 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 performs the normal performance.

When the winning B3 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the special stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "x???".

In other words, in the AT preparation game state, when the winning B3 role is won, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode is not displayed on the indication monitor or the display device 32.

In the AT game state, when the winning B3 role is won, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=3" and the display device 32 displays "2, 1, 3."

J) Name: Winning B4 (6-choice push order, 10-coin role) The probability of winning the winning B4 role is 2080/65536. When the winning B4 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning B4 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a symbol combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a symbol combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning B4 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of center → right → left. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the center reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel.

On the other hand, when the winning B4 role is won, if the stop switches are not operated in the order of center → right → left, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switches are operated in any of the following orders: left → center → right, left → right → center, center → left → right, right → left → center, or right → center → left, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

When the winning B4 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 performs the normal performance.

In the AT preparation game state, when the winning B4 role is won, information corresponding to the special stopping operation mode can be notified on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor notifies "=7" and the display device 32 notifies "x???".

In other words, when the winning B4 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the winning B4 role is won during AT play, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the indication monitor and the display device. For example, the indication monitor displays "=4" and the display device 32 displays "3, 1, 2."

C) Name: Winning B5 (6-choice push order 10-coin role) The probability of winning the winning B5 role is 2080/65536. When the winning B5 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped symbol. When the winning B5 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a symbol combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped symbol (a symbol combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol).

Specifically, when the winning B5 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of right → left → middle. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel.

On the other hand, when the winning B5 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of right → left → middle, it is possible to award 1 as the number of game media to be awarded. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, or right → middle → left, it is possible to stop and display a pattern combination that awards 1 as the number of game media to be awarded.

When the winning B5 role is won in normal game mode, the instruction monitor and the display device 32 do not display information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode. For example, the instruction monitor is turned off and the display device 32 performs the normal performance.

When the winning B5 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the special stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "x???".

In other words, when the winning B5 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the winning B5 role is won during AT play, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=5" and the display device 32 displays "2, 3, 1."

C) Name: Winning B6 (6-choice push order 10-coin role) The probability of winning the winning B6 role is 2080/65536. When the winning B6 role is won, if the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode, a pattern combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination. When the winning B6 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the correct stop operation mode (if the stop switch is operated in the incorrect stop operation mode), a pattern combination that awards 1 game media can be displayed as a stopped combination (a pattern combination that awards 10 game media cannot be displayed as a stopped combination).

Specifically, when the winning B6 role is won, a symbol combination that awards 10 game media can be displayed when the stop switches are operated in the order of right → middle → left. Therefore, the correct stop operation mode is that the first stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the right reel, the second stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel, and the third stop operation corresponds to the stop switch corresponding to the left reel.

On the other hand, when the winning B6 role is won, if the stop switch is not operated in the order of right → center → left, the number of game media awarded can be 1. Specifically, if the stop switch is operated in any of the following orders: left → center → right, left → right → center, center → left → right, center → right → left, or right → left → center, a symbol combination that awards 1 game media can be stopped and displayed.

When the winning B6 role is won during normal gameplay, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode is not displayed on the indication monitor or display device 32.

When the winning B6 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the special stopping operation mode can be displayed on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor displays "=7" and the display device 32 displays "x???".

In other words, when the winning B6 role is won during the AT preparation game state, information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is not displayed on the instruction monitor or the display device 32.

When the winning combination B6 is won in the AT game state, information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode can be notified on the instruction monitor and the display device 32. For example, the instruction monitor notifies "=6" and the display device 32 notifies "3, 2, 1."

<<Features of internal lottery during AT preparation game state and AT game state 2>>

As mentioned above, we have explained the typical combinations that can be obtained in the internal draw during the AT preparation game state and the AT game state. The characteristics of these combinations are explained below.

First, the winning combinations A1 to A6 are push order minor combinations that can award 10 gaming media if the operation of the stop switch is correct, but the winning probability is not the same.

Specifically, the winning probability of the winning A1 and A2 roles, which can display a symbol combination that awards 10 game media when the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated first, is designed to be lower than the winning probability of the winning A3 and A4 roles, which can display a symbol combination that awards 10 game media when the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel is operated first, and the winning A5 and A6 roles, which can display a symbol combination that awards 10 game media when the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated first.

In other words, in a situation where it is unclear which role has won (for example, a situation where the player is not notified of the operation mode of the stop switch using the instruction monitor and the display device as a process related to the instruction function), the probability of a symbol combination that awards 10 gaming media being displayed will differ depending on whether the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated first or the stop switch corresponding to the middle or right reel is operated first.

By configuring it in this way, in the normal game state, the player performs non-irregular presses (non-penalty presses) to receive the benefits of the processing related to the instruction function (for example, the AT transition lottery, the update of the remaining number of plays until the ceiling is reached), which has the effect of lowering the ball payout rate (base) in the normal game state.

In addition, by lowering the ball payout rate (base) in the normal game state, it is possible to vary the ball payout rate between the normal game state and the AT game state.

Secondly, the winning roles B1 to B6 are push order minor roles that can award 10 gaming media if the operation mode of the stop switch is the correct stop operation mode, and the winning probability is the same.

In other words, unlike the winning A1 to A6 roles, in a situation where it is unclear which role has won (for example, in a situation where the player is not notified of the operation mode of the stop switch using the instruction monitor and display device 32 as a process related to the instruction function), the probability of a symbol combination that awards 10 gaming media being displayed is the same when the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated first, when the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel is operated first, or when the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated first.

By configuring it in this way, in the normal game state, the player performs non-irregular presses (non-penalty presses) to receive benefits from the processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT transition lottery, update of the number of plays remaining until the ceiling is reached), but if the winning B1 role or winning B2 role is won more times than expected, the effect is that the payout rate (base) in the normal game state can be increased even if the first stop operation is the stop switch corresponding to the left reel.

Thirdly, the probability of winning any one of the winning roles A1 to A6 (combined probability) is higher than the probability of winning any one of the winning roles B1 to B6 (combined probability).

Specifically, the probability of winning any of the winning roles A1 to A6 is 29264/65536, while the probability of winning any of the winning roles B1 to B6 is 12480/65536.

In particular, the winning probability of each of the winning roles A3 to A6 is 7314/65536, while the winning probability of each of the winning roles B1 to B6 is 2080/65536.

In other words, the probability of winning any of the winning A3 to A6 roles is 29256/65536, which is designed to exceed the 1/3 probability of winning the role determined by the role drawing.

On the other hand, the probability of winning any of the winning roles B1 to B6 is 12480/65536, which is designed to be less than 1/3 of the probability of winning the role determined by the role drawing.

By configuring it in this way, in the normal game state, the player performs non-irregular presses (non-penalty presses) to receive benefits from the processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT transition lottery, update of the number of games remaining until the ceiling is reached), so when playing with non-irregular presses, even if each of the winning roles A3 to A6 is won, the symbol combination that awards 10 as the number of game media awarded will not be displayed. Therefore, the payout rate (base) in the normal game state can be lowered. On the other hand, in the AT game state, when any of the winning roles A3 to A6 is won, information regarding the correct stop operation mode can be notified, so that the payout rate can be varied between the normal game state and the AT game state.

Note that, as the roles that make up the winning A group, the winning A1 role, in which the correct stopping operation pattern is in the order of left → center → right, and the winning A2 role, in which the correct stopping operation pattern is in the order of left → right → center, have been described, but the winning A1 role and the winning A2 role do not have to be included.

By configuring it in this way, the ball payout rate (base) in the normal game state can be further lowered, so that the ball payout rate can be more balanced between the normal game state and the AT game state.

Fourthly, the navigation mode is configured to change depending on the game state.

For example, if any of the winning roles A3 to A6, or any of the winning roles B3 to B6, is won, information about the correct stop operation mode can be notified in the AT game state, whereas information about a special stop operation mode can be notified in the AT preparation game state. On the other hand, if any of the winning roles A1, A2, B1, and B2 is won, information about the correct stop operation mode can be notified in the AT preparation game state and the AT game state.

In other words, in the AT preparation game state, if a winning combination is achieved in which the first stop operation of the correct stop operation mode is the left, information about the correct stop operation mode can be notified. On the other hand, in the AT preparation game state, if a winning combination is achieved in which the first stop operation of the correct stop operation mode is the middle or right, information about a special stop operation mode can be notified.

By configuring in this way, the degree of benefit (expected degree of grant of gaming media) given to the player can be made different between the normal game state, the AT preparation game state, and the AT game state. For example, when the setting value is 6, the ball payout rate in the normal game state can be designed to be 54.9%, the ball payout rate in the AT preparation game state to be 76.6%, and the ball payout rate in the AT game state to be 248.6%. In other words, the ball payout rate for each game state is designed to be normal game state < AT preparation game state < 100% < AT game state, so that the degree of benefit given to the player cannot be increased by intentionally continuing the AT preparation game state. Note that the magnitude relationship of the ball payout rate for each game state when the setting value is 6 is assumed to be the same for other setting values.

Fifthly, if any of the winning roles A3 to A6, or any of the winning roles B3 to B6, is won, the AT preparation game state will notify the player of information regarding a special stop operation mode, allowing the player to meet the conditions to start the AT. Details of this point will be given later.

<<Variations of internal lottery>> Using Figure 110, we have explained the roles related to the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state in the AT preparation gaming state. However, it may be in a form different from that shown in Figure 110. Examples of variations are shown below, but the following variations may be applied independently or in combination.

First, the winning combinations in group A are the six combinations A1 to A6, but are not limited to these.

For example, the roles included in the winning group A can be four roles, winning A3 to winning A6. In other words, when the stop switch is operated to stop in the order of left → center → right, or when the stop switch is operated to stop in the order of left → right → center, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that award 10 gaming media.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to lower the ball payout rate due to the non-penalty push order. In other words, the ball payout rate (base) in the normal game state can be further lowered, so that it is possible to create a greater difference in the ball payout rate between the normal game state and the AT game state. In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of types of minor roles, which makes it possible to reduce program capacity and data capacity.

Secondly, six roles, from the winning B1 role to the winning B6 role, have been described as roles included in the winning B group, but it is not necessary to have the winning B group.

In other words, when the stop switch is operated in the order of left → center → right, or when the stop switch is operated in the order of left → right → center, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that will award 10 gaming media.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to lower the ball payout rate due to the non-penalty push order. In other words, since the ball payout rate (base) in the normal game state can be lowered, it is possible to vary the ball payout rate between the normal game state and the AT game state. In addition, it is possible to reduce the number of types of minor roles, which reduces the program capacity and data capacity.

Thirdly, although the AT gaming state has been described as one gaming state, the AT gaming state may be divided into multiple gaming states, such as AT gaming state 1 and AT gaming state 2.

For example, when the transition conditions for AT game state 1 are met in the AT preparation game state, AT game state 1 is started. Then, when the transition conditions for AT game state 2 are met in AT game state 1, AT game state 2 is started.

Here, the transition conditions for AT gaming state 1 can be the transition conditions for the AT gaming state described below. The transition conditions for AT gaming state 2 can be any condition that can be satisfied in AT gaming state 1, such as obtaining the right to transition to AT gaming state 2 as a result of a lottery related to the instruction function in AT gaming state 1, or playing a specific number of times in AT gaming state 1.

In addition, in order to provide different degrees of profit to the player between AT game state 1 and AT game state 2, the notification of information corresponding to the correct stopping operation mode may be changed.

For example, in AT game state 1, the winning group A can notify the information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode on the instruction monitor and display device 32, while the winning group B cannot notify the information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode on the instruction monitor and display device 32. On the other hand, in AT game state 2, both winning group A and winning group B can notify the information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode on the instruction monitor and display device 32. For example, when the setting value is 6, the ball payout rate of AT game state 1 can be designed to be 188.8%, and the ball payout rate of AT game state 2 can be designed to be 248.6%. Note that although the magnitude relationship between the ball payout rate of AT game state 1 and the ball payout rate of AT game state 2 when the setting value is 6 has been explained, it is possible to design it so that it is similar for other setting values.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be more profitable in AT gaming state 2 than in AT gaming state 1, and a new gaming experience can be provided in which the player aims to meet the transition conditions for AT gaming state 2.

In addition, by configuring in this way, even if any of the six-choice push order roles in the winning group B is won, the probability of winning each role is the same, and the degree of benefit given to the player does not differ depending on the order of the stop switch stop operation, so there is no need to perform penalty processing (processing that disadvantages the player) associated with the stop switch stop operation in the AT game state 1, and the program capacity can be reduced. Also, since the degree of benefit given to the player does not differ depending on the order of the stop switch stop operation, in the AT game state 1, in a game in which information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is not notified by the instruction monitor and the display device 32, the player can freely perform the stop operation. Therefore, a gaming machine that enhances the player's interest can be provided.

<<Conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state in the AT preparation gaming state>> In the AT preparation gaming state, a game in which a specific role (specific lottery result) has been won (determined) and information corresponding to a special stop operation mode has been notified may satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state.

In this embodiment, the specific combination corresponds to any one of the winning combinations A3 to A6 described above, or any one of the winning combinations B3 to B6.

Here, we will explain two examples of the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state.

<<<<Example 1 of conditions for transitioning to AT gaming mode: The stop switch is operated in a specific manner>>>

For example, if the stop switch corresponding to the center reel is operated as the first stop operation, or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated as the first stop operation, the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is met. On the other hand, if the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated as the first stop operation, the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is not met.

In other words, when "x, ?, ?" is displayed on the display device 32, if the stop switch corresponding to the center reel or the right reel, which is the reel corresponding to the "?", is operated to stop first, the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is met. In other words, the type of stop switch used for the second stop operation and the third stop operation does not matter.

To provide a concrete example, we will explain what happens when the winning A3 role is won.

In a game in which the winning A3 role is won in the AT preparation game state and "x, ?, ?" is displayed on the display device, A) when the stop switch is operated in the order of left → middle → right, the transition condition to the AT game state is not met. B) When the stop switch is operated in the order of left → right → middle, the transition condition to the AT game state is not met. C) When the stop switch is operated in the order of middle → left → right, the transition condition to the AT game state is met. D) When the stop switch is operated in the order of middle → right → left, the transition condition to the AT game state is met. E) When the stop switch is operated in the order of right → left → middle, the transition condition to the AT game state is met. F) When the stop switch is operated in the order of right → middle → left, the transition condition to the AT game state is met.

Note that, although an example has been given in which the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is met when the stop switch corresponding to the center reel is operated as the first stop operation, or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated as the first stop operation, the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is not met when the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated as the first stop operation, this is not limiting.

For example, when either the stop switch corresponding to the center reel or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated as the first stop operation, the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is met, but when a stop switch other than the specific stop switch is operated as the first stop operation, the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is not met.

In other words, when "x, ?, ?" is displayed on the display device 32, the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is met if either one of the predetermined stop switches corresponding to the center reel or the right reel, which is the reel corresponding to the "?", is operated to stop first. In other words, the type of stop switch used for the second stop operation and the third stop operation does not matter.

For example, a method of determining which of the stop switches corresponding to the center reel or the right reel is predetermined may involve drawing a lottery for each game to determine whether the stop switch corresponds to the center reel or the right reel.

As another method of determination, the stop switch may be determined according to the winning combination. For example, when the first stop operation of the correct stop operation mode is the middle, and any of the winning combinations of the winning combinations A3, A4, B3, and B4 is won, the stop switch may be set to the center reel, and when the first stop operation of the correct stop operation mode is the right, and any of the winning combinations of the winning combinations A5, A6, B5, and B6 is won, the stop switch may be set to the right reel.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine the stop switch that will be the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state without performing a new lottery.

In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is not met even if 10 gaming media are awarded when the stop switch is operated in the correct stop operation mode.

Here, the main control means is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met after all the reels have stopped. For example, if the main control means executes the process of determining whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met after the first stop operation, there is a possibility that the process of controlling the reel stoppage due to the second stop operation may be delayed. In other words, by executing the process of determining whether or not the main control means has met the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state after all the reels have stopped, it has the effect of preventing delays in the progress of the game.

However, the main control means may be configured to execute the process of determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state are met after the first stop operation or the second stop operation.

If the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met, the game state for the next game will be the AT preparation game state.

<<<<Example 2 of condition for transitioning to AT gaming state: The stop switch is operated in a specific stop operation manner and the number of gaming media awarded is 1 or more>>> For example, if the stop switch corresponding to the center reel is operated as the first stop operation, or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated as the first stop operation, and the number of gaming media awarded is 1 or more, the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is met. On the other hand, if the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated as the first stop operation, the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is not met even if the number of gaming media awarded is 1 or more.

In other words, when "x, ?, ?" is displayed on the display device 32, if the stop switch corresponding to the center reel or the right reel, which is the reel corresponding to the "?", is operated to stop first, and if the number of game media awarded is a predetermined value (e.g., 1) or more, the condition for transitioning to the AT game state is met.

To explain this point, let us use the example of when the winning A3 role is won.

In a game in which the winning A3 role is won in the AT preparation game state and "x???" is displayed on the display device 32, a) when the stop switch is operated in the order of left → middle → right, 1 game medium is awarded, but the transition condition for the AT game state is not met. b) when the stop switch is operated in the order of left → right → middle, 1 game medium is awarded, but the transition condition for the AT game state is not met. c) when the stop switch is operated in the order of middle → left → right, 10 game media is awarded, and the transition condition for the AT game state is met. d) when the stop switch is operated in the order of middle → right → left, 1 game medium is awarded, and the transition condition for the AT game state is met. e) 1) when the stop switch is operated in the order of right → left → middle, if 1 game medium is awarded, the transition condition for the AT game state is met. E2) When the stop switch is operated in the order of right → left → middle, if the number of game media is not given as 1, the transition condition for the AT game state is not met. F1) When the stop switch is operated in the order of right → middle → left, if the number of game media is given as 1, the transition condition for the AT game state is met. F2) When the stop switch is operated in the order of right → middle → left, if the number of game media is not given as 1, the transition condition for the AT game state is not met.

As in (1) and (2) above, even if the stop switch is operated in the same order, whether or not the number of game media awarded is 1 determines whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.

Similarly, even if the stop switch is operated in the same order as in (a) and (b) above, whether or not the number of game media awarded is 1 determines whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are met.

Whether or not the number of gaming media awarded is 1 depends on the timing of the operation of the stop switch for the second stop and/or the timing of the operation of the stop switch for the third stop.

Therefore, in example 2 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state, the main control means is configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state are satisfied after all reels have stopped.

The above explains the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state by giving Example 1 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state and Example 2 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state. However, these are only examples and are not limited to these.

At least in a game in which a specific role (specific lottery result) has been won (determined) in an AT preparation game state and information corresponding to a special stop operation mode has been notified, if the stop switch corresponding to a reel whose first stop operation is "X" is operated, the AT transition condition may not be met, but if the stop switch corresponding to a reel whose first stop operation is "?" is operated, the AT transition condition may be met.

In addition, in a game in which a special stop operation mode is notified in the AT preparation game state, the probability of satisfying the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state should be the same when the stop switches are stopped in the order of center → left → right, when the stop switches are stopped in the order of center → right → left, when the stop switches are stopped in the order of right → left → center, and when the stop switches are stopped in the order of right → center → left.

It is preferable that the probability of a game being played that can satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state in the AT preparation game state (the probability of winning the combined combination of each role that results in a specific role) is designed to be greater than 1/2. In other words, it is preferable that the game be designed so that a game that can satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state occurs within an average of two games after the start of the AT preparation game state.

In other words, it is preferable that the probability that a game in which a special stop operation mode is notified in the AT preparation game state is designed to be greater than 1/2 (greater than the probability that a game in which a special stop operation mode is not notified in the AT preparation game state).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the combined winning probability of winning A3 to A6 and B3 to B6 is set to 37576/65536 (greater than 1/2).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from declining due to the AT preparation game state being prolonged. In particular, when the game establishment is about to close, players will want to start playing in the AT game state as soon as possible, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not cause players stress.

In addition, A
If the transition condition for the T game state is not met, the game state for the next game is the AT preparation game state.

<<Games that can satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state>> Games that can satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state are games in which the start switch is operated in the AT preparation gaming state when the number of bets is a specific value (e.g., 3), and a specific role (specific lottery result) is won (determined).

When a specific winning combination is achieved, information regarding the special stopping operation mode can be displayed on the display device 32 between the time the start switch is operated and the time when all reels reach a certain speed.

In addition, after all reels have reached a certain speed, the stop switch can be operated to display information other than the information regarding the special stop operation mode on the display device 32.

This point will be explained using Figure 111.

Figure 111 shows an example of a notification by the display device 32 in a game in which the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state can be met.

(A) in FIG. 111 is a display that can be notified on the display device 32 after the start switch is operated. Also, (A) in FIG. 111 is a state when none of the stop switches are operated. Note that (A) in FIG. 111 is an example in which information regarding a special stop operation mode is notified on the display device 32. Also, at this time, it is assumed that "=7" is being notified on the indication monitor.

The image of "X, ?, ?" is displayed in the area near the center of the display device 32. In other words, it notifies the player that this game is one in which it is possible to satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state.

Here, "x" indicates that the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is not met. Specifically, it indicates that the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is not met when the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is operated to perform the first stop operation.

In addition, the "?" symbol indicates that the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state may be met. Specifically, it indicates that the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state may be met when the stop switch corresponding to the center reel or the stop switch corresponding to the right reel is operated to perform the first stop operation.

In an area that does not overlap with the area near the center of the display device 32 (the area at the top center in FIG. 111), an image of "START!?" is displayed. In other words, the text notation also notifies the player that this game is one in which the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state can be met. Note that the notification may be made not only by "START!?" but also by other text notations such as "AT!?".

(B) in FIG. 111 can be notified on the display device 32 after the notification of (A) in FIG. 111 is made by operating the stop switch in a manner that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state. Also, at this time, the indication monitor is supposed to be notifying "=7".

The "START!" image is displayed in the area near the center. In other words, it notifies the player that the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met (will be met) in this game. In other words, it notifies the player that the gaming state for the next game will be the AT gaming state.

For example, when using the above-mentioned example 1 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state, the timing of the operation that satisfies the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is the timing when the first stop operation is performed. In other words, if the operation that satisfies the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is performed when the first stop operation is performed, the display changes from (A) in FIG. 111 to (B) in FIG. 111.

At this time, as described above, the main control means may be configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met after all reels have stopped. In other words, although the main control means executes the process of determining whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met after all reels have stopped, the player is notified that the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met when the first stop operation is performed.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified as soon as possible that the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met, giving the player a sense of accomplishment for being successful in the first stop operation. In addition, by determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met after all reels have stopped, the delay until the second stop operation can be accepted can be reduced compared to determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met after the first stop operation.

In addition, even when the above-mentioned example 1 of the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is used, even when the first stop operation is an operation that satisfies the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state, the display may be configured to change from FIG. 111(A) to FIG. 111(B) when the second stop operation is operated or the third stop operation is performed (after all reels have stopped). Note that the display is configured to display FIG. 111(A) until it changes to FIG. 111(B).

Furthermore, for example, in example 2 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state described above, the timing of the operation that satisfies the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state is not only after the first stop operation, but also after the timing of the second stop operation or the third stop operation. In such a case, it is preferable to configure the display to change from (A) in FIG. 111 to (B) in FIG. 111 when the operation that satisfies the condition for transitioning to the AT gaming state occurs after the third stop operation has been performed.

(C) in Figure 111 can be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a manner that does not satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state after the notification of (A) in Figure 111. Also, at this time, the indication monitor is supposed to notify "=7".

The area near the center of the display device 32 does not display any images of "x, ?, ?". Also, there is no text notation indicating that the game is capable of satisfying the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state. In other words, it indicates that the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not satisfied in this game.

The image "Start!?" is displayed in the upper center area. However, the display format is different from that of FIG. 111(A). In this example, the degree of emphasis is configured to be lower in FIG. 111(C) than in FIG. 111(A).

For example, in FIG. 111(A), a star-shaped mark image (effect image) is displayed around the image "Start?", whereas in FIG. 111(C), a star-shaped mark image (effect image) is not displayed around the image "Start?". Therefore, FIG. 111(A) is configured to have a higher degree of emphasis than FIG. 111(C).

Here, examples of different degrees of emphasis are not limited to the above examples, but may include differences in the size of the "START!?" image, differences in the color of the "START!?" image, etc., as long as the player can see that the degree of emphasis is lower in FIG. 111(C) than in FIG. 111(A) when viewing the display device 32.

Note that, for example, when using example 1 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state described above, the timing of the operation that does not satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state is the timing when the first stop operation is performed. In other words, if the first stop operation is performed and it is a stop operation that does not satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state, the display changes from FIG. 111(A) to FIG. 111(C). Note that until the display changes to FIG. 111(C), FIG. 111(A) is displayed.

At this time, as described above, the main control means may be configured to execute the process of determining whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met after all reels have stopped. In other words, although the main control means executes the process of determining whether or not the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met after all reels have stopped, the player is notified that the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met when the first stop operation is performed.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified as soon as possible that the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have not been met. Also, by determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met after all reels have stopped, the delay until the second stop operation can be accepted can be reduced compared to determining whether the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state have been met after the first stop operation.

In addition, even if Example 1 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state described above is used, and even if the first stop operation is an operation that does not satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state, the display may be configured to change from FIG. 111(A) to FIG. 111(C) after the second stop operation is operated or after the third stop operation is performed (after all reels have stopped). Note that until the display changes to FIG. 111(C), FIG. 111(A) is displayed.

Furthermore, for example, in example 2 of the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state described above, the timing of the operation that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state is not only after the timing of the first stop operation, but also after the timing of the second stop operation or the third stop operation. In such a case, it is preferable to configure the display to change from FIG. 111(A) to FIG. 111(C) when the conditions for transitioning to the AT gaming state are not satisfied after the third stop operation is performed. Note that the display is configured to display FIG. 111(A) until the display changes to FIG. 111(C).

Note that even if the game is in the AT preparation state but does not meet the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state, (c) in FIG. 111 may be displayed. However, in this case, the indication monitor is set not to display "=7".

<<Test signal related to the operation mode of the stop switch in each game state>> The main control means is capable of executing a process to output a test signal to a specified test device (for example, not only the test device itself, but also an interface board that relays between the gaming machine and the test device) to check that the game does not significantly stimulate the player's gambling desire.

In particular, it is possible to execute processing to output two types of test signals as test signals related to the ball output rate. Specifically, there are two types: an IF2 test signal that is mainly used for testing to check whether the ball output rate exceeds a predetermined upper limit, and an IF3 test signal that is mainly used for testing to check whether the ball output rate falls below a predetermined lower limit. Note that the IF in the IF2 test signal and IF3 test signal is an abbreviation for interface.

In addition, to allow the testing organization to select the testing method at will, it is possible to execute processing for outputting an IF2 test signal and processing for outputting an IF3 test signal for each game. Specifically, when the start switch is operated and before all the reels reach a constant speed (constant speed state), it is possible to execute processing for outputting an IF2 test signal and processing for outputting an IF3 test signal.

Incidentally, gaming machines installed in gaming establishments are not connected to a specific test device, so the IF2 test signal and the IF3 test signal are not output to the outside (i.e., they are different from external signals). However, gaming machines installed in gaming establishments also have a program (processing) for outputting the IF2 test signal and a program (processing) for outputting the IF3 test signal. Also, gaming machines installed in gaming establishments are executing a program (processing) for outputting the IF2 test signal and a program (processing) for outputting the IF3 test signal. Therefore, although gaming machines installed in gaming establishments do not output test signals to the outside, they are configured to be able to execute the processing for outputting test signals, so "executing the processing for outputting test signals" is referred to as "making it possible to execute the processing for outputting test signals", etc.

<<<IF2 test signal>>> First, let's explain the IF2 test signal.

The IF2 test signal contains information on the order in which the stop switches are stopped and the timing of the stop switches' stop operations.

The information of the IF2 test signal varies depending on the information displayed on the indication monitor.

A) Non-instruction play In non-instruction play (play in which the instruction monitor is not displayed), processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch operation is left → middle → right, and information indicating that the timing of stop switch operation is A for the left reel, B for the middle reel, and C for the right reel.

In this embodiment, the order in which the stop switches are operated is left → center → right. This is included in the non-penalty pressing order mentioned above.

The order in which the stop switches are operated does not have to be left → middle → right, but may be left → right → middle, which is included in the non-penalty pressing order.

Also, A, B, and C above may be pattern numbers or the number of steps of a stepping motor.

For example, when the symbol number is used as the timing for stopping the stop switch of the IF2 test signal, if the symbol "20" is arranged on one reel, the above A, B, and C will be one of the values "0" to "19." Note that A, B, and C may all be the same value, any two of them may be the same value, or they may all be different values.

For example, when the number of steps of a stepping motor is used as the timing for stopping the stop switch of the IF2 test signal, if "336" steps are assigned to one reel, the above A, B, and C will be one of the values between "0" and "335." Note that A, B, and C may all be the same value, any two of them may be the same value, or they may all be different values.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game where any of the winning roles A1 to A6 or B1 to B6 is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode or information corresponding to a special stop operation mode is not notified to the instruction monitor or display device (non-instruction game), processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating the stop switch stop operation sequence of left → middle → right, and information indicating that the stop switch stop operation timing of the left reel is A, the stop switch stop operation timing of the middle reel is B, and the stop switch stop operation timing of the right reel is C.

a) Game instructing left → center → right In a game instructing left → center → right, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch operation is left → center → right, and information indicating that the timing of stop switch operation is arbitrary for the stop switch of the left reel, arbitrary for the stop switch of the center reel, and arbitrary for the stop switch of the right reel.

The "arbitrary timing of the stop switch stop operation for the IF2 test signal" means that the stop operation can be performed at any time.

For example, when the symbol number is used as the timing for stopping the stop switch of the IF2 test signal, if the symbol "20" is arranged on one reel, the value will be one other than "0" to "19". For example, it can be a value such as "255".

For example, when the number of steps of a stepping motor is used as the timing for stopping the IF2 test signal, if "336" steps are assigned to one reel, the value will be one other than "0" to "335". For example, it can be a value such as "1024".

Note that not only in games instructing left → center → right, but also in games instructing other stop operation sequences as the stop switch stop operation sequence, the IF2 test signal's "optional" timing for the stop switch stop operation has the same meaning and refers to the same value.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A1 role or the winning B1 role is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device, it is possible to execute processing to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating the stop switch stop operation sequence of left → middle → right, and information indicating that the stop switch stop operation timing of the left reel is optional, the stop switch stop operation timing of the middle reel is optional, and the stop switch stop operation timing of the right reel is optional.

c) Game instructing left → right → center In a game instructing left → right → center, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch operation is left → right → center, and information indicating that the timing of stop switch operation is arbitrary for the stop switch of the left reel, arbitrary for the stop switch of the center reel, and arbitrary for the stop switch of the right reel.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A2 role or the winning B2 role is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating the stop switch stop operation sequence of left → right → middle, and information indicating that the stop switch stop operation timing of the left reel is optional, the stop switch stop operation timing of the middle reel is optional, and the stop switch stop operation timing of the right reel is optional.

d) Game instructing center → left → right In a game instructing center → left → right, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch operation is center → left → right, and information indicating that the timing of stop switch operation is arbitrary for the stop switch of the left reel, arbitrary for the stop switch of the center reel, and arbitrary for the stop switch of the right reel.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A3 role or the winning B3 role is won and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating the stop switch stop operation sequence of center → left → right, and information indicating that the stop switch stop operation timing of the left reel is optional, the stop switch stop operation timing of the middle reel is optional, and the stop switch stop operation timing of the right reel is optional.

E) Playing games instructing center → right → left In playing games instructing center → right → left, it is possible to execute processing to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch operation is center → right → left, and information indicating that the timing of stop switch operation is arbitrary for the stop switch of the left reel, arbitrary for the stop switch of the center reel, and arbitrary for the stop switch of the right reel.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A4 role or the winning B4 role is won and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating the stop switch stop operation sequence of center → right → left, and information indicating that the stop switch stop operation timing of the left reel is optional, the stop switch stop operation timing of the middle reel is optional, and the stop switch stop operation timing of the right reel is optional.

F) Playing with instructions to go right → left → center In playing with instructions to go right → left → center, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch operations is right → left → center, and information indicating that the timing of stop switch operations is arbitrary for the left reel, arbitrary for the center reel, and arbitrary for the right reel.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A5 role or the winning B5 role is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating the stop switch stop operation sequence of right → left → middle, and information indicating that the stop switch stop operation timing of the left reel is optional, the stop switch stop operation timing of the middle reel is optional, and the stop switch stop operation timing of the right reel is optional.

K) Game instructing right → center → left In a game instructing right → center → left, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch operation is right → center → left, and information indicating that the timing of stop switch operation is arbitrary for the stop switch of the left reel, arbitrary for the stop switch of the center reel, and arbitrary for the stop switch of the right reel.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A6 role or the winning B6 role is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating the stop switch stop operation sequence of right → middle → left, and information indicating that the stop switch stop operation timing of the left reel is optional, the stop switch stop operation timing of the middle reel is optional, and the stop switch stop operation timing of the right reel is optional.

H) Game that notifies of a special stop operation mode (game that notifies of "x, ?, ?" on the display device) In a game that notifies of a special stop operation mode, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating that the stop operation sequence of the stop switches is center → left → right, and information indicating that the stop operation timing of the stop switches is optional for the left reel, optional for the center reel, and optional for the right reel.

Here, the information indicates that the order of stop switch operation is center → left → right, but any order of stop operation may be used as long as the stop switch corresponding to the left reel is not the first stop operation.

Specifically, instead of information indicating the order is center → left → right, information indicating the order is center → right → left, information indicating the order is right → left → center, or information indicating the order is right → center → left.

This is because, in a game in which a special stop operation mode is notified in the AT preparation game state, the probability of satisfying the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state is the same when the stop switches are stopped in the order of center → left → right, when the stop switches are stopped in the order of center → right → left, when the stop switches are stopped in the order of right → left → center, and when the stop switches are stopped in the order of right → center → left.

In other words, in a game in which a special stop operation mode is notified in the AT preparation game state, it is possible to execute processing to output information including the stop operation sequence of the stop switch that may satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state as an IF2 test signal.

In other words, the IF2 test signal makes it possible to test the payout rate when the AT gaming state starts (when the AT gaming state is likely to start), and to check whether the payout rate exceeds a predetermined upper limit.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which any of the winning roles A3 to A6, or winning B3 to B6 is won, and information corresponding to a special stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF2 test signal that includes information indicating the stop switch stop operation sequence of center → left → right, and information indicating that the stop switch stop operation timing of the left reel is optional, the stop switch stop operation timing of the middle reel is optional, and the stop switch stop operation timing of the right reel is optional.

<<<IF3 test signal>>> Next, we will explain the IF3 test signal.

The IF3 test signal includes the order in which the stop switches are to be operated. However, it does not include information about the timing of the stop switches' operation.

The information on the IF3 test signal varies depending on the information displayed on the display monitor.

A) Non-instructional play In non-instructional play (play in which the instruction monitor is not displayed), processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch stop operations is left → center → right.

The order in which the stop switches are operated does not have to be left → middle → right, but may be left → right → middle, which is included in the non-penalty pressing order.

Specifically, it is sufficient that the information on the order of stop switch stop operations contained in the IF2 test signal in non-instruction play is the same as the information on the order of stop switch stop operations contained in the IF3 test signal in non-instruction play.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which any of the winning roles A1 to A6 or B1 to B6 is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode or information corresponding to a special stop operation mode is not notified to the instruction monitor and display device 32 (non-instruction game), processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating the stop operation sequence of the stop switch from left to center to right.

a) Left → Center → Right In a game instructing left → center → right, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch stop operations is left → center → right.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A1 role or the winning B1 role is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating the stop operation sequence of the stop switch as left → center → right.

c) Left → Right → Center In a game instructing left → right → center, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch stop operations is left → right → center.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A2 role or the winning B2 role is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating the stop operation sequence of the stop switch as left → right → middle.

D) Playing with center → left → right instructions In playing with center → left → right instructions, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch stop operations is center → left → right.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A3 role or the winning B3 role is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating the stop operation sequence of the stop switch as center → left → right.

E) Playing with center → right → left instructions In playing with center → right → left instructions, it is possible to execute processing to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch stop operations is center → right → left.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A4 role or the winning B4 role is won and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating the stop operation sequence of the stop switch as center → right → left.

F) Right → Left → Center In a game instructing right → left → center, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch stop operations is right → left → center.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A5 role or the winning B5 role is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating the stop operation sequence of the stop switch as right → left → center.

K) Right → Center → Left In a game instructing right → center → left, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating that the order of stop switch stop operations is right → center → left.

Specific examples will be explained in conjunction with the winning roles in Figure 110.

In a game in which either the winning A6 role or the winning B6 role is won, and information corresponding to the correct stop operation mode is notified to the instruction monitor and the display device 32, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating the stop operation sequence of the stop switch as right → center → left.

H) Game that notifies of a special stop operation mode (game that notifies of "x, ?, ?" on the display device) "In a game that notifies of a special stop operation mode, processing can be executed to output an IF3 test signal that includes information indicating that the stop operation order of the stop switches is left → center → right.

The order in which the stop switches are operated does not have to be left → middle → right, but may be left → right → middle, which is included in the non-penalty pressing order.

Specifically, it is sufficient that the information on the stop switch stop operation sequence included in the IF2 test signal in non-instruction play, the information on the stop switch stop operation sequence included in the IF3 test signal in non-instruction play, and the information on the stop switch stop operation sequence included in the IF3 test signal in play that notifies of a special stop operation mode are the same.

In other words, in a game in which a special stop operation mode is notified in the AT preparation game state (a game in which the transition conditions to the AT game state can be met), the transition conditions to the AT game state are not met by performing processing to output a test signal for stopping the stop switches in the order of left → center → right (or left → right → center).

In other words, the IF3 test signal makes it possible to test the payout rate when the AT gaming state does not start (when it is difficult to start the AT gaming state), and to check whether the payout rate is below a specified lower limit.

<<<<Summary of IF2 test signal and IF3 test signal>>> Although it overlaps with the above content, we will explain again the characteristics of the IF2 test signal and the IF3 test signal in a game in which a special stop operation mode is notified in the AT preparation game state.

In a game in which a special stop operation mode ("x, ?, ?" on the display device) is notified during the AT preparation game state, it is possible to execute processing to output a test signal as an IF2 test signal that includes information on a predetermined stop operation order in which either the center or right stop switch corresponding to the "?" is the first stop operation, and stop operation position information (information indicating that the stop acceptance position of all reels is arbitrary).

By configuring it in this way, when the ball payout rate is tested in accordance with the IF2 test signal, there are cases where the transition conditions to the AT game state are met in a game in which a special stop operation mode is notified in the AT preparation game state. In other words, the IF2 test signal can test a ball payout rate that is approximately the same as the ball payout rate when playing with the player's stop switch stop operation mode when the gaming machine is installed in the market. In other words, it is possible to check whether the ball payout rate has reached a predetermined upper limit.

On the other hand, in a game in which a special stop operation mode has been notified in the AT preparation game state, it is possible to execute processing for outputting a test signal as an IF3 test signal that includes information on a predetermined stop operation sequence (not including information on the stop operation position) in which the left is the first stop operation, which is the stop switch corresponding to "x". Note that the information on the IF3 test signal in a game in which a special stop operation mode has been notified in the AT preparation game state and the information on the IF3 test signal in a non-instruction game are the same information.

By configuring it in this way, when the ball payout rate is tested according to the IF3 test signal, the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met in a game in which a special stop operation mode is notified in the AT preparation game state. In other words, the IF3 test signal can be used to test the ball payout rate in cases where the AT game state does not start (it is difficult to start the AT game state) when a gaming machine is installed in the market. In other words, it is possible to check whether the ball payout rate is below a predetermined lower limit.

In addition, the IF3 test signal information for a game in which a special stop operation mode is notified in the AT preparation game state and the IF3 test signal information for a non-instruction game are the same information (the same information is used), so that the data volume can be compressed.

<<Irregular Processing 1 in the AT Preparation Game State>> We will explain irregular processing 1 that can be adopted in the AT preparation game state.

In the AT preparation game state, suppose that in a game that notifies a special stop operation mode ("X, ?, ?" on the display device), the player mistakenly stops the stop switch corresponding to "X" (the stop switch corresponding to the left reel). In this case, the next game state will not be the AT game state. However, as mentioned above, the AT preparation game state is configured to continue. In other words, even if the transition conditions to the AT game state are not met in a game that notifies a special stop operation mode in the AT preparation game state, the AT preparation state continues, and the game that notifies a special stop operation mode can occur again in the continued AT preparation game state.

Here, the first game in the AT preparation game state is the first game, the game in which the special stop operation mode is notified for the first time in the AT preparation game state is the second game, and the game in which the special stop operation mode is notified again in the AT preparation state after the second game is the third game. Note that the first game and the second game may be the same game, but here, the first game is not the game in which the special stop operation mode is notified. For example, the first game corresponds to a game in which the winning B1 role is won, a game in which the replay role is won, etc. Also, the second game and the third game correspond to a game in which any of the winning roles B3 to B6 roles in FIG. 110 is won, or any of the winning roles B3 to B6 roles is won.

Furthermore, the period from the first game to the second game is referred to as the first period of play, and the period from the second game to the third game is referred to as the second period of play.

At this time, it is preferable that the relationship between the designed ball output rate in the first period of play (hereinafter referred to as ball output rate X) and the designed ball output rate in the second period of play (hereinafter referred to as ball output rate Y) is ball output rate X≦ball output rate Y.

By configuring it in this way, even if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met in a game in which a special stop operation mode is first notified in the AT preparation game state, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering further disadvantages in the subsequent AT preparation game state.

For example, if the frequency at which the correct stop operation mode is notified when the winning B1 role or the winning B2 role is won in a first period of play (hereinafter referred to as probability α) and the frequency at which the correct stop operation mode is notified when the winning B1 role or the winning B2 role is won in a second period of play (hereinafter referred to as probability β) are probability α = probability β (0% ≦ probability α = probability β ≦ 100%), then it can be configured so that payout rate X = payout rate Y < 100%.

Also, for example, if probability α<probability β (0%≦probability α<probability β≦100%), the ball output rate X<ball output rate Y<100%.

In other words, by setting 0≦probability α≦probability β≦100%, it is possible to set the ball output rate X≦ball output rate Y<100%.

In addition, if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met in the game in which the special stop operation mode is notified in the third game, the designed ball output rate in the game during the period in which the AT preparation game state continues thereafter may be the same as ball output rate Y, or may be a different ball output rate from ball output rate Y (higher than ball output rate Y or lower than ball output rate Y).

<<Irregular Processing 2 in the AT Preparation Game State>> We will explain irregular processing 2 that can be adopted in the AT preparation game state.

As explained in Irregular Processing 1, even if the conditions for transitioning to the AT game state are not met in a game that notifies a special stop operation mode ("X???" on the display device) in the AT preparation game state, the AT preparation state continues, and in the continued AT preparation game state, a game that notifies a special stop operation mode can occur again.

However, the AT preparation game state may continue if, for example, the player does not understand the game and continues to operate the stop switch corresponding to the "X" (the stop switch corresponding to the left reel) to stop, or if the AT preparation state does not start even though the stop switch corresponding to the "?" is operated to stop.

Therefore, the system is configured so that not only can the transition conditions to the AT gaming state be met in a game that notifies a special stop operation mode, but also the AT gaming state can be started when a specific condition is met. In other words, even if a specific condition is met in a game that does not notify a special stop operation mode, the next game can be in the AT gaming state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the AT preparation game state from continuing unintentionally, reducing frustration for the player.

For example, specific conditions include: a) the number of plays in the AT preparation game state has reached a specified number (e.g., 1000 times); b) the number of plays from the game in which the special stop operation mode was first notified has reached a specified number (e.g., 1000 times); c) the number of times the special stop operation mode has been notified has reached a specified number (e.g., 100 times); d) a specific role (so-called rare role) has been won by role drawing, etc.

However, the specific conditions are not limited to the above-mentioned A) to D). For example, at least one of A) to D) may be adopted, or a condition different from A) to D) may be set as the specific condition.

In this embodiment, a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) is used as an example of the gaming machine, but the invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, jankyu gaming machines, Parrot, or casino machines.

The technical contents of this embodiment described above to explain the present invention can be combined as appropriate.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Center reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Center stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal insertion slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation indicator lamp 24a: Left operation indicator lamp 24b: Center operation indicator lamp 24c: Right operation indicator lamp 25: Number of bets display lamp 25a: 1 bet lamp 25b: 2 bet lamp 25c: 3 bet lamp 26: Number of credits display 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Acquired coin count display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Sticker storage section 32 : Display device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal payout outlet 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal board

Claims (1)

a first display device controlled by a main control means;
A second display device controlled by a sub-controller is provided,
As a game state, there is a notification game preparation game state and a notification game state,
The first information can be notified by the first display device in a predetermined game in which a specific lottery result has been determined in the notification game preparation game state,
In a predetermined game in which a specific lottery result has been determined in the notification game preparation game state, the second display device can notify the first stop operation mode,
The second information can be notified by the first display device in a specific game in which a specific lottery result is determined in the notification game state;
In a specific game in which a specific lottery result is determined in the notification game state, a second stop operation mode can be notified by the second display device,
The first stop operation mode is a stop operation mode that recommends not performing the first stop operation on the stop switch corresponding to the first reel,
The second stop operation mode is a stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
In the notification game preparation game state, when a specific lottery result is determined and the first information is notified by the first display device in a predetermined game, if the stop switch corresponding to the first reel is operated to perform a first stop operation, the next game of the predetermined game is not a game in the notification game state,
When a specific lottery result is determined in the notification game preparation game state and the first information is notified by the first display device in a predetermined game, if a stop switch corresponding to the second reel is operated to perform a first stop operation, the next game of the predetermined game can be executed in the notification game state;
When a game is started, a process for outputting a first test signal is executable;
When a game is started, a process for outputting a second test signal is executable;
A first test signal in a predetermined game in which a specific lottery result is determined in the notification game preparation game state and the first information is notified by the first display device includes information on the operation order of the stop switch for performing the first stop operation on the stop switch corresponding to the second reel,
A gaming machine characterized in that a second test signal in a specified game in which a specific lottery result is determined in a notification game preparation game state and first information is notified by a first display device includes information regarding the operation order of the stop switches, which causes the stop switch corresponding to the first reel to be the first stopping operation.

Images